Project Manual - Mep & Site/Civil Specifications Volume 3 of 3

PROJECT MANUAL – MEP & SITE/CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 3 OF 3
GYMNASIUM ADDITION at
YORK COUNTY SCHOOL OF TECHNOLOGY
2179 South Queen Street
York, PA 17402
01 April, 2019
214 North Duke Street, Lancaster, Pennsylvania 17602

P 717.393.3211 / F 717.393.3212
www.marottamain.com
17-YCST-01 – GYMNASIUM ADDITION
SPECIFICATION INDEX
GYMNASIUM ADDITION
AT
YORK COUNTY SCHOOL OF TECHNOLOGY
NO. SECTION TITLE PAGES
INDEX 5
LEGAL SPECIFICATIONS – VOLUME 1 OF 3
PROJECT INFORMATION
00 01 01 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 01 2

00 01 07 SEALS PAGE 00 01 07 2
00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 1531
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT TO BID 00 11 13 2
00 11 53 REQUEST FOR QUALIFICATIONS 00 11 53 4
00 20 00 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 20 00 12
A305 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION STATEMENT A305 4
RFI RFI REQUEST FORM RFI 1
00 25 13 PRE-BID MEETINGS 00 25 13 2
00 26 00 PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 00 26 00 2
00 26 01 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (PRIOR TO BIDDING) 00 26 01 2
00 31 13 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE 00 31 13 1
00 31 19 EXISTING CONDITIONS INFORMATION 00 31 19 1
00 31 32 GEOTECH DATA 00 31 32 1
GEOTECH REPORT 35
00 31 43 PERMIT APPLICATION 00 31 43 1
CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT
00 41 16 BID FORM (STIPULATED SUM) 00 41 16 3
00 43 13 BID SECURITY FORM 00 43 13 4
00 43 22 UNIT PRICES 00 43 22 2
00 43 23 ALTERNATES FORM 00 43 23 3
00 43 24 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER 00 43 24 2
00 43 25 AGREEMENT OF SURETY/ ATTACHMENT TO THE BID FORM 00 43 25 1
00 43 93 BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST 00 43 93 1
A101 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN A101 9
OWNER/CONTRACTOR (AIA DOCUMENT A101-2017)
A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS A201 51
00 61 13 PAYMENT BOND 00 61 13 2
00 61 13.13 PERFORMANCE BOND 00 61 13.13 4
PWEVF PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYMENT VERIFICATION FORM PWEVF 1
PDE-6004 PDE-6004 ARREST/CONVICTION REPORT & CERTIFICATION FORM PDE-6004 3
CY 113 PA CHILD ABUSE HISTORY CLEARANCE FORM CY 113 3
SP-4-164 REQUEST FOR CRIMINAL RECORD CHECK FORM (ACT 34) SP-4-164 1
ACT 114 ACT 114 FINGERPRINTING REPORT ACT 114 1
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY 01 10 00 11
PWPR PREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATES PWPR 10
01 12 00 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 01 12 00 13
01 22 00 UNIT PRICES 01 22 00 3
01 23 00 ALTERNATES 01 23 00 5
01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 3
01 25 01 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (AFTER BIDDING) 01 25 01 2
01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 2
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS INDEX 1 of 5

01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 5
01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 8
RFI RFI REQUEST FORM RFI 1
01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 9
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 10
01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 9
01 42 00 REFERENCES 01 42 00 16
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 19
01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 5
01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 8
01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL 01 74 19 2
01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 7
CSI FORM PUNCH LIST - CSI FORM 14.1A CSI FORM 1
01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 8
01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 4
01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION & TRAINING 01 79 00 5
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS – VOLUME 2 OF 3
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 17
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 21
DIVISION 5 – METALS
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 10
05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 5
05 31 00 STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 9
05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 11
05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 11
05 51 13 METAL PAN STAIRS 05 51 13 9
05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 10
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES

06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06 10 53 5
06 16 00 SHEATHING 06 16 00 3
06 20 23 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 23 5
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 3
07 14 16 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 14 16 5
07 27 26 FLIUD-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 9
07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13 7
07 53 23 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 53 23 8
07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 12
07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 5
07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 7
07 84 46 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07 84 46 5
07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 10
DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS
08 06 71 DOOR HARDWARD SCHEDULE 08 06 71 9
08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 9
08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13 3
03 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 03 33 23 7
08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08 33 26 5
08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13 9
08 44 13 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 13 9
08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 8
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 13
08 80 00 GLAZING 08 80 00 11

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 7
09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 10
09 30 00 TILING 09 30 00 10
09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 8
09 64 66 WOOD GYMNASIUM FLOORING 09 64 66 4
09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 5
09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 5
09 65 19.33 RUBBER TILE FLOORING 09 65 19.33 6
09 65 66 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 65 66 7
09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 5
09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 13 5
09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 9
09 93 10 WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 09 93 10 5
09 96 46 INTUMESCENT PAINTING 09 96 46 5
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 11 00 6
10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19 5
10 14 23 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 6
10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13 4
10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 6
10 44 13 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 5
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11 66 23 9
11 66 53 GYMNASIUM DIVIDERS 11 66 53 4
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
12 35 40 MANUFACTURED PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CASEWORK 12 32 00 9
12 36 61 SOLID SURFACE PANELS 12 36 61 3
12 66 00 TELESCOPING STANDS 12 66 00 8
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19 24
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 24 00 14
MEP & SITE/CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS – VOLUME 3 OF 3
DIVISION 20 – RESERVED
20 00 10 GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL 20 00 10 9
20 00 20 GENERAL PROVISIONS – ELECTRICAL 20 00 20 10
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 10 10 FIRE PROTECTION 21 10 10 4
21 96 10 WIRING OF FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 21 96 10 2
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 05 05 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS 22 05 05 4
22 05 10 PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 22 05 10 7
22 05 15 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 05 15 4
22 05 20 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 05 20 5
22 05 25 PLUMBING VALVES 22 05 25 3
22 05 30 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 05 30 3
22 07 10 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 10 3
22 11 10 PLUMBING PUMPS 22 11 10 2
22 13 10 SANITARY DRAINAGE 22 13 10 3
22 14 10 STORM DRAINAGE 22 14 10 3
22 14 20 SUMP PUMPS 22 14 20 1
22 33 10 WATER HEATERS 22 33 10 2

22 40 10 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 10 7
22 60 30 FUEL GAS PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 22 60 30 2
22 96 10 WIRING OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 96 10 3
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 05 05 HVAC BASIC MATERIALS 23 05 05 6
23 05 10 HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 23 05 10 3
23 05 15 HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 05 15 2
23 05 30 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 05 30 3
23 05 35 HVAC SOUND & VIBRATION CONTROL 23 05 35 4
23 07 10 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 10 6
23 10 20 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 10 20 3
23 30 10 AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 10 8
23 30 20 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEMS 23 30 20 2
23 34 10 FANS AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS 23 34 10 4
23 72 10 ENERGY RECOVERY 23 72 10 4
23 81 10 UNITARY EQUIPMENT 23 81 10 10
23 82 10 TERMINAL HEATING UNITS 23 82 10 2
23 90 10 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 23 90 10 18
23 95 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEM 23 95 10 4
23 96 10 WIRING OF HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 96 10 4
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 25 ELECTRICAL FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 26 00 25 3
26 05 05 BASIC MATERIALS 26 05 05 7
26 05 20 WIRE AND CABLE, 600 VOLTS AND BELOW 26 05 20 7
26 05 30 RACEWAY AND FITTINGS 26 05 30 9
26 05 35 MANHOLES 26 05 35 2
26 05 40 BOXES 26 05 40 5
26 05 50 WIRING DEVICES 26 05 50 5
26 05 60 GROUNDING SYSTEMS 26 05 60 4
26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 73 6
26 12 10 LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS 26 12 10 3
26 13 10 WIRE AND CABLE, ABOVE 600 VOLTS 26 13 10 5
26 13 20 15 KV SWITCHGEAR 26 13 20 3
26 24 20 SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 20 4
26 24 30 PANELBOARDS 26 24 30 3
26 24 40 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 24 40 1
26 24 50 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 24 50 5
26 24 60 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 24 60 5
26 24 70 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26 24 70 2
26 41 10 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 10 3
26 50 10 LIGHTING 26 50 10 4
26 50 50 LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 50 50 12
26 60 10 SPECIAL SYSTEMS 26 60 10 4
26 60 85 SCOREBOARD CONDUIT SYSTEM 26 60 85 1
26 90 10 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 26 90 10 4
26 96 10 WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 26 96 10 6
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 15 COMMON REQUIREMENTS - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 27 05 15 3
27 05 25 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS 27 05 25 4
27 05 30 PATHWAYS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 30 6
27 11 10 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES EQUIPMENT AND FITTINGS 27 11 10 8
27 15 10 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLING 27 15 10 5
27 15 45 FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 15 45 4
27 16 10 CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS 27 16 10 3
27 19 10 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SYSTEMS TESTING - COPPER 27 19 10 3
27 53 20 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM - WIRELESS 27 53 20 9
27 54 10 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 27 54 10 11
27 55 10 SOUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 55 10 4
27 55 60 ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM - RF 27 55 60 5
27 59 20 TELEVISION CONDUIT AND CABLE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - CATV 27 59 20 4

27 60 10 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION 27 60 10 4

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 10 30 SECURITY CONDUIT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 28 10 30 2
28 23 10 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTREM 28 23 10 7
28 31 10 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 10 16
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
31 00 00 SITE CLEARING 31 00 00 3
31 20 00 EARTH MOVING (SITE EXCAVATION) 31 20 00 6
31 20 00.01 EARTH MOVING (ROADWAY EXCAVATION) 31 20 00.01 4
31 20 00.02 EARTH MOVING (TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, & COMPACTING) 31 20 00.02 9
31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS 31 25 00 5
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 16 FLEXIBLE ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 6
32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING (CEMENT CONCRETE CURB) 32 13 13 7
32 13 13.01 CONCRETE PAVING (PLAIN AND REINFORCED CEMENT) 32 13 13.01 11
32 13 13.02 CONCRETE PAVING (TRENCH PAVING & RESTORATION) 32 13 13.02 3
32 13 13.03 CONCRETE PAVING (UTILITY CONSTRUCTION) 32 13 13.03 2
32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 9
32 91 15 SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 15 7
32 93 00 PLANTS 32 93 00 7
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
33 05 13 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES 33 05 13 9
33 05 16.13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 33 05 16.13 5
33 11 16 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING (WATER MAINS) 33 11 16 7
33 11 16.01 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING (WATER SERVICE) 33 11 16.01 4
33 11 16.02 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING (VALVES & FIRE HYDRANTS) 33 11 16.02 5
33 11 16.03 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING (TESTING & DISINFECTING) 33 11 16.03 7
33 31 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS (PIPE) 33 31 00 11
33 31 00.01 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS (TESTING) 33 31 00.01 5
33 41 00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE 33 41 00 4
END OF INDEX

17-YCST-01 – NEW GYMNASIUM PROJECT
SECTION 20 00 10 – GENERAL PROVISIONS – MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The bidding requirements, Contract Documents, and Division 01 - General Requirements, are a part of
Divisions 21-23 and Contract for this Work and apply to these Divisions as fully as if they were repeated
therein.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED – PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION
A. Plumbing Work and fire protection shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for
installation of the plumbing and fire protection systems.
B. Plumbing and fire protection Work shall be bid as a separate prime contract in accordance with the bidding
requirements.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED – HVAC
A. HVAC Work shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for installation of the heating,
ventilating and air conditioning systems.
B. HVAC Work shall be bid as a separate prime contract in accordance with the bidding requirements.
1.4 TERMINOLOGY
A. Wherever the term “Bidder” is used in Divisions 21-23 of the Specifications, it shall be interpreted to refer
to the person, firm, or corporation who is submitting an offer or proposal, on the prescribed form, to
perform the Work of these Divisions.
B. Wherever the term, “Contractor” is used in of the Specifications, it shall be interpreted to refer to the
Contractor responsible for Work of these Divisions.
C. Those responsible for Work covered by other portions of the Specification will be indicated by trade, such
as Electrical Contractor, General Contractor, etc.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Portions or all of certain recognized industry or association standards referred to herein as being a
requirement of these Specifications shall be considered as binding as though reproduced in full herein.
Unless otherwise stated the referenced standard shall be the standard which is current as of the date of
issuance of these Specifications. Reference may be made to standards either by full name or for the sake
of brevity by letter designation only. The following is a list of the most commonly used standards, but is not
all inclusive for these Specifications:
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
AGA American Gas Association
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
ARI American Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 1 of 9

MECHANICAL
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation
I-B-R Institute of Boiler & Radiator Manufacturers
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PDI Plumbing Drainage Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.6 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Secure all permits and inspections required by applicable authorities and utilities and pay all costs in
connection with the Work.
B. Schedule all inspections required by applicable authorities and utilities. Certificates shall be in triplicate
and shall be delivered to Owner.
C. Piping work, specialties, or equipment shall not be concealed or covered until same have been tested and
inspected by municipal inspector(s) and observed by Architect. Municipal inspector(s) record of
inspections shall be delivered to Owner.
D. Architect and municipal inspector’s witnessing of tests shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for
concealed piping work and specialties, nor for equipment to perform in accordance with Contract
Documents.
1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Mechanical Work is subject to provisions of the Pennsylvania Uniform Construction Code and has been
designed to be in compliance with the Code. Design aspect of the Project shall not be altered regarding
building envelope or selection of HVAC, service water heating systems and equipment. Supplemental data
published by equipment and system manufacturers to substantiate energy conservation efficiencies
throughout the Project shall be furnished at request of Architect.
B. Mechanical Work shall meet requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, all federal, state,
and municipal authority's laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work and public utilities having
jurisdiction over systems specified herein.
C. Domestic water heater(s) shall be constructed and tested in accordance with recommendations of the
National Fire Protection Association, Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry - Boiler Inspection
Division, and ASME Code. Equipment shall be stamped with the ASME symbol and National Board
number and shall be inspected during construction by an inspector who has been commissioned by the
Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry to perform such service. Equipment shall be prepared for
initial inspection in accordance with Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry regulations.
D. The handling and use of CFC and HCFC refrigerants, whether leaking, venting, recovering, etc., shall be in
accordance with US Environmental Protection Agency regulations CFR 58 FR 28660, ASHRAE 15- Safety
Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, and ANSI/ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation and Safety
Classification of Refrigerants.
E. Electrical Work shall meet requirements of the National Electrical Code and all federal, state, and
municipal authority’s laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work.
F. Where applicable, materials and equipment shall bear the label of approval of Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc.

MECHANICAL
G. Reference to codes and standards listed herein shall constitute minimum acceptable requirements. Where
Drawings and Specification requirements exceed those of codes listed, Drawings and Specifications shall
take precedence for Work of this Project.
H. If Contractor, during the course of work, observes the existence of hazardous materials in the structure or
on the project site, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Architect. Contractor shall not perform any
work pertinent to the hazardous material prior to receipt of special instructions from Owner. “Hazardous
materials”, for the purpose of this Specification, are defined as asbestos, PCB’s, petroleum, radioactive
material, or hazardous waste substances.
1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Specifications for each piece of equipment and each item of material are written around a product of a
specific base manufacturer. This base manufacturer is the basis of design, dimensions and details. The
base manufacturer’s name and model information are included with the product description as the first
named manufacturer under the heading “Acceptable Manufacturer”.
B. “Substitution” manufacturers are defined as any manufacturer other than the one used as the basis of
design. “Substitution” manufacturers will be permitted, in accordance with the bidding requirements and
where indicated herein.
C. Manufacturers named in the product description, in addition to the base manufacturer, are “substitution”
manufacturers, have been determined to be manufacturers capable of manufacturing products similar to
the base manufacturer and these manufacturers are acceptable “substitution” manufacturers to the base
manufacturer. Where additional manufacturer’s names do not appear with the base manufacturer, the
Architect reserves the right to disallow any “substitution” manufacturers. Where the base manufacturer’s
name is followed by the term “no substitution”, no “substitution” manufacturers will be considered.
D. Naming of specific manufacturers shall not be construed as eliminating products or services of other
“substitution” manufacturers having comparable items. Where permitted by these Specifications, and
where Bidder desires to use other “substitution” manufacturers, he may submit a request for approval to
use the “substitution” manufacturer in accordance with bidding requirements.
E. Products described in Specifications are intended to set a quality level and ensure a workable system.
“Substitution” of manufacturers, including those herein named, may be made only after approval of
Architect. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for installation and dimensional changes required by the
use of all “substitution” manufacturer’s products, including revisions to wiring, controls, piping, structural
revisions, etc., and all room or space changes as required due to dimension differences of the
“substitution” manufacturer product. Architect, approval of “substitution” manufacturer’s products shall be
limited to compliance with information given on the Drawings and Specifications.
F. Where the Bidding requirements call for submittal for approval of substitutions prior to bids due, all
approvals given are for “substitution” manufacturers only, not approval of any particular product. An
approved “substitution” manufacturer’s product must comply with all requirements of the specifications and
drawings for the base manufacturer’s product.
1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit shop drawings and product data for approval to Architect. Shop drawings and product data shall
have been reviewed and approved (stamped) by Contractor furnishing the equipment. If evidence of this
Contractor’s approval does not appear on submittal data, submittals will be returned without review.
Following Architect review, submittals not approved or requiring resubmission shall be corrected and
resubmitted until satisfactory. Work indicated on shop drawings and product data shall not be executed
until submittals have been approved.
B. Each submittal shall contain shop drawings or product data for only one specification section. Submittals
containing information about products from multiple specification sections will be returned without review.
Likewise, each submittal shall contain shop drawings or product data for all items in one specification
section to be provided for this Project. Submittals that are incomplete may be returned without review.

MECHANICAL
C. Submittals for equipment and material shall indicate room numbers, drawing identification symbols,
product type, capacities, accessories, connection sizes, electrical characteristics, wiring diagrams, and
installation instructions. Each shop drawing shall have specified items, accessories and options, as
applicable to this Project, clearly marked. Catalog numbers, part numbers, etc. on shop drawings will not
be reviewed for correctness, Contractor is responsible for verifying correctness of these and that they
relate to the options, accessories, features, etc. marked on the shop drawings. Shop drawings not clearly
marked as to only that which will be provided for this Project will not be approved.
D. In as much as it is not the purpose of the submittal process to assure that the Contractor is meeting all the
requirements of the Contract Documents, submittal review by Architect is for conformance with design
concept of the Project and general compliance with information given in the construction documents.
Approval, corrections and/or comments made as part of the submittal review do not relieve the Contractor
of the responsibility from conformance with all requirements of the Contract Documents, applicable codes
and laws. Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, and performance requirements to be
confirmed and correlated at the job site; for information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes or
to techniques of construction; and for all coordination with the Work of all trades. Refer to paragraph
entitled “Substitutions” in this section of the specifications.
E. At the time of each submittal, Contractor shall give Architect specific written notice of such variations, if
any, that the Shop Drawing or product submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract
Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition,
shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and sample submitted to Architect for
review and approval of each such variation. Architect’s review and approval of Shop Drawings or products
shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents unless Contractor has in writing called the Architect’s attention to each such variation at the
time of each submittal and Architect has given written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying
the Shop Drawing or product approval; nor will any approval by Architect relieve contractor from
responsibility for complying with the requirements of this paragraph.
F. Shop drawing submittals shall be accompanied by a transmittal sheet with the applicable specification
section number and the "name" of the item or items being submitted clearly indicated on the transmittal. All
"names" on the transmittal shall match exactly the "names" listed in the specifications for the item being
submitted.
G. The name of the supplier, distributor, subcontractor, etc., who will furnish equipment and items to the
Contractor shall appear on the shop drawings when submitted. Shop drawing submittals without supplier’s,
distributors, subcontractors, etc., name will not be reviewed and will be returned without review.
H. If Architect is required to review any shop drawing or product data submittal more than two times, a
Change Order will be issued to the Contractor for a credit due on the Contract Price to recoup Architect’s
expenses associated with the multiple reviews.
I. One complete set of approved shop drawings and product data shall be delivered to Owner at completion
of Work. Include lists of manufacturer’s parts and part numbers.
J. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.
1.10 COORDINATION – GENERAL
A. Work shall be governed by requirements set forth in the conditions of the Contract.
B. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment required by the Contract Documents necessary for completion
of the Work of Divisions 21-23.
C. Bidders shall visit the project site to determine actual conditions which will be encountered in completing
the work of this project.
D. Drawings are generally indicative of Work to be installed but may not indicate all bends, fittings, elbows,
etc., required to meet conditions. Where items shown on the Drawings, or herein described, are not clearly
understood, Bidders shall confer with Architect.

MECHANICAL
E. Coordinate Work of Divisions 21-23 with that of other trades so that Work will be installed in the most
direct manner and so that interference between piping, ducts, conduits, equipment, and architectural or
structural features will be avoided. Work installed in an arbitrary manner without regard for Work of other
trades or equipment servicing requirements will be rejected in any situation where an undesirable condition
or an unfair hardship for other trades, or Owner, results.
F. Provide sufficient scaffolding and hoist or rig material and equipment into place, or arrange for rigging by
others. In any case, rigging or hoisting for Work of Divisions 21-23 shall be at the expense of Contractor.
G. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide structural steel members as required for support of
equipment and materials furnished under Divisions 21-23. Provide all hangers and supports, as specified,
detailed, or in accordance with accepted industry standards.
H. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions. Obtain
manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to roughing-in.
I. Where equipment is furnished by other trades for installation as Work under Divisions 21-23, or where
electrical service or utility connection to equipment installed by others is indicated as Work of Divisions 21-
23, obtain approved shop drawings and installation instructions from the respective contractor prior to
roughing-in. Discrepancies between installation instructions and Contract Documents shall be brought to
the attention of Architect.
J. Where equipment is indicated to be furnished as Work of Divisions 21-23 for installation by others, or
where equipment furnished and installed under Divisions 21-23 requires utility connections by others,
provide to the respective contractor one copy of an approved shop drawing and installation instructions
necessary for execution of his work.
K. Unless specifically indicated, communication between the mechanical and electrical systems equipment
and panels shall be via a dedicated wiring system furnished and installed by the systems installers. These
systems shall be separate from all other data communication networks within the building. Contractor may
request approval for providing communications on the Owner’s building data network. If Owner’s written
approval is obtained, the system installer shall fully coordinate the necessary data network connections
with the Owner, the Owner’s technology consultant, and the contractor responsible for installing the
building data network system. The systems shall follow the Owner’s data network labeling scheme for
outlets and jacks, operation protocols, and shall adhere to all network security measures. The system
installer shall be responsible for all costs associated with equipment, materials, and labor necessary to
furnish and install the communications network including, but not limited to: jacks, wall plates, cables,
conduits and boxes, patch panels, patch cords, additional Owner switches and equipment, additional
systems equipment, and programming services.
1.11 COORDINATION – NEW CONSTRUCTION
A. Openings and recesses, including cutting, patching and finishing, necessary for installation of mechanical
equipment in new construction will be provided by General Contractor. Coordinate locations, dimensional
data, and scheduling of Work with General Contractor.
B. Where piping is run concealed in concrete masonry unit (block) walls, Contractor shall be responsible for
installing his work in cores of block for mason to wall-in as he carries up wall. Coordinate locations and
scheduling of Work with General Contractor.
C. General Contractor will furnish and install structural steel members for supporting rooftop equipment as
indicated on Drawings. Provide General Contractor with dimensional data required for fabrication of
supports.
D. General Contractor will furnish and install all base flashing for roof mounted equipment. Furnish and install
all cap flashing integral to roof mounted equipment and field fabricated. Coordinate with General
Contractor’s roofer.
E. Electrical Contractor will wire all motors, resistance coils and controllers, except as noted otherwise in
Section 26 96 10, Wiring of Mechanical Equipment. Where motor starters and disconnect switches are
supplied, and shipped loose with mechanical equipment, they shall be mounted and wired by Electrical
Contractor. Verify available power characteristics prior to ordering equipment.

MECHANICAL
1.12 CONCRETE
A. Furnish and install concrete for Work of Divisions 21-23. Concrete work shall be in accordance with
requirements set forth in Division 03.
1.13 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Perform excavation and backfill required for Work of this Division, inside and outside building. Excavation
and backfill shall be in accordance with requirements set forth in Division 31.
1. Work shall include saw cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching of all areas disturbed by excavation.
2. Banks and excavations shall be retained by means of shoring and braces to avoid cave-ins.
Shoring shall be in accordance with state and local regulatory agencies’ requirements. Shoring
shall be maintained until installation, tests and inspections are complete.
3. Pumping equipment shall be provided and maintained to pump water from excavations.
4. Comply with Pennsylvania Underground Utility Line Protection Act (287-1974 as amended by Act
187-1996) before commencing any excavation work. Telephone number for Pennsylvania One-Call
Systems, Inc. is 1-800-242-1776.
1.14 PAINTING
A. Equipment furnished under Divisions 21-23 that is pre-painted or pre-finished by manufacturer shall have
all nicks, scratches, blemishes, and rust spots cleaned, primed, and refinished prior to final acceptance by
Owner.
B. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 09.
C. General Contractor will paint exposed unfinished equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., installed under
Divisions 21-23.
1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain a set of Contract Documents, i.e., Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, Modifications and
approved submittals at the site, in good order and annotated to show all changes made during
construction process. These record documents shall be delivered to Architect either prior to or with
submission of Application for Final Payment.
B. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Two (2) complete hard copy(ies) and 2 soft copy(ies)/electronic set(s) on compact disc(s) of the operating
and maintenance manual labeled as described herein shall be submitted to the Owner for approval in as
many 3-ring loose leaf binders as required. The copies shall be submitted a minimum of two weeks prior to
any instructions and demonstrations to Owner’s personnel.
B. The manuals shall be typewritten and the information shall be arranged in a logical order for use by the
Owner in maintaining the equipment and systems installed on the project.
C. The manuals shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Table of contents.
2. Materials list with place of purchase.
3. List of normally replaced items, such as filters, fuses, belts, seals, screens, etc., indicating style,
rating, size, etc., and place of purchase.

MECHANICAL
4. Approved copies of submittals, including component wiring diagrams and BAS wiring piping
diagrams of all installed systems indicating all connections, color coding, functions, locations, etc.
Approved “As-Noted” submittals shall be corrected to incorporate all approval notes prior to
inclusion in the manuals.
5. Installation, servicing, maintenance and operating instructions for all systems and components with
place of original purchase, and name, address and phone number of person servicing system.
6. Manufacturer’s guarantees and warranties.
7. System and equipment start-up, seasonal changeover, and seasonal shut-down with pre-start
checklists and precautions.
8. System and equipment troubleshooting guides.
9. Reference documents which shall include construction drawings list, record set of drawings list, test
and balance records.
10. Testing and balancing procedures for each system(s) and system(s) components.
11. Copies of all inspection certificates and approvals from all inspection agencies.
12. Copies of approved testing, adjusting and balancing reports.
D. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.17 SPARE PARTS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish to Owner spare parts and equipment at project closeout in accordance with each respective
specification section that requires spare parts and equipment.
1.18 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials and equipment shall be new, without imperfections or blemishes, and shall be protected from
the elements prior to installation.
B. Contractor shall be responsible to verify all furnished materials and equipment are suitable for the service,
temperatures, and pressures where they are installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Work shall be installed by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.
B. All mechanical equipment and materials shall be installed to allow access to and to facilitate service,
maintenance, repair, replacement, etc., of components to all equipment furnished and installed under this
Division of the specifications, furnished and installed under all other Divisions of the specifications, and,
where applicable, Owner furnished and installed and Owner’s existing equipment.
C. Duct work, piping, equipment, etc., shall be installed in such a manner as to preserve access to equipment
installed under this project and, where applicable, existing equipment.

MECHANICAL
3.2 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of Work, remove all dirt, foreign materials, stains, fingerprints, etc., from all parts and
equipment.
B. Remove all construction debris and vacuum interior spaces of all compartmental equipment.
C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and anti-pollution
laws.
D. Work shall be subject to inspection by the Architect.
3.3 PROTECTION FROM DUST AND DEBRIS
A. During patching, painting, ceiling removal and replacement, working on the ceiling or on things above the
ceiling, etc., maintain cloths or suitable building paper covers to protect building surfaces. Protective
measures (drop cloths, protective covers, etc.) shall be placed and sealed over all furniture and equipment
to keep items clean and protected against dirt, dust and debris from entering furniture and equipment that
the Owner has not removed.
B. Upon completion of work each day when building is occupied, remove all temporary covers, drop cloths
and debris and vacuum clean all worked-in areas to eliminate carrying of dirt materials and dirt tracking
throughout building during times construction is not proceeding.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE
A. The work shall proceed in accordance with the construction work sequence narrative as issued in Division
01.
B. Work to be installed through existing building shall be installed at other than normal occupied hours.
Coordinate installation times with Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for removing and replacing
ceilings for installing items above ceilings in these existing areas. All ceilings removed shall be replaced
prior to normal occupied hours.
3.5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems,
subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
B. Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at
least seven days' advance notice.
C. Instructor shall operate system(s) in order to demonstrate fulfillment of contract requirements and educate
Owner’s personnel on the following:
1. Basis of system design and operational requirements.
2. Documentation provided in the operating and maintenance manuals.
3. Startup and normal operation instructions.
4. Warning, trouble indications, emergency operation and failure instructions.
5. Adjustments.
6. Inspection and preventative maintenance.
7. Diagnostics and repairs.

MECHANICAL
3.6 WARRANTIES
A. Where extended warranties beyond the normal one year warranty are, as specified herein, to be applied to
a particular item of equipment or system, furnish to Owner a description of the warranty along with any
required registration and signature of manufacturer’s authorized personnel.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with and having the manufacturer administer these
warranties for the full extent of time the warranty will be in effect.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for administering and servicing all extended warranties for the life of each
extended warranty at no additional cost to Owner. Owner’s responsibility will be for additional costs for
parts associated with warranties that are warranted on a pro-rated basis. All labor for administering and
servicing the extended warranty, including actual replacement of parts, will be the responsibility of the
Contractor for the extended warranty period. All unwarranted shipping and handling costs for parts and
equipment will be the responsibility of the Owner.
END OF SECTION 20 00 10

MECHANICAL
SECTION 20 00 20 – GENERAL PROVISIONS – ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The bidding requirements, Contract Documents, and Division 01 - General Requirements, are a part of
Divisions 26-28 and Contract for this Work and apply to these Divisions as fully as if they were repeated
therein.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electrical Work shall consist of labor, materials, and equipment required for furnishing and installing the
electrical system.
B. Electrical Work shall be bid as a separate prime contract in accordance with the bidding requirements.
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
A. Wherever the term “Bidder” is used in Divisions 26-28 of the Specifications, it shall be interpreted to refer
to the person, firm, or corporation who is submitting an offer or proposal, on the prescribed form, to
perform the Work of these Divisions.
B. Wherever the term, “Contractor” is used in Divisions 26-28 of the Specifications, it shall be interpreted to
refer to the Contractor responsible for Work of these Divisions.
C. Those responsible for Work covered by other portions of the Specifications will be indicated by trade, such
as Mechanical Contractor, General Contractor, etc.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Portions or all of certain recognized industry or association standard referred to herein as being a
requirement of these Specifications shall be considered as binding as though reproduced in full herein.
Unless otherwise stated the reference standard shall be the standard which is current as of the date of
issuance of these Specifications. Reference may be made to standards either by full name or for the sake
of brevity by letter designation only. The following is a list of the most commonly used standards, but is not
all inclusive for these Specifications:
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act

AES Audio Engineering Society
AIA American Institute of Architects
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International
EIA Electronics Industry Association
FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation
ICC International Code Council
IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
NEC National Electrical Code
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NETA National Electrical Testing Association
NESC National Electric Safety Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association

ELECTRICAL
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.5 UNIT PRICES
A. Bidder shall state on Bid a unit price for furnishing and installing a duplex receptacle outlet. A duplex
receptacle outlet shall consist of a duplex receptacle, outlet box, wallplate and wiring within fifty wire feet of
a source of power. Unit price shall reflect an outlet installed during the normal course of installation.
B. Bidder shall state on Bid a unit price for furnishing and installing a data outlet. A data outlet shall consist of
a single data jack, double gang outlet box, single gang plaster ring, conduit stubbed up concealed in wall
and turned out above accessible ceiling, wallplate and category 6 cable, including all testing, within 150
cable feet of telecommunications space/room cabinet. Unit price shall reflect an outlet installed during the
normal course of installation.
1.6 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Secure all permits and inspections required by applicable authorities and pay all costs in connection with
the Work.
B. Schedule all inspections required by applicable authorities. Certificates shall be in triplicate and shall be
delivered to Owner.
C. Electrical inspection shall be made by the Code Official or Code Administrator as directed by the
municipality in which the work is being performed.
1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Electrical Work is subject to provisions of the Pennsylvania Uniform Construction Code and has been
designed to be in compliance with this code. Design aspect of the Project shall not be altered regarding
building envelope or selection of electrical distribution and illumination systems and equipment.
Supplemental data published by equipment and system manufacturers to substantiate energy
conservation efficiencies throughout the Project shall be furnished at request of Architect.
B. Work shall meet requirements of the National Electrical Code and all federal, state, and municipal
authority’s laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work.
C. Where applicable, materials and equipment shall bear the label of approval of Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc.
D. Reference to codes and standards listed herein shall constitute minimum acceptable requirements. Where
Drawings and Specifications requirements exceed those of codes listed, Drawings and Specifications shall
take precedence for Work of this Project.
E. All installations shall be completed in accordance with current National Electrical Contractors Association
(NECA) National Electrical Installation Standards.
F. If Contractor, during the course of work, observes the existence of hazardous materials in the structure or
on the project site, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Architect. Contractor shall not perform any
work pertinent to the hazardous material prior to receipt of special instructions from the Owner.
“Hazardous materials”, for the purpose of this Specification, are defined as asbestos, PCB’s, petroleum,
radioactive material, or hazardous waste substances.
1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Specifications for each piece of equipment and each item of material are written around a product of a
specific base manufacturer. This base manufacturer is the basis of design, dimensions and details. The

ELECTRICAL
base manufacturer’s name and model information are included with the product description as the first
named manufacturer under the heading “Acceptable Manufacturer”.
B. “Substitution” manufacturers are defined as any manufacturer other than the one used as the basis of
design. “Substitution” manufacturers will be permitted, in accordance with the bidding requirements and
where indicated herein.
C. Manufacturers named in the product description, in addition to the base manufacturer, are “substitution”
manufacturers, have been determined to be manufacturers capable of manufacturing products similar to
the base manufacturer and these manufacturers are acceptable “substitution” manufacturers to the base
manufacturer. Where additional manufacturer’s names do not appear with the base manufacturer, the
Architect reserves the right to disallow any “substitution” manufacturers. Where the base manufacturer’s
name is followed by the term “no substitution”, no “substitution” manufacturers will be considered.
D. Naming of specific manufacturers shall not be construed as eliminating products or services of other
“substitution” manufacturers having comparable items. Where permitted by these Specifications, and
where Bidder desires to use other “substitution” manufacturers, he may submit a request for approval to
use the “substitution” manufacturer in accordance with bidding requirements.
E. Products described in Specifications are intended to set a quality level and ensure a workable system.
“Substitution” of manufacturers, including those herein named, may be made only after approval of
Architect. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for installation and dimensional changes required by the
use of all “substitution” manufacturer’s products, including revisions to wiring, controls, piping, structural
revisions, etc., and all room or space changes as required due to dimension differences of the
“substitution” manufacturer product. Architect approval of “substitution” manufacturer’s products shall be
limited to compliance with information given on the Drawings and Specifications.
F. Where the Bidding requirements call for submittal for approval of substitutions prior to bids due, all
approvals given are for “substitution” manufacturers only, not approval of any particular product. An
approved “substitution” manufacturer’s product must comply with all requirements of the specifications and
drawings for the base manufacturer’s product.
1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit shop drawings and product data for approval to Architect. Shop drawings and product data shall
have been reviewed and approved (stamped) by Contractor furnishing the equipment. If evidence of this
Contractor’s approval does not appear on submittal data, submittals will be returned without review.
Following Architect review, submittals not approved or requiring resubmission shall be corrected and
resubmitted until satisfactory. Work indicated on shop drawings and product data shall not be executed
until submittals have been approved.
B. Each submittal shall contain shop drawings or product data for only one specification section. Submittals
containing information about products from multiple specification sections will be returned without review.
Likewise, each submittal shall contain shop drawings or product data for all items in one specification
section to be provided for this Project. Submittals that are incomplete may be returned without review.
C. Submittals for equipment and material shall indicate room numbers, drawing identification symbols,
product type, capacities, accessories, connection sizes, electrical characteristics, wiring diagrams, and
installation instructions. Each shop drawing shall have specified items, accessories and options, as
applicable to this Project, clearly marked. Catalog numbers, part numbers, etc. on shop drawings will not
be reviewed for correctness, Contractor is responsible for verifying correctness of these and that they
relate to the options, accessories, features, etc. marked on the shop drawings. Shop drawings not clearly
marked as to only that which will be provided for this Project will not be approved.
D. In as much as it is not the purpose of the submittal process to assure that the Contractor is meeting all the
requirements of the Contract Documents, submittal review by Architect is for conformance with design
concept of the Project and general compliance with information given in the construction documents.
Approval, corrections and/or comments made as part of the submittal review do not relieve the Contractor
of the responsibility from conformance with all requirements of the Contract Documents, applicable codes
and laws. Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, and performance requirements to be
confirmed and correlated at the job site; for information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes or
to techniques of construction; and for all coordination with the Work of all trades. Refer to paragraph
entitled “Substitutions” in this section of the specifications.

ELECTRICAL
E. At the time of each submittal, Contractor shall give Architect specific written notice of such variations, if
any, that the Shop Drawing or product submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract
Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition,
shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and sample submitted to Architect for
review and approval of each such variation. Architect’s review and approval of Shop Drawings or products
shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents unless Contractor has in writing called the Architect’s attention to each such variation at the
time of each submittal and Architect has given written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying
the Shop Drawing or product approval; nor will any approval by Architect relieve contractor from
responsibility for complying with the requirements of this paragraph.
F. Shop drawing submittals shall be accompanied by a transmittal sheet with the applicable specification
section number and the "name" of the item or items being submitted clearly indicated on the transmittal. All
"names" on the transmittal shall match exactly the "names" listed in the specifications for the item being
submitted.
G. The name of the supplier, distributor, subcontractor, etc., who will furnish equipment and items to the
Contractor shall appear on the shop drawings when submitted. Shop drawing submittals without supplier’s,
distributors, subcontractors, etc., name will not be reviewed and will be returned without review.
H. If Architect is required to review any shop drawing or product data submittal more than two times, a
Change Order will be issued to the Contractor for a credit due on the Contract Price to recoup Architect’s
expenses associated with the multiple reviews.
I. One complete set of approved shop drawings and product data shall be delivered to Owner at completion
of Work. Include lists of manufacturer’s parts and part numbers.
J. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.
1.10 COORDINATION - GENERAL
A. Work shall be governed by requirements set forth in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment required by the Contract Documents necessary for completion
of the Work of Divisions 26-28.
C. Bidders shall visit the project site to determine actual conditions which will be encountered in completing
the Work of this Project.
D. Drawings are generally indicative of Work to be installed but may not indicate all bends, fittings, boxes,
etc., required to meet conditions. Where items shown on the Drawings, or herein described, are not clearly
understood, Bidders shall confer with Architect.
E. Coordinate Work of Divisions 26-28 with that of other trades so that Work will be installed in the most
direct manner and so that interference between conduits, piping, ducts, equipment, and architectural or
structural features will be avoided. Work installed in an arbitrary manner without regard for Work of other
trades will be rejected in any situation where an undesirable condition or an unfair hardship for other
trades, or Owner, results.
F. Provide sufficient scaffolding and hoist or rig material and equipment into place, or arrange for rigging by
others. In any case, rigging or hoisting for all Work of Divisions 26-28 shall be at the expense of
Contractor.
G. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide structural steel members as required for support of
equipment and materials furnished under Divisions 26-28. Provide all hangers and supports, as specified,
detailed, or in accordance with accepted industry standards.
H. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions. Obtain
manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to roughing-in.
I. Where equipment is furnished by other trades for installation as Work under Divisions 26-28, or where
electrical service or utility connection, to equipment installed by others, is indicated as Work of this

ELECTRICAL
Division, obtain approved shop drawings and installation instructions from respective contractor prior to
roughing-in. Discrepancies between installation instructions and Contract Documents shall be brought to
the attention of Architect before Work is begun.
J. Where equipment is indicated to be furnished as Work of Divisions 26-28 for installation by others, or
where equipment furnished and installed under Divisions 26-28 requires utility connections by others,
provide to the respective contractor one copy of an approved shop drawing and installation instructions
necessary for execution of his work.
K. Owner, through Architect, reserves the right to move any outlet or stubbed-up conduit, a distance of
twenty-five feet before roughing-in, without additional cost to Owner.
L. Unless specifically indicated, communication between the mechanical and electrical systems equipment
and panels shall be via a dedicated wiring system furnished and installed by the systems installers. These
systems shall be separate from all other data communication networks within the building. Contractor may
request approval for providing communications on the Owner’s building data network. If Owner’s written
approval is obtained, the system installer shall fully coordinate the necessary data network connections
with the Owner, the Owner’s technology consultant, and the contractor responsible for installing the
building data network system. The systems shall follow the Owner’s data network labeling scheme for
outlets and jacks, operation protocols, and shall adhere to all network security measures. The system
installer shall be responsible for all costs associated with equipment, materials, and labor necessary to
furnish and install the communications network including, but not limited to: jacks, wall plates, cables,
conduits and boxes, patch panels, patch cords, additional Owner switches and equipment, additional
systems equipment, and programming services.
1.11 COORDINATION - NEW CONSTRUCTION
A. Openings and recesses, including cutting, patching and finishing, necessary for installation of electrical
equipment and devices in new construction will be provided by General Contractor. Coordinate locations,
dimensional data, and scheduling of Work with General Contractor.
B. Where conduit is run concealed in concrete masonry unit (block) walls, Contractor shall be responsible for
installing his work in cores of block for mason to wall-in as he carries up wall. Coordinate locations and
scheduling of Work with General Contractor.
C. Provide concrete foundations and pads for electrical equipment installed under Division 26. Foundations
for equipment shall be as specified in subsequent Sections of the Specifications. Inserts and anchor bolts
shall be poured into foundation according to equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Method of setting,
aligning, and anchoring shall be as recommended by equipment manufacturer. Coordinate concrete pad
sizes with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.12 COORDINATION - EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
A. Cut all openings required in existing construction for installation of equipment and material. Perform all
cutting, patching, and refinishing as required to match surroundings, whether or not specifically noted on
Drawings.
B. Existing Ceilings: Remove existing ceiling tile where required for installation of electrical Work. Reinstall
existing ceiling tiles as Work is completed. All damaged or broken ceiling tile caused by Contractor’s
workers shall be replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.
C. Utility interruptions and tie-ins shall be coordinated with Owner a minimum of 14 days in advance of Work.
1.13 CONCRETE
A. Furnish and install concrete for Work of Divisions 26-28. Concrete work shall be in accordance with
requirements set forth in Division 03.

ELECTRICAL
1.14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Perform excavation and backfill required for Work of this Division, inside and outside building. Excavation
and backfill shall be in accordance with requirements set forth in Division 31.
1. Work shall include saw cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching, repairing and reseeding of all areas
disturbed by excavation.
2. Banks and excavations shall be retained by means of shoring and braces to avoid cave-ins.
Shoring shall be in accordance with state and local regulatory agencies’ requirements. Shoring
shall be maintained until installation, tests and inspections are complete.
3. Pumping equipment shall be provided and maintained to pump water from excavations.
4. Comply with Pennsylvania Underground Utility Line Protection Act (287-1974 as amended by Act
187-1996) before commencing any excavation work. Telephone number for Pennsylvania One-Call
Systems, Inc. is 1-800-242-1776.
1.15 PAINTING
A. Equipment furnished under Divisions 26-28 that is pre-painted or pre-finished by manufacturer shall have
all nicks, scratches, blemishes, and rust spots cleaned, primed, and refinished prior to final acceptance by
Owner.
B. Painting shall be in accordance with the Division 09.
C. Paint systems junction boxes and covers in specified color as follows:

1. Emergency: Orange
2. Fire Alarm: Red
3. Sound/Intercom, paging: Blue
4. Telecommunications and Data: Yellow
5. Access Control, Security and Security CCTV: Brown
D. General Contractor will paint exposed unfinished equipment, conduit, etc., installed under Divisions 26-28.
1.16 EXISTING EQUIPMENT
A. Removal of Existing Equipment and Materials: Electrical equipment and materials indicated on Drawings
as “to be removed”, shall be removed as Work of Divisions 26-28. Items of value as determined by Owner
shall be stored on site where directed by Owner. Equipment and material that Owner does not wish to
retain shall be legally disposed of offsite. Do not remove any equipment and materials from the site without
Owner’s approval.
B. Relocation of Existing Equipment and Materials: Electrical equipment and materials indicated on Drawings
as “to be relocated”, shall be removed, relocated, reinstalled, and reconnected unless otherwise noted on
the Drawings. Where indicated, existing wiring shall be extended to relocated item. Before reinstallation,
equipment and materials shall be cleaned and nicks and scratches shall be touched-up. Broken parts shall
be brought to the attention of Owner prior to removal or any disassembly.
1.17 DEMOLITION
A. Only the trade responsible for Work of Divisions 26-28 shall perform the electrical demolition work.
B. Trace the entire circuit of any existing circuit to be partially removed. Before removal, mark, label or tag
remaining portions of that circuit for type of circuit (normal, emergency, etc.) and area or items served.
C. Existing conduit remaining in place may be reused, provided conduit is thoroughly cleaned and tested for
continuity before new wire is installed.

ELECTRICAL
D. Existing conduit remaining in place, and to be reused, shall run in same direction that new conduit would
run, if new conduit were installed.
E. Removed conduit and wire shall not be reused.
F. If an existing electrical item to be removed is located in the middle of an existing circuit, with other existing
items on that circuit to remain, the existing circuit shall be made continuous.
G. If an existing electrical item to be removed is located on the end of an existing circuit, the existing wire and
exposed conduit back to the next active item on that circuit shall be removed.
H. If an existing electrical item to be removed is the only item on the circuit, the existing wire and exposed
conduit shall be removed back to the panelboard and, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, the
existing breaker for that circuit shall become a spare. Existing panel schedule shall be revised.
I. Where an existing conduit run, or portion of an existing conduit run, to be removed is partially exposed and
partially concealed, the exposed portion shall be removed to a concealed point beyond the surface, i.e. a
wall, a ceiling, a floor and the surface shall be patched and refinished to match surroundings.
J. Requirements for existing exposed conduit, as stated above, shall also apply to existing concealed conduit
runs located above existing accessible tile ceilings or existing conduit runs that will be above new
accessible tile ceilings.
K. Unless indicated otherwise, where removal of existing wiring, or existing associated wiring, is indicated on
the Drawings, Work shall also include removal of all associated raceways.
L. In area(s) of work (including areas where ceilings will be removed), all existing exposed unused systems
cables shall be removed in their entirety (end to end) in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
Contractor shall coordinate with Owner. Verify with Owner that cables are unused and obtain Owner’s
approval to remove cables.
construction process. These record documents shall be delivered to Architect either prior to or with
B. Marked up record drawings shall include:

1. The single line diagram of the building electrical distribution system provided under this contract
and;
2. Floor plans indicating location and area served for all distribution.
C. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.19 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Two (2) complete hard copies and 2 soft copy(ies)/electronic set(s) on compact disc(s) of the operating
and maintenance manual labeled as described herein shall be submitted to the Owner for approval in as
many 3-ring loose leaf binders as required. The copies shall be submitted a minimum of two weeks prior to
any instructions and demonstrations to Owner’s personnel.
B. The manuals shall be typewritten and the information shall be arranged in a logical order for use by the
Owner in maintaining the equipment and systems installed on the project.
C. The manuals shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Table of contents.
2. Materials list with place of purchase.

ELECTRICAL
3. List of normally replaced items, such as lamps, fuses, etc., indicating style, rating, size, etc., and
place of purchase.
4. Approved copies of submittals, including component wiring diagrams and BAS wiring piping
diagrams of all installed systems indicating all connections, color coding, functions, locations, etc.
Approved “As-Noted” submittals shall be corrected to incorporate all approval notes prior to
inclusion in the manuals.
5. Installation, servicing, maintenance and operating instructions for all systems and components with
place of original purchase, and name, address and phone number of person servicing system.
6. Manufacturer’s guarantees and warranties.
7. System and equipment start-up, seasonal changeover, and seasonal shut-down with pre-start
checklists and precautions.
8. System and equipment troubleshooting guides.
9. Reference documents which shall include construction drawings list, record set of drawings list, test
and balance records.
10. Copies of all inspection certificates and approvals from all inspection agencies.
D. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.20 SPARE PARTS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish to Owner spare parts and equipment at project closeout in accordance with each respective
specification section that requires spare parts and equipment.
1.21 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials and equipment shall be new, without imperfections or blemishes, and shall be protected from
the elements prior to installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Work shall be installed by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.
B. All electrical equipment and materials shall be installed to allow access to and to facilitate service,
maintenance, repair, replacement, etc., of components to all equipment furnished and installed under this
Division of the specifications, furnished and installed under all other Divisions of the specifications, and,
where applicable, Owner furnished and installed and Owner’s existing equipment.
C. Conduit, wire, cable, wiring devices, equipment, etc. shall be installed in such a manner as to preserve
access to equipment installed under this project and, where applicable, existing equipment.

ELECTRICAL
3.2 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of Work, remove all dirt, foreign materials, stains, fingerprints, etc., from all parts and
equipment.
B. Remove all construction debris and vacuum interior spaces of all compartmental equipment.
C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and anti-pollution
laws.
D. Work shall be subject to inspection by the Architect.
3.3 PROTECTION FROM DUST AND DEBRIS
A. During patching, painting, ceiling removal and replacement, working on the ceiling or on things above the
ceiling, etc., maintain cloths or suitable building paper covers to protect building surfaces. Protective
measures (drop cloths, protective covers, etc.) shall be placed and sealed over all furniture and equipment
to keep items clean and protected against dirt, dust and debris from entering furniture and equipment that
the Owner has not removed.
B. Upon completion of work each day when building is occupied, remove all temporary covers, drop cloths
and debris and vacuum clean all worked-in areas to eliminate carrying of dirt materials and dirt tracking
throughout building during time construction is not proceeding.
A. The Work shall proceed in accordance with the construction work sequence narrative as issued in Division
01.
B. Work to be installed through existing building shall be installed at other than normal occupied hours,
coordinate installation times with Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for removing and replacing
ceilings for installing items above ceilings in these existing areas. All ceilings removed shall be replaced
prior to normal occupied hours.
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems,
subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
B. Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at
least seven days' advance notice.
C. Instructor shall operate system(s) in order to demonstrate fulfillment of contract requirements and educate
Owner’s personnel on the following:
1. Basis of system design and operational requirements.
2. Documentation provided in the operating and maintenance manuals.
3. Startup and normal operation instructions.
4. Warning, trouble indications, emergency operation and failure instructions.
5. Adjustments.
6. Inspection and preventative maintenance.
7. Diagnostics and repairs.

ELECTRICAL
3.6 WARRANTIES
A. Where extended warranties beyond the normal one year warranty are, as specified herein, to be applied to
a particular item of equipment or system, furnish to Owner a description of the warranty along with any
required registration and signature of manufacturer’s authorized personnel.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with and having the manufacturer administer these
warranties for the full extent of time the warranty will be in effect.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for administering and servicing all extended warranties for the life of each
extended warranty at no additional cost to Owner. Owner’s responsibility will be for additional costs for
parts associated with warranties that are warranted on a pro-rated basis. All labor for administering and
servicing the extended warranty, including actual replacement of parts, will be the responsibility of the
Contractor for the extended warranty period. All unwarranted shipping and handling costs for parts and
equipment will be the responsibility of the Owner

ELECTRICAL
SECTION 21 10 10 – FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for installation of a
total sprinkler system.
B. Water supply for the fire protection system shall be extended from main to curb stop, including curb stop
by local water company. Contractor shall make application for and incur all costs associated with fire
protection system water supply.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval in accordance with specified submittal procedures:

1. Backflow Preventers
2. Valves
3. Fire Department Connections
4. Flexible Drop Connections
5. Sprinkler Heads
6. Supervisory System
7. Flow Switches
8. Electric Alarm Bell
B. Submit shop drawings, product data and dimensional plans showing the locations of all sprinkler
heads/nozzles, control valves, piping and equipment and complete wiring diagrams. Submittals shall show
the relation of Work of this Section to the work of other trades.
C. Acceptance Tests: It is the intention of this Section to furnish and install a complete fire protection system
for the building as specified herein and as indicated on Drawings. Contractor will be required to furnish
applicable Contractor's Material and Test Certificate(s) to Owner prior to final inspection and acceptance.
1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Specifications and Drawings are intended to provide a functional system. Contractor shall prepare final
design and installation documents in accordance with applicable code and agency requirements.
B. Scaled drawings and hydraulic calculations bearing Owner’s Fire Insurance Underwriter stamp(s) of
approval shall be submitted to Architect prior to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
A. Fire protection system piping (both sprinkler and fire hose piping) aboveground shall be in accordance with
applicable NFPA standards. Pipe fittings and methods of pipe joining shall be in accordance with
applicable NFPA standards. Plastic pipe and fittings will not be permitted.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS FIRE PROTECTION 21 10 10 - 1 of 4

B. Underground fire lines shall be in accordance with Pipe Specification No. 6. Refer to Section 22 05 10,
Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
2.2 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Piping shall be supported by means of UL approved type hangers. Hangers shall be sized, spaced and
installed in accordance with NFPA 13.
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Double Detector Check Backflow Preventer

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts Series 774 DCDA, Zurn Model 350 DA, or Ames Series 3000, no
substitutions.
2. Components: Two independently acting spring loaded toggle lever check valves, two OS&Y gate
valves and four test cocks, arranged so each check valve can be tested. Integral bypass with
double check backflow preventer and water meter.
3. All materials shall be corrosion resistant. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be protected against
corrosion by epoxy coating.
4. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi.
2.4 VALVES
A. Valves for use in fire protection system piping shall be provided as required and shall be the following
types unless noted otherwise:
1. Drain valves and test valves shall be FM/UL approved (minimum cold water pressure rating of 175
psi, verified with actual system water pressure).
2. Control valves inside building shall be FM/UL approved valves (minimum cold water pressure rating
of 175 psi, verified with actual system water pressure).
3. Check valves shall be FM/UL approved type with synthetic rubber discs for quiet non return control
(minimum cold water pressure rating of 175 psi, verified with actual system water pressure).
2.5 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Fire department connection shall be wall type Storz connection, with chrome polished bronze body and
FM/UL approved. Fire department connection shall be lettered SPRINKLER.
2.6 FLEXIBLE DROP CONNECTIONS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Victaulic Inc., or FlexHead Industries Inc.
B. Type: Stainless steel, braided flexible connection may be used where approved by the local authority
having jurisdiction and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s specific listings and recommendations.
All flexible drop connections shall be UL and FM approved; pressure tested to a working pressure of 175
PSI. The product shall be factory tested and rated for a failure pressure of not less than 300 PSI.
C. Minimum diameter of flexible drop connections shall be not less than 1 inch IPS. Lengths shall be 2 feet
minimum to 6 feet maximum.
D. Flexible drop connections shall not be acceptable in areas where ceilings are not installed, in areas where
floating ceilings are installed or any other location where visible.

2.7 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Sprinkler heads shall be the following types:

1. Unless noted otherwise, sprinkler heads in finished ceilings shall be adjustable, fully concealed with
white cover plate.
2. For other areas where ceilings are not installed, sprinkler heads shall be brass and of appropriate
orientation (upright, pendant, or sidewall, etc.)
3. Temperature rating shall be as noted on Drawings.
4. All heads shall be FM/UL approved.
B. Provide the minimum number of spare sprinkler heads, in a cabinet, corresponding to types and
temperature ratings of installed sprinkler heads, in accordance with NFPA 13.
2.8 SUPERVISORY SYSTEM
A. OS&Y Valve
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Simplex, or Autocall, Potter Signal Company.
2. Supervisory switch for OS&Y valves shall be FM/UL approved with cast aluminum housing, gasket
seal, tamperproof feature, mounting bracket and bolts. Normally open operation.
3. Contractor shall coordinate voltage and power requirements with fire alarm system vendor.
2.9 FLOW ALARM SWITCH
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Simplex, or Autocall, Potter Signal Company.
B. Flow alarm switches shall be pressure actuated type for the system pressure and shall be FM/UL
approved. Normally closed operation.
C. Contractor shall coordinate voltage and power requirements with fire alarm system vendor.
2.10 ELECTRIC ALARM BELL
A. Electric alarm bell shall be FM approved, 6 inch size, with weatherproof bell backbox, fully addressable
and monitored by fire alarm system.
B. Contractor shall coordinate voltage and power requirements with fire alarm system vendor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fire protection system shall conform to requirements of the National Fire Protection Association and all
applicable state and local codes.
B. Work shall be installed and tested as specified herein and required by applicable ordinances, and shall be
repeated to the satisfaction of those making inspection. Fire protection system piping shall be flushed and
tested to 200 psi for two hours duration.
C. Coordinate sprinkler piping, equipment, heads, appurtenances, etc. with that of other trades so that
sprinkler work will be installed in the most direct manner and so that interference between piping, ducts,
equipment and architectural or structural features will be avoided. Sprinkler piping, equipment, heads,
appurtenances, etc. installed in an arbitrary manner without regard for work of other trades will be rejected
in any situation where an undesirable condition or an unfair hardship for other trades, or owner, results.

D. Pipe penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be large enough to accommodate pipe
expansion. Annular space between outside of pipe and inside of pipe sleeves or openings shall be sealed
with fire stop sealing system. Refer to Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Basic Materials.
E. Provide auxiliary drains for draining low points or trapped portions of system piping.
F. Inspector's test shall be provided on each floor.
G. Control, drain and test valves shall be provided with identification tags in accordance with NFPA 13.
H. Hydraulic design placards shall be placed at the base of each riser indicating design and demands of the
systems.
I. Upon project completion, contractor shall submit to the Owner two copies of the latest edition of NFPA 25,
“Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water Based Fire Protection Systems”.
J. Standard Contractor's Material and Test Certificate shall be submitted to FM for aboveground and
underground tests.

SECTION 21 96 10 – WIRING OF FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall include the power and control wiring of fire protection equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fire Protection Contractor shall provide equipment with controls, starters and related items as specified in
various Sections of Division 21.
B. Where fire protection equipment is specified without starters or controllers, Electrical Contractor shall
provide same as specified herein.
C. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring unless specifically noted otherwise.
D. Fire Protection Contractor shall furnish and install all control wiring unless specifically noted otherwise.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fire protection equipment shall be wired in accordance with the following schedule:
Key:
Item furnished by.....
Item installed by....
Item wired by.....
the respective trade according to the following designations:
F = Fire Protection Contractor

E = Electrical Contractor
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WIRING OF FIRE PROTECTION 21 96 10 - 1 of 2

EQUIPMENT
Fire Protection Equipment Wiring Schedule
Disconne Controllers Control Devices

ct
Remote Disconnect Switch
Integral Disconnect Switch
Duct Smoke Detectors

On/Off Switch on Wall
Line Volt. Thermostat
Low Volt. Thermostat

Equipment
Water Level / Elev.

Control Panel
Motor Starter
Remote VFD
DDC Control
Integral VFD
Cord & Plug
Pressure
Aquastat
Relay
Flow
Flow Switch
F
E
Tamper Switch
F
E
Electric Alarm Bell
F
B. Unless noted, Contractor responsible for wiring of an item shall be responsible for furnishing and installing
all wiring for that item and making all connections associated with this wiring.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WIRING OF FIRE PROTECTION 21 96 10 - 2 of 2

EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 05 05 – PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for the installation of
basic materials and motors associated with plumbing systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Access Panels
2. Fire Stop Sealing System
3. Equipment Nameplates; including itemized listing of nameplate equipment designations
4. Motors; submit with each piece of equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access Panel Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style AP for acoustical plaster, Style AT for acoustical tile, or
Karp, Krieger, Bilco, MiFab.
2. Type: Acoustical ceiling.
3. Construction: 16 gage galvanized steel frame, 18 gage galvanized steel panel. Recessed to
accommodate acoustical ceiling tile. Continuous hinge, steel with stainless steel pin.
4. Closing Feature: Flush, screw driver operated lock with steel cam.
B. Access Panel Specification No. 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style DW, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco, MiFab.
2. Type: Gypsum wallboard.
3. Construction: 16 gage steel frame, 14 gage steel panel.
4. Concealed spring hinges. Prime coat finish for field painting.
5. Closing Feature: Flush, screwdriver operated lock with steel cam.
C. Access Panel Specification No. 3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor, or Karp.
2. Type: Fire rated.
4. Continuous hinge with stainless steel pin. Automatic panel closer. Factory attached masonry
anchors.
5. Rating: UL listed 1 1/2 hour (B label), temperature rise 30 minutes, 250 degrees F. maximum.
6. Closing Feature: Self latching lock, direct action knurled knob, interior latch release mechanism.
D. Access Panel Specification No. 4
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS 22 05 05 - 1 of 4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style M, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco, MiFab.

2. Type: Masonry, tile, or wood.
3. Construction: 16 gage frame, 14 gage panel. Concealed spring hinges. Prime coat finish for field
painting or stainless steel, satin finish, as required.
4. Closing Feature: Flush screwdriver operated lock with steel cam.
E. Access Panel Specification No. 5

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style K, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco, MiFab.
2. Type: Plastered surfaces.
painting.
2.2 FIRE STOP SEALING SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Nelson Firestop Products CLK Silicone Sealant, or 3M Fire Protection Products,
RectorSeal, Specified Technologies (STI), Tremco.
B. Materials: Single component, ready-to-use, water-resistant, flexible elastomeric silicone sealant. Non-
sag/gunnable grade for penetrations in vertical surfaces, self-leveling grade for floor applications.
C. Compliance: Fire endurance tested per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). In addition to compliance as a fire stop,
the cured sealing system shall not permit smoke or water penetration.
2.3 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
A. Laminated phenolic, two outer layers of white phenolic and an inner layer of black with engraving depth to
the inner layer.
B. Nameplate and lettering suitably sized for their location, but not less than 1/4 inch high letters.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Motor Characteristics:
1. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 degrees C and at an altitude of 3300 feet
above sea level.
2. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. Horsepower rating shall not be
less than size indicated on Drawings.
B. Single Phase Motors:

1. Larger Than 1/20 HP: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific
motor applications:
a. Permanent-split capacitor.
b. Split phase.
c. Capacitor start, inductor run.
d. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
2. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-
split-capacitor type.
3. Voltage: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings.

C. Thermal Protection: Internal, automatically reset.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Access Panels
1. Furnish and install access panels in ceilings and walls for service and repair access to concealed
equipment, including, but not limited to:
a. Valves: hand operated and automatic
b. Backflow preventers
c. Gages and thermometers
d. Water hammer arresters
e. Expansion compensators
f. Calibrated balancing valves
2. Minimum Size: 18 inches by 18 inches. Where restrictions will not permit minimum size, verify
access panel size with Architect.
3. Provide access panels in accordance with the following schedule:
ACCESS PANEL SCHEDULE
Application Access Panel Spec. No.
Acoustical tile or acoustical plaster finishes 1

Gypsum board (dry wall) finishes 2
Fire rated walls 3
Masonry, tile, or wood finishes 4
Plastered finishes 5
Kitchens and food service areas 4 (stainless)
4. Access panel location(s) that are indicated on drawings are of a specific concern. However,
Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install access panels as required, whether noted on
Drawings or required by this section.
B. Sleeves and Plates

1. Furnish and install sleeves for all pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, slabs, grade beams
and foundations.
2. Layout, size, and locate sleeves such that they be set and installed prior to pouring concrete, or
when masonry is being constructed. In event sleeves must be placed after floor, wall, grade beam,
etc., has been constructed, submit in writing to and obtain approval from Architect on location,
quantity and proposed method of core drilling and installing.
3. Core drilled openings above grade in solid concrete need not be sleeved but must be clean and
neat without cracking or spalling.
4. Sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe having square cut ends with anchoring lugs
welded on. Horizontal sleeves through walls, grade beams, foundations, and partitions shall be
flush with finished wall faces. Vertical sleeves through floors shall extend 2 inches above finished
floor and be flush with finished ceiling or underside of floor construction. Sleeves in pits or below
grade shall be painted or coated with one coat of coal tar pitch paint.
5. Size sleeves such that internal diameter is 2 pipe sizes or a minimum of 2 inches larger than
outside diameter of bare pipe for uninsulated lines and 2 inches larger than outside diameter of
insulation and jacket for insulated lines. Center pipes in sleeves.

6. For pipes passing through floors, slabs, walls, grade beams, or foundations at or below grade and
in pits, the annular space between outside of pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve shall be packed
with a pliable, non hardening waterproof mastic sealer or a cement base quick set repair mortar.
7. For pipes passing through walls and floors above grade and with no fire or smoke rating, the
annular space between outside of pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or concrete shall be
packed tight with batt type fiberglass insulation.
8. For pipes passing through walls and floors above grade with smoke or fire rating of one hour or
more, the annular space between outside of pipe and insulation and inside of sleeve or concrete
shall be sealed with fire stop sealing system.
C. Fire Stop Sealing System

1. All floor and interior wall penetrations with smoke or fire rating of one hour or more shall be sealed.
Refer to architectural drawings for locations of fire rated floors and walls.
2. Prepare penetration and install sealing material in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Through penetration fire stop sealing systems shall be identified on both sides with permanently
mounted, preprinted vinyl labels which include the following information:
a. The words “Warning: Through Penetration Firestop System – Do Not Disturb” or similar
phrase.
b. Manufacturer’s brand name, product type or catalog number
c. Testing agency designation and rating
d. Installer’s Name
e. Installation Date
D. Equipment Nameplates
1. Furnish and install a full complement of nameplates for all items of mechanical equipment installed
as Work of this Division, including water heaters, pumps, mixing valves and control panels.
2. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
3. Unless noted, nameplates shall be attached with sheet metal screws or epoxy cement. Epoxy
cement shall not be used equipment installed outdoors.
4. Coordinate with Owner for nameplate designations. Submit a complete itemized listing of
nameplate equipment designations for approval.
5. Prior to fabricating nameplates, complete and submit a listing for all installed central plumbing
system equipment. Nameplates shall include the following information:
a. Unit #
b. Date unit put in service
c. Contractor
d. Manufacturer
e. Model #
f. Serial #

SECTION 22 05 10 – PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
plumbing piping and pipe fittings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Pipe shall conform to the materials specified herein, and shall be installed for piping systems as scheduled
in Part 3 – Execution, of this Section.
2.2 TYPE L COPPER PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 1
A. Design Pressure: 150 psig.
B. Maximum Design Temperature: 200 degrees F.
C. Sizes 2 inches and smaller:

1. Tubing: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B88.
2. Joints: Solder type with 95-5 solder, or press coupled.
3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze solder joint, ANSI B16.18, or with
EPDM O-rings, ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22.
D. Sizes 2 1/2 inches and larger:

2. Joints: Flanged and solder type with 95-5 solder, or press coupled.
3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze solder joint, ANSI B16.18, or
wrought copper press coupled joint. ANSI B16.22.
4. Flanges: 150 lb. class cast bronze, ANSI B16.24.
2.3 TYPE K COPPER UNDERGROUND PRESSURE PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 2

1. Tubing: Type K hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B88.
2. Joints: Solder type with 95-5 solder.
3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze solder joint, ANSI B16.18.
D. Sizes 2 1/2 inches and 3 inches:

1. Tubing: Type K hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B88.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE 22 05 10 - 1 of 7

FITTINGS
2. Joints: Flanged and solder type with 95-5 solder.

3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze solder joint, ANSI B16.18.
4. Flanges: 150 lb. class cast bronze, ANSI B16.24.
E. Pipes penetrating building floors on grade or building walls or pit walls below grade shall be ductile iron.
Refer to Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe Specification No. 6.
2.4 SERVICE WEIGHT CAST IRON PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 3
A. Approvals: Cast iron soil pipe and pipe fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast
Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and shall be listed by NSF International.
B. Design Pressure: Gravity.
C. Maximum Design Temperature: 180 degrees F.
D. All Pipe Sizes:

1. Pipe & Fittings
a. Below Grade: Service weight cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and outside, ASTM A74.
b. Above Grade: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and outside, CISPI Standard
301, ASTM A888.
2. Joints
a. Below Grade: Hub and spigot, compression.
b. Above Grade: Hubless.
3. Adapters: Transitions from cast iron soil pipe to another pipe material shall be made with Fernco
Joint Sealer Company PVC Donut adapters, or approved equal. Hubless transitions shall be made
with an approved, shielded coupling for the purpose and material.
E. Vent Flashing: By General Contractor.
2.5 TYPE DWV COPPER PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 4
A. Design Pressure: Gravity.
C. Sizes 1-1/4 inches through 4 inches:

1. Pipe: Type DWV hard temper seamless copper drainage tube, ASTM B306.
2. Joints: Solder. ASTM B32, Grade 50B.
3. Fittings: Cast bronze solder joint drainage type, ANSI B16.23 or wrought copper solder joint
drainage type, ANSI B16.29.
D. Vent Flashing: By General Contractor.
2.6 SCHEDULE 40 GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 5
B. All Sizes:
1. Pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized steel, threaded and coupled, ASTM A53.
2. Joints: Threaded, ASTM B16.3.
3. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron screwed drainage type, ANSI B16.4.

FITTINGS
C. Vent Flashing: By General Contractor.
2.7 DUCTILE IRON PRESSURE PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 6
A. Sizes: 4 inches and larger.
B. Pipe: Ductile iron pressure water pipe, thickness Class 51 for 4 inch pipe size, thickness Class 50 for sizes
6 inches through 24 inches, 250 psi rated working pressure, in accordance with ANSI A21.50 and ANSI
A21.51, tar coated outside, and cement mortar lined inside in accordance with ANSI A21.4. Full lengths of
pipe shall be utilized to the greatest extent possible.
C. Joints: Mechanical or push on joints.
D. Fittings: Push on joint or mechanical joint type shall be cast iron or ductile iron, 250 psi pressure rating, in
accordance with ANSI B21.10, tar coated outside and cement mortar lined inside in accordance with ANSI
A21.4.
E. Flanged type shall be cast iron or ductile iron, short body, 250 psi pressure rating, in accordance with
ANSI A21.10 (drilled and faced in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125), tar coated outside, and
cement mortar lined inside in accordance with ANSI A21.4.
F. Pipe penetrating building floors on grade shall be ductile iron, thickness Class 51 for 4 inch pipe size,
thickness Class 50 for 6 inches through 24 inches, 250 psi rated working pressure, in accordance with
ANSI A21.50 and ANSI A21.51, tar coated outside, and cement mortar lined inside in accordance with
ANSI A21.4. Pipe shall be one piece beginning at engagement of plain end with 1/4 bend below the floor
and terminating six inches above floor level with a ductile iron flange.
G. Pipe penetrating building walls or pit walls below grade shall be ductile iron, thickness Class 51 for 4 inch
pipe size, thickness Class 50 for 6 inches through 24 inches, 250 psi working pressure, in accordance with
ANSI A21.50 and ANSI A21.51, tar coated outside, and cement mortar lined inside in accordance with
ANSI A21.4. Pipe shall terminate approximately 12 inches either side of wall with push on joint bell end or
mechanical joint bell end on outside and ductile iron flange on inside.
2.8 SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 8
C. Sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, threaded and coupled, ASTM A53.
2. Joints: Threaded. (Exception: All gas piping installed in steel conduits; all gas conduit and conduit
vent pipe; all black steel pipe installations below ground; shall be continuous butt weld joints.)
3. Fittings: 150 lb (S) 300 lb (WOG) black malleable iron.
4. Unions: 250 lb (S) 500 lb (WOG) black malleable iron, ground joint with brass seat.
D. Sizes 3 inches and larger:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, beveled ends, ASTM A53.
2. Joints: Butt welded and flanged.
3. Fittings: Schedule 40 seamless steel, butt weld type, ASTM A234.
4. Flanges: 150 lb forged steel, welding neck or slip on, ASTM A181 Class 60.
2.9 SCHEDULE 40 PVC PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 13

FITTINGS
B. Maximum Design Temperature: 140 degrees F. at continuous flow.
C. All Pipe Sizes:

1. Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), ASTM D2665 with NSF seal.
2. Fittings: Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride, DWV pattern, ASTM D2665 with NSF seal.
D. Sizes: 2 inches and smaller:

1. Joints: Socket or factory threaded solvent cement ASTM D2564.
E. Sizes: 2-1/2 inches or larger:

1. Joints: Socket or flanged solvent cement ASTM D2564.
F. Vent Flashing: By General Contractor.
2.10 PVC WATER PRESSURE PIPE SPECIFICATION NO. 18
A. Design Pressure: 160 psi maximum.
B. All Pipe Sizes:

1. Pipe & Fittings: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) water pressure pipe, ASTM D2241 and SDR 26.
2. Joints: Push on type with elastomeric joint ASTM D3139 with PVC compound ASTM D1784.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the following pipe schedule(s).
PIPE SCHEDULE*
Service Application Pipe Spec. No.

Dom. Cold Water Above Grade 1
Below Grade 2, 6
Dom. Hot Water Above Grade 1
Dom. Hot Water Above Grade 1
Recirculating
Dom. Water Pipe All 1
Connections
to Boilers/Water Heaters
Sanitary Above Grade 3, 4 or 13
Below Grade, within bldg. 3 or 13
Sanitary Vent Above Grade 3, 4, 5 or 13
Below Grade 3 or 13
Storm Drainage Above Grade 3 or 13
Below Grade, within bldg. 3 or 13
Pumped Storm Discharge Above Grade 18
Below Grade 18
Natural Gas Above Grade 8
Fire Lines Below Grade 6

FITTINGS
* Where plastic piping is used, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure compatibility of the
installed piping system with the building’s HVAC system. Where plenum rated materials are required by
any federal, state, or municipal authority’s construction codes, plastic piping shall be covered in its
entirety by an approved fire retardant insulating material. Fire retardant insulating systems shall be
certified to meet ASTM E-84 and UL 723 standards for flame spread and smoke generation. Fire
retardant insulating systems shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing his work and he shall not deviate
therefrom, except for structural or interior finish interferences, and then only upon Architect's approval.
B. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation. Any item
found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the jobsite. All pipe
and fittings shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates with sufficient data for
identification to determine their conformance with specified requirements.
C. Plastic piping shall be installed in strict accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations and in
accordance with the recommendations of the Plastic Pipe Institute. Protect plastic piping from damage by
adjacent sharp surfaces with rubber or plastic grommets or sleeves.
D. During construction all openings in piping shall be kept closed except when actual work is being performed
on that item. Closures shall be plugs, caps, blind flanges, or other items specifically intended for this
purpose. Exercise all necessary care to prevent foreign objects from entering material.
E. Run pipe lines straight and true, parallel to building lines with a minimum use of offsets and couplings. Use
full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible.
F. Changes in direction shall be made only with pipe bends or fittings. Changes in size shall be made with
fittings only. All fittings shall be of the long radius type, unless otherwise specified. Changes in direction on
drainage pipe systems shall be made with wye fittings, combination wye and eighth bends, or one eighth
bends. Offset in soil or waste pipes will not be permitted where avoidable. Offsets shall be made with 45
degree bends or similar fittings.
G. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment and valves to facilitate dismantling.
H. Unless otherwise indicated, install all piping to pumps and other equipment at line size with reduction in
size being made only at inlet to pump or equipment connection.
I. All pipe shall be cut to exact measurement, and installed without springing or forcing. Particular care shall
be taken to avoid creating, even temporarily, undue loads, forces or strains on valves, equipment or
building elements with piping connections or piping supports.
J. Install bell and spigot pipe, such that spigot ends point in direction of flow.
K. Unless otherwise indicated, branch take offs shall be from top of mains or headers at either a 45 degree or
90 degree angle from the horizontal plane for gas lines, and from top, bottom or side for liquids.
L. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating, dielectric connections. Copper tubing shall be
protected from electrolysis at contact points with ferrous metals, including temporary methods of support,
by use of insulating, non conductive spacers such as rubber, fiberglass or an approved equal. Pipe
hangers for bare copper tubing shall be copper plated.
3.3 PIPE JOINTS
A. Heavy-duty No-hub Coupling: Heavy duty coupling shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C1540 with
AISI 304 stainless steel bi-directional corrugated shield with AISI 304 stainless steel clamps and screw
housing. Gasket shall conform to ASTMC564.

FITTINGS
B. Compression Joints, Hub and Spigot Soil Pipe: Joint shall be one piece double seal compression type
gasket made specifically for joining cast iron soil pipe. The gasket shall be neoprene material, permitting
joint to flex as much as 5 degrees without loss of seal. Gasket shall be extra heavy conforming to ASTM
C564 and ASTM C1563. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
C. Mechanical Joints: Joints shall conform to ANSI A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings. Gasket material shall be neoprene. The standard bolts and nuts of the pipe manufacturer
shall be used and shall be coated at the factory with rust preventive lubricant after threading and tapping.
Final tightening of bolts shall be with a torque wrench to insure equal tension in all bolts.
D. Press Coupled Joints: Copper press fittings in copper domestic water pipe, types L and K, shall be a NSF-
61, ASME B16.22 and ASTM B88 approved external compression system. System shall be rated to hold
200 PSI working pressure with a temperature range from 0 degrees Fahrenheit to 250 degrees Fahrenheit.
System may be rated for installation on wet or dry piping for sizes 1/2 inch to 4 inch diameter. Fittings shall
be properly cleaned prior in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations prior to installation.
E. Push On Joints, Pressure Pipe: Joints shall be single gasket type conforming with ANSI A21.11 Rubber
Gasket Joints for Cast Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. The bell shall have cast or machined gasket socket
recesses, a tapered annular opening and flared socket design to provide deflections up to maximum of 5
degrees. Plain spigot ends shall be suitably beveled to permit easy entry into bell, centering in gasket and
compression of gasket. The joint shall be liquidtight under all pressure ranges from vacuum up to 350 psig.
Sufficient lubricant shall be furnished to provide a thin coat on each spigot end. The lubricant shall be non-
toxic, shall impart no taste or odor to conveyed liquid, and shall have no deleterious effect on the rubber
gasket. The lubricant shall be of such consistency, that it can be easily applied to the pipe in hot and cold
weather and shall adhere to either wet or dry pipe.
F. Solder Joints: Make up joints with 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony (95-5) solder conforming to
ASTM B32 Solder Metal, Grade 95TA. Cut copper tubing so ends are perfectly square and remove all
burrs inside and outside. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt,
and grease just prior to soldering. Apply flux evenly, but sparingly, over all surfaces to be joined. Heat
joints uniformly to proper soldering temperature so solder will flow to all mated surfaces. Wipe excess
solder, leaving a uniform fillet around cup of fitting. Flux shall be non acid type. Remove composition discs
from solder end valves during soldering.
G. Welded Joints: The welding of all pipe joints, both as to procedures and qualification of welders, shall be in
accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, unless mandatory local codes take
precedence. Ends of pipe and fittings to be joined by butt welding shall be beveled, cleaned to bare metal
and internal diameters aligned before tack welding.
H. Threaded Joints: Pipe screw threads shall conform to ANSI B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings or
ASTM B687, Brass, Copper, and Chromium Plated Pipe Nipples. Ream pipe ends and remove all burrs
and chips formed in cutting and threading. Protect plated pipe and brass valve bodies from wrench marks
when making up joint. Apply thread lubricant to male threads only.
I. Flanged Joints: Steel pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.5, Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
Cast iron pipe flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings. Steel flanges
shall be raised face except when bolted to flat cast iron flange. Bolting for services up to 500 degrees F.
shall be ASTM A307, Grade B with square head bolts and heavy hexagonal nuts conforming to ANSI
B18.2.1, Square and Hex Bolts and B18.2.2, Square and Hex Nuts. Set flange bolts beyond finger
tightness with an indicating torque wrench to insure equal tension in all bolts. Tighten bolts such that those
180 degrees apart or directly opposite are torqued in sequence. Gaskets for flat face flanges shall form to
requirements for Group I Gaskets in ANSI B16.5. Unless otherwise specified, gaskets shall be 3/32 inch
thick.
J. Solvent Cement Joints: Socket joints in PVC, ABS, etc., pipe shall be made by using a manufacturer's
recommended solvent cement suitable for respective pipe (CPVC, PVC, ABS, Schedule 40, Schedule 80)
and conforming to ASTM D2564. Follow manufacturer's instructions for handling and cementing
procedures. Wipe off excess cement fillet around socket. Do not move pipe while cement is setting.

FITTINGS
K. Factory Threaded Solvent Cement Joints: Factory threaded solvent cement joints for plastic pressure
piping systems shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The threads should
be lubricated with a non hardening pipe dope or wrapped with Teflon tape.

FITTINGS
SECTION 22 05 15 – PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials, and equipment required for the installation of
plumbing piping specialties.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Branch Connections
2. Pipe & Valve Identification
3. Expansion Compensators, Pipe Guides, Anchors
4. Dielectric Connections
5. Thermometers
6. Pressure Gages
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRANCH CONNECTIONS
A. Branch connections shall be made with standard tee of the type required for the service unless otherwise
specified or detailed.
B. At Contractor's option, branch connections from headers and mains may be cut into black steel pipe using
forged weld on fittings. Weld on fittings shall conform to chemical and physical requirements of ASTM A
234 and design and installation requirements of ANSI B31.1.
C. Weld on fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to, or greater than, the maximum working pressure of
the pipe system where they are installed.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Allied Piping Products Co. Branchlets (Shaped nipples), or Bonney
Forge Weldolet & Threadolet
D. At Contractor's option, branch connections from headers and mains may be cut into copper to be using
mechanically extracted collars. Collars shall be formed in a continuous operation consisting of drilling a
pilot hole and drawing out the tube surface to form a collar having a height of not less than three times the
thickness of the tube wall. Main pipe shall be vacuumed to clear all debris during collar forming procedure.
Branch pipe shall be notched to conform with the inner curve of the run tube and dimpled to insure
penetration of the branch pipe into the collar at sufficient depth for brazing. All joints shall be brazed.
Mechanical formed branch collars shall be UL listed.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: T Drill, Division of Serlachius.
2.2 ESCUTCHEON PLATES
A. Plates shall be installed on all pipes and conduit passing through floors, walls, partitions, etc., in exposed
areas.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 05 15 - 1 of 4

B. Plates installed on pipe passing through core drilled openings in solid concrete without sleeves shall be
solid ring, cast iron with one set screw for sizes up to 4 inches and two set screws for sizes up to 8 inches.
C. Plates installed on pipe and conduit passing through openings with sleeves shall be solid ring, cast iron.
2.3 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: W. H. Brady Company, or Seton Nameplate Corp., Brimar Industries.
B. Shutoff valves and control equipment shall be marked by means of a brass or plastic disc minimum of 1
inch in diameter fastened to valve wheel or stem by brass wire or chain. Each disc shall have a legibly
marked identification number. A typewritten chart listing all valve tags, location, and service shall be
included in the operating and maintenance manual. The valve chart numbering sequence shall be
approved by Owner.
C. All piping installed as Work of this Division shall be identified by legend and flow arrow. Identification
system shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Identification markers shall use ANSI standard background colors
and text size. Markers shall be attached to pipe by wrapping with color coded banding tape. Markers shall
be located as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow
pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and non-accessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manhole, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run.
2.4 EXPANSION COMPENSATORS, GUIDES, ANCHORS
A. Expansion Compensator Type EXC-2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexonics, or Keflex, Metraflex, Hyspan.
2. Compensators shall be suitable for absorbing expansion and contraction in copper pipe 3 inches
and smaller. Compensators shall be constructed with two ply phosphor bronze or stainless steel
bellows, brass shroud, and threaded end fittings.
3. Units shall have internal guides, internal anti torque device, positioning clip, 150 psi maximum
working pressure up to 1 inch pipe size, 125 psi over 1 inch pipe size, 400 degrees F maximum
operating temperature, and 2 inch stroke.
B. Provide dielectric flanges where compensators are used with copper pipe.
C. Pipe Guides
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexonics Pipe Alignment Guides, or Keflex, Metraflex, Hyspan.
2. Pipe guides shall be installed as scheduled on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Guides shall consist of steel segmented spider, sized to the OD of the pipe, and
free to move axially in a segmented steel cylinder. Guides shall be securely attached to the building
structure.
D. Pipe Anchors
1. Anchors shall be installed in accordance with pipe guide manufacturer's and expansion
compensator manufacturer's recommendations. Anchors shall securely attach the piping system to
the building structure.

2.5 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS
A. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating, dielectric connections. Dielectric connections
shall also be furnished for joining similar metals in order to isolate cathodically protected pipelines from
adjoining pipe sections. Such joints, including dielectric material, shall be rated to withstand the
temperature, pressure, and other characteristics of the service for which it is to be used, including testing
pressure.
B. Screwed joints shall be made with insulating transition fittngs.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Victaulic Dielectric Transition Fittings - Style 647, or equal.
C. Flanged joints shall be made up with insulating gaskets, bolt sleeves, and washers.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts.
2.6 THERMOMETERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trerice, or Weiss, Miljoco.
B. Thermometers shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings. Thermometers shall be 9 inch scale
with 9 3/4 inch cast aluminum case, acrylic window, liquid-filled, and separable socket. Socket shall be
installed in path of water flow. Indication of operating temperature shall read in middle third of scale.
Thermometers installed 7 feet or more above floor shall be adjustable type.
2.7 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trerice, or Weiss, Miljoco.
B. Pressure gages shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings. Gage shall have a 4 inch diameter dial
with indication of operating pressure read in middle third of scale. Gages shall have phosphor bronze tube,
bronze brushed movement, cast aluminum case with black finish, and an accuracy of 1 percent of scale
range. Pressure gage shall be provided with pigtail and stop, and shall be installed vertically.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing his work. He shall not deviate
B. All equipment and accessories shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation.
Any item found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the jobsite.
All equipment shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates with sufficient data for
C. Piping specialties shall be installed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. A
manufacturer's representative shall certify, in writing, any equipment installation requested by Architect.
D. During construction all openings in equipment shall be kept closed except when actual work is being
performed on that item. Closures shall be plugs, caps, blind flanges, or other items specifically intended for
this purpose. Exercise all necessary care to prevent foreign objects from entering material.
E. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment to facilitate dismantling.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, branch take offs shall be from top of mains or headers at either a 45 degree or
90 degree angle from the horizontal plane for gas lines and from top, bottom, or side for liquids.

G. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating dielectric connections. Copper tubing shall be
protected from electrolysis at contact points with ferrous metals, including temporary methods of support,
by use of insulating non conductive spacers such as rubber, fiberglass, or an approved equal. Pipe
hangers for bare copper tubing shall be copper plated.

SECTION 22 05 20 – PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for installation of the
domestic water systems and associated specialties.
B. Domestic water shall be distributed to all fixtures and equipment indicated on Drawings.
C. Domestic water supply shall be extended from existing system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Hydrants
2. Water Hammer Arresters
3. Point of Use Thermostatic Mixing Valves
4. Digitally Controlled Thermostatic Mixing Valves
5. Temperature-Pressure Relief Valves
6. Backflow Preventers
7. Vacuum Breakers
8. Calibrated Balancing Valves
B. Submit written verification of testing procedures specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HYDRANTS
A. Wall Hydrant WH-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J. R. Smith, or Zurn, Wade, Josam, Mifab.
2. Type: Non-freeze.
3. Materials
a. Body: Bronze.
b. Face: Polished bronze, nickel bronze, or brass.
c. Casing: Bronze or brass.
4. Key: T-handle.
5. Inlet: 3/4 inch IPS.
6. Vacuum Breaker: Integral feature.
2.2 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water Hammer Arrester for Standard Plumbing Fixtures

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J. R. Smith Hydrotrol, or Zurn, Wade, Watts, Josam, Mifab.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 05 20 - 1 of 5

2. Type: Bellows surrounded by hydraulic fluid and nitrogen or argon pressurized chamber or pre-
pressurized tank with butyl diaphragm that separates air and water or free turning brass piston with
0-ring seals that separates air and water.
3. Material: Stainless steel or steel tank with polypropylene liner surge chamber, or barrel fabricated
of type K hard drawn copper.
4. Location: Noted on Drawings.
2.3 POINT OF USE THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES (NON-RECIRCULATING SYSTEMS)
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Acorn Controls, Powers Hydroguard, or Symmons.
B. Features: Tamperproof temperature adjustment control, union inlets, combination strainer-check-stops,

built-in shutoff in the event of hot or cold water supply failure, or thermostatic element failure.
C. Components: Factory assembled.

1. Lead-free sold DZR brass body with corrosion resistant and lead-free internal components.
2. Integral cartridge style checks with screens.
3. Parafin thermostatic actuator.
D. IAPMO certified per ASSE 1017 and CSA B125.3.
2.4 DIGITALLY CONTROLLED ELECTRONIC THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES (RECIRCULATING

SYSTEMS)
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Acorn Controls BASyC, Powers Intelli-Station, Leonard Nucleua, Armstrong
BRAIN.
B. General: Electronically actuated, digitally controlled thermostatic mixing valve
C. Features:
1. Tamperproof temperature adjustment control panel capable of multiple programmable outlet
temperature settings and shall maintain setpoint within 2 degrees,
2. Union inlets, inlet return check valves, combination strainer-ball valve(s)
3. Built-in anti-scald safeties in the event of hot or cold-water supply failure, or electrical failure, cold
water shut-off, hot water shut-off.
4. Capable of controlling up to four thermostatic mixing valves in two separate temperature loops.
5. Sanitization includes a “safe start' feature with targeted time and temperature displayed from
initialization to completion
D. Mixing Valve:
1. Lead free sold DZR brass body with corrosion resistant and lead-free internal components.
2. Components:
a. Integral cartridge style checks with screens.
b. Lockable full port brass ball valves for inlet connections.
c. Parafin thermostatic actuator
d. Outlet temperature gage.
E. Actuator:
1. Brushless DC motor capable of exerting a minimum of 300 pounds of force, manual override
2. Field replaceable without system shut-down or draining.
F. Miscellaneous Components

1. Temperature sensors for hot and cold water inlet, tempered water outlet, and remote tempered
system temperature per specified zone.
2. Pressure sensors.
3. Flow meter with digital output.
G. Controls:
1. Honeywell/Niagra AX hardware and software.
2. Alarms and alerts with e-mail notification, capable for link with relay outputs.
3. 18 (10 relay and 8 analog) programmable outputs.
4. LED digital readout.
5. 110 volt electrical connection with 12 volt transformer.
6. Sensors shall include hot water temperature, cold water temperature, tempered water sensor. 0-10
volt, 0-20 milliamp terminal strip with 2 way communication.
7. 16 universal inputs.
8. Expandable: inputs and outputs not used for factory controller standard features or options are
available for user-defined applications.
9. Remote temperature sensors for installation at farthest system fixtures for real time feedback to
controller.
10. Programmable sanitation modes for reduction of Legionella and other water-borne pathogens.
11. Primary ethernet adapter for access to control system via the facility local area network.
12. Secondary ethernet adapter for direct factory support and troubleshooting.
13. Password protection.
14. User-defined data poins and customizable reports of trend data.
15. Configurable to communicate data via BACNet, Modbus, Lonworks, OBix, TCP/IP, RS-485, or RS-
232.
H. Certifications and Agency Listings:

1. Certified by IAPMO to ASSE 1017 requirements.
2. UL, UPC, CSA, CE, FCC
I. Warranty: One year
2.5 TEMPERATURE-PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts.
B. Construction: Bronze body. ASME rated, AGA certified. Non-mechanical seat-to-disc alignment.
2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer

1. Sizes 1/2 inch through 2 inches
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts, Zurn, or Ames.
b. Components: Two independently acting spring loaded toggle lever check valves with
automatically operating pressure differential relief valve, two shutoff valves, and four test
cocks, arranged so each check valve can be tested. Furnish and install with OS&Y shutoff
valves in lieu of standard shutoffs where tamper switches are shown to be installed for
partial sprinkler systems.
c. All materials shall be corrosion resistant. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be protected against
corrosion by epoxy coating.

d. Accessories: Air gap fitting.

e. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi.
2.7 VACUUM BREAKER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watts.
B. Type: Antisiphon with bronze body and internal trim, plane brass finish, with full size orifice.
C. Working Pressure: 125 psi.
2.8 CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVES
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett Model CB, or Taco.
B. Construction: Bronze body with threaded ends, brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled TFE
seat rings.
C. Standard Features: Differential pressure readout ports across valve seat area. Readout ports to be fitted
with internal EPT inserts and check valves. Valve body provided with 1/4 inch NPT tapped drain purge
port. Valve furnished with calibrated nameplate indicating specific valve setting. Valve shall be rated for
300 psig at 250 degrees F. Provide portable master meter kit for use during start up, testing and balancing.
Meter kit shall be delivered to Owner at completion of Work.
D. Line size(s) indicated on drawings does not necessarily indicate required size for calibrated balancing
valves. Contractor shall be responsible to select appropriate valve size according to flow characteristics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing specialties in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. Submit

manufacturer’s printed installation instructions, operating and maintenance data, and wiring diagrams for
all electric powered equipment at completion of Work.
B. Connections to fixtures and equipment shall be according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Piping runs
shall be made in a manner to insure easy and even flow, eliminate air pockets, and to permit drainage and
venting. Provide 6 inch (minimum) separation between hot and cold water piping.
C. Mains and principle branches shall be valved for isolation and shall have drain valves installed at low
points for system draining.
D. Furnish and install proper plastic-to-copper adapters for all plumbing fixture supplies.
E. Domestic hot and cold water piping systems shall be disinfected prior to use. Method to be used shall be
that method prescribed by local codes, or, if method is not prescribed by local code, the International
Plumbing Code (latest edition) method should be followed. For plastic water piping systems verify with
plastic pipe manufacturer that disinfection solution to be used will not harm piping system.
F. Thermostatic mixing valves shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s piping installation
diagram(s) and referenced details.
3.2 TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Water Lines: Test water lines in accordance with local codes. If method is not prescribed by local codes,
the International Plumbing Code (latest edition) method shall be followed.

B. Valves: Test valve bonnets for tightness. Test-operate valves at least one time from closed-to-open-to-
closed positions while valve is under pressure. Test automatic valves for proper operation at settings
indicated. Test pressure relief valves minimum of three times.
C. Other Tests: Test all piping specialties for proper operation.
D. Balancing of Domestic Hot Water Circulation System.

1. Balance flow for each calibrated balancing valve indicated on drawings.
2. Submit a tabulated report including each calibrated balancing valve and corresponding valve size,
valve dial setting, corresponding pressure drop, and flow rate.
3. Report shall include the associated nomenclature room name or other identifying nomenclature so
that each calibrated balancing valve can be identified.
4. Example balancing report:
Valve Installed Valve Dial Flow Rate

(Location/Description) Size Setting ΔP Design Actual

SECTION 22 05 25 – PLUMBING VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
plumbing valves.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Valves
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES
A. Furnish and install valves as specified herein and as scheduled in Part 3 - Execution, of this Section.
Insofar as possible all valves shall be of a single manufacturer.
B. Packings, gaskets, discs, seats, diaphragms, lubricants, etc., shall conform to recommendations of the
valve manufacturer for the intended service.
C. If space permits, install valves with stems horizontal or extending vertically upward unless specifically
shown otherwise. Valves shall be installed in accessible locations for operation as well as for removal,
repair, or replacement.
D. Valves installed in Insulated Piping: With stem or neck extensions of sufficient length to accommodate
insulation thickness and the following features:
1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective
sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.
E. Provide Owner with one operating wrench for every ten (10) valves of each type (but not less than 2
wrenches) not equipped with handwheels or levers.
F. Valves shall conform to the following schedules:
BALL VALVE SPECIFICATIONS
Type Size Press. Description Acceptable Manufacturer

psig
BA-2 thru 2" 150S NSF/AWWA approved for potable Apollo

400WOG water; Milwaukee
Threaded ends; Nibco
Bronze, two piece body;
Manually operated;
Chrome plated bronze ball;
Teflon seats
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING VALVES 22 05 25 - 1 of 3

BALL VALVE SPECIFICATIONS
Type Size Press. Description Acceptable Manufacturer

psig
BA-5 2" thru 8” 200WC NSF approved for potable water; American Valve
200 Flanged ends;
degrees F. Epoxy coated A126 Class B iron
body;
Teflon-fused solid ball;
Full port;
100 percent lead free
BA-7 1/2" & 3/4" 5 psig Threaded ends; Apollo CB-10
Bronze body; Nibco GB
Two piece body, full port
chrome plated brass ball
BA-8 1" thru 2" 5 psig Threaded ends; Nibco T-FP600
Bronze body; Jomar JMT-100
Full port chrome plated brass ball
CHECK VALVE SPECIFICATIONS
Type Size Press. Description Acceptable

psig Manufacturer
CK-1 thru 2" 150S Threaded ends; Crane

Bronze body; Nibco
Regrinding swing type Hammond
Anvil International
Milwaukee
CK-2 thru 2" 125S Soldered ends; Crane
200WOG Bronze body; Nibco
Renewable bronze Hammond
disc swing type Anvil International
Milwaukee
CK-3 2-1/2" 125S Flanged ends; Crane
thru 200WOG Iron body; Nibco
12" Bronze trim; Hammond
Bronze disc swing type Anvil International
Milwaukee
PLUG VALVE SPECIFICATIONS
Type Size Press. Description Acceptable

psig Manufacturer
PL-1 thru 2" 200WOG Threaded ends; Walworth

Cast iron body;
Lubricated plug;
Wrench operated
PL-2 2-1/2" 200WOG Flanged ends; Walworth
thru 10" Cast iron body;
Lubricated plug;
4" & under: wrench
operated;
over 4": worm gear
operated

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the following valve schedule:
VALVE SCHEDULE
Valve Service
Piping System Shut-off Balancing Check
Domestic Water, Copper: BA-2 BA-5 n/a CK-2, CK-3

Cold, Hot, Hot Recirc.,
Make-up
Pumped Storm BA-1 n/a CK-1
Natural Gas BA-7, BA-8, PL-1, PL-2 n/a n/a
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. All valves shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation. Any item found
unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the job site. All valves shall
have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates with sufficient data for identification to determine
their conformance with specified requirements.
C. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to valves to facilitate dismantling.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, install all shutoff valves to pumps and other equipment at line size with
reduction in size being made only at inlet to pump or other equipment.

SECTION 22 05 30 – PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
plumbing supporting devices.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Roof Piping Supports
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HANGERS – INSULATED PIPING
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: National Pipe Hanger Corporation, Carpenter & Paterson, Inc., Anvil, or equal.
B. Hangers used with insulated piping shall be sized to accommodate the pipe, and insulation and shall have
a support shield to prevent the hanger from compressing the insulation. Hanger shall be clevis type with
rod and two nuts or bolt and nut.
2.2 HANGERS – UNINSULATED PIPING
B. Hangers for uninsulated ferrous pipe shall be clevis type with rod and two nuts or bolt and nut. Hangers for
uninsulated copper pipe shall be clevis type with bolt and nut and shall be copper plated.
2.3 INSERTS – POURED CONCRETE
B. Inserts shall have cast malleable iron body and nut with galvanized finish.
2.4 INSERTS – PRECAST OR CURED CONCRETE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hilti HSL.
B. A high integrity, torque controlled anchor for heavy duty fastenings. Loads shall not exceed manufacturer's
recommended weight.
2.5 BEAM CLAMPS
A. For pipe sizes of 3 inches and smaller:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: National Pipe Hanger Corporation, Carpenter & Paterson, Inc., Anvil, or
equal.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND 22 05 30 - 1 of 3

ANCHORS
2. Clamps for attachment to I beams and/or steel joists shall be malleable iron C clamp with hardened
steel cup and point set screw and locknut.
B. For pipe sizes of 4 inches and larger:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anvil International.
2. Clamps for attachment to I beams and/or steel joists shall be adjustable type with malleable iron
jaw, steel tie rod, nuts, and washer.
2.6 PIPE RISER CLAMPS
B. Pipe riser clamps for both insulated and uninsulated vertical pipe risers shall be 2 piece clamp complete
with 2 bolts and 2 nuts, sized for the outside diameter of the bare pipe to be supported. Clamp shall be
carbon steel construction with galvanized finish for ferrous pipe and copper plated for copper pipe.
2.7 ROOF PIPING SUPPORTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Miro Industries Model Nos. 3-R and 4-R, or MAPA Products.
B. Pipestand: A roller bearing pipe support which consists of the following three components:
1. A one-piece square roof deck base.
2. Pipe support and roller housing support composed of rigid polycarbonate resin.
3. Roller made of polycarbonate resin which rests on a nylon rod of 9/16 inch diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The requirements of the applicable Sections of ANSI B31, Pressure Piping shall be considered as
minimum requirements governing fabrication, installation, and support of piping systems except where
more specific or stringent requirements are stated herein or shown on the Drawings.
B. All piping and piping connected equipment, including valves, traps and other specialties and accessories
shall be supported in a manner that will not result in excessive stress, deflection, swaying, sagging or
vibration in the piping or in the building structure either during erection, cleaning, testing, or normal
operation of the systems. Piping shall not be so restrained, however, as to cause it to snake or buckle
between supports or anchors, or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction. Piping
shall be supported at equipment and valves such that they can be disconnected and removed without
further supporting the piping. Piping shall not introduce any strains or distortion to the connected
equipment.
C. Hangers, riser clamps, and supports shall be installed complete, including locknuts, clamps, rods, bolts,
couplings, swivels, inserts, and required accessory items. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have
adequate means of vertical adjustment for proper alignment of pipe, and shall be provided with locknuts.
All hangers, riser clamps, and supports in direct contact with copper piping shall be copper plated or
plastic coated.
D. Maximum spacing of supports for horizontal piping, except plastic piping, shall be as listed below. Provide
hanger rods in diameters recommended by hanger manufacturer.
Pipe Uninsulated Insulated Copper Cast

Size Steel Steel Tubing Iron
1/2" 7' 7' 5' -

ANCHORS
Pipe Uninsulated Insulated Copper Cast

Size Steel Steel Tubing Iron
3/4" 7' 7' 5' -
1" 7' 7' 5' -
1-1/4" 7' 7' 6' -
1-1/2" 9' 9' 8' -
2" 10' 10' 8' 5'
2-1/2" 11' 10' 9' 5'
3" 12' 10' 10' 5'
4" 12' 10' 10' 5'
5" 12' 10' 10' 5'
6" 12' 10' 10' 5'
8" 12' 10' 10' 5'
E. Maximum spacing of supports for horizontal plastic sanitary drainage and vent piping shall be as listed
below. Provide hanger rods in diameters recommended by hanger manufacturer.
Pipe Sanitary Sanitary
Size Drainage Vent
1-1/2" 3' 4'
2" 3' 4'
3" 3-1/2' 4'
4" 4' 4'
6" 4' 4'
8" 4' 4'
10" 4' 4'
F. Maximum spacing of supports for horizontal plastic rainwater conductors shall be as listed below. Provide
hanger rods in diameters recommended by hanger manufacturer.
Pipe Storm
Size Drainage
2" 4'
4" 4'
6" 4'
8" 4'
10" 4'
G. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged valves at equipment
connections and heavy fittings. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each joint in cast iron soil pipe and
grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, support
vertical pipe with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings or lugs welded to the pipe.
H. Inserts for supports in precast concrete slabs shall be drilled with rotary electric drill.
I. Lag screws shall be used to attach hangers to wood construction.
J. Beam clamps shall be used to attach hanger rods to structural steel.

ANCHORS
SECTION 22 07 10 – PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for insulating
plumbing piping and equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Insulation Materials, including application thicknesses
2. Sealants, Adhesives, Coatings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 1
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Micro Lok, or Owens Corning Fiberglas SSL II/ASJ.
B. Material: Fiberglass pipe insulation with all purpose vapor barrier jacket for indoor installations.
C. Properties
1. Maximum K Factor: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. mean.
2. Temperature Range: 0 degrees F. to 850 degrees F.
3. Fire Hazard: FHC 25/50 per ASTM E 84 and UL 723.
4. For use on pipe sizes 1/2 inch to 12 inches
D. Seams and Joints: Self sealing (pressure sensitive) lap seams and matching butt strips.
E. Fittings
1. Fiberglass batt inserts with premolded PVC jacket:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC, or Foster Speed Line, Proto.
b. Properties: 0.28 max. K at 75 degrees F. mean, 0 degrees F. to 450 degrees F. temperature
range, FHC 25/50 fire hazard per ASTM E 84.
2. Fitting insulation shall be same thickness as adjacent insulation.
2.2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC PIPE INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 2
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armacell AP Armaflex w/520 BLV Adhesive, or K-Flex.
B. Material: Flexible elastomeric thermal pipe insulation, black in color.
C. Properties
1. Maximum K Factor: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Compliance: ASTM E84, 25 flame/50 smoke.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 70 degrees F. to 220 degrees F.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 10 - 1 of 3

4. For use on pipe sizes: 3/8 inch to 6 inch.
D. Fittings, Joints: Mitered cut, same thickness as adjacent insulation.
E. Adhesive
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armacell 520 BLV, K-Flex 720, Foster Drion 85-75, or Childers Chil Stix
C-82.
2. Toluene free, VOC no greater than 50 g/L.
2.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC SHEET/ROLL INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 4
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armacell AP Armaflex w/520 Adhesive, or K-Flex.
B. Material: Exterior flexible elastomeric thermal sheet or roll insulation.
C. Properties
3. Temperature Rating: Minus 70 degrees F. to 220 degrees F.
D. Adhesive
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armstrong 520 BLV, K-Flex 720, Foster Drion 85-75, or Childers Chil
Stix C-82.
2. Toluene free, VOC no greater than 50 g/L
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the following insulation schedule(s). (Where more than one
insulation type is scheduled, Contractor shall have the option of choosing from types listed.)
PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE
Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness
Temp. Insul. 4”
Range Spec. 1” to < 1- 1-1/2” to < 8” 5” &
Service Deg. F No. < 1” dia. 1/2” dia. to < 4” dia. dia. Larger dia.
Dom Cold 1 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
40-60
Water 2 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
Dom. Hot 1 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
105-140
Water 2 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
Dom. Hot 1 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
Water 105-140 2 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
Recirculating
Horiz. 1 N/A N/A N/A 0.5 0.5
Rain Water --- 2 N/A N/A N/A 0.5 0.5
Conductors

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Surface areas of all pipe to be insulated shall be clean and dry. Insulation shall not be installed until
all tests and inspections of the specific system(s) are complete.
2. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling/floor penetrations except where
specific sealing requirements are specified, i.e. fire rated separations.
3. Insulate all components in piping systems, including valve bodies, hangers, guides, anchors, and
pump housings. Do not insulate expansion compensators in hot water systems. Maintain access to
all servicing points and nameplate data.
4. Insulation on all cold surfaces shall provide a continuous unbroken vapor seal.
5. Provide shields at all pipe hangers where protection saddles are not installed on pipes. Shields
shall be galvanized sheet metal, formed to fit insulated pipe outside diameter, and shall extend up
to the pipe centerline. Shield lengths shall be as follows:
Pipe Sizes, Inches Shield Length, Inches
1-1/2 to 2-1/2 10
3 to 6 12
8 to 10 16
12 and over 22
6. Insulation installed on plastic piping shall be installed with provisions for pipe expansion, without
effect on insulation.
7. Adhesives, mastics, sealers, and coatings shall be applied at manufacturer's required ambient
conditions and recommended minimum coverage.
B. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation

1. All piping shall be cleaned of debris prior to installation of insulation and components. Joints shall
be butted firmly together. Longitudinal laps and butt strips shall be securely fastened as
recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Fittings, insulated with fiberglass blanket and PVC jacket shall be installed in accordance with
insulation manufacturer's instructions. All butt joints between longitudinal pipe insulation and fittings
shall be taped.
3. All elbows, fittings, and valves on below-ambient piping shall be vapor-sealed with vapor barrier
coating and reinforcing mesh.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Pipe and Sheet Insulation

1. Insulation shall be installed neatly with oversized pipe insulation and sheet insulation being used for
fittings and valves. For outdoor installations, completely wrap insulation surface with glass fiber
mesh and fully adhere/lag glass mesh to insulation with one coat of insulation adhesive. Inspect for
bonding of glass mesh to insulation surfaces before applying specified weatherproof finish. Consult
insulation manufacturer's recommendations for coatings and sealants.

SECTION 22 11 10 – PLUMBING PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
plumbing pumps.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors.
B. Section 23 90 10, Building Automation System: Controls.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Pumps
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INLINE CIRCULATOR PUMP
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett, or Taco, Armstrong.
B. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed
for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.
C. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections, rated for a minimum of 150 psi working
pressure, equipped with gage parts and suitable for operation at 225 degrees F.
D. Impeller: Plastic.
E. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Section 22 05 05.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Inline pumps shall be installed with valves, and gages as detailed on the Drawings. Provide flanges or
unions at all pump connections to facilitate dismantling.
B. Diagrammatic representation of inline pumps on the Drawings is only for clarification of pump location.
Actual positioning of pump in the piping system, orientation of pump and motor, and location of supports
for pumps shall be in accordance with pump manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Contractor shall carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing his work and he shall not deviate
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING PUMPS 22 11 10 - 1 of 2

D. All pumps and accessories shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation. Any
item found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the jobsite. All
pumps shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates with sufficient data for identification
to determine their conformance with specified requirements.
E. During construction all openings in pumps shall be kept closed except when actual work is being
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING PUMPS 22 11 10 - 2 of 2

SECTION 22 13 10 – SANITARY DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
sanitary drainage system.
B. Sanitary drainage shall be collected as indicated and connected to site sanitary lateral(s) at 5'-0" outside
building. Contractor shall make application for same and pay all costs required by the local authority.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Cleanouts
2. Floor Drains
3. Drain Traps
4. Trap Guard Device
5. Funnels
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Wall Cleanouts
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Fig. 4422, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam, Mifab.
2. Size: Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe to 4 inch and not less than 4 inch for larger pipe sizes.
3. Plug: Bronze with tapered threads or with lead seal.
4. Cover: Stainless steel shallow cover secured to plug with vandalproof screws.
B. Exterior Cleanouts
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Fig. 4251 U, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam, Mifab.
2. Size: Cleanouts shall consist of wye fitting, full size of pipe to 4 inch and not less than 4 inch for
larger pipe sizes.
3. Plug: Bronze, countersunk, rectangular slotted, with emulsified lead paste.
4. Cover: Cast iron, non-skid, vandalproof, gasketed, watertight secured independently of plug.
5. Anchoring: 6 inch of concrete shall be poured around wye fitting, cleanout pipe and cleanout cover
frame. Concrete shall terminate 6 inch below grade.
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drain FD-1

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS SANITARY DRAINAGE 22 13 10 - 1 of 3

2. Body: Cast iron.

3. Outlet: Bottom.
4. Flashing Ring: Provided with weepholes.
5. Strainer: Adjustable, square with vandalproof screws. Nickel bronze or nickel brass.
6. Furnish with trap guard device.
B. Floor Drain FD-2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Fig. 3450 12, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam, Mifab.
2. Body: Cast iron with acid resisting porcelain enameled interior.
3. Grate: Cast iron with acid resisting porcelain enameled finish, nickel bronze or nickel brass. Half
grate.
4. Dome Strainer: Cast iron with acid resisting porcelain enameled finish, polished brass, nickel brass,
nickel bronze, bronze or aluminum.
5. Outlet: Bottom.
6. Flashing Ring: Provided with weepholes.
2.3 DRAIN TRAPS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Fig. 7222, or Zurn, Watts, Josam, Mifab.
B. Where drains are specified without integral trap, furnish and install deep seal P trap of cast iron
construction with hub inlet, spigot outlet.
2.4 TRAP GUARD DEVICE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Proset Trap Guard, or J.R. Smith Quad Close, Sure Seal Trap Sealer
B. Type: Barrier type trap seal protection device, inline floor drain trap sealer, elastomeric, neoprene rubber.
Prevents the evaporation of the trap seal and the emission of sewer gases.
C. Approvals: ASSE 1072-2007.
2.5 FUNNELS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith Fig. 3812, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam.
B. Body: Cast iron.
C. Outlet: No hub or caulked.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Drainage lines shall be properly vented, graded and trapped to conform to local and state requirements.
B. Each fixture shall be vented and trapped. Each vent shall be extended through roof, or shall be loop
vented into a common main, acceptable by code. Where a vertical vent riser connects to another vent
riser, an inverted wye fitting shall be provided.

C. Cleanouts shall be provided in soil and waste piping where shown, at the ends of all mains, at intersection
of branches with mains, at base of vertical stacks, at intermediate points of long runs not exceeding 40
feet, and at additional locations required by local ordinances.
D. Unless indicated otherwise, horizontal sanitary and waste lines 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be graded
1/4 inch per foot inside building. Horizontal sanitary and waste line 3 inches and larger shall be graded 1/8
inch per foot and in accordance with inverts indicated outside building.
E. Floor drains and piping floor penetrations shall be sealed to prevent leakage to floor below.
F. No-hub fittings shall have a pipe stop on the interior of the fitting as well as a stainless steel shield that
surrounds the coupling material. Dual pipe clamps shall be installed around the shield.
G. No-hub cast iron fittings shall be supported by clevis hangers. Wire, string, or strapping supports will not
be permitted.
H. Vertical sanitary and vent piping shall be supported at each floor with riser clamps. Pipe joints shall not
occur at floor line.
3.2 PURGING AND TESTING
A. Sanitary Piping, Gravity Either of the following testing methods may be used.
1. Water Test: The water test shall be applied to the drainage system either in its entirety or in
sections after rough piping has been installed. If testing entire system, all openings in the piping
shall be closed tightly, except for the highest opening in the system. The system shall be filled with
water to point of overflow. If system is tested in sections, each opening shall be plugged tightly
except for the highest opening in the section under test. Each section shall then be filled with water.
A section shall not be tested with less than a 10 foot head of water. In testing successive sections,
at least the upper 10 feet of the next preceding section shall be tested so that a joint or pipe in the
building (except the uppermost 10 feet of the system) shall not have been submitted to a test of
less than a 10 foot head of water. Test water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under
test for 1 hour before start of inspection. The system shall remain tight at all points throughout
inspection. If any leaks occur, those areas shall be corrected and re tested.
2. Drainage and Vent Air Test: An air test shall be made by forcing air into the system until there is a
uniform gauge pressure of 5 pounds per square inch (psi) (34.5 kPa) or sufficient to balance a 10
inch (254 mm) column of mercury. This pressure shall be held for a test period of at least 15
minutes. Any adjustments to the test pressure required because of changes in ambient
temperature of the seating of gaskets shall be made prior to the beginning of the test period. If any
leaks occur those areas shall be corrected and retested.

SECTION 22 14 10 – STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
storm water drainage system.
B. Storm water drainage systems shall be connected to site sanitary laterals at 5’-0” outside building.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Cleanouts
2. Roof Drains
3. Overflow Drains
4. Area Drains
5. Downspout Nozzles
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Wall Cleanouts
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam, Mifab.
2. Size: Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe to 4 inches pipe size and not less than 4 inches for larger
pipe sizes.
3. Plug: Bronze, countersunk, rectangular slotted, with emulsified lead paste.
4. Cover: Chrome plated bronze face of wall cover secured to plug with vandalproof screws.
B. Exterior Cleanouts
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam, Jones Manufacturing, Mifab.
2. Size: Cleanouts shall consist of wye fitting full size of pipe to 4 inches pipe size and not less than 4
inches for larger pipe sizes.
3. Plug: Bronze, countersunk, rectangular slotted with emulsified lead paste.
4. Cover: Cast iron, non-skid, vandalproof, gasketed, watertight secured independently of plug.
5. Anchoring: 6 inches of concrete shall be poured around wye fitting, cleanout pipe, and cleanout
cover frame. Concrete shall terminate 6 inches below grade.
C. Floor Cleanouts, For Finished Floors

2. Size: Cleanouts shall consist of wye fitting, full size of pipe to 4 inch and not less than 4 inch for
larger pipe sizes.
3. Plug: Bronze, countersunk, rectangular slotted, with emulsified lead paste and spigot outlet.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS STORM DRAINAGE 22 14 10 - 1 of 3

4. Cover: Scoriated nickel bronze top.
2.2 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof Drain RD-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam, Mifab.
2. Type: For installation in insulated precast concrete or insulated metal roof decks where insulation is
sloped to roof deck providing a sump for roof drain.
3. Materials
a. Body: Cast iron.
b. Dome: Cast iron, rough bronze, aluminum or brass.
4. Body: Provide flashing collar and gravel stop, sump receiver and under deck clamp.
5. Dome: Lock type.
6. Outlet: Bottom, inside calk.
2.3 OVERFLOW DRAINS
A. Overflow Drain
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Zurn, Watts, Wade, Josam.
2. Type: For installation in insulated precast concrete or insulated metal roof decks.
3. Materials
a. Body: Cast iron.
b. Dome: Cast iron, rough bronze, aluminum or brass.
4. Body: Provide flashing collar and gravel stop, extension flange, sump receiver, and under-deck
clamp.
5. Dome: Lock type.
6. Outlet: Bottom inside calk.
7. Standpipe: Cut PVC standpipe to achieve ponding depth at base of drain specified by Architect.
2.4 DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES
A. Downspout Nozzle OFDN-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 1770 or Zurn, Wade, Josam.
2. Material: Cast bronze body and flange.
3. Screen: Stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Horizontal rain water conductors and storm sewers within the building shall be graded 1/8 inch per foot or
in accordance with inverts indicated on Drawings. Horizontal storm lines outside building shall be graded in
accordance with inverts indicated on Drawings.
B. Cleanouts shall be provided in storm piping where indicated on Drawings, at ends of all mains, at
intersection of branches with mains, at base of vertical stacks, at intermediate points of long runs not
exceeding 40 feet, and at other points required by local ordinances.

A. Storm Piping, Gravity (Either of the following testing methods may be used.)
1. Water Test: The water test shall be applied to the drainage system either in its entirety or in
sections after rough piping has been installed. If testing entire system, all openings in the piping
shall be closed tightly, except for the highest opening in the system. The system shall be filled with
water to point of overflow. If system is tested in sections, each opening shall be plugged tightly,
except for the highest opening of the section under test. Each section shall then be filled with water.
A section shall not be tested with less than a 10 foot head of water. In testing successive sections,
at least the upper 10 feet of the next preceding section shall be tested so that a joint or pipe in the
building (except the uppermost 10 feet of the system) shall not have been submitted to a test of
less than a 10 foot head of water. Test water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under
test, for 1 hour before start of inspection. The system shall remain tight at all points throughout
inspection. If any leaks occur, those areas shall be corrected and re tested.
2. Drainage and vent air test. An air test shall be made by forcing air into the system until there is a
uniform gauge pressure of 5 pounds per square inch (psi) (34.5 kPa) or sufficient to balance a 10
inch (254 mm) column of mercury. This pressure shall be held for a test period of at least 15
minutes. Any adjustments to the test pressure required because of changes in ambient
temperature of the seating of gaskets shall be made prior to the beginning of the test period. If any
leaks occur those areas shall be corrected and retested.
B. Storm Piping, Pumped

1. After installation of piping, lines shall be blown clear by means of air. Piping shall be tested with air
to 125 psi. Test shall be held for 2 hours with a maximum pressure drop of 1 psi.

SECTION 22 14 20 – SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for installation of
sump pumps.
A. Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Sump Pumps
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUMP PUMP, OIL-SENSING
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Weil, or Hydromatic, Liberty Pumps, Stancor, Zoeller.
B. Type: Submersible, single pump unit, for elevator pits.
C. Pump and Motor

1. Motor shall be hermetically sealed, capacitor start with built-in overload protection, and Class B
insulation.
2. Bearings shall be factory sealed, grease lubricated, ball bearing type.
D. Discharge Pipe Size: 2 inches.
E. Controls: Float operated level switch and oil sensing system. Oil sensing system shall consist of a wall
mounted control panel with power cord and a self-cleaning, hermetically sealed, stainless steel oil-sensing
probe mounted on pump. The probe shall be positioned at a point above the pump inlet so that the
presence of oil can be detected and a signal can be sent to a relay which will shut the pump off before
pollutants are ejected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install sump pumps and complete piping connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
recommendations. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance
data at completion of Work.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS SUMP PUMPS 22 14 20 - 1 of 1

SECTION 22 33 10 – WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
domestic water heating equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Water Heaters
2. Expansion Tanks
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: A. O. Smith DEL, or Rheem EGSP, Lochinvar LD.
B. Heater Style: Standard vertical, UL listed.
C. Materials:
1. Tank: Welded steel.
2. Tank Lining: Porcelain enamel (glass lined).
3. Outer Shell: Steel with baked enamel finish.
4. Insulation: Blanket type glass fiber, or polyethylene foam.
5. Cathodic Protection Anode: High density magnesium.
6. Water Connections: Brass or bronze.
D. Working Pressure: 150 psi.
E. Heating Element and Operation: Immersion type, single element, medium watt density.
F. Thermostat: Automatic snap action surface type with high limit energy cutoff.
G. Temperature Pressure Relief Valve: 3/4 inch (minimum) ASME.
H. Manufacturer's Guarantee: 3 years.
I. Compliance: ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
2.2 DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE HEATER, GAS COMMERCIAL, HIGH EFFICIENCY
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: A. O. Smith Cyclone Mxi, or Bradford White eF Series, PVI Conquest.
B. Heater Style: Standard vertical, AGA approved, condensing, ASME labeled and National Board number.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WATER HEATERS 22 33 10 - 1 of 2

C. Materials
1. Tank: Welded steel, or engineered duplex alloy
2. Tank Lining: Porcelain enamel (glass lined).
3. Tank Jacket: Steel with baked enamel finish.
4. Insulation: Blanket type glass fiber or polyurethane foam.
5. Water Connections: Brass or bronze.
6. Base and Legs: Steel or cast iron.
D. Working Pressure: 150 psi.
E. Fuel: Natural gas.
F. Controls: Electronic control of ignition and temperatures up to 180 F.
G. Venting: PVC, ABS, or CPVC pipe. Venting options shall include horizontal, vertical, and direct vent sealed
combustion.
H. Venting Accessories: Wall/roof termination kit with exhaust and intake terminals, roof/wall penetration
accessories.
I. Gas Pressure Regulator: Integral to heater.
J. Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve: 3/4 inch, minimum, ASME.
K. Manufacturer's Guarantee: 3 years.
L. Compliance: ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
2.3 EXPANSION TANK
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Amtrol Series ST or ST-C.
B. Type: Diaphragm, vertical.
C. Tank: Steel, bearing ASME label for unfired pressure vessels.
D. Tank Lining: Polypropylene.
E. Diaphragm: Custom molded butyl.
F. Air Charge: Factory charged. Provide air charging valve on tank for field charging.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install water heating equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Submit
manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance data at completion of Work.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WATER HEATERS 22 33 10 - 2 of 2

SECTION 22 40 10 – PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
plumbing fixtures and associated fittings and trim.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Water Closets
2. Urinals
3. Lavatories
4. Sinks
5. Mop Receptors
6. Showers
7. Electric Water Coolers
8. Washing Machine Boxes
B. Substitute manufacturer's fixtures shall be similar in style, dimensions and quality to the basis of design
manufacturer's specified model number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fixtures shall be of one manufacturer, insofar as possible, and of first quality. Wall hung vitreous china
fixture backings shall be drilled and tapped for mounting carriers specified.
2.2 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closet WC-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler K-4325, or American Standard, Toto, Sloan, Zurn.
2. Type: Wall hung, flush valve type, 1.6 gallon per flush, vitreous china, siphon jet action, elongated
bowl, 1-1/2 inch top spud.
3. Seat:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler, or Beneke, Olsonite, Bemis.
b. Extra heavy, elongated, white, open front, check hinge.
4. Solar Powered Flush Valve:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan Solis 8111, or Toto, Zurn.
b. ADA compliant, chrome plated 1.6 gallons per flush, less handle opening, electronic
powered infrared sensor, battery powered with solar charging system, piston or diaphragm
valve, flush delay, override button, infrared sensor adjustment, screw driver check angle
stop with vandal resistant cap, sweat solder adaptor, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker
flush connection, spud coupling, and flange.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 10 - 1 of 7

5. Carrier (compact or standard, as required for the application):

a. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Watts, Wade, Zurn, Josam, Mifab.
b. Cast iron, adjustable, vandal-proof trim.
B. Water Closet WC-2

2. Type: ADA compliant, wall hung, flush valve type, 1.6 gallon per flush, vitreous china, siphon jet
action, elongated bowl, 1-1/2 inch top spud, 17-19 inches high, floor to top of seat.
3. Seat:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler, or Beneke, Olsonite. Bemis.
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan Solis 8111, or Toto, Zurn.
stop with vandal resistant cap, sweat solder adaptor, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker
flush connection, spud coupling, and flange.
C. Water Closet WC-3

2. Type: ADA compliant, wall hung, flush valve type, 1.6 gallon per flush, vitreous china, siphon jet
action, elongated bowl, 1-1/2 inch top spud, 17-19 inches high, floor to top of seat.
3. Seat:
4. Flush Valve:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan 111, or Delany, Zurn, Toto.
b. ADA compliant, chrome plated, metal oscillating non-hold-open handle, 1 inch inlet, screw
driver check angle stop with vandal resistant protective cap, adjustable tail piece, vacuum
breaker flush connection and spud coupling for 1-1/2 inch top spud, wall, and spud flanges,
sweat solder adaptor fitting.
D. Water Closet WC-4

2. Type: Wall hung, flush valve type, 1.6 gallon per flush, vitreous china, siphon jet action, elongated
bowl, 1-1/2 inch top spud.
3. Seat:
4. Flush Valve:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan 111, or Delany, Zurn, Toto.
b. ADA compliant, chrome plated, metal oscillating non-hold-open handle, 1 inch inlet, screw
driver check angle stop with vandal resistant protective cap, adjustable tail piece, vacuum
breaker flush connection and spud coupling for 1-1/2 inch top spud, wall, and spud flanges,
sweat solder adaptor fitting.

2.3 URINALS
A. Urinal UR-1
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: KohlerK-4991-ER, or American Standard, Toto, Sloan, Zurn.
2. Type: Wall hung, wash out, flush valve type, 0.125-1.0 GPF, vitreous china, 3/4 inch top spud,
beehive strainer and wall hangers.
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan Solis 8186 HEU, or Toto, Zurn.
stop with vandal resistant cap, sweat solder adaptor, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker,
spud coupling, and flange.
4. Carrier:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Wade, Watts, Zurn, Mifab.
b. High strength steel uprights, hanger plate, bottom bearing plate, vandal-proof trim and block
feet for bolting to floor construction.
B. Urinal UR-2
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: KohlerK-4991-ER, or American Standard, Toto, Sloan.
2. Type: Wall hung, ADA compliant, wash out, flush valve type, 0.125-1.0 GPF, vitreous china, 3/4
inch top spud, beehive strainer and wall hangers.
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan Solis 8186 HEU, or Toto, Zurn.
stop with vandal resistant cap, sweat solder adaptor, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker,
spud coupling, and flange.
4. Carrier:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, or Wade, Zurn, Josam, Watts, Mifab.
b. High strength steel uprights, hanger plate, bottom bearing plate, vandal-proof trim and block
feet for bolting to floor construction.
2.4 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatory L-1
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler K-2032, or American Standard, Eljer, Moen.
2. Type: ADA compliant, vitreous china, wall hung with anti-splash rim, drilled with centers to
accommodate faucet and concealed arm carriers.
3. Faucet:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Moen 4601, or American Standard.
b. Vandal resistant, single lever control, 0.5 GPM spray, open grid drain assembly, chrome
finish.
4. Supplies:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire 170LK, or Brasscraft.
b. 3/8 inch wall supplies, loose key angle stops, flexible tube riser, escutcheon, chrome finish.
5. Trap:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire 8872C or Brasscraft.
b. 1-1/4 inch, 17 gage, cast brass adjustable P-trap, cleanout plug, escutcheon, chrome finish.
6. Carrier:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 700, or Watts, Wade, Zurn, Josam, Mifab.
b. Concealed arms with mechanical locking device, high strength steel uprights with block
bases for bolting to floor construction.

7. Accessories: Point-of-use thermostatic mixing valve(s), where applicable, shall comply with ASSE
1070.
B. Lavatory L-2
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kohler K-2032, or American Standard, Eljer.
2. Type: ADA compliant, vitreous china, wall hung with anti-splash rim, drilled with centers to
accommodate faucet and concealed arm carriers.
3. Faucet:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan EBF-650 with BDT.
b. Battery powered sensor operated faucet with mechanical below deck thermostatic mixing
valve, 0.5 GPM spray, vandal resistant head, lavatory protective enclosure.
4. Supplies:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire 170LK, or Brasscraft.
5. Trap:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire 8872C or Brasscraft.
b. 1-1/4 inch, 17 gage cast brass adjustable P-trap, cleanout plug, escutcheon, chrome finish.
6. Drain and Supply Line Covers:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: True Bro Model 102W or Prowrap.
b. ADA compliant, flexible vinyl insulation installed on exposed drain piping, hot water piping
and cold water piping.
c. ANSI A117.1-2003.
7. Carrier:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 700, or Wade, Watts, Zurn, Josam, Mifab.
b. Concealed arms with mechanical locking device, high strength steel uprights with block
bases of bolting to floor construction.
8. Accessories: Point-of-use thermostatic mixing valve(s), where applicable, shall comply with ASSE
1070.
C. Lavatory L-3
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bradley LVQD2, or Acorn, Sloan.
2. Type: Vandal resistant, ADA approved, pre-molded lavatory system, for two users, lavatories on 30
inch centers, washbar which includes soap dispenser, water and hand dryer, single connections for
cold water, hot water, and sanitary piping.
3. Construction:
a. Bowl(s): Quartz resin.
b. Washbar: Stainless steel.
c. Support Frame: Stainless steel.
d. Control: Electric infrared sensors.
e. Accessories: P-trap, tailpiece, stainless steel supplies, thermostatic mixing valve with
combination stops, strainers, and check valves.
Lavatory L-4
4. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bradley LVWD3, or Acorn, Sloan.
5. Type: Vandal resistant, ADA approved, pre-molded lavatory system, for three users, lavatories on
30 inch centers, washbar which includes soap dispenser, water and hand dryer, single connections
for cold water, hot water, and sanitary piping.
6. Construction:
a. Bowl(s): Quartz resin.
b. Washbar: Stainless steel.
c. Support Frame: Stainless steel.
d. Control: Electric infrared sensors.
e. Accessories: P-trap, tailpiece, stainless steel supplies, thermostatic mixing valve with
combination stops, strainers, and check valves.

2.5 SINKS
A. Sink S-1
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Elkay Series LRAD or Just.
2. Type: Double bowl, ADA compliant, type 304 stainless steel, 18 gage, self-rimming bowl, drain
opening shall be located in back center of bowl, sound dampened underside, holes drilled to
accommodate faucet.
3. Faucet:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Chicago Faucet 786-E29ABCP, or Moen, Chicago Faucet, T&S
Brass, Kohler.
b. Chrome plated, solid brass construction, wrist blade handles, gooseneck spout, 2.2 GPM
outlet, washerless, color coded index button.
4. Supplies
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire, or Brass Craft.
5. Drain Outlet:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Elkay LK-35, or Just.
b. Chrome plated brass drain, stainless steel basket strainer, chrome plated brass 1-1/2 inch
OD tailpiece.
6. Trap: 1-1/2 inch P-trap with cleanout, chrome plated.
7. Continuous Waste: 1-1/2 inch size, chrome plated, brass.
8. Drain and Supply Line Covers:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: True Bro Model 102W or Prowrap.
b. ADA compliant, flexible vinyl insulation installed on exposed drain piping, hot water piping
and cold water piping.
c. ANSI A117.1-2003.
2.6 MOP RECEPTORS
A. Mop Receptor MR-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Fiat, or Florestone, Stern-Williams.
2. Type: One piece precast terrazzo, integral cast drain, stainless steel protective cap on exposed
sides, size as scheduled on Drawings.
3. Faucet:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Chicago Faucets 540-LD897SGCCP, T&S Brass.
b. Polished chrome plated with vacuum breaker, lever handles, threaded spout, rubber hose,
wall hook, loose key stops.
4. Accessories:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Fiat, or Florestone, Stern-Williams.
b. Mop Hanger: Stainless steel with three rubber tool grips.
c. Wall Guard: Heavy gage stainless steel.
2.7 SHOWERS
A. Shower SH-1
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Acryline G3636 ADA-3/4 inch.
2. Type: One piece seamless acrylic with grab bars, curtain rod, “L” shaped fold-up seat, dome light,
drain, and slip resistant bottom. ANSI A117.1, ADA compliant.
3. Shower Valve:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Powers P413, or Moen, Speakman, Leonard, Symmons.
b. Valve: Balanced-temperature and balanced-pressure shower set provided with color coded
dial plate, lever handle, diaphragm balancing chamber with poppet type anti-line valves and
inlet check stops.

c. Shower Assembly: Flexible hose shower with adjustable water spray, swivel joint, 59 inch
long flexible chrome plated hose, vacuum breaker, mounting hardware and 24 inch
adjustable bar 2 1/2 GPM flow control.
d. Additional fixed shower head.
1) Acceptable Manufacturer: Powers 141-337, or Speakman, Leonard, Symmons.
2) Chrome plated, self-cleaning volume control, 2.5 GPM flow restrictor, spray pattern
vandal-proof provided with anchor plate and remote lever diverter valve.
e. Valve shall comply with ASSE-1016
4. Water Retaining Strip:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Lasco, or Acryline.
b. Synthetic water retaining strip mounted at threshold of shower using a double sided
adhesive backing.
2.8 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A. Electric Water Cooler EWC-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Halsey Taylor HAC8FS-Q, or Oasis, Elkay, Acorn Aqua.
2. Type: Wall mounted, ADA compliant, lead free, electric water cooler shall have a minimum capacity
of 8 gallons per hour of 50 degrees F drinking water with an 80 degrees F inlet water temperature
and a room temperature of 90 degrees F. Unit shall be equipped with front and side push bar water
controls, stainless steel receptor and platinum vinyl or stainless steel cabinet, option selected by
Architect. Include flexible power cable, and three pronged grounded male plug. Bubbler stream
shall be self-regulating.
3. Trap: 1-1/4 inch P-trap with cleanout.
4. Supplies:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire ST16, or Brasscraft.
b. 1/2 inch wall supply, brass stem, sweat inlet, 3/8 inch outlet.
B. Electric Water Cooler EWC-2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Halsey Taylor HTHB-HAC8, or Oasis, Elkay, Acorn Aqua.
2. Type: Twin units, wall mounted, ADA compliant, lead free, electric water cooler with bottle filler
shall have a minimum capacity of 8 gallons per hour of 50 degrees F drinking water with an 80
degrees F inlet water temperature and a room temperature of 90 degrees F. Unit shall be equipped
with front and side push bar water controls, have a stainless steel receptor, and platinum vinyl or
stainless steel cabinet, option selected by Architect. Include flexible power cable with three pronged
grounded male plug. Bubbler stream shall be self-regulating.
3. Trap: 1-1/4 inch P-trap with cleanout.
4. Supplies:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGuire ST16, or Brasscraft.
b. 1/2 inch wall supply, brass stem, sweat inlet, 3/8 inch outlet.
2.9 WASHING MACHINE BOXES
A. Washing Machine Box WMB-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: IPS Corporation/Guy Gray “T” Series.
2. Style: Washer supply and drain unit. Drain located in box between supply valves.
3. Box and Faceplate: 20 gage steel, white powder coat finish.
4. Supply: 1/2 inch hot water, 1/2 inch cold water.
5. Valves: 1/2 inch quarter turn MIP.
6. Drain: 2 inch slip nut drain kit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Plumbing fixtures shall be installed square with wall, in line, and level, to give a uniform appearance.
Plumbing trim and exposed supply and waste piping, including traps, shall be polished chrome plated
brass, unless otherwise specified.
B. Drain and supply line covers shall be provided for all exposed plumbing (drain, tailpiece, trap, hot and cold
water supplies, etc.) beneath ADA compliant lavatories and sinks.
C. Each hot and cold water connection to plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be valved, if not provided
with integral stops as specified herein.
D. Calk space watertight between plumbing fixtures and wall or floor; silicone, white for all white fixtures, clear
for all other colors.
E. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the orientation of all plumbing fixtures (i.e. left-hand, right-
hand) with ADA requirements and general building conditions. Model numbers are listed for plumbing
fixtures to illustrate a standard of quality for materials and indicate a specific style.
F. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate carriers with chase dimensions and choose compact carriers
where chase dimensions are narrow and free space will not accommodate standard size carriers.
G. Coordinate lavatory and sink hole drilling configurations with faucets.
3.2 TESTING
A. Plumbing fixtures shall be filled with water and checked for leaks or retarded flow. Remove and clean all
aerators.

SECTION 22 60 30 – FUEL GAS PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for installation of fuel
gas piping and specialties.
B. Natural gas piping shall be extended from the existing natural gas system and distributed to equipment
indicated on Drawings or specified herein.
A. Section 22 05 10, Plumbing Piping and Pipe Fittings: Natural gas piping and pipe fittings.
B. Section 22 05 25, Plumbing Valves: Natural gas valves.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Gas Regulators
B. Submit written verification of piping system testing procedures specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS REGULATORS
A. Line Pressure Regulators

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Itron, Fisher, or Bellgas.
2. Type: Single stage, suitable for natural gas, steel jacket, and corrosion resistant components.
3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
4. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port.
7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
9. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet,
and no pressure sensing piping external to regulator.
10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not to exceed 150
percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless steel screen in opening if not connected to
vent piping.
13. Approvals: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS FUEL GAS PIPING AND 22 60 30 - 1 of 2

SPECIALTIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Piping
1. Extend natural gas piping to equipment indicated on the Drawings or specified herein with suitable
drips and cocks.
2. All welding of gas piping shall be performed by welders approved by local gas company.
3. All exterior gas piping shall be primed and painted.
a. Exterior semi-gloss, acrylic enamel: 2 coats over rust-inhibitive primer.
b. Color selected by Owner.
4. Provide cathodic protection on gas piping as required by local gas company.
5. Rough-in and make final connection to gas fired equipment furnished and installed under Divisions
22 and 23. Verify locations for rough-in with equipment supplier prior to start of work.
B. Gas Regulators
1. The gas regulator vent shall be extended to the exterior. Vent limiting devices will not be
acceptable. Vent piping shall be installed per local codes and manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. The gas regulator vent shall be sized as indicated on the drawings, but not less than the connection
size to the regulator.
3. Furnish and install pressure gage upstream and downstream of each pressure regulator.
A. After installation of piping, but before installation of outlet valves, natural gas piping shall be blown clear by
means of oil free dry air or nitrogen.
B. Natural gas piping shall be tested in accordance with recommendations of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA 54), American Gas Association, and local gas company.
C. Gas piping specialties and equipment shall be tested and inspected in the presence of the utility inspector
and representative of Architect prior to concealing or covering.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS FUEL GAS PIPING AND 22 60 30 - 2 of 2

SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 96 10 – WIRING OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall include the power and control wiring of plumbing equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Plumbing Contractor shall provide equipment with controls, starters and related items as specified in
various Sections of Division 22.
B. Where plumbing equipment specified without starters or controllers, Electrical Contractor shall provide
same as specified herein.
C. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring unless specifically noted otherwise.
D. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all control wiring unless specifically noted otherwise.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Plumbing equipment shall be wired in accordance with the following schedule:
Key:

Item wired by.....
P = Plumbing Contractor
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WIRING OF PLUMBING 22 96 10 - 1 of 3

EQUIPMENT
Plumbing Equipment Wiring Schedule
Disconnect Controllers Control Devices

Water Level / Elev.

Equipment
Control Panel
Motor Starter
Remote VFD
DDC Control
Integral VFD
Cord & Plug
Pressure
Aquastat
Relay
Flow
Domestic Water Heater
P E
DWH-1
P E
E E
P E
DWH-2
P E
E E
Hot Water Return Pump
P P
CP-1
P P
E E
Electronic Mixing Valve
P E
TMV-1
P E
E E
Electric Water Cooler
P E
EWC-1
P E
E E
Sump Pump SP-1
P E
P E
E E

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 05 05 – HVAC BASIC MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
basic materials and motors associated with HVAC systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Access Panels
2. Fire Stop Sealing System
3. Pipe Portals
4. Equipment Supports
5. Equipment Nameplates; including itemized listing of nameplate equipment designations
6. Engineered Strut Support System; including structural calculations
7. Motors; submit with each piece of equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS PANELS

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style AP for acoustical plaster, Style AT for acoustical tile, or
Karp, Krieger, Bilco.
2. Type: Acoustical ceiling.
3. Construction: 16 gage galvanized steel frame, 18 gage galvanized steel panel. Recessed to
accommodate acoustical ceiling tile. Continuous hinge, steel with stainless steel pin.
4. Closing Feature: Flush, screw driver operated lock with steel cam.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style DW, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor, or Karp.
anchors.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS HVAC BASIC MATERIALS 23 05 05 - 1 of 6

5. Rating: UL listed 1-1/2 hour (B label), temperature rise 30 minutes, 250 degrees F. maximum.
6. Closing Feature: Self-latching lock, direct action knurled knob, interior latch release mechanism.
D. Access Panel Specification No. 4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style M, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco.
4. Closing Feature: Flush screwdriver operated lock with steel cam.
E. Access Panel Specification No. 5

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style K, or Karp, Krieger, Bilco.
2. Type: Plastered surfaces.
painting.
2.2 FIRE STOP SEALING SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Nelson Firestop Products CLK Silicone Sealant, or 3M Fire Protection Products,
RectorSeal, Specified Technologies (STI), Tremco.
B. Materials: Single component, ready-to-use, water-resistant, flexible elastomeric silicone sealant. Non-
sag/gunnable grade for penetrations in vertical surfaces, self-leveling grade for floor applications.
C. Compliance: Fire endurance tested per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). In addition to compliance as a fire stop,
the cured sealing system shall not permit smoke or water penetration.
2.3 PIPE PORTALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pate Style PCA, or Roof Products & Systems Corp.
B. Construction: 18 gage galvanized steel, unitized construction with integral base plate.
C. Standard Features
1. Built-in raised cant.
2. Wood nailer.
3. 3 lb. density insulation.
4. Acrylic clad ABS plastic cover, fastening screws, graduated step boots with stainless steel clamps.
2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pate Style ES, or Roof Products & Systems Corp.
B. Construction: 18 gage galvanized steel with integral base plate, continuous welded corner seams,
pressure treated wood nailer and internally reinforced.
2.5 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
the inner layer.

B. Nameplate and lettering suitably sized for their location, but not less than 1/4 inch high letters.
2.6 EQUIPMENT LOCATION LABELS
A. Equipment location labels shall be self-adhering, 3/4 inch diameter, gloss vinyl circles. Labels shall be
placed on the T-bar of the adjoining ceiling tile to be removed for access to item. Color-coding of labels
shall be as directed by Owner.
2.7 ENGINEERED STRUT SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Unistrut Corporation, or as approved.
B. General: Provide all engineering, material, fittings, anchors, and related accessories for installation of the
engineered strut support system. Submit structural calculations with design criteria, selection of framing
members, fittings, accessories, and shop/assembly drawings.
C. Channel members shall be structural grade steel conforming to ASTM A-1011 SS GR or A-653 GR 33.
Fittings shall be fabricated from steel conforming to ASTM A 575, A 576, A 36, or A 635. Components
shall be finished with rust inhibiting acrylic enamel paint applied by electro-deposition.
2.8 MOTORS
A. Motor Characteristics:
1. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 degrees C and at an altitude of 3300 feet
above sea level.
2. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. Horsepower rating shall not be
less than size indicated on Drawings.
B. Three Phase Motors:

1. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
2. Efficiency: Premium efficiency, as defined by NEMA MG 1.
4. Service Factor: 1.15.
5. Insulation: NEMA Class F.
6. Sound Power Levels: Conform to NEMA MG 1.
7. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged
provision for re-lubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 200,000 hours.
8. Thermal Protection: Internal, automatically reset.
9. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Drives:
a. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant varnish, designed and tested to resist
transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width
modulated inverters.
b. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
c. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
d. Shaft grounding ring.
C. Single Phase Motors:

1. Larger Than 1/20 HP: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific
motor applications:
a. Permanent-split capacitor.
b. Split phase.

c. Capacitor start, inductor run.

d. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
2. 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-
capacitor type.
4. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings.
5. Thermal Protection: Internal, automatically reset.
D. ECM, where required in equipment specifications:

a. Variable-speed, DC, brushless motors specifically designed for use with single phase, 120
or 277 volt, 60 hertz electrical input.
b. Operated by a single phase integrated controller/inverter that operates the wound stator and
senses rotor position to electronically commutate the stator.
c. Designed for synchronous rotation.
d. Permanent magnet type motor rotor with near zero rotor losses.
e. Able to be mounted with shaft in horizontal or vertical orientation.
f. Permanently lubricated with ball bearings.
g. Direct coupled to the blower.
h. Integral thermal overload protection.
i. Minimum of 70 percent efficiency over its entire operating range.
j. Anti-back rotation system or provide a motor that is designed to overcome reverse rotation
and not affect life expectancy.
k. Inductors to minimize harmonic distortion and line noise.
l. Motor control module:
1) Built-in soft start and soft speed change ramps.
2) Electronics and built-in surge protectors to protect the solid state controls from line
transients.
3) Variable speed mode to receive a variable control voltage signal from a DDC system
in response to external PID outputs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Access Panels
1. Furnish and install access panels in ceilings and walls for service and repair access to concealed
equipment, including, but not limited to:
a. Valves: hand operated and automatic.
b. Strainers and traps.
c. Backflow preventers.
d. Air vents.
e. Gages and thermometers.
f. Pressure regulating/reducing valves.
g. Expansion compensators.
h. Flow measuring devices.
i. Dampers: volume, control, fire/smoke.
j. All control operators/devices.
2. Minimum Size: 18 inches by 18 inches. Where restrictions will not permit minimum size, verify
access panel size with Architect.
Acoustical tile or acoustical plaster finishes 1

Gypsum board (dry wall) finishes 2


Fire rated walls 3
Masonry, tile, or wood finishes 4
Plastered finishes 5
Kitchens and food service areas 4 (stainless)
B. Sleeves and Plates

1. Furnish and install sleeves for all pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, slabs, grade beams
and foundations.
2. Layout, size, and locate sleeves such that they be set and installed prior to pouring concrete, or
when masonry is being constructed. In event sleeves must be placed after floor, wall, grade beam,
etc., has been constructed, submit in writing to and obtain approval from Architect on location,
quantity and proposed method of core drilling and installing.
3. Core drilled openings above grade in solid concrete need not be sleeved but must be clean and
neat without cracking or spalling.
4. Size sleeves such that internal diameter is 2 pipe sizes or a minimum of 2 inches larger than
outside diameter of bare pipe for uninsulated lines and 2 inches larger than outside diameter of
insulation and jacket for insulated lines. Center pipes in sleeves.
5. For lines passing through walls and floors above grade and with no fire or smoke rating, the
annular space between outside of pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or concrete shall be
packed tight with batt-type fiberglass insulation.
6. For pipes passing through walls and floors above grade with smoke or fire rating of one hour or
more, the annular space between outside of pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or concrete
shall be sealed with fire stop sealing system.
C. Fire Stop Sealing System

Refer to architectural drawings for locations of fire rated floors and walls.
2. Prepare penetration and install sealing material in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
phrase.
D. Pipe Portals and Equipment Supports

1. Pipe portals and equipment supports provided as Work of this Section shall be coordinated with
requirements of roofing installer. Shop drawing submittals for pipe portals and equipment supports,
with, or without cants will be considered in compliance with roofer's requirements.
E. Equipment Nameplates
1. Furnish and install a full complement of nameplates for all items of HVAC equipment installed as
Work of this Division, including boilers, chillers, pumps, air handling units, fans and building
automation system panels.

cement shall not be used on equipment installed outdoors.

SECTION 23 05 10 – HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
HVAC piping and pipe fittings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Pipe shall conform to the materials specified herein, and shall be installed for piping systems as scheduled
in Part 3 - Execution, of this Section.

2. Joints: Solder type with 95-5 solder, or press coupled.
3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze solder joint, ANSI B16.18, or with
EPDM O-rings, ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117.
1. Tubing: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280 (ACR).
2. Joints: Brazed, AWS A5.8 B Cup silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.
3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the following pipe schedule(s).
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS HVAC PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 23 05 10 - 1 of 3

PIPE SCHEDULE
Service Application Pipe Spec. No.

Condensate Drainage, Cold All 1
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation. Any item
found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the jobsite. All pipe
and fittings shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates with sufficient data for
C. During construction all openings in piping shall be kept closed except when actual work is being performed
on that item. Closures shall be plugs, caps, blind flanges, or other items specifically intended for this
purpose. Exercise all necessary care to prevent foreign objects from entering material.
D. Run pipe lines straight and true, parallel to building lines with a minimum use of offsets and couplings. Use
full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible.
E. Changes in direction shall be made only with pipe bends or fittings. Changes in size shall be made with
fittings only. All fittings shall be of the long radius type, unless otherwise specified. Changes in direction on
drainage pipe systems shall be made with wye fittings, combination wye and eighth bends, or one-eighth
bends.
F. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment, traps and valves to facilitate dismantling.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, install all supply piping to coils, pumps and other equipment at line size with
reduction in size being made only at inlet to control valve or pump. Install supply piping from outlet of
control valve at full size of connection in equipment served. Install piping in equipment outlet or return lines
beyond dirt pockets the size of tapping in the trap or, if no trap, the size of the equipment connection.
H. All pipe shall be cut to exact measurement, and installed without springing or forcing. Particular care shall
be taken to avoid creating, even temporarily, undue loads, forces or strains on valves, equipment or
building elements with piping connections or piping supports.
I. Unless otherwise indicated, branch take-offs shall be from top of mains or headers at either a 45 degree or
90 degree angle from the horizontal plane for steam lines, and from top, bottom or side for liquids.
J. Pipe joints connecting dissimilar metals shall be insulating, dielectric unions or waterways. Dielectric
unions are prohibited. Copper tubing shall be protected from electrolysis at contact points with ferrous
metals, including temporary methods of support, by use of insulating, non conductive spacers such as
rubber, fiberglass or an approved equal. Pipe hangers for bare copper tubing shall be copper plated.
3.3 PIPE JOINTS
A. Press Joints:
1. Copper and copper alloy press connections shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
2. Copper press fittings shall be installed using the proper tools, actuator, jaws and rings as instructed
and approved by the press fitting manufacturer.
3. Installer shall be a qualified installer, licensed within the jurisdiction, and familiar with the
installation of copper press joint systems.

4. Follow all installation instructions of manufacturer of press-joint fitting to ensure quality, leak-tight
seal.
5. Provide unions and arrangement of sufficient length of removable sections of tubing at valves and
equipment connections to allow for easy removal and reinstallation for repairs without having to
redo press connections.
B. Solder Joints:
1. Make up joints with 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony (95-5) solder conforming to ASTM B32
Solder Metal, Grade 95TA.
2. Cut copper tubing so ends are perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and outside.
3. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt, and grease just
prior to soldering.
4. Apply flux evenly, but sparingly, over all surfaces to be joined. Heat joints uniformly to proper
soldering temperature so solder will flow to all mated surfaces. Wipe excess solder, leaving a
uniform fillet around cup of fitting. Flux shall be non acid type.
5. Remove composition discs from solder end valves during soldering.
C. Brazed Joints:
1. Make up joints with silver alloy brazing filler metal.
2. Cut copper tubing so ends are perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and outside.
Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt, and grease just
prior to brazing.
3. Apply non-corrosive flux of the type recommended by filler alloy manufacturer evenly, but sparingly,
over all surfaces to be joined. Heat joints uniformly to proper brazing temperatures using oxygen-
acetylene torch with tip size as recommended by fitting manufacturer. Wipe and brush joint clean
after alloy has set.
4. Remove composition discs from solder end valves during brazing.

SECTION 23 05 15 – HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials, and equipment required for the installation of
HVAC piping specialties.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Pipe & Valve Identification
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of measuring instrument. Submit
schedule showing manufacturer's model number, scale range, location, and accessories for each type and
application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: W. H. Brady Company, or Seton Nameplate Corp., Brimar Industries.
B. Shutoff valves and control equipment shall be marked by means of a brass or plastic disc minimum of 1
inch in diameter fastened to valve wheel or stem by brass wire or chain. Each disc shall have a legibly
marked identification number. A typewritten chart listing all valve tags, location, and service shall be
included in the operating and maintenance manual. The valve chart numbering sequence shall be
approved by Owner.
C. All piping installed as Work of this Division shall be identified by legend and flow arrow. Identification
system shall conform to ANSI A-13.1. Identification markers shall use ANSI standard background colors
and be text size. Markers shall be attached to pipe by wrapping with color coded banding tape. Markers
shall be located as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow
pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall carefully follow the Drawings in laying out and installing his work. He shall not deviate
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 05 15 - 1 of 2

B. All equipment and accessories shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship prior to installation.
Any item found unsuitable, cracked, or otherwise defective shall be rejected and removed from the jobsite.
All equipment shall have factory applied markings, stampings, or nameplates with sufficient data for
C. During construction all openings in equipment shall be kept closed except when actual work is being
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 05 15 - 2 of 2

SECTION 23 05 30 – HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
HVAC supporting devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HANGERS, INSULATED PIPING
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anvil International, or Penn Pipe Hanger.
B. Hangers used with insulated piping shall be sized to accommodate the pipe, and insulation and shall have
a support shield to prevent the hanger from compressing the insulation. Hanger shall be clevis type with
rod and two nuts or bolt and nut.
2.2 HANGERS, UNINSULATED PIPING
B. Hangers for uninsulated ferrous pipe shall be clevis type with rod and two nuts or bolt and nut.
C. Hangers for uninsulated copper pipe shall be clevis type with bolt and nut and shall be copper plated.
2.3 INSERTS, POURED CONCRETE
B. Inserts shall have cast malleable iron body and nut with galvanized finish.
2.4 INSERTS, PRECAST OR CURED CONCRETE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hilti HSL, or as approved.
B. A high integrity, torque controlled anchor for heavy duty fastenings. Loads shall not exceed manufacturer's
recommended weight.
2.5 BEAM CLAMPS
A. For pipe sizes of 3 inches and smaller:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anvil International, or Penn Pipe Hanger.

2. Clamps for attachment to I-beams and/or steel joists shall be malleable iron C-clamp with hardened
steel cup and point set screw and locknut.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 05 30 - 1 of 3

2.6 PIPE RISER CLAMPS
B. Pipe riser clamps for both insulated and uninsulated vertical pipe risers shall be 2-piece clamp complete
with 2 bolts and 2 nuts, sized for the OD of the bare pipe to be supported. Clamp shall be carbon steel
construction with galvanized finish for ferrous pipe and copper plated for copper piping.
2.7 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS
A. All components of support and anchor systems installed outdoors shall be hot dipped galvanized or
stainless steel. Apply galvanizing-repair paint to any surfaces damaged during installation.
B. Any components that are not available in galvanized or stainless steel shall be properly prepared, primed
and painted using zinc rich primer and two top coats by brushing or spraying to a minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils per coat. Paint color shall be as selected by Owner.
C. Equipment or materials stabilized with guy wires shall have turn buckles with lock wire, all stainless steel.
Submit proposed support plans to Architect for approval prior to installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The requirements of the applicable Sections of ANSI B31, Pressure Piping shall be considered as
minimum requirements governing fabrication, installation, and support of piping systems except where
more specific or stringent requirements are stated herein or shown on the Drawings.
B. All piping and piping connected equipment, including valves, strainers, traps, and other specialties and
accessories shall be supported in a manner that will not result in excessive stress, deflection, swaying,
sagging or vibration in the piping or in the building structure either during erection, cleaning, testing, or
normal operation of the systems. Piping shall not be so restrained, however, as to cause it to snake or
buckle between supports or anchors, or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction.
Piping shall be supported at equipment and valves such that they can be disconnected and removed
without further supporting the piping. Piping shall not introduce any strains or distortion to the connected
equipment.
C. Hangers, riser clamps, and supports shall be installed complete, including locknuts, clamps, rods, bolts,
couplings, swivels, inserts, and required accessory items. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have
adequate means of vertical adjustment for proper alignment of pipe, and shall be provided with locknuts.
All hangers, riser clamps, and supports in direct contact with copper piping shall be copper plated or
plastic coated.
D. Maximum spacing supports of horizontal piping shall be as listed below. Provide hanger rods in diameters
recommended by hanger manufacturer.
Pipe Uninsulated Insulated Copper

Size Steel Steel Tubing
1/2" 7' 7' 5'
3/4" 7' 7' 5'
1" 7' 7' 5'
1-1/4" 7' 7' 6'
1-1/2" 9' 9' 8'
E. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged valves and strainers, at
equipment connections and heavy fittings. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each grooved end steel
pipe with mechanical couplings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, support vertical pipe with
riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings or lugs welded to the pipe.

F. Inserts for supports in precast concrete slabs shall be drilled with rotary electric drill.
G. Beam clamps shall be used to attach hanger rods to structural steel.

SECTION 23 05 35 – HVAC SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials, and equipment required for installation of
sound and vibration control devices and materials to prevent sound transmission and vibration to the
building structure.
A. Section 23 05 05, HVAC Basic Materials: Piping and ductwork penetrations.
B. Section 23 05 15, HVAC Piping Specialties: Flexible pipe connectors.
C. Section 23 30 10, Air Distribution: Flexible duct connectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Isolators
2. Bases
3. Acoustical Treatment Materials
B. Vibration Isolators and Bases: Submittal data shall show type, size, and deflection of each vibration
isolator proposed. Include clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting vibration isolators.
C. Acoustical Treatment Materials: Submittal shall include construction details, materials, dimensions and
attachment methods of individual components.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vibration isolation devices shall be designed and furnished by a single manufacturer or supplier to assure
single responsibility for performance of vibration isolators installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Vibration isolators and bases for outdoor installations shall be suitably protected to prevent corrosion.
Steel bases shall be primed and painted. Springs, nuts, bolts, etc., shall be cadmium plated and neoprene
coated. Spring housings shall be neoprene coated.
2.2 ISOLATORS
A. Isolator Specification No. 3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kinetics Noise Control Model RD, or Amber/Booth, Vibration Mountings
& Controls, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator Co.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS HVAC SOUND & VIBRATION 23 05 35 - 1 of 4

CONTROL
2. Type: Molded neoprene pad.

3. Description: A double deflection elastomeric mounting having a steel baseplate with mounting
holes and a threaded insert at the top of or crossout the mounting for attaching equipment. All
metal parts shall be completely embedded in elastomeric material. Elastomeric shall be neoprene
or high quality synthetic rubber with anti-ozone and anti-oxident additives.
4. Design: Mountings shall be designed for approximately 1/4 inch deflection and loaded so that
deflection does not exceed 15 percent of the free height of the mounting.
B. Isolator Specification No. 4

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kinetics Noise Control Model NG (neoprene), Model KIP (fiberglass), or
Amber/Booth, Vibration Mountings & Controls, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator Co.
2. Type: Neoprene or fiberglass pad.
3. Description: A pad type mounting consisting of two layers of ribbed or waffled neoprene pads
bonded to a galvanized steel separator plate, or a pad type precompressed molded fiberglass
isolator, individually coated with elastomeric membrane.
C. Isolator Specification No. 5

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kinetics Noise Control Model SFH, or Amber/Booth, Vibration
Mountings & Controls, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator Co.
2. Type: Hanger.
3. Description: A combination spring and elastomeric or fiberglass hanger consisting of a rectangular
steel box, steel spring, and an elastomeric isolation element, with a neoprene or fiberglass
construction.
4. Design: The elements shall be designed for approximately 1/4 inch deflection and loaded so that
deflection does not exceed 15 percent of the free height of the element.
2.3 BASES
A. Base Specification No. 3

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kinetics Noise Control Model KSR, or Amber/Booth, Vibration Mountings
& Controls, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator Co.
2. Type: Curb rail isolator.
3. Description: Isolator shall consist of a prefabricated extruded aluminum or a formed galvanized
steel rail system, incorporating 1 inch deflection freestanding stable springs for vibration isolation,
and a continuous air and water seal.
4. Construction: Rail sections shall include integral slot anchoring springs to the bottom section, but
allow horizontal adjustment. Spring elements shall meet specified characteristics of spring isolators,
specified herein, and shall be selected and located to maintain a level rail assembly and uniform
spring deflection of 1 inch after equipment is installed. A continuous, integral, gravity, water seal
and foam or neoprene air seal shall be incorporated into rail sections, allowing no metal contact
between top and bottom sections.
5. Installation: Curb isolator assembly may be a one piece unitized assembly or may be provided in
multiple sections, designed to fit the base of rooftop equipment and associated roof curb. Curb
isolator shall have mitered corners with an integral alignment and connection facility for accurate
joining of side and end assemblies. Curb isolators shall be field calked in accordance with
instructions furnished by curb isolator manufacturer.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Acoustical Grade Calk

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: BRD Noise & Vibration Control, Inc. HSAC-100.
2. Material: Non-hardening, extruded latex bead, white in color.

CONTROL
3. Compliance: UL 723 and Class “A” per ASTM E-84.
B. Loaded Vinyl Sound Barrier

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: BRD Noise & Vibration Control, Inc. NRLV-100.
2. Material: High temperature-fused, non-reinforced vinyl loaded with non-lead fillers, 0.107 inch
nominal thickness, 1.0 lbs/sq.ft.
3. Performance: Barrier shall exhibit a transmission loss not less than indicated below when tested in
accordance with ASTM-E-90-75.
HZ 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 STC
13 17 22 26 32 37 26
C. High Density Acoustic Insulation

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: BRD Noise & Vibration Control, Inc. HB-200.
2. 2 inch thick batt insulation, nominal 3 lbs./cu.ft. density.
3. Performance: Insulation shall exhibit absorption characteristics not less than shown below in
accordance with ASTM C-423-77.
HZ 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC
0.07 0.27 0.96 1.13 1.08 0.99 0.85
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Vibration isolation equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for proper selection of spring rates to
accomplish the specified minimum static deflections for all spring and pad type isolators, based on weight
distribution of equipment to be isolated.
B. Minimum spring deflections shall be selected in accordance with latest ASHRAE Applications Handbook,
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Vibration isolators and bases shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule:
VIBRATION ISOLATOR AND BASE SCHEDULE
Application Isolator Spec. No. Base Spec. No.
Condenser-Compressor Unit 3 or 4 Not Req’d.

Fan, Centrifugal Suspended 5 Not Req’d.
Rooftop Equipment, Curb Mtd. n/a 3
* Isolators are not required on air handlers with manufacturer furnished vibration isolation in
motor/fan sections. Confirm with Engineer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of sound and vibration control equipment and materials shall be as indicated on Drawings and
accomplished in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

CONTROL
B. Rigid connections shall not exist between equipment and building structure that will degrade the sound
and vibration control system(s) specified herein.
C. Sound and vibration control equipment and materials manufacturer, or his qualified representative, shall be
responsible for providing such supervision as may be necessary to assure correct installation and
adjustment of the sound and vibration control system. Upon completion of equipment installation and after
the system is placed into operation, the manufacturer, or his representative, shall make a final inspection
and submit a report to Architect in writing, certifying the correctness of the installation and compliance with
Drawings and Specifications.
D. Piping and ductwork to be vibration isolated shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid
connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of piping or
ductwork, and maintain a minimum of 3/4 inch and a maximum of 1-1/4 inch clearance around the outside
surfaces. Refer to Section 23 05 05 for procedures in sealing this annular space.
E. Rooftop Unit In-curb Acoustical Treatment

1. Alternating layers of sound barrier and acoustic insulation shall line the top surface of the roof deck
inside the curb as indicated on Drawings to reduce the noise levels radiated inside the curb from
the bottom of the rooftop unit to the occupied spaces below.
2. Decking shall be maintained inside the curb to a clearance of 1/4 inch maximum around the duct
drops but shall not contact the duct.
3. Sound barrier shall be overlapped a minimum of 3 inches.
4. Acoustic insulation seams shall be butted and insulation shall be packed in air gaps around duct
drops.
5. Seams for every layer shall be staggered.
6. Acoustic grade calk shall be applied in the following areas:
a. Around the entire curb interior perimeter.
b. Single bead at sound barrier overlaps.
c. Around duct drop penetrations through decking.

CONTROL
SECTION 23 07 10 – HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for insulating HVAC
piping and ductwork.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Insulation Materials, including application thicknesses
2. Sealants, Adhesives, Coatings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 1
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Micro-Lok (indoor) Manville Micro-Lok w/Zeston 2000 PVC
(outdoor), or Owens Corning Fiberglas SSLII/ASJ (indoor) Owens Corning Fiberglas SSLII/ASJ w/ Insul
Coustic Metal Clad (outdoor).
B. Material: Fiberglass pipe insulation with all purpose vapor barrier jacket for indoor installations. For outdoor
installations, insulation jacket shall be 20 mil PVC or 0.016 inch polished aluminum.
C. Properties
2. Temperature Range: 0 degrees F. to 850 degrees F.
3. Fire Hazard: FHC 25/50 per ASTM E-84 and UL 723.
4. For use on pipe sizes 1/2 inch to 12 inches.
D. Seams and Joints: Self-sealing (pressure sensitive) lap seams and matching butt strips.
E. Fittings
1. Fiberglass batt inserts with premolded PVC jacket:
a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC, or Foster Speed-Line, Proto.
b. Properties: 0.28 max. K at 75 degrees F. mean, 0 degrees F. to 450 degrees F. temperature
range, FHC 25/50 fire hazard per ASTM E-84.
2. Fitting insulation shall be same thickness as adjacent insulation.
2.2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC PIPE INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 2
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armacell AP Armaflex , or K-Flex.
B. Material: Flexible elastomeric thermal pipe insulation. Black in color.
C. Properties
1. Maximum K Factor: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS HVAC INSULATION 23 07 10 - 1 of 6


3. Temperature Range: Minus 70 degrees F. to 220 degrees F.
4. For use on pipe sizes: 3/8 inch to 6 inch.
D. Fittings, Joints: Mitered cut, same thickness as adjacent insulation.
E. Adhesive
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armacell 520 BLV, K-Flex 720, Foster Drion 85-75, or Childers Chil Stix
C-82.
2. Toluene free, VOC no greater than 50 g/L
F. Outdoor Installations
1. For outdoor installations, insulation shall be covered with glass fiber mesh embedded in insulation
adhesive and painted with insulation manufacturer's standard protective finish.
2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Armaflex WB Finish, or Foster 30-64.
2.3 FIBERGLASS DUCT LINER INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 4
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Permacote Lina-coustic, or Certain-Teed ToughGardTM,

Owens-Corning Aeroflex Plus, Knauf Duct Liner E-M.
B. Material: Fiberglass blanket duct liner.
C. Properties
2. Density: 1.5 or 2.0 pcf.
3. Temperature Rating: 250 degrees F. (maximum)
4. NFPA Requirements: Bulletin 90A and 90B.
D. Coating for Duct Liner Butt Joints and Clip Fasteners

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foster Jac Tac Edge Sealer 85-62 or Childers Chil Spred CP-135-2.
2. VOC no greater than 50 g/L.
E. Adhesive for Duct Liner Attachment

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foster Quick Tack 85-60 or Childers Chill Quik CP-127.
2. Water-based adhesive meeting ASTM C 916, Type II.
2.4 FIBERGLASS DUCT WRAP INSULATION SPECIFICATION NO. 5
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johns Manville Microlite, or Certain-Teed Standard Duct Wrap, Owens-Corning
Fiberglas All-Service Duct Wrap, Knauf.
B. Material: Exterior fiberglass duct insulation with foil scrim kraft laminated (FSKL) facing.
C. Properties
2. Density: 1.0 pcf or 1.5 pcf.
3. Temperature Rating: 250 degrees F. (maximum)

4. NFPA Requirements: Bulletins No. 90A and 90B.

D. Adhesive for Duct Insulation Attachment

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foster Quick Tack 85-60 or Childers Chil Quik CP-127.
2. Water-based adhesive meeting ASTM C 916, Type II.
E. Tape for Sealing Duct Insulation Butt Joints, 2 inches Wide

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Elgen Air-Tite EDT-2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the following insulation schedule(s). (Where more than one
insulation type is scheduled, Contractor shall have the option of choosing from types listed.)
PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE
Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness

Temp. Insul.
Range Spec. to 2-1/2" 5" &
Service Deg. F No. 1-1/2" 2" to 4" larger
Refrigerant, All 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
Suction 2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 N/A
2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 N/A
Condensate 35-70 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1

Drainage 2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE
Duct Type/Service Insulation Spec. No. Thickness, Inches
Rectangular Sheet Metal, installed within building thermal envelope:
Supply Air 4 1-1/2

5 2
Return Air 4 1-1/2

5 2
Exhaust Air, Upstream of 4 1

Energy Recovery Equipment 5 1-1/2
Exhaust Air Not Required ---

Outdoor Air 4 1-/2
5 2
Relief Air Not Required ---

Make-up Air 4 1-1/2
5 2

DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE
Duct Type/Service Insulation Spec. No. Thickness, Inches
Round Sheet Metal, installed within building thermal envelope:
Supply Air 5 2
Return Air 5 2
Energy Recovery Equipment
Outdoor Air 5 2
Make-up Air Not Required ---
Rectangular Sheet Metal, installed exposed in mechanical rooms:
Supply Air 4 1-1/2

Return Air 4 1-1/2
Energy Recovery Equipment
Outdoor Air 8 1-1/2
Rectangular or Round Sheet Metal, installed outside building thermal envelope:
Supply Air 4 and 5 1 and 1-1/2

5 2-1/2
Return Air 4 and 5 1 and 1-1/2

5 2-1/2
Exhaust Air, Upstream of 4 and 5 1 and 1-1/2

Energy Recovery Equipment 5 2-1/2

Make-up Air 4 and 5 1 and 1-1/2
5 2-1/2
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Surface areas of all pipe and ducts to be insulated shall be clean and dry. Insulation shall not be
installed until all tests and inspections of the specific system(s) are complete, with the exception of
duct liner installed during duct fabrication.
2. All pipe and duct insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling/floor penetrations except
where specific sealing requirements are specified, i.e. fire-rated separations. Where pipes pass
through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, the use of a UL approved system for through
penetrations is required. The annular space around the pipes shall be packed with mineral wool or
other noncombustible material and sealed at each exposed edge to maintain the rating of the
system in accordance with the through penetration sealant manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Insulate all components in piping systems, including valve bodies, inline air separators, hangers,
guides, anchors, and pump housings. Do not insulate traps, strainers, flexible connectors, or
expansion compensators. Maintain access to all servicing points and nameplate data. Edges of
vapor barrier insulation at valve stems, instrument wells, unions and other raw edges shall be
adequately sealed to prevent moisture from penetrating the insulation.
4. Insulation on all cold surfaces shall provide a continuous unbroken vapor seal. Hangers, supports,
anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately insulated and vapor
sealed to prevent condensation.
5. Adhesives, mastics, sealers, and coatings shall be applied at manufacturer's required ambient
conditions and recommended minimum coverages.
B. Insulation Protective Shields

1. Insulation protection shields fabricated from galvanized steel shall be installed at all pipe hangers
and supports. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
2. Provide shield lengths and thicknesses as outlined in the latest version of the International
Mechanical Code or MSS-SP69. Minimum shield lengths shall be as follows:
Pipe Sizes, Shield Length,

Inches Inches
1-1/2 to 2-1/2 10
3 to 6 12
8 to 10 16
12 and over 22
3. Rigid cellular glass insulation, capable of resisting the crushing effect of the hydraulically loaded
piping, shall be placed under each shield. Jacketing material shall be wrapped around rigid
insulation and adjacent top and butt sections to maintain the jacketing continuity.
4. Stainless steel shields shall be installed on insulated piping located on the roof.
C. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation

1. All piping shall be cleaned of debris prior to installation of insulation and components. Joints shall
be butted firmly together. Longitudinal laps and butt strips shall be securely fastened as
recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Fittings, insulated with fiberglass blanket and PVC jacket shall be installed in accordance with
insulation manufacturer's instructions. All butt joints between longitudinal pipe insulation and fittings
shall be taped.
D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Pipe Insulation

1. Insulation shall be installed neatly with oversized pipe insulation and sheet insulation being used for
fittings and valves. For outdoor installations, completely wrap insulation surface with glass fiber
mesh and fully adhere/lag glass mesh to insulation with one coat of insulation adhesive. Inspect for
bonding of glass mesh to insulation surfaces before applying specified weatherproof finish. Consult
insulation manufacturer's recommendations for coatings and sealants.
E. Duct Liner Insulation

1. Duct liner shall be applied to the flat duct sheet with a minimum of 90 percent coverage of
adhesive.
2. Duct liner shall be cut to assure snug closing corner joints. The smooth surface of the liner shall
face the air stream. On top and sides of duct having a width and/or height dimension over 15
inches, the liner shall be additionally secured with welded pins and speed clips or grip-nails on a
maximum of 15 inch centers. Pins shall be cut close to the speed clip. Pins shall start within 2
inches of the leading edge of each section and within 3 inches of the leading edge of cross joints
within the duct section. All exposed edges and joints of the liner shall have coating applied.
F. Duct Wrap Insulation

1. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted. Insulation shall be secured with adhesive
which shall be applied to entire metal surfaces so that insulation conforms to duct surfaces
uniformly and firmly.

SECTION 23 10 20 – VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
variable frequency drives for air handling units.
B. Variable frequency drives shall serve as starter, circuit breaker, motor overload protection, indicator panel,
remote signal output and power factor correction for the specific mechanical equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit variable frequency drives for approval in accordance with specified submittal procedures. Include
wiring diagrams, load characteristics, connections and mountings with submittal data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABB, or Allen Bradley, or Yaskawa, Reliance, Toshiba, Graham, Schneider
Electric, Cutler Hammer.
B. General: The drive shall accept three phase input.

1. Suitable for operation on standard NEMA design B motors. Drive shall have a diode bridge rectifier
on the input to minimize generation of electrical noise back into the line and provide near unity
power factor.
2. Drive horsepower rating shall range from 3 HP to 100 HP with a speed range of 3 to 67, 80 or 120
Hz selectable by rotary switch. Drive shall be capable of an overload of 120 percent for 60
seconds.
3. Output devices shall be transistors, IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistors) for reduced motor
noise.
4. UL listed.
C. Environment Conditions
1. Drive Enclosure Type: NEMA 1 (indoor) or NEMA 3R (outdoor); as required for the application. The
enclosure shall provide protection of all internal components for the application and environmental
conditions at the installed location.
2. Drive shall be capable of operation under any combination of the following conditions without
mechanical or electrical damage.
a. Ambient Temperature: Minus 10 to 40 degrees C (14 to 104 degrees F), minus 10 to 50
degrees C (14 to 122 degrees F) without cover.
b. Relative Humidity: Less than 90 percent non-condensing.
c. Altitude: Less than 1,000m (3300 ft.) above sea level.
d. Vibration: Less than 0.5 G for 20 to 50 Hz less than 0.1 mm (peak to peak) for 50 to 100 Hz.
D. Disconnect: Integral switch for power disconnect.
E. Manual Bypass: Refer to schedule on drawings.
F. Control
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 10 20 - 1 of 3

1. Control System: Sinusoidal pulse width modulated voltage waveform.

2. Output Voltage: 3 phase 380 to 460 volt.
3. Frequency Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of maximum frequency.
4. Setting Frequency: 3 to 67 Hz internally selectable to 120 Range: Hz.
5. Volts/Hertz Ratio: 3 to 60 Hz V/Hz dependent on load (automatic) 60 Hz and up, voltage constant.
6. Operation frequency 0 to 67 Hz, internally selectable to 120 cy Range: Hz.
7. Overload Capacity: 120 percent for 60 seconds. A microprocessor shall monitor the load on the
drive and in the event of an overload, it shall, based on the calculation of a true inverse time
overload characteristic, either trip out or phase back the voltage and speed as selected by an
internal jumper.
G. Digital Readout and Monitor: Four (4) each, seven (7) segment LED's shall display OFF, LOW SPEED,
FREQUENCY and FAULT. Front accessible pushbutton shall permit user to monitor percent current,
percent voltage, frequency, acceleration and deceleration time, input bias, input gain, upper and lower
limit. Drive readout shall also provide drive status and protective circuits status.
H. Protection: Variable frequency drive system shall include a diode bridge rectifier, capacitor filter, and
transistorized invertor section. Base driver signals to control firing of the power transistors shall be
designed with optically coupled isolators for maximum protection of the control circuits from high voltage
and noise. Output shall be a sinusoidal waveform, pulse width modulated, voltage waveform for reduced
harmonic heating in the motor.
1. System protection, as a minimum, shall provide the following:
a. Frequency stall (230 percent causes acceleration stop, over 125 percent causes phase-
back control).
b. Current limit, 140 percent.
c. Overcurrent, 180 percent IET.
d. Short circuit, phase-to-phase or phase to ground (trips fault).
e. Overvoltage: High DC bus voltage (trips fault)
230V Series - 400 VDC
460V Series - 800 VDC
460V H Series - 760 VDC
f. Undervoltage, 85 percent below line voltage (indicates fault).
g. Component burnout, DC bus fuse protection and/or 3 phase input fusing.
h. Digital Indication of Fault: When the drive trips out on a fault, the drive shall activate a fault
relay with normally open and normally closed contacts available to the user and an LED
display shall indicate the reason for the trip as follows:
OC: Overcurrent trip at 180 percent.
OCA: Internal component short circuit.
OCL: Output short circuit.
OL: Overload (when soft stall not selected).
OP: Overvoltage on DC bus.
OPS: Overvoltage on input.
UP: Undervoltage.
OH: Overheat or closing of terminals OH.
EF: Ground fault (earth fault).
i. Auto restart shall be a standard feature of the drive as follows:
1) Auto restart enabled or disabled by jumper selection.
2) If auto restart is selected the microprocessor shall determine, in the event of a fault,
if a restart should be attempted. A restart shall be attempted under the following
conditions:
Undervoltage (UP) - every time as soon as voltage returns to a safe level. Fault relay
is not activated (not jumper selectable).
Input Overvoltage (OPS) and DC Bus Overvoltage (OP) - every time if voltage
returns to normal within 30 seconds, fault relay is not activated and reset for 30
seconds (jumper selectable).

Overcurrent (OC) - drive delays 1 second and attempts a restart. If drive trips a
second time, it delays 2 seconds and attempts a second restart. Overall, five
attempts are made after successive delays of 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16 seconds. If the restart
fails after the fifth attempt, the drive will trip out and activate the fault relay (jumper
selectable).
3) A restart shall not be attempted for any other type of fault and the drive shall trip out
immediately, activate the fault relay and make the appropriate indication on the
display.
j. In the event of a fault trip the microprocessor shall save the status of the drive at the time of
the fault and make that information available on the LED display until the drive is reset or
the control power is removed.
k. An undervoltage condition of less than 30ms duration shall not affect drive operation. If main
power falls below 85 percent of rated voltage for longer than 30ms while control power is
retained the drive shall forcibly decelerate the load in an attempt to force a higher bus
voltage through regeneration. This feature, depending on the inertial of the load, shall allow
the drive to "ride through" a longer condition.
l. The following shall be mounted by drive manufacturer:
1) Incoming motor circuit protector and thermal overload.
2) AC Line Reactor: For reduction of harmonic content, power factor improvement and
line transient suppression.
3) If indicated on schedule, provide manual bypass switch which allows motor operation
during service to variable speed drives.
4) Integral disconnect switch.
m. Operational Functions:
1) Acceleration and deceleration time independently adjustable from 0.1 to 30/1 to 300
seconds (selectable ranges).
2) Signal follower 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20ma, 0 to 20ma, 1 to 5VDC, or 0 to
135 ohms selectable by jumper. An increasing input signal can command increasing
or decreasing frequency as required by the application.
3) Ramp-to-stop or coast-to-stop for normal operation (coast-to-stop on fault).
4) Volts/Hertz patterns selectable by rotary switch.
5) Upper and lower frequency limit adjustments shall be available. When the drive
reaches one of the limits it shall activate an open collector signal available to the
user. A dry contact signal shall be available as an option.
I. Equipment shall be provided with a terminal strip set up to have control input and output function
interaction. Terminal strip shall have the connections to accept safety input, control signal input, run signal
input, motor disconnect input, and fault signal output.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install variable frequency drives in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Submit

B. Wiring of variable frequency drives shall be in accordance with Division 26 Specifications and supervised
by an authorized factory representative. Drive shall be field commissioned by a factory trained and
employed service technician.

SECTION 23 30 10 – AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
air distribution system ductwork, and associated specialties.
A. Section 23 05 05, HVAC Basic Materials: Access doors.
B. Section 23 07 10, HVAC Insulation: Insulation of ductwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Single Wall Spiral Round Ductwork, including fittings
2. Double Wall Spiral Round Insulated Ductwork, including fittings
3. Flexible Ductwork
4. Duct Accessories
5. Diffusers, Registers, Grilles
6. Louvers
7. Fire Dampers
B. Submit complete shop (fabrication) drawings of entire ductwork system. Ductwork shop drawings shall be
drawn at a scale of no less than 1/4” equal 1 foot. Ductwork shop drawings shall be prepared by the
ductwork fabricator, or his representative, and shall indicate coordination with all trades installing work in
proximity of the ductwork indicated on the submittals. Drawings issued as part of the Contract Documents,
altered for the purpose of this submittal requirement, will not be acceptable. Submit quantities of prints in
accordance with specified submittal procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RIGID METAL DUCTWORK
A. Rigid metal ductwork and plenum chambers shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel constructed in
accordance with SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible based on indicated
static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. , and the latest publication of the ASHRAE Equipment
Handbook.
1. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-
pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and
other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular
Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 30 10 - 1 of 8

3. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and
fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B. Duct dimensions shown on Drawings are net clear inside dimensions.
C. Distance from floor to bottom of ductwork shown on Drawings is distance from floor to bottom of sheet
metal, excluding joint reinforcements.
D. Changes in duct sizes shall be gradual with a slope of approximately 15 degrees divergence wherever
possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees divergence
downstream.
E. Elbows shall be radius type made with an R/D ratio of 1.5. Square elbows with turning vanes shall be used
where shown on Drawings or where space does not permit the foregoing radius.
F. Dryer vent ductwork shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet metal in accordance with NFPA Standard
54.
G. Un-insulated ductwork installed outdoors shall be fabricated from aluminum or stainless steel.
2.2 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND METAL DUCTWORK, LOW PRESSURE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGill Airflow, or Semco Mfg., Inc..
B. Low pressure/low velocity round metal ductwork shall be factory fabricated of galvanized steel meeting
ASTM A 527 71. Ducts shall be fabricated with spiral lockseam construction. Fittings shall be galvanized
steel, shall have a flanged saddle tap or slip joint and shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Metal
gages for ducts shall be as follows:
Duct Diameter Duct Gage
3" - 8" 26
9" - 22" 24
23" - 36" 22
37" - 50" 20
2.3 DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND INSULATED DUCTWORK
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: McGill Airflow, or Semco Inc.
B. Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct with light reinforcing corrugations, galvanized steel outer
wall, 2 inch thick glass fiber insulation, solid perforated galvanized steel inner wall; fittings manufactured
with perforated inner wall.
Duct Diameter Duct Gage Fitting Gage
3" - 14" 26 24
15" - 26" 24 22
28" - 36" 22 20
38" - 50" 20 20
2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK, ACOUSTIC
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexmaster U.S.A. Type 1M or Thermaflex M-KE, no substitutions..

B. Material: Acoustical round flexible ductwork consisting of helical wound corrugated steel with PE
(polyethylene) inner film, exterior fiberglass insulation and reinforced metallized vapor barrier.
C. Properties:
1. Thermal Conductance: Minimum R5.
2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 250 degrees F
3. Working Pressure: 10 inches w.g. positive, 5 inches w.g. negative thru 16 inches diameter.
4. Listing: ETL Class 1 Air Duct
5. Compliances: NFPA 90A and 90B
6. Flame Spread: Less than 25
7. Smoke Developed: Less than 50
D. Acoustical Performance Data: Minimum straight duct insertion loss in dB for 8 inch diameter, 9-10 feet long
section at 2500 fpm velocity:
Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz
125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
11 26 32 32 29 17
2.5 DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. Duct Sealant
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foster, Childers, or Duro Dyne.
2. Duct joints and seams shall be sealed to minimize air leakage.
B. Duct Sealant, High Velocity

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Foster, Childers, or United McGill.
2. High velocity duct joints and seams shall be sealed as specified herein. Liquid duct sealer shall be
applied to male end only of slip type fittings prior to assembly. Single slip fittings shall be secured
with sheet metal screws following application of liquid sealer and assembly of joint. Apply liquid
sealer to outside of assembled joint in a 2 inch wide band. Flanged joints shall be sealed with either
a self adhering neoprene rubber gasket or impregnated felt gasket adhered to flanged joint with
duct sealer.
C. Volume Dampers
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Young Regulator Co. for dampers with smallest dimension 10 inch or
less, Louvers & Dampers, Inc. for dampers with smallest dimension 12 inch or more.
2. Opposed blade volume dampers shall be installed where indicated on Drawings. Each dampers
shall be equipped with adjustable quadrant regulator and lock. Dampers shall be multiple blade.
Single blade damper units will not be permitted. Maximum blade width shall be 10 inch and
maximum blade length shall be 42 inch. Longer spans shall consist of multiple damper sections.
3. On externally-insulated ducts, mount quadrant regulators on stand-off brackets to accommodate
thickness of insulation.
D. Turning Vanes
1. Turning vanes shall be provided in all square elbows unless specifically noted otherwise. Turning
vanes shall be single thickness vane style, with no trailing (flat) edges. Vanes shall be securely
fastened to runners. Runners shall be securely fastened to ductwork. For lined ductwork, runners
shall be raised hat style to prevent damage to duct liner. Turning vanes greater than 36 inch in
length shall be braced at intermediate points with tie rods.
2. All turning vanes shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards.

E. Volume Extractors
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Volume extractors shall be installed where indicated on Drawings. Extractors shall consist of a
series of radius vanes attached to a pivoting frame and mounting bracket. Vanes shall be gang
operated in synchronized motion. Operators shall be suitable for exposed or concealed units but
not limited to the following types:
a. Push pull operator strap through branch duct sidewall.
b. External duct (or ceiling) rotary operator and shaft assembly.
c. Worm drive mechanism with removable key operator.
F. Flexible Duct Connectors

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate, Duro Dyne, Elgen, or Ventfabrics.
2. Connector: 24 or 28 gage galvanized steel.
3. Fabric: Woven fiberglass, coated with neoprene. Water proof and airtight. Designed to meet NFPA
701, 90A and 90B.
G. Take Off Fittings

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Clevepak Corp., Flexmaster.
2. Take off connections for use in connecting flexible ductwork to rectangular duct systems shall be
straight tap-in type, prefabricated, galvanized steel construction, with damper. Take off connections
shall be same size as flexible duct.
H. Duct Access Doors

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Cesco Advanced Air.
2. Application: Install in ductwork within working distance of all fire dampers, motor-operated dampers
and volume dampers to permit inspections and adjustments.
3. Construction: Reinforced with angle iron stiffeners and provided with a continuous edge gasket for
airtight fit. Insulated where installed in insulated duct systems.
4. Closure Method: Double cam latch.
I. Backdraft Dampers
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
2. Backdraft (pressure relief) dampers shall be all welded, 14 gage aluminum constructed frame and
blades. Blades shall be double crimped, front and rear, and linked to work in unison with blade
stops and adjustable counterweights. Maximum blade width shall be 6 1/2 inch.
2.6 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. Ceiling Registers and Grilles, Exhaust, Return

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey, or Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Metalaire, Price
Industries, Titus.
2. Construction: Extruded aluminum.
3. Standard Features:
a. 1 inch minimum frame width with mitered corners.
b. 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch cellular grid core.
4. Accessories: Opposed blade damper (register only).
5. Finish: Baked white enamel.
B. Sidewall Registers and Grilles, Exhaust, Return

Industries, Titus.


a. 1 inch minimum frame with mitered corners.
b. Fixed position horizontal bars at 35 to 45 degree deflection and spaced 3/4 inches on
center.
C. Sidewall and Ceiling Registers And Grilles, Supply

Industries, Titus.
a. 1 inch minimum frame with mitered corner.
b. Double deflection air foil shaped bars with adjustable horizontal front bars spaced 3/4 inch
on center, providing greater than 80 percent free area.
D. Heavy Duty Sidewall Registers and Grilles, Exhaust, Return

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey, or Carnes, Anemostat, Krueger, Price Industries, Titus.
2. Construction: Steel.
a. 1 inch minimum 20 gage welded frame.
b. Fixed position, minimum 13 gage horizontal steel bars at approximately 40 degrees of
deflection and spaced 1/2 inch on center.
c. Vertical steel support braces spaced maximum 8 inch to 10 inch on center for reinforced
construction.
E. Sidewall Direct Spiral Grilles, Return

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey, or Titus, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire, Carnes.
a. 1 inch minimum frame.
b. Perforated face.
c. Grilles shall be constructed with radiused endcaps and foam gaskets for a tight seal.
4. Finish: As selected by Architect.
F. Sidewall Direct Spiral Registers, Supply

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tuttle & Bailey, or Titus, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire, Carnes.
a. 1 inch minimum frame.
b. Double deflection air foil shaped bars with adjustable horizontal front bars.
c. Grilles shall be constructed with radiused endcaps and foam gaskets for a tight seal.
4. Accessories: Air scoop/extractor damper (register only).
5. Finish: As selected by Architect.

G. Diffusers, High Performance

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Titus, or Anemostat, Krueger, Price Industries, Tuttle & Bailey.
a. 360 degree air pattern.
b. 24 x 24 full face and panel mounted lay in type frames.
c. Flush cones.
d. Removable inner core.
4. Accessories:
a. Adjustable volume damper.
b. Sectorizing baffle.
2.7 LOUVERS
A. Stationary Waterproof Louver

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: American Warming & Ventilating, or Louvers and Dampers, Airstream,
Ruskin, Pottorff.
2. Construction: 6 inch deep all welded extruded aluminum.
3. Frame: Not less than .081 inch thick 6063 T5 alloy.
4. Blades: 3-1/2 inch to 4-1/2 inch centers with two reinforcing V's and integral downspouts to drain
water from louver blades.
5. Finish: Kynar 500, color as selected by Architect.
6. Certification: AMCA certified for air and water penetration.
7. Accessories: 1/2 inch mesh aluminum birdscreen.
2.8 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fire Damper, Primary

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ruskin, or Cesco Products, Prefco Products, Pottorff.
2. Type: Multiple interlocking steel "curtain" damper.
3. Construction: Galvanized steel frame and blades; blades stacking out of air stream; for rectangular
damper with smallest dimension 12 inches or less, frame and blades shall be out of air stream.
Damper shall be suitable for vertical or horizontal mounting; labeled as a dynamic rated 1 1/2 hour
fire damper; constructed in accordance with UL 555.
4. Fusible Link: UL listed 165 degrees F.
5. Wall Sleeve: Contractor's option for manufacturer's accessory wall sleeve or contractor fabricated,
in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.
6. Compliance: NFPA 90A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Rigid metal ductwork and associated specialties shall be installed in accordance with SMACNA, HVAC
Duct Construction Standards, and the latest publication of the ASHRAE Equipment Handbook. Rigid and
flexible ductwork shall be installed in sizes indicated on the Drawings with field supplied rigid metal
transitions at connections to equipment duct collars.

B. Protect open ends of ductwork during construction, either stored or installed, with plastic covering.
C. Flexible duct connectors shall be installed on inlet and outlet of each fan and air handling unit.
D. Fire dampers and fire doors shall be installed in accordance with the International Building Code,
SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems, and manufacturer’s
installation requirements. The UL label shall be visible for inspection from a duct access door which is
labeled to identify the damper type.
E. Rectangular sheet metal ductwork shall be insulated internally. Duct dimensions shown on Drawings are
net clear inside dimensions, that is, the inside dimensions of the duct insulation. Refer to Section 23 07 10.
F. Flexible non metallic ductwork shall be connected to rigid metal duct fittings and terminal unit duct collars
by draw straps. Extend flexible duct insulation and vapor barrier over completed joint and tape securely.
G. Manual volume dampers shall be installed in all branch ducts for balancing and as indicated on Drawings.
H. Access panels shall be installed in inaccessible ceilings for access to air distribution devices requiring
adjustment, repair, or replacement. Refer to Section 23 05 05.
I. Installation of Exposed Ductwork

1. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
2. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-
part tape sealing system.
3. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and
treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
4. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
5. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
3.2 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B. Joints in exhaust ductwork carrying steam or high humidity (i.e. dishwasher or shower room exhaust) shall
be sealed watertight with clear silicone calk.
3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers
and Supports."
3.4 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTING
A. Perform duct leakage testing in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual” and
submit written letter of compliance.
1. Disassemble, reassemble and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate testing.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system. Do not pressurize
systems above maximum design operating pressure.
3. Maximum allowable leakage shall be SMACNA Leakage Class 3 for supply air ducts and Leakage
Class 6 for return air ducts.

4. Leaking joints shall be remade and retested until leakage is equal to or less than the maximum
allowable.
3.5 DUCT CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Air System Pressure Class SMACNA Seal Class
Supply Ducts Connected to Central Positive 3 inches w.g. B

Station Variable Air Volume Air Handling
Units and Packaged Rooftop Units
Supply Ducts Connected to Central Positive 2 inches w.g. C
Station Constant Volume Air Handling
Units and Packaged Rooftop Units
Supply Ducts Connected to Unitary Positive 1 inch w.g. C
Equipment (heat pumps, fan coil units,
split systems, etc.)
Supply Ducts Downstream of Variable Air Positive 1 inch w.g. C
Volume Boxes
Return and Relief Air Ducts Connected to Negative 2 inches w.g. C
Central Station Air Handling Units and
Packaged Rooftop Units
Return Ducts Connected to Unitary Negative 1 inch w.g. C
Outside Air Ducts Connected to Central Negative 2 inches w.g. C
Station Air Handling Units and Packaged
Rooftop Units
Outside Air Ducts Connected to Unitary Negative 1 inch w.g. C
General Exhaust Ducts Positive or Negative C
1 inch w.g.

SECTION 23 30 20 – VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
variable air volume equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Control Reheat Units
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHUTOFF CONTROL REHEAT UNIT, TYPE CRU
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trane, or Carrier, Titus, Enviro-Tec/Johnson Controls.
B. Casing: Constructed of galvanized steel and lined with minimum 1-1/2 pound density thermal/acoustical
[foil-faced] fiberglass insulation meeting UL 181 and NFPA 90 requirements. Provide access door for
inspection and cleaning.
C. Air Volume Control Damper: Factory calibrated air damper assembly, factory set and field adjustable
minimum and maximum airflows.
D. Electric Heating Coil

1. Nickel-chromium resistance, open type heater including primary automatic over-temperature
protection, manual reset secondary thermal safety device and airflow switch.
E. Controls
1. Internal regulator to maintain constant airflow independent of inlet static pressure.
2. Provide with SCR modulation of electric heat.
3. Factory mounted electric actuator for interface with automatic temperature control system.
4. Electric heater control panel including contactors required for interface with automatic temperature
control system.
5. Provide line fused and disconnect switch.
6. Refer to Section 23 90 10, Building Automation System.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install VAV equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Submit

B. Provide supporting steel for support of VAV equipment from substantial building structure. Do not support
VAV equipment from adjacent equipment, piping, or ductwork.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS VARIABLE AIR VOLUME 23 30 20 - 1 of 2

SYSTEMS
C. Provide sheet metal transitions as required for inlet and discharge connections of VAV equipment.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS VARIABLE AIR VOLUME 23 30 20 - 2 of 2

SYSTEMS
SECTION 23 34 10 – FANS AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for installation of fans
and gravity ventilators.
A. Section 23 05 05, HVAC Basic Materials: Motors
B. Section 23 05 35, HVAC Sound and Vibration Control: Vibration isolators
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Fans
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for fans, including:
1. Selection characteristics and rated capacities.
2. Fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
3. Sound power ratings, with an 8 octave band analysis for large, central system fans.
4. General specifications: Fan type description, material of construction, thicknesses and finishes.
5. Motor type, ratings and electrical characteristics
6. Accessories furnished
C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to fan units.
Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate
between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
E. Coordination Drawings: As required to meet project complexity, show fan room layout and relationships
between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions,
motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and
wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Manufacturer's published fan curve data shall be included with shop drawing submittal data for fans. Fan
curve information shall include operating point, RPM curve for operating point, minimum and maximum
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS FANS AND GRAVITY 23 34 10 - 1 of 4

VENTILATORS
RPM curves for fan, system curve and brake horsepower curves. Tabular fan performance charts are not
an acceptable substitute for fan curve data. Shop drawing submittals for air handling equipment will be
returned without Architect's review if the fan curve data is not included with the submittal.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Fan rating shall be AMCA certified.
1.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings
from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound
Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.
B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation
speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans
for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Fan ratings shall be AMCA certified and statically and dynamically balanced and run tested at the factory.
B. Bearings: Fans, except power roof ventilators, shall be provided with lubricating type bearings with
extended fittings as required. Extend grease fittings to safe, accessible locations.
C. Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 05 for motor requirements.
D. Accessories:
1. Belt guards: Where required, guards shall be fabricated to comply with OSHA and SMACNA
requirements, constructed of expanded metal mesh to allow for quick visual inspection of belts and
pulleys without removal. Guards shall be attached to equipment with hinges and/or quick release
fasteners that can be turned without tools to allow for ease of maintenance. Secure to fan or fan
supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
2. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
3. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.
4. Roof Exhaust Fan Roof Curbs: Provide manufacturers roof curb with outer finish to match fan.
Provide hinging kit to allow easy access to damper. Curb shall be insulated with 2 inch thick sound
and thermal insulation.
2.2 CABINET FAN, TYPE CFD
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Greenheck Fan Corp., or Loren Cook Company, Broan, Carnes, PennBarry,
Solar & Palau.
B. Blower: Centrifugal, aluminum.
C. Housing
1. Insulated steel with discharge duct collar.

VENTILATORS
2. Integral backdraft damper.

3. Integral terminal box.
4. Removable fan motor and wheel assembly from housing.
D. Ceiling Grille: Fan shall be furnished with either a molded plastic or aluminum egg crate ceiling grille.
E. Accessories
1. Wall cap where indicated on Drawings.
2. Electronic speed controller.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Submit manufacturer's

printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance data at completion of Work.
B. Install fans level and plumb to prohibit excessive vibration and insure longer life.
C. Protect belts, sheaves, bearings, motors and other fan parts during installation.
D. Access: Provide adequate access and service clearance space around and over fans as indicated, but in
no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. Allow adequate and safe pathway for components
and unit replacement.
E. Isolation: Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 35.
F. Duct Connections:
1. Minimize Fan System Effects: Avoid poor fan inlet and outlet conditions. Comply with
manufacturer’s installation guidelines.
2. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors.
3. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
4. Provide access door in duct below power roof ventilators to service damper.
G. Electrical Connections: Ground equipment and connect control wiring according to Division 26.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of fans, and after motor has been energized with normal power source,
perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative to demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and
electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in
motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free
rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, make final alignments of
pulleys and belt tension, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

VENTILATORS
7. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire in connected ductwork systems are in
fully open position.
8. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they
do not pass tests and inspections.
9. Prepare test and inspection reports.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units that cannot be satisfactorily corrected and retest as specified
above.

VENTILATORS
SECTION 23 72 10 – ENERGY RECOVERY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
energy recovery equipment.
A. Section 23 05 05, HVAC Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors.
B. Section 23 05 35, HVAC Sound and Vibration Control: Vibration isolators and bases.
C. Section 23 10 20, Variable Frequency Drives: VFDs.
D. Section 23 90 10, Building Automation System: Controls.
E. Section 23 95 10, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of HVAC System: Air system balancing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Packaged Energy Recovery Ventilators
B. Manufacturer's published fan curve data shall be included with submittal data for energy recovery units.
Fan curve information shall include operating point, RPM curve for operating point, minimum and
maximum RPM curves for fan, system curve and brake horsepower curves. Tabular fan performance
charts are not an acceptable substitute for fan curve data. Submittals for energy recovery equipment will
be returned without Architect's review if the fan curve data is not included with the submittal.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units
and components.
C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to ARI 430,
"Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.
D. Fan ratings shall be AMCA certified.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS ENERGY RECOVERY 23 72 10 - 1 of 4

1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR, TYPE ERV
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Greenheck Fan Corp., or AAON, Ruskin, Munters.
B. General:
1. Listing: ANSI/UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment.
2. Energy Transfer Ratings, Energy Recovery Wheel: ARI Certified.
3. Ventilators Certification: AMCA Certified Rating Seals for Air Performance.
4. Exhaust discharge and outside air intake shall not be located on the same side on roof top units.
C. Unit Casing:
1. Frame and Panels: G90 galvanized steel, minimum of 18 gage.
2. Internal Panels For Double Wall Construction: Galvanized steel, minimum 24 gage.
3. Where top panels are joined there shall be a standing seam to insure positive weather protection.
All metal-to-metal seams shall be sealed.
4. Unit Base: Designed for curb-mounting. Unit base shall over hang the curb for a positive seal
against water run-off.
5. Access Doors:
a. All components accessible through access doors for exhaust, supply, filter and damper
compartments.
b. Doors formed and reinforced, single- or double-wall insulated panels of same material and
finish as unit casing.
c. Doors hinged with lever type latches, operable from inside and outside unit, and arranged to
open against air pressure differential.
d. Neoprene gasket around entire perimeter of panel frames.
e. Energy recovery wheels (smaller than 54 inches) mounted in a slide-out track for ease of
inspection, removal and cleaning.
6. Insulation:
a. Casing: Insulated with 1 inch fiberglass with foil-scrim-kraft facing.
b. Insulation shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A and tested to meet UL 181 erosion
requirements.
c. Secured to unit with waterproof adhesive and permanent mechanical fasteners.
d. Insulation shall be enclosed in double wall construction.
7. Weatherhoods:
a. Louvered design with moisture eliminator, tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-L
and achieve an “A” water penetration classification rating up to 8 in/hr rainfall at 50 mph.
b. Same material and finish as the unit casing.
D. Energy Recovery Wheel:

1. Type: Enthalpy for both sensible and latent heat; designed to insure laminar flow. Energy recovery
device shall transfer moisture entirely in the vapor phase.
2. Energy Transfer Ratings: ARI Certified to Standard 1060 and bear the ARI certification symbol for
ARI Air-to Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification Program based on ARI 1060.
Ratings “in accordance with 1060” without certification will not acceptable.
3. Desiccant: Silica gel with polymer media mounted in a stainless steel rotor for corrosion resistance.
Wheels with sprayed on desiccant coatings or with desiccant applied after wheel formation will not
be acceptable.
4. Wheel Design: Removable segments (for wheels greater than 26 inches in diameter) with silica gel
desiccant permanently bonded to wheel media to retain latent heat recovery after cleaning.

5. Drive Belt: High strength urethane, factory installed in a pre-stretched state, eliminating the need
for field belt tension adjustment. Link style belts will not be acceptable.
6. Frost Control: Factory programmed variable frequency drive controlled by outdoor air temperature
sensor and wheel pressure drop sensor to modulate wheel speed for frost control mode. Both
sensors shall be satisfied to employ frost control.
7. Warranty: 5 years.
E. Fans:
1. Type: Centrifugal, double width, double inlet, single fan forward curved type.
2. Wheels: Statically and dynamically balanced.
3. Shafts and Bearings: Ground and polished steel shafts mounted in lubricated, sealed ball bearing
pillow blocks with lubrication fittings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L10) life in excess
of 100,000 hours at a maximum cataloged operating speeds.
4. Separate motors for exhaust shall allow independent balancing of exhaust and supply airflows.
5. Speed controllers on direct-drive fans shall allow independent balancing of exhaust and supply
airflows. Fan and motor assemblies shall be mounted to unit base with neoprene isolators.
6. Fans shall be located in draw-through position in reference to the energy recovery wheel.
F. Motors:
1. Type: Permanently lubricated, heavy duty type, matched to the fan. Refer to Section 23 05 05.
2. Mounting: Belt-drive motors factory mounted to an adjustable motor plate having two heavy-duty
adjusting bolts for alignment and belt tension.
3. Drives: Sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined
cast type, keyed and securely attached to the fan wheel and motor shafts; 10 horsepower and less
shall be supplied with an adjustable drive pulley.
G. Filters:
1. Supply and Exhaust Air Filters: 2-inch thick pleated fiberglass, minimum MERV 8 (30-35% efficient)
and tested to meet UL Class 2.
2. Filter Racks: Die-formed galvanized steel.
H. Dampers:
1. Insulated, low leakage type, opposed blade.
2. Installed on outside air intake and exhaust discharge.
I. Electrical:
1. All internal electrical components shall be factory wired for single point power connection.
2. All electrical components shall be UL Listed, Approved or Classified where applicable and wired in
compliance with the National Electrical Code.
3. Factory mounted fused disconnect switch for power to units.
4. Provide motor variable speed controller inside unit.
J. Roof Curb:
1. Supplied by unit manufacturer for field assembly.
2. Dye formed galvanized steel sections.
3. Full perimeter type with gasketing provided for field installation between curb and unit base.
4. Provide a spring rail curb between unit and roof curb where fans are not internally isolated within
the unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install energy recovery equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance data at completion
of Work.
B. Install units level to prohibit excessive vibration and insure longer life.
C. Roof Mounted Units: Roof curbs provided as Work of this Section shall be coordinated with requirements
of the roofing subcontractor. Product data submittals for roof curbs, with, or without, cants will be
considered in compliance with roofer's requirements.
D. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place,
bearings lubricated, and fans have been test run under observation. Replace temporary filters used during
construction with new, clean filters prior to start of air system testing and balancing.
A. Upon completion of installation of units, and after motor has been energized with normal power source,
perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative to demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and
electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in
motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free
rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, make final alignments of
pulleys and belt tension, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
7. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in fully open position.
B. See Section 23 95 10 for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they
do not pass tests and inspections.
2. Prepare test and inspection reports.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units that cannot be satisfactorily corrected and retest as specified
above.

SECTION 23 81 10 – UNITARY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
unitary equipment.
A. Section 23 05 05, HVAC Basic Materials: Equipment nameplates and motors.
B. Section 23 05 35, HVAC Sound and Vibration Control: Vibration isolators and bases.
C. Section 23 96 10, Wiring of HVAC Equipment: Controls.
D. Section 23 90 10, Building Automation System: Controls.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Packaged Rooftop Heating-Cooling Units
2. Ductless Split System Air Conditioners
B. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product
indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power
characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Samples for Color Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: To include in operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
C. Minimum Energy Efficiency: ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1: Comply with applicable requirements
in Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning”.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS UNITARY EQUIPMENT 23 81 10 - 1 of 10

1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING COOLING UNIT (3 ton – 10 ton)
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trane, or Johnson Controls, Carrier.
B. Type: Gas fired heating cooling.
C. General: Unit shall be factory assembled, piped, internally wired and fully charged with refrigerant. Unit
shall be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115 degrees F. Cooling and
heating capacities shall be rated in accordance with ARI standards. Unit design shall be certified by the
CSA specifically for outdoor applications using propane or natural gas. Unit shall be designed for outdoor
rooftop level installation.
D. Casings: Unit casing shall be heavy gage galvanized steel with exterior surfaces painted. All panels shall
be heavy gage steel, gasketed and insulated. Glass fiber mat faced insulation shall be installed in the
indoor air section. Removable, or hinged, service panels shall be provided for access.
E. Refrigeration System: Refrigeration controls shall include condenser fan, evaporator fan and compressor
contactors, and 24 volt transformer. Each circuit shall have a separate set of refrigerant controls. Safety
controls shall include high and low pressure controls and compressor overloads.
1. Compressors: Units over 6 tons shall be provided with dual compressors. Unit shall have direct
drive hermetically sealed scroll compressors. Compressors shall be equipped with over
temperature, over current and high pressure controls. Crankcase heaters shall be standard.
Compressors shall have internal spring isolation.
2. Cooling Coil: Units 7-1/2 tons and above shall have two independent evaporator coil circuits. Coils
shall be 3/8 inch OD seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins and shall be
factory pressure tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 200 psig.
3. Drain Pan: Evaporator drain pan shall be internally sealed and insulated with copper drain
connection provided for evaporator section.
4. Condenser Coils: Units 7-1/2 tons and above shall have dual condenser coil circuit. Outdoor coils
shall be 3/8 inch OD seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Each coil
shall be factory pressure tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 200 psig.
5. Dehumidification: The unit shall be have a hot gas reheat coil. Dehumidification shall be achieved
by routing hot refrigerant gas from the discharge line through the reheat coil. Coils shall be 8mm.
OD seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins and shall be factory pressure
tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 200 psig.
F. Fans
1. Supply Air Fan: Indoor fans shall be direct drive, forward curved, centrifugal type. Fan shall have a
variable speed adjustment potentiometer in comtrol box.The motor shall be thermally protected with
permanently lubricated fan and motor bearings. Fan drive components shall be mounted on rubber
in shear isolators to reduce noise and vibration.
2. Condenser Fans: Condenser fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced
propeller fans. Weatherproof fan motors shall be UL listed for outdoor use. All motors shall have
built in thermal overload protection.
G. Filters: 2 inch throwaway, in quantity and size to fit unit filter rack.
H. Heating System: Gas fired heating section shall be a completely assembled, wired and piped, gas fired
heating system within the unit. Design shall be certified by CSA specifically for outdoor application.
Threaded gas connections.

1. Heat exchanger shall be embossed, formed and seamed, 18 gage aluminized steel. Shall be
factory tested for gas leaks. Shall be stress relieved, free floating design. Heat exchanger shall be
located upstream of cooling coil.
2. Units 5 tons and under shall have single stage gas valve. Units over 5 tons shall have 2-stage gas
valves.
3. Forced combustion blower shall insure flame stability under varying wind conditions. Shall give
higher combustion efficiency and unit location flexibility. Combustion blower motor shall not be in
hot airstream.
4. Electronic ignition system shall light each time thermostat calls for heat. Flame sensor shall prove
pilot flame and turn on main burners. Should a loss of pilot flame occur, the main valve shall close
and a spark reoccur within 0.8 second. When the thermostat is satisfied, both pilot and main burner
shall be extinguished.
I. Electrical Connections:
1. Single point power connection.
2. Integral non-fused disconnect switch.
J. Accessories
1. Roof Mounting Insulated Curb: Designed to mate with unit and provide support and complete
weathertight installation.
2. Low Ambient Operation: Unit standard refrigeration system operation shall be capable of cooling at
ambient temperatures down to 30 degrees F. Accessory dampers or two speed motor control shall
provide operation to 0 degrees F.
3. Time Delay Relay: Shall provide a 4 minute time delay between starting of the first and second
compressor.
4. Antishortcycle Timer: Shall provide a minimum off time of 5 minutes between compressor cycling.
5. Downflow Economizer, Factory or Field Installed: Enthalpy controlled 100 percent economizer shall
automatically use outdoor air for free cooling when outdoor air temperature and humidity are at
acceptable levels. Automatically modulating outdoor and return air dampers shall maintain proper
discharge air temperature into the conditioned space. Adjustable minimum position control shall be
standard. Furnished with spring return motor. Upon loss of power, dampers shall close.
Economizers shall have low leakage type dampers. Barometric relief shall be included.
6. Powered Exhaust: On units over 5 tons, powered exhaust shall be provided.
K. Controls: Unit shall be controlled via BAS/ATC system, refer to Section 23 90 10.
L. Safety Controls: Unit shall be provided with Manufacturer's minimal refrigeration only controls package
suitable for safe operation of the unit's refrigeration circuit(s). Minimal control shall include, but not be
limited to:
1. Anti-short cycle timer(s)
2. Hi pressure cut out(s)
3. Low pressure cut out(s)
4. Compressor contactor(s)
5. Condenser fan contactor(s)
6. Crankcase heater(s)
7. Circuit breaker and/or fuse protection per code and Manufacturer's requirements
8. Control transformer(s):
M. Operation Controls: Manufacturer shall provide communicating interface through BACnet or Lontalk
protocol to allow for operation of equipment as indicated in the BAS/ATC Section 23 90 10. Coordinate
with the requirements of the Building BAS/ATC system installer to allow operation of the following:
1. Digital input, for unit enable/disable

2. Digital output, for fan status (on/off)

3. Analog input signal for unit's VFD control
4. Analog input signal for either unique or combined SA/RA damper operation
5. RTD output for OA, SA, RA temperatures
6. Digital input(s) for control of unit's SA temperature set point by ATC vendor
7. Digital input(s), to invoke gas furnace heating stage(s), if applicable
8. Analog input signal for modulation of unit's variable gas valve, if applicable
9. Digital input(s), via dry contact closure(s) to invoke hot gas reheat operation for dehumidification
operation.
10. Analog input signal for modulation of unit's hot gas reheat coil.
11. Digital output(s), if available, from any Manufacturer's safeties.
12. Digital output, pressure switch, for filter status
N. Provide a five year compressor warranty for unit compressor.
2.2 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING COOLING UNIT (12-1/2 ton to 25 ton)
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trane or Johnson, Carrier, Daikin.
C. General: Designed for outdoor rooftop installation on full roof curb. Completely factory assembled and
tested, piped, internally wired, fully charged with refrigerant, compressor oil and shipped in one piece.
Provide non fused disconnect switches and all operating and safety controls factory installed. Units shall
be factory run tested. Cooling capacity rated in accordance with ARI 360. Unit shall be UL listed. Units
shall have decals and tags to aid in service and indicate caution areas. Provide electrical diagrams on long
life water resistant material attached to control panel doors.
D. Casing: Exterior panels shall be zinc coated steel, phosphatized, and finished in manufacturer's standard
painted finish. Screws shall be coated with zinc plus zinc chromate. Hinged access panels shall be 18
gage steel with tiebacks to secure door in open position to provide access to filters and heating section.
Refrigeration components, supply air fan, and compressor shall be accessible through removable panels.
Unit control panel shall be accessible through hinged access panel with quick release latches. All access
doors and panels shall be sealed with neoprene gaskets. Interior surfaces or exterior casing members
shall be insulated with 1/2 inch fiberglass insulation. Drains shall be provided on each side of the
condenser section. Unit base shall be watertight with 14 gage formed load bearing members, formed
recess and curb overhang. Unit lifting lugs shall accept chains or cables for rigging. Lifting lugs shall also
serve as unit tie down points.
1. Compressors: Unit shall have direct drive hermetically sealed reciprocating or scroll compressors.
Compressors shall be equipped with over temperature, over current and high pressure controls.
Crankcase heaters shall be standard. Compressors shall have internal spring isolation.
2. Cooling Coil: Units shall have two independent evaporator coil circuits. Coils shall be 3/8 inch OD
seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins and shall be factory pressure tested
to 450 psig and leak tested to 200 psig.
3. Hot Gas Reheat Coil: Unit shall have an aluminum fully modulating hot gas reheat coil factory
pressure tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 200 psig.

F. Condenser Fans and Motors: Vertical discharge, direct drive fans, statically balanced, with steel blades
and zinc plated steel hubs. Three phase motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings, built in current
and thermal overload protection, and weathertight slingers over bearings.
G. Supply Fan and Motor: Variable speed, Belt drive, forward curved, centrifugal type with adjustable motor
sheave, thermally protected motor, permanently lubricated bearings, motor fan assembly isolated from unit
with rubber mounts.
H. Filters: Filters shall mount integral within unit and shall be accessible by hinged access panels. Provide 2
inch thick throwaway glass fiber filter, 30 percent efficient.
I. High Efficiency Motor: Provide high efficiency motors for supply and exhaust fan.
J. Firestats: Provide two manual reset firestats, one located in unit discharge section set at 240 degrees F.,
the other located in unit return section set at 175 degrees F. Supply and exhaust fan shutdown when
firestat is activated.
K. Exhaust Return Air Section:

1. Provide modulating 100 percent exhaust fan operation consisting of two double inlet, forward
curved fans mounted on common shaft with fixed sheave drive. All fans shall be dynamically
balanced and tested in factory. Fan shaft shall be mounted on two grease lubricated ball bearings
designed for 200,000 hour average life. Provide extended grease lines to allow greasing of
bearings from unit filter section. Fan motor and assembly shall be mounted on common base to
allow consistent belt tension with no relative motion between fan and motor shafts. Entire assembly
shall be completely isolated from unit and fan board by double deflection, rubber in shear isolators
on motor sizes larger than 5 horsepower. Provide spring isolation where recommended by unit
manufacturer. Discharge dampers at unit outlet shall modulate exhaust air flow in response to
outdoor air damper position on constant volume systems. Dampers shall modulate in response to
building pressure.
L. Outdoor Air: Provide full economizer cycle operated through primary temperature controls to automatically
utilize outdoor air for "free" cooling. Automatically modulated return and outdoor air dampers shall maintain
proper temperature in conditioned spaces. Provide an automatic lockout when outdoor enthalpy
temperature is too high for proper cooling. Adjustable minimum position control shall be standard and
located on damper motor. A spring return motor shall ensure closure of outdoor air dampers during unit
shutdown or power interruption. Mechanical cooling shall be available to aid economizer cycle at any
ambient. Provide low leak economizer dampers with leakage rate of 2.5 percent of nominal air flow (400
cfm/ton) at 1 inch WC static pressure.
M. Heating Section
1. Burner: Natural gas, modulating gas valve with fan forced combustion. Electronic ignition with flame
sensor, temperature limit control supply fan time delay relay for heat exchanger cool down and
second time delay relay for gas valve closure in the event of supply fan failure.
2. Heat Exchanger: Tubular aluminized steel.
N. Roof Insulated Curb: Shall be constructed of 14 gage zinc coated steel with nominal 2 inch by 2 inch nailer
setup. Supply return air opening shall be gasketed. Curb shall be shipped knocked down for easy field
assembly. Provide channel for field adjustment of return air opening location. Curb shall be manufactured
to National Roofing Contractors Association guidelines.
O. Controls: Provide VAV control with variable frequency drive. Unit shall be provided with microprocessor
controller to operate unit from discharge air temperature and static pressure.
P. Controls: Refer to Section 23 90 10.
Q. Safety Controls: Unit shall be provided with Manufacturer's minimal refrigeration only controls package
limited to:


R. Operation Controls: Manufacturer shall provide communicating interface through BACnet or Lontalk
operation.
S. Provide a five year compressor warranty for unit compressor.
2.3 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEATING COOLING UNIT ( Over 25 ton)
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trane or Johnson, Carrier, Daikin.
C. General: Designed for outdoor rooftop installation on full roof curb. Completely factory assembled and
tested, piped, internally wired, fully charged with refrigerant, compressor oil and shipped in one piece.
Provide non fused disconnect switches and all operating and safety controls factory installed. Units shall
be factory run tested. Cooling capacity rated in accordance with ARI 360. Unit shall be UL listed. Units
shall have decals and tags to aid in service and indicate caution areas. Provide electrical diagrams on long
life water resistant material attached to control panel doors.
D. Casing: Exterior panels shall be zinc coated steel, phosphatized, and finished in manufacturer's standard
painted finish. Screws shall be coated with zinc plus zinc chromate. Hinged access panels shall be 18
gage steel with tiebacks to secure door in open position to provide access to filters and heating section.
Refrigeration components, supply air fan, and compressor shall be accessible through removable panels.
Unit control panel shall be accessible through hinged access panel with quick release latches. All access
doors and panels shall be sealed with neoprene gaskets. Interior surfaces or exterior casing members
shall be insulated with 1/2 inch fiberglass insulation. Drains shall be provided on each side of the
condenser section. Unit base shall be watertight with 14 gage formed load bearing members, formed
recess and curb overhang. Unit lifting lugs shall accept chains or cables for rigging. Lifting lugs shall also
serve as unit tie down points.

1. Compressors: Unit shall have direct drive hermetically sealed reciprocating or scroll compressors.
Compressors shall be equipped with over temperature, over current and high pressure controls.
Crankcase heaters shall be standard. Compressors shall have internal spring isolation.
2. Cooling Coil: Units shall have two independent evaporator coil circuits. Coils shall be 3/8 inch OD
seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins and shall be factory pressure tested
to 450 psig and leak tested to 200 psig.
3. Hot Gas Reheat Coil: Unit shall have an aluminum fully modulating hot gas reheat coil factory
pressure tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 200 psig.
F. Condenser Fans and Motors: Vertical discharge, direct drive fans, statically balanced, with steel blades
and zinc plated steel hubs. Three phase motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings, built in current
and thermal overload protection, and weathertight slingers over bearings.
G. Supply Fan and Motor: Variable speed, Belt drive, forward curved, centrifugal type with adjustable motor
sheave, thermally protected motor, permanently lubricated bearings, motor fan assembly isolated from unit
with rubber mounts.
H. Filters: Filters shall mount integral within unit and shall be accessible by hinged access panels. Provide 2
inch thick throwaway glass fiber filter, 30 percent efficient.
I. High Efficiency Motor: Provide high efficiency motors for supply and exhaust fan.
J. Firestats: Provide two manual reset firestats, one located in unit discharge section set at 240 degrees F.,
the other located in unit return section set at 175 degrees F. Supply and exhaust fan shutdown when
firestat is activated.
K. Exhaust Return Air Section: Barometric relief dampers shall relieve building overpressurization when that
overpressurization is great enough to overcome the return duct pressure drops. Provide 50 percent
exhaust fan operation consisting of one double inlet forward curved fan mounted rigidly to base with fixed
sheave drive. Fan shall be dynamically balanced and tested in factory. Fan shaft shall be mounted on two
grease lubricated ball bearings designed for 200,000 hours average life. Provide extended grease lines to
allow greasing of bearings from unit filter section. Provide barometric dampers at fan outlet to prevent air
backdraft. Control of 50 percent exhaust fan shall be on off control based on economizer outdoor air
damper position.
L. Outdoor Air: Provide full economizer cycle operated through primary temperature controls to automatically
utilize outdoor air for "free" cooling. Automatically modulated return and outdoor air dampers shall maintain
proper temperature in conditioned spaces. Provide an automatic lockout when outdoor enthalpy
temperature is too high for proper cooling. Adjustable minimum position control shall be standard and
located on damper motor. A spring return motor shall ensure closure of outdoor air dampers during unit
shutdown or power interruption. Mechanical cooling shall be available to aid economizer cycle at any
ambient. Provide low leak economizer dampers with leakage rate of 2.5 percent of nominal air flow (400
cfm/ton) at 1 inch WC static pressure.
M. Heating Section
1. Burner: Natural gas, modulating gas valve with fan forced combustion. Electronic ignition with
flame sensor, temperature limit control supply fan time delay relay for heat exchanger cool down
and second time delay relay for gas valve closure in the event of supply fan failure.
2. Heat Exchanger: Tubular aluminized steel.
N. Roof Insulated Curb: Shall be constructed of 14 gage zinc coated steel with nominal 2 inch by 2 inch nailer
setup. Supply return air opening shall be gasketed. Curb shall be shipped knocked down for easy field

assembly. Provide channel for field adjustment of return air opening location. Curb shall be manufactured
to National Roofing Contractors Association guidelines.
O. Controls: Provide VAV control with variable frequency drive. Unit shall be provided with microprocessor
controller to operate unit from discharge air temperature and static pressure.
P. Controls: Refer to Section 23 90 10.
Q. Safety Controls: Unit shall be provided with Manufacturer's minimal refrigeration only controls package
limited to:
R. Operation Controls: Manufacturer shall provide communicating interface through BACnet or Lontalk
operation.
S. Provide a five year compressor warranty for unit compressor.
2.4 DUCTLESS SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Mr. Slim Series, or Daikin AC, EMI International, Sanyo.
B. System shall be complete with ceiling suspended, wall mounted indoor evaporator blower as indicated on
Drawings, matching outdoor condenser-compressor unit and microprocessor remote controller.
C. Indoor Evaporator Blower

1. Cabinet:
a. Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.
b. Discharge Grille: Steel with surface-mounted frame.
c. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.

d. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated and complying with
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
e. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI
210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
3. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic
support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-reset
thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection.
4. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.
5. Fan Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 05.
6. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
7. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
8. Condensate Pump: Unit shall be provided with integral condensate pump.
D. Air-cooled Condenser-Compressor Unit

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in manufacturer’s standard color selected by Architect,
removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in
base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,
relay, and contactor.
3. Compressor Type: Scroll.
4. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-
pressure switch.
5. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
6. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI
210/240, and with liquid sub cooler.
7. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
8. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
9. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 degrees F.
E. Controls
1. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with
the following features:
a. Compressor time delay.
b. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
c. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting, operating
mode, and fan speed.
d. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.
2. Refer to Section 23 90 10.
3. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
F. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized,
and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install unitary equipment and complete piping connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
B. Filters installed in unitary equipment during the construction period will be considered temporary. Provide
new throwaway filter(s) at time of Owner acceptance of Work.
C. Install condensate drain, complete with trap, on rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation.
D. Install condensate drain, complete with trap, on all cooling coils furnished with drain pan. Provide trap seal
according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Install pre charged refrigerant piping in accordance with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. In
lieu of pre charged refrigerant piping, Contractor may elect to provide a field installed refrigerant piping
system. Install refrigerant piping system complete with charging valves, shutoff valves, sight glasses, oil
traps and double risers when required by equipment manufacturer. Consult manufacturer's literature for
specific instructions
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and
adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field
testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.3 TESTS
A. Field installed refrigerant piping shall be leak tested with a mixture of system refrigerant and dry nitrogen.
Pressurize to 350 psi and inspect for and repair all leaks. Purge system. Evacuate system and charge
system with dry nitrogen. Purge system again, evacuate and recharge with system refrigerant.

SECTION 23 82 10 – TERMINAL HEATING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
terminal heating units.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Cabinet Unit Heaters
2. Unit Heaters
3. Wall Heater
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINET UNIT HEATER, ELECTRIC
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trane Force-Flo, or QMark, Berko.
B. Cabinet: Die-formed, heavy gage steel, phosphatized, finished with baked enamel of color selected by
Architect. Removable front panel.
C. Fans: Forward curved, double inlet, aluminum centrifugal fan, mounted on double extended shaft.
D. Filter: Throwaway fiberglass type.
E. Motors: Resilient mounted on cushion base, furnished for constant speed operation. Built-in automatic
reset thermal overload protection.
F. Heating Elements: Spirally wound extended fins permanently bonded around steel sheathed resistance
coil. Provide automatic reset high limit switch wired in series with each element and located in discharge
air.
G. Installation: As indicated on Drawings.
H. Controls: Line voltage room thermostat with heat-off-fan settings. Thermally activated fan switch. Refer to
Section 23 90 10, Building Automation System.
2.2 HORIZONTAL UNIT HEATER, ELECTRIC
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trane, or QMark, Berko.
B. Casing: Heavy gage steel with baked enamel finish. Top plate shall be provided with threaded or drilled
hanger connections.
C. Heating Elements: Individually replaceable steel sheathed type with built-in automatic reset high limit
switch.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS TERMINAL HEATING UNITS 23 82 10 - 1 of 2

D. Motors: Continuous duty, direct connected to fan. Provide built in automatic reset thermal overload
protection.
E. Fan: Aluminum or steel blades, statically and dynamically balanced.
F. Outlet: Adjustable discharge louver.
G. Controls: Line voltage thermostat with heat-off-fan settings. Thermostat shall cycle fan. Thermostat shall
be remote mounted. Power disconnect switch.
H. Fan Guard: Removable heavy duty wire cage.
2.3 WALL HEATER, ELECTRIC
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trane, or QMark, Berko.
B. Casing: Tamperproof, heavy duty steel front cover with down flow discharge louvers and baked enamel
finish.
C. Heating Element: Cast or spirally wound extended fins permanently bonded around steel sheathed
resistance coil. Provide built in automatic reset high limit switch.
D. Motors: Enclosed, continuous duty, direct connected to fan, permanently lubricated, impedance protected.
E. Fan: Aluminum or steel blades, propeller.
F. Outlet: Permanent downflow louver.
G. Controls: Integral safety disconnect switch. Thermally activated fan switch. Built in adjustable thermostat.
H. Application: Recess mounted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install terminal heating units and complete piping connections in accordance with unit manufacturer's
B. Filters installed in cabinet unit heaters during the construction period will be considered temporary. Provide
new throwaway type unit filters at time of Owner acceptance of Work.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS TERMINAL HEATING UNITS 23 82 10 - 2 of 2

SECTION 23 90 10 – BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work under this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for installation of
the building automation system and automatic temperature control system (BAS/ATC).
B. BAS/ATC shall be a direct extension of the existing building Schneider Electric Building Automation
System.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete BAS/ATC shop drawings for Engineer's approval prior to installation or fabrication of any
equipment. Submittal data shall include a schedule of all devices to be installed, including proposed
locations. Devices shall be properly sized and selected for optimum system operation.
B. Deviations from the sequence of control specified herein shall be clearly noted in the sequence of control
furnished with shop drawing submittals.
C. Submittals shall include software, control equipment, control valves, motor-operated dampers, damper
actuators, sequence of operations, points list, complete system drawings, etc.
A. The BAS/ATC system shall be designed, installed, commissioned and serviced by factory trained
personnel.
1.4 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE
A. At completion of system installation, BAS/ATC system manufacturer shall adjust all thermostats, control
valves, motors and other equipment provided under this contract with trained personnel in the direct
employ of BAS/ATC system manufacturer. He shall place said equipment in complete operating condition
subject to approval of Engineer, and instruct Owner's operating personnel in the operation of the system.
B. BAS/ATC system, as shown on Drawings and specified herein, shall be guaranteed free from defects in
workmanship and material under normal use and service for a period of 1 year after acceptance by Owner.
C. Equipment herein described proven to be defective in workmanship or material during the guarantee
period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced by BAS/ATC system manufacturer at no charge to Owner.
D. BAS/ATC system manufacturer shall maintain an up to date software program to provide Owner with
backup in the event of system failure at any future date.
1.5 WIRING
A. All power and wiring required by the BAS/ATC system, controllers and required appurtenances shall be
provided by BAS/ATC system supplier.
B. Detailed wiring diagrams and complete field supervision shall be provided by system installer.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 23 90 10 - 1 of 18

C. System installer shall furnish and install control devices specified in this Section unless specifically stated
otherwise.
D. Maximum allowable voltage for wiring inside control panels shall be 120V.
E. All wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code and requirements of Division 26.
F. Control wiring penetrations at wall-mounted sensors shall be calked and sealed to prevent air leakage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Basis of Design, to match existing system: Schneider Electric; TAC I/A Series
B. Substitutions: None.
2.2 GENERAL
A. BAS/ATC system shall include, but not be limited to, the following components:
1. Operator interface shall consist of hardware and software that allows full user monitoring and
adjustment of system parameters.
2. System application controllers shall manage the energy and building management capacities of the
automation system, as well as, facilitate remote communications and central monitoring.
3. Application specific controllers shall provide distributed, pre engineered control, specific to the
mechanical equipment specified.
4. Custom application controllers with distributed custom programming capability shall provide control
for nonstandard control sequences.
5. Data communications capability shall allow data to be shared between the various controllers in the
architecture.
6. System software shall include system software for global application functions, application software
for distributed controllers, and operator interface software.
7. End devices such as sensors, actuators, dampers, valves, and relays.
B. The failure of any single component shall not interrupt the control strategies of other operational devices.
System expansion shall be through the addition of end devices, controllers, and other device specified
herein.
2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Local Interface. Update existing work stations to be located as directed by Owner. The graphic based
workstation shall be able to access all information in the system, reside on the same high speed LAN as
the central plant controllers, and shall be web-based. Workstation shall be able to be custom configured
based on the needs of the operator.
B. Web Browser: The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard
Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Mozilla Firefox. The Web browser software shall run on any
operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser and provide the same
view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface
methodology as is provided by the graphical interface. The Web browser client shall support:
1. User log-on identification and password

2. Graphical screens developed for the graphical interface shall be the same screens used for the
Web browser client.
3. Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges including: modifying schedules, calendars
and set points; commands to start and stop objects; viewing of logs and charts; and viewing and
acknowledgement of alarms.
C. For Local Area Network installations, provide access to the LAN from a remote location, via the Internet.
The Owner shall provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via high speed cable modem,
asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) modem, ISDN line, T1 Line or via the customer’s Intranet to a
corporate server providing access to an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
2.4 SYSTEM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
A. BAS/ATC system shall be composed of one independent, stand alone, microprocessor based system
application controller to manage the global strategies described in application software section.
B. System application controller shall have ample memory to support its operating system, database, and
programming requirements.
C. Operating system of the system application controller shall manage the input and output communications
signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central
monitoring and alarms.
D. Data shall automatically be shared between system application controllers when they are networked
together.
E. Database and custom programming routines of remote system application controllers shall be editable
from single operator station.
F. System applications controllers shall have the capability of being remotely monitored over telephone
modem. Additional capabilities shall include automatically dialing out alarms, gathering alarms, reports and
logs, programming an downloading databases.
G. Controller shall continually check status of all processor and memory circuits. If a failure is detected,
controller shall:
1. Assume a predetermined failure mode.
2. Emit an alarm.
3. Display card failure identification.
2.5 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
A. Application specific controllers shall be stand alone, microprocessor based direct digital controllers with
sufficient memory to handle its operating system, database and programming requirements.
B. Application specific controller shall be pre programmed, tested, and factory mounted on mechanical
equipment to ensure reliability.
1. Where factory mounting is not possible, controllers shall be factory programmed and tested prior to
shipment to jobsite. Controllers shall be clearly labeled as to controller type, where installed, and
software address (if applicable). Controller shall be fully tested upon installation to ensure that it is
properly matched to the equipment it is controlling.
C. Controller shall communicate with other devices on communication network and be fully integrated with
other system components.
D. Hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures,
and shall be rated for operation at minus 40 degrees F to 155 degrees F.
2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust proof enclosures, and shall be
rated for operation at 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
2.6 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
A. Custom application controllers shall provide stand alone control and require no additional system
components for complete operation. It shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system,
database, and programming requirements.
B. All programming required for operation shall be memory resident and shall be retained in permanent
memory. Battery backup for a minimum of 72 hours is also permissible.
C. Custom application controller shall be configured such that portable operator interface can be plugged
directly into it or within sight for programming, editing, and other operator functions.
D. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
E. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures, and shall
be rated for operation at minus 40 degrees F to 155 degrees F.
F. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust proof enclosures, and shall be rated for
operation at 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
2.7 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
A. Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through system application, or application specific
controllers. Slave devices are also acceptable. Any critical points requiring immediate reaction shall be tied
directly into controller hosting control software algorithm for critical function.
B. Binary inputs shall allow monitoring of on off signals from remote devices. Binary inputs shall provide a
wetting current of 12MA at 12VDC to be compatible with commonly available control devices.
1. All status points shown on point list shall be positive proof differential pressure or current sensing
binary switches.
C. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage, current, or resistance signals and shall have a
minimum resolution of 0.1 percent of sensing range. Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field
configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
D. Binary outputs shall provide a continuous low voltage signal for on off control of remote devices. Where
specified in sequence of operations or indicated on points list, binary outputs shall have 3 position on off
auto override switches, status lights, and shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed
position.
E. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a
0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 milliampere signal as required to provide proper control of output device.
F. System architecture shall allow for point expansion in one of the following ways:
1. Addition of input/output cards to an existing system application controller.
2. A slave controller may be used to expand point capacity.
3. 10 percent expansion capacity for all point types in all DDC panels.

2.8 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES
A. Control Valves
1. Two-way or three-way [mixing] [diverting] valves as indicated with linkage for connection to valve
operator. Maximum pressure drop shall be 3 psig at design flow.
B. Valve Actuators
1. Valve actuators shall be electronic, spring return, low voltage (24VAC), and properly selected for
valve body and service.
2. Actuators shall be fully proportioning and be spring return for normally open or normally closed
operation as called out in the sequence of operations.
2.9 TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. Temperature sensors shall be integrated circuit temperature detector sensors (RTD) or thermistor as
dictated by requirements herein.
B. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well.
C. Space sensors shall be equipped with setpoint adjustment and/or override switch as specified on the
Drawings or in the sequence of operations.
D. Accuracies shall be plus or minus 1 degree F for standard applications. Where high accuracy is required,
accuracies shall be plus or minus.2 degrees F.
2.10 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. The following energy management capabilities shall be furnished standard as part of the BAS/ATC
system.
1. Scheduling:
a. Scheduling program shall have a minimum of 32 named master schedules. Each master
schedule shall have a minimum of eight day schedules (seven plus holiday).
b. To these master schedules, a minimum of 24 system loads (HVAC equipment, etc.) or
groups of loads can be assigned.
c. Master schedule shall be individually editable for each day of the week and holiday.
d. On any day, a minimum of six time of day events may be edited including:
1) Equipment start stop.
2) Optimum start stop.
3) Occupied unoccupied.
4) Duty cycle start stop.
5) Night purge cycle start.
B. Optimum Start Stop:

1. An optimum start stop program shall determine the required equipment start stop timing by
applying inside outside temperature information to user's time of day schedule.
2. Optimum start stop program shall run independently for each controlled load or zone.
3. Program shall automatically make adjustments to itself based on historical data.
C. Duty Cycling:
1. Duty cycle program shall cycle a minimum of 32 pieces of equipment according to user defined on
off patterns.
2. User editable parameters shall include period length, off time and delay time. Program shall
incorporate temperature and humidity overrides to ensure that indoor air quality an occupant
comfort are not compromised.

D. Software Graphics:
1. Provide color graphic system flow diagram display for each HVAC system with each point
indicated.
a. Provide text sequence of operation for each system launched from graphic.
b. Graphics based on real-time data.
c. Provide with user adjustable settings.
d. Provide graphic editing tool.
e. Provide library graphics containing basic symbols and icons.
f. Provide color graphic display of each section and floor of the building. Indicate each zone
with values and status. Provide historical data viewer functionality.
g. Provide color graphic display for each system; properly label rooms with actual name and
number.
h. Provide configuration diagrams.
i. Provide navigation tree that will allow user to view and change points but stay in graphic
system.
j. Provide custom reports with graphics as specified in article Building Management Software
below.
E. Demand Limiting:
1. Demand limiting program shall monitor building power consumption from signals generated by a
pulse generator (provided by other) mounted at building power meter or from a watts transducer or
current transformer attached to building feeder lines.
2. Demand limiting program shall be based on a predictive sliding window algorithm. The program
shall be self adjusting and shall control a minimum of two independent demand limiting
applications.
3. Demand limiting parameters shall include 15 to 30 minute intervals, shed restore dead band width
as well as maximum off time and temperature limits for each load to ensure that indoor air quality
and occupancy comfort are not compromised.
4. HVAC equipment shall be protected by anti recycle timer described below.
5. Input capability shall also be provided for an end of billing period indication.
F. Wireless Access Protocol:

1. Provide software and protocol to connect remote web-accessed devices such as handheld phones,
laptops and tablets to the BAS/ATC, with the ability for monitoring, receiving alarms, viewing
graphics, and user interface abilities to make setting changes.
2.11 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. The following building management capabilities shall be furnished as part of the BAS/ATC system.
1. Timed Override:
a. A timed override program shall be provided to enable the building operator to set up devices
or groups of devices to be temporarily turned on for a defined period of time based on
binary inputs, analog inputs, or CRT inputs.
b. Override time shall be adjustable from 1 to 720 minutes.
c. A standard weekly and monthly report shall be provided for easy documentation of time
override operation.
2. Direct Digital Control:
a. Direct digital control program shall allow modulating control of remote devices based on
sensed data.
b. Standard control strategies shall include proportional, proportional plus integral, and
proportional plus integral plus derivative control.
c. Control routines shall be flexible enough to allow operator to set parameters and make
adjustments.
d. Direct digital control loop set up and modification shall be done through pre formatted edit
screens with parameters listed in English language.

e. Program shall include a dynamic graphic display printout routing to indicate status and real
time performance of control loop.
f. As an alternative, auto tuning loops or another method of testing and proving control loop
response may be provided.
3. Custom Programming Language:
a. A custom control language capability shall be provided to allow operator to create real time,
equation based, custom control routines.
b. All binary and analog points in the BAS/ATC system shall be available as inputs to the
custom routines.
c. Equation operations shall include math functions such as addition, subtraction,
multiplication, division, square root, minimum maximum and average. Logical functions such
as greater than, less than, equal to, not equal to, less than or equal to, greater than or equal
to, variable timing and delays shall also be allowed.
4. Totalizing:
a. A totalizing program shall be provided to enable building operator to monitor and totalize
any user defined flow such as water flow, electricity, natural gas, steam and air.
b. A minimum of 64 totalizing equations shall be provided.
5. Run Time Maintenance:
a. System shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon
user designated run time, starts and/or calendar date limits.
b. A minimum of 32 separate devices shall be monitored under this function.
6. Expanded Messages:
a. User shall be able to define a minimum of ten 40 character messages for automatic printing
in the event of system alarm and/or run time and maintenance events.
7. Reports and Logs:
a. System shall include the capability to store, review an print the following reports and logs. In
addition, if a PC interface is specified, these reports shall be saved to diskette as an ASCII
file for use by other Owner furnished software packages.
1) Current Summary Report: An instantaneous summary of building status including
heating and cooling degree days, on and off peak electrical demand performance,
current electrical KWH consumption, and summary for critical temperature sensors
listing today's minimum and maximum values.
2) Monthly Summary report: An end of month summary of building status including
heating and cooling degrees days, on and off peak electrical demand performance,
current electrical KWH consumption, and summary for critical temperature sensors
listing this month's minimum and maximum values.
3) Monthly Demand Limiting Report: A report for logging electrical demand
performance (both on and off peak), and the KWH consumption for each of two utility
meter programs shall be provided to building operator. Included shall be times of
today's and yesterday's demand peaks as well as time and date of monthly demand
peaks. Report shall log electrical performance for present day and previous 32 days.
4) Yearly Demand Limiting Report: A report for logging electrical demand performance
(both on and off peak) and KWH consumption for each of two utility meter programs.
Report shall log electrical performance for present month and previous 12 months.
5) Yearly Meter Report: A report for logging electrical KWH consumption for up to 6
submeters. Report shall log electrical performance for present month and previous
12 months.
6) Yearly Degree Day Report: A current month and previous 12 month summary of
heating and cooling degree days.
7) Weekly Temperature Report: A previous 7 day summary of minimum and maximum
temperatures for critical zone temperature sensors.
8) Weekly Override Time Report: A previous 7 day summary of after-hours override
usage (in hours and minutes) for timed override groups.
9) Monthly Override Time Report: A current and previous month summary of after-
hours override usage (in hours and minutes) for timed override groups).
10) Trend Logs: A custom report generator allowing user to trend and store
11) Event Logs: System shall track system events including alarms, logons and
diagnostics.
12) Input/Output Status Reports: This reporting tool shall allow operator to review status
of all system points.

13) HVAC Equipment Reports: Reports shall be provided which indicate HVAC
equipment status as well as status of all input/output points of connected HVAC
equipment.
14) Customer Report Capability: Building operator shall be provided with a simple
method of creating custom reports.
8. Anti Recycle Timer Protection:
a. A software program shall be provided to allow each individual piece of HVAC equipment to
be individually programmable with minimum on, and minimum off timers to protect HVAC
equipment from rapid cycling due to system or operator error.
b. Minimum on off timer program shall have priority over all application software functions
except fire shutdown and smoke evacuation modes.
c. For system start up purposes, timers shall be set at 15 minutes or at an acceptable time
specified by HVAC equipment supplier.
d. Timers shall be individually programmable from 0 to 120 minutes.
9. Diagnostics:
a. Building operator shall be provided with a report containing common symptom and
diagnostic trouble shooting guides for HVAC system equipment.
b. Compile and enter equipment symptom and diagnosis information from manufacturers
operations and maintenance manuals. When an equipment alarm is received, allow printing
of report to assist personnel in troubleshooting.
c. A system self test shall be provided. On self test initiation, panels failing to respond shall be
identified on printer.
10. Custom Programming Requirements:
a. A user friendly custom DDC programming utility shall be provided to allow building operator
to tailor system to meet individual needs and respond to changing building requirements.
b. Building operator shall be able to create custom DDC routines using analog and binary point
values, alarm states, constants, and shared variables to perform calculations. Results of
these calculations shall be used to perform analog control, binary control, DDC loop
enable/disable and other control functions.
c. Building operator shall be able to download these routines to system or custom application
controllers either via modem, direct connect, or through a portable operator interface.
d. Custom routines in distributed controllers shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory to
prevent loss in a power outage. Custom routines hosted in system applications controllers
may use battery backup so long as a quick method of system downloading is provided.
2.12 MOTOR OPERATED DAMPERS
A. Remote mounted motor operated dampers shall be furnished by the BAS/ATC system manufacturer and
installed by the HVAC Contractor. Dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type as required for the
application. Dampers shall be of the low leakage type of not more than 1 percent leakage based on a 4
inch WC static pressure and a 2000 feet per minute approach velocity. Seals on damper blades and
frames shall be replaceable in the field. Furnish and install for motor operated dampers, including motor
operated dampers furnished by the unit manufacturer, piston type damper actuators providing ample
power to smoothly position damper to any position. Damper operators shall be equipped with pilot
positioners where specified or required to meet the specified sequence of operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Mounting height for space sensors and thermostats shall be 44 inches from the finished floor to the
centerline of the device. If the designated location of a device places it partially between two finishes, the
actual location shall be adjusted to set the device entirely on one finished surface only, but actual height
shall not exceed mounting heights indicated or required by codes.

PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Single Zone VAV Packaged Rooftop Units RTU-1, 2, 3, 4:

1. The unit’s shall be indexed to unoccupied/occupied cycles from the BAS/ATC system. In the event
of loss of communication with the building automation control system, the unit controller shall
automatically transfer control set points for heating, cooling, and night setback to default values
programmed at the controller.
2. Rooftop Units RTU-1 and 2 shall operate as a single zone during non-event conditions and RTU-3
and 4 shall operate as a single zone during non-event conditions. Systems shall operate in a
lead/lag mode of operation. The lead/lag operation shall be reversed every two weeks to promote
even run times for the equipment. Event mode shall be indexed based on event scheduling at the
users head end.
3. Night Setback/Setup: During the unoccupied times of operation (setback/setup) the unit fan shall
be de-energized and the outdoor air/return air dampers shall be configured to full return air
positions. If the space temperature falls below or rises above its respective setback or setup
temperature, the lead unit fan shall energize and the furnace section shall heat or the cooling
system shall cool the space (see cooling sequence for details) to within setback/setup parameters.
The unit’s outside air dampers shall remain closed. Initial user selectable setback/setup
temperatures shall be 60 degrees setback and 85 degrees setup during unoccupied times.
4. Heating Cycles:
a. Preoccupancy Mode – the lead unit shall be turned on based on optimal start/stop
programming. During the heating preoccupancy mode of operation, the supply fan shall be
turned on at maximum VFD speed (adjustable) and the outside/return air dampers shall be
modulated to provide full return air and the unit’s gas heat exchanger and modulating gas
valve shall operate to provide a discharge temperature of 95 degree F (set point adjustable).
When the set point temperatures are achieved, the unit shall be indexed to the occupied
heating mode.
b. Occupied Heating- the lead unit’s outside/return air dampers shall open to 10 percent
outside air (1500 cfm) and shall be controlled by the outside air/return air damper control.
The supply air fan shall be controlled by the variable frequency drive. The VAV packaged
rooftop unit shall utilize the gas heat exchanger and modulating gas valves to maintain
space temperature setpoint. The supply air fan shall operate at 80% of design airflow. As
the space air temperature begins to drop, the PID loop associated with the rooftop unit shall
operate the heat exchanger and modulate the gas valve to maintain space temperature. On
a continued drop in space temperature, the unit’s shall modulate the gas valve open to
maintain space temperature. As the space air temperature begins to rise, the PID loop shall
modulate the gas valve closed to maintain space temperature. If the lead unit is unable to
maintain space temperature for more than 15 minutes; the lag unit’s outside/return air
dampers shall open to 10 percent outside air (1500 cfm) and shall be controlled by the
outside air/return air damper control. The supply air fan shall be controlled by the variable
frequency drive. The VAV packaged rooftop unit shall utilize the gas heat exchanger and
modulating gas valves to maintain space temperature setpoint. The supply air fan shall
operate at 80% of design airflow. As the space air temperature begins to drop, the PID loop
associated with the rooftop unit shall operate the heat exchanger and modulate the gas
valve to maintain space temperature. On a continued drop in space temperature, the unit’s
shall modulate the gas valve open to maintain space temperature. As the space air
temperature begins to rise, the PID loop shall modulate the gas valve closed to maintain
space temperature. If space temperature rises above setpoint for more than 15 minutes, the
lag unit shall be indexed off, and it’s outside air dampers shall close.
c. Event Heating- the lead and lag unit’s outside/return air dampers shall open to 25 percent
outside air (3750 cfm) and shall be controlled by the outside air/return air damper control.
The supply air fan for both units shall be controlled by the variable frequency drive. The
VAV packaged rooftop units shall utilize the gas heat exchanger and modulating gas valves
to maintain space temperature setpoint. The supply air fan shall operate at 80% of design
airflow. As the space air temperature begins to drop, the PID loop associated with the
rooftop unit shall operate the heat exchanger and modulate the gas valve to maintain space
temperature. On a continued drop in space temperature, the unit’s shall modulate the gas
valve open to maintain space temperature. As the space air temperature begins to rise, the
PID loop shall modulate the gas valve closed to maintain space temperature.
5. Cooling Cycles:

a. Preoccupancy Mode – the lead unit shall be turned on based on optimal start/stop
programming. During the Cooling preoccupancy mode of operation, the supply fan shall be
turned on at design airflow VFD speed (adjustable) and the outside/return air dampers shall
be modulated to provide full return air, tand the unit shall produce 55 degree (adjustable)
supply air by utilizing its economizer and/or mechanical cooling system. When the setpoint
temperature is achieved, the unit shall be indexed to the Occupied Cooling Mode.
b. Occupied Cooling- The lead unit shall be indexed to the cooling mode of operation by the
ATC system and the VAV Package Rooftop Unit’s outside air damper shall be allowed to
modulate with the unit’s return air damper to provide the required supply air temperature in
accordance with the Cooling Mode supply air temperature Reset schedule as long as the
outdoor air enthalpy is lower than the return air enthalpy. If the outdoor air enthalpy is
greater than the return air enthalpy, the VAV Packaged Rooftop Unit’s outdoor air damper
shall be open to 10 percent outside air (1500 cfm). The unit’s mechanical refrigeration
system shall be energized to maintain the supply air temperature in accordance with the
Cooling Mode reset schedule if supply air temperature is not met by the unit’s economizer
control. The unit’s mechanical refrigeration system shall be energized when indexed on to
maintain setpoint temperature. During Cooling mode:
1) Unit gas heat exchanger shall be off.
2) The supply air fan shall operate continuously, controlled by its VFD, refer to control
below.
3) The supply air temperature setpoint shall be maintained as described below.
Cooling Mode Reset Schedule
O.A. Supply Air

Temp. Temp.
60 59
85 55
4) As the room temperature begins to rise, the unit’s PID loop shall begin to accelerate
the fan in order to optimally arrive at the space’s adjustable cooling set point. As the
room temperature begins to drop, the unit’s PID loop shall begin to decelerate the
fan in order to optimally arrive at the space’s adjustable cooling setpoint. When the
outside air drops below 60 degrees (adjustable) or the space temperature drops
below the heating setpoint with the supply fan operating at less than 30 percent of
full airflow, the unit shall be indexed to the heating mode of operation. If the space
temperature rises above setpoint with unit operating at 100% airflow for more than
15 minutes, the lag unit shall be enabled and the both unit fans shall modulate speed
to maintain space temperature, if fans operate at less than 30 percent of full airflow
with both units in operation, the lag unit shall be disabled and it’s dampers shall
close.
5) During Occupied Cooling mode, if the space humidity rises above setpoint (60% RH)
for longer than 15 minutes, the Unit shall be indexed to dehumidification mode of
operation. The mechanical refrigeration system shall operate at full capacity, if the
space temperature drops below set point, the unit’s hot gas reheat coil shall operate
to maintain the Cooling supply air temperature reset. When space humidity drops
below setpoint for more than 15 minutes, the unit shall revert back to the normal
cooling operation.
c. Event Cooling- Both the lead and lag unit shall be indexed to the cooling mode of operation
by the ATC system and the VAV Package Rooftop Unit’s outside air damper shall be
allowed to modulate with the unit’s return air damper to provide the required supply air
temperature in accordance with the Cooling Mode supply air temperature Reset schedule as
long as the outdoor air enthalpy is lower than the return air enthalpy. If the outdoor air
enthalpy is greater than the return air enthalpy, the VAV Packaged Rooftop Unit’s outdoor
air damper shall be open to 25 percent outside air (3750 cfm). The unit’s mechanical
refrigeration system shall be energized to maintain the supply air temperature in accordance
with the Cooling Mode reset schedule if supply air temperature is not met by the unit’s
economizer control. The unit’s mechanical refrigeration system shall be energized when
indexed on to maintain setpoint temperature. During Cooling mode:

below.
O.A. Supply Air

Temp. Temp.
60 59
85 55
d. As the room temperature begins to rise, the unit’s PID loop shall begin to accelerate the fan
in order to optimally arrive at the space’s adjustable cooling set point. As the room
temperature begins to drop, the unit’s PID loop shall begin to decelerate the fan in order to
optimally arrive at the space’s adjustable cooling setpoint. When the outside air drops below
60 degrees (adjustable) or the space temperature drops below the heating setpoint with the
supply fan operating at less than 30 percent of full airflow, the unit shall be indexed to the
heating mode of operation.
e. During Event Cooling mode, if the space humidity rises above setpoint (60% RH) for longer
than 15 minutes, the Unit shall be indexed to dehumidification mode of operation. The
mechanical refrigeration system shall operate at full capacity, if the space temperature
drops below set point, the unit’s hot gas reheat coil shall operate to maintain the Cooling
supply air temperature reset. When space humidity drops below setpoint for more than 15
minutes, the unit shall revert back to the normal cooling operation.
6. Outside Air/Return Air Damper Control - When the CO2 level in the space increases to 700 ppm
(adjustable) above referenced outdoor CO2 levels as sensed by a CO2 monitor in the space and a
CO2 monitor mounted on the exterior of the building and external reference at exterior of the
building, the outside air damper shall modulate an additional 10 percent open. If after a period of
15 minutes, the CO2 level does not fall below setpoint, the outdoor air damper shall modulate an
additional 10 percent open. Dampers shall continue to modulate open until the CO2 setpoint is
achieved. If CO2 level drops below 500 ppm (adjustable) for a period of 15 minutes, the outdoor
air damper shall modulate closed at 10 percent intervals until unit returns to the initial open
position.
7. Relief Controls: During economizer operation, the unit’s powered exhaust fan section shall operate
under manufacturer’s control to maintain building differential pressure of 0.1” W.C. (adjustable).
8. Freeze Protection: If the discharge air temperature drops below 40 degrees (adjustable) the return
damper shall fully open and the outdoor air damper shall be fully closed. The fan VFD shall ramp
to full airflow and the gas heat exchanger and gas valve shall open until reaching the low
temperature limit setpoint. Refer to safety alarm below.
9. Safeties
a. BAS/ATC shall turn off the fan and mechanical refrigeration system and an alarm shall be
reported to the operator interface if any of the following conditions occurs:
1) High static pressure of 3.5 inches w.c. (adjustable) is detected downstream of the
unit’s discharge. This safety shall be hardwired to the unit turn the unit fan off.
2) Detection of supply air temperature below 40 degrees F (adjustable).
3) Failure of the supply air fan (as sensed by a current sensor)
b. Upon the detection of products of combustion by duct mounted smoke detectors in the
return ductwork, the Rooftop unit shall turn off through a hard wired connection, an alarm
shall be reported at the operator interface.
10. Provide differential pressure switch across filter bank. Upon detection of pressure above 0.2” w.g.
(adjustable) send signal to the operator interface that the filters require changing.
B. Single Zone VAV Packaged Rooftop Units RTU-5:


temperature, the unit fan shall energize and the furnace section shall heat or the cooling system
shall cool the space (see cooling sequence for details) to within setback/setup parameters. Initial
user selectable setback/setup temperatures shall be 60 degrees setback and 85 degrees setup
during unoccupied times.
3. Heating Cycles:
a. Preoccupancy Mode - the unit shall be turned on based on optimal start/stop programming.
During the heating preoccupancy mode of operation, the supply fan shall be turned on at
maximum VFD speed (adjustable) and the outside/return air dampers shall be modulated to
provide full return air, and the unit’s gas heat exchanger and modulating gas valve shall
operate to provide a discharge temperature of 95 degree F (set point adjustable). When the
set point temperatures are achieved, the unit shall be indexed to the occupied heating
mode.
b. Occupied Heating- Occupied Heating- the lead unit’s outside/return air dampers shall open
to 10 percent outside air (525 cfm) and shall be controlled by the outside air/return air
damper control. The supply air fan shall be controlled by the variable frequency drive. The
VAV packaged rooftop unit shall utilize the gas heat exchanger and modulating gas valves
PID loop shall modulate the gas valve closed to maintain space temperature..
4. Cooling Cycles:
During the Cooling preoccupancy mode of operation, the supply fan shall be turned on at
design airflow VFD speed (adjustable) and the outside/return air dampers shall be
modulated to provide full return air, and the unit shall produce 55 degree (adjustable) supply
air by utilizing its economizer and/or mechanical cooling system. When the setpoint
b. Occupied Cooling- The unit shall be indexed to the cooling mode of operation by the ATC
system and the VAV Package Rooftop Unit’s outside air damper shall be allowed to
below.
O.A. Supply Air

Temp. Temp.
60 59
85 55
c. As the room temperature begins to rise, the unit’s PID loop shall begin to accelerate the fan

d. During Occupied Cooling mode, if the space humidity rises above setpoint (60% RH) for
longer than 15 minutes, the Unit shall be indexed to dehumidification mode of operation.
The mechanical refrigeration system shall operate at full capacity, if the space temperature
position.
8. Safeties
4) Failure of the ERV outside air fan, exhaust fan, or enthalpy wheel motor (as sensed
by a current sensor)
5) The outdoor airflow quantity shall be monitored and if the airflow decreases 10%
below the setpoint (adjustable) when the system is not in economizer mode, an
alarm shall be signaled to the operator interface.
return ductwork, the Rooftop unit and ERV fans shall turn off through a hard wired
connection, an alarm shall be reported at the operator interface.
C. Rooftop Units: VAV Packaged Rooftop Units and associated energy recovery ventilators RTU-6/ ERV-
1and associated VAV Boxes w/ Hydronic Heat.
positions, and the associated ERV fans and enthalpy wheel shall be de-energized. If the space
temperature falls below or rises above its respective setback or setup temperature, the unit fan
shall energize and the furnace section shall heat or the cooling system shall cool the space (see
cooling sequence for details) to within setback/setup parameters. The associated ERV shall remain
off and ERV dampers shall remain closed. Initial user selectable setback/setup temperatures shall
be 60 degrees setback and 85 degrees setup during unoccupied times.
3. Warm-up Mode:

a. The unit shall be turned on based on optimal start/stop programming. During the heating
preoccupancy mode of operation, the supply fan shall be turned on at maximum VFD speed
(adjustable) and the outside/return air dampers shall be modulated to provide full return air,
ERV’s dampers shall remain closed, ERV’s fans and wheel shall remain off, and the unit’s
gas heat exchanger and modulating gas valve shall operate to provide 95 degree F
discharge air. When the set point temperatures are achieved, the unit shall be indexed to
the occupied heating mode.
b. As the room temperatures begin to rise, the PID loop associated with the room’s respective
VAV box(s) shall begin to close the VAV damper in order to optimally arrive at the space’s
adjustable heating set point. The VAV boxes associated with each room shall be allowed to
modulate completely shut during warm up operations. If at any time during the Warm Up
Mode the supply fan and return fan VFD’s output falls below 30 percent (adjustable), the
system shall index it’s associated VAV boxes to their respective minimum heating positions
and the system supply air temperature shall be reset to 70 degrees F (adjustable).
c. The room temperatures associated with a given VAV Packaged Rooftop Unit’s VAV boxes
shall be averaged and the average temperature value shall be used to initiate the occupied
mode of operation. When the average room temperatures during the Warm Up Mode are
within 1 degree of the average of the occupied set points, the VAV packaged rooftop unit
system shall index to the occupied mode.
4. Cool Down Mode
a. The unit supply fan shall run and the unit shall produce 53 degrees F (adjustable) supply air
by utilizing its economizer and/or refrigerant system. The supply fan shall be turned on at
modulated to provide full return air, ERV’s dampers shall remain closed, ERV’s fans and
wheel shall remain off.
b. As the room temperatures begin to fall, the PID loop associated with the room’s respective
VAV box(s) shall begin to close the VAV box in order to optimally arrive at the space’s
adjustable cooling set point. The VAV boxes associated with each room shall be allowed to
modulate completely shut during cool down operations. If at any time during the Cool Down
Mode the supply fan and return fan VFD’s output falls below 30 percent (adjustable), the
system shall index it’s associated VAV boxes to their respective minimum cooling positions
and the system supply air temperature shall be reset to Occupied Mode temperature
required by the Cooling Mode Reset Schedule.
c. The room temperatures associated with a given VAV packaged rooftop unit’s VAV boxes
shall be averaged and the average temperature value shall be used to initiate the occupied
mode of operation. When the average room temperatures during the Cool Down Mode are
within 1 degree of the average of the occupied set points, the VAV rooftop unit system shall
index to the occupied mode.
5. Occupied Mode
a. In the occupied mode of operation, the outside/return air dampers shall be closed to outside
air, the ERV outside air and exhaust air dampers shall open, and the ERV’s fans and wheel
shall be turned on. The supply air fan shall be controlled by the variable frequency drive. In
the occupied mode of operation, the VAV rooftop unit shall deliver supply air based on the
following reset schedules for Heating and Cooling Modes of operation:
Heating Mode Reset Schedule
O.A. Temp. Supply Air Temp.
0 62
55 58

O.A. Temp. Supply Air Temp.
55 58
80 53
The change over from the Heating Mode to the Cooling Mode shall occur at 55 degrees F
(adjustable) outdoor air temperature.

b. During the Heating Mode, the system’s VAV boxes shall prevent overheating of their spaces
by modulating it’s SCR controlled electric heat, and then modulate their air valves to their
Heating Minimums. On a drop in space temperature the reverse shall occur.
c. During the Cooling Mode, If the outdoor air enthalpy is less than the return air enthalpy, the
VAV package rooftop unit’s outside air damper shall be allowed to modulate with the unit’s
return air damper to provide the required supply air temperature in accordance with the
Cooling Mode supply air temperature reset schedule. If the economizer mode is unable to
maintain leaving supply temperature the unit’s mechanical refrigeration system shall be
energized to maintain supply air temperature. During Economizer mode of operation, the
ERV outside air fan and exhaust fan shall be remain on, and ERV’s outside air and exhaust
dampers shall be open. If the unit is not indexed to operate under economizer mode, the
VAV packaged rooftop unit’s outdoor air damper shall be closed, the ERV’s outside air and
exhaust air fans shall operate and dampers shall be open, and the unit’s mechanical
refrigeration system shall operate to maintain the supply air temperature in accordance with
the Cooling Mode Reset Schedule. If the space humidity, as sensed by any space humidity
sensor, rises above 60 percent (adjustable) relative humidity, the unit shall be indexed to
the Dehumidification Mode of operation. The mechanical refrigeration system shall operate
at full capacity, if the space temperature drops below set point, the unit’s hot gas reheat coil
shall operate to maintain the Cooling supply air temperature reset. When the space
humidity, as sensed by the room humidity sensor, drops five percentage points below the
adjustable high humidity set point, the unit shall return to its Cooling Mode of operation. The
system’s VAV boxes shall prevent overcooling of their spaces by first modulating their air
valves to their Cooling Minimums and on a continued fall in space temperature the air valve
shall be indexed to the heating minimum airflow and modulating the SCR controlled electric
heat. On a rise in space temperature the reverse shall occur.
6. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Control

a. The VAV packaged rooftop unit’s associated VFD(s) and supply fan shall be controlled by a
static pressure sensor located two thirds of the way down the system’s supply duct main.
The VAV system balancer shall determine the required minimum system static pressure
necessary for the most remote (from a static pressure stand point) VAV box to deliver its
maximum scheduled cooling air volume. The minimum system static pressure necessary for
the most remote VAV box to deliver its maximum scheduled cooling air volume shall be
input to the system’s the Cooling Mode Reset Schedule’s supply static pressure set point
(adjustable). The VAV system balancer shall determine the required minimum system static
pressure necessary for the most remote VAV box to deliver its minimum scheduled heating
air volume. The minimum system static pressure necessary for the most remote VAV box to
deliver its minimum scheduled heating air volume shall be input to the system as the
Heating Mode Reset Schedule’s supply static pressure set point (adjustable). The system’s
static pressure shall change as the system changes back and forth from the Heating Mode
Reset Schedule to the Cooling Mode Reset Schedule.
9. Safeties
return ductwork, the fans shall turn off through a hard wired connection, an alarm shall be
reported at the operator interface.

D. Single Zone VAV Packaged Rooftop Units RTU-7:

temperature, the unit fan shall energize and the furnace section shall heat or the cooling system
shall cool the space (see cooling sequence for details) to within setback/setup parameters. Initial
user selectable setback/setup temperatures shall be 60 degrees setback and 85 degrees setup
during unoccupied times.
3. Heating Cycles:
During the heating preoccupancy mode of operation, the supply fan shall be turned on at
maximum VFD speed (adjustable) and the outside/return air dampers shall be modulated to
provide full return air, and the unit’s gas heat exchanger and modulating gas valve shall
operate to provide a discharge temperature of 95 degree F (set point adjustable). When the
set point temperatures are achieved, the unit shall be indexed to the occupied heating
mode.
b. Occupied Heating- Occupied Heating- the lead unit’s outside/return air dampers shall open
to 10 percent outside air (240 cfm) and shall be controlled by the outside air/return air
damper control. The supply air fan shall be controlled by the variable frequency drive. The
VAV packaged rooftop unit shall utilize the gas heat exchanger and modulating gas valves
PID loop shall modulate the gas valve closed to maintain space temperature..
4. Cooling Cycles:
During the Cooling preoccupancy mode of operation, the supply fan shall be turned on at
modulated to provide full return air, and the unit shall produce 55 degree (adjustable) supply
air by utilizing its economizer and/or mechanical cooling system. When the setpoint
b. Occupied Cooling- The unit shall be indexed to the cooling mode of operation by the ATC
system and the VAV Package Rooftop Unit’s outside air damper shall be allowed to
below.
O.A. Supply Air

Temp. Temp.
60 59
85 55
c. As the room temperature begins to rise, the unit’s PID loop shall begin to accelerate the fan
d. During Occupied Cooling mode, if the space humidity rises above setpoint (60% RH) for
longer than 15 minutes, the Unit shall be indexed to dehumidification mode of operation.
The mechanical refrigeration system shall operate at full capacity, if the space temperature
position.
8. Safeties
return ductwork, the Rooftop unit and ERV fans shall turn off through a hard wired
connection, an alarm shall be reported at the operator interface.
E. Variable Air Volume with Reheat (All VAV boxes): When the Variable Air Volume (VAV) box’s associated
rooftop unit is in occupied mode the VAV box shall modulate between the minimum air flow setting and the
design cooling air flow setting and shall modulate the electric heating coil as required to maintain the zone
temperature as sensed by the zone temperature sensor. When the associated rooftop unit is in
unoccupied mode the VAV box shall be indexed to the fully open position.
1. Occupied Mode:
a. On a rise in zone temperature above the zone temperature setpoint of 75 degrees F
(adjustable) VAV box damper shall begin to modulate open. As the zone temperature
begins to approach the zone temperature setpoint the VAV box damper shall begin to
modulate closed. The VAV box damper shall modulate open and closed as required to
maintain the zone temperature setpoint.

b. On a drop in zone temperature below the zone temperature setpoint of 70 degrees F

(adjustable) the VAV box damper shall modulate to its minimum position. If the zone
temperature continues to drop below the zone temperature setpoint the VAV box damper
shall modulate to it heating airflow and the electric heating coil shall modulate it’s electric
heat. The electric heat coil shall modulate it’s SCR controlled electric heat as required to
maintain the zone temperature setpoint.
F. Wall Heater (All): Shall operate to maintain space temperature setpoint. When the space temperature
drops below the space setpoint of 70 degrees F (adjustable) the wall heater shall be energize. When the
space temperature rises above the space setpoint the reverse shall occur.
G. Ductless Split (EB-1, 2 /CC-1, 2): Shall operate to maintain space temperature setpoint. Ductless split
system shall have integral controls with space temperature sensor.
1. On a rise in space temperature above space temperature setpoint of 75 degrees F (adjustable) the
indoor unit’s (EB) fan motor and the outdoor unit’s (CC) compressor and condenser fan motor shall
be energized. The outdoor unit compressor shall modulate to maintain the space temperature.
When the space temperature drops below the space setpoint the reverse shall occur.
H. Cabinet Unit Heater (CUH-1 thru 7): Shall operate to maintain space temperature setpoint. When the
space temperature drops below the space setpoint of 68 degrees F (adjustable) the fan motor shall be
energized. When supply air is proven across the electric heating coil the electric heating coil shall
energize. When the space temperature rises above the space setpoint the reverse shall occur.
I. Unit Heater: Shall operate to maintain space temperature setpoint. When the space temperature drops
below the space setpoint of 65 degrees F (adjustable) the fan motor shall be energized. When supply air is
proven across the electric heating coil the electric heating coil shall energize. When the space temperature
rises above the space setpoint the reverse shall occur.
J. Fans (F-5): Shall be control by room mounted switch provided by the Electrical Contractor.
K. Fans (F-2, 3, 4): Shall operate to maintain space temperature setpoint. When the space temperature rises
above the space setpoint of 85 degrees F (adjustable) the fan motor shall be energized and the remote
interlocked outside air damper shall be energized open. On a drop in space temperature below set point,
the fan shall be de-energized, the remote interlocked outside damper shall be de-energized and shall
close.
L. Fan (F-1): Non thermal exhaust fans indicated in Section 23 96 10, Wiring of Mechanical Equipment, shall
be provided with relays/contactors as required to control fan and motor operated dampers. ATC system
shall allow the operator to adjust each fan's occupied/unoccupied times individually.

SECTION 23 95 10 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall include the labor, materials, and equipment required for testing and
balancing the air distribution systems.
B. Contractor shall procure the services of an independent air balance and testing agency to be approved by
the Architect.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB
contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance"
Article.
B. Qualifications: The testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) agency shall submit a company resume listing
personnel and project experience in air and hydronic system balancing and a copy of the agency's test
and balance engineer (TBE) certificate.
C. Field reports indicating deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing
of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
D. Certified TAB reports, including instrument calibration reports, within thirty days after substantial
completion of the project. Test and balance reports shall include the following documentation in addition to
the documentation required in Part 3 - Execution:
1. Report table of contents.
2. Each individual final Reporting Form submitted must bear the signature of the person who recorded
the data and the signature of the testing and balancing supervisor of the performing firm.
3. If more than one certified firm performs the TAB work, all final reports shall be submitted by that
certified firm having managerial responsibility.
4. Identification of all types of instruments used and their last dates of calibration shall be submitted
with the final report.
5. The final test report shall include appropriate reference to all problems regarding the system(s)
encountered prior to, during and after testing and what action taken to correct the problem(s),
including noise and vibration.
6. Prints (reduced in size) or sketches showing the following for easy reference to report data:
a. Supply, return, and exhaust air outlet locations.
b. Air system(s) schematic(s) including terminal numbers and traverse locations.
c. Hydronic system(s) schematic(s) including flow station locations.
d. An approved copy of the balancing report shall be included in the Operating and
Maintenance Manual submittal.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND 23 95 10 - 1 of 4

BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEM
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB as
a TAB technician.
B. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.
C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5,
"Instrumentation."
1.5 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION
A. Shop drawings, submittal data, up-to-date revisions, change orders, and other data required for planning,
preparation, and execution of the TAB work shall be provided to the TAB agency no later than 30 days
prior to the start of TAB work.
B. System installation and equipment startup shall be complete prior to the TAB agency's being notified to
begin.
C. Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
D. Perform TAB after pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment shall be completely installed and in continuous
operation as required to accomplish the test and balance work specified.
B. TAB shall be performed when outside conditions approximate design conditions indicated for heating and
cooling functions.
C. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion.
Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUMENTS
A. Instruments used for testing and balancing of systems shall have been calibrated within a period of six
months prior to balancing. Test and balance reports shall include a letter of certification listing
instrumentation used and last date of calibration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 AIR SYSTEMS
A. Preliminary
1. Identify and list size, type, and manufacturer of all equipment to be tested, including air terminals.
Use manufacturers' ratings for all equipment to make required calculations except where field tests
show ratings to be impractical.

B. Air Handlers and Fans

1. Provide accessory components for motor drives, or replace complete drive package, whenever
factory furnished drives on mechanical equipment do not provide design air flows.
2. Record equipment manufacturer, model and serial number.
3. Test and adjust fan RPM to design requirements.
4. Test and record motor voltage and running amperes including motor nameplate data, and starter
heater ratings.
5. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply, exhaust and return ducts, determine CFM at fans, and
adjust fans to design.
6. Test and record system static pressure, suction and discharge.
7. Test and adjust system for design outside air, CFM.
8. Test and adjust system for design recirculated air, CFM.
9. Test and record heating apparatus entering air temperatures, dry bulb.
10. Test and record cooling apparatus entering air temperatures, dry bulb and wet bulb.
11. Test and record heating apparatus leaving air temperatures, dry bulb.
12. Test and record cooling apparatus leaving air temperatures, dry bulb and wet bulb.
C. Distribution: Adjust zones or branch ducts to proper design CFM, supply and return.
D. Air terminals
1. Identify each air terminal from reports as to location and determine required flow reading.
2. Test and adjust each air terminal to within 10 percent of design requirements.
3. Adjust flow patterns from air terminal units to minimize drafts to extent design and equipment
allows.
E. Verification
1. Prepare summation of readings of observed CFM for each system, compare with required CFM,
and verify that duct losses are within an acceptable range.
2. Verify design CFM at fans as described above.
3.2 ELECTRIC HEATING EQUIPMENT
A. Record equipment manufacturer, model and serial number.
B. Test and record voltage and amperage readings at each electric unit heater and VAV boxes while fully
energized.
3.3 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
A. In cooperation with the building automation system manufacturer's representative, set and adjust
automatically operated devices to achieve required sequence of operations. Refer to Section 23 90 10,
Building Automation System.
B. Testing organization shall verify all controls for proper calibration, setpoints and proper operation and list
those controls requiring adjustment by building automation system installer.
3.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REPORT
A. After the conclusion of balancing operations, make temporary installation of portable recorders and
simultaneously record temperatures and humidity during summer and winter conditions at representative

locations in each system.
B. Recordings shall be made during summer and winter for a 7 day period, continuous over a weekend, and
including at least one period of operation at outside conditions within 5 degrees F wet bulb temperature of
maximum summer design condition and within 10 degrees F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter
design condition.
C. Report of test results shall include original recording and two reproductions.

SECTION 23 96 10 – WIRING OF HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall include the power and control wiring of HVAC equipment. It shall not include
control wiring specifically detailed as part of the automatic temperature control system specified in Section
23 90 10, Building Automation System.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mechanical equipment shall be wired in accordance with the following schedule:
Key:

Item wired by.....
H = HVAC Contractor
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WIRING OF HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 96 10 - 1 of 4

HVAC Equipment Wiring Schedule

Water Level / Elev.

Equipment
Control Panel
Motor Starter
Remote VFD
DDC Control
Integral VFD
Cord & Plug
Pressure
Aquastat
Relay
Flow
Rooftop Unit RTU-1 thru
H E H H E
7
H E H H H
E E E H E
Energy Recovery
H E H H
Ventilator ERV-1
H E H H
E E H H
Fan F-1
H H H H
H H H H
E E H H
Fan F-2, 3, 4,
H H H
H H H
E E E
Fan F-5
H H E
H H E
E E E
VAV-1 thru 12
H H H H
H H H H
E E E H
Split System SSAC-1, 2
H H H
H H H
E E H


Water Level / Elev.

Equipment
Control Panel
Motor Starter
Remote VFD
DDC Control
Integral VFD
Cord & Plug
Pressure
Aquastat
Relay
Flow
Split System SSCC-1, 2
H E H
H E H
E E H
Cabinet Unit Heater
H H H
CUH-1, 2, 3, 6
H H H
E E H
Cabinet Unit Heater
H H H
CUH-4, 5
H H H
E E H
Cabinet Unit Heater
H H H
CUH-7
H H H
E E H
Unit Heater UH-1
H H H
H H H
E E H
Wall Insert Heater WH-1,
H H H H
2
H H H H
E H H H

C. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install wiring from duct smoke detector to fire alarm panel.
Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install wiring from normally open auxiliary contact on duct smoke
detector to control circuitry for shut down of equipment if duct smoke detector is activated.

SECTION 26 00 25 – ELECTRICAL FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, material, and equipment required for testing the
electrical equipment and systems.
1.2 ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Testing shall be performed on electrical equipment and systems to assure that equipment and systems are
operational and within applicable standards and manufacturer’s tolerances. Testing should verify that
equipment and systems are installed in accordance with design specifications.
B. Testing shall be performed by a NETA accredited testing agency, or an equivalent third-party, independent
testing authority that is professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of the
equipment or systems being evaluated. The name of the proposed testing organization shall be submitted
to the Owner for approval.
C. Qualified technicians who are trained and regularly employed for testing services shall do all testing.
D. The testing organization will conform to the general guidelines in their entirety as of the latest version of
NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications. This includes the following:
1. Safety and Precautions
2. Suitability of Test Equipment
3. Test Instrument Calibration
4. Test Report
E. Three copies of each completed report will be furnished to the Owner.
F. The Owner shall be notified in advance of testing. A representative of the Owner shall witness testing.
G. Inspection and testing of all applicable electrical equipment listed below shall be done in accordance with
the latest version of NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications. This will include all tests of the following
items:
1. Switchgear and Switchboard Assemblies

2. Transformers: Air cooled and liquid filled.
3. Cables: Medium Voltage
4. Medium Voltage Switches, all types
5. Low Voltage Circuit Breakers, to include all types, 100 amp frame and above
6. Medium voltage circuit breakers, all types
7. Protective Relays
8. Instrument Transformers
9. Metering Systems
10. Grounding Systems
11. Ground Fault Protection Systems
12. Motor Starters; All types
13. Surge Protection Devices
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS ELECTRICAL FIELD QUALITY 26 00 25 - 1 of 3

CONTROL
14. Uninterruptible Power Systems and associated Components
1.3 SYSTEMS FUNCTION TESTS
A. Perform system function tests upon completion of the equipment tests as previously outlined. It is the
purpose of the system function tests to prove the correct interaction of all sensing, process, and action
devices.
B. Verify the correct operation of all safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition to design function.
C. Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.
1.4 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY
A. A thermographic survey should be performed on all current carrying devices. The survey should be
performed during periods of maximum possible loading and prior to expiration of the one year warranty
period.
B. Imaging equipment shall be capable of detecting a minimum of 1-degree Celsius at 30 degrees Celsius.
C. A level 2 certified thermographer should perform the survey.
D. A report shall be submitted to the Owner which includes the following:
1. Description of equipment tested

2. Discrepancies
3. Temperature difference between area of concern and reference area
4. Areas inspected
5. Load conditions at time of inspection
6. Provide photographs and/or thermograms of deficient areas
7. Summary which includes listing of deficient areas and corrective action taken by contractor.
1.5 FIRE ALARM TESTING
A. All connected fire alarm devices furnished and installed under this contract shall be tested for operation,
proper programming, and verified to meet proper sequence of operation. Printout of test showing test of
all these devices and interconnected systems shall be provided. Test is to include all detectors, pull
stations, duct smoke detectors, associated fan shutdown, any fire alarm sub-system interconnection, etc.
Final fire alarm testing is to be completed in the presence of a representative from the Owner with
sufficient prior notification.
B. System shall be tested for code compliant alarm audibility upon completion of construction.
C. Completed and accurate As-Built floor plans shall be used for final testing and copies of these drawings
shall be turned over to Owner immediately after testing. These plans shall include full floor plans showing
all fire alarm devices furnished and installed under this contract with address and/or loop ID information.
Also, a copy of the fire alarm system (as applicable) program shall be turned over to Owner at this time.

CONTROL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(NOT USED)

CONTROL
SECTION 26 05 05 – BASIC MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, material and equipment required for furnishing and
installing basic materials associated with electrical systems. The specific application of these materials
shall be as outlined in this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on
Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Access Panels
2. Wall Plate Labels
3. Fire Stop Sealing Systems
4. Danger/Warning Labels
B. Submit test reports specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and supports shall be suitable for intended purpose and, where shown on Drawings, where
detailed, or as noted, shall be of the type indicated.
B. Hangers and supports shall be galvanized finish, or otherwise protected against corrosion, unless noted
otherwise.
C. All fasteners, mounting hardware and materials for supporting electrical items on the exterior shall be type
316 stainless steel.
2.2 ACCESS PANELS
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style DW, or Karp, Krueger, Boico, Acudor.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor, or Karp, Acudor.

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS BASIC MATERIALS 26 05 05 - 1 of 7


anchors.
5. Closing Feature: Self-latching lock, direct action knurled knob, interior latch release mechanism, or
self-latching lock, flush key-operated cylinder lock with two keys, interior release mechanism as
directed by Owner.
6. Rating: UL listed 1/2 hour (B-label), temperature rise 30 minutes, 250 degrees F. maximum.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Milcor Style M, or Karp, Krueger, Boico, Acudor.

4. Closing Feature: Flush screwdriver operated lock with steel cam or cylinder lock with two keys as
directed by Owner.
2.3 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS
A. Plywood
1. Material: 3/4 inch fire resistive plywood, with beveled edges and square cut corners. Plywood shall
be type A/C or better with “C” side towards wall.
2. Backboards shall be sized as required for mounting of electrical equipment at specific locations.
Anchor backboards securely to building structure.
3. Plywood shall have two coats of white fire retardant paint, both sides.
4. Where used for telecommunications, shall have ‘D’ rings, spools, etc., as required for installing
wiring neat and orderly.
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Construction: Sleeves shall be constructed of standard weight, galvanized steel pipe, square cut ends with
anchoring lugs welded to outside surface of pipe.
B. Size: Internal diameter of sleeve shall be 2 inch (minimum) larger than outside diameter of conduit or EMT.
2.5 NAMEPLATES
the inner layer.
B. Nameplate and lettering suitably sized for their locations, but not less than 1/4 inch high letters.
2.6 WALL PLATE LABELING
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Brady Corporation BradyBondz™ Cat. No. THT-37-430-10, or as approved.
B. Material: Gloss polyester.
C. Adhesive: Permanent acrylic with high adhesive and translucent properties.
D. Size: 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/2 inch high

E. Color: Clear.
F. Text: Black, 1/4 inch high, all capital letters. Label text shall be printed using recommended printing
procedures and equipment in accordance with label manufacturer’s instructions.
G. Listing: UL Standard 969.
2.7 FIRE STOP SEALING SYSTEMS
A. Fire Stop Sealing System Specification No. 1
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Nelson Firestop Products CLK Silicone Sealant, or 3M Fire Protection
Products, RectorSeal, Specified Technologies (STI), Tremco.
2. Application: Sealing for floor, wall and ceiling conduit and cable penetrations through fire-rated
assemblies.
3. Materials: Single component, ready-to-use, water-resistant, flexible elastomeric silicone sealant.
Non-sag/gunnable grade for penetrations in vertical surfaces, self-leveling grade for floor
applications.
4. Compliance: Fire endurance tested per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). In addition to compliance as a fire
stop, the sealing system shall prevent the spread of smoke or water.
B. Fire Stop Sealing System Specification No. 2
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: RectorSeal Metacaulk “Putty Sticks”, or Specified Technologies (STI).

2. Application: Sealing for floor, wall and ceiling conduit and cable penetrations through fire-rated
assemblies.
C. Fire Stop Sealing System Specification No. 3
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: RectorSeal Metacaulk “Putty Pads”, “Box Guards”, “Covering Guards”.
2. Application: Sealing for electrical cabinets, junction and pull boxes, and outlet boxes installed in
fire-rated assemblies.
D. Fire Stop Sealing System Specification No. 4
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Specified Technologies (STI) “EZ-Path”, or Wiremold “Flame Stopper”.

2. Applications: Where conduit sleeves are either shown or required through fire-rated assemblies,
“EZ-Path” or “Flame Stopper” may be used in lieu of the standard conduit sleeve and sealant/putty.
3. Cable fill as directed by manufacturer.
4. Gang plates, floor plates and retrofit plates furnished and installed as required.
5. Radius control module furnished and installed where vertical cables leave a horizontally mounted
sleeve.
2.8 DANGER/WARNING LABELS
A. Labels, as specified herein, need not be furnished and installed if the item of electrical equipment specified
to receive the label is furnished with a label, with similar wording as specified herein, by the manufacturer.

B. Warning Labels For Electrical Equipment That Cannot Be De-energized:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Clarion Safety, custom labels, or as approved.
2. Material: Premium polyester with clear over-laminate, self-adhering.

3. Size: Minimum 4 inches wide by 2 inches high.
4. Shall be placed on electrical equipment that cannot be de-energized for examination, adjustment,
servicing, repairing, maintaining, modifying, installing components within, etc.
5. Minimum arc flash warning label requirements:
6. Where arc-flash reduction technologies are utilized on service entrance equipment, two labels shall
be provided. An orange label shall contain standard operating information, a blue label shall contain
information applicable when maintenance mode is activated.
2.9 WIRE AND CABLE TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
A. Safety and Application
1. All wire and cable shall be safety and application tested for its environment and use and shall have
the Listed Mark and associated identifiers affixed to the cable outer insulation or, for multi-
conductor jacketed cable, affixed to the outer jacket.
B. Performance
1. Where specified, wire and cable shall be included in a verification program, be

performance tested to the industry and association standards specified herein
and shall bear a “verified” mark affixed to the outer insulation or, for multi-
C. Manufacturer’s Information
1. Where specified, wire and cable shall have the Manufacturer’s name, month and year in which
cable was manufactured and manufacturer’s job number affixed to the outer insulation or, for multi-
D. All testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Hangers and Supports
1. Furnish and install suitable hangers and supports for materials and equipment to provide rigid
installation. Electrical equipment shall be installed utilizing wood screws on wood, machine screws
or lag bolts on masonry or concrete walls and ceilings. Nails will not be permitted.
2. Spring steel clips and clamps will be permitted for hanging conduit 3/4 inch or smaller, above
accessible ceilings.
3. Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. Tie wires will not be permitted.
4. All aluminum components in contact with concrete shall be coated with two coats of zinc chromate
primer or bituminous paint to prevent a reaction between the aluminum and the concrete.
C. Access Panels
1. Furnish and install access panels, size as required, but not smaller than 12 inch by 16 inch for
access to concealed pull boxes, junction boxes, or similar items where no other means of access is
provided.
Gypsum board (dry wall) finished 2

Fire rated walls and ceilings 3
Masonry, tile, or wood finished 4
D. Equipment Backboards
1. Furnish and install backboards so that equipment will be uniformly arranged on backboard, and
connected with wireways and wiretroughs to provide a complete installation.
2. Backboards requiring support shall have 2 inch by 2 inch by 1/4 inch minimum steel angles, welded
or bolted.
E. Sleeves
1. Furnish and install for EMT and conduit passing through floors, walls, partitions, slabs, grade
beams and foundations.
2. Layout, size and locate sleeves such that they will be set and installed prior to pouring concrete, or
when masonry is being constructed. In the event sleeves must be placed after floor, wall, grade
beam, etc., has been constructed, submit in writing and obtain approval on location, quantity and
proposed method of core drilling and installing.
3. Core drilled openings above grade in solid concrete need not be sleeved but openings shall be
clean and neat without cracking or spalling.
4. Sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe having square cut ends with anchoring lugs
welded on. Horizontal sleeves through walls, grade beams, foundations, and partitions shall be
flush with finished wall faces. Vertical sleeves through floors shall extend 2 inches above finished
floor and be flush with finished ceiling or underside of floor construction.

5. Size sleeves such that internal diameter is a minimum of 2 inches larger than OD of conduit. Center
conduit in sleeves.
6. For conduit passing through floors, slabs, walls, grade beams, or foundations at or below grade
and in pits, the sleeves shall be painted or coated with one coat of coal tar pitch paint and the
annular space between outside of conduit and inside of sleeve shall be packed with a pliable non-
hardening waterproof mastic sealer or a cement base quick-set repair mortar.
7. For conduit passing through walls and floor above grade and with no fire or smoke rating, the
annular space between outside of conduit and inside of sleeve or concrete shall be packed tight
with batt type fiberglass insulation.
8. For conduit passing through walls and floors above grade with smoke or fire rating of one hour or
more, the annular space between outside of conduit and inside of sleeve or concrete shall be
sealed with fire stop sealing system.
F. Nameplates
1. Furnish and install a full complement of nameplates for all items of electrical equipment installed as
Work of this Division, including motor starters, transformers, disconnects, panelboards, and
breakers and switches on distribution panelboards and secondary switchboards.
cement shall not be used equipment installed outdoors.
4. Nameplates located in harsh environments shall be attached with either self-tapping, stainless steel
screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts, flat washers and lock washers.
Epoxy cement or other adhesives will not be permitted.
G. Wall Plate Labeling
1. Furnish and install labels on all receptacle wall plates identifying the panel and branch circuit
breaker number supplying the receptacle (i.e., “LP1-1”, “ELP1-1”, etc.).
2. The label shall be installed parallel with wall plate outside edges, located on the receptacle center
line, and centered between the top of the receptacle and the top of the wall plate. The label
placement shall not be placed over a wall plate mounting screw.
3. Prior to attaching label, wall plate surfaces shall be dried, and cleaned of all dirt, paint, oils, grease,
or other foreign material that would prevent label adhesion.
H. Fire Stop Sealing System

Refer to architectural drawings for locations of fire rated floor and walls.
2. Outlet boxes, on opposite sides of a fire rated wall and separated by a distance less than 24
inches, shall have fire stop sealants installed, unless the outlet box has been tested and listed for
use in the fire rated assembly.
phrase.
I. Danger/Warning Labels
1. Danger/warning labels shall be installed on all electrical equipment – switchgear, switchboards,

panelboards, transformers and control panels furnished and installed under this contract. The
labels shall be located on the exterior of all switchboards, switchgear, transformers, control panels,

and on the exterior of control panels and panelboards located in other than finished spaces, one
label on each section of the switchgear and switchboard, both front and rear, where rear
accessible. For panelboards in finished spaces, the label shall be located inside the panel door,
either on the panel front or on the backside of the panel door.
3.2 TESTS
A. After installation of wiring and apparatus has been completed, electrical conductors shall be tested to
insure continuity, proper splicing, freedom from ground (except “made ground” and those required for
protection), and insulation resistance in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories requirements. Furnish
and employ necessary instruments such as ammeters, volt meters, meggers, etc. Preliminary testing with
magnetos will be permitted, but will not be acceptable as final or conclusive test. Submit to Owner three
copies of final insulation resistance tests for all feeders rated 100 amps and above.
B. Equipment and wiring systems not indicated as requiring specific tests shall be tested in actual operation
to determine that design functions are obtained and that the required features are provided.
C. Contractor shall perform all visual, physical, mechanical, etc. inspections on items and equipment as
directed by manufactures. Where specifications indicate a “prior-to-start-up” or a specific type of test or
tests to be performed, testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency or firm. All testing on
electrical equipment or items shall be performed in accordance with the procedures of the National
Electrical Testing Association. Costs for all testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be
included in the bid.
D. All test equipment requiring calibration shall be calibrated based on manufacturer’s recommendations,
shall have been calibrated within the manufacturer’s recommended time period, calibration shall be current
and there shall be a label on the instrument indicating the most recent calibration date and the name of the
firm performing the calibration. Type of instrument used and most recent calibration date shall appear on
all submitted test reports.
E. All submitted test results shall have included a summary of the results of the tests and, where applicable,
recommendations for corrective or remedial actions to be taken if the tests results indicate a failed or
borderline condition.
F. Testing shall be scheduled such that the equipment shall be energized immediately after successful
completion of the testing.
G. All equipment or items interconnected or dependent upon other items for operation shall be tested
simultaneously to verify and ensure proper operations and functions.
H. Items, equipment, systems, etc., tested (other than existing items) that result in a failure or borderline
condition shall be corrected by the contractor and re-tested until test results are satisfactory at no
additional costs to the owner.
I. Consult with Architect prior to testing and adjusting to determine intended function of equipment, wiring
and systems. Perform such tests and make necessary adjustments to ensure that design function is
obtained.
J. Where specific tests are specified herein to be performed on equipment or materials, tests shall be
recorded and three copies submitted to Architect. Test records shall properly identify equipment, or
system, and indicate test date.

SECTION 26 05 20 – WIRE AND CABLE, 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing wire and cable, 600 volts and below. The specific application of these materials shall be as
outlined in this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Wire and Cable
1.3 CABLE TESTING
A. Wire and cable shall be safety and application tested and shall have this information and the
Manufacturer’s information affixed to the wire and cable as specified in Section 26 05 05, Basic Materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Acceptable manufacturers of wire and cable shall be as follows: Aetna, Okonite, South Wire, General
Cable, Belden, Amer-Cable, American (AIW), Pyrotenax, Pirelli, Berk-Tek, Kerite.
B. All wire and cable shall conform to the following:
1. Copper shall not be less than 98 percent conductivity.

2. Single conductor, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Color coded.
4. Marked with classification type, conductor size, and voltage rating, every foot, where applicable.
5. Minimum Size: #12 AWG, unless otherwise specified.
6. Sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded, sizes #10 AWG and smaller for power and lighting
circuits shall be solid conductor, unless otherwise specified.
7. UL listed.
8. Minimum size in flexible metal conduit for final connection to recessed lighting fixtures shall be #14
AWG.
9. Wire and cable shall be manufactured no more than one year prior to installation.
10. Unless noted, insulation for wire and cable used on voltage systems 600 volts and below shall be
rated 600 volts.
11. Minimum size for control wiring shall be #14 AWG, except 24 volt and below. All control wiring shall
be stranded.
C. Aluminum conductors will not be permitted on this Project.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WIRE AND CABLE, 600 VOLTS 26 05 20 - 1 of 7

AND BELOW
2.2 WIRE
A. Wire Specification No. 3

1. Type XHHW insulation, UL listed.
2. 600 volt insulation.
3. Ampacity based upon maximum conductor temperature of 75 degrees C. dry locations and 75
degrees C. wet locations, continuous operation.
4. Moisture and heat resistant cross linked polyethylene (XLP) insulation.
5. Conform to applicable NEMA and IPCEA requirements.
6. Conform to ASTM B3 for solid conductors and ASTM B8 for stranded conductors.
7. Soft copper conductor.
B. Wire Specification No. 4

1. Type THHN/THWN insulation, UL listed.
2. 600 volt insulation.
3. Ampacity based upon maximum conductor temperature of 75 degrees C. dry and wet locations,
continuous operation.
4. Flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic (PVC) insulation with nylon jacket.
5. Conform to applicable NEMA and IPCEA requirements.
6. Conform to ASTM B3 for solid conductors and ASTM B8 for stranded conductors.
7. Soft copper conductor.
C. Wire Specification No. 7

1. Type MC metal clad cable, UL listed.
2. Interlocked aluminum armor.
3. Internal green insulated copper grounding wire.
4. 600V THHN/THWN insulated single conductors.
5. Two, three or four soft copper conductors, as required.
6. Meets requirements of UL 83, UL 1063, and UL 1569 and all NEC requirements.
7. Conforms to ASTM B3 for solid conductors and ASTM B8 for stranded conductors.
8. Ampacity based upon maximum conductor temperature of 75 degrees C., continuous operation.
D. Wire Specification No. 8

1. Solid copper conductor.
2. PVC or rubber insulation.
3. Nylon, PVC, rubber or neoprene jacket.
4. Minimum Size: #18 AWG.
5. Number of conductors as required.
6. 600 volts, UL listed.
2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Connector Specification No. 1
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Buchanan B-cap, or Ideal Wing-nut, 3M Scotchlok.

2. Type: Splice connectors.

AND BELOW
3. For insulated wire, 600 volt and under, #8 AWG and smaller.
4. Compression solderless connector.
5. Insulated or non-insulated.
6. UL listed.
B. Connector Specification No. 2
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anderson, or Thomas & Betts, Penn-Union, Dossert, Burndy, Reliable
Electric, Ideal.
3. For insulated wire, 600 volts and under, #6 AWG and larger.
4. Split bolt pressure connector.
5. Bronze.
6. UL listed.
C. Connector Specification No. 3
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anderson, or Thomas & Betts, Dossert, Burndy, MAC, 3M, Ideal.
3. For insulated wire, 600 volts and under, #6 AWG and larger.
4. Compression or crimp connector, short sleeve.
5. Copper.
6. UL listed.
D. Connector Specification No. 4
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Anderson, or Thomas & Betts, Penn-Union, Dossert, Burndy, MAC, 3M,
Ideal.
2. Type: Lug connector.
3. For insulated wire, 600 volt and under, #8 AWG and larger.
4. Compression or crimp connector, short sleeve.
5. Copper.
6. UL listed.
E. Connector Specification No. 5
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Penn-Union, or Thomas & Betts, Anderson, Dossert, Burndy, Ideal.
3. For insulated wire, 600 volt and under, #8 AWG and larger.
4. Bolted type pressure connection, hex head or hex socket pressure bolts.
5. Copper.
6. UL listed.
F. Connector Specification No. 6
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Penn-Union Penn Crimp, or Ideal Crimp Terminal, Thomas & Betts Sta-
Kon, Burndy Insulug, MAC MiniDent, 3M Scotchlok Terminals.
3. For insulated wire, 600 volt and under, #10 AWG and smaller.

AND BELOW
4. Compression or crimp type.

5. Standard barrel, insulated for 600 volts.
6. Ring terminal or flanged or flared block spade terminal.
7. Copper.
8. UL listed.
2.4 WIRE MARKERS
A. Wire Marker Specification No. 2
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thomas & Betts E-Z-Code, Type WSL, or W.H. Brady Co. Type CAB.
2. Vinyl plastic or vinyl polyester.
3. Temperature Range: to 250 degrees F.
4. Self-sticking adhesive backing.
5. Waterproof, solvent proof.
6. Printing permanently protected.
2.5 TAPE
A. Tape Specification No. 1
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: 3M Scotch 33+, or Tomic, Okonite.

2. Type: Tape for insulation 600 volts or less.
3. Vinyl plastic all weather electrical tape.
B. Tape Specification No. 2
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Harris Industries, Griffolyn, Inc., Stanco, Inc.

2. Type: Detectable underground marker and warning tape, fully detectable using above grade
induction conduction type locaters. Consist of either aluminum foil or stainless steel tracer wires
laminated between multiple layers of polyethylene tape, overall thickness 4.5 to 6 mils.
3. Material: Plastic, 6 inches wide, black lettering. Lettering shall be abrasion resistant, subsurface to
be protected from being scraped off and protected from underground moisture, acids, alkalis and
other soil substances.
4. Color: Red for underground electrical lines and orange for underground telecommunications, alarm
and signal lines in accordance with the American Public Works Association Uniform Color Code.
5. Marking: Either “CAUTION - BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”, or “CAUTION - BURIED
TELECOMMUNICATIONS LINE BELOW” or similar wording as applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Unless noted, products and material specified in this Section shall be installed in accordance with the
following schedule(s).

AND BELOW
WIRE SCHEDULE - BUILDING WIRE
Application Wire Spec. No.
Install in raceways, 600 volt and below:

Feeders 3 or 4
Branch circuit wiring 3 or 4
WIRE SCHEDULE - CONTROL
Application Wire Spec. No.

Control wiring 3 or 4
Control wiring, 24 volts and below 8
Control wiring in enclosures 3 or 4
CONNECTOR SCHEDULE
Application Connector Spec. No.
Splice Connectors:
#8 AWG and smaller 1
#6 AWG and larger 2 or 3
Lug Connectors:
Connection to motor leads 4 or 6
Stranded wire connection under head of binding screw or 4 or 6
bolt
Connection to equipment bus, or screw or bolt terminals 4, 5, 6
or manufacturer supplied lugs
Note: All connectors are for use only on 600 volt or less insulated wire.
WIRE MARKER SCHEDULE
Application Wire Marker Spec. No.
All applications 2
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Shared neutral conductors for branch circuits will not be permitted. All branch circuit phase
conductors shall be paired with a dedicated neutral conductor along their entire length.
2. Wiring shall be installed in raceways unless otherwise noted. Direct burial cable shall not be used,
unless noted.
3. Exterior of wires shall be color coded where applicable, color coding of wires shall conform to the
National Electrical Code.
a. Color coding shall clearly indicate the difference between:
1) Phase wires of different voltage systems.

AND BELOW
2) Neutral and phase wires of each voltage system.

3) The grounding system wire.
b. All equipment grounding conductors shall be green in color. All isolated ground conductors
shall be green in color with an over-layed black or yellow stripe.
c. In sizes and insulation types where factory applied colors are not available, colored plastic
tape in overlapping turns shall be applied at all terminal points and in all points of splicing.
Tape shall be applied at minimum intervals of 6 inches along the wire and cables.
d. Wire color coding for all voltage systems shall conform to Owner’s color coding system if
Owner has a color coding system, verify with Owner.
e. If Owner does not have a wire color coding system or unless required otherwise by local
code authorities, the following color coding scheme shall be used for 120/208 volt system:
120/208 Volt system
Phase A - Black
Phase B - Red
Phase C - Blue
Neutral - Natural Grey or White
f. If Owner does not have a wire color coding system or unless required otherwise by local
code authorities, the following color coding scheme shall be used for 277/480 volt system:
277/480 Volt system
Phase A - Brown
Phase B - Orange
Phase C - Yellow
Neutral - Natural Grey or White
4. Pull wire into conduit so that insulation will not be damaged. Approved pulling compound shall be
used to assist in pulling of 600 volt wire into conduit. Oil or grease will not be permitted. Pulling
compound shall be compatible with wire insulation and conduit. Do not exceed manufacturer’s
recommended maximum pulling tensions.
5. Conductors shall be installed continuous from outlet to outlet, without splicing except within outlet
or junction boxes.
6. Noninsulated splices in insulated wire, 600 volts and under shall be factory insulated as follows:
a. Rubber and friction tape coated with Scotchkote or similar coating.
b. Scotchfil or equivalent electrical putty with Tape Specification No. 1.
c. Insulation of splices shall provide same insulation qualities as insulation of wire being
spliced.
7. Lugs on motor leads shall be fastened with brass machine bolts, lock washers, and nuts.
8. Stranded wire shall not be placed under the head of a binding screw or bolt. Refer to Part 2 -
Products, this Section, for connectors to be used in stranded wire connections under head of
binding screw or bolt.
9. Wire shall be identified by use of wire markers at termination points, including outlet boxes, pull
boxes, junction boxes, wireways and at locations where wire changes direction within an enclosure.
10. Provide minimum of 6 inches of conductors extended from opening of each outlet box.
11. Wiring in finished area shall be concealed. Wiring serving switch legs, receptacles, and lighting
fixtures on concrete masonry unit type walls in areas such as boiler rooms and equipment rooms
shall be concealed.
12. Circuiting shall be as indicated on Drawings.
13. Feeder Identification:
a. Identify feeders using a two-segment conductor numbering scheme which defines the origin
of the conductor and the destination of the conductor. Example: DSA-PA where DSA is the
origin, and PA is the destination.
b. For conductors with one point of origin and two or more destinations, expand the destination
identification number, e.g., PA, PB, etc.
c. Make the origin and destination identification the specific names for the equipment used in
the Contract Documents. A feeder shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code.
14. Conduit and wiring indicated on Drawings are diagrammatic. Exact routing of conduit and
placement of boxes for wiring shall be governed by jobsite conditions.

AND BELOW
15. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to the
manufacturer, U.L. or code required inch-pound requirements. Re-check tightness of all
connections prior to energizing.
16. Terminals, connectors, etc., shall be of an acceptable type for the materials used.
17. Cap all spare conductors with U.L. Listed end caps.
18. Only one conductor shall be installed per terminal or lug, unless terminal or lugs are U.L. Rated for
more than one conductor.
19. Exact location, material of construction and thickness of all walls to be chased or cut for installation
of wiring shall be verified with General Contractor and Architect before Work is begun.
20. Underground direct burial cable runs shall have marker or warning tape installed above cable, 12
inches below finish grade. Tape shall be Tape Specification No. 2.
21. All wiring connections made at or below grade shall be waterproof with UL listed waterproof
connectors.
B. Emergency Power System Wiring
1. Wiring for lights and equipment on either emergency only or normal emergency power shall be run
in non-flexible metal raceways. This wiring shall be kept independent of all other wiring and
equipment and shall not enter the same raceways, boxes, or cabinets with each other or other
wiring, except in transfer switches, bypass/isolation switches, or lighting fixtures supplied from two
sources.
2. Wiring for the life safety (LS) branch and equipment (EQ) branch shall be run in metal raceways.
Branches shall be kept independent of all other wiring and equipment and shall not enter the same
raceways, boxes, or cabinets with each other or other wiring, except in transfer switches,
bypass/isolation switches, or lighting fixtures supplies from two sources.
C. Metal Clad Cable
1. Metal clad cable shall only be installed where allowed by the National Electrical Code. MC cable
shall not be installed exposed anywhere, shall not be installed in areas without ceilings and shall
not be installed in new masonry walls. MC cable may be run concealed above ceilings or where
concealed in wood or metal stud walls or where concealed in furred out walls.
2. Installation of MC cable shall meet latest NEC and NECA 120 installation requirements.
3. MC cable may be used between the lighting fixture and junction box in lengths that do not exceed 6
feet. Wiring directly from recessed lay-in light fixture-to-recessed lay-in light fixture is not permitted,
each recessed lay-in light fixture shall be wired from a junction box.

AND BELOW
SECTION 26 05 30 – RACEWAY AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, material and equipment required for the furnishing and
installing of raceways and fittings. The specific application of these materials shall be outlined in this
Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Raceways and Fittings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY AND FITTINGS
A. Acceptable manufacturers of raceway and fittings shall be as follows:
1. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC):

a. Allied Tube & Conduit
b. Wheatland Tube
c. Copperweld
d. Western Tube
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
a. Allied Tube & Conduit
b. Wheatland Tube
c. Copperweld
d. Western Tube
3. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) - Schedule 40:
a. Carlon
b. Scepter/Canron
c. Allied Tube & Conduit
4. Flexible Metal Conduit:
a. American Flex Conduit
b. Alflex
c. International Metal Hose
d. Electri-Flex
5. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit
a. Anaconda Type UA
b. Electri-Flex Type LA
c. Flexi-Guard
2.2 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION NO. 1
A. Type: Rigid metal conduit (RMC).
B. Mild steel piping, galvanized inside and outside, thoroughly welded seams, circular in cross section,
uniform wall thickness.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS RACEWAY AND FITTINGS 26 05 30 - 1 of 9

C. Ten foot lengths, reamed and threaded at each end, with coupling on one end and protector on opposite
end.
D. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch
E. UL Listed.
F. Threads galvanized after cutting.
G. ANSI C80.1.
H. Conduit Couplings
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thomas & Betts, Erickson, or Allied Kwik-Couple.

2. Malleable iron.
3. Galvanized.
I. Bushings
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton, or Raco, Steel City, Efcor, OZ, Thomas & Betts.
2. Malleable iron.
3. Insulated throat.
4. Ground lug, where required.
5. Screw-on.
J. Expansion Joints
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ Type EX with BJ bonding jumper, or Appleton.

2. Sleeve with fittings to provide for telescoping of conduits into sleeve; 8 inch movement.
3. Galvanized or cadmium finish.
4. Bonding jumper: Copper.
K. Conduit Bodies
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton Unilets, or Crouse Hinds, Pyle National, Killark, OZ, Efcor,
Adalet, Neer.
2. Malleable iron or copper-free aluminum.
3. Heavy, threaded hubs.
4. Malleable iron bodies shall be finished with zinc or cadmium, both inside and outside, after all
machine work is finished.
5. Screw-on type covers.
6. Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel screws required for damp or wet locations.
L. Conduit Thru-Wall Seal
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ Type WSK.

2. Consist of oversize sleeve and sealing assembly.
3. Sealing ring between the body and oversize sleeve.
4. Galvanized finish.
M. End Bells
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ Type TNS.

2. Malleable iron.
3. Provide smooth rounded pulling surface.
4. Galvanized finish.
N. Conduit Seals
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton Sealing Unilets, FO or F, Fiber Filler, Apello Sealing Cement,
or Crouse Hinds, Pyle National, Killark, Adalet.
2. Malleable iron or copper-free aluminum.
3. For sealing horizontal or vertical runs, as required.
4. Drain fittings, where installed in vertical conduit runs between different temperature zones.
5. Hazardous area classification, as required.
6. Fiber filler and sealing cement.
O. Myers Hubs
1. Stainless Steel, Type 316

2. Grounding
3. Stainless Steel Ground Nut
4. “Vitron (75)” O-Ring
A. Type: Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
B. High grade mild steel, thoroughly welded seams, circular in cross section, and uniform wall thickness.
C. Electro-galvanized coating on exterior and enameled or galvanized on interior.
D. Ten foot lengths; 3/4 inch minimum size.
E. UL listed.
F. Fire alarm wiring to be installed in conduits shall be installed in “Fire Alarm EMT”, red galvanized topcoat
and “E-Z” pull interior finish. (Allied tube and conduit, or as approved.)
G. Couplings and Connectors (Compression Type)
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton, or Efcor, Raco, OZ, Crouse Hinds, Thomas & Betts.
2. Compression type, steel. Die cast will not be accepted.
3. Cadmium finish or galvanized.
4. Rain and concrete tight.
5. Box connectors shall have insulated throat.
H. Couplings and Connectors (Set Screw)
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton, or Efcor, Raco, OZ, Crouse Hinds, Thomas & Betts, Steel City,
or Allied Kwik-Fit.
2. Set screw type, steel, U.L. listed for grounding. Die cast will not be accepted.
3. Concrete tight.
4. Box connectors shall have insulated throat.

I. Other Fittings: Same as Raceway Specification No. 1.
A. Type: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Schedule 40.
B. Extruded from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound.
C. Resistant to water, oil, outdoor aging, exposure to sunlight, underground environments, and corrosive
atmosphere.
D. Flame retardant for use above ground, resistant to low temperatures, and resistant to distortion due to heat
under conditions likely to be encountered in intended service.
E. Sufficient strength to withstand abuse, such as impact and crushing during handling, installation, and
service.
F. Ten foot lengths with one coupling furnished for each length.
G. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.
H. Each length clearly and durably marked with manufacturer’s name. Markings shall be permanent for PVC
used above ground.
I. PVC conduit shall be UL listed.
J. Comply with applicable ASTM testing procedures and specifications.
K. Fittings:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Same as PVC conduit manufacturers.
2. Conform to applicable PVC conduit specifications above.
A. Type: Flexible metal conduit.
B. Formed from a continuous length of high-grade mild steel strip, zinc coated and shaped into interlocking
convolutions.
C. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch.
D. UL listed.
E. Approved for grounding.
F. Fittings:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ, or Efcor, Thomas & Betts.

2. Squeeze, 2-screw double clamp, or hinged clamp type.
3. Threadless.
4. Malleable iron, cadmium plated.
5. Approved for grounding.

A. Type: Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
B. Made from strong, flexible, galvanized steel core with smooth, abrasion resistant, liquid-tight polyvinyl
chloride cover.
C. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch.
D. UL listed.
E. Approved for grounding or built-in, continuous copper ground.
F. Fittings.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Appleton Type STB, or OZ, Efcor, Thomas & Betts, Ideal, Crouse Hinds.
2. Liquid tight.
4. Steel or malleable iron, cadmium or zinc finish.
5. Approved for grounding.
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Square Duct, or Hoffman, Wiegman, Keystone.
B. Type: Wireways, NEMA 1, lay-in.
C. Code gage steel, NEMA 1 enclosure.
D. Hinged covers.
E. Provide for continuous lay-in of wiring.
F. Furnished complete with all fittings and hangers.
G. UL listed.
2.8 CONDUIT COATINGS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Koppers No. 50 base coat, No. 28 or 33 top coat.
B. For protection of exterior steel conduit at ground penetration. Conduit shall be coated with coal tar coating.
Portion of conduit above grade, exposed to atmospheric conditions, shall have top coat of non-volatile
organic coal tar emulsion.
2.9 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT MARKER
A. Provide 6 inch by 6 inch by 30 inch long concrete marker set in ground to mark location of end of
underground conduit or duct bank, for future extension.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Unless noted, products and materials specified shall be installed in accordance with the following
schedule(s):
RACEWAY SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR
Applications Raceway Spec. No.
Exterior:
Underground 4
Exposed 1
Final connections to motors 6
RACEWAY SCHEDULE - INTERIOR, UNDER 600 VOLTS

Interior, 600 volts and under and all systems:
Concealed in walls & ceilings 2
Exposed within an area between floor and four (4)
1
feet above floor
Exposed, at ceiling and above four (4) feet from
2
floor
Areas subject to mechanical damage, unless noted 1
Final connections to motors, pipe mounted
6
equipment and equipment exposed to vibration
Final connection to recessed lighting fixtures 5
RACEWAY SCHEDULE - IN OR UNDER CONCRETE SLABS
Underground beneath concrete slabs 1 or 4

In concrete slabs on grade 2 or 4
In concrete slabs above grade 2
RACEWAY SCHEDULE - WIREWAYS, CABLE TRAY, DUCTS
Wireways, except in wet, damp and oily

10
atmospheres

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Raceway connectors, connections and couplings shall be pulled up tight to provide an electrical
bond throughout entire raceway system
3. Raceways shall be installed in such a manner that wires may be removed and replaced at a later
date.
4. Raceways shall be run as direct as possible to minimize number of bends and offsets. Exposed
raceways shall be installed with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls and ceilings and with right
angle turns utilizing proper connectors, conduit bodies or symmetrical bends. In areas where
vertical raceways will be exposed, raceways shall be run on building walls or columns where
possible.
5. Running threads will not be permitted on raceways requiring threads. Approved threaded couplings
or a conduit coupling shall be used where such construction is required.
6. Cylindrical metal raceways shall be bent only by use of an approved pipe bending machine so that
raceway will always retain its cylindrical shape.
7. Furnish and install No. 12 non-ferrous or 200 lb. test nylon pull string in each spare or empty
conduit. Conduit shall be identified at each end indicating destination and future use.
8. Caps shall be installed on all open conduit ends to protect against entrance of dirt and moisture.
B. Interior Raceways
1. Raceways shall be supported to building structure by use of beam clamps, one hole pipe straps
where applicable, or other approved fasteners. Use of tie wire to support raceways will not be
permitted.
2. Raceway runs shall be separated by a minimum of 6 inches from hot water pipes, steam pipes and
flues inside the building. If a separation of 6 inches or greater cannot be maintained, an approved
pipe covering shall be used over raceway runs for the length of such exposures.
3. Expansion joints, as specified for particular raceway system, shall be used on all runs that cross
building expansion joints. Raceways shall cross building expansion joints at right angles. Free ends
of conduits shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Concrete Slab Raceways
1. Cylindrical metal or PVC schedule 40 raceways, as scheduled, may be laid below or poured in a
concrete slab on grade, depending on the fill below slab, as specified for underground installation.
Cylindrical metal raceways, as scheduled, shall be poured in a concrete slab above grade.
Maximum diameter of raceways to be placed in slab shall be limited to 1/3 thickness of the slab.
Exact placement of cylindrical raceways below or within concrete slab shall be verified with the
prime professional.
2. Where cylindrical raceways are installed in concrete slabs, or under floor slabs, the minimum
permissible size shall be 3/4 inch diameter.
3. Conduits for recessed floor boxes located in slabs on grade and slabs below grade shall be
installed totally within the concrete slab with concrete totally encasing the conduits, including the
point where conduits enter the recessed floor boxes, to ensure a watertight system and that water
does not enter the conduit system. Coordinate with General Contractor.
4. All slab conduits for floor boxes shall be dry prior to installing cables.
5. Refer to Section 26 05 40, Boxes, for additional information on recessed floor boxes and conduit
connections to recessed floor boxes.
D. Underground Raceways
1. Raceway shall not be used in or under cinderfill where subject to permanent moisture unless
protected on all sides by a layer of non-cinder concrete at least 2 inches thick or unless the
raceway is at least 18 inches under the fill.

2. Underground raceways or duct banks shall have a marker and warning tape installed above
raceway, 12 inches below finished grade. Use Tape Specification No. 2; refer to Section 26 05 20,
Wire and Cable, 600 Volts and Below. Duct banks with widths over 12 inches shall have 6 inch
wide tape runs installed side-by-side on 12 inch (maximum) centers. Warning tape shall be
continuous for entire underground conduit run. Manufactures splices shall be used to connect tape
for long runs.
3. Exterior steel conduit shall be coated with a bitumastic protective covering 6 inches above and
below point where conduit enters ground. Bitumastic coating shall be top coated with a bituplastic
coating above ground after bitumastic coating has been aged from 2 to 4 weeks. Refer to coating
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
4. Where conduits penetrate building walls, manhole walls, etc., underground penetration shall be
made watertight and conduits shall be sealed with duct seal.
E. Raceways Installed in Duct Banks
1. Slope duct bank away from building entrances.

2. Elbows shall be 36 inch radius, minimum.
3. Furnish and install suitable separators. Fasten conduits to separators.
4. Securely anchor conduits to prevent movement during concrete placement.
5. Unless noted, conduits shall be encased in a 3 inch concrete envelope with minimum 2 inch
separation between conduits.
6. Where indicated, concrete for duct banks shall be reinforced. Concrete duct banks under vehicle
roadways shall be reinforced to either 10 feet beyond roadway surface or 5 feet beyond roadway
right-of-way, whichever is greater.
7. All conduits shall be capped to protect against entrance of dirt and moisture. Before use and before
installation of pull string in spare conduits, conduits shall be “swabbed”.
8. Furnish and install a pull string in all empty and spare conduits.
9. Furnish and install underground warning tape above all duct banks as specified herein for Raceway
Installation, Underground.
F. Raceway Specification No. 1
1. Rigid metal conduit shall be installed as follows:

a. Each end of every conduit run terminating in a steel enclosure of any type shall be provided
with galvanized locknut with metal insulated throat bushing inside and galvanized locknut
outside.
b. Bushing shall have ground lug where required.
c. Fittings specified under Raceway Specification No. 1 shall be used when installing rigid
metal conduit.
d. Conduit bodies shall be used on exposed conduit runs, except at locations where
impractical. At these impractical locations, factory ells shall be used. Factory ells will not be
permitted on exterior of building.
e. All electrical raceway systems located on the exterior shall be installed to maintain a NEMA
4 rating using Myers hubs.
f. Where rigid metal conduit passes from one temperature zone to another, a conduit seal
shall be installed on warmer side of wall.
g. Conduit seals shall be installed in conduit runs as required by National Electrical Code for
hazardous areas.
G. Raceway Specification No. 2
1. Electrical metallic tubing shall be installed as follows:

a. Each end of every electrical metallic tubing run termination in a pressed steel box of any
type shall be provided with an insulated throat EMT connector and locknut on the inside.
Bushing with ground lug specified under Raceway Specification No. 1 shall be installed
where required.
b. Appropriate threadless couplings and connectors shall be used with electrical metallic
tubing and made up tight so when buried in masonry or concrete, raceway will remain dry at
all times.

c. Fittings specified under Raceway Specification No. 1 shall be used when installing electrical
metallic tubing.
d. Set screw connectors are acceptable for all feeders greater than 1-1/2” diameter containing
an equipment grounding conductor sized in accordance with the latest edition of the
National Electric Code.
H. Raceway Specification No. 4
1. PVC conduit shall be installed as follows:

a. Joints in PVC conduit runs shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
b. Expansion joints shall be installed where expansion and contraction of PVC conduit occurs
due to changing temperature conditions.
c. PVC conduit shall not be used where subject to ambient temperature exceeding those
which conduit has been approved.
d. Fittings specified under Raceway Specifications No. 4 shall be used when installing PVC
conduit.
I. Raceway Specification No. 5
1. Flexible metal conduit shall be installed as follows:

a. Maximum length of flexible metal conduit permitted for final connection to motors and
equipment shall be 2 feet. Flexible metal conduit for final connection to belt drives shall
have sufficient slack to permit motor adjustment.
b. Maximum length of flexible metal conduit permitted for final connection to recessed lighting
fixtures shall be 6 feet and minimum size of 3/8 inch diameter.
c. Fittings specified under Raceway Specification No. 5 shall be used when installing flexible
metal conduit.
J. Raceway Specification No. 6
1. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be installed as follows:

a. Maximum length of liquidtight flexible metal conduit permitted for final connection to motors
and equipment shall be 2 feet. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit for final connection to belt
drives shall have sufficient slack to permit motor adjustments.
b. Fittings specified under Raceway Specification No. 6 shall be used when installing
liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
K. Raceway Specification No. 10
1. Wireways NEMA 1, lay-in, shall be installed as follows:

a. Wireways shall be adequate size.
b. Wireways shall only be installed for exposed work.
c. Wireways shall be marked with manufacturer’s name (or trademark) which shall be visible
after installation.
L. Underground Conduit Marker
1. Bury vertically in ground at end of underground conduit or duct bank with 6 inch by 6 inch end of
marker flush with grade.

SECTION 26 05 35 – MANHOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for furnishing and
installing manholes.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Precast Manholes: Indicate dimensions, reinforcement, size and locations of openings and
locations of all accessories.
2. Manhole Covers and Frames
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANHOLE AND COVER, SINGLE PRECAST
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: A.C. Miller Concrete Products Inc. manhole and Neenah Foundry Co. R1640
Series cover, or Penn-Cast Products, York Septic Tanks, Flockhart Foundry.
B. General: Manhole shall be precast, reinforced concrete, size as indicated on Drawings. Cover and frame
shall be round. Cover shall be solid, cast iron, heavy duty, machined bearing, size as required, but not less
than 30 inch diameter. Manhole covers shall be either over 100 pounds or require the use of tools to open.
For manhole covers on manholes with cables rated above 600 volts, minimum weight of cover shall be 100
pounds.
C. Openings shall not be located directly above electric equipment or conductors.
D. Minimum size shall be as shown on the Drawings, Contractor shall increase size as required to comply
with the “Sufficient Size”, “Cabling Work Space”, “Equipment Work Space”, and “Cable Bending Space”,
requirements of the National Electrical Code.
E. Standard Features
1. Two inch deep sump in center of manhole floor. Slope floor to sump.
2. Modular sections with all joints watertight.
3. Applicable service name cast on cover, TELEPHONE or ELECTRIC.
4. Provide raceway entrances on all four sides. For raceways installed under this Contract, knockout
panels or precast individual raceway openings may be used. On sides where no raceways are
installed under this contract, provide knockout panels for future raceway installation.
5. Furnish and install heavy weight cable racks with adjustable arms and acceptable insulators for all
cables in each manhole. Set adjustable inserts in the concrete walls for the attachment of racks. Do
not use bolts or studs embedded in concrete for attaching racks. Set racks and inserts on not
greater than 3-foot centers around the entire inside perimeter of the manhole, arranged so that all
spare conduit ends are clear for future cable installation. Provide racks with a sufficient number of
arms and insulators to accommodate cables for each conduit entering or leaving the manhole,
including spares.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS MANHOLES 26 05 35 - 1 of 2

6. Furnish and install a pulling iron embedded in the concrete wall opposite each raceway entrance.
Utilize 3/4 inch round stock securely fastened to the overall steel reinforcement before concrete is
poured.
7. All hardware shall be steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
8. Where ladders are indicted, ladders shall be corrosion resistant.
9. .EXECUTION
2.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install manholes where shown on the Drawings. Provide excavation, shoring, bracing, backfilling, grading,
etc.
B. Do not install manholes until final conduit grading, including field changes necessitated by underground
interferences, has been determined. Set frames to final grades as required.
C. Install manholes in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Submit manufacturer’s printed

installation instructions at completion of Work.
D. Provide adequate seal around conduit entrances into manhole to prevent ingress of moisture.
E. Install water stops, as required, during manhole construction.
F. Grounding at manholes shall be as detailed on Drawings. Install one ground rod at each manhole.
Connect all non-current-carrying metal parts in the manhole and any metallic raceway grounding bushings
to this ground rod with No. 6 AWG (minimum) copper conductor.
G. Install manholes plumb.
H. All conduits shall enter manholes at right angles.
I. Clean and remove all debris from manholes, for both manholes installed under this contract and existing
manholes that require working in under this contract.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS MANHOLES 26 05 35 - 2 of 2

SECTION 26 05 40 – BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing boxes. The specific application of these materials shall be as outlined in this Section and
subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Boxes
1.3 SCRUB – WATER PROTECTION
A. All floor boxes, poke-through devices, etc., shall provide for scrub-water protection.
B. The scrub-water protection shall utilize a comprehensive gasketing system to prevent the ingress of scrub-
water from mops and carpet shampooing equipment from entering floor boxes, poke-through devices, etc.
Entrance of dust, dirt and debris shall also be prevented.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BOX SPECIFICATION NO. 1
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Steel City, or Appleton, Raco.
B. Type: Recessed outlet boxes.
C. Constructed of galvanized, 14 gage pressed steel, square corners, depth as required.
D. Plaster rings for plaster areas.
E. Masonry boxes in masonry areas.
F. Rectangular type covers in special finished area, such as block, paneling or tile.
G. Ganged, where indicated or required.
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Crouse Hinds FS or FD cast conduit fittings, or Appleton, Pyle ional, Killark,
Adalet, OZ.
B. Type: Surface outlet boxes.
C. Constructed of copper free aluminum or rust resisting alloy of iron.
D. Heavy, threaded hubs to fit applicable conduit.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS BOXES 26 05 40 - 1 of 5

E. Cast malleable iron fittings shall be thoroughly coated with metallic zinc or cadmium, inside and outside,
after all machine work is completed.
F. Cast mounting lugs where lugs are required.
G. Gasketed, watertight covers, same construction as box, and stainless steel screws.
H. NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel, where indicated, neoprene gasketed, watertight and stainless steel screws.
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Steel City, or Appleton, Raco.
B. Type: Junction boxes.
C. Constructed of galvanized pressed steel, 14 gage, 4 inch square or octagon, depth as required.
D. Plaster rings for plaster areas.
E. Furnish and install fixture stud where required for lighting fixture support. Size stud as required to support
weight of fixture, 3/8 inch minimum size. Stud shall be integrally fabricated with the box or inserted from
back of box.
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hoffman, or Keystone, Wiegmann, McKinstry.
B. Type: Junction and pull boxes.
C. Constructed of code gage galvanized steel sheet metal, reinforced where required.
D. Riveted or welded joints.
E. Furnish and install covers of same material of construction as box, screwed to box with stainless steel
screws.
F. Box size shall be sufficient to pull, rack, and splice cables, where specific size is not indicated.
G. NEMA 3R in wet locations and on the exterior, neoprene gasketed, stainless steel screws.
H. NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel, where indicated, neoprene gasketed, watertight and stainless steel screws.
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Quazite Composolite PC1118DA18 box with solid base; Quazite Composolite
PC1118SA00 steel locking cover; Quazite Composolite PC1118HA00 locking cover.
B. Type: Polymer concrete exterior service box, suitable for vehicular traffic.
C. Constructed of polymer concrete and reinforced by a heavy-weave fiberglass.
D. Stackable for extra depth.
E. Stainless steel inserts and bolts.
F. Enclosures and covers shall be rated for no less than 15,000 pounds over a 10 inch by 10 inch area.
G. Nominal dimensions of 20 inches long by 13 inches wide by 18 inches deep.

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell LCFBSSA/LCFBCA, large capacity.
B. Type: Recessed, multi-service floor box, fully adjustable.
C. Cast iron for applications on-grade and below grade, stamped steel for all other applications.
D. Six chambers, separate power from low voltage wiring.
E. Removable non-metallic chamber plugs to allow internal wiring between chambers.
F. Reinforced nylon cover with thermoplastic (ABS) carpet flange and cable doors. Brown, gray or ivory color
as directed.
G. Service plates.
1. Duplex opening.
2. Blank.
3. Style line opening.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Unless noted, products and materials specified in this Section shall be installed in accordance with the
following schedule(s):
BOX SCHEDULE - OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
Application Box Spec. No.
Recessed outlet boxes for wiring devices 1

Surface outlet boxes for wiring devices 2
Splice, junction, or pull boxes, interior 3 or 4
Splice or pullboxes, exterior and wet locations 4, NEMA 3R
BOX SCHEDULE - OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES – SPECIAL AREAS
Surface Outlet Boxes

Interior, Wet Locations 2, NEMA 4X, watertight
Exterior 2, NEMA 4X, watertight
Surface Pull Boxes
Interior Wet Locations 4, NEMA 4X, watertight
Exterior 4, NEMA 4X, watertight

BOX SCHEDULE - FLOOR BOXES

39
Floor boxes with wiring devices
BOX SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR
Splice, junction, or pull boxes, recessed in concrete floors; 35

for exterior use - recessed in grade
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install boxes in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Outlet boxes shall be installed for weatherproof applications with wall plate lift covers hinged at top,
to open lifting up.
3. All boxes shall be accessible.
4. Locations indicated are approximate. Coordinate in relation to spaces and equipment surrounding
each outlet. When necessary, relocate outlets to avoid interference with mechanical equipment or
structural features.
5. Locate all boxes for light switches on strike side of doors, unless otherwise indicated, or if building
construction prohibits installation at this location. Locations at other than the strike side of the door,
even if shown on the Drawings, shall be verified with the Architect before roughing in.
6. Locate all light fixture outlets in a symmetrical pattern according to the room layout unless
otherwise indicated.
7. Mount all boxes plumb and level. Furnish and install flush proper type extension rings or plaster
covers as required. For flush mounted boxes, make holes in the surrounding surface no larger than
required to receive the box.
8. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel boxes than are actually required. Seal any used openings
in any type box.
9. Boxes shall not be fastened to hung ceiling support wires.
10. Support all boxes independently of conduit.
11. Install boxes to maintain fire rating, where applicable.
12. Boxes shall not be installed exposed in finished areas without approval of Architect.
B. Junction and Pull Boxes
1. Junction, pull, or splice boxes shall be adequate size, suitable to construction features and
independently supported.
2. Install boxes to maintain adequate head room.
C. Floor Boxes
1. Floor boxes with devices or outlets as specified shall be installed where indicated on Drawings.
2. Floor boxes recessed in slabs on grade and slabs below grade shall be cast type boxes and shall
have concrete installed on all sides of the floor box with a minimum of 2 inches of concrete on the
bottom of the box. Coordinate with General Contractor.

3. No cables shall be installed to these floor boxes until the building has been sealed from the
elements.
4. Cast boxes shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions to ensure a water tight box installation.
5. Water accumulation within these boxes shall be dried out prior to installing cables.
6. Conduit connections to these boxes shall be of the type and installed as directed by the
manufacturer to ensure watertight connection.
7. If when dried out, water continues to enter these boxes, installing contractors, both General and
Electrical, shall take whatever means necessary to correct the water intrusion situation.
D. Exterior Flush with Grade Boxes
1. Box and cover shall be suitable for heavy vehicular traffic. Pull box to be flush mounted with grade
and be set in 6 inch minimum concrete, sides and bottom. All penetrations in pull box shall be
made watertight.
3.3 DIMENSIONS
A. Unless otherwise noted, dimensions are to the center of finished outlet with all wiring devices in place.
Where indicated as clear, dimensions shall be to top or bottom of wiring device, plate, or trim.
B. Dimensions specified herein shall be verified by Architect before roughing-in outlets.
3.4 LOCATIONS
A. Locations of outlets and equipment shall be verified by Architect before roughing-in outlets or conduit.
Final location may differ from that indicated on Drawings.

SECTION 26 05 50 – WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing wiring devices. The specific application of these materials shall be as outlined in this Section and
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Switches
2. Receptacles
3. Wall Plates
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL WIRING DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Pass and Seymour, Eaton, Leviton.
B. All wiring devices shall be heavy-duty, specification grade, unless noted otherwise.
C. All wiring devices shall be back and side wired, unless noted otherwise.
D. All wiring devices shall be “weather-resistant” type where installed in wet or damp locations.
E. UL Listed and labeled as defined in the National Electrical Code, by a qualified testing agency, and
marked for intended location and application.
F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from
single manufacturer.
2.2 COLOR
A. Unless otherwise noted, color of all wiring devices and wall plates shall be as selected by Architect.
B. Wiring devices connected to the emergency power system shall be red.
C. Receptacles and wall plates mounted in finished ceilings shall be white.
D. Color of nylon wall plates shall match color of associated wiring device.
2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Standard Receptacle
1. 125 volts, 20 amp, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding.
2. Simplex or duplex as indicated.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WIRING DEVICES 26 05 50 - 1 of 5

3. NEMA Configuration 5-20R.

4. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel-plated, brass
mounting strap. Nylon finder groove. Automatic grounding feature.
B. Special Receptacles
1. Simplex, NEMA configuration as indicated on drawings.
2. Voltage and poles as required by indicated NEMA configuration.
mounting strap. Automatic grounding feature.
C. Controlled Receptacle
2. Simplex or duplex as indicated.
mounting strap. Nylon finder groove. Automatic grounding feature.
5. Identification: Receptacle (or portion of receptacle) controlled by an automatic control device shall
be permanently labeled with word “CONTROLLED” and provided with universal controlled device
symbol, as defined in the National Electrical Code.
2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Requirements:
1. All GFCI receptacles shall be UL 943 compliant.
a. Self-Test Function: Periodic, automatic testing of ground fault module. If test fails,
receptacle shall deny power or provide visual and/or audible notification.
b. Line-Load Reversal Function: If line power is connected to load terminals, power to
receptacle face shall be denied.
2. Trip Threshold: 5 mA plus or minus 1 mA, Class A.
3. Trip Time: 0.025 seconds.
4. Test and reset buttons. Indicator light to indicate tripped condition.
5. Automatic grounding feature.
B. Standard GFCI Receptacle

2. Duplex.
2.5 USB CHARGER DEVICES
A. Combination USB Charger Receptacle

2. Duplex.
4. USB Outlets: Dual, Type A.
mounting strap.
B. USB Charger Station

1. USB Outlets: USB Receptacles: Quad, Type A. 5 amp.
2.6 TWIST-LOCK RECEPTACLES
A. Special Receptacles
1. Simplex, NEMA configuration as indicated on drawings.
2. Voltage and poles as required by indicated NEMA configuration.
3. Material and Color: Black nylon.
mounting strap. Automatic grounding feature.

2.7 SWITCHES
A. General Requirements
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Pass and Seymour, Eaton, Leviton. Manufacturers listed
below are basis of design only.
2. All switches shall be rated 120/277 volt, 20 amp, unless noted otherwise.
3. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
4. Back and side wired, silver cadmium oxide contacts, stainless steel automatic grounding clip.
B. Standard Toggle Switch

1. Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL1221 Series.
2. Type: Single or double pole, three-way or four-way as indicated on drawings.
3. Nylon toggle.
4. Key operated, where indicated, two keys furnished with each switch.
C. Momentary Contact Switch

1. Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL1557 Series.
2. Type: Single pole, double throw, three position, momentary contact, center off.
3. Nylon toggle.
D. Double Throw, Center Off Switch

1. Hubbell HBL1386 Series.
2. Type: Single pole or double pole, double throw, three position, maintained contact, center off.
3. Nylon toggle.
2.8 WALL PLATES
A. General Requirements
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Pass and Seymour, Eaton, Leviton. Manufacturers listed
below are basis of design only.
2. Wall plate configurations and cutouts shall match corresponding wiring devices. Provide gang
plates where devices are ganged.
3. Plate securing screws shall be metal with head color to match plate finish.
B. Wall Plate Specification No. W1
1. Manufacturer: Hubbell ‘NP’ Series.

2. Nylon, high impact resistant, smooth finish, contoured edges.
3. Color: Shall match color of wiring device.
C. Wall Plate Specification No. W2
1. Manufacturer: Hubbell ‘SS’ Series.

2. Stainless steel type 302/304, .04 inch thickness, satin finish, smooth (no lines).
3. 18 percent chromium and 8 percent nickel, non-magnetic.
4. Contoured edges.
5. Wall plates indicated to be engraved, shall be engraved by manufacturer.
D. Wall Plate Specification No. W8
1. Manufacturer: Hubbell WP826 Series.

2. NEMA 3R rating while in use, hinged cover/enclosure clearly marked “Suitable for Wet Locations
While in Use”.
3. Grey finish.

4. There shall be a gasket between the enclosure and mounting surface and between the hinged
cover and mounting plate/base to ensure proper seal.
5. Stainless steel mounting screws.
6. Flame retardant, UV stabilized polycarbonate, impact resistant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Unless noted, products and material specified in this Section shall be installed in accordance with the
following schedule(s):
WALL PLATE SCHEDULE
Application Wall Plate Spec. No.

Interior W1, W2
Interior, emergency W1
Weatherproof (While in Use) W8
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install all wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, plumb and level.
2. All wall openings shall be neatly cut and covered by wall plates. Do not use oversized or extra-deep
plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush
or do not cover rough wall opening.
3. Furnish and install wall plates on all wiring devices and all blank boxes.
4. Furnish and install zinc or cadmium coated steel plates on all surface “FS” boxes.
5. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
6. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting
screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
7. Clean dirt, dust and debris from all outlet boxes, final cleaning shall be by vacuuming.
8. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed
before building finishing operations were complete.
9. Verify that all wiring devices are energized and test for proper polarity and proper operation.
B. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles

1. Ground fault interrupter receptacles shall not be wired for downstream protection.
2. Ground fault receptacles shall be installed in all locations where required by the National Electrical
Code.
3. As a minimum, ground fault receptacles shall be installed in the following locations:
a. All toilet rooms.
b. Within 6 feet of any type sink.
c. Within twenty-five feet of all HVAC equipment as required by the National Electrical Code.
d. Outdoor locations.
e. All locations in kitchens located in “other than dwelling units” as defined by the National
Electrical Code, not limited to countertop receptacles.
C. Switches
1. Install switches with “off” position down.
2. Switches shall not be connected to neutral conductor.
3. Switches shall be ganged where grouped at specific locations, as indicated on Drawings.
4. Switch outlets shall be located on strike side of door, unless otherwise indicated, or if building
construction prohibits installation at this location. Locations at other than the strike side of the door,
even if shown on the Drawings, shall be verified with the Architect before roughing in.
5. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

D. Coordination with Other Trades

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and
do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint,
and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the
joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
E. Conductors
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or
nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
1) The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of the
National Electrical Code, Article 300, without pigtails.
F. Receptacle Orientation
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to
the right.
A. Mounting height of outlets or receptacles serving special equipment or installed above a counter shall be
determined in field.
B. Mounting heights and locations of all receptacles serving kitchen equipment shall be coordinated in field
with kitchen equipment installer before rough-in.
C. If the designated location of a switch or receptacle places it partially between two finishes, the actual
location shall be adjusted to set the plate entirely on one finished surface only, but actual height shall not
exceed mounting heights indicated herein or required by codes.
D. Outlet boxes for flush mounted wiring devices installed in concrete masonry unit (block) or brick walls shall
be installed so bottom of outlet box coincides with bottom of block or brick that is below specified mounting
height, and actual height shall not exceed mounting heights indicated herein or required by code.
E. Mounting heights, measured to centerline, shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated,:
1. Switches: 42 inches above finished floor

2. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor
3. Receptacles, Above Countertop: 6 inches above backsplash.
4. Weatherproof Receptacles on Exterior Lighting Poles: 24 inches above finished grade
5. Weatherproof Receptacles on Exterior of Building: 24 inches above finished grade
6. Weatherproof Receptacles on Roof: 24 inches above roof

SECTION 26 05 60 – GROUNDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, material and equipment required for the installation of
grounding systems and devices. The specific application of these materials shall be as outlined in this
Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Ground Rods
2. Ground Connectors
3. Grounding Bus Bars
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUND RODS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Copperweld, or Penn-Union, Weaver.
B. Type: High strength steel core.
C. Construction: Copper exterior welded to the steel core.
D. Chamfered top to prevent mushrooming. Pointed end.
E. Minimum Diameter
1. 10 foot rod: 3/4 inch diameter.

2. Above 10 feet: 1 inch diameter.
F. For lengths over 10 feet, sectional rods with steel driving bolt may be furnished.
2.2 GROUND CONNECTORS
A. Ground Connectors Specification No. 1
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: OZ Types ABG, CG, DG, EG, FG, or HG, or Thomas & Betts.
2. Type: Wire to pipe connector. U-bolt, clamp type.
3. Copper alloy.
B. Ground Connector Specification No. 2
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thomas & Betts, or Burndy.

2. Type: Ground grid clamps. Compression connection to cable or rod.
3. High conductivity cast copper fittings.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GROUNDING SYSTEMS 26 05 60 - 1 of 4

4. Cable, rod, plate or combination connector, as required.

5. Suitable for direct burial or imbedded in concrete.
C. Ground Connector Specification No. 4
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Copperweld Type AB, or Burndy, Penn Union, Dossert, Anderson.
2. Type: Cable to rod. Bolted pressure type.
3. Copper.
4. Nonferrous hex socket or hex head bolt.
2.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING BUSBAR
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Erico Eritech “EGBA” Series, Chatsworth or Newtown Instrument Co.
B. Minimum 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide by 24 inches long copper bus bar.
C. Hole pattern with alternate columns of 5/16 inch diameter holes and 7/16 inch diameter holes – 3 holes per
column.
D. Furnish with polyamide, glass fiber reinforced, stand-off insulators and stainless steel mounting brackets
and stainless steel fasteners.
E. Unless noted otherwise, all connections to the ground bus shall be made using two-hole compression
connectors secured with two silicon bronze bolts, each with two washer, one lock washer and nut.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Unless noted, ground connectors shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule(s):
GROUND CONNECTOR SCHEDULE
Application Ground Connector Spec. No.
Connection of ground wire to water pipe 1

Connection of ground wire or ground grid 2
cable to ground rod, building steel or another
ground grid cable
Connection of ground wire to ground rod 4
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Unless otherwise specified, conductive noncurrent carrying electrical materials and equipment shall
be grounded. Non-electrical items of equipment shall be bonded together and grounded as
indicated on Drawings. Grounding and bonding shall be in accordance with National Electrical
Code requirements.
2. Bonds and jumpers shall be furnished and installed where required during construction and where
necessary to ensure both operation and safety. Jumpers shall be installed around water meters
and insulated pipe connectors.

3. Raceway system shall be grounded and shall be electrically, and mechanically continuous from all
outlet devices, power utilization equipment, and distribution equipment to system main ground
point.
4. Main system ground points shall be as noted on Drawings. Exact location and point of connection
of main system grounds shall be verified during construction.
5. Ground wire shall be installed in raceway runs where indicated on Drawings. Ground wires shall be
insulated.
6. Grounding shall be by separate insulated grounding conductors installed in all raceway runs and
pulled with phase conductors. Grounding system shall be electrically, and mechanically continuous
from all outlet devices, power utilization equipment, and distribution equipment to system main
ground point.
7. Neutral conductors shall be continuous throughout system and shall be grounded only at the
switchboard neutral.
8. Electrical service shall be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
9. Separately derived systems shall be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
B. Ground Rods
1. Ground rods shall be installed where indicated on Drawings, where specified, or as required by
National Electrical Code.
2. Ground rods shall be driven to a depth so that top of rod is 2 feet below grade.
3. Provide accessible test well at each ground rod location.
C. Building Structural Steel Ground
1. Building steel columns shall be connected to ground rods driven alongside column as indicated on
Drawings. Provide #4/0 wire to connect to ground rod.
D. Service Entrance Grounding Busbar

1. Mount busbar on wall adjacent to service entrance equipment.
2. Exothermically weld the bonding conductor between the service entrance equipment and the
ground bus at the ground bus only.
3. Make bolt-on connections at ground bus for the following grounding conductors.
a. Water service.
b. Ground grid.
c. Building steel.
d. Telecom ground bus(es).
e. Lightning protection system, as applicable.
f. Step-down transformer(s) within the main electrical room.
4. Identify each connection to the ground bus with an engraved nameplate.
5. Furnish and install bare copper cable (minimum size #1/0) from ground bus to ground grid.
3.3 TESTS
A. Ground resistance of main system grounding point shall be tested and shall not exceed values required by
National Electrical Code. Test shall be made using two auxiliary ground rod (three point) method or other
approved method. If resistance is found to be higher than that allowed by National Electric Code,
additional ground rods shall be driven until a resistance below allowed value is obtained.
B. Outside tests shall not be performed during unusually wet conditions. Tests shall be made during dry
weather conditions.

C. Complete test record in triplicate shall be submitted to Owner stating allowable National Electrical Code
value, showing resistance values and calculations and shall indicate method of test.

SECTION 26 05 73 – POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, material and equipment required for performing studies
as described below.
B. The scope of the studies shall include all distribution equipment furnished and installed under this contract.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide for review the following studies under one cover:

1. Short Circuit Equipment Evaluation Study; including all associated reports, supporting
documentation, and narrative analysis.
2. Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study; including all associated protective device
settings, supporting documentation, time-current curves, narrative analysis, and recommendations.
3. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis; including all associated tabulated results, supporting documentation,
labels, and narrative analysis.
4. The overcurrent protective device coordination and short circuit analysis shall be submitted prior to
submission of switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, etc., shop drawings. Submittals for
switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, etc., will not be reviewed and approved until the
overcurrent protective device coordination and short circuit analysis has been submitted.
B. Furnish and install arc flash hazard labels for all equipment included in the arc flash hazard analysis as
specified in Section 26 05 05, Basic Materials. All hazard labels shall, at a minimum, indicate the wording
as specified in Section 26 05 05 and the following:
1. The system model “Bus” or “Protective Device” Component Name corresponding to specific electrical
equipment and/or component applicable to the label.
2. Nominal voltage level of the equipment.
3. Flash Hazard Boundary
4. Incident Energy (cal/cm^2)
5. Limited Approach Distance.
6. Restricted Approach Distance.
7. Prohibited Approach Distance.
C. After approval of final studies, contractor shall submit two hard copies and one electronic copy of entire
report, including (but not limited to) all applicable system input data, analysis reports, and project model one-
line.
D. Submit an electronic copy of the final system project file in the most recent version of SKM Power Tools
software, or converted to the most recent version of SKM Power Tools format from the format associated
with the software program used to perform the analysis.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be performed by the
distribution equipment manufacturer or an independent firm currently involved in medium and low voltage
power system evaluation.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 26 05 73 - 1 of 6

B. The study shall be performed, stamped, and signed by a registered professional engineer licensed in the
state in which the project is located.
C. A minimum of five (5) years’ experience in power system analysis is required for the individual in charge of
the project.
1.4 SOFTWARE
A. Perform all studies using SKM Systems Analysis software, or one of the following approved equals:
1. Energy-Distribution System Analysis (EDSA), by EDSA Micro Corporation
2. Easy Power, by ESA Inc.
B. Comply with IEEE Standard 399: Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
Analysis.
1.5 DATA COLLECTION
A. Contractor shall collect all data as required by the power system studies. The Engineer performing the short
circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with
a listing of required data immediately after award of the contract. The Contractor shall expedite collection of
the data to assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop
drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for collecting all source data from Power Company, including available fault
current and impedance.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for field surveys of all applicable existing electrical distribution system
components as required, including all device data, settings, feeder lengths, etc.
D. Studies shall include contribution of all motors larger than 20HP.
E. The contractor shall gather and tabulate including, but not limited to, the following input data:
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified as part of this project and involved in
overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are
consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input
and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats, showing the
following:
a. Utility contribution.
b. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
c. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
d. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance,
and X/R ratios.
e. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
f. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material, insulation, and
length.
g. Busway material type, ampacity and impedance.
h. Motor horsepower (nameplate and duty point) and code letter designation according to NEMA
MG 1.
3. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers
on diagram, showing the following:
a. Utility contribution.
b. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and
stopping.
c. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and
overload capability.
d. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and
thermal-damage curve.

e. Generator thermal-damage curve.

f. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
g. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company.
h. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
i. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere or current
sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous
adjustment range for circuit breakers.
j. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,
instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent
relays.
k. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes
rms symmetrical.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHORT CIRCUIT EQUIPMENT EVALUATION STUDY
A. Analysis shall begin at and include Power Company’s nearest upstream protective device. Study shall end
with either main breaker or largest branch breaker in lighting and appliance panelboards. Tie breaker, where
indicated, will operate normally open. Equipment will be provided with ampere interrupting current rating and
bus bracings equal to or greater than values indicated on Drawings, these values will not be decreased as
a result of short circuit study.
B. Emergency electrical system shall be included in study.
C. All breakers shall be fully rated for short circuit interrupting, series connected ratings will not be approved.
D. Use actual conductor impedances if known. If unknown, use typical conductor impedances based on IEEE
Standard 141-1993.
E. Transformer design impedances shall be used when test impedances are not available.
F. Calculate the maximum available short-current in amperes rms symmetrical at overcurrent protective
devices positions in the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a three-phase
bolted fault at each component including, but not limited to:
1. Switchgear and switchboard bus
2. Motor control center
3. Distribution panelboard
4. Branch panelboard
5. Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS)
6. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) units
7. All other devices which carry a KAIC or KAWC rating including, but not limited to, VFDs, starters,
disconnect switches, busway, etc.
G. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical
distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations
that could result in maximum fault conditions.
1. Where momentary paralleling occurs during controlled conditions (closed-transition transfer
schemes), the effect of the parallel sources shall be ignored as is permitted in IEEE 666.
H. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current from all
available power sources.
I. The contractor shall be responsible for supplying conductor information (lengths, types, number per phase,
etc.) in a timely manner to allow the short-circuit analysis to be completed prior to final installation.

J. Comply with IEEE Standard 399: Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
Analysis for general procedures of analysis.
K. Study format shall include the following:

1. Calculation methods and assumptions
2. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated
3. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution characteristics.
4. Table of calculated quantities
5. Results, conclusions, recommendations.
2.2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. Analysis shall begin at and include Power Company’s nearest upstream protective device. Ground fault shall
be included. Study shall end with either main breaker or largest branch breaker in lighting and appliance
panelboards.Study will be used to determine settings of protective devices for selective coordination.
B. Emergency electrical system shall be included in study.
C. Time-Current Curve Graphs

1. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves shall be displayed on log-log scale
graphs.
2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical
fault current to which the device is exposed.
3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap,
time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.
D. Study format shall include the following:

1. Calculation methods and assumptions
2. Applicable Time-Current Curves
3. Results, conclusions, recommendations.
E. For all installations where coordination is required by the NEC and a coordination deficiency is identified,
provide recommendations of equipment or device changes required for system to be selectively coordinated
to required levels.
F. For all installations where coordination is not required by the NEC and a coordination deficiency is identified,
provide recommendations of equipment or device changes required for increasing system protection or
device coordination.
G. Where changes to existing upstream devices or settings are required for selective coordination of devices
or equipment installed under this project, provide analysis and recommendations to Architect as part of this
study.
2.3 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. Calculate Arc Flash Incident Energy (AFIE) levels and flash protection boundary distances. Where arc-flash
reduction technologies are utilized in service entrance equipment, study shall calculate values for both
normal operation settings and arc reduction mode settings.
B. The Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed in conjunction with a short circuit equipment evaluation
and an overcurrent protective device coordination study. Arc Flash study shall be performed using settings
and recommendations obtained in associated studies.

C. If the results of the associated fault-current and coordination studies are altered in any way due to changes
in field conditions during construction, shop drawing review, or study recommendations, the arc flash study
shall be revised accordingly to ensure the completed arc flash study results are based upon the final
approved results of all associated studies and reflect the final electrical system configurations to closely
reflect the system as-built conditions to the extent possible.
D. Results of the Analysis shall be submitted in tabular form, and shall include device or bus name, bolted fault
and arcing fault current levels, flash protection boundary distances, personal-protective equipment classes
and AFIE levels.
E. The analysis shall be performed under all applicable system operational scenarios, but only the worst-case
Arc-Flash conditions must be uniquely reported for each equipment location. The final report shall describe,
when applicable, how the worst-case flash conditions differ from worst-case bolted fault conditions, and a
detailed description of all system operational scenarios included within the analysis.
F. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed in compliance with the most recent and applicable
editions of both the IEEE Standard 1584, the IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Calculations, and NFPA
70E, the Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
G. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include recommendations for reducing AFIE levels and enhancing
worker safety.
H. Safe working distances shall be based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident
energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.
I. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for multiple system
scenarios must be compared and the greatest incident energy must be uniquely reported for each equipment
location. Calculations must be performed to represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault
current magnitude for all normal and emergency operating conditions. The minimum calculation will assume
that the utility contribution is at a minimum and will assume a minimum motor contribution (all motors off).
Conversely, the maximum calculation will assume a maximum contribution from the utility and will assume
the maximum amount of motors to be operating.
J. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Maximum
clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2. Where it is not physically
possible to move outside of the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event,
a maximum clearing time based on the specific location shall be utilized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The power distribution equipment manufacturer shall carry in their bid to the Electrical Subcontractor, a
sufficient allowance to provide modifications to the equipment, if necessary, based on the results of the
studies identified herein.
B. Contractor shall adjust all devices, both new and existing, to settings identified in the recommendations
section of the overcurrent protective device coordination study.
C. Contractor shall notify Owner of any deficiencies of existing equipment or equipment ratings identified during
studies.
3.2 LABELS
A. Contractor shall install labels on all equipment included in arc flash study.
B. Existing labels on equipment included in study shall be removed prior to application of new labels.
C. Labels shall be installed straight and plumb.

D. Labels shall be installed on outside of panelboard covers. Where a panel is installed in a finished space,
label shall be installed on inside of cover adjacent to panel directory.

SECTION 26 12 10 – LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
liquid filled transformers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Transformers; performance characteristics, losses, insulation system, dimensions and weights.

Include pad dimensions when applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D or General Electric, Eaton - Cutler Hammer, Siemens Energy,
Pauwels.
B. General: Transformer shall be pad mounted compartmental type, self-cooled, tamperproof, weatherproof,
and furnished with heavy duty lifting lugs and jacking pads welded to tank. Enclosure shall be bolted to
tank for terminating high voltage and low voltage cables. Liquid preservation shall be by sealed tank
method. Tank base shall be constructed to allow rolling or skidding in any direction. Transformer tank shall
withstand pressures of direction. Transformer tank shall withstand pressures of 7 psi without permanent
distortion. Provide ground pad on outer surface of tank. Transformer shall comply with sound level
requirements of NEMA TR1.
C. Terminal Cabinet: Terminal Cabinet shall be separated into high voltage and low voltage sections by steel
barrier and bolted to transformer tank front wall. High voltage door fastening shall not be accessible until
low voltage door has been opened. Access to cable compartments through two liftoff hinged doors with
low voltage door overlapping high voltage door. Single handle on low voltage door with provisions for
padlocking.
1. Low voltage compartment shall contain the following:

a. Nameplate on tank wall above low voltage bushings.
b. Bushings/terminals, for terminating secondary conduits, fastened externally to permit
tightening when necessary.
2. High voltage compartment shall contain the following:
a. Bushings with connectors for terminating primary cables.
b. Tank grounding pad, liquid drain and sampling plug.
c. Lightning arresters.
D. Cover: Cover shall be bolted to tank with nitrile gasket to prevent liquid contamination. Handhole will not
be permitted. Cover shall not be welded to tank.
E. Core: Coil assembly shall be five leg design with wound cores.
F. Provide full capacity primary taps, two 2 1/2 percent taps above voltage and two 2 1/2 percent below rated
voltage. A tap changing mechanism shall be provided for de energized operation only and shall be
externally operable.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS 26 12 10 - 1 of 3

G. Transformer shall be equipped with the following:
1. Dial type thermometer.

2. Magnetic liquid level gauge.
3. Provision for vacuum pressure gauge.
4. 1 inch drain valve with sampling device.
5. 1 inch filling provision.
6. Pressure relief valve.
H. Transformer ratings shall be as follows:
1. Primary Voltage: 13.2 KV delta.

2. Secondary Voltage: 277/480 volt,wye, 4-wire.
3. KVA: 1500.
4. BIL: 95 KV.
5. Impedance: 5.75 percent.
I. Coils shall be wound with aluminum conductors.
J. Transformer shall be energy efficient per DOE 2016 requirements.
K. Maximum temperature rise shall be 65 degrees C. above a 40 degrees C. ambient. Temperature shall not
exceed 65 degrees C. when measured near top of tank, without the use of cooling fans. Hot spot
allowance shall be 80 degrees C.
L. Primary connection shall be delta and secondary connection shall be wye.
M. High voltage leads and connections shall have insulation equal to voltage class of winding and shall be
properly supported.
N. Coolant and insulating fluid:

1. Non-propagating liquid insulated – Biodegradable as follows:
a. The fluid shall be Envirotemp FR3, or as approved.
b. The dielectric coolant shall be a listed less flammable fluid meeting the requirements of
National Electrical Code Section 450-23 and the requirements of the National Electrical
Safety Code (IEEE C2-1997), Section 15.
c. The fluid shall be non-toxic, non-bioaccumulating and be readily and completely
biodegradable per EPA OPPTS 835.3100.
d. The fluid shall be comprised of edible oils and food grade performance enhancing additives.
e. The fluid shall result in zero mortality when tested on trout fry per OECD G.L. 203.
f. The fluid shall not require oils derived from genetically altered seeds.
g. The fluid shall be Factory Mutual Approved and UL Classified.
h. The fluid shall have a minimum open cub flash point of ≥ 325 degrees C and a fire point of ≥
350 degrees C per ASTM D92.
O. Transformer high voltage component shall be dead front construction.
P. Transformer shall be radial feed type.
Q. Furnish transformer with primary disconnect.
R. Surge protection:
1. Provide three distribution class lightning arrestors for surge protection. Arresters shall be mounted
in the high voltage compartment.
S. Transformer shall be UL listed.

T. Transformer shall be painted manufacturer’s standard color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install transformer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Submit manufacturer's printed

installation instructions with operating and maintenance data at completion of Work.
B. Tighten connections prior to energizing.
C. Measure voltage and make appropriate tap adjustments.
D. Transformer shall be located such that there is a minimum of 10 foot working clearance in front of the
equipment.
E. Coordinate dimensions of transformer pad with final dimensions of transformer.
3.2 ON SITE TESTING
A. Liquid filled transformers shall be tested on site before energization in accordance with current NETA
testing procedures. Test results shall be turned over to Owner.
B. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of IEEE C57.12.90 and shall include, as a
minimum, the following tests:
1. Ratio
2. Polarity
3. Phase Rotation
4. No-Load Loss
5. Excitation Current
6. Impedance Voltage
7. Load Loss
8. Applied Potential
9. Induced Potential
10. QC Impulse Test
C. Testing shall be performed by Met Electrical Testing Company, Inc., Baltimore, Maryland.

SECTION 26 13 10 – WIRE AND CABLE, ABOVE 600 VOLTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing wire and cable, above 600 volts. The specific application of these materials shall be as outlined in
this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Wire and Cable.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Splices and terminations shall be made only by an electrical worker with a minimum of 5 years experience
in wire and cable installations over 600 volts.
1.4 FACTORY TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
A. Wire and cable shall be safety and application tested, performance tested and shall have this information
and the Manufacturer’s information affixed to the wire and cables as specified in Section 26 05 05, Basic
Materials.
B. DC Resistance Test: Conductor DC resistance shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-68-516.
C. AC Voltage Tests: Each reel of cable shall be subjected to AC high potential tests in accordance with Part
6 of ICEA. The cable shall be given a 5-minute AC voltage-withstand test.
D. Insulation Resistance: The insulation resistance shall not be less than that corresponding to a constant of
50,000 at 15.6 degrees C. The resistance shall be recorded in megohms per 1,000 feet.
E. Corona Discharge: Each reel of cable shall be given a corona discharge test. The test shall be in
accordance with AEIC No. CS-6, latest edition. The maximum partial discharge allowed is 5 picocoulombs.
F. Certification: For each reel of cable, a certified and notarized factory test report (CTR) shall be submitted.
The report shall be submitted in triplicate to owner for file and future reference. The report shall include
reel numbers for cable identification, date of manufacture, electrical test results, physical test results, date
of testing, and other pertinent information. Test reports are to be submitted before any cable is shipped.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE, 15 KV, EPR
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pirelli, or Okonite.
B. Ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) insulation, rated 15 KV.
C. Conform to ICEA S-68-516 and NEMA standards.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WIRE AND CABLE, ABOVE 600 26 13 10 - 1 of 5

VOLTS
D. Conductors: Concentric stranded, soft copper, conforming to ASTM B8.
E. Conductor or Strand Shielding: Conductors shall be covered with an extruded, conducting or

semiconducting layer firmly bonded to cable insulation. Conform to electrical and physical properties of
ICEA 5-19-81.
F. Insulating Shield:
1. Conducting or semiconducting covering applied directly over insulation.

2. Semiconducting, non-metallic tape applied over covering.
3. Concentric serving of equally spaced #24 AWG solid tinned copper wires applied over
semiconducting tape.
4. Separator tape shall be applied over cable shield system.
G. Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
H. Insulation shall be suitable for use at continuous conductor temperature to 90 degrees C. for normal
operation, 130 degrees C. for emergency overload conditions, and 250 degrees C. for short circuit
conditions.
I. All cable shall have surface identification showing manufacturer’s name, insulation type, insulation level,
conductor size and voltage rating every 24 inches.
J. Cable shall be tested in accordance with ICEA standards.
K. Certified test reports of cable tests shall be included with required submittal data.
L. Insulation Level: 133 percent.
2.2 15 KV CABLE TERMINATIONS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 3M “Cold Shrink”, Silicon Rubber Termination Kits, QT-III.
B. Voltage class equal or greater than the cable being terminated. Current rating shall meet or exceed the
current rating of the cable being spliced.
C. Maximum continuous operating temperature rating – 90 degrees C. Emergency overload rating – 130
degrees C.
D. Constructed of “Hi-K” stress control compound and “Hi-K” EPDM rubber tube. Installation shall not require
the use of silicon grease.
E. Constructed of tracking resistant silicone rubber, 4 skirts for 15 KV exterior operation, non-skirted for
internal termination and weather-protected application.
F. Pre-stretched cold shrink design, installed without application of a heat source.
G. Class 1 design (IEEE), for use with listed copper lugs.
H. For either free hanging or bracket mounted installations, used in interior weather protected, or weather
exposed contaminated areas.
I. For termination both XLP or EPR insulated cables.
J. Suitable for installation in a “light” to “extremely heavy” operating environment.
K. Meet IEEE standards for “Test Procedures and Requirements for High Voltage Alternating Current Cable
Terminations”, to include:

VOLTS
1. Partial Discharge (Corona)

2. Power Frequency (AC) Withstand
3. Lightning Impulse
4. Sealing
L. Capable of being hypotted in the field.
M. Not harmed by field surface cleaning.
N. BIL-150 KV.
2.3 15 KV CONNECTION SYSTEM – 600 AMP
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Cooper, Elastimold, or as approved.
B. Submersible, fully shielded and insulated plug-in terminations for connecting to transformers, switches and
junctions. Dead front when connected. Connection ring for pull-stick disconnecting.
C. 600 amp, non-load break, 15 KV.
D. Shall consist of load break connector, bushing well insert and bushing well.
E. Suitable for use on XLP and EPR insulated cables.
F. High quality, peroxide cured EPDM insulation.
G. Junction modules, bushing inserts and wells, parking stands, grounding wells, bushings, protective caps,
stand-off insulators, and all other necessary accessories, suitable for use with subsurface, pad-mounted
and submersible installations, shall be furnished and installed.
H. Ratings as follows:
1. Impulse Voltage – 125 KV BIL

2. Withstand Voltage – 40 KV, 60 Hz, 1 minute; 78 KV, DC, 15 minutes.
3. Corona Voltage Level – 19 KV extinction
4. Dimensions – IEEE (ANSI) 386
5. Fault Close – 10,000 amps rms symmetrical or available fault.
6. Current Rating – 600 amp rms continuous, non-load break.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install wire and cable in accordance with manufacturer’ instructions.

2. Wring shall be installed in raceways unless otherwise noted.
3. Use color coded wire throughout for convenience in testing and maintenance. Neutral conductors
shall be color coded neutral gray or white. Grounding conductors shall be green.
4. A compound of oil or grease shall not be used to assist in pulling wire into conduit.
5. Conductors shall be installed continuous without splicing except where indicated on the Drawings
within junction boxes, splice boxes or manholes.

VOLTS
6. Avoid abrasion and other damage to cables during installation.

7. Protect installed cables from entrance of moisture.
8. Cable shall be manufactured no more than one year prior to installation.
9. Underground direct burial cable runs shall have marker or warning tape installed above cable, 12
inches below finished grade. Tape shall be Tape Specification No. 2.
B. 15 KV Cable Terminations
1. Install terminations in accordance with instructions using all materials and components as directed
by manufacturer.
C. 15 KV Connector Systems
1. Install the 15 KV connector systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions using all
materials and components as directed by manufacturer.
2. Elbow Connectors: Arrange elbow connectors for hook stick operation and having test points.
Where connection is being made to an existing junction module, supply an elbow connector by the
same manufacturer as the junction module.
3. Junction: Furnish and install junctions for the number of points indicated and complete with PVC
coated steel or fiberglass brackets for round or flat wall mounting as shown and angles as shown.
Supply mounting bracket having parking stands suitable for standoff plugs and portable feed-
through modules.
4. Protective Caps: Furnish and install protective caps hook stick operated, insulated type, fully
shielded for sealing energized bushings and having an electrostatic ground wire. Furnish and install
protective caps on all unused bushings of junction modules.
5. Furnish two suitable hook sticks and turn over to Owner.
3.2 CABLE TESTING
A. Perform a high potential test on medium voltage cables in accordance with ICEA test procedures and
guidelines for Field Acceptance Testing of cables based upon the type of cable insulation.
B. Perform the high potential test on the cables after all splices and permanent connections are completed.
Cable tests shall include connections at both ends of cable and switchgear bus to open line switch.
Lightning arrestors and all other cable attached components shall be disconnected during testing.
C. Cable continuity insulation-resistance and phase identification shall be checked.
D. Each cable shall be given a full dielectric absorption test with a 2500 volt motor driven megger prior to high
potential test. Test shall be applied to fully charged cable. Megger readings shall be taken every 15
seconds during first three minutes and at one minute intervals thereafter until three equal readings, one
minute apart, are obtained. Cable may then be considered fully charged. Minimum megger reading shall
be 200 megohms.
E. Each cable shall be tested between ground with other conductors and metallic shielding connected to
ground.
F. Direct current high potential tests shall be used for Field Acceptance Testing and to determine suitability of
cable for use. Most factory test voltages are AC voltage. The “Maximum AC Voltage Value” to be used to
determine the DC voltage for testing shall be 80 % of the factory test AC voltage. To determine DC
voltage for testing, multiply the “Maximum AC Voltage Value” by 1.8. If other items or equipment are
connected that may limit the test voltage, test voltage applied shall be lower and shall be compatible with
the complete system to be tested as directed by the manufacturer of the other items and equipment.
G. Test voltage should be applied gradually raising voltage in 8 to 10 equal increments to achieve final value
of test voltage. Voltage shall be held at each step until leakage current stabilizes. Full test voltage shall be
held for 15 minutes. Value of leakage current shall be read and plotted at end of each voltage step.

VOLTS
H. Values of leakage current versus voltage shall be plotted on 8-1/2 x 11 inch graph paper as test
progresses to check on condition of cable. Cable under test may be considered in good condition as long
as plotted test curve rise is relatively linear (equal increments of voltage rise giving equal increments of
current rise). At some point during test current will start rising at a more rapid rate and will show up on the
plot as a knee in the curve. Test shall not be carried beyond point where the start of this knee in the curve
is observed. If this point on the curve is obtained at a point considerably below maximum test voltage, test
shall be stopped. Further instructions will be issued by the Owner’s representative.
I. When final test voltage is achieved, system shall remain on and leakage current shall be plotted on the
graph versus time at one minute intervals until initial high charging value reaches a steady state value. Any
increase of current during this test is indicative of a bad cable or equipment and test should be stopped.
J. After current has stabilized and last reading is completed, equipment should be turned off. After charging
current has leaked off and voltage has reached zero, cable should be connected to ground and then
disconnected from test equipment. Cable shall remain connected to ground for minimum of one hour to
enable all charging current to drain off. (For longer runs of cable, cable may have to be connected to
ground for a longer period then one hour to enable the charging current to drain off.)
K. Three copies of test record shall be submitted to Owner. Test record shall include cable identification,
cable length, voltage versus leakage current graph, leakage current versus time graph, and approximate
temperature and humidity at test location.
L. Cable shall not be energized until test record is approved by Owner’s representative.
3.3 ARC AND FIREPROOFING OF CABLES
A. Furnish and install arc and fireproofing tapes on all cables rated above 600 volts throughout their entire
exposed length and at splices in all manholes, handholes, and vaults.
B. Wrap together as a single cable all conductors entering from each conduit.
C. Follow tape manufacturer’s installation instructions. Secure the arc and fireproofing tape at frequent
intervals with bands of the specified glass cloth electrical tape. Make each band of at least two wraps of
tape directly over each other.
D. Wrap together as far as possible, conductors carrying phases A, B, and C of the same feeder. Do not wrap
together conductors carrying only two of the three phases.
E. The cables shall be trained as closely as possible to their final positions.
F. The cables shall be cleaned of all oil, grease, and cable pulling compounds using suitable solvents and
cleaners non-injurious to cable and then wiped completely dry.
G. Any projecting surfaces such as fittings, ground connectors or bonding connections shall be covered with
an insulating compound to present a smooth continuous surface for taping.

VOLTS
SECTION 26 13 20 – 15 KV SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing 15 KV switchgear.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. 15 KV Fusible Load Break Switches
2. On-Site Testing Results
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 15 KV FUSIBLE LOADBREAK SWITCHES
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as existing exterior switchgear line up.
B. Single switch or multiple section line up, as specified herein or indicated on Drawings, shall be deadfront,
metal enclosed, free standing unit. General construction features shall include adequate venting in top,
bottom, front and back panels, enclosure finished in gray enamel over rust inhibiting primer. Complete unit
shall be assembled and factory tested before shipment. Provisions on both sides of single switch or on
distribution end of multiple section line up for bus extension. Construction and installation shall conform to
NEMA, ANSI and IEEE standards. Loadbreak switches shall have the following ratings:
1. Maximum Voltage: 15 KV nominal, 3 phase.

2. Impulse Withstand Voltage: 95 KV.
3. Continuous Ampere Rating: 600 amps.
4. Interrupting Rating: 600 amps.
5. Fault Closing Rating: 40,000 amp asymmetrical.
6. Momentary Rating: 40,000 amp asymmetrical.
7. Unless otherwise noted or specified, two position, on off, 3 pole, loadbreak.
C. Each switch section shall be a separate cubicle constructed of 11 gage steel and assembled to form a free
standing unit, with 11 gage steel full length barriers between sections of multiple section line-up. Ground
bus shall be firmly secured to each vertical section, with required number of ground lugs.
D. Single, integrated equipment shall have a short circuit of at least that of the existing switchgear line up.
E. Loadbreak switches shall be fusible, fuse size and type as indicated on Drawings. Fuses and fuse
mountings shall be accessible through an interior door mechanically interlocked with switch to ensure
switch is open when the fuses are accessible. Energized components shall not be within reach of the open
doorway. Provide an interlock to prevent closing switch unless door is closed. Four single, full length
interphase barriers shall isolate the three phases of the switch from each other and from the enclosure.
F. Fuses: Fuses shall be positively clamped in position with provisions for easy removal or installation from
the front. Fuses shall be applied so indication or a blown fuse will be visible without opening the enclosure.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS 15 KV SWITCHGEAR 26 13 20 - 1 of 3

Fuses connected to load side of the switch shall be de energized when switch is open. Include provision in
front door to hold three spare fuses. Three spare fuses shall be supplied for each switch.
G. Switch shall have stored energy spring mechanism which shall provide quick closing and opening of the
switch independent of the handle speed. Switch operating handle shall be permanently mounted and
operable from the front of the equipment. Provide means for padlocking switch in the open position.
H. Provide laminated safety glass window in the switch enclosure, located to enable visible inspection of the
switchpoles, installed fuses, and cable connections from the outside of the enclosure.
I. Terminals: Terminals shall be of the solderless type. All terminals shall be provided for loop feed.
J. Main bus shall be electro tin plated aluminum mounted on NEMA rated porcelain insulators for the voltage
class and BIL specified, shall be braced for the short circuit MVA specified, and rated 600 amps.
K. Additional Features:
1. All hardware used on conductors shall have a high tensile strength and anti corrosive plating.
2. Provide adequate conduit space.
3. All openings shall be screened to prevent entrance of vermin, reptiles, etc.
4. Main switch section shall have three station type lightning arrestors, rating as directed by the
manufacturer for a 13.2 KV, grounded system.
5. Exterior switches shall include the following:
a. Enclosures shall be gasketed, waterproof, and shall have drainable roof, sloped from front
to back.
b. Furnish and install barriers at all openings to prevent the entrance of snow, sand, etc.
c. Furnish and install a light in each section, controlled by a door switch. Light shall be
automatically turned-on when door is opened.
d. Furnish and install one electric space heater, 250W, 120 volt, in each exterior section,
thermostat controlled.
e. Furnish and install one receptacle, 20 amp, 125 volt, duplex, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding in
each exterior section.
f. 13.2 KV to 120 volt step-down transformer, with primary and secondary protection, sized for
the 120 volt load in the switchgear.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchgear in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Submit manufacturer's printed

B. Install exterior loadbreak switch on existing concrete pad at location provided. Furnish and install anchor
bolts suitable for existing concrete pad, according to equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Provide operation and maintenance data.
B. Provide instructions for fuse replacement, switch adjustment and switch lubrication.
C. Furnish tool for pulling fuses as required.
D. Furnish one set (three total) of spare fuses for each switch.

3.3 ON SITE TESTING
A. Interrupter switches shall be tested on site before energization, in accordance with NETA ATS 1987,
Testing Procedures for Air Switches Medium Voltage Metal Enclosed.
B. Test results shall be turned over to Architect as part of project close-out documentation.
C. Testing shall be performed by Met Electrical Testing Company, Inc., Baltimore, Maryland.

SECTION 26 24 20 – SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
switchboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Distribution Switchboards, one-line diagram, devices, components dimensions, voltages, frame
sizes, trip ratings, fault current withstand ratings, amperes interrupting current ratings and time-
current curves.
2. Ground fault protection system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D, or General Electric, Siemens Industry, Cutler Hammer.
B. Construction: Front accessible, completely self-supporting. Refer to Drawings for number and type of
sections.
1. Devices shall be panel mounted.

2. Provide full height isolation between sections, constructed of steel or plastic non-flammable
insulation.
3. Provide plastic insulated barrier enclosing crossover bars between sections.
4. Side, top, and rear panels shall be removable screw-on code gage steel plates.
5. Furnish nameplates as specified in Section 26 05 05, Basic Materials.
C. Protective devices shall be as listed on Drawings and as specified herein.
D. Buses
1. Tin or silver-plated aluminum buses or copper buses.

2. Temperature rise of buses shall not exceed 55 degrees C.
3. Bus work shall be arranged for future addition.
4. Bus supports shall be high impact, non-tracking, insulating material.
E. Switchboards used as service entrance equipment shall carry a label indicating suitability for service
entrance.
F. Switchboard and all components shall be capable of withstanding the short circuit current bracing indicated
on Drawings. All breakers shall be fully rated for short circuit interrupting, series connected rating will not
be approved. Refer to Section 26 24 10, Electrical Service, for requirements for “Electrical System
Overcurrent Protective Device Study”.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 20 - 1 of 4

G. Main Disconnect - Insulated Case, Non-Electric Operated, Circuit Breaker: Shall have the following
features:
1. Micrologic full function trip system with adjustable tripping characteristics as follows:
a. Long time ampere rating.
b. Long time delay.
c. Short time pick-up.
d. Short time delay (I2T In and I2T Out).
e. Ground fault pick-up.
f. Ground fault delay (I2T In and I2T Out).
g. Instantaneous pick-up, with defeatable feature.
2. Quick-make, quick-break overcenter independent switching mechanisms.
3. Mechanically trip free so contacts cannot be held closed against abnormal currents. Common
tripping of all poles.
4. On, off and tripped position indications.
5. Front accessible, manually operated push-to-trip and push-to-close.
6. Continuous current (monitor) rating indicated on static sensor nameplate.
7. Trip indicator, LCD readout, no external power required. Display until reset.
8. Manual operating handle for emergency operation.
9. Power logic compatible communications with communication adapter and product interface.
10. Fixed mounted.
11. Means to seal the rating plug and trip unit adjustments.
12. Two-step, stored energy closing, mechanism, closing springs charged manually.
13. Ratings as indicated on Drawings.
H. Distribution overcurrent protective devices, as specified in Section 26 24 50, Overcurrent Protective

Devices, ratings as indicated on Drawings.
I. Power Logic System, Level 1
1. Utilized to monitor main bus and main breaker.

2. Main Breaker Monitoring
a. Real-time current, including ground fault.
b. Historical Breaker Data
1) Data and time of last trip.
2) Cause of trip.
3) Phase currents at trip.
4) Ground fault current at trip.
5) Number of overload, short circuit and ground fault trips.
c. Circuit Breaker Data
1) Breaker type.
2) Sensor ratings.
3) Plug rating.
4) Long time settings - pick-up and delay.
5) Short time setting - pick-up and delay.
6) Instantaneous settings.
7) Ground fault settings - pick-up and delay.
3. Main Bus Monitoring
a. Provide a multi-function instrumentation, data acquisition and control device system as
follows:
1) UL listed (UL508).
2) Full 3-element instrumentation.
3) True RMS sensing.
4) Accepts standard CT and PT inputs (5A and 120V AC).
5) 120V AC source.
6) Industry standard RS-485/RS-422 communication.
7) Microprocessor-based control.

8) Historical data.
9) Non-volatile memory.
10) SY/MAX compatibility.
11) Energy management alarms.
12) On-board clock/calendar.
13) User configurable.
14) Standard component encompassing many voltage classes.
b. System shall be self-contained to retain all information (including clock and calendar) for a
minimum of 24 hours.
c. With programming processor, will allow the following:
1) Local initialization of user-defined parameters.
2) Establishment of communications.
3) Control commands.
4) Capacitor control.
5) Shall be IBM compatible.
6) Shall monitor main bus for the following:
RMS Current Values:

Phase A current
Phase B current
Phase C current
3-phase average current
Apparent current
RMS Voltage Values:
Phase A-B voltage
Phase B-C voltage
Phase C-A voltage
Phase A-N voltage
Phase B-N voltage
Phase C-N voltage
Current Values:
Average demand current phase A
Average demand current phase B
Average demand current phase C
Peak demand current phase A
Peak demand current phase B
Peak demand current phase C
Real Power Values:
Average demand real power
Predicted demand real power
Peak demand real power
Energy Accumulated
Reactive Energy Accumulated.
Power Factor Values:
Phase A power factor
Phase B power factor
Phase C power factor
3-phase total power factor
3-Phase Total Power Values:
Real power, 3-phase total
Reactive power, 3-phase total
Apparent power, 3-phase total
Capability of any of all of the above information for breakers monitored can be
communicated to Owner’s remote terminal or monitored on remote digital
readouts.
d. Each current transformer shall be terminated on its own compartment shorting block.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Switchboard
1. Install switchboard in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. Submit

manufacturer’s printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance data at completion
of Work.
2. Bolt switchboard to concrete pad.
3. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners.
4. Adjust and set breaker trip and time delay settings in accordance with the results of the power
systems studies specified in Section 26 05 73 – Power System Studies.
5. Maintain adequate clearances around switchboard.
6. Ensure there are no pipes or ductwork installed over switchboard, in accordance with NEC.
7. Furnish and install permanent label on all service entrance equipment indicating available short
circuit current, date, and utility company name. Labels shall meet NEC 110 requirements for
markings.
3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Provide services of manufacturer’s representative for start-up and placing in operation.
B. Provide recommended maintenance procedures and recommended intervals between maintenance

procedures.

SECTION 26 24 30 – PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing panelboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Panelboards
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
B. General: Panelboards shall be furnished complete with interior, box, trim and door, and constructed of
code gage steel.
1. Dead front construction

2. Keyed alike.
3. Furnished with manufacturer’s nameplate and panelboard rating.
4. Insert typewritten index card, verified for correctness, in frame provided on panel door.
C. Circuit breaker or fusible switch type shall be as indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Rating shall
be as indicated on Drawings.
D. Devices shall be replaceable without removing adjacent devices and main bus connectors, as follows:
1. Bolt-on breakers.
2. Rated SWD for switching.
3. Rated HACR where required for HVAC or refrigeration equipment.
4. Rated for personnel ground fault circuit interrupter protection where indicated on drawings.
5. Rated for ARC-fault protection where indicated on drawings.
E. Provide full height phase bus, provide full size neutral bus and ground bus, where applicable.
1. Bus arranged for sequence phasing.

2. Tin or silver plated aluminum busses
3. Provisions shall be bussed for maximum device that can be fitted into space.
F. Panelboards used for service shall carry a label indicating suitability for service entrance.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PANELBOARDS 26 24 30 - 1 of 3

G. Double panels shall consist of two separate panels in separate, matching back boxes and trim. One panel
shall have double lugs to feed the second panel. Feeder wires between panels shall be same size as
feeder to panel. Breakers shall be divided equally between panels.
H. Short circuit current rating of circuit breaker panelboards shall be equal to or greater than that of lowest
interrupting rated device in panel.
I. All breakers shall be mounted in the normal vertical breaker mounting space to the left or right of the main
vertical bus. “Sub-feed” breakers and “individual” mounted breakers will not be approved.
J. 200% neutral bus, where indicated on the drawings.
K. Integral surge protection devices, where indicated on the drawings.
L. Isolated ground bus, where indicated on the drawings.
M. All breakers shall be fully rated for short circuit interrupting, series connected ratings will not be approved.
N. Short circuit current rating of fusible switch panelboards shall be as indicated on Drawings, symmetrical.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Submit manufacturer’s printed

B. Install surface or recessed as indicated on Drawings. Install plumb.
C. Panelboards shall be mounted 6 feet from finished floor to top protective device in panel.
D. In areas with accessible ceilings, one 3/4 inch raceway, type as specified for branch wiring, shall be
extended from all recessed panelboards and stubbed out above accessible tile ceilings for every three
spare breakers and for every three provisions indicated in panel schedule.
E. Provide for adequate clearances around panelboards.
F. Ensure clear space over panels and no pipes or ducts are installed over panelboards, both in accordance
with NEC.
G. Rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance loads.
H. Inspect for tightness of all connections.
I. Panelboard indexes shall be provided to reflect installed condition. Indexes shall be typewritten and shall
indicate room numbers and type of load served by each circuit. Coordinate final room numbers names,
numbers and load descriptions with Owner.
J. Furnish and install permanent printed adhesive label on all panelboards indicating source of power. Label
shall be installed plumb and centered above index on inside of panelboard cover.
K. Refer to Section 26 05 05, Basic Materials, for installation of “Danger Labels”.
3.2 EXISTING PANELBOARD MODIFICATIONS
A. Where electrical modifications are performed on existing panelboards, panelboard indexes shall be revised
to reflect modified condition. Revised indexes shall be typewritten and shall indicate room names, numbers

and description of load served by each circuit. Coordinate final room numbers names, numbers and load
descriptions with Owner.

SECTION 26 24 40 – DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
disconnect switches. The specific application of these materials shall be as outlined in this Section and
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Disconnect Switches
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
B. Type: Heavy duty, fusible or non-fusible as indicated on Drawings.
C. Ratings and Accessories: Refer to Drawings.
D. Standard Features:
1. NEMA 1 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Handle padlockable in the off position, up to three padlocks.
3. Quick-make, quick-break switching mechanism.
4. Fuse clips shall have rejection type feature for the fuses specified.
E. Furnish cover interlocks to prevent unauthorized opening of switch door when switch is in the on position,
and to prevent closing switch mechanism when door is open.
F. Disconnect used for service entrance shall carry a label indicating suitability for service entrance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Disconnect switches shall be installed 5 feet above finished floor.
C. Fuse type and size as required shall be installed in fusible safety switches.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 24 40 - 1 of 1

SECTION 26 24 50 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing overcurrent protective devices. The specific application of these materials shall be as outlined in
this Section and subsequent Sections of this Specification, or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Fuses, all types

2. Circuit Breakers, All Types
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSES
A. Coordination and current limiting for protection of portions of the electrical system has been designed on
the base manufacturer of fuses specified herein for each type or class of fuses. The option to provide
fuses manufactured by any substitute manufacture requires the submission of a written report verifying the
substitute manufacturer’s fuses will provide proper coordination and current limiting for those portions of
the distribution system where the substitute fuses are proposed. Manufacturer’s fuse curves for the
proposed substitute fuses shall be included with the report. This report shall be submitted in same quantity
and concurrent with shop drawing submission for fuses.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, 10 percent (or a minimum of 3) spare fuses of each size and type shall be
provided to Owner at completion of Work.
C. Fuse Specification No. 2
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bussman, or Littelfuse, Gould.

2. Type: Buss fusetron, dual element.
3. Class RK5, with rejection feature, 600 amps and below.
4. Ratings: Refer to Drawings.
5. Fuse shall have either “blown fuse indicator” or “blown fuse indicating” fuse cover.
2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS - GENERAL
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as panelboard or switchboard manufacturer.
B. Constructed of glass reinforced, or equal, insulation material with current-carrying components isolated
from the handle and accessory mounting area.
C. Molded case circuit breakers shall be over-center, trip free, toggle operating, quick-make, quick-break,
manually operated, and, unless noted, with individual thermal and magnetic trip units in each pole.
D. Individual trip mechanisms on each pole shall open all poles (common trip).
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE 26 24 50 - 1 of 5

DEVICES
E. Mechanically trip free so contacts cannot be held closed on an overload or short circuit.
F. When tripped, circuit breaker handle shall reside in a position between “on” and “off”.
G. Clearly marked “on” and “off” positions.
H. Breakers shall be bolted to the bus, unless otherwise noted.
I. Ratings shall be as indicated on Drawings. Ampere rating and U.L. and IEC certification standards with
applicable voltage and ampere interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of breaker.
J. All breakers shall be fully rated for short circuit interrupting, series connected ratings will not be approved.
K. Thermal trip units shall be factory preset and sealed.
L. Breakers shall be true RMS current sensing.
M. Breaker frames above 100 amps shall have a single magnetic trip adjustment accessible without removal
of the breaker, cables, etc.
N. Amperes Interrupting Current (AIC) Ratings: 120V, 208V, and 240V breaker - minimum AIC 10,000 amps.
O. Amperes Interrupting Current (AIC) Ratings: 277V and 480V breaker - minimum AIC 14,000 amps.
2.3 GROUND FAULT BREAKERS – PERSONNEL PROTECTION
B. Unless noted, all 15 amp and 20 amp, single pole breakers indicated as ground fault type shall be for
personnel protection.
C. Shall provide Class A protection – Trip when a fault current to ground is 6 milliamps or higher.
D. Equipped with a push-to-trip button located on the face of the breaker to simulate a ground fault and
mechanically operate the circuit breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.
E. Visual ground fault trip indication shall be provided.
2.4 ARC FAULT BREAKERS
B. Detects and clears high energy arc faults between current carrying conductors and arcs to ground.
C. Interrupt arcing faults above 50 amps.
D. Interrupt ground faults of 30 milliamps or higher.
2.5 SWITCHING DUTY BREAKERS
B. U.L. listed as SWD (switching duty) rated.
C. Suitable for switching fluorescent and HID lighting fixtures.
D. Unless noted, all 15 amp and 20 amp, single pole breakers shall be SWD rated.

DEVICES
E. All two pole and three pole breakers feeding fluorescent or HID lighting fixtures shall be SWD rated.
2.6 HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION BREAKERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Same as panelboard or switchboard manufacturer.
B. U.L. listed as HACR (heating, air conditioning, refrigeration equipment) type breakers.
C. All breakers feeding heating, air conditioning and refrigeration type equipment shall be HACR type
breakers, verify with equipment installer.
2.7 ELECTRONIC TRIP MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH FULL FUNCTION TRIP SYSTEM
B. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based (micrologic) true rms sensing design with
sensing accuracy through the thirteenth harmonic.
C. The integral trip system shall be independent of any external power source and shall contain no less than
industrial grade electronic components.
D. The ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall be determined by the combination of an interchangeable
rating plug, the sensor size and the long-time pickup adjustment on the circuit breaker. The sensor size,
rating plug and switch adjustments shall be clearly marked on the face of the circuit breaker. Circuit
breakers shall be UL listed to carry 100% of their ampere rating continuously.
E. The following time/current response adjustments shall be provided. Each adjustment shall have discrete
settings and shall be independent of all other adjustments.
1. Instantaneous Pickup
2. Long Time Pickup
3. Long Time Delay (Ground Fault Alarm Only Pickup)
4. Short Time Pickup
5. Short Time Delay (I2T IN and I2T OUT)
6. Ground Fault Pickup
7. Ground Fault Delay (I2T IN and I2T OUT)
F. Circuit breakers with adjustable short-time function shall be provided with defeatable instantaneous
adjustment and 30 cycle short-time withstand ratings. Short-time withstand ratings shall be specified in rms
symmetrical amperes, as shown on the drawings.
G. A means to seal the rating plug and trip unit adjustments in accordance with NEC shall be provided.
H. Local visual trip indication of overload, short circuit and ground fault trip occurrences shall be provided.
I. An ammeter to individually display all phase currents flowing through the circuit breaker shall be provided.
Indication of inherent ground fault current flowing in the system shall be provided on circuit breakers with
integral ground fault protection. All current values shall be displayed in True rms with 2% accuracy.
J. Long Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or exceeds the adjusted ampere rating of
the circuit breaker shall be provided.
K. The trip system shall include a Long Time memory circuit to protect against intermittent overcurrent
conditions above the long time pickup point. Means shall be provided to reset Long Time memory circuit
during primary injection testing.
L. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with back-up thermal and magnetic trip system.

DEVICES
M. Circuit breaker trip system shall be equipped with an externally accessible test port for use with a
Universal Test Set. Disassembly of the circuit breaker shall not be required for testing. Test set shall be
capable of verifying the operation of all trip functions with or without tripping the circuit breaker. Universal
test set shall be provided and turned over to owner.
N. Communications capabilities for future remote monitoring of circuit breaker trip system, to include phase
and ground fault currents, pre-trip alarm indication, switch settings, and trip history information shall be
provided.
O. Circuit breakers shall be provided on Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) communications capabilities on the
short-time and ground fault functions compatible with all electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground
fault sensing systems.
P. Circuit breakers shall be provided with integral equipment ground fault protection for grounded systems.
The circuit breaker shall be suitable for use on three-phase, four-wire systems.
Q. A separate neutral current transformer shall be provided as directed by the manufacturer.
R. The trip system shall include a ground fault memory circuit to sum the time increments of intermittent
ground faults above the pickup point.
S. A means of testing the ground fault system to meet the on-site testing requirements of NEC shall be
provided.
T. Local visual trip indication for a ground fault trip occurrence shall be provided.
U. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be provided with communications capabilities for remote ground
fault alarm indication only (no trip) per NEC Article 700 for emergency systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fuses
1. Fuses shall not be installed until installation of equipment is complete and tests and inspections
have been completed prior to energizing equipment, including thorough cleaning, tightening of
electrical connections, inspection of ground and grounding conductors, and conductor insulation
tests.
2. Equipment shall not be shipped with fuses in place.
3. Fuses identification label, indication type and size, shall be placed inside door of each switch.
4. Fuse reducers shall be used where fuse gaps are larger than fuse dimensions.
B. Circuit Breakers
1. Install circuit breakers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Test all ground fault breakers to ensure proper operation.
3. On ground fault breakers for personnel, do not connect more than 250 feet of load conductor for
the total one-way run (to prevent nuisance tripping).
4. On all adjustable trip circuit breakers, adjust all settings to values as indicated in the “Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study”.

DEVICES
C. Enclosed Circuit Breakers
1. Enclosed circuit breakers shall be installed 5 feet above finished floor.

DEVICES
SECTION 26 24 60 – SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing the surge protection devices.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Surge Protection Devices, including performance parameters and warranty certificate
A. Manufacturer of surge protection devices shall have at least five years’ experience in manufacturing surge
protection devices.
1.4 EXTENDED WARRANTY
A. The surge protection device shall be warranted for a period of five years incorporating unlimited
replacement of all parts, to include both parts and labor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES – EXTERNAL
A. Surge Protection Devices – Panelboard
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as panelboard manufacturer, or approved equal.

2. Description:
a. Externally mounted. Recessed or surface mounted as indicated.
b. Listed and component recognized in accordance with UL 1449, 2nd Edition, February 2007
Revision, and UL 1283.
c. Self contained module design, each suppression element shall be metal oxide varistor
(MOV) based. Module shall consist of either a separate module for each diversion path or all
diversion paths contained in one module.
d. The smallest size MOV used shall be 40 mm diameter. Where parallel MOV’s are used to
achieve the required KA rating as specified herein, the MOV’s shall be computer selected to
provide the closest “turn-on” voltage as possible. Each diversion path shall contain at least
one set of paralleled MOV’s.
e. Each individual MOV of the surge current diversion module shall be separately fused with a
200,000 AIC fuse, fuse designed for protection of surge current modules, Little Fuse, or as
approved. Fuse shall withstand surge currents but open on fault currents.
f. Each MOV shall have a thermal cut-out device in direct contact with the metal oxide disk for
optimum heat transfer.
g. LED to indicate power and status of each MOV. LED shall give an indication of both fuse
opening and thermal element opening. For multiple parallel MOV’s modules, there shall be
an LED to indicate “fully operational”, a separate LED to indicate “reduced capability”, and a
separate LED to indicate “loss of suppression” for each phase module. There shall be a
LED push-to-test button for each module.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 24 60 - 1 of 5

h. Shall provide surge current diversion paths between each of the following:
1) Each phase conductor and the neutral conductor.
2) Each phase conductor and ground.
3) The neutral conductor and ground.
i. Audible alarm, with both a silencing switch and test switch, to indicate when protection has
failed. Audible alarm shall sound on both “reduced capability” and “loss of suppression”.
j. One set of dry contacts rated 5.0 amps, 250 volts, AC, for remote monitoring of protection
status.
k. Sine wave tracking.
l. Noise Attenuation: 50 db at 100 kHz.
m. Unit shall have a transient event surge counter equipped with a manual reset and battery to
retain memory upon loss of AC power.
n. Tested and U.L. Listed for use on circuits capable of delivering up to and including 200,000
symmetrical amps. This rating shall be indicated on the face of the unit.
o. Unit shall be individually fully rated, series ratings will not be approved.
p. Surge protection devices shall be housed in a NEMA 12, metal enclosure, 14 gauge, seam
welded, cold rolled steel, phosphor dipped and powder coated.
q. The components of each diversion path shall be encapsulated in a material with a minimum
dielectric of 390 volts/mil.
3. The surge protection device shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
a. Maximum surge current capability – 80 KA, each surge current diversion path.
b. Endurance – Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1,
category C transients without failure.
c. UL 1449, 2nd Edition, listed and recognized suppression voltage ratings and maximum
continuous operating voltages (MCOV) shall not exceed the following:
Voltage L-N L-G N-G MCOV

120/208, wye 330V 330V 330V 150V
277/480, wye 700V 700V 700V 320V
These voltages shall be indicated on the face of the surge
protection device unit.
d. The ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 category C high let through voltages shall not exceed the
following:
Voltage L-N L-G N-G

120/208V, wye 520V 520V 520V
277/480V, wye 880V 880V 880V
B. Surge Protection Devices – Distribution panelboard, motor control center, and busway.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as distribution panelboard, motor control center or busway

manufacturer, or as approved.
2. Description:
a. Externally mounted. Recessed or surface mounted as indicated.

h. Shall provide surge current diversion paths between each of the following:
i. Audible alarm, with both a silencing switch and test switch, to indicate when protection has
j. One set of dry contacts rated 5.0 amps, 250 volts, AC, for remote monitoring of protection
status.
k. Sine wave tracking.
l. Noise Attenuation: 50 db at 100 kHz.
m. Unit shall have a transient event surge counter equipped with a manual reset and battery to
n. Tested and U.L. Listed for use on circuits capable of delivering up to and including 200,000
o. Unit shall be individually fully rated, series ratings will not be approved.
p. Surge protection devices shall be housed in a NEMA 12, metal enclosure, 14 gauge, seam
q. The components of each diversion path shall be encapsulated in a material with a minimum

120/208, wye 330V 330V 330V 150V
277/480, wye 700V 700V 700V 320V
following:
Voltage L-N L-G N-G

120/208V, wye 520V 520V 520V
277/480V, wye 880V 880V 880V
C. Surge Protection Devices – Switchboard
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as switchboard manufacturer, or as approved.

2. Description:
a. Externally mounted. Recessed or surface mounted, as indicated.

h. Fuse shall withstand surge currents but open on fault currents.
i. Shall provide surge current diversion paths between each of the following:
j. Audible alarm, with both a silencing switch and test switch, to indicate when protection has
k. One set of dry contacts rated 5.0 amps, 250 volts, AC, for remote monitoring of protection
status.
l. Sine wave tracking.
m. Noise Attenuation: 50 db at 100 kHz.
n. Unit shall have a transient event surge counter equipped with a manual reset and battery to
o. Tested and U.L. Listed for use on circuits capable of delivering up to and including 200,000
p. Unit shall be individually fully rated, series ratings will not be approved.
q. Surge protection devices shall be housed in a NEMA 12, metal enclosure, 14 gauge, seam
r. The components of each diversion path shall be encapsulated in a material with a minimum

120/208, wye 330V 330V 330V 150V
277/480, wye 700V 700V 700V 320V
following:
Voltage L-N L-G N-G

120/208V, wye 520V 520V 520V
277/480V, wye 880V 880V 880V
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. External Surge Protection Devices
1. Devices shall be connected to a dedicated breaker within the panelboard, distribution panelboard,
switchboard, motor control center, etc., to which the surge protection device is to be connected.
2. The dedicated breaker shall be located as the first breaker after either the main disconnect device
or the lug connections in the panelboard, distribution panelboard, switchboard, motor control

center, etc., to which the surge protection device is to be connected to. For busways, the surge
protection device shall be mounted in the first plug-in opening after the cable feed box.
3. Conductor length between the panelboard, switchboard, motor control center, etc., and the surge
protection devices shall be as short as possible. Wherever possible, the surge protection device
shall be short nippled to the electrical equipment being connected at a point as near as possible to
the dedicated breaker within the item of electrical equipment.
4. The conductors shall have no sharp bends.

SECTION 26 24 70 – DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing dry type transformers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Dry Type Transformers; performance characteristics, losses, and insulation system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER, 37-1/2 TO 500 KVA - UNDER 600 VOLTS -150 DEGREES C RISE
B. Transformer shall be ventilated, ratings shall be as indicated on Drawings.
C. Transformer losses shall be in compliance with current Department of Energy requirements found in 10
CFR 431. Transformer production, testing, and labeling shall be in compliance with all applicable NEMA
and federal standards and regulations. Provide NEMA standard taps, two 2-1/2 percent full capacity both
above and below normal.
D. Provide NEMA standard taps, two 2-1/2 percent full capacity both above and below normal.
E. Transformers shall be 150 degrees C. rise above a 40 degrees C. ambient.
F. Insulation: UL 220 degrees C. system in accordance with NEMA standards.
G. Construction: In accordance with latest revised standards of IEEE, ANSI and NEMA. UL listed.
H. Aluminum windings.
I. 600V transformer and below shall have a BIL of 10 KV.
J. Sound level shall not exceed:

37-1/2 TO 50 KVA 45 db
50 to 150 KVA 50 db
151 t0 300 KVA 55 db
301 to 500 KVA 60 db
K. Terminals shall be located so as to insure terminations in ambient temperature levels - side or bottom
conduit entrance. Provide terminals of sufficient size and number to accommodate NEC rated cable and
conduit sizes.
L. Lifting holes shall be usable without removing any enclosure components.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26 24 70 - 1 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install transformers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Submit manufacturer’s printed

B. Allow for adequate ventilation space around transformer in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Tighten connections prior to energizing.
D. Measure voltage and make appropriate tap adjustments.
E. Connect for sound isolation using flexible conduit.
F. Install on isolation pads.
3.2 ON-SITE TESTING
A. Dry type transformers over 600 volts shall be tested on site before energization in accordance with NETA
testing procedures for dry type transformers over 600 volts. Test results shall be turned over to Owner.
B. Testing shall be performed by Met Electrical Testing Company, Inc., Baltimore, Maryland.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26 24 70 - 2 of 2

SECTION 26 41 10 – LIGHTNING PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for the furnishing and
installing of a lightning protection system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Shop drawings showing layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes, cable routing, and bonding
connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, and conductor sizes,
and connection and termination details.
2. Product data showing dimensions and materials of each component. Verify listing in accordance
with ANSI/UL 96.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. LPI Lightning Protection Institute.
B. UL 96A Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems.
C. NFPA 78 Lightning Protection Code.
D. UL 96 Lightning Protection Components.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work of this Section with [existing] roofing, exterior and interior finishes.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Lightning Protection System: ANSI/NFPA 78; Class I or Class II UL 96A; Master Labeled system
protecting building, consisting of air terminals on roofs, roof mounted mechanical equipment, chimneys
and stacks, and penthouse roofs; bonding of structure and other metal objects; grounding electrodes; and
interconnecting conductors.
B. Building has varying roof elevations. Refer to Architectural Drawings.
C. Rooftop mechanical equipment is six to eight feet above roof. Refer to Mechanical Drawings.
D. Visit site to verify existing conditions, existing roof elevations and existing rooftop mechanical equipment
and stacks. Review Drawings for locations of mechanical equipment to be installed under this contract.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with minimum three years
documented experience and member of the Lightning Protection Institute.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 10 - 1 of 3

B. Installer: Authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum three years documented experience and
member of the Lightning Protection Institute.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Components: In accordance with ANSI/UL 96.
B. Air Terminals: Solid copper or aluminum.
C. Grounding Rods: Stainless steel.
D. Ground Plate: Copper.
E. Conductors: Copper cable or aluminum.
F. Connectors and Splicers: Bronze or aluminum.
G. Screws and Fasteners: Stainless steel.
H. Conduit: Raceway Specification No. 4, size as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Air Terminals: Shall be spaced at intervals not to exceed code requirements and extend above the
protected area and all items to be protected.
B. Conductors: Shall be secured on 3' 0" centers and shall maintain a horizontal or downward course.
C. Conductor Bend Angles: Shall be maximum 90 degrees with a minimum radius of 8 inches.
D. Down Conductors: Shall run in a 1-1/4 inch PVC conduit with code required cable support at a maximum
of a 100 feet distance on a reinforced concrete building. PVC conduit shall be schedule 40 painted over its
entire length to match adjacent wall surfaces. Follow master label criteria for other types of construction.
E. Ground Electrode: Connecting to a rod or wing plate shall be made at minimum 2' 6" below grade and
minimum 4' 0" away from footing of foundation wall.
F. Bond: All metal bodies within 6' 0" from the lightning conducting system or a metal body 6' 0" away,
already bonded to the system.
G. Metal Bodies: Extending above the highest air terminal shall be bonded to the system.
H. Tagging: All ground terminals shall be tagged indicating exact vertical depth and tag shall be attached to or
adjacent to each down conductor at 3 feet to 6 feet above grade.
3.2 PROTECTION OF SURROUNDING ELEMENTS
A. Protect elements surrounding Work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.
C. Verify existing building conditions at site. Submission of shop drawings shall be interpreted to mean
installer has visited site, has become familiar with exiting conditions and accepts existing conditions.
3.4 CERTIFICATION
A. The system shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in production of lightning protection
systems and installed by a contractor regularly engaged in the installation of lightning protection systems.
B. Obtain the service of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to provide inspection and certification of the lightning
protection system under provisions of UL 96A.
C. Upon completion of the installation deliver to Owner a MASTER LABEL issued by the Underwriters'
Laboratories. In the event the master label is not awarded by the Underwriters' Laboratories due to
adjacency to a non-protected facility, furnish a certificate of compliance indicating the work was installed in
compliance with all rules and regulations of the UL regarding a master label installation.

SECTION 26 50 10 – LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing lighting fixtures, complete with lamps, for each lighting outlet indicated on the Drawings and other
items associated with lighting as specified herein. The type and wattage of each light fixture is noted on
the Drawings; the letter indicates the type of light fixture and the numeral indicates the wattage. If type and
wattage are omitted from any outlet, a light fixture of the type and size specified for a similar location shall
be provided.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Fixtures, including ballast and lamp data
2. LED Luminaires
3. Poles
4. Gym Lighting Control System and Accessories
5. Exit Signs
1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If, in order to conform to the performance criteria shown on Drawings, a substitute manufacturer’s quantity
of lighting fixtures is greater than the quantity indicated, Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install
quantities of all lighting fixtures, junction boxes, wiring, conduit, and other accessories which comprise the
entire lighting system as required to conform to the indicated performance criteria. Electrical Contractor
shall provide all quantities required at no additional cost to Owner.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install concrete bases for pole mounted lighting fixtures, or other
exterior lighting fixtures, as Work of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LED LUMINAIRES
A. LED array color and lumen output shall be as indicated on Drawings. Chips shall be binned to no more
than 2-step MacAdam Ellipse.
B. Minimum manufacturer stated LED lifetime shall be 50,000 hours or as indicated on fixture schedule.
Lifetime shall be considered predicted time where average lumen output reaches 70 percent of initial
output as measured in accordance with IESNA LM-80 testing requirements.
C. Driver shall be rated for 120 volt to 277 volt input.
D. Power Factor: Greater than 90 percent.
E. Minimum Efficiency: 85 percent.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS LIGHTING 26 50 10 - 1 of 4

F. Color Rendering Index: 80 minimum, higher where noted on drawings.
G. Dimming: Where indicated on Drawings, 0-10VDC standard.
H. Luminaire shall comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards.
I. Drivers shall be reduction of hazardous substances (ROHS)-compliant.
J. Minimum 5 year warranty on all LED arrays and drivers.
K. UL listed.
2.2 POLES, METAL
A. All poles shall have a hand hole near base of pole.
B. All anchor bolt nuts shall be covered, either by metal pole base cover furnished with pole or by nut covers
furnished by pole manufacturer.
C. All furnished poles shall be sized sufficiently for effective projected area of associated fixtures. Refer to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.3 GYM LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: LEX Products PCS-I-A-MC-08, or approved equal.
B. Power rack shall be by fully populated with PCS-A-MD-RRR relay modules.
C. The rack shall also include the PCS-I-STND-FLR weight transfer stand.
D. A PCS-I-A-DBD Decibel Dampener IF rack shall be located adjacent to power rack.
E. Power distribution rack shall accommodate power for all gym lighting circuits, including track fixtures.
F. The following lighting accessories shall be installed in the gym sound system rack:
1. 1 x Pathway Octo 6401 DMX Opto Splitter w/ rack mount kit
2. 1 x Inspire External Control Box UL924 – House Light Control Box (supply emergency power and
fire alarm wiring)
G. Wall entry stations:

1. Wall entry stations shall be Doug Fleener PRE10-A-POPO, or approved equal.
2. Preset wall station shall be where at south-west corner of gym.
3. Wall stations shown at other gym entry points shall provide on/off control of all gym fixtures.
4. Wiring to control stations shall be DMX type originating at lighting distribution rack. Wiring shall be
daisy-chained between control stations.
H. Furnish and install operating software
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. Illuminated Exit Sign, LED Edge-Lit

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Emergi-Lite (LED) Prestige Series.
2. Red or Green light emitting diodes to match existing building, less than 5 watt draw per face.

3. Computer engraved lettering in clear, virgin acrylic panel.

4. Optical diffuser to protect LED’s and provide uniform LED light output.
5. 120/277 dual voltage.
6. Directional arrows as indicated on Drawings.
7. Stencil face, red letters, minimum 5 inches high, 2 inches wide (except for “I”) and minimum 3/4
inch stroke.
8. Distance between letters shall be 3/8 inch minimum.
9. Single face (clear background) or double face (mirrored background) as required.
10. Warranty: 5 year full warranty beginning on date of acceptance by Owner.
11. Units installed in gym or multi-purpose rooms shall be supplied with wire guards and shall be
mounted above doors. All other units shall be ceiling mounted.
2.5 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. The term "acrylic", as applied to fluorescent lighting fixture enclosures, shall require the side and bottom
panels, or the complete wrap around enclosure, to be formed from virgin acrylic compounds. Mixtures of
acrylic or any other plastic material will not be permitted.
B. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule on Drawings.
2.6 RACEWAYS
A. Underground raceways for exterior lighting fixtures shall be Raceway Specification No. 4, minimum 1inch
conduit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting Fixtures
1. Contractor shall consult room finish schedule for type of ceiling construction and shall be
responsible for installing proper fixture with required hardware for specified ceiling. All recessed
fixtures in plaster ceilings shall include a plaster frame and a matt white trim finish unless noted.
2. Furnish necessary supports, hangers and hardware to properly secure fixtures to building
structures. Fixtures shall be securely hung in place, properly wired and connected to branch
circuits, lamped, tested, cleaned, and left ready for operation.
3. Support all ceiling recessed lighting fixtures in lay in ceilings with one end of each tie wire attached
directly to each corner of the fixture and the other end of each tie wire attached directly to the
building structure above in accordance with code requirements.
4. Fixtures shall be provided only with type of lamps recommended by fixture manufacturer.
5. Lamps and ballasts shall be compatible.
6. Diffusers, lenses, globes, etc., shall be as scheduled and shall be suitable for the light fixture
according to fixture manufacturers recommendation. All items shall be inspected for breakage,
cracks, and chips before installation. All diffusers shall be wiped clean and dust free with a soft
cloth.
7. Use of a manufacturer's catalog number shall not relieve Contractor from furnishing a complete
unit, whether a required accessory is or is not part of the catalog number specified.
8. Rating of wire to all fixtures shall be compatible with fire rating of fixture.

9. Lighting fixtures shall be grounded by grounding wire. Suspended fixtures shall be served with a
three conductor cord or circuit using a green bond wire for connection to the outlet box or raceway.
B. Poles
1. Set poles plumb and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

SECTION 26 50 50 – LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing all lighting controls as specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval in accordance with specified submittal procedures. All Lighting Control System
components, including wiring and interconnecting diagrams of all items and equipment.
1. Occupancy Sensors
2. Daylight Photosensors
3. Photo Controls
4. Timer Switches
5. Emergency Lighting Relays
6. Digital Lighting Control System
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. All occupancy sensors shall be of the same manufacturer, unless specified otherwise herein.
B. Manufacturer shall have minimum 10 years’ experience in manufacture of lighting controls.
C. All units - 100 percent tested prior to shipment.
D. All applicable products shall be UL/cUL listed.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Digital Lighting Control System Programming

1. Configuration of load and sensor behavior shall be specified by the building owner and
communicated to the system manufacturer’s field service technician prior to start up to enable the
field service technician to program the digital lighting control system.
1.5 FUNCTION
A. Lighting for rooms in the project area, as indicated on the Drawings, shall be wired through Digital Lighting
Management system room controllers. Digital Lighting Management system shall return occupancy
status and usage trending data to building management system in order to be mapped to BMS graphical
user interface.
B. Owner shall be able to monitor occupancy status of all rooms, change status of lighting, and re-program
low voltage control stations remotely through Digital Lighting Management system software.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 50 50 - 1 of 12

1.6 WARRANTY
A. All devices and components specified herein shall be furnished with five-year manufacturer warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Occupancy Sensor Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watt Stopper PW-100 Series, Hubbell, Leviton, or as approved.
2. The passive infrared sensor shall be a completely self-contained control system that replaces a
standard toggle switch. Switching mechanism shall be a latching air gap relay, compatible with
electronic ballasts, compact fluorescent, and inductive loads. Triac and other harmonic generating
devices shall not be allowed. Sensor shall have ground wire and grounded strap for safety.
3. Sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting changes in infrared
energy. Small movements shall be detected, such as when a person is writing while seated at a
desk.
4. Furnish multi-way sensor where multiple devices are located in same space. Up to 4 sensors shall
be connected to simultaneously control loads from multiple locations.
5. Sensor shall have built-in LED nightlight with adjustable high/low blue nightlight.
6. Sensor shall utilize advanced control logic based on RISC (Reduced Instruction-Set Circuit)
microcontroller.
7. Detection Signature Processing (DSP) shall be used to avoid false offs and false activations and to
provide immunity to RFI and EMI.
8. Continuously adjusting Zero Cross relay control shall be used to guarantee reliable operation with
non-linear loads (electronic, PL lamp ballasts) even with temperature changes and product aging.
9. Sensor shall utilize SmartSet™ technology to optimize the sensor behavior to fit occupant usage
patterns and adjust sensitivity and time delay to changing conditions. The use of SmartSet shall be
selectable by user with a DIP switch.
10. Sensor shall have a time off delay that is adjusted automatically (with the SmartSet setting) or shall
have a fixed time off delay of 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes, walk-through mode, or test mode, set by
DIP switch. In walk-through mode, lights shall turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if
no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds.
11. Sensor shall have the choice of light flash alert and/or audible alert of impending light shut off,
selectable with DIP switch.
12. Sensor shall have sensitivity adjustment that is set to either automatic (SmartSet setting) or reduced
sensitivity, and is set with DIP switch.
13. Sensor shall have a built-in light level feature, adjustable from 2 to 200 footcandles, selectable with
DIP switch. During set up of light level control, sensor shall learn desired hold-off level, requiring
only one step.
14. Sensor shall have automatic-ON or manual-ON operation adjustable with DIP switch.
15. Sensor shall have no minimum load requirement and shall be capable of switching 0 to 800 watts
fluorescent/incandescent at 120VAC, 0 to 1200 watts fluorescent at 277VAC, or 1/6 HP at 277VAC,
60 Hz.
16. Sensor shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual element sensor, and a multi-element Fresnel
lens.
17. For vandal resistance, Fresnel lens shall be made of hard, 1.0mm Poly IR 2 material that offers
greater sensitivity to motion and superior detection performance. Lens shall have grooves facing in
to avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR reception.
18. Sensor shall cover up to 300 sq. ft. for walking motion, with a field of view of 180 degrees.

19. Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable, tamper resistant cover
to prevent tampering of adjustments and hardware.
20. Sensor shall have a 100 percent off switch with no leakage current to the load.
21. Input voltage: 120/277VAC, 60Hz.
22. UL and cUL listed.
B. Occupancy Sensor Specification No. 8

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watt Stopper DT-300/305, Hubbell, Leviton, or as approved.
2. The Dual Technology sensor shall be ceiling mounted and capable of detecting presence in the
control area by detecting Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared heat
changes.
3. Sensors shall use patent pending ultrasonic diffusion technology that spreads coverage to a wider
area.
4. Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination between ultrasonic and PIR
technologies. Detection verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting
systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold lighting on.
5. Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either technology shall retrigger the
lighting system on within 5 seconds of being switched off.
6. Sensors shall provide 360 degree coverage.
7. Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency of 40 KHz. It shall utilize
Advanced Signal Processing that automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically to
compensate for changing levels of activity and airflow throughout controlled space.
8. To avoid false ON activations and to provide immunity to RFI and EMI, Detection Signature Analysis
shall be used to examine the frequency, duration, and amplitude of a signal, to respond only to
those signals caused by human motion.
9. The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual element sensor and a multi-
element Fresnel lens. The lens shall be Poly IR4 material to offer superior performance in the
infrared wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as those emitted by the sun and other
visible light sources. The lens shall have grooves facing in to avoid dust and residue build up which
affects IR reception.
10. Sensors shall utilize SmartSet™ technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity settings to fit
occupant usage patterns. The use of SmartSet shall be selectable with a DIP switch.
11. Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically (with the SmartSet setting) or shall
have a fixed time delay of 5 to 30 minutes, set by DIP switch.
12. Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where lights turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially
occupied if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds.
13. Sensor shall have an additional single-pole, double throw isolated relay with normally open,
normally closed and common outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data logging,
and other control options.
14. Sensors shall have a built-in light level sensor that works from 10 to 300 footcandles.
15. Sensors shall have a manual on function that is facilitated by installing a momentary switch.
16. Sensors shall have eight occupancy logic options that give the ability to customize control to meet
application needs.
17. Each sensing technology shall have an LED indicator that remains active at all times in order to
verify detection within the area to be controlled. The LED can be disabled for applications that
require less sensor visibility.
18. Sensor shall be used with “power pack” as specified herein.
C. Power Pack
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watt Stopper BZ Series, Hubbell, Leviton, or as approved.
2. Power pack shall be a self-contained transformer and relay module.

3. Power pack shall have 1/2 inch snap-in nipple for 1/2 inch knockouts and mounting on outside of
enclosure.
4. Power packs shall have dry contacts capable of switching 20 amp ballast load, 20 amp
incandescent, 1 hp at 120 VAC, 60Hz; 20 amp ballast at 277 VAC, 60 Hz.
5. Power packs shall provide a 24 VDC, 150 mA output.
6. Power packs shall be capable of parallel wiring without regard to AC phases on primary.
7. Power pack can be used as a standalone, low voltage switch, or can be wired to sensor for auto
control.
8. Power packs shall have low voltage Teflon coated leads, rated for 300 volts, and 94V-O plastic
enclosure suitable for use in plenum applications.
9. Zero crossing switching circuitry.
10. Hold-on/Hold-off inputs.
11. LED status indicator.
12. Dual Voltage: 120/277 volts.
13. Overcurrent protection.
2.2 DAYLIGHT SENSORS
A. Daylight Sensor Specification No. 2 – Dimming Photosensor

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Watt Stopper LS-301 Series, Hubbell, Leviton, or as approved.
2. Single zone, 0-10VDC dimming, closed loop.
3. Automatic setpoint calculation.
4. Digital multi-band photosensor range: 1-1400 footcandles.
5. On setpoint range: 1-850 footcandles.
6. User adjustable parameters: on setpoint, off setpoint, off setpoint time delay, and ‘Hold On While
Occupied’.
7. Status indicator: Multi-function green LED.
8. Setup shall be performed remotely via handheld remote control.
9. UL listed.
10. Sensor shall be used with “power pack” as specified herein.
2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING RELAY
A. Emergency Lighting Relay Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Wattstopper ELCU-200, or as approved.
2. Relay unit shall provide all functionality required to allow standard lighting control device to control
emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in a building. Unit shall monitor single circuit
that provides normal lighting to an area. As long as normal power is available, unit shall permit
control devices to control emergency lighting fixtures. Upon loss of power, unit shall bypass control
device and energize emergency fixtures.
3. Unit can be wired as control device (receives switching signal from relay, occupancy sensor, switch,
etc.) or as a shunt (with dimming device).
4. Integral push-to-test.
5. Zero-cross switching technology.
6. LED indication for emergency and normal operation.
7. UL924 listed.

8. Unit shall meet all applicable NEC, OSHA, and NFPA requirements.
9. 120/277VAC.
10. Maximum load: 20A ballast load, 10A incandescent load, 1HP motor load.
11. Wire per manufacturer’s recommendations.
12. Five year warranty.
2.4 DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper DLM System, or as approved.
B. System Description
1. Contractor shall furnish and install a plug-and-play, topology-free Digital Lighting Management
(DLM) system as described herein to be wired, connected, and commissioned. System shall include
all devices and equipment as defined in this section and all system components, cabling, and
accessories as required for a fully-functioning, first-class lighting control system. System
components shall include (but not be limited to):
a. Digital Switches: Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and
scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications.
b. Digital Occupancy Sensors: Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated
occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications.
c. Digital Room Controllers: Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relay
controllers, with 0-10 volt or forward phase control dimming outputs where required.
d. Digital Photo Sensors: Single-zone closed loop and multi-zone open loop daylighting
sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications, able to provide switching, bi-
level, tri-level or dimming control for daylight harvesting.
e. Digital Input/Output Interface: Device shall allow seamless integration with third party
devices.
f. Configuration Tools: Handheld remote for room configuration to provide two way infrared
(IR) communications to digital devices and allow complete configuration and reconfiguration
of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit shall have Organic LED display,
pushbutton interface, and allow bi-directional communication of room variables and
occupancy sensor settings.
g. Computer Software: Personal computer software to allow customized room settings,
installed and configured on Owner’s equipment.
h. Handheld Remote Controllers for Personal Control: One-button dimming, two-button on/off,
or five-button scene remotes provide control using infrared communications. Remote
controllers shall be configurable in the field to control selected loads or scenes without
special tools.
i. Network Bridge: To provide BACnet MS/TP-compliant digital networked communication
between rooms, panels and the Segment Manager or building automation system (BAS).
j. Segment Manager: To provide a web browser-based user interface for system control,
scheduling, power monitoring, room device parameter administration and reporting.
k. Digital Lighting Control Local Network: Free topology, plug-in wiring system using pre-
configured or field fabricated Cat 5e Ethernet cables for power and data to room devices.
C. Digital Wall Or Ceiling-Mounted Occupancy Sensor

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMDC (Ceiling) or LMDW (Wall) Series.
2. Wall or ceiling mounted (as indicated on Drawings) dual-technology occupancy sensor.
3. Furnish the manufacturer’s system which accommodates the square-foot coverage requirements for
each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories which
suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.
4. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic
documentation. Features include the following:
a. Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:
1) Sensitivity: 0-100% in 10% increments
2) Time Delay: 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments
3) Test Mode: Five second time delay
4) Walk-through mode

5) Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight

enable/disable when photo sensors are included in the DLM local network.
b. One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.
c. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld
commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.
d. Device Status LEDs including:
1) PIR detection
2) Ultrasonic detection
3) Configuration mode
4) Load binding
e. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special
tools.
f. Manual override of controlled loads.
5. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.
6. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free
topology DLM local network. No additional configuration shall be required.
D. Digital Wall Stations

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMSW or LMDM Series.
2. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration (as indicated
on Drawings).
3. Device color as directed by Architect.
4. Stations shall be compatible with standard decora-style wall plates.
5. Wall stations shall include the following features:
a. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls.
b. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color
buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.
c. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.
d. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:
1) Bi-level LED
2) Dim locator level indicates power to switch
3) Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active
e. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.
6. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.
7. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free
topology DLM local network. No additional configuration shall be required to achieve multi-way
switching.
8. The following switch attributes shall be capable of being changed or selected using a wireless
configuration tool:
a. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to
Scene, and vice versa).
b. Individual button function may be configured to Dim, Toggle, On only or Off only for any load
or combination of loads.
c. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.
d. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18
hours.
e. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.
f. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type
dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads.
g. Individual button may have varied programmable functions based upon time of day or
occupied/unoccupied status.
E. Digital Room Controllers

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMRC Series.
2. Room controllers shall automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space
without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room controllers shall be provided to match the
room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers shall be simple to install and shall not
have dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration.

3. The control units shall include the following features:

a. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based
upon the devices in the room.
b. Simple Rplacement: Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller
may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup.
c. Device Status LEDs to indicate:
1) Data transmission
2) Device has power
3) Status for each load
4) Configuration status
d. Quick installation features including:
1) Standard junction box mounting
2) Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable
e. Plenum rated.
f. Manual override and LED indication for each load
g. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz), or 347 VAC, 60 Hz (selected models only)
h. Zero cross circuitry for each load.
4. On/Off Room Controllers shall include:
a. One or two relay configuration
b. Efficient 150 mA switching power supply
c. Three RJ-45 DLM local network ports
5. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include:
a. Real time current monitoring
b. Multiple relay configurations:
1) One, two or three relays (LMRC-21x series)
2) One or two relays (LMRC-22x series)
c. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply
d. Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports.
e. One dimming output per relay:
1) Where indicated, one 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible
ballasts and LED drivers. The 0-10 volt output shall automatically open upon loss of
power to the Room Controller to assure full light output from the controlled lighting.
2) Where indicated, one forward phase control line voltage dimming output per relay for
control of compatible two-wire or three-wire ballasts, LED drivers, MLV, forward
phase compatible ELV, neon/cold cathode and incandescent loads.
f. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration
tool:
1) Establish preset level for each load from 0-100%
2) Set high and low trim for each load
3) Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours
F. Digital Photo Sensors

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMLS-400 or LMLS-500 Series.
2. Provide open or closed loop photo sensors as recommended by system manufacturer for individual
application.
3. Digital photo sensors work with room controllers to provide automatic switching, bi-level, or tri-level
or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Closed
loop photo sensors shall measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone.
Open loop photo sensors shall measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of
controlling up to three lighting zones.
4. Photo sensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring.
5. Digital photo sensors shall include the following features:
a. An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum, and has a response
curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in
either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than
5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.
b. Sensor light level range shall be from 1-6000 footcandles (fc).
c. The capability of ON/OFF, bi-level or tri-level switching, or dimming, for each controlled
zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room
controller(s).

d. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a field-selectable

deadband, or a separation, between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that shall
prevent the lights from cycling excessively after they turn off.
e. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the
daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a field-selectable
minimum level.
f. Optional wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy
savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise lighting levels for a selectable period
of time or cycle of occupancy.
g. Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld
configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for
communication with personal remote controls.
h. Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission.
i. Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.
j. Recessed switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.
k. One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.
l. Any load or group of loads in the room can be assigned to a daylighting zone
m. Each load within a daylighting zone shall be capable of being individually enabled or
disabled for discrete control (load independence).
6. Closed loop digital photo sensors shall include the following additional features:
a. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 100 degree angle, cutting off the unwanted
light from bright sources outside of this cone.
b. Automatic self-calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration tool or a
PC with appropriate software.
c. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following self-calibration. For
switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints shall
prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation a sliding setpoint control algorithm
with separate Day and Night setpoints shall prevent abrupt ramping of loads.
7. Open loop digital photo sensors shall include the following additional features:
a. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted
light from the interior of the room.
b. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following manual calibration using a
wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. For switching operation, an
adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints for each zone shall prevent the
lights from cycling; for dimming operation, a proportional control algorithm shall maintain the
design lighting level in each zone.
c. Each of the three discrete daylight zones can include any non-overlapping group of loads in
the room.
G. Digital Input/Output Interface

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Wattstopper LMIO-101 Series.
2. Input/Output interface for integration of third party devices such as building automation systems
(BAS), time clocks, photo cells, etc.
3. 24VDC isolated relay (SPDT with normally open, normally closed, and common outputs) for output
to other systems.
4. 24VDS output and four input terminals for maintained momentary switch closure inputs or third part
logic inputs.
5. Status LED for each input and output.
6. Devices shall have two RJ45 ports.
H. Room Network
1. The DLM local network shall be a free topology lighting control physical connection and
communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. Digital room devices shall
connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors which provide both data and
power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network shall include:
a. Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting
loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.
b. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without
requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.

c. Push n’ Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and
load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local
network.
d. Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a
handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within
a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor, wall switch or IR receiver.
I. Configurations Tools
1. A configuration tool shall facilitate optional customization of DLM local networks, and be used to set
up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool shall feature infrared
communications, while PC software shall connect to each local network via a USB interface.
2. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include:
a. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of
approximately 30 feet.
b. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven
operation.
c. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room
controllers and buttons on digital wall switches.
d. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors.
e. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those
levels in scene setting.
f. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-commissioning, and input
light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls.
J. Network Bridge
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMBC Series.
2. The network bridge module shall connect a DLM local network to a BACnet-compliant segment
network for communication between rooms, panels and a segment manager or BAS. Each local
network shall include a network bridge component to provide a connection to the local network
room devices. The network bridge shall use industry standard BACnet MS/TP network
communication.
a. The network bridge shall be provided as a separate module connected on the local network
through an available RJ-45 port.
b. Provide Plug n’ Go operation to automatically discover room devices connected to the local
network and make all device parameters visible to the segment manager via the segment
network. No commissioning shall be required for set up of the network bridge on the local
network.
c. The network bridge shall automatically create standard BACnet objects for selected room
device parameters to allow any BACnet-compliant BAS to include lighting control and power
monitoring features as provided by the DLM room devices on each local network. Standard
BACnet objects shall be provided as follows:
1) Read/write the normal or after hours schedule state for the room
2) Read the detection state of the occupancy sensor
3) Read/write the On/Off state of loads
4) Read/write the dimmed light level of loads
5) Read the button states of switches
6) Read total current in amps, and total power in watts through the room controller
7) Read/write occupancy sensor time delay, PIR sensitivity and ultrasonic sensitivity
settings
8) Activate a preset scene for the room
9) Read/write daylight sensor fade time and day and night setpoints
10) Read the current light level, in footcandles, from interior and exterior photo sensors
and photocells
11) Set daylight sensor operating mode
12) Read/write wall switch lock status
13) Read watts per square foot for the entire controlled room
14) Write maximum light level per load for demand response mode
15) Read/write activation of demand response mode for the room
16) Active/restore demand response mode for the room
K. Segment Manager
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: WattStopper LMSM/NB-ROUTER/NB-SWITCH Series.

2. The digital lighting management system shall include at least one segment manager to manage
network communication. It shall be capable of serving up a graphical user interface via a standard
web browser. Each segment manager shall have integral support for one, two or three segment
networks as indicated. Segment networks may alternately be connected to the segment manger via
external routers and switches, using standard Ethernet structured wiring. Each router shall
accommodate one segment network. Provide the quantity of routers and switches as shown on the
Drawings.
3. Operational features of the Segment Manager shall include the following:
a. Connection to PC or LAN via standard Ethernet TCP/IP.
b. Graphical user interface, compatible with Internet Explorer 8, or equal browser.
c. Log-in security capable of restricting some users to view-only or other limited operations.
d. Automatic discovery of DLM devices and panels on the segment network(s). Commissioning
beyond activation of the discovery function shall not be required to provide communication,
monitoring or control of all local networks and lighting control panels.
e. After discovery, all rooms and panels shall be presented in a standard navigation tree
format. Selecting a device from the tree shall allow the device settings and operational
parameters to be viewed and changed by the user.
f. Ability to view and modify room device operational parameters. It shall be possible to set
device parameters independently for normal hours and after hours operation.
g. Ability to set up schedules for rooms and panels. Schedules shall automatically set
controlled zones or areas to either a normal hours or after hours mode of operation.
h. Ability to group rooms and loads for common control by schedules, switches or network
commands.
i. Ability to monitor connected load current and display power consumption for areas equipped
with room controllers incorporating the integral current monitoring feature.
j. Provide capabilities for integration with a BAS via BACnet protocol. At a minimum, the
following points shall be available to the BAS via BACnet IP connection to the segment
manager: room occupancy state; individual occupancy sensor state; scene activation;
schedule mode; room lighting power; room plug-load power; load ON/OFF state; and load
dimming level.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Occupancy Sensors
1. Occupancy sensors shall be installed and wired per manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Room and/or areas shown on the Drawings with occupancy sensors shall have the lighting in those
rooms controlled using occupancy sensors. Electrical Contractor shall verify application and
quantity of sensors with manufacturer based on type of space and coverage of each sensor type
and add sensors, power packs, etc., of the types directed by the manufacturer in order to provide
adequate detection throughout entire room.
3. Time-off delay times shall be set as directed by Owner.
4. Ultrasonic sensors shall be located a minimum of 4 feet away from air supply diffusers and 6 inches
from power pack.
5. All wiring shall be tested prior to installation and connection of occupancy sensors.
6. Aiming of all directional occupancy sensors shall be as directed by the manufacturer.
B. Daylight Sensors
1. Daylight sensors shall not be mounted directly above direct/indirect pendant fixtures.
2. Final aiming and location of all daylight sensors shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Photo Controls
1. Photo controls shall be installed where indicated on Drawings.

3.2 TESTING
A. Upon completion of all line, load and interconnection wiring, and after all fixtures are installed and lamped,
a qualified factory representative shall completely check the installation prior to energizing the system.
Each installed occupancy sensor shall be tested in the test mode to see that lights turn off and on based
on occupancy.
B. Test results shall be documented and tabulated for each sensor and shall include all settings. Three
copies shall be turned over to Owner.
C. At the time of checkout and testing, the owner’s representative shall be thoroughly instructed in the proper
operation of the system.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall protect installed product and finished surfaces from damage during all phases of
installation including preparation, testing, and cleanup.
3.4 SERVICE CONTRACT
A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid the costs of and turn over to Owner a one year service
contract. The service contract shall include two visits to the site during the period of the one year service
contract, one visit at 3 months and the second visit near the end of the one year service contract. The
visits shall be made by a manufacturer authorized representative knowledgeable of the products and the
operation of the product. During each visit, the manufacturer’s representative shall check each occupancy
sensor for proper operation and make adjustments as necessary. All settings (sensitivity, time delays,
etc.) shall be compared to initial settings and adjusted as required. Make adjustments and re-set as
directed by Owner due to change in use of room, etc. Controls found to be non-operating, broken (other
than miss-use), defective or not operating properly shall be replaced under the contract standard one
year warranty at no cost to the Owner.
B. Electrical contractor shall provide to Owner manufacturer’s name and contact information to notify for the
3 months and near end of first year visits.
3.5 DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's factory
authorized representative who shall verify a complete fully functional system.
B. Upon completion of the system commissioning the factory-authorized technician shall visit site to set initial
scenes and lighting levels, calibrate daylight sensors, and to provide the proper training to the owner's
personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system.
C. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid all costs for commissioning of the control system and all
components and devices by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. The Electrical Contractor
shall assist the manufacturer’s representative as required during the commissioning. The manufacturer’s
procedures and instructions shall be followed for the commissioning and shall include, as a minimum, the
following:
1. Prior to submission of shop drawings, the Electrical Contractor shall review with the manufacturer’s
authorized representative the physical details and proposed occupancy and usage of each area
indicated to receive an occupancy sensor and the type and location of the lighting control device(s)
in each area for approval by the manufacturer’s representative. Each area shall be reviewed for
sensor location and orientation relative to occupant location, room geometry, obstacles and false
triggering. A letter from the manufacturer’s authorized representative stating that the review has
been completed and that locations and types of sensors in each area are approved shall be
included with the shop drawing submittal. If, for any reason, the manufacturer’s authorized
representative does not approve the sensor location or type for an area or areas, the letter shall
include a listing of those areas, the reason for non-approval and recommendations for changes.

2. During construction and prior to device rough-in, the manufacturer authorized representative shall
visit the site and approve the actual location of the occupancy sensor.
3. After installation, the manufacturer’s authorized representative, in coordination with the Owner, shall
adjust the functions, scheduling, sensitivity and time delays of each sensor and input device as best
for the occupancy and usage of the area as described by the Owner. The adjustments and settings
shall be based upon occupant(s) in and out for short periods of time, occupant(s) in most of the time
and out for long periods of time, etc.
4. Electrical Contractor shall submit to Owner listing of each area indicating type of device in each
area and device/sensor initial settings.
3.6 OCCUPANCY SENSOR CONTROL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid all costs for commissioning of the occupancy sensors and,
where applicable, the occupancy sensors control system(s) by an authorized representative of the
manufacturer. The Electrical Contractor shall assist the manufacturer’s representative as required during
the commissioning. The manufacturer’s procedures and instructions shall be followed for the
commissioning and shall include, as a minimum, the following:
1. Prior to submission of shop drawings, the Electrical Contractor shall review with the manufacturer’s
authorized representative the physical details and proposed occupancy and usage of each area
indicated to receive an occupancy sensor and the type and location of the occupancy sensor(s) in
each area for approval by the manufacturer’s representative. Each area shall be reviewed for
sensor location and orientation relative to occupant location, room geometry, obstacles and false
triggering. A letter from the manufacturer’s authorized representative stating that the review has
been completed and that locations and types of sensors in each area are approved shall be
included with the shop drawing submittal. If, for any reason, the manufacturer’s authorized
representative does not approve the sensor location or type for an area or areas, the letter shall
include a listing of those areas, the reason for non-approval and recommendations for changes.
2. During construction and prior to occupancy sensor rough-in, the manufacturer authorized
representative shall visit the site and approve the actual location of the occupancy sensor.
3. After installation, the manufacturer’s authorized representative, in coordination with the Owner, shall
adjust the sensitivity and time delays of each sensor as best for the occupancy and usage of the
area as described by the Owner. The adjustments and settings shall be based upon occupant(s) in
and out for short periods of time, occupant(s) in most of the time and out for long periods of time,
etc.
4. Electrical Contractor shall submit to Owner listing of each area with an occupancy sensor, type of
sensor in each area and settings of each sensor.

SECTION 26 60 10 – SPECIAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials, and equipment required for the furnishing
and installing of special equipment specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Elevator Power Disconnect Switches
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELEVATOR POWER DISCONNECT MODULE SWITCH
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bussman Power Module Switch, or Ferraz-Shawmut
B. Ratings as indicated on the drawings.
C. NEMA 1 enclosure.
D. Shall include a horsepower rated, 3-pole, fusible switch with a shunt trip device having a normally open
auxiliary contacts for interfacing with the battery back-up for elevator lowering.
E. Handlockable off with up to three pad locks.
F. Visible blade for visually determining the “On-Off” position of the switch.
G. Rated 200,000 amps short circuit current.
H. Included in the switch enclosure shall be the following:
1. Class ‘J’ fuses, furnish and turn over to Owner six additional spare Class ‘J’ fuses.
2. 100 VA control power transformer with both primary and secondary fuses. An additional four spare
fuses of each type shall be furnished and turned over to Owner.
3. Fire alarm interface relay to initiate the shunt trip. Relay energized by auxiliary contact(s) from the
fire alarm system and, for shunt trip testing, energized by a door mounted key test switch. Relay to
have 24 volt DC coil, from the fire alarm system.
4. Shunt trip relay to activate the shut trip device of the fusible switch.
5. Door mounted pilot light for voltage available indication.
6. Door mounted key test switch to test the shunt trip. Furnish four keys and turn over to Owner.
7. Relay for monitoring “Loss of Power” on each of the three phases by the fire alarm system, coil
voltage for the relay from the 100 VA control power transformer.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS SPECIAL SYSTEMS 26 60 10 - 1 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install equipment and wiring to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Furnish and install suitable strain relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
B. Roll Up Curtain
1. Motor and limit switches for roll up curtain will be furnished and installed by General Contractor and
shall be wired and connected as Work of this Section.
2. Key operated control switches will be furnished by General Contractor and shall be installed, wired
and connected as Work of this Section.
3. Manual motor starters shall be furnished, installed, wired and connected as Work of this Section.
C. Elevators
1. Elevator equipment and elevator controller(s) shall be furnished and installed by General
Contractor. All wiring for elevator equipment will be furnished and installed by General Contractor,
except as follows which shall be furnished and installed as work of this Division:
a. Furnish, install and connect power wiring to elevator controller and furnish, install, wire and
connect Elevator Power Disconnect Module Switch.
b. Furnish, install, wire and connect wiring, light, and switch for elevator pit lighting and for
ground fault receptacle in elevator pit.
c. Furnish, install and terminate wiring from disconnect switch in Elevator Equipment Room to
junction box in elevator shaft for elevator car lighting.
2. Alarm circuit in elevator will consist of a bell in the elevator shaft which shall be connected to the
emergency stop button and the alarm button in the elevator. Elevator supplier will furnish and install
wiring from this alarm circuit to the elevator controller. Furnish and install wiring from the elevator
controller to the elevator alarm station at location indicated on the Drawings.
3. Furnish and install telephone cable to elevator controller for telephone in elevator. Furnish and
install telephone cable to telephone outlet in elevator equipment room. Refer to telecommunication
sections for wiring specifications.
4. Furnish and install the following from the fire alarm panel to the Elevator Power Disconnect Module
Switch:
a. Wiring to monitor the power available on each of the three phase power wires, connect to
the “Loss of Power” relay contacts in the Elevator Power Disconnect Module Switch
Enclosure.
b. 24 volt DC wiring for the fire alarm interface relay, connect to the coil of the fire alarm
interface relay in the Elevator Power Disconnect Module Switch enclosure.
c. Wiring to activate the shunt trip device in the Elevator Power Disconnect Module Switch,
connect to the coil of the shut trip relay.
5. Furnish and install conduit and wire from fire alarm panel to elevator controller for connection of
fireman's return.
6. Refer to Section 28 31 10, Fire Alarm System, for Work required to install wiring for fireman's return
on elevator bank.
7. Pit Lighting and GFI Receptacle: Dedicated 20 amp normal circuit. Connect light and related control
upstream of GFI receptacle.
8. Pit Sump Pump: Dedicated circuit and devices as required by load.
9. Hoistway Devices: Dedicated 20 amp Normal circuit for receptacles and required lighting fixtures.
10. Machine Room Lighting and GFI Receptacle: Dedicated 20 amp Normal circuit for GFI receptacles
and lighting. Connect lighting and related control upstream of GFI receptacle.

D. Automatic Door Operators
1. Automatic door operators and associated controls, wiring and equipment will be furnished and
installed by General Contractor. Furnish and install branch wiring to junction box indicated and
make final connections.
E. Receptacles Furnished with Equipment
1. Receptacles will be furnished by equipment supplier as noted on Drawings. Furnish materials

necessary to install receptacles, install receptacles and furnish and install wiring to receptacles and
make connections.
F. Kitchen Appliances
1. Kitchen appliances, ranges, refrigerators, etc., and washer and dryers, complete with cord and plug
sets, will be furnished and installed by General Contractor. Furnish and install receptacles for these
appliances.
G. Basketball Backstop Hoist Motors
1. Motors and limit switches will be furnished and installed by General Contractor and shall be wired
2. Key operated raise-lower control switches will be furnished by General Contractor and shall be
installed and wired as Work of this Section.
3. Control panel and height adjustment combination switch-keypad will be furnished by the General
Contractor and shall be installed and wired as Work under this section.
4. Furnish, install and wire all manual motor starters.
H. Coil Walls
1. Motors and limit switches will be furnished and installed by General Contractor and shall be wired
2. Key operated control switches will be furnished by General Contractor and shall be installed, wired
3. Furnish, install and wire all manual motor starters.
I. Scoreboard
1. Furnish and install conduit and flush pull boxes for future scoreboard system.
2. Install fish wire in conduit.
J. Electrically Operated Overhead Doors
1. Overhead doors with electric operators will be furnished and installed by General Contractor.
General Contractor will furnish all controls. Install and wire controls and furnish and install power
wiring to door operators and control wiring from controls to door operators. Provide final connection
of power wiring and control. Furnish, install and wire disconnect switches.
K. Electrically Operated Projection Screens
1. Projection screen with motor and starter will be furnished and installed by General Contractor.
Raise lower, key operated, selector switches will be furnished by General Contractor.
2. Furnish and install power wiring to screen, install raise lower switches, and furnish and install wiring
for raise lower switches.
L. Electronically Operated Bleachers
1. Power operated bleachers with all associated motors, controls, bleacher control box, and operators
will be furnished and installed by general contractor.

2. Electrical contractor shall furnish and install disconnect switch, power wiring to disconnect switch
and power wiring from disconnect switch to bleacher control box.
3. Power wiring from bleacher control box to bleachers, all controls, all control wiring and all power
wiring on the load side of the bleacher control box will be furnished and installed by the bleacher
installer.
4. Coordinate exact location of disconnect switch with the bleacher installer.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Obtain verification from Architect on mounting height and location of all electrical outlets, conduit stubs,
receptacles, switches, disconnect switches, plugmold, motor starters, controls and other electrical
equipment before roughing in.
B. Before roughing in equipment, obtain verification from Architect for all equipment to be wired as Work of
this Section as follows:
1. Verify electrical loads of all equipment.

2. Verify electrical characteristics of all equipment for compatibility with electrical power provided to
the equipment.
C. Before roughing in equipment, obtain verification from Engineer for all equipment to be wired as Work of
this Section as follows:
1. Verify electrical loads of all equipment.
2. Verify electrical characteristics of all equipment for compatibility with electrical power provided to
the equipment.

SECTION 26 60 85 – SCOREBOARD CONDUIT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work in this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for furnishing and
installing a conduit system for a future scoreboard.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Outlet Boxes
2. Conduit
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Furnish and install 20 amp, 120 volt AC receptacle or junction boxg installed at future locations of control
console and scoreboards. Refer to Drawings for outlet locations.
B. Furnish and install raceways, as indicated on Drawings, for scoreboard system wiring.
C. Scoreboard and associated wiring will be installed by General Contractor at a future date
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Unless noted, raceways shall be Raceway Specification No. 2.
2.2 BOXES
A. Boxes shall be as indicated on the Drawings, verify with Owners scoreboard equipment supplier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit and boxes as directed by Owner’s scoreboard equipment supplier.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS SCOREBOARD CONDUIT SYSTEM 26 60 85 - 1 of 1

SECTION 26 90 10 – CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required to furnish, install, and
connect the control instrumentation equipment as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Motor Starters
2. Contactors
3. Control Stations
4. Relays
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Unless otherwise indicated, acceptable manufacturers of equipment and items specified in this section
shall be one of the following:
1. Square D
2. Allen Bradley
3. General Electric
4. Siemens Industry
5. Eaton Cutler Hammer
2.2 MOTOR STARTERS, MANUAL
A. Manual Motor Starter Specification No. MN-1.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Class 2510, single-speed, and Class 2512 two-speed.
2. Type: Manual motor starter with overloads, fractional horsepower.
3. 120/240 volts AC, single phase.
4. Surface mounted in unfinished spaces, flush mounted in finished spaces.
5. NEMA 1 enclosure.
6. Single speed, non-reversing.
7. With or without pilot light, as indicated.
8. Thermal overload protection in each ungrounded conductor.
9. 1 or 2 pole as required. Switch shall break each ungrounded conductor.
10. Handle guard/lock-off.
11. Hand-off-automatic switch, where indicated.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS CONTROLS AND 26 90 10 - 1 of 4

INSTRUMENTATION
2.3 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS
A. General: Combination motor starters shall be:

1. Manufactured and rated in accordance with NEMA standards.
2. Gravity drop-out.
3. Solid state overload protection in each ungrounded conductor as specified herein.
4. Suitable for addition of no less than four auxiliary contacts of any arrangement, normally open (NO)
or normally closed (NC), quantity as indicated on Drawings. One additional NO auxiliary contact
shall be provided in addition to the quantity indicated on Drawings. If auxiliary contacts are not
indicated, provide one NO contact.
5. Single speed, non-reversing, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Cover mounted manual reset.
7. Suitable for two or three wire control.
8. Heavy duty control devices for NEMA 1 enclosures, Control Device Specification No.1, as specified
herein.
9. Controls for other enclosures shall be suitable for the enclosure type, heavy duty.
10. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, motor starters indicated as not being combination type
shall be applicable starter type specified herein.
B. Disconnect devices for combination motor starters shall include:

1. Fusible or non-fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker type, as indicated on Drawings.
2. Unless otherwise noted, circuit breakers shall be as specified in Section 26 24 50, Overcurrent
Protective Devices, and disconnect switches shall be as specified in Section 26 24 40, Disconnect
Switches.
3. Padlock type disconnect handle for locking in the off position for no more than three padlocks.
Disconnect handle in continuous control of the disconnect switch or breaker.
4. Enclosure door in the closed position to permit operation of disconnect.
5. Enclosure door locking device when disconnect is in on position, unless a defeater is deliberately
activated.
6. Auxiliary normally open (NO) contact on disconnect, when indicated on Drawings.
7. Unless noted otherwise, fuse clips, for Class R rejection type fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C. Refer to Drawings for the following starter requirements:

1. Starter type.
2. NEMA size.
3. NEMA enclosure.
4. Ratings.
5. Control and pilot devices.
6. Control voltage.
7. Control transformer, fused secondary. (Do not provide transformer if control transformer is not
indicated.)
8. Other accessories and modifications.
D. Combination Motor Starter Specification No. CMS-1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Class 8538 switch type non-reversing, Class 8539 breaker
type non-reversing, Class 8738 switch type reversing, Class 8739 breaker type reversing.
2. Full voltage.
3. Single Speed.

INSTRUMENTATION
2.4 CONTACTORS
A. Refer to Drawings for the following contactor requirements:

1. Contactor type.
2. NEMA size where applicable.
3. NEMA enclosure.
4. Ratings.
5. Control and pilot devices.
6. Control voltage.
7. Control transformer, secondary fused. (Do not provide transformer if control transformer is not
indicated.)
8. Other accessories or modifications.
B. Contactors shall be group mounted in common enclosure when indicated as mounted side-by-side.
C. Where indicated as combination, contactors shall have fusible or non-fusible disconnect switch or circuit
breaker in same enclosure. Disconnect switches and circuit breakers shall be as specified herein.
D. Contactor Specification No. 1

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Class 8903.
2. Non-motor loads.
3. 2 wire control.
4. Electrically held type.
5. Normally open (NO) holding circuit interlock provided for 3 wire control, when required.
2.5 CONTROL DEVICES
A. Control Device Specification No.1

1. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Square D Class 9001, heavy duty.
2. Heavy duty.
3. Manufactured in accordance with NEMA standards.
4. NEMA 1 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Surface mounted, unless indicated.
6. Pushbuttons, selector switches and pilot lights as indicated on Drawings.
7. Push-to-test, 6 to 8 volt, transformer type pilot lights.
8. Colored pilot light lens as indicated on Drawings, or red if no color indicated. Colored lens shall be
interchangeable.
9. Silver contacts.
10. 600 volts AC, maximum; 10 amps continuous current carrying capacity at all AC voltages.
11. Start pushbuttons shall have fully guarded or flush black button.
12. Stop pushbuttons shall have unguarded or extended red button.
13. Provide appropriate legend or nameplate.
14. Selector switches shall have standard operator, unless otherwise indicated.
15. Panic buttons shall have one NO and one NC contact, momentary contact, red mushroom head.

INSTRUMENTATION
2.6 CONTROL STATIONS
A. Control Station Specification No. 1

2. NEMA 4.
3. Surface mounted in unfinished spaces, flush mounted in finished spaces.
4. Provide quantity of device mounting holes, as required.
2.7 RELAYS
A. Relay Specification No. 1

2. Silver contacts, convertible.
3. 10 amp continuous current rating, 600 volts maximum.
4. Ratings, poles and enclosure as indicated on Drawings.
5. Electrically held, unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 TIME SWITCHES
A. Time Switch Specification No. 5

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Intermatic ET100C Series.
2. 24 hour, single channel electronic time switch.
3. Rated 30 amps per pole, 120/277 volts, single pole - single throw.
4. Up to 8 set points per 24 hours.
5. Battery carry-over.
6. NEMA 1 enclosure.
7. Manual override.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install control and instrumentation equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instructions with operating and maintenance
2. Individually mounted motor starter shall be mounted 5 feet above finished floor unless otherwise
noted.

INSTRUMENTATION
SECTION 26 96 10 – WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall include the labor, materials, and equipment required for furnishing and
installing the power and control wiring of mechanical equipment. It shall not include control wiring
specifically detailed as part of the building automation and automatic temperature control system specified
in Section 23 90 10, Building Automation System.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Mechanical Contractor(s) shall furnish equipment with controls, starters and related items as specified in
various Sections of Divisions 21, 22 and 23.
B. Where mechanical equipment is specified without starters or controllers, Electrical Contractor shall furnish
and install same as specified herein.
C. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all power wiring unless specifically noted otherwise.
D. Mechanical Contractor(s) shall furnish and install all control wiring unless specifically noted otherwise.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mechanical equipment shall be wired in accordance with the following schedule:
Key:
Item furnished by ...
Item installed by ...
Item wired by ...
FP = Fire Protection Contractor

P = Plumbing Contractor
H = HVAC Contractor
G = General Contractor
O = Owner
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS WIRING OF MECHANICAL 26 96 10 - 1 of 6

EQUIPMENT
DWH-1
Flow Switch
Tamper Switch
Electric Alarm Bell
Equipment
Equipment

F
F
F
F
F
F
E
P
P
E
E
E
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS

Remote Disconnect Switch Remote Disconnect Switch
ct
ct
Integral Disconnect Switch Integral Disconnect Switch

Disconne
Disconne
Cord & Plug Cord & Plug
Remote VFD Remote VFD
Integral VFD Integral VFD
E
E
E
Motor Starter Motor Starter
EQUIPMENT
On/Off Switch on Wall On/Off Switch on Wall
Controllers
Controllers
WIRING OF MECHANICAL
Line Volt. Thermostat Line Volt. Thermostat
Control Panel Control Panel

Relay Relay
Fire Protection Equipment Wiring Schedule
DDC Control DDC Control
Low Volt. Thermostat Low Volt. Thermostat
Aquastat Aquastat
Duct Smoke Detectors Duct Smoke Detectors
Flow Flow
Control Devices
Control Devices
Pressure Pressure
26 96 10 - 2 of 6
Water Level / Elev. Water Level / Elev.
Disconne Controllers Control Devices

ct


Equipment
Water Level / Elev.

Control Panel
Motor Starter
Remote VFD
DDC Control
Integral VFD
Cord & Plug
Pressure
Aquastat
Relay
Flow
P E
DWH-2
P E
E E
Hot Water Return Pump
P P
CP-1
P P
E E
Electronic Mixing Valve
P E
TMV-1
P E
E E
Electric Water Cooler
P E
EWC-1
P E
E E
Sump Pump SP-1
P E
P E
E E

EQUIPMENT

Water Level / Elev.

Equipment
Control Panel
Motor Starter
Remote VFD
DDC Control
Integral VFD
Cord & Plug
Pressure
Aquastat
Relay
Flow
Rooftop Unit RTU-1 thru
H E H H E
7
H E H H H
E E E H E
Energy Recovery
H E H H
Ventilator ERV-1
H E H H
E E H H
Fan F-1
H H H H
H H H H
E E H H
Fan F-2, 3, 4,
H H H
H H H
E E E
Fan F-5
H H E
H H E
E E E
VAV-1 thru 12
H H H H
H H H H
E E E H
Split System SSAC-1, 2
H H H
H H H
E E H

EQUIPMENT

Water Level / Elev.

Equipment
Control Panel
Motor Starter
Remote VFD
DDC Control
Integral VFD
Cord & Plug
Pressure
Aquastat
Relay
Flow
Split System SSCC-1, 2
H E H
H E H
E E H
Cabinet Unit Heater
H H H
CUH-1, 2, 3, 6
H H H
E E H
Cabinet Unit Heater
H H H
CUH-4, 5
H H H
E E H
Cabinet Unit Heater
H H H
CUH-7
H H H
E E H
Unit Heater UH-1
H H H
H H H
E E H
Wall Insert Heater WH-1,
H H H H
2
H H H H
E H H H

EQUIPMENT
C. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install wiring from duct smoke detector to fire alarm panel. HVAC
Contractor shall furnish and install wiring from normally open auxiliary contact on duct smoke detector to
control circuitry for shut down of equipment if duct smoke detector is activated.

EQUIPMENT
SECTION 27 05 15 – COMMON REQUIREMENTS – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The requirements stated in Section 20 00 20, General Provisions – Electrical apply to this Section as if
fully repeated herein.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Telecommunications system work shall consist of labor, materials, and equipment required for furnishing
and installing the complete and operational telecommunications system.
B. The Telecommunications System includes work of the following Specification Sections:
1. Specifications:
Section 27 05 15 Common Requirements – Telecommunications Systems
Section 27 05 25 Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications Systems
Section 27 05 30 Pathways for Telecommunications Systems
Section 27 11 10 Telecommunications Spaces, Equipment and Fittings
Section 27 15 10 Horizontal Distribution Cabling – Telecommunications Systems
Section 27 15 45 Faceplates and Connectors - Telecommunications Systems
Section 27 16 10 Connecting Cords, Devices and Adapters – Telecommunications
Systems
Section 27 19 10 Telecommunications Cable System Testing – Copper
Section 27 60 10 Telecommunications Systems Identification and Documentation
2. Drawings:
E3.1 First Floor Level - Systems
E3.2 Gym Level - Systems
E3.2A Gym Level Alternate - Systems
E7.2 Telecommunications Riser Diagram
C. Telecommunications Work shall be bid as a subcontract to the Electrical contract.
1.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall be recognized by the manufacturer providing the cable system performance warranty as
an approved/certified installer of their product. Furnish a certificate from the manufacturer with the shop
drawings.
B. Contractor firm and all employees shall have at least 5 years’ experience in providing certified
communication cabling projects.
C. Contractor shall submit with shop drawings a list of the project team which shall include, as a minimum,
the project manager and foreman. Note on the list the personnel that have been trained and certified by
the data system manufacturer along with a brief description of their experience and training. Changes to
project staffing after contract award must be requested, in writing, and approved by Owner prior to any
changes.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS COMMON REQUIREMENTS - 27 05 15 - 1 of 3

TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
D. At least 50% of the technicians on site shall be BICSI Level I or Level II certified with current certificates
available for review upon request. The foreman shall be, at minimum, BICSI Level II.
E. Where applicable, contractor shall have personnel trained and certified in category rated UTP and fiber
optic cable installation, termination and testing techniques. Personnel shall have experience using a
category rated cable tester, fiber optic light meter and power source and OTDR.
F. Submit, with shop drawings, a list of at least three certified communication cabling projects of similar size
completed in the past two years. Provide references with telephone numbers for each project. Only
provide projects where the listed project team members participated.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Unless noted otherwise, the following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:
1. All electronics and active data networking equipment, etc.

2. Telephones, fax machines and modems, etc.
3. PC’s, printers, video display terminals, flat panel displays, etc.
4. Contact the Owner’s network and computer equipment personnel for specific instructions before
starting Work.
B. Furnish complete systems documentation as described herein, Section 27 60 10, Telecommunications

System Identification and Documentation, where required in other specification sections and as required
by Division 1.
C. Coordinate outlet locations with existing conditions and the work of other trades prior to rough-in and
installation. Any discrepancies between the work shown on the drawings and actual field conditions shall
immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution prior to the start of construction.
D. Coordinate cable lengths with existing conditions and the work of other trades prior to rough-in and
installation. This coordination shall include, but is not limited to, conduit, cable tray and pathways furnished
and installed by other trades. The contractor shall verify that the installed cables will not exceed the
maximum allowable cable length, including all routing, rises, drops and slack cable as required. Any
discrepancies between the work shown on the drawings and actual field conditions shall immediately be
brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution prior to the start of construction.
E. Coordinate with the Owner for the testing, removal from service, removal and relocation of any cables or
equipment owned and maintained by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
construction process. These record documents shall be delivered to Owner either prior to or with
B. Record drawings shall include:
1. The single line diagram of the building telecommunications distribution system provided under this
contract and;

2. Drawings indicating location and area served for all distribution.

3. Drawings indicating outlet locations and outlet numbers.
4. Cable distribution pathways.
5. Termination locations (other than in telecommunications spaces and outlets).
3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Furnish an instructor/operator at completion of system(s) installation, who shall operate system(s) in order
to demonstrate fulfillment of contract requirements. During this time, Owner shall be thoroughly versed in
details of operation and maintenance.
B. A minimum of 2 sets of printed instructions covering operation and maintenance of each item of equipment
shall be submitted to Owner during this operating period. Required instructions from manufacturer’s
representatives shall be submitted at this time.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include:
1. Submittal data stating equipment rating and selected options for each piece of equipment requiring
maintenance.
2. Manufacturers’ installation instructions for each cable system component and major hardware
component furnished and installed as part of this Work.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment requiring maintenance with
required routine maintenance actions clearly identified.
4. Names and addresses of at least one qualified service agency.
5. Complete narrative of how each system is intended to operate.
3.3 WARRANTIES
A. Provide a system warranty covering the installed telecommunications cable system against defects in
workmanship, components, and performance, and follow-on support after project completion.
B. Installation Warranty: Contractor shall warrant the telecommunications cable system against defects in
workmanship for a period of two years from the date of system acceptance. The warranty shall cover all
labor and materials necessary to correct a failed portion of the system and to demonstrate performance
within the original installation specifications after repairs are accomplished. This warranty shall be provided
at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Cable System Performance Warranty: Contractor shall facilitate a 25 Year Performance Warranty between
the manufacturer and the Owner. The performance warranty shall warrant the installed Category rated
UTP copper and the backbone optical fiber portions of the cabling system. Copper links shall be warranted
against the link performance minimum expected results defined in the latest TIA/EIA standard, and the
manufacturer's Network Cabling Contractor Agreement. [Fiber optic links shall be warranted against
the link and segment performance minimum expected results defined in the latest TIA/EIA
standard, and the manufacturer's Network Cabling Contractor Agreement.] All other connectivity
components shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 25 years.

SECTION 27 05 25 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
the telecommunications grounding and bonding system as part of a complete and operational
telecommunications cable system. The specific application of these materials shall be as outlined in this
Section and Sections of this Division, and as indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Ground connectors
2. Grounding busbars
1.3 COORDINATION
A. All items specified or included in this section shall be furnished and installed by, wired and connected by,
and connected by Electrical Contractor, unless noted otherwise.
B. The term “Contractor” as used herein shall mean Electrical Contractor.
C. Contractor shall furnish and install telecommunications grounding busbars, telecommunications bonding
backbone(s), grounding equalizer(s), and equipment bonding conductors to install a complete
telecommunications grounding system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUND CONNECTORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Burndy/FCI, Thomas & Betts/Blackburn, or as approved.
B. Wire to Wire Connectors:

1. Burndy/FCI KS Series split bolt connector, or as approved.
2. Max Conductor Size:
a. Run: #3/0 AWG
b. Tap: #3/0 AWG
3. Wire Type: Solid or stranded copper.
4. Material: High conductivity copper or bronze alloy.
5. Configuration: Split bolt.
C. Wire to Busbar/Equipment Connectors

1. Thomas & Betts/Blackburn Type L Mechanical Series, or as approved.
2. Max Conductor Size: As required.
3. Wire Type: Solid or stranded copper.
4. Material: High strength bronze alloy or copper.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR 27 05 25 - 1 of 4

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
5. Material: High strength bronze alloy or copper.

6. Configuration: Single conductor mechanical lug with two mounting holes in the tongue.
2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECONDARY GROUNDING BUSBAR
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Erico Electrical Products “TGB” Series, Chatsworth or Newtown Instrument Co.
B. Conforms to specifications of TIA/EIA 607.
C. 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide by 20 inches long copper bus bar with electro-tin plating.
D. BICSI hole pattern with 12 pairs of 5/16 inch holes - “A” pattern and 3 pairs of 7/16 inch holes - “C” pattern.
E. Furnish with polyamide, glass fiber reinforced, stand-off insulators and stainless steel mounting brackets
and stainless steel fasteners.
F. All connections to the telecommunications ground bus shall be made using two-hole compression
connectors secured with two silicon bronze bolts, each with two washer, one lock washer and nut.
2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS GROUNDING BACKBONE AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Refer to Section 26 05 20, Wire and Cable, 600 Volts and Below, for types and requirements of wire for
telecommunications grounding backbone and bonding conductors.
B. Grounding and bonding conductors shall be Wire Specification No. 4.
C. Grounding and bonding conductors may be non-insulated wire.
D. Stranded or solid grounding and bonding conductors shall be selected based on wire size requirements as
indicated in Section 26 05 20, Wire and Cable, 600 Volts and Below.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Unless noted otherwise, the telecommunications grounding system shall be furnished and installed in
accordance with the TIA/EIA/J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications.
B. Unless noted otherwise, wires and connectors for telecommunications grounding system shall be installed
in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 20, Wire and Cable, 600 Volts and Below.
C. Unless noted otherwise, ground busbars for telecommunications grounding system shall be installed in
accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 60, Grounding Systems.
3.2 GROUNDING - GENERAL
A. Unless noted otherwise, conductive non-current carrying electrical materials and equipment shall be
grounded. Non-electrical items of equipment shall be bonded together and grounded as indicated herein
and on drawings. Grounding and bonding shall be in accordance with National Electrical Code
requirements.
B. Raceway system shall be grounded and shall be electrically and mechanically continuous from all
telecommunication rooms to system main ground point

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
C. Main system ground points shall be as indicated on Drawings. Exact location and point of connection of
main system grounds shall be verified during construction.
D. Grounding conductors shall be installed in telecommunications raceways unless noted otherwise.
E. Grounding conductors shall be bonded to raceway systems at 100 foot intervals in cable tray systems and
at the entrance and exit of conduits where grounding conductors are installed through the conduit.
F. The contractor shall furnish and install ground wires from the telecommunications main grounding busbar
to each of the telecommunications grounding busbars in each telecommunications space. Conductor size
shall be as indicated on drawings
G. TMGBs and TGBs shall be mounted on the plywood backboards in each telecommunications space. The
mounts shall include two isolation bushings and two sets of mounting legs for each bus bar.
H. The contractor shall furnish and install stranded ground wires from the ground bus bars in each of the
telecommunications spaces to the nearest point of connection of:
1. Local electrical distribution panel ground

2. Building steel
I. Conductor size shall be as indicated on Drawings.
J. Furnish and install ground wires, clamps, connectors, etc. as required to connect all racks, cabinets,
frames and all exposed conductive materials and equipment of each telecommunications system to the
ground bar/plate in each telecommunications space.
K. All exposed conductive elements telecommunications systems shall be bonded to the ground bar in the
telecommunications spaces.
L. Lightning protection equipment (primary and secondary protectors) shall be bonded to ground with a
minimum as required by manufacturers recommended wire size and type.
M. Cable shields and splice enclosures shall be bonded to ground as required by the manufacturer’s
recommendations, #10 AWG minimum.
N. Equipment chassis, racks, cabinets and frames shall be bonded to ground as required by the
manufacturer’s recommendations or in lieu of manufacturer’s recommendations as follows:
1. Size grounding conductors as required by the NEC for the largest amperage electrical circuit
available at the specific equipment, rack or cabinet.
3.3 GROUNDING SYSTEM AT MANHOLES AND VAULTS
A. Furnish and install a grounding system at all manholes and vaults accessed as part of this project.
B. Ground rods shall be driven vertically wherever soil and earth conditions permit.
C. Ground rods shall be driven to allow a minimum of 6 inches of cover when driven vertically
D. Ground rods may be driven or laid horizontal if required by soil and earth conditions
1. The contractor shall verify conditions and obtain the Engineer’s approval for angled or horizontal
ground rods before installation.
2. Horizontal ground rods shall have a minimum of 24 inches of cover upon completion of installation.
E. Manhole/Vault grounding systems shall be installed to obtain a maximum resistance of 10 ohms to ground.
1. The contractor shall furnish and install additional ground rods as required to obtain this resistance.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
2. The resistance to ground shall be tested under ‘average’ soil conditions and shall not be tested in
extreme wet or dry soil conditions.
F. Ground wires shall be exothermically welded to ground rods.
G. Ground wires shall be installed in conduit from the ground rod location to the interior manhole/vault
H. Ground wires shall be exothermically welded to a ground bar or plate inside the manhole/vault
I. All exothermic welds shall be made as required by the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.4 BONDING TO GROUND IN MANHOLES/VAULTS
A. Bond all cable armor, cable shields, cable enclosures, cable racking and all conductive exposed materials
and equipment to the ground bar/plate in each manhole/vault.
B. Ground connections to splice enclosures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.
C. Ground wire connections to grounding bar or plate within the manhole shall be either by exothermic weld
or mechanical connectors.
D. All connections (exothermic or mechanical) shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
E. Ground bars and/or plates shall be cleaned and burnished at the connection point to remove any corrosion
before making the bonding connection.
F. Anti-corrosion materials shall be applied between any mechanical connector and the ground rod and/or
plate.
G. All grounding shall be copper to copper or with a like metal approved for outdoor grounding applications.
Dissimilar metals or combinations of metals which will result in corrosion or galvanic reaction shall not be
allowed.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 27 05 30 – PATHWAYS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing raceways as part of a complete and operating telecommunications cabling system.
A. Section 26 05 05, Basic Materials: Fire stop sealing system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. All components of the telecommunications raceway system(s), as specified herein.
1.4 COORDINATION
C. Contractor shall furnish and install the following:
1. Conduits for telecommunications service and distribution.

2. Innerduct in underground conduits and innerduct inside building for fiber optic cable.
3. Conduits, raceways, sleeves, pull boxes, and outlet boxes.
4. Cable tray and all fittings.
5. A #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each spare run of conduit and in each spare run of
innerduct.
6. Outlet boxes, outlet plates, straps, jacks and adapters in wall boxes.
7. Floor boxes, outlet plates, straps, jacks and adapters in floor boxes.
8. Boxes above ceilings, outlet plates, straps, jacks and adapters in boxes above ceiling.
9. Conduits from outlet boxes to above accessible ceilings in corridors (or to accessible location if
ceilings are not accessible).
10. “J” hook cable supports and associated hardware.
11. Firestopping for conduits, cable tray and conduit sleeve penetrations. Contractor shall coordinate
specific requirements with the Electrical Contractor in order to furnish and install a UL Classified
Firestop System at each penetration in rated assemblies.
D. Coordinate location of outlets with the work of other trades prior to rough-in.
E. Coordinate location of raceways with the work of other trades prior to rough-in.
F. Coordinate location of outlets for connection to equipment (fire alarm, elevator controls, automatic
temperature controls, security, etc.) prior to rough-in.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS PATHWAYS FOR 27 05 30 - 1 of 6

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Refer to Section 26 05 30, Raceways, for additional raceway types and requirements.
B. Raceways for interior cabling shall be:

1. In walls and above all inaccessible ceilings: Raceway Specification No. 2.
2. Above accessible ceilings, unless noted otherwise on drawings:
a. Main Pathways: J-Hooks
b. Branch Pathways: J-hooks, or other non-continuous raceway system.
3. Cable Runway within telecommunications spaces: Raceway Specification No. 19.
4. Conduit bodies for telecommunications cabling: Madison Electric SmartLB, or approved equal.
a. Internal radius to accommodate published cable bend radius, in accordance with BICSI
TDMM recommendations.
b. Die-cast aluminum.
c. Suitable for interior, exterior, or plenum installation.
d. Size as required.
2.2 INNERDUCT
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Endot Industries “ENDOCOR/PL”, or Middle Atlantic.
B. Color: Orange.
C. Size(s) as indicated.
D. Corrugated duct, unless noted.
E. Factory installed pull tape
F. Interior, approved for use in air plenums.
G. Exterior, High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
H. All fiber optic backbone cables shall be installed in innerduct.
2.3 J-HOOKS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Erico “Caddy Fastener System – Cable CAT 32 Wide Base Cable Support
System”, or Snake Hook.
B. Specifically designed for category rated and fiber optic cables.
C. 2 inch diameter loop.
D. Wide base.
E. Steel construction.
F. With mounting hardware as required by mounting location and surface.
G. Brackets for ganging multiple hooks at a single location where more than one hook is required.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
2.4 DUCT PLUGS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Tyco Electronics Jack Moon Series, or as approved.
B. Blank, simplex, triplex, quadplex or custom plug configurations for conduits with installed cables.
C. High impact plastic compression plates.
D. Elastic expansion gaskets.
E. Constructed of corrosive resistant materials.
F. Blank plugs shall have high-impact plastic compression hardware with pull tape tie loop on back
compression plate.
G. Cable entry seals shall be split design for retrofit and addition of cables.
H. Cable entry seals shall have stainless steel compression hardware.
I. Size and configuration as required by application.
J. Furnish and install duct plugs at all conduit entrances and exits in manholes, building entrances and at
stub-ups to telephone poles.
1. Furnish and install blank duct plugs in unused conduit and innerduct.
2. Furnish and install cable entry seal duct plugs in conduit and innerduct containing cables.
K. Furnish and install cable entry seals with all required accessories, including but not limited to bushing
sleeves and hole plugs.
L. Pull tapes shall be fed through and captured by cable entry seal duct plugs.
2.5 OUTLET BOXES
A. Refer to Section 26 05 40, Boxes, for box types and requirements.
B. Unless noted otherwise, outlet boxes shall be Box Specification No. 1. Masonry boxes shall not be used
for telecommunications outlets.
C. Furnish and install recessed boxes for wall mount telecommunications outlets as follows:
1. 4-11/16 inches x 4-11/16 inches square, 2-1/8 inches deep.
2. Single or double gang plaster ring as required by outlet type.
3. Plaster ring depth sized for wall type.
D. Furnish and install fittings for surface mount telecommunications outlets as follows:
1. Single or double gang raceway adapter as required by outlet and raceway type.
2. Items, as required, for installation of jacks and blanks, as specified in Section 26 05 40.
E. Furnish and install floor boxes for floor-mount telecommunications outlets as follows:
1. Floor Box Spec No. 39.
2. Flush mount floor box adapters and plates, as specified herein and as required by floor box make
and type.
3. Brackets and adapter plates, as required, for installation of jacks and connectors.
4. Conduit(s) as required.
F. Furnish and install recessed boxes for ceiling mount telecommunications outlets as follows:

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS

3. Plaster ring depth sized for ceiling type.
4. Tile bridge to support ceiling mount back boxes, faceplates and connections.
G. Furnish and install boxes for above ceiling telecommunications outlets as follows:
3. 4 inch L-bracket or other approved hardware for attaching box to beam clamp.
4. Beam clamp or other approved hardware for attaching box to structure above ceiling.
H. Furnish and install outlet boxes for equipment connections as follows:

1. 6 inches x 6 inches x 4 inches square NEMA 1 enclosure.
2. Minimum 1 inch conduit between NEMA 1 enclosure and equipment enclosure. Increase conduit
size if needed to enclose additional connections.
3. Surface mount box
a. 1 or 2 port as required, refer to Drawings for cable and connector type and quantity.
b. To match manufacturer of connectors and faceplates. Refer to Section 27 15 45, Faceplates
and Connectors – Telecommunications Systems.
I. Furnish and install from each outlet box a minimum 1 inch conduit run concealed in floor and/or wall to
above accessible ceiling and stub out. Install larger conduit as indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. All raceways, boxes and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of
available space in coordination with other uses. All raceways and associated hardware shall be
placed so as to not impair the use or capacity of other building systems, equipment, or hardware
placed by others (or existing).
2. All raceways shall be installed as required in Section 26 05 30, Raceways.
3. All boxes shall be installed as required in Section 26 05 40, Boxes.
4. Unless noted otherwise, category rated cables shall be installed in separate raceways than other
systems cables.
5. Wiring above accessible ceilings may be installed in cable tray or on J-hooks as indicated herein.
6. Installation of cable pathways shall allow for easily access for addition and removal of cables in the
future.
7. Installation of pathways and cables shall be planned for future installation of ceilings below tops of
interior walls, whether or not indicated on the Architectural drawings. Pathways and cable runs
shall be coordinated with Owner before installation.
8. Do not attach raceways to pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. Do not attach to wires used for supporting
suspended ceilings.
9. The use of tie-wires or bridle rings is not acceptable for cable pathways or supports.
10. Cable pathways shall be installed to ensure that it is possible to install cables to have a minimum
bending radius greater than 10 times cable diameter.
11. Open cable pathways (e.g. cable trays and J-hooks) shall not be placed near power sources or
other items where interference could develop. Open cable pathways shall be installed so that

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
cables are not placed within 18 inches of light fixtures and within 3 feet of motors, transformers,
copy machines, or solid state motor starters unless cable is installed in grounded conduit.
Contractor shall furnish and install a grounding conduit system where these minimum clearances
cannot be maintained.
12. Furnish and install a #14 jet line or #232 pull rope in all raceways. Pull lines and pull tapes in
occupied conduits and cable shall be installed after all cable is pulled. Pull lines and pull tapes
installed with or used for pulling cables are not acceptable.
13. Cable raceways and pathways shall be documented on the Project Record Documents.
B. Raceways
1. Furnish and install sleeves as indicated on Drawings and as required to install all
telecommunications and system cables. Refer to drawing details for additional conduit sleeve
requirements.
2. Unless noted otherwise, furnish and install sleeves through all wall penetrations to continue cable
pathways.
3. Furnish and install a minimum of one 1-1/2 inch conduit sleeve to each room. Install sleeve in wall
above door if possible, allowing for future installation of ceilings. Furnish and install additional 1-1/2
inch conduit sleeves as required based on quantity of cables to be installed.
4. Furnish and install hardware as required to attach raceways (including J-hooks) to building
structure. Telecommunications cable support systems shall not be attached to or supported by
conduits, boxes, pipe, ceiling support systems or the work of other trades, other than the building
structure. Cables shall not be directly supported by the work of other trades or building structure.
5. Furnish and install continuous conduit from slab on grade floor boxes to the associated
consolidation point. Refer to Section 27 15 10, Horizontal Distribution Cabling –
Telecommunications Systems and Section 27 15 45, Faceplates and Connectors –
Telecommunications Systems for additional requirements for the consolidation point(s).
C. Innerduct
1. All interior fiber optic cables shall be installed in innerduct.

a. All interior fiber cables shall be installed in innerduct to within 12 inches maximum of
termination enclosure.
b. Install pullboxes, 12 inches x 12 inches minimum, as required to limit cable pulls to two (2)
90 degree bends or 150 feet.
c. Innerduct shall not be kinked or tightly bent in any way.
2. All exterior fiber optic cables shall be installed in innerduct.
a. Innerduct shall be installed in conduits containing fiber optic cables.
b. Furnish and install two (2) 1-1/4 inch innerduct and two (2) 1 inch innerduct in underground
4” conduits with fiber optic cables.
D. J-Hooks
1. Furnish and install hanger brackets/assemblies/loops as required to support all data and voice
cable at no greater than 48 inches with no greater than 3 inches sag between supports.
2. Do not install more than 50 cables per hook.
3. All wiring in the J-hook fasteners shall be securely clamped using the plenum rated tie-wrap Erico
part number” CATTRC”, number as required.
4. J-hooks shall only support data and voice cabling. No other cabling (i.e.; HVAC control, video, fire
alarm, sound, power, etc.) shall be supported by these systems.
5. Furnish and install multiple runs of J-hooks along pathways which will have greater than 40
category rated cables.
E. Outlet Box
1. Mounting Heights
a. Install system components at the following mounting heights. Coordinate location and
mounting heights of all outlets with Owner and Architect prior to rough-in.
1) Data and Telephone Wall Outlets: 18 inches above finished floor.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
2) Data and Telephone Wall Outlets, Above Counter: 6 inches above counter
backsplash. Install horizontally at same height if vertical installation is not possible.
Coordinate these conditions with Architect prior to rough-in.
3) Wireless Access Point Outlets: Install above ceiling at location shown attached to
structure with 4 inch mounting angle and beam clamp or other detachable
attachment method.
4) Equipment Outlets: Coordinate with contractor responsible for furnishing and
installing the system.
2. Contractor shall coordinate locations of telecommunications outlet boxes with boxes and devices to
be installed for other systems.
3. Unless noted otherwise, all interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No.
2, one inch minimum. Furnish and install conduit from each outlet box to above accessible ceiling
and turn out. Where an outlet is in an area without an accessible ceiling, the contractor shall
continue the conduit from above the outlet to an area of accessible ceiling.
4. Coordinate location of outlets for equipment connections to elevator controls with General
Contractor. Coordinate location of outlets for equipment connections to automatic temperature
control and building automation systems with Mechanical or HVAC Contractor. Install outlets for
equipment connections adjacent to equipment enclosures. Outlet enclosures shall be connected to
equipment enclosures with conduit where possible. Where warranty of equipment does not allow
this conduit connection directly to the equipment enclosure, the conduit shall be installed to within 3
inches of enclosure and the conduit and opening in the equipment enclosure shall have bushings
installed.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 11 10 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES, EQUIPMENT AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing equipment and fittings as part of a complete and operating telecommunications cabling system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Racks, cabinets and enclosures.

2. Cable management hardware.
3. Patch panels, all types.
4. Punch down blocks.
5. Optical fiber termination enclosures, rack and wall mount.
6. Optical fiber connectors.
7. Surge protection devices.
8. For each cable and equipment cabinet and rack, prior to construction, the vendor shall develop and
submit, for approval by Architect, the elevation of the front of each cable and equipment cabinet
and rack.
9. For each telecommunications space, prior to construction, develop and submit, for approval by
Architect, drawings of each telecom room indicating layout of all items of equipment including
layout of racks, cabinets, blocks, rings, cross connects, backboards, etc., and ceiling supports for
and routing of all cables (including CATV equipment where applicable).
1.3 COORDINATION
1. Racks
2. Cabinets
3. Patch panels
4. Cable management panels.
5. Building entrance terminal and protectors.
6. Fiber optic termination enclosures.
7. Fiber optic connectors.
8. Fiber optic cable management.
9. Plywood backboards.
10. Primary and secondary building entrance protection
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES 27 11 10 - 1 of 8

EQUIPMENT AND FITTINGS
11. Surge protection devices

12. Power circuits to telecommunications spaces and equipment.
D. Unless noted otherwise, the following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:

E. All products shall be provided and installation shall be completed in accordance with Owner’s current
telecommunication standards.
F. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s network and computer equipment personnel for specific
instructions before starting Work.
G. Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor for location and type of blocking to be installed in
the walls to support wall mounted equipment.
H. Contractor shall coordinate location of electrical receptacles to be installed on raceways, racks or inside
cabinets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE RUNWAY – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise, CPI, or Eaton B-Line.
B. Type: Cable tray, cable runway type
C. UL Classified and Listed.
D. Rung Spacing: 9 inches on centers.
E. Loading Depth:
1. 4 inch bundles attached to cable runway.

2. For loading depths greater than 4 inches, contractor shall furnish and install vertical cable retaining
posts.
F. Furnish and install all connectors and fittings, as required. Where cables drop out of the cable tray, “drop-
out” fittings shall be furnished and installed.
G. Cable tray shall be approved as a ground conductor or ground conductor clamps shall be furnished and
installed for each section with appropriate sized ground wire between sections.
H. Width as indicated on Drawings.
I. Material: Steel.
J. Finish: Black powder coat
2.2 PUNCH DOWN BLOCKS
A. Punch down blocks shall be 110-type with wall-mount legs. Punch down blocks shall be rated for Category
6. The contractor shall furnish and install blocks and connecting clips to terminate all telephone pairs

(backbone and horizontal distribution) in each telecommunications space. Include 25 percent spare
capacity (space and connecting clips) on all horizontal distribution punch down blocks in each closet.
B. 110-type Punch Down Blocks
1. 25-pair, 50-pair and 100-pair wiring blocks, wall mounted

a. For copper telephone backbone cables
b. 110-type with wall-mount legs
c. Material: Polycarbonate UL 94 V-O
d. Accepts Solid or Stranded 26-22 AWG copper conductors
2. Connecting clips
a. 5-pair for backbone applications, unless noted otherwise
b. 4-pair for horizontal distribution applications, unless noted otherwise
c. Category rated to match category rating of cable as required by application.
d. Material: Polycarbonate UL 94 V-O
e. Insulation Displacement Contacts
1) Contact material: Phosphor bronze
2) Contact Plating: Tin/lead solder
3) Accepts solid or 7 conductor stranded 26-22 AWG copper conductors
C. Furnish and install punch down blocks with labels and label holders.
D. Furnish and install protective covers for punch down blocks. Cover colors shall be as follows:
1. Demarcation point – Orange

2. First level backbone – White
3. Second level backbone – Gray
4. Campus backbone – Brown
5. Network connections – Blue
6. Connection to telephone equipment – Purple
7. Horizontal distribution – Blue
8. Alarms, security, building automation systems – Yellow
9. Connections for fire alarm and life safety systems – Red
E. Furnish and install block accessories and cable management accessories including “D”-rings, spools and
clamps to manage all cables, cross-connects and patch cords.
F. Furnish and install blocks and connecting clips to terminate telephone pairs (backbone, horizontal
distribution and cross-connect from building entrance protectors and telephone equipment) in each
telecommunications space.
G. Furnish and install 25% spare capacity, block space and connecting clips on all horizontal distribution
punch down blocks in each closet.
2.3 PATCH PANELS
A. UTP Patch Panels (Category 6)
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell “NEXTSPEED” Series, or Leviton, Siemon, Ortronics.

2. 48-port and 24-port as indicated on Drawings.
3. Non-keyed, unshielded, 4-pair
4. 8-position, 8-wire (RJ-45)
5. Accommodates T568A and T5698B wiring
6. Nose Contacts:

a. Beryllium copper with a minimum of 50-micro inch gold plating over nickel under plating.
7. Insulation displacement terminals.
a. 110 blocks: Polycarbonate.
b. Jack Contacts: Phosphor bronze with 100 micro-inch tin lead 60/40 over nickel under
plating.
c. Terminates 22-24 AWG solid conductors.
8. Minimum Contact Force: 100 grams with FCC compliant 8-position plug
9. Mating Cycles: 2000+ with FCC compliant 8-position plug.
10. Component Performance shall meet ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 component requirements.
11. Panel shall be constructed of 14 gage steel, rolled edge construction with black powder coat finish.
Panel shall be standard 19 inch rack mount.
2.4 FIBER OPTIC RACK MOUNT ENCLOSURE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell FCR Series, or Leviton, Siemon, Ortronics.
B. “Technician’s Side” for securing, storing slack, arranging and securing the fiber optic cable.
C. “User’s Side” with same features for management of fiber optic patch cords.
D. Quick release latches.
E. Locking.
F. Patch cord tie-down features.
G. Tinted, removable Plexiglas cover.
H. 16 gage cold rolled steel construction.
I. Black powder coat finish.
J. Accepts adapter panels as specified herein. Furnish and install type as specified and quantity as required.
K. Blank panels furnished and installed to close all unused adapter space(s).
2.5 FIBER OPTIC ADAPTER PANELS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell “FSP” Series, or Leviton, Siemon, Ortronics.
B. For installation in the fiber optic rack mount enclosure and in the fiber optic patch panels.
C. Single and multi-mode applications.
D. Standard density version, 6 adapter capacity.
E. Loaded with LC style fiber optic connectors.
F. Quick, snap-in installation.
2.6 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Corning Cable System or Hubbell Premise.
B. Style and finish to match Owner’s existing network.

C. Pre-polished or splice on type.
D. Singlemode and multimode connectors for data network cable shall be duplex connectors.
E. Singlemode connectors for telephone and CATV backbone cable shall be simplex connectors.
F. Zirconia ceramic ferrule, PC radiused or UPC radiused as directed by Owner.
G. TIZ/EIA-568-B.3 compliant.
H. Strain relief boot.
2.7 FLOOR MOUNT RACKS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise, or CPI, Homaco, Eaton B-Line, Middle Atlantic.
B. Extruded aluminum construction, black finish.
C. 19 inches mounting width by 84 inches height with 16 inch full width base. 500 lb. static weight capacity.
D. Double sided 12/24 tapped holes, 5/8 inch, 5/8 inch, 1/2 inch EIA standard hole pattern, pre-threaded
holes, 45 rack mount units.
E. 6 inch deep mounting rails.
F. Furnish and install vertical wire management channels on both side of rack, type as specified.
G. Furnish and install horizontal wire management units, quantity and type as specified.
H. Furnish and install ground terminal block/lug for each rack and #6 ground wire to room ground bus bar.
2.8 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGERS
A. Vertical Cable Manager Specification No. 1
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise, Eaton B-Line, or CPI Double Sided Wide Vertical
Cable Section.
2. For use with Floor Mount Racks
3. 7 feet height, 6 inch width, 12 inch depth (nominal).
4. Material: Steel channel and cover. Steel channel shall have coated grommet material on exposed
edges.
5. Black finish.
6. Universal mounting hole pattern.
7. Pass through holes, front to rear.
8. Integral cable latches.
9. Furnish and install with front and rear steel cover.
2.9 HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise, Eaton B-Line, or CPI.
B. 19 inch rack mount steel panel.

C. Front and rear finger type manager.
D. Pass through knock outs in panel.
E. Hinged front and rear cover.
F. 1 or 2 rack units high as indicated on Drawings.
G. Black finish.
H. Furnish and install a horizontal cable management unit beneath each patch panel in each rack.
2.10 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS
A. 3/4 inch plywood, size as indicated for plywood backboards in Part 3 – Plywood Backboards.
B. 3-5 ply, 3-layer interior C-D plugged grade or better as defined by the National Institute of Standards and
Technology Voluntary Product Standard PS1-07.
2.11 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Leviton Model 5500-192, or approved equal.
B. Furnish and install one 19 inch rack mount multi-outlet power strip with surge protection in each rack and
cabinet.
C. Strip shall have ten rear-mounted receptacles and two front-mounted receptacles.
D. Strip shall be rated for 20 Amps load current.
E. Each receptacle shall provide normal mode (L-N) and common mode (L-G, N-G) protection.
F. On/Off rocker switch.
G. Outlet polarity/ground status LED diagnostics.
H. Re-settable overload circuit breaker.
I. 12 feet length power supply load.
J. Unit shall continue to provide power if protection is lost.
K. UL listed, 1449, 2nd edition.
L. Tested to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 for categories A & B.
M. Maximum continuous operating Voltage – 135V.
N. Clamping performance as follows, for normal mode (common mode in parenthesis):
1. Maximum single pulse transient current (8 x 20 µs, amps peak), 33,000 A (26,000 A).
2. EMI/RFI noise rejection at 50 ohms 5 KHz; 100 KHz; 50-60dB (30-40dB).
3. CAT A ring wave (6 KV, 200A, 100 KHz); 190V.
4. CAT B ring wave (6 KV, 500A, 100 KHz); 210V.
5. CAT B impulse (6 KV, 3KVA, 8 x 20 µs); 310V.
6. UL 1449 ratings (8 x 20 µs at 500A) (L-N/L-G/N-G); 330/330/330 volts

2.12 BUILDING ENTRANCE PROTECTORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: TII Technologies, Anixter, .
B. 25-pair, 50-pair and 100-pair as required by application.
C. Housing and cover constructed of 18 gage steel, epoxy powder coated.
D. Input and output terminations shall be 110 type.
E. Protector Modules:
1. 5-pin module.
2. Solid state heat coil.
3. Tin/lead alloy plated contact over spring tempered phosphor base metal.
4. 240V rated.
5. Clamping time less than 5 nanoseconds.
6. Furnish and install quantities sufficient for protecting all incoming and outgoing pairs.
7. Furnish 5 spares per protector.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All termination hardware shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures.
B. All hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space in coordination with other uses.
All wiring and associated hardware shall be placed so as to not impair the use or capacity of other building
systems, equipment, or hardware placed by others (or existing).
C. Hardware shall be installed as to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or
maintenance purposes such as access boxes, equipment, mechanical equipment access doors and
covers, switches or electrical panels, and lighting fixtures. Hardware shall be installed to maintain a
minimum 36 inch working clearances in the front and rear of all racks and cabinets wherever possible.
D. Contractor shall install electrical receptacles on racks, cable runways or inside cabinets. Electrical
receptacles serving racks and cabinets shall be installed on the racks as shown on Drawings as indicated
on Drawings.
E. Contractor shall attach all floor mount racks and cabinets to building structure with hardware as required
by manufacturer, 3/8 inch hardware minimum. Furnish and install seismic rated hardware where required
by local codes. Furnish and install raised floor mounting kits where racks and cabinets are installed on
raised floors.
F. Contractor shall attach all wall mount racks and cabinets to building structure with hardware as required by
the manufacturer. All wall mount racks and cabinets shall be mounted on plywood backboards. Wall
mount racks and cabinets on gypsum wall board walls shall be attached through the plywood and fastened
to wood studs or wood blocking in the wall.
G. Rack configurations indicated on Drawings are typical and may not reflect final installation in all
telecommunications spaces. Contractor shall coordinate final rack layouts with fiber termination
enclosures, patch panels, wire management panels, equipment and equipment to be furnished and
installed by the Owner prior to installation.
H. Punch down blocks shall be mounted on plywood backboard.

I. Contractor is responsible for obtaining minimum loss and reflectance in fiber connections and polishing in
accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. The contractor may fusion splice factory terminated
pigtails to obtain the fiber optic connector performance required. Contractor shall furnish and install splice
trays, splice tray holders, enclosures, splice protection, etc. for installation of spliced pigtails. Fiber
connectors shall be as specified herein. Fiber pigtails shall be manufactured with fiber optic performance
characteristics as indicated in Section 27 13 10, Backbone Cabling – Telecommunications Systems.
Contractor shall provide additional racks and cabinets as required to accommodate splice enclosures.
J. Backbone termination blocks shall be situated on the left side of the wall mount termination field.
Horizontal distribution cables shall be situated on the right side of the wall mount termination field.
K. Furnish and install quantity of Velcro wraps as required for proper cable bundling, organization and
support. Plastic or nylon cable ties will not be accepted for use on any category rated cable.
L. Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor for placement of blocking in walls where wall mount
cabinets are to be installed.
M. Furnish and install 3/4 inch wide hook and loop fasteners to bundle all cables in telecommunications
spaces and other areas of telecommunications cable termination, minimum 8 inches in length; provide by
Panduit or HellermanTyton.
N. All copper wires of each cable of every type system entering a building shall be provided with proper surge
and current protection where it enters (and exits) the building as close to the entrance and exit point as
possible.
O. Contractor shall install cards and connections as required to connect UPS systems to the Owner’s network
equipment. The contractor shall program and configure the UPS system to operate on the Owner’s
network. The Contractor shall coordinate installation, configuration, network and IP addresses, etc. with
the Owner as required.
3.2 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS
A. Plywood backboards shall be installed on three walls of telecommunications rooms up to 12 feet by 12

feet.
B. Plywood backboards in larger spaces shall be installed as indicated on Drawings.
C. Plywood backboards shall be installed from corner to corner with no gaps between boards. Plywood
backboards shall be attached across a minimum of three wall studs. Install plywood backboards in a
horizontal orientation where possible to span more than three wall studs.
D. Where plywood backboards smaller than 8 foot by 4 foot are indicated, the minimum size shall be 4 foot by
4 foot and shall be installed to span across three wall studs.
E. Install plywood backboards in telecommunications rooms at 12 inches AFF to the bottom edge of the
backboard and 108 inches to the top edge of the backboard.
F. Plywood backboards in telecommunications spaces shall be painted front and back and all edges with two
coats of white fire retardant paint.
G. Plywood backboards in areas other than telecommunications spaces shall be painted front and back and
all edges with two coats of fire retardant paint. Coordinate paint color with Architect.

SECTION 27 15 10 – HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLING – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing horizontal distribution cabling as part of a complete and operational telecommunications cabling
system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Components of the telecommunications system, as specified herein.
1.3 COORDINATION
1. Copper cables.
2. Fiber optic cables.
3. Pathways as defined in Section 27 05 30, Pathways for Telecommunications System.
1.4 CABLE TESTING
and the Manufacturer’s Information affixed to the wire and cable as specified in Section 26 05 05, Basic
Materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE – GENERAL
A. Unless noted otherwise, all cable shall be constructed with solid copper conductors.
B. Four-pair UTP cable jacket shall be color coded as follows:
1. Voice –White
2. Data –Blue
C. Marking and labeling systems for cable shall comply with UL 969 standard for legibility, defacement and
adhesive characteristics.
D. All horizontal distribution cable shall be of the same manufacturer.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION 27 15 10 - 1 of 5

CABLING -
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
E. All horizontal distribution cable shall be plenum rated.
F. Horizontal distribution cable for telephone system, shall be Category 6.
G. Horizontal distribution cable for data network system (including wireless access point locations) shall be
Category 6.
H. Horizontal distribution cable for slab on grade floor boxes and/or installed through slab on-grade conduit
shall be outside plant rated (OSP) Category 6. OSP rated Cat6 cable shall be installed from the slab on
grade floor box or other type of box to a consolidation point installed above the accessible ceiling. Refer to
Section 27 05 30, Pathways for Telecommunications System and Section 27 15 45, Faceplates and
Connectors - Telecommunications Systems for additional requirements for the consolidation point(s).
I. Horizontal distribution cable for CATV system shall be Series 6 Coaxial. Refer to Section 27 59 10,
Television System – CATV.
J. Horizontal distribution cable for equipment connections to (including Automatic Temperature

Control/Building Automation System, Fire Alarm, Security/Access Control) shall be Category 6.
2.2 CATEGORY 6 (Cat 6) CABLE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell Premise C6RPB, or CommScope, Berk-Tek, Mohawk, General Cable.
B. Construction: Four (4) unshielded twisted pair (UTP).
C. Conductors:
1. Plenum: 23 AWG solid copper.

2. Riser: 24 AWG solid copper.
D. Insulation:
1. Plenum: FEP.
2. Riser: PE.
E. Jacket: Flame Retardant PVC.
F. Nominal Capacitance: 5.6 nF/100m.
G. Nominal Input Impedance: 100 ohm.
H. Maximum DC Resistance: 9.5 ohm/100 m.
I. Nominal Velocity of Propagation:
1. Plenum: 71 percent.
2. Riser: 67 percent.
J. Propagation Delay: </= 5.45 ns/m.
K. Specified Frequency: 250 MHz
L. Maximum Skew: </= 45 ns/100m
M. Electrical Performance:

CABLING -
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
Attenuatio NEXT ACR PSELFEX PSACR RL

Frequenc n dB dB/100m PSNEXT T dB ELFEXT dB
y dB/100m (min.) (min.) dB (min.) dB (min.) (min.) dB/100m (min.)
1.0 2.0 74.3 72.3 72.3 64.8 70.3 67.8 20.0
4.0 3.8 65.3 61.5 63.3 52.7 59.5 55.8 23.0
8.0 5.3 60.8 55.5 58.8 46.7 53.4 49.7 24.5
10.0 6.0 59.3 56.4 57.3 44.8 51.3 47.8 25.0
16.0 7.6 56.2 48.7 54.2 40.7 46.7 43.7 25.0
20.0 8.5 54.8 46.4 52.8 38.8 44.3 41.8 25.0
25.0 9.5 53.3 43.8 51.3 36.8 41.8 39.8 24.3
31.25 10.7 51.9 41.2 49.9 34.9 39.2 37.9 23.6
62.5 15.4 47.4 32.0 45.4 28.8 30.0 31.9 21.5
100.0 19.8 44.3 24.5 42.3 24.8 22.5 27.8 23.0
155.0 25.2 41.4 16.2 39.4 21.0 14.2 24.0 18.8
200.0 29.0 42.8 10.7 37.8 18.8 8.7 21.8 18.0
250.0 32.8 41.4 8.6 39.4 20.0 6.5 23.0 17.5
2.3 CATEGORY 6, OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP) RATED CABLE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell Premise C6OSPB, or CommScope, Berk-Tek, Mohawk, General

Cable.
B. Construction: Four (4) unshielded twisted pair (UTP).
C. Conductors: 23 AWG solid copper.
D. Insulation: PE.
E. Jacket: Flooded PE.
F. Nominal Capacitance: 4.6 nF/100m.
G. Nominal Input Impedance: 100 ohm
H. Maximum DC Resistance: 8.16 ohm/100m.
I. Nominal Velocity of Propagation: 62 percent
J. Specified Frequency: 250 MHz
K. Maximum Skew: </= 45 ns/100m
L. Electrical Performance:
NEXT ACR PSACR RL

Attenuation dB dB/100m PSNEXT PSELFEXT dB ELFEXT dB
Frequency dB/100m (min.) (min.) dB (min.) dB (min.) (min.) dB/100m (min.)
1.0 2.0 74.3 72.3 72.3 65.8 70.3 64.8 23.0
4.0 3.8 65.3 61.5 63.3 53.7 59.5 52.8 23.0
8.0 5.3 60.8 55.4 58.8 47.7 53.4 46.7 24.5
10.0 6.0 59.3 53.3 57.3 45.8 51.3 44.8 25.0
16.0 7.6 56.2 48.7 54.2 41.7 46.7 40.7 25.0
20.0 8.5 54.8 46.3 52.8 39.7 44.3 38.8 25.0
25.0 9.5 53.3 43.8 51.3 37.8 41.8 36.8 24.3
31.25 10.7 51.9 41.2 49.9 35.9 39.2 34.9 23.6

CABLING -
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
NEXT ACR PSACR RL

Attenuation dB dB/100m PSNEXT PSELFEXT dB ELFEXT dB
Frequency dB/100m (min.) (min.) dB (min.) dB (min.) (min.) dB/100m (min.)
62.5 15.4 47.4 32.0 45.4 29.8 33.0 28.9 23.0
100.0 19.8 44.3 24.5 42.3 25.8 22.5 24.8 23.0
155.0 25.2 41.4 16.3 39.4 21.9 14.3 21.0 18.8
200.0 29.0 39.8 10.8 37.8 19.7 8.8 18.8 18.0
250.0 32.8 41.4 8.6 39.4 20.0 6.5 23.0 17.5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All cable and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space in
coordination with other uses. All cable and associated hardware shall be placed so as to not impair the use
or capacity of other building systems, equipment, or hardware placed by others (or existing).
B. Where cable is placed in ceiling areas or other non-exposed areas, cables shall be installed in cable trays
or in non-continuous cable support system. Non-continuous cable supports shall be placed at random
intervals no greater than 48 inches. Cables in non-continuous support systems shall be bundled using
hook and loop type fasteners. Cable sag between supports shall not exceed 3 inches. Attaching wire to
pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. Cables shall not be bundled or tied in conduits, and in
cable trays above ceilings.
C. All cabling shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or
maintenance purposes such as access boxes, network equipment, mechanical equipment access doors
and covers, switches or electrical panels, and lighting fixtures. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above
or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow other cables to enter the conduit/riser at a later
time by maintaining a working distance from these openings. All cable shall be installed to allow for simple
installation and removal of cables in the future.
D. Unless noted, all interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2, one inch
minimum. Wiring above accessible ceilings may be installed in cable tray and exposed on "J" hooks.
E. All cables not in raceways shall be riser or plenum rated.
F. All cables running outside the building shall be rated for outside plant installation.
G. All horizontal distribution cable for slab on grade floor boxes shall be OSP rated. OSP cable shall be
installed from slab on grade floor box in underfloor conduit, rise up in wall, and terminate in consolidation
point above accessible ceiling. Indoor rated cabling shall be used from consolidation point back to nearest
MDF/IDF.
H. Backbone cables shall be grouped separately from horizontal distribution cables. Cable for other systems
shall be grouped separately from cables for telephone and data.
I. All inside cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using cable tray and "J" hooks
supported from building structure. Do not attach to pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. Do not allow cable to rest on
pipes, conduits, ducts, ceiling tiles, etc. Do not attach to wires used for supporting suspended ceilings. Do
not use tie wires or bridle rings.
J. All wires shall be marked at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and terminations. Each cable
run between terminating locations shall be one continuous cable (no splices or connections).
K. Install cable in such a manner as to prevent stretching, kinking or sharp bends. Cable damaged during
installation or not passing required testing shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.

CABLING -
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
L. Replace or rework cables showing evidence of improper handling including stretches, kinks, short radius
bends, over tightened bindings, loosely twisted and over twisted pairs at terminations, and too much jacket
removed.
M. Minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension for all cables shall be maintained during and after
installation. Install cable in accordance with manufacturer's ratings and instructions.
N. Cables shall not be installed near power sources or other items where interference could develop. Cables
shall not be placed within 18 inches of light fixtures and within 3 feet of motors, transformers, copy
machines, or solid state motor starters unless cable is installed in conduit. Contractor shall furnish and
install a grounding conduit system where these minimum clearances cannot be maintained.
O. In telecommunications spaces, cables shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or corners
to ensure that adequate wall or backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for
cable terminations. Cables shall not be tie-wrapped to existing electrical conduit or other equipment.
Minimum bend radius shall be observed.
P. Dress and attach cables to the backboard along the shortest possible route run square (horizontal and
vertical) to the backboard. Bundle similarly routed cables together and attach by means of clamps or
distribution rings. Cable dress and attachment shall minimize obstruction to future installations of
equipment, backboard, or other cables.
Q. Cables shall be neatly bundled with hook and loop type fasteners. Nylon tire wraps are not acceptable.
Cables must be neatly bundled in the telecommunications spaces and at the cable service loop.
R. Cable service loops shall be provided at both ends of cable runs.
1. At the telecommunications room, provide a minimum 8 foot service loop stored in a figure eight
pattern in the cable tray above the racks/cabinets.
2. At the telecommunications room, provide sufficient slack to properly dress and terminate cables at
the racks and cabinets.
a. Provide sufficient slack so that swing gate type racks and cabinets can open fully
b. Provide sufficient slack so that cables do not catch or bind at swing gate type rack or
cabinet hinge and the cables do not pull taught across the hinge or edge.
3. At outlet locations provide 10 feet of slack stored at the last cable support.
4. At wireless access point outlets installed above accessible ceiling, provide 20 feet of slack stored at
the outlet.
S. Any damage to Owner’s existing cabling or existing cable owned by others, caused as a result of work
performed under this scope, shall be brought to the Owner’s attention and be repaired or replaced within
48 hours.
T. Contractor shall use only cable lubricants recommended by the manufacturer for use with the specific
cable construction.
U. Should a cable become kinked, skinned or stretched during installation, the cable shall be removed and
replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Splicing at points other than those specified will not be
acceptable.

CABLING -
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 15 45 – FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing telecommunications outlets, faceplates and connectors as part of a complete and functional
telecommunications system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 COORDINATION
C. Refer to Section 26 05 30, Raceways and Section 26 05 40, Boxes for raceway and boxes to be furnished
and installed for telecommunications outlets.
D. Contractor shall furnish and install the following:
1. Jacks, wallplates and connectors, both copper and fiber.
E. Unless noted, the following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:

F. Contact the Owner’s network and computer equipment personnel for specific instructions before starting
Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. All devices specified herein shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Superior, Siemon, or Leviton.
B. Manufacturers listed below are basis of design, meant to indicate representative level of quality.
2.2 WALL PLATES
A. Telecom Wall Plate Specification No. 1 – Flush Mount for Keystone Type Modular Jacks and Inserts
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS 27 15 45 - 1 of 4

- TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell “IFP” Series, or Superior Modular Products.

2. For mounting on wall boxes.
3. Faceplate, jacks and inserts shall be of the same manufacturer.
4. Supports both fiber and copper applications.
5. UL 94 V-O rated flames retardant material.
6. One, two, three, four or six port faceplates as indicated on Drawings.
7. Single gang or double gang as indicated on Drawings.
8. Quantity of and configuration of jacks and inserts as indicated on Drawings.
9. Label insets with clear label covers.
10. Face plate labels.
11. Blank inserts in all unused port locations.
12. Color as selected by Architect.
B. Telecom Wall Plate Specification No. 6 – Surface Mount Outlet Box
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell ISM Series.

2. For use as outlets for communications connections to elevator, building automation system,
security system, fire alarm system and other systems equipment.
3. Quantity of ports as required by outlet configuration.
4. High impact, flame-retardant polymer base and cover.
5. Accepts keystone type modular jacks.
6. Jack quantity and type as required by outlet configuration.
7. Jack flush with face of outlet box.
8. Outlet box labels.
2.3 MODULAR JACKS AND ADAPTERS
A. Jacks, Cat 6
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell NEXTSPEED Category 6 Series Jacks, or Superior Modular

Products.
2. Non-keyed, Unshielded, 4-pair.
3. 8-position, 8-wire (RJ-45).
4. Accommodates T568A and T5698B wiring.
5. Accepts 6-position modular plug for telephone use.
6. Useable bandwidth: 500 MHz.
7. Nose Contacts:
a. Beryllium copper with a minimum of 50-micro inch gold plating over nickel under plating.
8. Insulation displacement terminals.
a. 110 blocks: Polycarbonate.
b. Jack Contacts: Phosphor bronze with 100 micro-inc tin lead 60/40 over nickel under plating.
c. Terminates 22-24 AWG solid conductors.
9. Minimum Contact Force: 100 grams with FCC compliant 8-position plug
10. Jack Color:
a. Data: Blue
b. Telephone: White
B. Duplex LC Fiber Optic Adapter Module

SYSTEMS
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: To match outlet plates.

2. For data network cable applications
3. For use with PC and Ultra PC connectors.
4. Alignment Sleeve:
a. Multimode: Phosphor bronze.
b. Singlemode: Zirconia Ceramic.
5. Adapter Color:
a. Multimode: Beige.
b. Singlemode: Blue.
6. Module Plate Color (where applicable): To match outlet plates.
C. Blank Inserts
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: To match outlet plates.

2. Color to match outlet plates.
2.4 CONSOLIDATION POINT
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Punch Down Blocks: As indicated in Section 27 11 10, Telecommunications Spaces Equipment

and fittings.
2. Enclosures: as indicated in Section 26 05 40, Boxes.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install consolidation points at locations indicated on the Drawings and as
required where floor box outlets are installed on slab on grade floor construction.
C. Refer to Section 27 05 30, Pathways for Telecommunications Systems and Section 27 15 10, Horizontal
Distribution Cabling - Telecommunications Systems for additional requirements for the consolidation
point(s).
D. The consolidation point(s) shall be used to interconnect between outside plant rated cables and indoor
rated cables.
E. The consolidation point(s) shall be comprised of punch down blocks mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure
installed above the ceiling.
F. The enclosure shall meet the requirement of Box Specification No. 4.
G. The enclosure shall be sized as required to mount the punch down blocks, accommodate the quantity of
cables to be terminated, and accept the quantity of conduits connected from slab on grade floor box
outlets. Minimum enclosure size shall be 14 inches wide by 12 inches high by 6 inches deep.
H. The punch down blocks shall have the following specifications:
1. 64-pair wiring blocks, wall mounted.

2. 110-type with wall-mount legs.
3. Material: Polycarbonate UL 94 V-O.
4. Accepts solid 26-22 AWG copper conductors.
5. 4-pair connecting clips.
6. Material: Polycarbonate UL 94 V-O.
7. Insulation displacement contacts.
8. Contact Material: Phosphor bronze.

SYSTEMS
9. Contact Plating: Tin/lead solder.

10. Accepts solid 26-22 AWG copper conductors.
11. Furnish and install with labels and label holders.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all connectors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures.
B. Flush mount and surface mount outlet plates shall be installed level and plumb. Coordinate outlet box
installation with General Contractor prior to rough-in.
C. Cables shall be marked at all outlet boxes and terminations.
D. Furnish and install cable, outlet plate and connector labeling as indicated in Section 27 60 10,
Telecommunication Systems Identification and Documentation.
E. Provide a minimum service loop of 12 inches in each outlet box.
F. Bending radius of cables shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Install cable in outlet boxes per
manufacturer's instructions.
G. Furnish and install mounting hardware as required to attach consolidation points above accessible ceiling.
Consolidation points shall be securely fastened to building structure or wall.
A. Refer to Section 27 05 45, Pathways for Telecommunications Systems, for outlet mounting heights.

SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 16 10 – CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing patch cords, equipment cords, workstation cords, connecting devices and adapters as part of a
complete and operating telecommunications system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 COORDINATION
C. Contractor shall furnish the following:
1. UTP copper patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords.

2. Optical fiber patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords.
3. UTP cross-connect wire.
4. Opto-electronic converters and transceivers.
5. Adapters.
1.4 CABLE TESTING
Materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PATCH CORDS
A. Category 6 UTP Patch Cords, Equipment Cords and Workstation Cords
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell NEXTSPEED Cat6 Series.

2. 8 conductor, 24 AWG stranded, Category 6.
3. PVC jacket.
4. RJ 45, 8 position, Category 6 plugs on each end.
a. Furnish patch cords with harsh environment sealed connector bodies to match outlet
requirements as indicated on drawings.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES 27 16 10 - 1 of 3

AND ADAPTERS -
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
5. 100 percent factory tested.

6. Color: To match system cable color as defined in Section 27 15 10 and Section 27 15 45.
7. Furnish hybrid cords (dissimilar connectors on opposite ends of cable) as required by equipment
connections. Coordinate equipment connector type with Owner and Equipment Supplier prior to
submitting products for review.
8. Furnish 3-foot patch cords to connect patch panels to network equipment in each
telecommunications space.
9. Furnish and install 3-foot equipment cords to connect outlets to equipment and devices (i.e.;
wireless access points; building automation systems; security systems, etc.).
10. Furnish 15-foot workstation cords to connect from outlets to Owner’s computer equipment in
classrooms, offices and work areas.
11. Furnish and install one patch cord for 80 percent of the data outlets installed as part of the project
plus 2 percent spare, minimum of 5 spare patch cords
12. Furnish and install one equipment cord for 100 percent of the equipment data outlets installed as
part of the project plus 2 percent spare, minimum of 5 spare patch cords.
13. Furnish one 15-foot workstation cord for 80 percent of the data outlets installed as part of this
project plus 5 percent spare, minimum of 10 spare patch cords.
B. Cross-Connect Cords
1. Acceptable Manufacturer (Data): Hubbell 6-110 Cross Connect, Cat6.

a. 4-pair 110 to 110.
b. 4-pair 110 to RJ-45.
2. Acceptable Manufacturer (Telephone): Siemon S210, Cat6 patch cords.
a. 1-pair 110 to 110.
b. 2-pair 110 to 110.
c. 4-pair 110 to 110.
d. 1-pair 110 to RJ-45.
e. 2-pair 110 to RJ-45.
f. 4-pair 110 to RJ-45.
3. 24 AWG stranded twisted pair.
4. 1-, 2-, 4- pair as required by application.
5. Color: To match system cable color as defined in Section 27 15 10 and Section 27 15 45.
6. Furnish hybrid cords (dissimilar connectors on opposite ends of cable) as required by equipment
connections. Coordinate equipment connector type with Owner and Equipment Supplier prior to
submitting products for review.
7. Furnish length as required patch cords to connect termination blocks to network equipment in each
telecommunications room.
8. Furnish and install one patch cord for 75 percent of the data outlets installed as part of the project
plus 2 percent spare, minimum of 5 spare patch cords
9. Furnish and install one patch cord for 75 percent of the telephone outlets installed as part of the
project plus 2 percent spare, minimum of 5 spare patch cords.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All patch cords shall be neatly installed and dressed in the vertical and horizontal wire management
systems in each telecommunications space.
B. Patch cords shall be routed so that the wire management system provides proper support of the
connector/cord interface.

AND ADAPTERS -
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
C. Patch cords shall be labeled at each end using a machine generated label. Patch cord label shall indicate
patch panel port and network equipment port connected.
D. Patch cords shall not be tied or bundled in the wire management system.
E. Patch cords shall be tied to cable runway (tray) when routed between racks, cabinets and wall termination
fields in telecommunications rooms.
F. Patch cords (where bundled) shall be neatly bundled with Velcro style fasteners. Nylon tire wraps are not
acceptable.
G. Patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords shall not be installed above accessible ceiling.
H. Patch cords, equipment cords and workstation cords shall not be installed in conduit except in short
sections of conduit installed from an enclosure for an equipment connection outlet to the equipment
enclosure being served.
I. Install cables along the shortest route in the wire management system. Use the shortest patch cords
available to connect two points.
J. Patch cord slack shall be neatly stored in the wire management system.
K. Equipment cords shall be turned over to equipment supplier for connection between outlet and equipment.
L. Workstation area cords shall be turned over to Owner.
M. Install patch cords, equipment cords and workstation area cords in a manner to protect cable from
stretching, kinking or sharp bends. Cords damaged during installation shall be removed and replaced at no
additional cost to Owner.
N. Bending radius of patch cords shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommended bend radius.
O. Install patch cords between outlets for equipment connection and equipment enclosures through conduit
stub. Coordinate placement and connection of patch cords with contractor responsible for equipment
enclosure. Not more than 3 inches of patch cords shall be exposed between outlet for equipment
connection and equipment enclosure.
P. Cross-connect wiring shall be installed along the shortest route between termination points.
Q. Cross-connect wiring shall be routed through distribution rings and around distribution spools in a manner
which provides full support of the wire and termination without additional support.
R. Cross-connect wires shall be installed with a minimum 3/4 inch drip loop at either end of the wire to allow
manual tracing of the connected circuit.
S. Furnish and install voice grade cross-connect wiring at the telecommunications entrance facility, MDF and
each IDF for all equipment outlets including but not limited to: elevator equipment room telephone, elevator
cab telephone, fire-alarm communications, security system(s) communications, area of rescue assistance
communication, other emergency communication system(s) and building automation system. Coordinate
the requirements for the cross-connects with system installer as required. Complete the dial-tone circuits
from the service provider demarcation to the point of connection to the equipment. Coordinate dial-tone
requirements with system installer. The Owner shall coordinate service requirements with their service
provider.

AND ADAPTERS -
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 19 10 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SYSTEMS TESTING – COPPER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for testing the copper
backbone and horizontal distribution system as part of a complete and operating telecommunications
cabling system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Contractor’s test procedures

2. Sample test reports
1.3 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COPPER CABLE TESTING – MULTI-PAIR, OTHER THAN CATEGORY RATED
A. Copper cable backbone shall be tested for the following. Each wire/pair shall be tested at both ends for
the following:
1. Termination order
2. Polarity
3. Continuity
4. Shorts
5. Grounds
6. Cable length
3.2 CABLE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTING – CATEGORY RATED
A. Cables and termination hardware shall be 100 percent tested for defects in installation and to verify cable
performance under installed conditions. All conductors of each installed cable shall be verified usable by
the contractor prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cable system installation including but not
limited to cable, connectors, feed through coupler, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or
replaced in order to ensure 100 percent usable conductors in all cables installed.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE 27 19 10 - 1 of 3

SYSTEMS TESTING - COPPER
B. General Requirements
1. Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the field test specifications
defined in the most recent standard of the Telecommunications Industry Associations
(TIA)/Electronics Industry Association (EIA).
2. The installed twisted-pair horizontal links shall be tested from the data or telecommunications room
to the jack in the wall outlet against the “Permanent Link” performance limits specification as
defined by TIA/EIA.
3. 100% of the installed cabling links must be tested and must pass the requirements of the TIA/EIA
standards. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective action shall be
followed with a test to prove that the corrected link meets the performance requirements. The final
and passing result of the tests for all links shall be provided in the test results documentation.
4. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program and have
obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. Appropriate training programs
include but are not limited to installation certification programs provided by BiCSi (Building Industry
Consulting Services International) or the ACP (Association of Cabling Professionals).
5. The test equipment (tester) shall comply with or exceed the accuracy requirements for the Level III
field testers as defined by TIA. The tester including the appropriate interface adapter must meet
the specified accuracy requirements.
6. The tester shall be within the calibration period recommended by the vendor in order to achieve the
vendor-specified measurement accuracy.
7. The tester interface adapters must be of high quality and the cable shall not show any twisting or
kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters. In order to deliver
optimum accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface adapter for the tester that can
be calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return Loss measurement to the permanent link
interface. The contractor shall provide proof that the interface has been calibrated within the period
recommended by the vendor. To ensure that normal handling on the job does not cause
measurable Return Loss change, the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted-pair construction.
8. The Pass or Fail condition for the link-under-test is determined by the results of the requirements
individual tests. Any Fail or Fail* results yields a Fail for the link-under-test. In order to achieve an
overall Pass condition, the results for each individual test parameter must Pass or Pass*.
9. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by comparing the measured values with the
specified test limits for the parameter. The test result of a parameter shall be marked with an
asterisk (*) when the result is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the field tester. The field
tester manufacturer must provide documentation as an aid to interpret results marked with
asterisks.
10. The Contractor shall coordinate with the cable system manufacturer providing the extended
performance warranty to determine whether the manufacturer will accept Pass* results for their
warranty. Only test results which meet the requirements of the manufacturer’s warranty will be
acceptable.
11. The Owner shall be invited to witness field testing. The Owner shall be notified of the start date of
the testing phase 5 business days before testing commences.
12. The Owner (or his authorized representative) may select a random sample of 5% (minimum of
three) of the installed links. The Owner shall test these randomly selected links and the results are
to be stored as specified herein. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by
the Contractor. If more that 2% (minimum of 1) of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail
determination, the Contractor under supervision of the Owner’s representative shall repeat 100%
testing and the cost shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. Performance Test Parameters
1. Cables shall be performance tested in accordance with the requirements of the Cable Category
Rating as defined by TIA/EIA. The test of each link shall contain all of the following parameters: In
order to pass the test all measurements (at each frequency in the TIA/EIA specified test frequency
range) must meet or exceed the limit value listed by TIA/EIA.
a. Wire Map
b. Length
c. Insertion Loss (Attenuation)

d. Near-End Cross-Talk (NEXT) Loss, Pair-to-Pair

e. Power Sum NEXT (PSNEXT) Loss
f. Equal Level Far-end Cross-Talk (ELFEXT) Loss, pair-to-pair
g. Power Sum ELFEXT (PSELFEXT) Loss
h. Return Loss
i. Attenuation to Cross-talk Ratio (ACR)
j. Power Sum ACR (PSACR)
k. Propagation Delay
l. Delay Skew
D. Test Results Documentation
1. The test result information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field tester upon
completion of the test.
2. The test result records saved by the tester shall be transferred into a Windows™-based database
utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records. A guarantee
must be made that these results are transferred to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the tester” at
the end of each test and that these results cannot be modified at a later time. Use cable testers
that transfer the numeric measurement data from the tester to the PC in a format which cannot be
manipulated by the user.
a. Comma Separated Value (CSV) format does not provide adequate protection and shall not
be acceptable.
3. The database for the completed job, including twisted-pair copper cabling links if applicable, shall
be stored and delivered on CD-ROM; this CD-ROM shall include the software tools required to
view, inspect, and print any selection of test reports.
4. A paper copy of the test results shall be provided that lists all the links that have been tested with
the following summary information:
a. The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in the overall
system documentation and as coordinated with Owner
b. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test including the Attenuation worst case
margin (margin is defined as the difference between the measured value and the test limit
value).
c. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester
5. General information to be provided in the electronic data base containing the test result information
for each link:
a. The identification of the customer site as specified by the Owner.
b. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test.
c. The name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results.
d. The cable type and the velocity of propagation used for length calculations.
e. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester.
f. The brand name, model and serial number of the tester.
g. The revision of the tester software and the revision of the test standards database in the
tester.

SECTION 27 53 20 – MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM – WIRELESS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for furnishing and
installing a complete operating, coordinated, centrally controlled wireless GPS master-satellite time
system, compatible with the Owner’s existing wireless clock system. Furnish and install equipment as
specified herein to be wired, connected and placed in operating condition.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Master Clock System Components
2. Software
3. Interconnecting and Wiring Diagrams of Items of Equipment, including interfaces with existing
school master clock system.
4. Submit brochure or color card showing available colors and finishes of clocks.
5. Operating License: Submit evidence of application to FCC for operating license prior to installing
equipment. Furnish the license to Owner prior to installing the equipment.
6. Samples: Submit one clock for approval. Approved sample shall be tagged and shall be installed in
the work at location as directed.
7. Manufacturer’s and installer’s qualifications as specified herein.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Clock system shall continually synchronize clocks throughout the project area and shall be capable of
clock readouts in multiple time zones where desired.
B. Time system shall be a synchronized master-satellite time system. The system shall synchronize all
clocks to each other. The system shall utilize GPS technology to provide atomic time. The system shall
not require hard wiring. Clocks shall automatically adjust for Daylight Savings Time.
C. Clocks shall be synchronized within 10 milliseconds 6 times per day, and the system shall have an internal
oscillator that maintains plus or minus one second per day between synchronizations, so that clock
accuracy shall not exceed plus or minus 0.2 seconds.
D. The system shall include internal clock so that failure of the GPS signal shall not cause the clocks to fail in
indicating time.
E. The system shall incorporate fail-safe design so that failure of any component shall not cause failure of the
system. Upon restoration of power or repair of failed component, the system shall resume normal
operation without the need to reset the system or any component thereof.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM - 27 53 20 - 1 of 9

WIRELESS
F. Clock locations shall be as indicated and clocks shall be fully portable, capable of being relocated at any
time.
G. The system shall provide wireless synchronized precision through interface with the facility’s existing
master clock system.
H. Timing and operation of the WT generator system shall be controlled by software provided by system
manufacturer, housed in the transmitter and programmed by an Owner-furnished PC.
I. The system shall not require wiring from the transmitter to WT generator.
J. Wireless Tone (WT) Generator: Initially and at scheduled intervals, the WT Generator receives the time
data and command packet from the transmitter. Using the information, the WT Generator can send an
audio tone to and an existing PA-type announcement system and/or an existing bell system.
K. L. The transmitter shall continuously broadcast (transmit) a time data packet and command packets to the
WT generator. The transmitter shall operate on FCC licensed frequencies that have good building
penetration and that are regulated by the FCC to minimize interference on the selected channel.
L. The GPS unit shall receive the precise time via satellite from its vantage point with a ‘view of the sky’ and
continuously provide this precise time to the transmitter.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment and components furnished shall be of manufacturer’s latest model.
B. Transmitter and receiver shall comply with Part 15 and Part 90 of FCC rules, as follows:
1. The equipment shall not cause harmful interference.
2. The equipment shall accept interference that will cause adverse on equipment operation.
3. Transmitter frequency shall be governed by FCC Part 90.35.
4. Transmitter output power shall be governed by FCC Part 90.257 (b).
C. System shall be installed in compliance with local and state authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Unauthorized changes or modifications to the equipment will void the Owner’s authority to operate the
equipment.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Furnish, install and activate all items to provide a complete and operating clock correction system to
include interface with existing master clock system in the facility, local transmitter to provide correction
signal source and all other required components.
B. Coordinate complete clock system installation and function with sound system installer.
C. Coordinate with the existing intercom supplier connecting the wireless tone generator into the existing
intercom system for sounding the tone for class change over the existing intercom system speakers. Pay
all costs to the existing intercom system supplier (Rauland-SAGE Technology Solutions, 717-653-6641)
for assisting in wiring the system and start-up and check-out of the system.
D. Existing combination speaker/clock enclosure faceplates do not need to be replaced if the wireless clocks
can be installed neatly on the existing faceplate. If the wireless clocks cannot be installed neatly on the
existing faceplate (not cover the entire hole, leave gaps between clock and existing faceplate, etc.) than
the existing faceplate shall be replaced with a faceplate to accommodate the existing speaker and the
wireless clock.

WIRELESS
A. Permits: Obtain operating license for the transmitter from the FCC.
B. Qualifications (submit with shop drawings):

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing time systems with a minimum of 10
continuous years of documented experience.
2. Installer: Company with documented experience in the installation of computer controlled, time-
actuated control systems and commercial time systems.
3. Documented experience shall be submitted with shop drawings.
1.8 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Transmitter Operation: When power is first applied to the transmitter, it checks for the displays the
software version, and then it checks the position of the switches and stores their position in memory. The
transmitter then looks for the GPS time signal. Once the transmitter has received the GPS time, it sets its
internal clock to that time. The transmitter then starts to transmit its internal time once every second. The
transmitter updates its internal clock every time it receives valid time data from the GPS.
B. Transmitter Programming: After the transmitter has been set up and is operating correctly, it is
programmed to transmit a signal to the WT generator at predetermined intervals. This programming can
be done either as part of the contract, or can be done separately by the Owner.
C. WT Operation: When the WT generator receives a signal from the transmitter it shall generate a tone to
actuate the devices that have been predetermined to operate upon receipt of that tone.
D. Clock Operation:
1. When the batteries are inserted into the clock: A) Press the red button when the red second hand is
at the 12:00 position. At this time the microprocessor will lock in the locations of the second hand.
B) After the red second hand has passed over the minute hand (first second hash mark after
minute hand), press and release the red button. At this time the microprocessor will lock in the
location of the minute hand. The microprocessor then assumes the location of the hour hand.
2. After the red button has been pressed twice, the microprocessor will start searching the channels.
It will start at channel No. 1 and proceed one by one until it either decodes a valid signal or reaches
channel No. 16. If no signal is detected the receiver will be shut off and try again later. If a signal
is received, the microprocessor will store the channel number, set the clock to the receive time,
then for the next minute the clock will beep every time that it receives a valid time signal. If the
clock is in a good signal area it will beep once a second. If the clock beeps every few seconds, the
clock is in a marginal signal area. Clocks should operate in marginal signal areas, but battery life
will be about 25 percent shorter.
3. After initial set, the clock will shut off the receiver. On a pre-scheduled basis, the microprocessor
will turn the receiver back on and starting with the stored channel, it will again look for a valid time
signal. However, the beeper will not operate.
4. If the clock has not decoded a valid time signal for seven days, then it will go back to a double step
mode. Non signal reception can be caused by low battery voltage. If this occurs, replace the
batteries.
1.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER
A. The equipment shall be supplied by a manufacturer certified engineering distributor. Manufacturer's written
certification of the engineering distributorship shall be provided when requested.
B. When requested, the manufacturer or his certified distributor shall provide evidence that distributor
maintains a fully equipped factory authorized service organization, stocked with factory approved
replacement parts and is capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the equipment.
C. Equipment suppliers employing personnel for local service on a "contract basis" will not be acceptable.

WIRELESS
1.10 WIRE AND CABLE TESTING
Materials.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all components to the site in the manufacturer’s original packaging. Packaging shall contain
manufacturer’s name and address, product identification number, and other related information.
B. Store equipment in unopened containers until ready for installation. Store in building in finished, air-
conditioned space.
1.12 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Clocks shall not be installed until painting and other finish work in each room is complete.
B. Coordinate installation of GPS receiver with work on the roof or exterior side wall so that the bracket and
related fasteners are watertight.
C. Verify that a PC having the manufacturer’s specified minimum system requirements will be available for
use in programming the WT generator.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sapling, to match existing master clock system in the facility. No substitutions.
Components of the system shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Equipment supplier shall be:
SAGE Technology Solutions, Inc.
1040 West Main Street
Mount Joy, PA 7552
Contact: Charlie Mowrer - (717) 653-6641 Email: cmowrer@sagetechs.comMENT
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: The time system shall include a transmitter, Indicating clocks and all accessories for a complete
operating system.
2.3 TRANSMITTER
A. Sapling Wireless Model FM-72, consisting of wireless transmitter with GPS receiver. Unit shall obtain
current atomic time from satellite. The clock system shall transmit time continuously to all clocks in the
system.
B. Transmission:
1. Frequency Range: One watt at frequency of 72.100 to 72.400 MHz.
2. Transmission Range: One mile, open field.
3. Radio Technology: Narrowband FM.
4. Number of Channels: 16.

WIRELESS
5. Channel Bandwidth: 20 kHz maximum.

6. Transition Mode: One-way communication.
7. Data rate: 2 KBps.
C. Transmitter:
1. Transmitter output power: +30 dBm (one watt)
2. Frequency deviation: +/- 4 kHz
3. Transmitter power requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz
4. Internal power requirements: 5 volts DC
5. Carrier frequency stability +/1 20 ppm.
D. Transmitter shall have 16 selectable channels to assure interference-free reception.
E. Transmitter shall have the following switches:

1. Time zone adjust switches for all time zones in the world. Includes all US time zones: Eastern,
Central, Mountain, Pacific, Alaska and Hawaii.
2. Daylight savings time bypass switch.
3. 12-hour or 24-hour display.
F. Transmitter housing shall be black metal case, 16-3/4 inches by 12 inches by 1-7/8 inches in size.
G. Antenna shall be 46 inches high, commercial type, mounted on top center of transmitter housing. Antenna
gain shall be > 110 dBm. Antenna polarization shall be data logic, zero to 5 volts.
H. Transmitter housing shall incorporate a display which shall include the following:
1. Time readout
2. AM and PM indicator if 12 hours time display is set
3. Day and date readout
4. Indicator for daylight savings or standard time
5. LED which shall flash red in event of reception problem
6. GPS reception indicator.
I. Transmitter shall contain an internal clock such that failure of reception from the GPS will not disable the
operation of the clocks nor of the wireless tone generator.
1. Power Supply:
2. Model Number: Q11666
3. Input: 120 volt AC 50/60 Hz, 0.4 amp.
4. Output: 9 volt DC, 1.5 amp.
2.4 CLOCKS
A. Sapling wireless clocks and, unless noted, furnish and install Sapling SBP-31S-254 – 2.5” IP digital
surface mount clock to match units in existing building. Furnish and install Sapling SBP-31S-404 – 4”
analog IP surface mount clock as directed by system vendor. Provide wire guards as shown.
B. Clocks shall be battery operated and shall have 5 year battery life.
C. Clocks shall be capable of automatically adjusting for daylight saving time. An on-off switch located on the
transmitter shall disable this function if desired.
D. Time shall be automatically updated from the transmitter 6 times per day.

WIRELESS
E. Clocks shall remember the time during changing of batteries.
F. Clock lock: Tamper-proof/theft resistant hangers and slots in the backs of the clocks.
G. Furnish and install 2 alkaline AD@ cell batteries with each clock.
H. Clock receivers shall be as follows:

1. Decode sensitivity: >-110dBm
2. Receiver power: Two alkaline AD@ cells
3. Antenna type: internal
4. Antenna gain: -7 dBd
I. If transmitter stops transmitting valid time signals due to power failure, the clocks will continue to function
as accurate quartz clocks until a valid time signal is decoded.
J. Wire Guards: Furnish and install one for each clock as follows:
1. Model No. 14123, 18 by 18 inch size, for 16 inch diameter clock in Multipurpose Rooms.
2.5 CABLE CONNECTION SEALANT
A. Radio Shack coaxial Cable connector Sealant 278-1645, or approved electrical grade silicone sealant.
2.6 SOFTWARE
A. Provide Sapling software as required for clocks being installed in project area, for installation and
programming by Owner, compatible with the following PC operating systems:
1. Windows 95 with Internet Explorer 5.01 Service Pack 2.
2. Windows 98.
3. Windows ME.
4. Windows NT with Service Pack 6a, Internet Explorer 5.01 Service Pack 2 and valid administrator
rights.
5. Windows 2000 with valid administrator rights.
6. Windows XP with valid administrator rights.
B. Software shall be in form of a CD, suitable for operation in stand CD-ROM drives.
C. Provide one cable, RS232 (9 wires straight through DB9-F/DB9-M) with USB-to-serial adapter if required
for use in downloading programmed software.
D. Provide assistance and instruction to Owner on installation and operation of the software.
2.7 CABLE
A. Cables between wireless transmitter and existing intercom system shall be as directed by system supplier.

WIRELESS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that construction is complete in spaces to receive equipment and that rooms are clean, painted, dry
and permanent air conditioning systems are operating.
B. Verify that 120 volt electrical outlet is located within 6 feet of location of transmitter and that outlet is
operational and properly grounded.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with system manufacturer's instructions. Furnish and install all equipment
necessary for a complete and operable system. Final connections between equipment and the wiring
system, testing and placing system in operation, shall be completed under direct supervision of a
representative of the manufacturer. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operation
and maintenance data at completion of Work.
B. All wires shall be marked at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and terminations. All wiring
shall be tested for continuity and freedom of all grounds and short circuits. Each cable run between
terminating locations shall be one continuous cable (no splices or connections).
C. Proceed with caution when installing cable to protect cable from stretching, kinking or sharp bends. Cable
damaged during installation shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Contractor and manufacturer shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable loss of
amplitude, or distortion in the system after installation has been completed.
E. Transmitter:
1. Locate transmitter where indicated as high as possible allowing room for the antenna, away from
large metal objects such as filing cabinets, lockers or metal framed walls.
2. Attach receiver to transmitter using coaxial cable.
3. Connect antenna to transmitter, using care not to strip threads.
4. Connect power supply to the transmitter.
5. Set the channel number on the display to correspond to the FCC license.
6. Plug power supply into electrical outlet.
F. Clocks: perform the following operations with each clock:

1. Furnish and install “D” cell batteries.
2. Set clock to correct time in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
3. Observe clock until valid signals are received and clock adjusts itself to correct time.
4. Install the clock either on the wall or on the combination clocks speaker enclosure in the indicated
location, plumb, level and tight against wall. Attach using Clock-Lock hanging method and suitable
fasteners or other means as approved by clock manufacturer and the Architect.
G. Wire Guards: Secure to wall, using approved theft-resistant fasteners.
H. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2, except above accessible
concealed ceilings where wiring may be run exposed using approved cable and proper supports.
I. Furnish and install 3/4 inch conduit from each wall outlet box to above accessible ceilings and turn out.
J. Furnish and install conduit above all non lay-in tile ceilings and in all other non-accessible areas in the
building.

WIRELESS
K. Where sleeves are indicated on Drawings, furnish and install a measured length of conduit, size as
indicated. Cap all unused conduit sleeves at both ends.
L. Cables shall be bundled by section of building, as directed by Owner.
M. Installation shall allow for easily replacing cables in the future.
N. All clock signal cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using J-hooks or other Owner
approved methods and attached to building structure. Do not attach to pipes, ducts, etc. Do not allow cable
to rest on pipes, ducts, ceiling tiles, etc. Do not use tie wires or bridle rings. Do not attach to wires used to
support suspended ceilings.
O. All cable not in raceways shall be rated for its intended use (riser, plenum, etc.).
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Prior to final acceptance, inspect each clock, adjust as required and replace parts which are found
defective.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Prior to final acceptance, clean exposed surfaces of clocks, using cleaning methods recommended by
clock manufacturer. Remove temporary labels from clock faces. Do not remove labels from backs of
clocks.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide training to Owners representative on setting and adjusting clocks, replacing batteries and routine
maintenance.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation until final acceptance of the project.
3.7 CABLE TESTING
A. The following tests, as applicable, shall be performed on all cable pairs:

1. Opens
2. Shorts (within and between pairs)
3. Polarity reversals
4. Transpositions
5. AC voltage
6. Lengths
7. Noise Susceptibility
8. Connector pinouts (wire mapping) to prevent crossed pairs and split pairs.
B. All abnormalities found shall be corrected by Electrical Contractor prior to energizing system.

WIRELESS
3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. At completion of installation and prior to final acceptance, start up the equipment; assure that all
equipment is operating properly, that all units connected to the system are receiving tones as programmed
and all clocks and class change signal system are functioning.
A. Contractor through equipment supplier shall provide three complete sets of operating instructions,
including circuit diagrams and other information, necessary for complete installation, operation and
maintenance service. One copy of this information shall be submitted for review and will be returned to
Contractor after which three copies shall be delivered to Owner upon the installation and final testing of the
equipment.
B. Upon acceptance of the system by Owner, Contractor through equipment supplier shall provide training for
Owner's personnel in proper operation of the system.
3.10 SUPERVISION
A. Installation of this system shall be supervised by a factory trained representative who shall accompany
Owner's representative on an inspection of the entire system, and shall demonstrate satisfactory system
performance.
B. A complete operational test of the system and all individual components shall be performed under the
supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Final tests and checks shall be completed in the
presence of the Owner's representative.
C. Contractor through equipment supplier shall provide a set of operating instructions to Owner, including
circuit diagrams and other information necessary for proper installation, operation and maintenance.
D. Equipment supplier shall assume complete responsibility for equipment and services supplied, and for
complete supervision of system installation and correction of all malfunctions. Equipment supplier shall be
responsible for correct operation of the system.
A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid cost of and shall provide Owner with a one year service
contract effective from the date of acceptance of the Work. Service contract shall provide for maintenance
and inspection service for the complete system. Provide a minimum of two inspections during the contract
year. Equipment manufacturer shall make available, if requested by Owner, the option to extend the
service agreement to provide all parts, labor and mileage beyond the first year contract period.
A. Unless noted, clock system components shall be mounted at the following heights:
1. Indicating Wall Clocks: 12 inches below finished ceilings, 9’-0” AFF max., unless otherwise noted.
Verify all mounting heights and locations in field.

WIRELESS
17-YCST-01 – nEW GYMNASIUM PROJECT
SECTION 27 54 10 – INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work in this Section consists of the labor, materials and equipment required for upgrades to the existing
Rauland Telecenter ICS intercom systems to the Rauland TCU campus system. Work shall include
installing a Campus controller, IP Gateway modules for the existing intercom stations, Admin Consoles
and Zone, Modules.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Intercommunications systems components
2. Wiring diagram, showing interconnections between all components and tie in of system to the
existing system.
3. FCC Approval: The system shall be approved for direct interconnection to the telephone utility
under Part 68 of FCC rules and regulations. Systems, which are not FCC approved or utilize an
intermediary device for connection, will not be considered. Provide the FCC registration number of
the system being proposed as part of the submittal process.
4. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with requirements.
5. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements. Include record of final matching transformer-tap settings, and signal ground-
resistance measurement certified by Installer.
1.3 COORDINATION
C. Connection of new system wiring to existing system shall be approved by and coordinated with Owner.
Loss of operation of existing system shall be kept to a minimum during construction. Existing system shall
not be down except when workmen are performing actual wiring changes.
1.4 FUNCTION
A. This system shall be an extension of the school’s fully operational IP platform for district-wide internal and
school communications system incorporating school safety notifications and general communications
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. The platform shall provide complete internal communications and employing state of the art IP
Technology including the minimum functions listed.
a. Two-way Internal Intercommunications between staff locations and classrooms
b. Scheduled Bell Event announcement
c. Emergency announcement that will override any pre-programmed zones assuring that all
Emergency/Lockdown etc., are heard at each and every speaker location.
d. Capability of prerecording emergency announcements that can simply be activated by a
simple Soft Key or via a dedicated push button.
e. Atomic Time Synchronization with Class Change Tones utilizing multiple, programmable
schedules for each zone.
f. District wide, Emergency, group, all school and zone live voice paging
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS INTERCOMMUNICATIONS 27 54 10 - 1 of 11

SYSTEM
g. District wide, emergency, group, all school and zone paging for pre-recorded audio – tones,
music and voice.
h. Web-based, permission-based user interface.
B. The system shall support a minimum of 1000 level priorities which shall be user definable, allowing each
end point to place a minimum of 5 different priority calls at the same time.
C. Any authorized administrator shall be able to call from outside the school into any classroom, zone or
entire school directly via the School District supplied SIP enabled Telephone Network. This shall allow
remote monitoring, call-in annunciation and two-way conversation from outside the facility as well as
paging into the system. (Compliance with NEMA Standard SB-40 for emergency communications in K-12
Schools)
D. Authorized system users shall be able to create a minimum of twenty (20) automated sequences with
emergency instructions, tones, e-mails and relay activations and replay them.
E. Automated message strings shall be manually initiated from a single-button access on the console, on a
SIP connected telephone, a panic button, from the web interface or via interface with third party systems.
F. Paging and two-way intercom features shall be accessible from any system console or SIP connected
telephone.
G. The platform shall synchronize its system time to the network timeserver or a web-based time server.
H. Each single campus building installation shall be locally survivable for intercom, paging, bells, and
emergencies such as lockdown, even when the district connection is unavailable.
I. This specification establishes a minimum level of quality, features, and performance for individual
components as well as the integrated system.
C. Equipment suppliers employing personnel for local service on a "contract basis" will not be acceptable.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of equipment

manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of equipment required for this Section. The installer’s
main service location must be less than a 2 hour drive time from the project site (according to google
maps). Provide the following with in thirty (30) days after notification to proceed:
1. Provide a list of installations of systems meeting the specifications herein that the Installer has
specifically installed for verification by the Owner. Provide contact name, phone number and email
address for all installation sites. Random installations from other vendors and/or Installers shall not
be accepted. The Installer, not its employees, must meet these qualifications.
2. The Installer shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner or his representative that he has:
a. Adequate plant and equipment to pursue the work properly and expeditiously.
b. Adequate staff and technical experience to implement the work.
c. Suitable financial status to meet the obligations of the work.
d. Technically capable and factory trained service personnel at a local service facility to
provide routine and emergency service for all products used in this project.
3. Installer shall have on his fulltime staff for installation, maintenance, and client support a Microsoft
Certified Database Administrator (MCDBA) and a Microsoft Certified Technical Specialist (MCTS).
4. Submittal shall include copies of reference site contacts and manufacturer and staff technical
certifications.

SYSTEM
B. Any Contractor, who intends to bid on this work and does not meet the requirements of the “Quality
Assurance” paragraph(s), shall employ the services of an “Installer” who does meet the requirements and
who shall provide the equipment, make all connections and continuously supervise the installation. A
subcontractor so employed as the “Installer” must be acceptable to the Architect/ Engineer. The “Installer”
shall be identified within thirty (30) days of notification to proceed for acceptance by the Architect/Engineer
C. Because the life expectancy of this type of communications structure normally exceeds 10 years, the
owner expects continuity from the service provider. If the installing/servicing company has not been an
authorized provider of the manufacturers’ product for at least 15 years, the following is required:
1. A list of (2) systems manufacturers of which they currently are authorized service providers where
the relationship exceeds 10 years
2. A letter from the manufacturer outlining the details of changes in service providers over the last 5
years and what actions they will take to ensure continuity of service to the customer.
D. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturers name, address and model number,
NEMA code ratings, UL Label, and other data that is die-stamped into or factory printed on the surface of
the equipment and easily visible.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Comply with NFPA 70
G. Comply with NEMA Standard SB-40 for Emergency Communications in K-12 schools.
H. Comply with UL 60950.
and the Manufacturer’s information affixed to the wire and cable as specified in Section 26 05 05, Basic
Materials.
1.8 VARIATIONS TO SPECIFIED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Any variations of materials and equipment specified shall be completely described listing all variances from
that specified. This information shall be submitted with shop drawings and product data submittals.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide a manufacturer’s five-year warranty of the school communications network equipment against
defects in material and workmanship. This warranty will cover all electronic equipment, as well as analog
clocks, speakers, and call-in switches. If any defects are found within the warranty period, the defective
equipment shall be replaced at no cost (equipment only); a one year warranty shall be provided for labor.
B. A copy of the manufacturer’s standard statement of warranty proving all equipment provided for the school
communications network is covered with the required five-year warranty shall be included with the project
submittal. This statement of warranty shall be provided on the manufacturer’s stationary. The standard
five-year warranty is an important element in establishing a standard in quality. Manufacturers who
circumvent the five-year warranty by offering special “extended warranties” that are not part of their normal
published warranty will not be accepted.
C. The manufacturer’s warranty shall include software updates including full version software releases and
service patches for the full five years.
D. Contractor shall respond, excluding weekends and holidays, within 24 hours to any warranty service calls.
If equipment cannot be repaired within 24 hours of service visit, the contractor shall provide “loaner”
equipment to the facility at no charge.

SYSTEM
E. Make available a service contract offering continuing factory authorized service of the system after the
initial warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Telecenter manufactured by Rauland-Borg Corp. No Substitiutions (District

Standard)
1. Authorized Rauland-Borg Distributor contact:
SAGE Technology Solutions, Inc.
1040 West Main Street
Mount Joy, PA 7552
Contact: Charlie Mowrer - (717) 653-6641 Email: cmowrer@sagetechs.com
2.2 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. The platform shall utilize state of the art IP Technology for Call-in Notification, School Safety Paging and
Evacuation tones, Atomic Time Synchronization, Class Change Tones utilizing multiple, programmable
schedules for each zone, Two-way hands-free Internal Intercommunications and Paging, and Program
Distribution. The system shall be easy to learn and operate. All standard programming shall be web based
and user friendly to allow the system administrator the ability to easily program system features.
B. Provide complete and satisfactorily operating district/school communications and district/school safety as
described herein, using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings, and performances as indicated.
Use materials and equipment that comply with referenced standards and manufacturers’ standard design
and construction, in accordance with published product information. Coordinate the features of all
materials and equipment so they form an integrated system, with components and interconnections
matched for optimum performance of specified functions.
C. The platform shall be a single electronic system consisting of a minimum of 10 intercom channels for each
facility, (classroom) IP speakers and calls switches, IP Zone Modules connecting corridor speakers, inside
and outside horns, IP Administrative Consoles, SIP phone integration and district wide integration for
paging, emergency notifications, calendar scheduling and configuration.
D. Each Classroom shall be provided with an IP Speaker interface and up to 5 different call-in switches, each
with their own annunciation path and priority.
E. Call-ins may automatically annunciate (display of priority and location) to administrative consoles, SIP
phones, outside phones.
F. Call-ins shall be programmed to change priority and annunciation route based on age of call-in and original
priority.
G. Call-ins may have priority (and annunciation route) changed by user action from a console or SIP phone.
H. Call-in annunciation route shall include playing pre-recorded audio over speakers, sending a pre-
configured email, and activating relays.
I. The platform shall lend itself to expansion by simple addition of hardware modules.
J. The platform shall directly connect to the WAN/LAN without the need for a separate server at each school
location. Configuration, including bell schedules, calendars, and emergency sequences can remotely be
created, changed, stored and downloaded to the system by an authorized user from a browser-based
interface.
K. The platform shall provide the ability to initiate school safety paging announcements, evacuation tones and
take cover tones from any telephone or connected web-browser within the facility or outside the facility to
any other location within the facility or district.

SYSTEM
L. The platform shall provide the ability to selectively communicate or monitor individual classrooms in
emergency situations from any telephone within the facility or outside the facility to any other location
within the facility; all communication within the classroom shall be hands free and will not require any
interaction by the classroom user.
M. The platform shall provide classroom users the ability to confirm that they have safely secured their
classrooms during lockdown with a single button press.
N. IP-addressable and POE powered speaker modules for individual rooms shall be system programmable
and may be assigned any two, three, four, five or six digit number as well as name and description. Any
extension may be reassigned at any time.
O. IP-enabled two-way voice communication shall be available from any provided telephone or administrative
console through any speaker in the system. This shall allow hands-free communication to any classroom
or any individual loudspeaker unit. A programmable pre-announce tone shall sound immediately before the
intercom path is opened and a supervisory tone shall continue to sound at regular intervals when speaker
monitoring is active, complying fully with all privacy legislation. Pre announce tone and supervisory tones
shall be disabled during designated emergencies automatically.
P. The platform shall allow users to configure multiple schedules per school, with up to 500 unique events per
schedule, and automatic Daylight Savings time correction. Up to 5 schedules may be active on any given
day for each school. User shall be able to select from 25 standard included tones as well as unlimited
user created and uploaded audio files for class change signaling and messaging. In addition, scheduled
events shall include relay actions, email notifications, paging exclusions as system configuration changes.
The platform shall allow control of the bell schedules via the district WAN/LAN without the need for a
separate server at each school location. Bell schedules can remotely be created, changed, stored and
assigned to calendar days for the local school by an authorized user from a browser-based interface.
2.3 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A. Server Software:
1. Provides district wide paging, bell event scheduling, emergency notification and configuration for
entire district.
2. Ability to configure system and initiate system features, per school and district wide via web-based
interface.
3. The software has the ability to sync system time to the Atomic Clock Signal or to the school’s or
districts network time server
4. The software will provide a web-browser to deliver district wide emergency paging, pre-recorded
messages and tones from any authorized computer in the facility or the district. The software must
be capable of automatically notifying district personnel via the WAN of an alarm condition.
5. The software can automatically broadcast page emergency instructions via associated system
hardware throughout an entire district when an alarm (e.g. lockdown, lockout, security, fire) is
initiated via the web-based interface. The emergency instructions are preprogrammed and require
no user intervention. The system provides redundant alarm annunciation over intercom/paging
speakers and is not meant to replace primary fire alarm or security systems
6. The software shall support any combination of VoIP Telecenter Campus Controllers and Telecenter
Page Modules for a minimum of 1000 facilities.
7. The software shall support a minimum of 50,000 IP Speaker modules, district wide.
8. Provide Rauland Telecenter U Server Software – TCU2000LiteSW
B. Controller Rauland-Borg Telecenter Series – with the following features and capabilities:
1. Provides call routing for paging and intercom for a single facility
2. System shall connect to the district provided Telephone Network via a SIP connection.
3. Support a flexible numbering plan allowing two, three, four, five, or six digit extensions.
4. SIP interface to a district provided Telephone Network shall be capable of allowing connected
phones to display classroom call-ins, answer internal intercom call-ins, make pages and change
priorities of call-ins in progress.
5. Direct Dialing, two-way amplified voice intercom between any provided telephone or admin console
and speaker without the use of a press-to-talk or talk-listen switch.
6. Ability to place two levels of call-in from any call in switch.
7. The ability to answer intercom call-ins registered at administrative consoles and pre-selected
telephones.
8. The ability to automatically escalate incoming call-ins to an alternate telephone or group of
telephones if they remain unanswered for a predetermined amount of time.

SYSTEM
9. The ability to manually upgrade an intercom call-in to an alternate telephone or group of

telephones.
10. The ability for classrooms to “check-in” via push button when they have successfully secured their
location during emergency.
11. Administrative console shall display locations that have not checked in to confirm their secured
location and provide hands-free audio monitoring and communication to unsecured locations.
12. The ability to remotely locate IP Campus Controller. The controller shall not need direct connection
to any classroom via home run or distributed wiring. It shall communicate solely through the IP
network.
13. Single button access from any telephone on the system to distribute emergency announcements
within the facility to all or select locations equipped with speakers. Emergency announcements
originating from any assigned administrative telephone shall have priority over all regular system
functions.
14. Ability for administrative consoles and connected phones to selectively monitor audio at any two-
way speaker during an emergency.
15. Stores a minimum of 48 hours’ worth of Bell Event Schedules, all emergency notification
sequences as well as facility wide configuration. System has the ability to sync system time to the
Atomic Clock Signal or to the school’s or districts network time server.
16. System’s SIP Interface shall provide:
a. Audio paging access from any telephone to any single intercom speaker, zone (group) of
intercom/paging speakers, or all speakers/paging horns throughout the entire facility.
b. Ability to answer a call-in directed to that SIP extension.
c. Ability to upgrade a call-in directed to that SIP extension
d. Single button access from any telephone on the system to initiate alarm signals within the
facility to all or select locations equipped with speakers. A minimum of 25 separate distinct
alarm signals shall be provided. Alarm signals originating from any assigned administrative
telephone shall have priority over all regular system functions.
e. Ability to initiate a school-wide emergency including lockdown and evacuate sequences.
17. The system must be capable of automatically notifying district personnel via the WAN of an alarm
condition.
18. The system can automatically broadcast page emergency instructions throughout an entire school
when an alarm (e.g. lockdown, lockout, security, fire) is tripped or manually activated. The
emergency instructions are preprogrammed and require no user intervention. The system provides
redundant alarm annunciation over intercom/paging speakers and is not meant to replace primary
fire alarm or security systems.
19. Provide one (1) Rauland Telecenter TCC2000 Campus Controller. Install in the MDF.
20. Provide Install and Configure Interface for up to 10 SIP trunks from the District’s PBX. PBX SIP
trunk Licenses and configuration shall be provided by the owner.
C. IP addressable Modules:
1. System shall provide multiple IP addressable modules for intercom, paging and relay activation.
a. All modules are POE 802.3af compliant
b. All Modules support DHCP
c. All Modules connect to network with a single RJ45 connector
2. IP-addressable Zone Paging Module:
a. Zone paging module shall connect multiple speakers for district all page, all page, zone
paging, bells, audio events and, emergency notification.
b. Zone Paging Modules shall be rack and/or wall mountable. Wall mount adjacent to rack with
amplifiers in each IDF as required.
c. Zone Paging modules shall be able to belong to one or more of 50 independent zones for
live paging, bells, pre-recorded audio and emergency notification
d. Provide Rauland Telecenter TCC2011/603101 Zone Paging Module for hallways, office
areas and other non-educational spaces. Install as required in each IDF with zone
amplification for corridor and miscellaneous area loudspeaker zones.
e. Zone Page Modules with amplifiers shall be provided for the following minimum zones
(additional modules and amplifiers shall be deployed as required to meet specifications
herein.) Provide the system with hardwired zones for corridor speaker zones corresponding
to Building Sections and Mechanical/Office (non-instructional) spaces, plus two outdoor
loudspeaker zones or as otherwise designated by the District. Corridor speakers in these
areas shall be 25volt passive with Ethernet connected Zone Module and amplifier in nearby
IDF. Zone Modules shall also be used for each remote sound system.
f. Provide one (1) Module for the existing ICS intercom rack and provide one (1) for the new
Gym.
3. IP Addressable Aux I/O Module.
a. Aux I/O Module shall have two input contacts and two output contacts.

SYSTEM
b. Input and output contacts are individually addressable.

c. Aux I/O Module shall be wall and rack mountable.
d. User can program relays to be activated manually, through an event/bell schedule and
during emergency notification.
e. Provide Rauland Telecenter TCC2033 Auxiliary Input/Output Modules as required.
f. Install one (1) Aux I/O Modules for interface with two (2) contact closures from the District’s
Security System for initiation of Emergency Protocols with options as defined above.
g. Install one (1) Aux I/O Module for interface with one (1) contact closure from the Building
Fire Alarm System. When contact closure is present system Program Distribution/Paging
shall be muted and all local AV Projector Audio amplification systems shall be muted.
D. IP Addressable Administrative Console:

1. A full color screen with 64 soft keys, 3 line select, volume control, push to talk, speakerphone mode
and left/right and up/down scrolling.
2. Audio paging access from any Console to any single intercom speaker, zone (group) of
intercom/paging speakers, or all speakers/paging horns throughout the entire school.
3. Programmable soft key access from any console on the system to initiate alarm signals within the
school to all or select locations equipped with speakers. A minimum of 25 separate distinct alarm
signals shall be provided. Alarm signals originating from any assigned administrative telephone
shall have priority over all regular system functions.
4. Programmable soft key access from any console to automatically broadcast page emergency
instructions throughout an entire school when an alarm (e.g. lockdown, lockout, security, fire) is
tripped or manually activated. The emergency instructions are preprogrammed and require no user
intervention. The system provides redundant alarm annunciation over intercom/paging speakers
and is not meant to replace primary fire alarm or security systems.
5. Ability to perform intercom to any single IP Addressable Speaker Module.
6. Ability to display 3 call-ins at a time on the screen, with unlimited number of call-ins annunciating
and the ability to scroll to view all call-ins.
7. Ability to upgrade a call-in via soft key
8. Ability to change which bell event schedule(s) are active on current day.
9. Programmable soft key access from any console for activating relays, school wide
10. Ability to maintain, along with controller and other IP Modules system functions, including intercom,
bells and paging in the event of district wide connection loss
11. Provide (1) Rauland TCC2045 Telecenter Administrative console and in the main office.
E. Audio Paging/Program Amplifiers:

1. Power amplifier(s) shall be provided to provide a minimum of 1 watt of power to all corridor and
general area paging speakers, a minimum of 8 watts to enhanced corridor speakers, and a
minimum of 8 watts of power to all paging horns.
2. The amplifiers shall be rack mounted in each IDF with TC2022 zone paging modules and sized to
support connected load. The maximum load on the paging/program amplifiers shall be 80% of the
rated maximum output of the amplifiers. Provide detail in submittal of load on each zone amplifier.
3. The amplifiers shall have a frequency response of 30Hz to 20kHz (+0, -3 dB) and THD+N of <0.2%
at full power. Signal to Noise ratio shall be greater than 80 DB. The Amplifier shall be Convection
Cooled to eliminate fan cleaning requirements. The amplifier shall be designed for constant duty
applications. The amplifier shall go into sleep mode when no signal is present with instant wake
from sleep when signal is restored.
2.4 SPEAKERS, CEILING, RECESSED
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Rauland Model BAFKIT1x2S, or approved equal.
B. Nominal 1ft.x2ft. recessed ceiling speaker with 8 inch dual cone, 12 watt rating, 65 Hz to 17 KHz
frequency response per EIA 426A Standard, 5 ounce ceramic magnet weight, 8 ohm voice coil, 1 inch
voice coil diameter, 10,000 gauss flux density, 92 dB sensitivity (SP) at four feet with 1 watt input.
C. Connections
1. RJ45 jack for audio input cable from switch/line card, as required.
2. 7 inch speaker wiring leads for upstream or downstream speakers on same zone.
D. Line Transformer

SYSTEM
1. 25 primary volts, frequency response of 1 dB, 65 Hz to 17 KHz, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 watt primary
taps, rotary tap selector switch, 8 ohm secondary impedance, 16 dB insertion loss, 8 watt power
rating. Verify primary voltage in field.
E. Baffle
1. For recessed speaker, rectangular perforated steel, powder coated white finish.
F. 24 inch T Bar included. T bar to match ceiling grid type.
G. Molded fiber enclosure, 4 seismic tie-off points.
2.5 SPEAKERS, CEILING, EXPOSED
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Atlas Sound SBMS, or as approved.
B. For speakers in gymnasium, locker rooms, corridors and other areas with exposed structural ceilings.
C. Power Rating: 25 watts.
D. Dispersion: 130 degrees.
E. Nominal Impedance: 8 ohms (selectable).
F. Transformer: 70.7/25 volt with 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 watt taps
G. Frequency Response: 85 Hz – 20 kHz
H. Sensitivity: 92 dB at 1w/1m.
I. Woofer: 8 inch dual cone.
J. Woofer Magnet: 10 oz.
K. Dimensions: 12 inches x 12 inches nominal, 5.75 inches high.
L. Housing: Cold rolled steel, white powder coat finish with white grille. Enclosure shall be paintable.
M. Integral beam clamp mounts.
N. Speakers in Gymnasium shall be provided with wire guards.
2.6 HORN TYPE SPEAKER, WALL MOUNTED
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Atlas/Soundolier APC 30T, or approved equal.
B. High powered compression driver.
C. Power Rating: 30 watts continuous.
D. Frequency Response: 300 to 12,000 Hertz.
E. Sound Level: 124 dB, 4 foot on axis at continuous rated power.
F. Dispersion: 95 degrees x 70 degrees vertical.
G. Transformer: 70.7/25 volt with 2.0, 3.8, 7.5, 15 and 30 watt taps at 70 volts and 0.9, 1.8, 3.7, 7.5, and 15
watt taps at 25 volts.

SYSTEM
H. Polycarbonate and structural aluminum housing, baked gray epoxy finish.
I. Exterior horn speakers shall be weatherproof.
J. Provide horn speakers in gym with wire guard.’
2.7 VOLUME CONTROLS
A. Furnish and install Rauland Model ACC1300 volume controls as shown on the drawings.
2.8 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and cable to all system components shall be as directed by system manufacturer-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install intercommunication system in accordance with system manufacturer's instructions. Provide all
equipment necessary for a complete and operable system. Final connections between equipment and the
wiring system, testing and placing system in operation, shall be completed under direct supervision of a
D. Contractor and manufacturer shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable loss of volume,
or distribution in the system after installation has been completed.
E. Unless noted, two additional feet of cable shall be provided at each outlet box and 20 feet of additional
cable shall be provided at each rack and at each console.
F. The cable lines shall be laced together into separate groups from the wall boxes to the racks to provide a
neat and flexible arrangement to allow racks and consoles to be pulled away from the wall for rear service
access.
G. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2, except above accessible
H. Furnish and install 3/4 inch conduit from each wall outlet box to above accessible ceilings and turn out.
I. Furnish and install conduit above all non lay in tile ceilings and in all other non accessible areas in the
building.
J. Where sleeves are indicated on Drawings, furnish and install a measured length of conduit, size as
K. Cables shall be bundled by section of building, as directed by Owner.
L. Installation shall allow for easily replacing cables in the future.

SYSTEM
M. All signal cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using J-hooks or other Owner approved
method and attached to building structure. Do not attach to pipes, ducts, etc. Do not attach to wires used
for supporting suspended ceilings. Do not allow cable to rest on pipes, ducts, ceiling tiles, etc. Do not use
tie wires or bridle rings.
N. All cable not in raceways shall be rated for its intended use (riser, plenum, etc.).
A. Equipment manufacturer shall provide three complete sets of operating instructions, including circuit
diagrams and other information, necessary for complete installation, operation and maintenance service.
One copy of this information shall be submitted for review and will be returned to Contractor after which
three copies shall be delivered to Owner upon the installation and final testing of the equipment.
B. Upon acceptance of the system by Owner, manufacturer shall provide training for Owner's personnel in
proper operation of the system.
3.3 SUPERVISION
owner's representative on an inspection of the entire system, both new and existing, and shall
demonstrate satisfactory system performance.
C. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a set of operating instructions to Owner, including circuit diagrams
and other information necessary for proper installation, operation and maintenance.
responsible for operation of both new and existing systems.
A. Contractor shall include in Base Bid cost of and shall provide Owner with a one-year service contract
effective from the date of acceptance of the Work. Service contract shall provide for maintenance and
inspection service for the complete system. Provide a minimum of two inspections during the contract
year, and make post-occupancy adjustments to system settings as directed by Owner. Equipment
manufacturer shall make available, if requested by Owner, the option to extend the service agreement to
provide all parts, labor and mileage beyond the first year contract period.
A. Unless noted, Intercommunications systems components shall be mounted at the following heights:
1. Wall mounted intercom stations: 48 inches above finished floor.
2. Intercom outlets: 18 inches above finished floor.
3.6 CABLE TESTING
A. The Following tests, as applicable, shall be performed on all cable pairs:

1. Opens

SYSTEM
4. Transpositions
5. AC voltage
6. Lengths

SYSTEM
SECTION 27 55 10 – SOUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work in this Section consists of the labor, materials and equipment required for furnishing and installing a
complete operating sound system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Sound distribution system components.
2. Wiring diagram, showing interconnections between all components.
1.3 COORDINATION
1.4 FUNCTION
A. Systems shall process inputs from multiple program sources and distribute both audio and video signals to
projectors and speakers in Gymnasium and associated spaces.
B. Systems shall be controlled from multiple locations in each space through
C. touchpads, and/or preset control stations.
D. Where both audio/visual and sound systems are installed, an overall control system shall be installed to
integrate control of the systems under one platform that shall coordinate functions of the various systems
into a user-friendly control system that shall provide presets for various functions of the spaces.
C. Equipment suppliers employing personnel for local service on a contract basis will not be acceptable.
1.6 WIRE AND CABLE
Materials.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS SOUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 55 10 - 1 of 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers of sound system components shall be as listed herein, or as approved.
2.2 RACEWAYS
A. Raceway for interior sound system shall be Raceway Specification No. 2.
B. Raceway for underground sound system shall be Raceway Specification No. 4.
2.3 GYMNASIUM SOUND SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A. The following equipment shall be installed in the Gymnasium and adjacent spaces as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein:
1. Speakers-JBL Control 30 under hung on beams/trusses with MTC-30UB U-brackets (quantities as
shown on Drawings)
2. 1 x Extron EPB50 Wall Controller located in Gym as directed by Owner
3. Rack Equipment
a. 1 x Furman PL8C or equivalent rack mount power strip
b. 1 x Listen Tech LS-54-072 IDSP ALS system with 4 beltpacks, rack mount and antenna
installation kit
c. 1 x Shure UA844+SWB Antenna/Power Splitter
d. 2 x Shure QLXD24/SM58 wireless systems with handheld
e. 2 x Shure QLXD14/SM35 wireless system with headset
f. 1 x Denon Pro DN300z CD/Multimedia player
g. 1 x Ashly Protea 24.24m matrix processor with RS232 and network control
h. 1 x Ashly FR8 network fader remote for 24.24m
i. 1 x Ashly Rackmount kit for FR8 remote
j. 6 x Crown CDi2000 2 channel stereo amplifiers
k. 1 x Extron IN 1608xi A/V Switcher
l. 1 x Extron IPCP Pro 350 Control Processor, mounted on 1RU shelf
m. 1 x Extron XTP PI 100 Power Injector, mounted on 1RU shelf
n. 2 x Extron DTP HD DA 4K 230 Video Splitter
o. 1 x Extron DTP HDMI 4K 230 RX HDMI Extender, mounted on 1RU shelf
p. 1 x Middle Atlantic or equivalent steel floor rack, rack capacity as required
q. 1 x Middle Atlantic locking vented front door
r. 1 x Middle Atlantic locking vented rear door
s. 1 x Middle Atlantic or equivalent 3RU rack drawer
t. 1 x 4 port PoE switch
4. Wallplates
a. Whirlwind MIPAI media input wall plate in single gang box with 3.5mm and XLR summing
input with dual volume controls at control location
b. Ashly neWR-5 programmable wall remote in single gang box for system control on gym wall
at location(s) indicated with locking cover
c. 2 x 2 gang boxes for antenna 12’H minimum 10’ apart
5. Antenna: 2 x Shure UA864US wall mounted antenna
6. Wire
a. West Penn 226 or equivalent 14/2 speaker wire (6 runs from rack to speaker beams)
b. CAT5 from rack to neWR5 location
c. CAT5 from rack to MIPAI location
d. RG59 from rack to antenna locations

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install sound distribution system in accordance with system manufacturer's instructions. Provide all
equipment necessary for a complete and operable system. Final connections between equipment and the
wiring system, testing and placing system in operation, shall be completed under direct supervision of a
D. Unless noted, two additional feet of cable shall be provided at each outlet box and 20 feet of additional
cable shall be provided at each rack or console.
E. Contractor and manufacturer shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable loss of volume,
or distortion in the system after installation has been completed.
F. Loudspeakers shall be properly phased where more than one loudspeaker appears in a single room or
area.
G. Cable lines shall be laced together into separate groups from the wall boxes to the racks to provide a neat
yet flexible arrangement to allow the racks and consoles to be pulled away from the wall for rear service
access.
H. Install input circuits in separate raceways from output circuits.
I. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2.
A. Equipment manufacturer shall provide three complete sets of operating instructions, including circuit
diagrams and other information, necessary for complete installation, operating and maintenance service.
One copy of this information shall be submitted for review and will be returned to Contractor after which
three copies shall be delivered to Owner upon the installation and final testing of the equipment.
B. Upon acceptance of the system by Owner, manufacturer shall provide training for Owner's personnel in
proper operation of the system.
3.3 SUPERVISION
Owner's representative on an inspection of the entire system and shall demonstrate satisfactory system
performance.
C. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a set of operating instructions to Owner, including circuit diagrams
and other information necessary for proper installation, operation and maintenance.

responsible for correct operation of the system.
A. Electrical Contractor shall include cost in base bid of, and provide Owner with, a one year service contract
year. Equipment manufacturer shall make available, and if requested by Owner, the option to extend the
service agreement, to provide all parts, labor and mileage beyond the first year contract period.
3.5 CABLE TESTING

1. Opens
4. Transpositions
5. AC voltage
6. Lengths
8. Connector pinouts (wire mapping) to prevent crossed pairs and split pairs
A. Unless noted, sound system components shall be mounted at the following heights:
1. System input/control devices: 48 inches above finished floor.
2. Local volume controls: 48 inches above finished floor.

SECTION 27 55 60 – ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM – RF
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work in this Section consists of the labor, materials and equipment required for furnishing and installing
complete operating assistive listening system.
B. All items specified or included in this section shall be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor,
unless noted otherwise. “Contractor” as used herein shall mean Electrical Contractor.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Assistive Listening System Components
2. Wiring diagrams showing all components, wiring to all components, and interconnections between
all components and systems.
1.3 LOCATIONS
A. An assistive listening system shall be furnished and installed in each of the following locations:
1. Gymnasium
1.5 CABLE TESTING
Materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. A. Raceway shall be Raceway Specification No. 2.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM - 27 55 60 - 1 of 5

RF
2.2 ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Telex SM-1 System.
B. System to include:
1. ST-200 base transmitter
2. SR-50 receivers
3. SEB-1 ear buds
4. Wall plaque
5. BC-100 battery charger
6. CCS-12 replacement cushion covers
C. Base Transmitter
1. Single channel
2. RF Frequency Range: 72 to 76 MHz
3. Modulation: FM ±25kHz deviation
4. Signal to Noise Ratio: 58dB (64dB A weighted)
5. Maximum Deviation: ±25kHz
6. Maximum Rated Power: 50 mw
7. Audio Input: Balanced XLR-3F plus unbalanced 1/4 inch
8. Antenna: 1/4 wave omnidirectional whip
9. Audio Controls: Audio input level, monitor jack volume
10. Visual Indicators: 5 segment audio level LED, power “on” indicator
11. RF Power Switch:
a. 80K microvolt/meter in high
b. 25K microvolt/meter in low
12. One base transmitter shall be furnished and installed for each of the six locations, mounted in the
remote sound system cabinet for that area.
D. Receiver
1. Power Requirements: Two AA batteries, rechargeable, alkaline, 30 hours use.
2. Audio Frequency Response: Less than 3dB variation (100 Hz - 10 kHz).
3. Sensitivity: 0.5 microvolt typical, 1.0 microvolt maximum, 12 dB SINAD.
4. Signal-to-Noise Ratio at 1 millivolt Input: Less than 60 dB.
5. Distortion: Less than 2% THD.
6. Audio output at 10% distortion:
a. Into 8 ohms: 2.0V/15 miliwatt, 3.0V/80 milliwatt
b. Into 32 ohms: 2.0V/10 miliwatt, 3.0V/50 milliwatt
7. Controls: Volume/on/off switch
8. Visual Indicators: Backlit on/tuning indicator
9. External Jack: 3.5mm audio output charger
10. Frequency to be determined by the system supplier.
11. Twelve receivers shall be furnished, complete with batteries.
E. Ear Buds
1. Single ear bud with cord.
2. Twelve ear buds shall be furnished.

RF
F. Wall Plaque
1. Shall indicate that “Assistive Listening Available Here”.
2. One wall plaque shall be furnished and installed for each of the four locations, location of wall
plaque to be as directed by Owner.
G. Battery Charger
1. Charge two SR-50 receivers simultaneously.
2. Six battery chargers shall be furnished.
H. Cushion Covers
1. Replacement cushion covers for the ear bud.
2. One hundred cushion covers shall be provided.
I. Connecting Cables
1. As directed by manufacturer, plenum rated when not in conduit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with system manufacturer's instructions. Provide all equipment necessary for
complete and operable system. Final connections between equipment and the wiring system, testing and
placing system in operation, shall be completed under direct supervision of a representative of the
manufacturer. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operation and maintenance data
at completion of Work.
terminating locations shall be one continuous cable (no splices or connections). All wiring and wiring
diagrams shall be verified by the system manufacturer prior to installation.
D. Unless noted, two additional feet of cable shall be provided at each outlet box and 20 feet of additional
cable shall be provided at each rack or console.
E. Contractor and manufacturer shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable loss of volume,
or distortion in the system after installation has been completed.
F. Cable lines shall be laced together into separate groups from the wall boxes to the racks to provide a neat
yet flexible arrangement to allow the racks and consoles to be pulled away from the wall for rear service
access.
G. Install input circuits in separate raceways from output circuits.
H. Wire size, type and quantity shall be as directed by manufacturer.
I. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2, except above accessible
J. Furnish and install 3/4 inch conduit from each wall outlet box to above accessible ceilings and turn out.
K. Furnish and install conduit above all non lay in tile ceilings and in all other non accessible areas in the
building.

RF
L. Where sleeves are indicated on Drawings, furnish and install a measured length of conduit, size as
M. Cables shall be bundled by section of building, as directed by Owner.
N. Installation shall allow for easily replacing cables in the future.
O. All signal cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using bridle rings or other Owner
approved method and attached to building structure. Do not attach to pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. Do not
attach to wires used for supporting suspended ceilings. Do not allow cable to rest on pipes, conduits,
ducts, ceiling tiles, etc. Do not use tie wires or bridle rings.
P. All cable not in raceways shall be rated for its intended use (riser, plenum, etc.).
A. Contractor through equipment supplier shall provide five complete sets of bound operating instructions,
including circuit diagrams, part numbers, names, addresses and telephone numbers of parts source, and
other information, necessary for complete installation, operating and maintenance service. One copy of
this information shall be submitted for review and will be returned to Contractor after which three copies
shall be delivered to Owner upon the installation and final testing of the equipment.
Owner's personnel in proper and full potential operation of the system.
3.3 SUPERVISION
Owner's representative on an inspection of the entire system and shall demonstrate satisfactory systems
performance.
B. A complete operational test of each system and all individual components shall be performed under the
complete supervision of these systems installation and correction of all malfunctions. Equipment supplier
shall be responsible for correct operation of the system.
A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid the cost of and shall provide owner with a one year service
contract from the system supplier effective from the date of acceptance of the Work. Service contract shall
provide for maintenance and inspection service for all systems. Provide a minimum of two inspections of
each system during the contract year. Equipment manufacturer shall make available, if requested by
Owner, the option to extend the service agreement to provide all parts, labor and mileage beyond the one
year contract period.
3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS
A. Unless noted, sound system components shall be mounted at the following heights:
1. Mounting locations and heights of all items, etc., shall be approved by manufacturer and verified in
field before installation.

RF
3.6 TESTING
A. System shall be fully tested after installation. All alarm functions shall be tested. Provide written report to
Engineer stating that the system and its functions have been tested and that the Owner has been given
operating instructions.
3.7 CABLE TESTING

1. Opens
4. Transpositions
5. AC voltage
6. Lengths
8. Connector pinouts (wire mapping) to prevent crossed pairs and split pairs

RF
SECTION 27 59 20 – TELEVISION CONDUIT AND CABLE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM – CATV
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing conduit and cable for a future CATV system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Wall Plates
2. Cable
3. Jacks
4. Connectors
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall provide the following:

1. Conduit and pull boxes for CATV distribution system.
2. Ground wire and ground clamps.
3. Indicated power supply to CATV equipment.
4. A #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each run of conduit.
5. Power supply to CATV equipment.
6. Receptacles (Jacks), wall plates, outlet boxes and connectors. Connectors shall be installed on all
cables at the CATV head end location.
B. The following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:

1. CATV distribution equipment.
2. Monitors.
C. Contact the Owner’s IT department for coordination of extension of existing CATV service to the project
area, and any requirements regarding cable and connectors.
1.4 WIRE AND CABLE
A. A. Wire and cable shall be safety and application tested, performance tested and shall have this
information and the Manufacturer’s information affixed to the wire and cable as specified in Section
26 05 05, Basic Materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Raceway for interior CATV system shall be Raceway Specification No. 2.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS TELEVISION CONDUIT AND 27 59 20 - 1 of 4

CABLE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM -
CATV
2.2 BOXES
A. Television outlet boxes for installation in masonry or dry wall:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Steel City GW 335C.
2. Two gang, 2-1/2 inches deep.
3. Furnish and install adapter, single gang plaster ring and single gang cover.
B. Television outlet boxes for installation in plaster:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Steel City H3 BD (box) 3 GC (cover).
2. Two gang, 2-1/2 inches deep.
3. Furnish and install adapter, single gang plaster ring and single gang cover.
C. Recessed outlet boxes for wall-mount television/monitor outlets:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell NetSelect NSAV62M (Box) and NSAV62C (Cover).
2. Two-gang, 3-1/2 inches deep, recessed combination AV in-wall enclosure.
3. Furnish with duplex receptacle and CATV/telecommunications devices as indicated on drawings.
2.3 WALL PLATES
A. Furnish and install wall plates with connectors on all CATV outlets. Wall plates shall be as specified in
Section 27 15 45, Faceplates and Connectors – Telecommunications Systems.
2.4 COAX CABLES
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: West Penn, Belden, Commscope.
B. RG 6U type coaxial cable for all branch cables from distribution tap blocks to television units. RG-11/U
type coaxial cable for trunkline cables.
C. Plenum rated - CATVP markings.
D. Integral copper conductor with two outer shields (quad shield).
E. Attenuation (nominal) shall be as follows:
Frequency RG-6U RG-11U

(MHZ) (dB/100 ft.) (dB/100 ft.)
1 MHz 0.37 dB 0.15 dB
10 MHz 0.66 dB 0.45 dB
50 MHz 1.41 dB 0.90 dB
100 MHz 1.92 dB 1.28 dB
200 MHz 2.64 dB 1.85 dB
400 MHz 3.73 dB 2.75 dB
700 MHz 5.05 dB 3.92 dB
900 MHz 5.79 dB 4.72 dB
1000 MHz 6.11 dB 5.04 dB
2.5 CONNECTORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Gilbert Engineering, Blonder Tongue or same manufacturer as data jacks
specified in Section 27 15 45, Faceplates and Connectors – Telecommunications Systems.
B. Furnish and install television wall connectors/outlets at locations indicated on Drawings.

CATV
C. Television connectors shall be coax `F' connector jacks as specified herein. All connectors shall be
compression type, thread-on and crimp ring types will not be permitted.
D. Connector jacks shall be rated for the full frequency range of the system and approved for use with the
specific coaxial cable that is used.
E. Connector must be rated to withstand 40 pounds, minimum, of pull force without separating from cable that
is used.
2.6 COAX CONNECTION CABLE
A. Furnished and installed between wall connector jack and TV set.
B. Use same cable that is used for cable distribution system.
C. Six feet length.
D. Cable terminated with connectors on both ends.
PART 3 - Furnish and install a coax connector cable for each TV connector jack plus 10 percent (minimum of 3)
spares.EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All wires shall be marked at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and terminations. All wiring
B. Proceed with caution when installing cable to protect cable from stretching, kinking or sharp bends. Cable
C. Unless noted, 20 feet of additional cable shall be provided at each rack and at each console.
D. Contractor and manufacturer shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable loss of signal or
distortion in the system after installation has been completed.
E. The cable lines shall be laced together into separate groups from wall boxes to racks to provide a neat yet
flexible arrangement to allow racks and consoles to be pulled away from wall for rear service access.
F. All connections shall be made with suitable connectors. Splicing of cable in conduit will not be permitted.
Splicing of coaxial cable will not be permitted. Connectors shall be used for connection of all video cable to
equipment.
G. All cables shall be fastened securely with suitable hardware to avoid sharp bends, to prevent rubbing
against sharp corners, and in a manner to prevent damage or physical distortion.
H. Video cables shall be installed in a manner that shall prevent sharp bends and pressure points which may
cause the cable to lose its concentricity due to core migration.
I. I. Cable shall have double shielding where two or more cables are run in the same conduit.
J. J. Furnish and install a #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each unused conduit.
K. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2, except above accessible
concealed ceilings where wiring may be surface using approved cable and proper supports.
L. Furnish and install 1 inch conduit from each wall outlet box to above accessible ceiling and turn out.

CATV
M. Furnish and install conduit above all non-lay in tile ceilings and in all other non-accessible areas in the
building.
N. Where sleeves are indicated on Drawings, furnish and install a measured length of conduit, size as
O. Cables shall be bundled by section of building, as directed by Owner.
P. Installation shall allow for easily replacing cables in the future.
Q. All CATV cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using J-hooks or other Owner approved
method and attached to building structure. Do not attach to pipes, ducts, etc. Do not attach to wires used
to support suspended ceilings. Do not allow cable to rest on pipes, ducts, ceiling tiles, etc. Do not use tie
wires or bridle rings.
R. All cable not in raceways shall be rated for its intended use (riser, plenum, etc.).
A. Unless noted, CATV system components shall be mounted at the following heights:
1. Wall outlets for floor, desk, tabletop, etc., mounted TV sets: 18 inches above finished floor.
2. Wall outlets for wall bracket or ceiling mounted TV sets: 80 inches above finished floor, to be
verified with Owner and Architect before rough-in.

CATV
SECTION 27 60 10 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION AND DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work of this Section shall consist of the labor, materials and equipment required for documenting the
complete telecommunications cabling system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Sample labels
1.3 COORDINATION
C. Contractor shall coordinate exact numbering and identification scheme(s) for all telecommunications
spaces, equipment, hardware, devices and cables with the Owner prior to rough-in. The numbering and
identification scheme(s) shall include, but not be limited to schemes for:
1. Backbone cables.
2. Horizontal distribution cables
3. Telecommunications outlet plates and jacks
4. Racks
5. Patch panels
6. Punch-down/termination blocks
7. Fiber termination enclosures and panels
8. Telecommunications spaces
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SELF-ADHESIVE CABLE LABELS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Panduit.
B. Labels shall have a clear laminate over wrap to protect printed surface after installation.
C. Size as required to legibly identify cables using the approved labeling scheme.
D. Label field shall be white with black printing unless noted otherwise.
2.2 TERMINATION HARDWARE LABELS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Panduit or hardware manufacturer.

SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION AND
DOCUMENTATION
B. Paper labels as furnished with termination hardware or as manufactured to fit the termination hardware.
C. Machine printed.
D. Fitted behind plastic protective cover as part of or attached to termination hardware.
E. Color coded in accordance with TIA/EIA-606 requirements and as specified herein.
2.3 OUTSIDE PLANT CABLE LABELS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Seton.
B. Labels shall be embedded characters on cable tags and shall be attached to cable with cable ties.
1. Cable ties for attaching labels shall be UV resistant, resistant to fuels, oils and chemicals and shall
be rated for use in manholes and other outside environments.
C. Cable tags shall be indelible, resistant to chemicals, and designed to withstand underground
environments.
1. Fiber cable tags shall be orange and shall state “FIBER OPTIC CABLE”.
2. Copper cable tags shall be yellow and shall state “CUSTOMER OWNED COPPER CABLE”.
D. Cable tags shall allow a minimum of 15 character labeling for the cable ID.
2.4 WARNING LABELS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Seton.
B. Orange background with the text “CAUTION, FIBER OPTIC CABLE” in embossed black lettering.
C. Warning labels shall be indelible, resistant to chemicals, and designed to withstand underground
environments.
2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Underground warning tape shall be Tape Specification No. 2. Refer to Section 26 05 20, Wire and Cable,
600 Volts and Below.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING
A. General
1. Using the drawings as a reference, clearly identify all components of the system: racks, cables,
panels and outlets.
2. Label all cables using the labeling scheme as indicated on the Drawings and as coordinated with
the Owner. The final labeling scheme shall be approved by Owner prior to start of labeling.
3. Handwritten labels are not acceptable.
B. Inside Plant Cable System Labeling

DOCUMENTATION
1. Faceplate and cable labels shall be machine printed on adhesive labels. The font shall be at least
1/8 inch in height, block characters, and legible.
2. Labels shall be white background with black lettering unless noted otherwise.
3. Patch panels ports and punch down blocks for horizontal distribution cables shall be labeled to
indicate outlet number and each cable serving a given outlet.
4. Patch panel ports and punch down blocks for backbone cables shall be labeled to indicate cable
and pair number.
5. Labels on patch panel ports and punch down blocks shall be numerically sequential.
6. Each horizontal distribution cable shall be labeled at both ends with an adhesive label bearing its
respective cable number. The cable number shall include designators for the telecommunications
space, patch panel, and outlet. Refer to details on the Drawings for specific requirements.
7. Each backbone cable shall be labeled at both ends with an adhesive label bearing its respective
cable number. The cable number shall include designators for the origin and destination
telecommunications space and building where applicable.
8. Each multi-pair backbone cable binder group shall be tied off with its respective identifying ribbon at
each break-out point.
9. Outlet plates shall be labeled in the label insert space with a clear plastic cover. Outlet plates that
do not have a label insert space shall be labeled a clear label tape with black lettering.
10. Room numbers shall not be used for telecommunications cable system identifiers (outlet, cable,
telecom space, etc.) unless specifically requested by the Owner.
11. The labeling system for cables shall designate the cable’s origin and destination.
12. Backbone cables, coax and voice, shall designate the cables origin (Entrance Facility, MDF or TC
room number) and destination (Entrance Facility, MDF or TC room number).
13. Racks and cabinets shall be identified with engraved laminate labels by telecommunications space
number and a unique rack/cabinet identifier, per Owner’s current IT standards.
14. Patch panels and termination enclosures shall be identified with adhesive laminated labels by
telecommunications space number, rack/cabinet number and a unique panel/enclosures identifier,
per Owner’s current IT standards.
15. All labeling information shall be recorded on the record document drawings. Test documents shall
reflect the approved labeling scheme.
C. Outside Plant Cable Labeling
1. Each outside plant cable shall have a cable label installed within 12 inches of:
a. Each manhole entrance/exit.
b. Each splice case.
c. Building entrance.
d. Each termination field.
2. Each outside plant fiber optic cable shall have a warning label installed within 18 inches of:
a. Each manhole entrance/exit.
b. Each splice case.
c. Building entrance.
d. Each termination field.
3. Furnish and install warning tape in trench above all conduits and duct banks where optical fiber
cable will be installed.
4. Furnish and install warning tape in trench above all direct buried cables.
3.2 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A. Contractor will be provided with one set of drawings at the start of the project. This set will be designated
as the central location to document all record document information as it occurs throughout the project.
The central set will be maintained by the Contractor on a daily basis, and shall be available to the Owner's
Representative upon request during the course of the project. No variations will be allowed to the planned

DOCUMENTATION
termination positions of horizontal and backbone cables and hardware unless approved in writing by the
Owner.
B. Provide an advanced copy of the central drawing set to the Owner’s Information Technology personnel
prior to substantial completion. This copy of the drawing shall properly identify each outlet and termination
location with the final outlet and cable identifiers as specified and as coordinated with the Owner. This
copy of the central drawing set shall be available to the Owner’s Information Technology personnel at least
30 days prior to the Owner’s scheduled date of occupancy.
C. Provide the central drawing set to the Owner upon completion of the installation. The marked-up drawing
set shall accurately depict the installed status of the system including termination locations, cable routing,
and all administration labeling for the cable system. In addition, a narrative shall be provided that describes
any areas of difficulty encountered during the installation that could potentially cause problems to the
telecommunications system.
3.3 WARRANTY DOCUMENTS
A. Furnish the original warranty certificates(s) and any supporting information to the Owner as part of the
record documents.

DOCUMENTATION
SECTION 28 10 30 – SECURITY CONDUIT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
installing a conduit distribution system for an Owner furnished and installed security system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Wall Plates
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall provide the following:

1. Underground conduit for security.
2. Conduit and pull boxes for security distribution systems.
3. Outlet boxes and blank wall plates for wall security outlets.
4. Ground wire and ground clamps.
5. Indicated power supply to cable security equipment.
6. A #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each run of conduit.
B. The following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:

1. Wire and cable.
2. Security equipment.
C. Contact the Owner's security equipment supplier, for specific instructions before starting Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Raceway for interior security system shall be Raceway Specification No. 2.
B. Raceway for underground security system shall be Raceway Specification No. 1.
2.2 BOXES
A. Outlet boxes for installation in masonry or dry wall:

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Steel City GW 335C, or as approved.
2. Two gang, 2 1/2 inches deep.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS SECURITY CONDUIT 28 10 30 - 1 of 2

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
B. Furnish and install plaster ring, single gang adapter plates and single gang cover.
C. Furnish and install a minimum ¾” conduit from outlet box, recessed in wall, to above an accessible ceiling
and stub out. Furnish and install an insulated bushing on the end of the conduit.
2.3 WALL PLATES
A. Furnish and install blank wall plates on all security outlets. Wall plates shall be Wall Plate Specification No.
W2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install a #14 fish wire or Jet Line No. 232 pull rope in each run of conduit.
B. Where sleeves are indicated on Drawings, furnish and install a measured length of conduit, size as
indicated, capped at both ends.
A. Unless noted, security system components shall be mounted at the following heights:
1. Arm/Disarm Panel: 44 inches above finished floor.
B. Exact final locations and mounting heights for all cameras shall be coordinated with Owner’s security
equipment supplier before rough-in.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS SECURITY CONDUIT 28 10 30 - 2 of 2

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
SECTION 28 23 10 – VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work in this Section consists of the labor, materials and equipment required for furnishing and installing a
complete operating video surveillance system that is compatible with Owner’s existing video surveillance
network.
B. All items specified or included in this section shall be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor, wired
and connected by Electrical Contractor and tested by Electrical Contractor, unless noted otherwise.
“Contractor” as used herein shall mean Electrical Contractor or Electrical Contractor’s sub-contractor.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. Video Surveillance System Components.
2. Wiring and Interconnecting Diagrams and System Diagrams of all items of equipment including tie
in to existing system
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall furnish and install the following:
1. Raceways, fittings and backboxes

2. Horizontal Distribution Cabling, including jacks and terminations at cameras and at patch panels in
IDF room, as part of the data network cabling system.
3. Cameras and wall brackets.
4. System software, as required.
5. Surge protection devices as required.
6. Power circuits to video equipment.
B. Unless noted otherwise, the following items will be the responsibility of the Owner:
1. PoE network switches
2. Network Video Recorder (existing)
C. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s Information Technology personnel for acquiring IP addresses,
sub-net addresses, and gateway addresses.
D. Contactor shall coordinate with the Owner for installing remote viewing software on Owner’s PCs.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 10 - 1 of 7

1.4 Contractor shall coordinate with Owner for aiming, viewing area, and recording criteria of the video
surveillance system.
1.5 FUNCTION
A. The video surveillance system shall provide the existing system user interface display to view live video
from cameras installed in the project area, while simultaneously recording or viewing recorded images.
The cameras may be viewed in live mode or recorded and reviewed from the internal disk archives.
B. The existing Network Video Recorder (NVR) may be programmed to record images continuously, or if
desired, only when motion, alarm, or a triggered event occurs.
C. The NVR shall include two analog monitor outputs for full screen or sequenced display from the attached
analog network cameras.
D. The system shall be capable of viewing live and recorded images over a private Ethernet network via
Intranet Explorer. The DVR shall provide embedded internet web browser access for remote PCs. From
the remote site using the browser, the live video images shall be displayed in single or multi-screen format;
video displayed as single screen sequences; status of the inputs shall be displayed; remote relays shall be
controllable; and compatible PTZ cameras shall be controllable.
E. The system shall utilize open communications protocol systems to provide the ability to integrate any
manufacturer of camera to operate on system in the future, as well as provide the ability for any camera to
be monitored by authorized users at any computer monitor in the district.
F. The recorder shall provide a timeline function that allows either the selection of the camera list with the
timeline or a list of the search result. The camera list with the timeline shall contain such information as
alarm recording, motion recording, continuous recording, video loss, protected video, and areas where
there has been no recording.
G. The NVR shall be capable of recording pre-alarm video on an alarm or motion detection for a time period
from 0 to 120 seconds. Post alarm recording time shall be selectable from 0 to 999 seconds. The NVR
shall be capable of recording pre- and post-alarm from all attached cameras.
H. Video surveillance system shall be programmed and configured for the following upon alarm from access
control and intrusion detection system:
1. Increase frame rate and quality for cameras in the area of alarm
I. Each camera shall be able to record in different modes and on different schedules or using the same
schedule and configuration.
J. Local and remote interfaces shall allow easy search and retrieval of video.
K. User defined parameters shall allow searches based on the time and date the video was captured,
whether alarm, motion, or scene loss events occurred; and which camera captured the video.
L. Recording Options:
1. Record Motion, always or on schedule for each camera
2. Each camera shall be able to be set to record at different resolutions, fps, and quality
3. Each camera shall be set to record a pre and post motion buffer
4. System shall allow customizable motion recording sensitivity; the user shall create multiple motion
sensitive zones that have unique specifications.
5. Each camera shall be able to be configured for the maximum amount of disk space used for
recording.
6. The maximum file size shall be specified.
7. Create a clip by use of start and end points and then write directly to CD.

M. Rapid search by time/date for the following events: Camera, session, system, maintenance, input, output,
video-loss, recorded date and motion detection.
N. System shall be capable of being integrated with existing viewing software installed throughout the district.
O. System shall be equipped for the number of cameras as indicated including control, video storage and
power supply equipment. Cameras shall be provided as indicated.
1.7 WIRE AND CABLE
Materials.
1.8 VARIATIONS TO SPECIFIED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Any variations of materials and equipment specified shall be completely described listing all variances from
that specified. This information shall be submitted with shop drawings and product data submittals.
1.9 EQUIPMENT SELECTION
A. Contractor and equipment supplier shall be responsible for the proper selection of camera types (HD),
lenses (normal, wide angle, telescopic) for the use intended, according to camera locations indicated on
the drawings and the appropriate application for each camera.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Refer to Section 26 05 30 for raceway types and requirements.
B. Raceway for interior video surveillance system shall be Raceway Specification No. 2 in walls, above all
inaccessible ceilings, and in areas with open structure.
C. Raceway for underground video surveillance system shall be Raceway Specification No. 4.
D. Raceways above accessible ceilings shall be as noted on Drawings and as specified herein:
1. Main Cable Pathways: J-hooks or other non-continuous raceway system.
2. Branch Cable Pathways: J-hooks or other non-continuous raceway system

2.2 FIXED CAMERAS
A. Interior Fixed Camera

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Panasonic HD WV-XX 1080P Series Vandal Resistant Fixed Dome
Network Camera, or approved equal.
2. Furnish and install in interior corridors and other areas as shown on Drawings.
3. Fixed color camera
4. Scanning Mode: 1080 P Progressive Scan
5. Lens: Contractor shall furnish and install lenses as required by location and application.
a. Type: Varifocal
b. Coordinate area of coverage required at each camera location with Owner.
6. Input/Output:
a. Network Interface: 10/100 Ethernet, RJ-45 connector, IEEE 802.3af PoE compatible.
7. Power Source: 12V PoE
8. Operating Temperature: 14 degrees to 122 degrees Fahrenheit.
9. Operating Humidity: 0-90 percent, non-condensing.
10. Standards:
a. UL Listed
b. FCC Part 15 Class A
11. Housing:
a. Vandal resistant weatherproof enclosure, base and mount.
b. Dome Cover: clear polycarbonate with camera mask, impact resistant.
c. Impact Resistant: IEC 60068-2-75 test Eh, 50J / IEC 62262 IK10
12. Mounts: Furnish and install with mounts as required by location and application.
B. Exterior Fixed Camera

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Panasonic HD WV-XX 1080P Series Vandal Resistant Fixed Dome
Network Camera, or as approved.
2. Furnish and install at exterior monitored door locations and other locations as shown on Drawings.
3. Fixed color camera
4. Scanning Mode: 1080P Progressive Scan
5. Lens: Contractor shall furnish and install lenses as required by location and application.
a. Type: Varifocal
b. Coordinate area of coverage required at each camera location with Owner.
6. Input/Output:
a. Network Interface: 10/100 Ethernet, RJ-45 connector, IEEE 802.3af PoE compatible.
7. Power Source: 12V PoE
8. Operating Temperature: -22 degrees to 140 degrees Fahrenheit.
9. Operating Humidity: 0-90 percent, non-condensing.
10. Standards:
a. UL Listed
b. FCC Part 15 Class A
11. Housing:
a. Weather and vandal resistant enclosure, base and mount.
b. Dome Cover: Clear polycarbonate, impact resistant.
c. Dehumidification device.
d. Impact Resistant: IEC 60068-2-75 test Eh, 50J / IEC 62262 IK10
e. Water and Dust Resistance: IP66, IEC60529 measurement standard compatible.
f. Provide vandal resistant wall bracket where shown as wall mount.
12. Furnish and install outdoor enclosures with heater assembly and dehumidification device.

13. Mounts: Furnish and install with mounts as required by location and application:
2.3 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Power, signal and control wire and cable shall be as recommended by equipment supplier and
manufacturer.
B. Signal cables for cameras shall be Category 6 4-pair unshielded twisted pair cables as specified in Section
27 05 15, Common Requirements Telecommunications and the related Telecommunications Sections
indicated therein.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install video surveillance system in accordance with system manufacturer's instructions. Furnish and install
all equipment necessary for a complete and operable system. Final connections between equipment and
the wiring system, testing and placing system in operation, shall be completed under direct supervision of
a representative of the manufacturer. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions with operation
D. Contractor and manufacturer shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable loss of
amplitude and volume, or distortion in the system after installation has been completed.
E. Cable lines shall be laced together into separate groups from wall boxes to racks to provide a neat yet
flexible arrangement to allow racks and consoles to be pulled away from wall for rear service access.
F. Installation of video surveillance equipment shall be supervised by an accredited video engineer. Video
engineer shall be responsible to check and inspect system installation to the satisfaction of Owner.
G. All connections shall be made with suitable connectors. Splicing of cable in conduit will not be permitted.
Splicing of coaxial cable will not be permitted. Connectors shall be used for connection of all video cable to
equipment.
H. Required electronic equipment shall be rack mounted in rack type metal cabinets. All equipment shall be
protected by grounding to an approved electrical ground. All equipment shall be installed to permit access
for maintenance. All equipment shall be located to avoid interference with servicing of other nearby
equipment.
I. All cables shall be fastened securely with suitable hardware to avoid sharp bends, to prevent rubbing
against sharp corners, and in a manner to prevent damage or physical distortion.
J. All system components shall be labeled.
K. Cable shall have double shielding where two or more cables are run in the same conduit.
L. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2, except above accessible
M. Furnish and install 1 inch conduit from each wall outlet box to above accessible ceiling and turn out.

N. Furnish and install conduit above all non-lay in tile ceilings and in all other non-accessible areas in the
building.
O. Where sleeves are indicated on Drawings, furnish and install a measured length of conduit, size as
P. Cables shall be bundled by section of building, as directed by Owner.
Q. Installation shall allow for easily replacing cables in the future.
R. All video surveillance cables shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using J-hooks or other
Owner approved method and attached to building structure. Do not attach to pipes, ducts, etc. Do not
attach to wires used to support suspended ceiling grid. Do not allow cable to rest on pipes, ducts, ceiling
tiles, etc. Do not use tie wires or bridle rings.
S. All cable not in raceways shall be rated for its intended use (riser, plenum, etc.).
A. Contractor through equipment supplier shall provide three complete sets of operating instructions,
including circuit diagrams and other information, necessary for complete installation, operating and
maintenance service. One copy of this information shall be submitted for review and will be returned to
Contractor after which three copies shall be delivered to Owner upon the installation and final testing of the
equipment.
Owner's personnel in proper operation of the system.
3.3 SUPERVISION
Owner's representative on an inspection of the entire system and shall demonstrate satisfactory system
performance.
responsible for correct operation of both new and existing systems.
A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid costs of and provide Owner with a one year service contract
year. Equipment manufacturer shall make available, if requested by Owner, the option to extend the
service agreement to provide all parts, labor and mileage beyond the first year contract period.
3.5 CABLE TESTING

1. Opens
4. Transpositions
5. AC voltage
6. Lengths
3.6 SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING
A. Contractor shall include all required software (and documentation) and shall include all programming,
testing, and set-up of the system including instructing the Owner’s personnel on the use of the system, and
remote viewing using the owner’s browser software. Access to the system shall be password protected, for
local viewing, remote viewing, and for programming and up-dating. Password shall be different for viewing
and programming/updating.
B. Contractor shall provide the Owner with a complete copy of system programming as part of the Record
Documents.
A. Unless noted, video surveillance system components shall be mounted at the following heights:
1. Wall Outlets for Interior Cameras (9' 6" ceiling area): 12 inches below finished ceiling
2. Wall Outlets for Interior Cameras (other than 9' 6" ceiling areas): 10’-0” above finished floor
3. Wall Outlets for Desk, Tabletop, Etc.; Mounted Monitors: 18 inches above finished floor.
4. Wall Outlets for exterior cameras
B. Verify exact final locations and mounting heights of all wall mounted cameras with Owner and Architect
before rough-in.

SECTION 28 31 10 – FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work of this Section shall consist of labor, materials, and equipment required for furnishing and installing a
complete operating intelligent microprocessor based fire alarm system as follows:
1. Addressable Analog System: A system that shall utilize both on-off initiating devices that have
discrete identification and the on-off status individually identified and sensors that have discrete
identification and the varying degree of condition monitored. System shall not require separate
circuits for fire alarm initiation zones, but shall provide for individual initiation device annunciation.
2. Voice Evacuation: Control Panel(s) shall be equipped with the necessary hardware to allow for
evacuation signals to be delivered by spoken voice. Both standard and custom messages shall be
available as specific conditions require.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

1. All fire alarm system components.
2. Wiring and interconnecting diagrams of all items of equipment.
3. All system product and component data sheets shall have all components highlighted to indicate
the specified products, components, features, and functions. All substitute items submitted under
this contract must provide a detailed line-by-line comparison of how the submitted product meets,
exceeds, or does not comply with this specification.
4. System power and battery charts with performance graphs and voltage drop calculations to assure
that the system will operate per the prescribed backup time periods and under all voltage
conditions per UL and NFPA standards.
5. Product certification signed by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system components certifying that
their products comply with the requirements of the project and all codes and regulations.
6. Certificate bearing the system designer’s signature and NICET III certification number certifying
that the design complies with the requirements of the project and applicable codes, regulations and
standards.
B. Upon approval of fire alarm submittals, Engineer will provide Electrical Contractor with deferred submittal
letter per Pennsylvania UCC requirements. Electrical Contractor shall submit approved drawings along
with deferred submittal letter to the AHJ for final approval.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Fire alarm control panel shall contain supervised digital communicator for connection to an off-site
monitoring station. Modules shall notify off- site monitoring for both alarm and trouble separately.
Contractor shall coordinate with Owner and fire alarm equipment supplier for central station monitoring
agreement.
B. Furnish and install wiring from fire alarm panel to elevator control panels in elevator equipment room and
make connections. Elevator installer will perform all work required on elevator control system for fireman’s
return. Coordinate with elevator installer.
C. Furnish and install wiring between the fire alarm control panel and the Elevator Power Disconnect Module
for elevator shunt trip shut-down and for monitoring elevator shunt trip voltage.
MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 10 - 1 of 16

D. Furnish, install, and wire four (4) fire alarm relay modules for each elevator controller. Relay modules shall
be for Shunt, Primary Recall, Secondary Recall, and Service.
E. OS&Y valves with supervisory switch and water flow switches will be furnished and installed as Work of
Division 21 and shall be wired as Work of this Section. Electrical contractor shall furnish and install fire
alarm monitor module for each tamper and flow switch.
F. Electric alarm bell will be furnished and installed as Work of Division 21 and wired as Work of this Section.
Electrical Contractor shall furnish, install, and wire fire alarm relay module for electric alarm bell.
G. Duct smoke detectors for the control of mechanical equipment shall be installed in air ducts, where
indicated on Drawings. Furnish duct smoke detectors and furnish and install remote relay modules and fire
alarm system wiring. Installation of duct smoke detector will be by HVAC. Wiring from detector to remote
relay module for control of mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor.
Wiring from the remote relay module for control of mechanical equipment will be furnished and installed as
Work of Division 23. Coordinate location of duct smoke detector with HVAC Contractor.
H. Gas solenoid valves will be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Contractor. Furnish and install relay
modules as indicated and required to shut off gas valves in laboratories, kitchen, laundry, etc. Coordinate
valve wiring requirements with Plumbing Contractor.
I. Existing fire alarm equipment shall be maintained fully operational until the specified equipment has been
tested and accepted. Existing and specified fire alarm equipment shall be integrated as one system until
the existing equipment is completely disconnected.
J. Connection of new wiring to existing fire alarm panel shall be responsibility of Electrical Contractor and
shall be approved by and coordinated with Owner. Loss of detection on existing system shall be kept to a
minimum during construction. Fire alarm system shall not be disabled except when workers are physically
present making wiring changes. Local fire department shall be advised of changeover procedures to avoid
fire department responses to false alarms. Contractor shall be responsible for paying any fines levied
against Owner which are a result of false alarms on existing systems.
K. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the specified fire alarm system in each area, disconnect and
remove the existing fire alarm equipment and exposed wiring and, unless noted, patch existing surfaces as
required to match surroundings. Existing wiring above accessible ceilings shall be considered as
“exposed.”
1. Contractor shall dispose of existing equipment, devices, appliances, wire and cable as required by
local authorities.
A. Furnish and install a complete intelligent, addressable fire alarm system as described herein and as shown
on the Drawings; to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. Include a control panel,
manual pull stations (fire alarm boxes), automatic fire and smoke detectors, horns, annunciator, remote
control devices, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary
material for a complete operating system.
1.5 FUNCTION
A. When an alarm is initiated at the fire alarm control panel, the audible alarm devices shall sound and visual
alarm devices shall provide notification throughout the protected premises and notify off-site monitoring
station.
B. The system shall be capable of being reset by use of the reset switch located at the fire alarm control
panel(s) and on remote annunciators.
C. Power failure, an open circuit, or other abnormal conditions shall cause audible trouble signal(s) to sound
and visual trouble lamp(s) to light at the fire alarm panel(s) and on remote annunciators and notify the off-
site monitoring station. Audible trouble signal(s) may be silenced but visual trouble lamp(s) shall remain lit
until the trouble condition(s) is/are corrected and restored to normal.

D. Fire alarm system shall signal elevator control, upon an alarm condition, to cause all elevators to move to
the floor (either preferred or alternate) designated by the AHJ and to stop. During these conditions the
elevator shall be under manual operation. Provide override of this signal for testing and drills.
E. Smoke detectors in elevator lobbies, hoistways, and machine rooms upon being activated, shall cause
audible alarm to be initiated at the fire alarm control panel, and shall signal elevator control to cause all
elevators to move to the AHJ’s designated floor (either preferred or alternate) and to stop. Provide three
(3) zones; Zone 1 – primary recall landing; Zone 2 – typical landings; Zone 3 – elevator machine
room/hoist way. During these conditions, the elevator shall be under manual operation.
F. Activation of a heat detector in hoistway(s) or elevator machine room(s) shall activate shunt trip in the
elevator power disconnect module(s) and shut down power to the elevator(s).
G. Upon sensing smoke in air ducts, duct smoke detector(s) shall activate remote relay module(s) and cause
alarm to be initiated at the fire alarm control panel. Remote relay modules(s), where connected to smoke
dampers, shall have a normally closed contact to open upon detector activation and stop voltage to smoke
damper motors causing dampers to close. Remote relay modules(s), where connected to air handler
control circuits, shall have a normally closed contact to open upon detector activation and open air handler
control circuit causing air handler to shut-down.
H. OS&Y valve supervisory switch activation (closing of an OS&Y valve) shall cause a supervisory signal to
be transmitted to the fire alarm control panel and a local signal to sound.
I. Water flow switch in the sprinkler main shall, when activated, cause alarm to be initiated at the fire alarm
control panel.
J. Activation of a flow switch in the sprinkler branch piping of each floor, when activated, shall cause an alarm
to be initiated at the fire alarm control panel. Indication shall be provided at the fire alarm control panel on
to indicate which floor water flow switch has been activated.
K. Owner will provide for off-site monitoring or on-site central monitoring under separate contract. Electrical
Contractor shall furnish and install wiring (either copper or fiber optic, as indicated, and jacks) between fire
alarm control panel and telecom service entrance backboard and make all connections as required.
Coordinate dial-tone with Owner. Fire alarm equipment supplier shall provide all programming necessary
to allow the digital communicator to transmit to the central monitoring station.
L. Specified fire alarm equipment shall be correlated to existing equipment and both new and existing
equipment throughout the building shall operate as a single, complete fire alarm system.
M. Priority of Signals:
1. Fire alarm events have highest priority.
2. Subsequent alarm events are queued in the order received and do not affect existing alarm
conditions.
3. Priority Two, Supervisory and Trouble events have second-, third-, and fourth-level priority
respectively.
4. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the
lower-priority condition occurred first.
5. Annunciate all events regardless of priority or order received.
6. Mass notification notices shall override all audible signals for the duration of the emergency
announcement. Upon termination of the emergency announcement(s) the fire alarm events shall
resume until silenced or reset at the fire alarm control panel.
N. Non-interfering:
1. An event on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone.
2. All zones shall be manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or devices are
restored to normal.
3. The activation of an addressable device shall not prevent the receipt of signals from subsequent
addressable device activations.

O. Transmission to Remote Central Station:

1. Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote central station service as
provided by Owner under another contract.
2. System shall be capable of transmitting specific point data to the central station including type of
alarm (smoke, heat, manual, sprinkler, etc.) and location within the building.
P. Annunciation:
1. Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated at the FACP and the
remote annunciator, indicating the location and type of device.
2. It shall be possible through programming to annunciate conditions from other control panels
connected to the fire alarm network at any network node.
Q. Voice Evacuation – The system shall include all equipment necessary for voice evacuation as directed by
the Owner and AHJ.
1. Voice evacuation messages shall include both pre-recorded messages and override for live
evacuation or emergency mass notification messages.
2. Pre-recorded messages, voice evacuation messages shall be initiated automatically and be
operator selectable for all-call, by building and by zone.
3. The following is a general configuration of tones and messages for the system. Contractor shall
coordinate the use of tones, voice evacuation messages and mass notification announcements
with the Owner prior to submittal for review.
a. Evacuation tones or voice evacuation shall be initiated by the fire alarm system for
evacuation alarms as directed by the Owner and AHJ.
b. Emergency announcements shall be initiated by an operator at the Central Station or at the
fire alarm control panel.
A. The fire alarm system shall be furnished and installed to be in compliance with applicable codes and
regulations. Due to there being differences (loudness, brightness, spacing requirements, etc.) between
various fire alarm system components, it shall be the Electrical Contractor and the fire alarm system
supplier’s responsibility to review the Contract Documents (Specifications and Drawings) in depth and
modify the component and device lay-out to ensure the furnished and installed system complies with
applicable codes and regulations.
B. Each and all items of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm system
manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the
"U.L." label. All control equipment is to be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial
listing shall not be acceptable.
C. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification shall be provided by a
manufacturer who has been engaged in production of this type of equipment for at least ten (10) years,
and has a fully equipped service organization within fifty (50) miles of the installation. A list of five (5)
references of similar installations within fifty (50) miles of this project shall be provided upon request.
D. The organization furnishing and installing this equipment shall employ factory trained and NICET certified
technicians, and shall provide a list of certified technicians indicating current certification status upon
request.
E. All control equipment shall have transient protection devices to comply with UL864 requirements.
F. In addition to the UL UOJZ requirement mentioned above, the system controls shall be UL listed for Power
Limited Applications per NEC 760. All circuits must be marked in accordance with NEC article 760 10.
G. Wire and cable shall be safety and application tested, performance tested and shall have this information
and the manufacturer’s information affixed to the wire and cable as specified in Section 26 05 10, Basic
Materials

A. The equipment shall be supplied by a manufacturer-certified engineering distributor. Manufacturer’s written

replacement parts, and is capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the equipment.
C. Equipment suppliers employing personnel for local service on a “contract basis” will not be acceptable.
D. Equipment supplier shall employ factory trained and NICET Level III Certified technicians.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish and turn over to Owner extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage,
and identified with labels clearly describing contents as follows:
1. Visual Alarm (strobes) and Recessed Ceiling Speaker Units: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of
the number of each type of units installed, but not less than two.
2. Pull Station Lexan Shields with Sounders: Furnish six.
1.9 ABANDONED FIRE ALARM CABLES
A. Electrical Contractor shall remove the accessible portions of all existing fire alarm cables and as otherwise
required by the National Electrical Code.
B. “Abandoned Fire Alarm Cables” shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Siemens XLS/XLSV Series fire alarm control panel, to be compatible with
existing equipment within the facility. No substitutions. Equipment supplier shall be Berkshire Systems
Group, Inc. (610) 775-1200.
B. Listing: UL Listed to UL Std. 864, Fire Detection and Control (UOJZ).
C. Power limited base panel with cabinet and door, 120 VAC, 60 HZ input power.
D. Minimum of 250 addressable point capacity per node inclusive of inputs and outputs in any combination.
E. Minimum of 250 points of annunciation where one (1) point of annunciation of equals one (1) output or 1
switch input on an I/O module.
F. Connectivity: Minimum of four (4) RS -232-C control and communications ports, Ethernet port for remote
installation, programming, and troubleshooting
G. Supervised serial communication channel for control and monitoring of remotely located LCD annunciators
and I/O panels.
H. System shall include a Digital Alarm Communicating Transmitter (DACT), capable of reception and
transmission of any system-wide activity.
I. Integral power supply and battery charger.

J. Cabinet: Steel, with a locking, transparent front door. 24” wide, height as required for application.
K. Mounting: Surface-mounted.
L. Front panel controls for testing, operation and maintenance from the front of the enclosure.
M. Alphanumeric display and system controls:

1. Minimum 80 character LCD display to indicate alarm supervisory, and component status messages
2. Keypad for use in entering and executing commands
N. System Operations
1. A system alarm shall include:
a. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP and the annunciator(s).
b. Identification of the device /zone that is the source of the alarm at the FACP and the
annunciator(s).
c. Transmission of alarm signal to remote central station.
d. Operation of audible and visible notification devices until silenced at FACP.
e. Closing doors normally held open by magnetic door holders.
f. Shutting down supply and return fans serving zone where alarm is initiated.
g. Notifying the local fire department.
h. Initiation of elevator recall in accordance with ASME/ANSI A17.1, when specified detectors
or detectors are activated.
i. Recording of the event in the FACP historical log.
2. A supervisory alarm from a supervisory device shall include:
a. Activation of the system supervisory service audible signal and illumination of the LED at the
FACP and the remote annunciator.
b. Record the event in the FACP historical log.
c. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station.
d. Correction of the condition shall cause the supervisory LED to clear and restore the system
to normal.
3. Alarm Silence, when activated from the FACP or annunciator shall cause all audible alarm signals
to cease operation.
4. System Reset shall be used to return the system to its normal state. The system shall verify all
circuits or devices are restored prior to resetting the system to avoid the potential for re-alarming
the system.
a. Display messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps involved in reset
as they occur.
b. Should an alarm condition continue, the system shall remain in an alarmed state.
5. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the notification appliances without
causing other control circuits to be activated. Transmission to the central station shall be
suppressed during manual evacuation.
6. The system shall have the capacity of eight (8) programmable pass code protected one person
testing groups, such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing. Test mode
shall operate as follows:
a. The central station connection and any suppression release circuits shall be bypassed for
the testing group.
b. Control relay functions associated with the testing groups shall be bypassed.
c. The control unit shall indicate a trouble condition.
d. The alarm activation of any initiation device in the testing group shall cause the audible
notification appliances assigned only to that group to sound a code to identify the device or
zone.
e. The unit shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete.
f. Any opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible
signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition.
O. Distributed Module Operation: FACP shall be capable of allowing remote location of the following
modules. Interface of such modules shall be through a supervised serial communications channel (SLC):
1. Amplifiers, voice and telephone control circuits
2. Addressable Signaling Line Circuits

3. Initiating Device Circuits

4. Notification Appliance Circuits
5. Auxiliary Control Circuits
6. Graphic Annunciator LED/Switch Control Modules
P. Power Requirements
1. The control unit shall receive AC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit.
2. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss
of normal AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 15 minutes of alarm
operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to battery standby upon
power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.
3. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the
control unit.
4. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure will be indicated at
the control unit. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously at the user interface while
incoming power is present.
5. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery or a depleted battery condition, or
disconnection of the battery shall be indicated at the control unit and displayed for the specific fault
type.
6. The system shall support 100 percent of addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same
time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.
7. Loss of primary power shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP. The FACP shall indicate when the
system is operating on an alternate power supply.
Q. Analog Smoke Sensors

1. The FACP shall individually monitor sensors for calibration, sensitivity and alarm condition, and
shall individually adjust for sensitivity. The control unit shall determine the condition of each sensor
by comparing the sensor value to the stored values.
2. The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the sensor's smoke chamber value to automatically
compensate for dust, dirt, and other conditions that could affect detection operations.
3. Photoelectric smoke sensors shall have 7 selectable sensitivity levels ranging from 0.2% to 3.7%,
programmed and monitored from the FACP.
4. The FACP shall provide sensor reports that meet NFPA 72 calibrated test method requirements.
The reports shall be viewed on a display or printed for annual recording and logging of the
calibration maintenance schedule.
5. The FACP shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. The system
shall provide a means to automatically indicate when a sensor requires cleaning.
a. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined value, 3 progressive levels of
reporting are provided.
b. The first level shall indicate if a sensor is close to a trouble reporting condition and will be
indicated on the FACP. This condition provides a means to alert maintenance staff of a
sensor approaching dirty condition without creating a trouble in the system.
c. If this indicator is ignored and the second level is reached, a "DIRTY SENSOR" condition
shall be indicated at the FACP. The sensor base LED shall glow steady giving a visible
indication at the sensor location. The "DIRTY SENSOR" condition shall not affect the
sensitivity level required to alarm the sensor.
d. If a "DIRTY SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a third
predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be
indicated at the FACP.
6. The FACP shall continuously perform an automatic self-test on each sensor which will check
sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted. Any sensor that fails
this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition.
7. It shall be possible to program relay and sounder bases to operate independently of their
associated sensor.

R. Fire Suppression Monitoring

1. Water Flow: Activation of a water flow switch shall initiate general alarm operations.
2. Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switch: The activation of any valve tamper switch shall activate system
supervisory operations.
3. Water flow switches and sprinkler valve tamper switches shall be capable of existing on the same
initiating zone. Activation of any device shall distinctly report which device is in alarm on the
initiating zone.
S. Software
1. The FACP shall allow for loading or editing special instructions and operating sequences as
required. The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate expansion, building
parameter changes, or changes as required by local codes. All software operations shall be stored
in a non-volatile programmable memory within the FACP. Loss of primary and secondary power
shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.
2. The ability for selective input/output control functions based on Boolean logic– (ANDing, Oring,
NOTing), timing and special coded operations shall be incorporated in the resident software
programming of the system.
3. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, initiation circuits shall be individually configurable
on-site to provide either alarm/trouble operation, alarm only, trouble only, current limited alarm, no
alarm, normally closed device monitoring, a non-latching circuit or a alarm verification circuit.
4. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, notification appliance circuits shall be individually
configurable on-site to provide, upon activation, a temporal code until silenced or reset, upon any
output circuit.
5. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, all hard-wired initiation and control circuits shall be
individually configurable, on-site, in any combination, to provide initiating circuit, notification circuit,
or auxiliary control circuit operation.
T. History Logs: The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological
order for the purpose of recreating an event history. A separate alarm and trouble log shall be provided.
U. Recording of Events: Record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events by means of a system printer. The
printout shall include the type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), the device identification, date and
time of the occurrence. The printout shall differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications.
V. Storage: Panel shall have dedicated compact flash memory for archiving of status and event logs.
W. Voice Alarm:
1. Provide an emergency communication system, integral with the FACP, including voice alarm
system components, microphones, amplifiers, and tone generators.
2. Amplifiers
a. Amplifiers comply with UL 1711, Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
b. Amplifiers shall provide an onboard local mode temporal coded horn tone as a default
backup tone.
c. Test switches on the amplifier shall be provided to test and observe amplifier backup
switchover.
d. Each amplifier shall communicate to the host panel amplifier and NAC circuit voltage and
current levels for display on the user interface.
e. Dual alarm channels shall permit simultaneous transmission of different announcements to
different zones or floors automatically or by use of the central control microphone. All
announcements shall be made over dedicated, supervised communication lines.
f. Eight channel digitally multiplexed audio for systems that require more than two channels of
simultaneous audio. Up to 8 channels of audio shall be multiplexed on either a Style 4 or
Style 7 twisted pair.
g. Emergency voice communication audio controller module shall provide up to 32 minutes of
message memory for digitally stored messages. Provide supervised connections for master
microphone and up to 5 remote microphones.
h. Status annunciator indicating the status of the various voice alarm speaker zones and the
status of firefighter telephone two-way communication zones.

3. Manual Voice Paging

a. The system shall be configured to allow voice paging. Upon activation of any speaker
manual control switch, the alarm tone shall be sounded over all speakers in that group.
b. The control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the push-to-talk
paging microphone over the pre-selected speakers.
c. Facility for total building paging shall be accomplished by the means of an "All Call" switch.
2.2 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT (NAC) POWER EXTENDER PANEL
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as FACP manufacturer, or as approved.
B. Input Voltage: 120VAC.
C. The NAC power extender panel shall be a stand-alone panel capable of powering a minimum of 4
notification appliance circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be Class B Style Y, rated at 2 amps
each.
D. The internal power supply & battery charger shall be capable of charging up to 12 Ah batteries, internally
mounted.
E. NAC Power Extender Panel shall be connected to the addressable loop (SLC), and notification appliance
circuits shall be selectively activated by this connection.
F. Alarms from the host fire panel shall signal the NAC power extender panel to activate. The panel shall
monitor itself and each of its notification appliance circuits for trouble conditions and shall report trouble
conditions to the host panel.
G. NAC power extender panel shall be a standard product offering of the fire alarm system manufacturer.
2.3 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOX (PULL STATION)
B. Manual addressable pull station.
C. Single-action or double action push-pull type to match existing devices.
D. Break-glass type stations are not acceptable.
E. Construction: Red LEXAN
F. Molded raised-letter identification and operating instructions of contrasting color.
G. Mechanical latch upon operation.
H. Key operated manual reset.
I. Keying common with control units.
J. Communication transmitter and receiver.
K. Unique identification.
L. Capability for status reporting to the FACP.
M. Furnish and install a tamperproof, clear LEXAN protective shield and red frame over manual pull stations.
1. Protective shield shall include a battery operated sounder, activated by opening cover.
N. Furnish and install a protective wire guard over all stations as indicated on the drawings.

2.4 DETECTION DEVICES
B. Smoke Detector
1. Photoelectric type.
2. UL listed to with UL 268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
3. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification.
4. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore
normal operation.
6. LED indicator:
a. Flash when scanned by FACP.
b. Steady during alarm condition.
7. Magnetically actuated test switch.
8. Communication transmitter and receiver
9. Unique identification.
10. Capability for status reporting to the FACP.
11. Detector address shall be located in base to eliminate false addressing when replacing detectors.
12. Relay base
13. Detector electronics shall include:
a. Environmental compensation
b. Programmable sensitivity settings
c. Status testing
d. Monitoring of detector dirt accumulation
e. Detector type identification.
14. Detector status shall be communicated to the FACP during each polling cycle.
15. The detector's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.
C. Duct Detector
1. Duct smoke detector housing.
2. Detector head as specified above
3. Sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific
duct size and installation conditions where applied.
4. Relay control trouble indicator Yellow LED.
5. Transparent cover to monitor for the presence of smoke.
6. Cover shall secure to housing by means of captive fastening screws.
7. Two (2) test ports for measuring airflow and for testing. These ports shall allow aerosol injection in
order to test the activation of the duct smoke detector.
8. Magnetic test area and red detector status LED.
9. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes by
accessing them through the duct housing front cover.
10. Remote Indicator and Test Station
a. Single gang wall mount
b. Alarm indicator LED
c. Keyed test switch.
11. Supervised relay contact drivers for connection to remote relay(s) for control of air handlers, fans
and dampers as required by code.
a. Remote Relay

1) Fully encapsulated circuitry with wire leads for connection to fire alarm circuits and
equipment.
2) Addressable with fully programmable output.
3) End of line resistors as required.
4) Furnish and install in a separate back box within three feet of the equipment to be
controlled.
2.5 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT INTERFACE MODULE
B. Addressable circuit interface modules will be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet box.
Modules shall include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting.
C. Modules shall receive their operating power from the signaling line or a separate two wire pair running
from an appropriate power supply as required.
D. Fire Alarm Monitor Module

1. Furnish and install for all system components that are not otherwise equipped for addressable
communication. Modules shall be used for monitoring of water flow, valve tamper and all other non-
addressable devices.
2. Individually addressable that has both its power and its communications supplied by the two wire
multiplexing signaling line circuit.
3. Location specific addressability to a fire alarm initiating device by monitoring normally open dry
contacts.
4. Location specific addressability for up to five supervisory devices by monitoring normally closed or
normally open dry contacts.
5. Capability of communicating four zone status conditions (normal, alarm, current limited, trouble) to
the FACP.
E. Fire Alarm Relay Module

1. Furnish and install for all devices which require a change of state during fire alarm conditions.
Modules shall be used for control of air handlers, smoke dampers, elevators, door holders, etc.
2. Individually addressable that has both its power and its communications supplied by the two wire
multiplexing signaling line circuit.
3. Location specific addressability to a fire alarm point of control.
4. All circuit interface modules shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control unit. Module
identification shall be transmitted to the control unit for processing according to the program
instructions.
5. On-board LED to provide an indication that the module is powered and communicating with the
FACP. The LEDs shall provide a troubleshooting aid since the LED blinks on poll whenever the
peripheral is powered and communicating.
2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Same as FACP manufacturer, or as approved.
B. Speaker/Strobe (A/V) Appliance

1. Listed to UL 1971 and UL 1480.
2. 24 VDC, supplied by the FACP.
3. Driven by a 25 or 70 VRMS supervised audio circuit.
4. Wall or ceiling mounted as indicated on Drawings.
5. Red in color where wall-mounted, White in color when ceiling-mounted.

6. Strobe Light: Xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system, with selectable minimum flash
intensities of 15 cd, 75 cd and 110 cd, and shall be capable of synchronized operation.
7. Speaker Component: Field selectable taps over the minimum range of 1/2 watt to 2 watts, and shall
have a minimum frequency range of 400 Hz to 4000 Hz. Listed sound output level shall be within
the range of 75 to 92 dB minimally.
8. Notification appliance circuit shall provide synchronization of strobes at a rate of 1 Hz. The
capability to synchronize multiple notification appliance circuits shall be provided.
9. Furnish and install wire guards for devices installed in Gymnasium.
C. Strobe Only (V/O) Appliance

1. Listed to UL 1971.
2. 24 VDC, supplied by the FACP.
3. Wall or ceiling mounted as indicated on Drawings.
4. Red in color.
5. Strobe Light: Xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system, with selectable minimum flash
intensities of 15 cd, 75 cd and 110 cd, and shall be capable of synchronized operation.
6. Enclosure shall mount directly to a standard single gang, double gang or 4 inch square electrical
box without the use of special adapters or trim rings.
7. Notification appliance circuit shall provide synchronization of strobes at a rate of 1 Hz. The
capability to synchronize multiple notification appliance circuits shall be provided.
8. Furnish and install wire guards for devices installed in Gymnasium.
D. Speaker Appliance
1. Listed to UL 1971 and UL 1480.
2. Driven by a 25 or 70 VRMS supervised audio circuit.
3. Wall or ceiling mounted as indicated on Drawings. Wall mounted speakers shall be furnished in a
square enclosure. Ceiling mounted speakers shall be furnished in a round enclosure.
4. White in color.
5. Speaker: Field selectable taps over the minimum range of 1/2 watt to 2 watts and shall have a
minimum frequency range of 400 Hz to 4000 Hz. Listed sound output level shall be within the
range of 75 to 92 dB minimally.
2.7 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and cable type, quantity and size shall be as directed by the fire alarm system equipment supplier.
B. Wiring/Signal Transmission:
1. Transmission shall be hard-wired, using separate individual circuits for each zone of alarm
operation as required or addressable signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only.
2. Connections for initiating device circuits shall be Class B/Style B.
3. Connections for notification appliance circuits shall be Class B/Style Y.
4. Connections for signaling line circuits shall be as directed by manufacturer.
5. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at the FACP. Provide a
distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation.
C. Wire and cable shall be a type listed for its intended use by an approval agency acceptable to the Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate articles from the current
approved edition of NFPA 70: National Electric Code (NEC).
D. Contractor, through the equipment supplier, shall obtain from the fire alarm system Manufacturer written
instruction regarding the appropriate wire/cable to be used for this installation. No deviation from the

written instruction shall be made by the Contractor without the prior written approval of the fire alarm
system manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA standards and system manufacturer’s instructions.
Furnish and install all equipment necessary for a complete and operable system. Final connections
between equipment and the wiring system, testing, and placing system in operation shall be completed
under direct supervision of a representative of the manufacturer. Submit manufacturer’s printed installation
instruction, with operation and maintenance data at completion of Work.
B. Installation personnel shall be supervised by persons who are qualified and experienced in the installation,
inspection, and testing of fire alarm systems. Examples of qualified personnel shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
1. Factory trained and certified personnel.
2. National Institute of Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) fire alarm level II certified
personnel.
3. Personnel licensed or certified by state or local authority.
C. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until all major construction and clean-up have been completed
(substantial completion). After major construction and clean-up have been completed, dust covers shall be
installed on all smoke detectors until acceptance by Owner. For analog addressable systems, the
sensitivity of all smoke sensors shall be evaluated for the area where the detector is installed and the
detectors shall be cleaned as required.
D. Smoke detectors shall be installed at a minimum distance of 3 feet from air diffusers.
E. All wires shall be marked at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and terminations. All wiring
F. Equipment, devices, wire and cable damaged during installation shall be removed and replaced at no
additional cost to Owner.
G. Contractor and equipment supplier shall correct any condition producing cross talk, appreciable loss of
volume, or distortion in the system after installation has been completed.
H. Color Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one
color code for alarm initiating device circuits wiring and a different color code for supervisory circuits.
Color-code notification appliance circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Paint fire alarm system
junction boxes and covers red.
I. Mark all fire alarm system disconnecting means in red and permanently identify the location of the
disconnecting means at all fire alarm panels. Handle locking devices shall be installed on all breakers
serving fire alarm system components.
J. Power for fire alarm panel(s) shall be taken from the load side of automatic transfer switch. Operating
power shall be taken from neutral and one phase wire and supervisory power shall be taken from neutral
and one of the other phase wires.
K. All interior wiring shall be installed in raceways, Raceway Specification No. 2.
L. Furnish and install 1 inch conduit from each wall outlet box to above accessible ceilings and turn out.
M. Furnish and install conduit above all non-lay-in tile ceilings and in all non-accessible areas in the building.

N. Furnish and install conduit sleeves as indicated on Drawings and as required to install all cables. Refer to
Drawings for additional conduit sleeve requirements. Cap all unused conduit sleeves at both ends.
Firestop all wall and floor penetrations [in rated structures] as indicated in Section 26 05 05, Basic
Materials.
O. Installation shall allow for easily replacing cables in the future.
P. All signal cable shall be installed neatly above accessible ceilings using J-hooks or other approved method
and attached to building structure. Fire alarm wire and cable shall be installed in dedicated raceways and
cable supports separate from other low voltage system cables.
Q. Do not attach to pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. Do not allow cable to rest on pipes, conduits, ducts, ceiling
tiles, etc. Do not attach to wires used for supporting suspended ceilings. Do not use tie wires or bridle
rings.
R. All cable not in raceways shall be rated plenum, riser, etc.

1. Opens
4. Transpositions
5. AC voltage
6. Lengths
B. All abnormalities found shall be corrected prior to energizing system.
3.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING
A. Contractor, through equipment supplier, shall provide three complete sets of operating instructions,
including circuit diagrams and other information, necessary for complete installation, operation, and
maintenance service to include all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. One
copy of this information shall be submitted for review and will be returned to Contractor after which three
copies shall be delivered to Owner upon the installation and final testing of the equipment. A list of all input
and output points in the system shall be provided with a label indicating location or use of IDC, NAC, relay,
sensor, and auxiliary control circuits.
B. Upon acceptance of the system by Owner and the authority have jurisdiction (AHJ), Contractor, through
equipment supplier, shall provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to
demonstrate the system and train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below.
1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance of the system.
2. Schedule training with the Owner at least seven days in advance.
C. Provide the names, addresses and telephone numbers of the manufacturer’s authorized service
organization.

3.4 SUPERVISION
Owner’s representative on an inspection of the entire system, and shall demonstrate satisfactory system
performance.
supervision of the manufacturer’s representative. Final tests and checks shall be completed in the
presence of the Owner’s representative.
C. Contractor and equipment supplier shall assume complete responsibility for equipment and services
supplied, and for complete supervision of system installation and correction of all malfunctions. Contractor
and equipment supplier shall be responsible for correct operation of both the specified and existing
systems.
A. Electrical Contractor shall include in Base Bid cost of and shall provide Owner with a [one] [two] year
service contract effective from the date of acceptance of the Work. Service contract shall provide for
maintenance and inspection service for the complete system. Provide a minimum of two inspections during
the contract year. Inspections shall include all visual inspection points as required by the NFPA 72 (latest
edition) and as required by the system manufacturer. Equipment supplier shall make available, and if
requested by Owner, the option to extend the service agreement, to provide all parts, labor and mileage
beyond the first year contract period.
A. Unless noted otherwise, fire alarm system components shall be mounted at the following heights. Where
a range of heights is given, the Contractor shall install all devices and appliances of the same type at the
same height throughout the building:
1. Manual fire alarm boxes (pull stations): The operable part of each manual fire alarm box shall not
be lower than 42 inches above finished floor and not be higher than 48 inches above finished floor.
2. Fire Alarm Visual Devices: No part of the lens of the devices shall be lower than 80 inches above
finished floor, and not higher than 96 inches above finished floor. Where low ceiling heights do not
allow for 80” mounting height, device shall be mounted less than 6 inches below finished ceiling.
3. Fire Alarm Audible Devices: No part of the speaker of the devices shall be lower than 90 inches
above finished floor, or less than 6 inches below finished ceiling.
4. Fire Alarm Audible/Visual Devices:
a. Individual audible/visual devices shall be installed in accordance with their respective
requirements as indicated above.
b. Combination audible/visual devices shall be installed in accordance with the requirement of
the fire alarm visual device as indicated above.
5. Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel: 48 inches above finished floor to the top most control device within
the unit. Coordinate exact location and height with the AHJ and Architect before rough-in.
6. Remote Alarm Indicators/Test Stations: 48 inches above finished floor to the top of the test switch,
in the immediate vicinity of the detector indicated.
7. Knox Box: Coordinate with the AHJ and Architect.
3.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris from all fire alarm system components and
devices. Clean all smoke detector units internally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer. Vacuum clean the interiors of all control panels.

B. Within one year of date of acceptances, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and adjusting
controls and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to the site for this
purpose.
A. Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and
connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.
B. Service personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the inspection, testing, and maintenance of fire
alarm systems. Examples of qualified personnel shall be permitted to include, but shall not be limited to,
individuals with the following qualifications:
1. Factory trained and certified.
2. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) fire alarm certified.
3. International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA) fire alarm certified.
4. Certified by a state or local authority.
5. Trained and qualified personnel employed by an organization listed by a national testing laboratory
for the servicing of fire alarm systems.
C. All devices shall be programmed into the system and verified to ensure the programming is correct. It shall
be the Contractors and fire alarm equipment suppliers joint responsibility to verify and ensure that all fire
alarm system components and devices (pull stations, detectors, water flow switches, etc.) are installed,
connected to the fire alarm system wiring and operating properly. Contractor and supplier shall take
whatever means necessary to accomplish this and provide to Owner written documentation indicating that
this has been performed and method(s) used to verify this.
D. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications and NFPA. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged
items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.
E. The completed fire alarm system shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 by the system
manufacturer’s authorized representative, in the presence of the Owner’s representative and, if required,
the local AHJ. Three copies of computer generated or typewritten testing report shall be submitted,
indicating each device tested, type of test performed, and test result. Control panels, remote processing
units, and annunciators shall also be tested and list measured battery voltages with and without charger,
supply voltage, and circuit breaker number and location. Handwritten reports will not be accepted for this
final inspection report.
F. Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.
G. Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72.
H. Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by
the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards.
I. Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log and include
Final Test, Certificate of Completion, and Certificate of Occupancy.
J. Test the system as required by the authority having jurisdiction in order to obtain a certificate of
occupancy.
K. Provide the Owner with a point identification (or zone) print-out and verify with Owner that the point
identification matches exactly the area served.

17-YCST-01 YORK COUNTY SCHOOL OF
TECHNOLOGY – GYMNASIUM
ADDITION
SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING (Clearing and Grubbing)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to:
1. Clearing
2. Grubbing
3. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil
4. Debris disposal
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Earth Moving (Site Excavation and Placement of Fill Material): Section 31 20 00.00
2. Earth Moving (Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting): Section 31 20 00.02
3. Earth Moving (Roadway Excavation, Fill, and Compaction): Section 31 20 00.00
4. Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Controls: Section 31 25 00
5. Soil Preparation (Performance Specification): Section 32 91 15
C. Definitions:
1. Clearing is defined as the removal of trees, brush, down timber, rotten wood, rubbish, any
above original ground elevation not designated to be saved. Clearing also includes
removal of fences, walls, guard posts, guiderail, signs, and other obstructions interfering
with the proposed work.
2. Grubbing is defined as the removal from below the surface of the natural ground of
stumps, roots and stubs, brush, organic materials and debris.
D. Applicable Standard Details: NONE
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE - Section not utilized
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Permits:
1. Submit two copies of each on-site burning permit if such permits are required.
2. For off-site disposal, submit two copies of the agreement with each property OWNER
releasing the OWNER and ENGINEER from responsibility in connection with the disposal
of the debris, and permits or approvals from regulatory agencies.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The CONTRACTOR may clear all obstructions within the construction limits or permanent and
construction rights-of-way except those specifically designated to be saved or restored on the
Contract Drawings or Specifications.
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1

(Clearing and Grubbing)
Copyright © 2018 by the American Institute of Architects. Warning: This AIA MasterSpec based document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. It was created by "MM Architects, Inc." for "YORK COUNTY SCHOOL OF TECHNOLOGY – GYMNASIUM ADDITION". A valid, current MasterSpec license is
required for editing: and use of this document for any other project.(5133)
ADDITION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Temporary Fencing:
1. Undamaged picket snow fence, 4' high, formed of wooden slats, tightly woven with wire
cable or light weight orange polyethylene barricade fence with 1”-2” by 3”- 4” openings.
2. Soil-set fence posts, studded "T" type, 6' high.
B. Tree Wound Dressing:
1. Antiseptic and waterproof, asphalt base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Notify the ENGINEER and regulatory agencies at least 72 hours prior to beginning any clearing
work.
B. Protect benchmarks, utilities, existing trees, shrubs and other landscape features designated for
preservation with temporary fencing or barricades satisfactory to the ENGINEER. No material
shall be stored or construction operation carried on within 4-feet of any tree to be saved or
within the tree protection fence.
C. When a private enclosure fence encroaches on the work area, notify the property OWNER at
least 5 days in advance of the clearing/grubbing operations to permit the OWNER to remove it,
construct a supplemental fence, or make such other arrangements as may be necessary for
security purposes. Upon failure of the property OWNER to reasonably proceed with the work
required to secure his property, carefully remove the fence, in whole or in part and neatly pile
the materials onto the OWNER's property.
3.2 UTILITY RELOCATIONS
A. Inform all companies, individuals and others owning or controlling facilities or structures within
the limits of the work which have to be relocated, adjusted or reconstructed in sufficient time for
the utility to organize and perform such work in conjunction with or in advance of the
CONTRACTOR's operations.
B. Comply with the requirements of Pennsylvania Underground Utility Protection Law.
3.3 CLEARING
A. Confine clearing to within the construction limits.
B. Clear in a manner that will avoid damage to trees, shrubs, structures, and other installations
which are to be retained.
C. Where stumps are not required to be grubbed, flushcut with ground elevation.

ADDITION
3.4 GRUBBING
A. Grub areas within the construction limits to remove roots and other objectionable material to a
minimum depth of 24".
B. Remove all stumps within the cleared areas.
3.5 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL
A. Strip topsoil to whatever depth it may occur from areas to be excavated, filled, or graded and
stockpile.
B. The topsoil is the property of the OWNER and shall not be used as backfill or removed from the
site.
3.6 DEBRIS DISPOSAL
A. Trees, logs, branches, brush, stumps, and other debris resulting from clearing and grubbing
operations shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be legally disposed of.
B. Do not deposit or bury on the site debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing work unless
authorized in writing by the OWNER.
C. Debris may be burned on-site if required permits are obtained, and if burning operations are
conducted in compliance with all regulations.
D. Discarded materials within the right-of-way limits necessary to perform the work shall be
removed and properly disposed of at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.
3.7 RESTORATION
A. Repair all injuries to bark, trunk, limbs, and roots or remaining plants by properly dressing,
cutting, and painting, using approved arboricultural practices and materials.
B. Replace trees, shrubs and plants designated to be saved which are permanently injured or die
during the life of the Contract and warranty period as a result of construction operations with like
species acceptable to the OWNER.
C. Remove protective fences, enclosures and guards upon the completion of the project.
D. Restore guard posts, guiderail, signs and other interferences to the condition equal to that
existing before construction operations.
E. Fences, mail boxes, and signs within the line of work shall be carefully removed, stored, and
upon completion of backfill, reset or replaced to their original condition and location, at the
CONTRACTOR’s expense.

ADDITION
SECTION 31 20 00.00 EARTH MOVING (Site Excavation and Placement of Fill Material)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Excavation
2. Blasting
3. Placement and compaction of fill material
1. Site Clearing (Clearing and Grubbing): Section 31 10 00

2. Earth Moving (Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting: Section 31 20 00.02
3. Earth Moving (Roadway, Excavation, Fill and Compaction): Section 31 20 00.01
4. Erosion and Sedimentation Controls: Section 31 25 00
C. Definitions: NONE
A. Reference Standards:
1. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PennDOT), latest revision:
Publication 408, Specifications

Publication 213, Temporary Traffic Control Guidelines
Publication 19, Field Test Manual
• PTM No. 106 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils (using 5.5 lb

Rammer and 12 inch drop
• PTM No. 402 Determine In-Place Density and Moisture Content of
Construction Materials by Use of Nuclear Gauges
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D698 Test Method of Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft.-lbf./ft3)
D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft.-lbf./ft3)
D2922 Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 31 20 00.00 EARTH MOVING (Site 31 20 00.00 - 1

Excavation and Placement of Fill Material)
ADDITION
3. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
T89 Determining Liquid Limit of Soils

T90 Determining Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils
4. Pennsylvania Code
Title 67, Transportation, Chapter 459, Occupancy of Highway by Utilities
B. Testing Agency:
1. Compaction testing shall be performed by a Soils Testing Laboratory engaged and paid
for by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER.
C. Compaction Testing:
1. Determine compaction by the testing procedure contained in ASTM D698 or ASTM

D1557 at the locations and frequencies specified in Section VIII - Technical Provisions
(Detailed).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit certified compaction testing results from the Soils Testing Laboratory.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Classification of Excavation:
1. All site excavation work performed under this contract is UNCLASSIFIED, and includes
excavation and removal of all soil, shale, rock, boulders, fill, and all other materials
encountered of whatever nature.
B. Control of Traffic:
1. Employ traffic control measures in accordance with Publication 213, "Temporary Traffic
Control Guidelines".
C. Protection of Existing Utilities and Structures:
1. Take all precautions and utilize all facilities required to protect existing utilities and
structures in compliance with Pennsylvania Act 187. Request cooperative steps of the
Utility and suggestions for procedures to avoid damage to its lines.
2. Allow free access to Utility personnel at all times for purposes of maintenance, repair and
inspection.

ADDITION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS
For purposes of construction control, the following materials may be deemed acceptable for use in
placement of fills:
A. Soil. Soil shall include all inorganic material having a maximum size that can be readily placed
and compacted in loose 8 inch layers and of which more than 35 percent shall pass the No. 200
sieve. Soil shall have a minimum dry weight density of 98 pounds per cubic foot as determined
in accordance with PTM No. 106, Method B and a maximum liquid limit of 65 as determined in
accordance with AASHTO Designation T89. The plasticity index, as determined by AASHTO
Designation T90 for soils having liquid limits of 41 to 65 inclusive, shall be not less than that
determined by the formula: Plasticity Index = Liquid Limit - 30.
B. Granular Material. Granular material shall include all natural or synthetic mineral aggregates
having a maximum size that can be readily placed and compacted in loose 8 inch layers and of
which 35 percent or less shall pass the No. 200 sieve.
C. Shale. Shale shall include all rock-like materials formed by the natural consolidation of mud,
clay, silt and fine sand and usually thinly laminated, comparatively soft and easily split, having a
maximum size that can be readily placed and compacted in loose 8 inch layers.
D. Rock. Rock shall include all igneous, metamorphic and sedimentary rock having a maximum
size that can be readily placed and compacted in loose 8 inch layers and which generally has
sufficient fines to normally fill all the voids in each layer.
E. Random Materials. Random material shall include any combination of the above classifications
and may include old concrete, brick, etc., from demolition having a maximum size that can be
readily placed and compacted in loose 8 inch layers, and which has been approved by the
ENGINEER.
F. Flowable Fill. As defined in Section 31 20 00.02 and approved in advance by the ENGINEER.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC
A. Coordinate the work to ensure the least inconvenience to traffic and maintain traffic on one or
more unobstructed lanes unless closing of the roadway is authorized.
B. Maintain access to all streets and private drives and for emergency vehicles.
C. Provide and maintain signs, flashing warning lights, barricades, markers, and other protective
devices as required to conform with construction operations and to keep traffic flowing with
minimum restrictions.
D. Comply with State and local codes, permits and regulations.

ADDITION
3.2 SALVAGE TOPSOIL
A. Within the areas indicated for grading, strip topsoil to the depth of suitable topsoil material and
stockpile for subsequent top soiling operations. See Section 31 10 00.
3.3 PLACEMENT OF FILL MATERIAL
A. After removal of topsoil, areas to receive fill shall be thoroughly rolled, and any soft spots
disclosed by rolling shall be excavated and the unsuitable material removed and disposed of in
a waste area. The excavated area shall be filled with suitable fill material approved by the
ENGINEER and recompacted. Suitable fill material shall be spread in layers of not more than 8
inches (loose) over the full area of the fill, and compacted to the required density by the use of
compaction equipment. All fill material shall be compacted to not less than 95% of its maximum
dry weight density at its optimum moisture content, plus or minus 2%, as determined by ASTM
D698, under roadways, shoulders, driveways, curbs, sidewalks, gravel and sand parking areas
and not less than 90% in yards, fields and sand areas.
When the material is too coarse to satisfactorily use these methods, compaction will be
determined by the ENGINEER based on non-movement of the material under the equipment.
B. Fill material placed in areas inaccessible to the compaction equipment shall be placed in
uniform loose layers not exceeding 4 inches in depth and compacted by means of approved
mechanical tampers to the density requirements herein specified.
C. When a previously constructed fill requires additional material to bring it to required elevation,
the top of the fill shall be thoroughly scarified before the required additional material is placed.
D. Material containing moisture in excess of that percentage which will ensure satisfactory
compaction shall not be placed in the fill and fill material shall not be placed on material that has
become unstable due to excessive moisture.
E. Frozen fill material shall not be placed in fills, and fill material shall not be placed on frozen
material. If during construction the top of the fill freezes, all frozen material shall be removed
before additional material is placed.
F. Wet or frozen materials which would be suitable when dried or when thawed and dried, may be
wasted by the CONTRACTOR for his convenience only with the written permission of the
ENGINEER, and subject to replacement in equivalent volume, at the expense of the
CONTRACTOR. However, in no case shall waste material be disposed of in the flood channel
or floodway area of any stream.
G. Shale and random material containing an excessive quantity of large fragments shall be so
placed that the coarser material is in areas where no building foundations or utility trenches are
to be located. The large pieces shall then be broken down by the use of approved equipment
until all voids are filled. Mixtures of shale and rock shall be placed in accordance with the
requirements for placing shale.
H. Where fill is to be constructed on a slope, the slope shall be benched to the width and depth
shown on the drawings or as approved by the ENGINEER.

ADDITION
3.4 EXCAVATION
A. Perform excavation of borrow material in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Strip borrow
pits of brush, trees, roots, grass and other vegetation prior to removal of material for use in fill.
During the excavation operation, grade the borrow area to ensure free drainage of water from
the area. Place and maintain erosion control devices after completion of the excavation, grade
the excavated area, including side slopes, to drain and present a uniformly trim appearance
merging into the surrounding terrain. After borrowing operations are complete, re-grade area, if
necessary, to prevent erosion.
3.5 BLASTING
A. Blasting is the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and no duty is assumed or to be

exercised by OWNER or ENGINEER relative thereto.
B. Blasting work shall be supervised by licensed and experienced personnel and performed in
conformance with applicable Federal, State and local codes.
3.6 CONTROL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. Provide temporary barricades to prevent excavated material from encroaching on private

property, walks, gutters, and storm drains.
B. Maintain accessibility to all fire hydrants, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb boxes, fire and
police call boxes, and other utility controls at all times. Keep gutters clear or provide other
satisfactory facilities for street drainage. Do not obstruct natural water courses. Where
necessary, provide temporary channels to allow the flow of water either along or across the site
of the work.
C. Comply with requirements of Section 31 25 00- Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
3.7 DEWATERING
A. Keep excavations dry and free of water. Dispose of precipitation and subsurface water clear of
the work.
B. Intercept and divert surface drainage away from excavations. Design surface drainage systems
so that they do not cause erosion on or off the site, or cause unwanted flow of water.
C. Comply with Federal and State requirements for dewatering to any watercourse, prevention of
stream degradation, and erosion and sediment control.
3.8 TOPSOILING
A. Top soiling as specified in Section 32 91 15 - Finish Grading, Seeding and Sodding.
3.9 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. Excavated material remaining after completion of placement of fills shall remain the property of
the CONTRACTOR, removed from the construction area, and properly disposed of.

ADDITION
3.10 FOREIGN BORROW MATERIAL
A. Foreign borrow consists of excavation, placement and compaction in fill areas of approved
material obtained from sources outside the project limits.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall make his own arrangements for obtaining all foreign borrow material
and pay all costs involved.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 31 20 00.01 EARTH MOVING (Roadway Excavation, Fill and Compaction)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Excavation
2. Compaction
3. Fill
1. Site Clearing (Clearing and Grubbing): Section 31 10 00

2. Earth Moving (Site Excavation and Placement of Fill Material): Section 31 20 00.00
4. Asphalt Paving (Bituminous Paving and Surfacing): Section 32 12 16
C. Definitions:
1. Roadway: Area under and within ten feet of the edge of paving.
2. Roadway Subgrade: The prepared earth surfaces on or over which additional roadway
materials will be placed or work is to be performed.
D. Applicable Standard Details:
As shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with Publication 408 Specifications.
T99 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils, Using a 5.5-lb. Rammer and a 12-in. Drop
T191Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method.
D2167 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber-
Balloon Method.
D2922 Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth).
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 31 20 00.01 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00.01 - 1

(Roadway Excavation, Fill and Compaction)
ADDITION
B. Inspections:
1. Inspection by the ENGINEER will, at a minimum, be made of the subgrade prior to

placement of the base course, and of the base course prior to placement of the binder
surface.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit certification from aggregate suppliers attesting that materials conform to

PennDOT specifications herein. PennDOT certification (CS-4171) shall be provided with
each load of crushed aggregate delivered to the job site.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. As shown on the Contract Drawings, in accordance with Publication 408 Specifications.
B. Control of traffic:
1. Reasonable access must be maintained for adjacent property OWNERs and commercial
properties.
2. All excavations in access drive, driveways, and state highway rights-of-way shall be
backfilled or plated at the end of each work day.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS
A. Roadway Fill Areas: As specified previously under Site Excavation and Placement of Fill
Material, Section 31 20 00.00, Paragraph 2.1.
B. Embankment Fill Areas: As specified previously under Site Excavation and Placement of Fill
Material, Section 31 20 00.00, Paragraph 2.1.
C. Excavated Areas: Suitability of material for subgrade purposes shall be determined by non-
movement of the material under compaction equipment.
D. Course Aggregate: Hard, tough, durable and uncoated inert particles reasonably free from clay,
silt, vegetation other deleterious substances. Course aggregate shall be obtained from an
approved source.
2.2 GEOTEXTILES:
A. For all areas of wet subgrade – Class 4 Type B as defined in PennDOT Publication 408,
Section 735, and as approved by the ENGINEER.
B. For pavement base drains – Class 1 as defined in PennDOT Publication 408, Section 735, and
as approved by the ENGINEER.

ADDITION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE
A. Perform soil erosion control work in accordance with requirements of the Contract Drawings and
Section 31 25 00: Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
B. Roadway Excavation: Excavate or otherwise remove and satisfactorily dispose of materials

located within the limits indicated on the Contract Drawings for roadways.
1. Excavate to roadway subgrade depths required, and cut drainage channels and
waterways as detailed on the Contract Drawings. Proof roll subgrade to the satisfaction
of the ENGINEER.
2. Remove rock encountered in roadway excavation to a depth six inches below finished
subgrade elevation.
3. Excavate unsuitable subgrade material. Refill such areas to required elevation with
acceptable materials.
4. Place geotextile layer in wet areas prior to placing final base course.
C. Roadway Grading: Shape subgrade of roadways, intersections, approaches, entrances and

adjoining pedestrian walkways to no more than 0.10 foot above or below the design elevations.
D. Roadway Fill: Construction requirements for roadway fill shall be as follows:
1. Form the roadway fill with acceptable materials.
2. Compact material to a minimum final density of not less than 95% of the maximum dry
weight density at its optimum moisture content plus or minus 2%, per ASTM D698 or
D1557. Proof roll roadway fill to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
E. Roadway Embankment: Construction requirements for roadway embankment shall be as

follows:
1. Break up shale and other rock-like materials formed by natural consolidation of mud,
clay, silt and fine sand into a maximum size that can be readily placed and compacted in
loose eight-inch layers.
2. Place rock to form the base of roadway embankments. Place in uniform loose layers not
exceeding in depth the approximate average size of the larger rock, but not exceeding 8
inches deep.
3. Smooth and level each layer adding soil or granular material conforming to Section 31 20
00.00, Paragraph 2.1 in sufficient quantity to supplement the smaller rock pieces, filling
the voids and pockets.
4. Form the top 18 inches of roadway embankments with soil or granular material
conforming to Section 31 20 00.00, Paragraph 2.1.

ADDITION
5. Compact embankment material to a minimum final density of not less than 95% of the
maximum dry weight density at its optimum moisture content plus or minus 2%, per
ASTM D698 or D1557. Proof roll embankments to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
6. During foreign borrow excavation operations, keep the borrow area graded to ensure free
water drainage. Following completion of work in the borrow area, grade the area to
present a uniformly trim appearance merging into the surrounding terrain and to prevent
erosion.
A. Surface Tolerance:
1. After the base course has been completed as specified, the surface smoothness shall be
checked with approved templates, string lines, or straightedges.
a. Templates: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and use approved templates of

required length and cut to the required crown of the finished surface of the base
course, for checking the crown and contour thereof. The templates shall be
equipped with metal or other approved vertical extensions attached to each end,
so that the bottom of the template will be at the elevation of the top of the
aggregate. At least 3 such templates shall be furnished, and used at intervals of
not more than 25 feet.
b. String Lines: String lines, for controlling the finished elevation of the proposed
base course, shall be furnished with ample supports and offset along each side of
the base course, and shall be maintained until all irregularities have been
satisfactorily corrected.
c. Straightedges: Approved straightedges 10 feet in length shall also be furnished

and used for testing longitudinal irregularities in the surface of the base course.
Any surface irregularities that exceed ½ inch shall be remedied by loosening the
surface and removing or adding material as required, after which the entire area,
including the surrounding surface, shall be rolled until satisfactorily compacted.
B. Field Moisture-Density Tests:
Conduct such tests as specified under Site Excavation and Placement of Fill Material: Section
31 20 00.00.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 31 20 00.02 EARTH MOVING (Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Cutting paved surfaces

2. Blasting
3. Trench excavation, backfill and compaction
4. Support of excavation
5. Pipe bedding requirements
6. Control of excavated material
7. Rough Grading
8. Restoration of unpaved surfaces
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Site Clearing (Clearing and grubbing): Section 31 10 00

2. Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Controls: Section 31 25 00
As shown on the Contract Drawings, in accordance with Publication 408 Specifications.
1. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PennDOT), Latest Revisions:

Publication 72M, Standards for Roadway Construction
•PTM No. 106 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils (using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12
inch drop)
• PTM No. 402 - Determining In-Place Density and Moisture Content of
Construction Materials by Use of Nuclear Gauges
C33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates

D698 Test Method of Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort
D2922 Test for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting)
ADDITION
Title 67, Transportation, Chapter 459, Occupancy of Highways by Utilities
B. Testing Agency:
1. Compaction testing shall be performed by an approved Soils Testing Laboratory engaged

and paid for by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER.
C. Compaction Testing:
1. Conduct compaction tests at locations as directed by the ENGINEER during backfilling

operations.
2. Determine compaction in state highways and shoulders by the testing procedure

contained in PTM No. 106, Method B or PTM No. 402.
3. Determine compaction in areas other than state highways and shoulders by the testing
procedure contained in ASTM D698 or ASTM D2922.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit certification from aggregate suppliers attesting that the pipe bedding and select
material stone backfill materials conform to the specifications herein.
B. Compaction Equipment List:
1. Submit a list of all equipment to be utilized for compacting, including manufacturers' lift
thickness limitations.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Classification of Excavation:
1. All excavation work performed under this contract is UNCLASSIFIED, and includes
excavation and removal of all soil, shale, rock, boulders, fill, and all other materials
encountered of whatever nature.
B. Compaction of Backfill:
1. Compact backfill per Section 32 13 13.02.
C. Control of Traffic:
1. Employ traffic control measures in accordance with Publication 213, "Temporary Traffic
D. Protection of Existing Utilities and Structures:
1. Take all precautions and utilize all facilities required to protect existing utilities and
structures. Comply with the requirements of the Pennsylvania Underground Utility
Protection Law. Request cooperative steps of the Utility and suggestions for procedures
to avoid damage to its lines.

ADDITION
2. Advise each person in physical control of powered equipment or explosives used in

excavation or demolition work of the type and location of utility lines at the job site, the
utility assistance to expect, and procedures to follow to prevent damage.
3. Immediately report to the Utility and the ENGINEER any break, leak or other damage to
the lines or protective coatings made or discovered during the work and immediately alert
the occupants of premises of any emergency created or discovered.
4. Allow free access to Utility personnel at all times for purposes of maintenance, repair and
inspection.
E. Site Inspections:
1. Prior to entering upon any private property, the CONTRACTOR shall have arranged for
and completed a site inspection of each property with the ENGINEER, at which time the
ENGINEER will advise the CONTRACTOR as to what area is available for work; as to
the trees, planting, and improvements which may be removed or disturbed during the
work; and as to any special condition or requirements which shall govern the work on
each property.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Type III and Type IV Bedding Material:
1. AASHTO No. 8 coarse aggregate, Table C, Section 703.2, Publication 408

Specifications. Do not use slag or cinders.
B. Type V Bedding:
1. AASHTO No. 8 coarse aggregate conforming to Section 703, Publication 408. Do not
use slag or cinders.
2.2 BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Select Material Backfill:
1. Crushed stone or gravel aggregate conforming to Select Granular Material (2RC),

Section 703.3, Publication 408 Specifications. Do not use slag or cinders.
B. Flowable Backfill Material:
1. Material conforming to PennDOT Special Provision S94 (S2060130), Type A or B as

shown in Table 1.
2. Flowable backfill inside casing pipe shall be Type D.
C. Suitable Backfill Material (Highways, driveways, and shoulders):

ADDITION
1. From top of pipe bedding material to subgrade elevation:
a. Select Material Backfill
b. Flowable Backfill Material – Where directed or approved
D. Suitable Backfill Material (Other than highways, driveways, and shoulders):
1. From top of pipe bedding material to 24" over top of pipe:
a. Material excavated from the trench if free of stones larger than 6" in size and free
of wet, frozen, or organic materials.
2. From 24" above pipe to subgrade elevation:
a. Material excavated from the trench if free of stones larger than 8" in size and free
of wet, frozen, or organic materials.
Table 1 - Flowable Fill

Properties & Criteria Type A Type B Type C Type D
Mix Design ( /cy)
PART 1 - Cement (lbs)* 100 50 150-200 300-700

PART 2 - Fly Ash (lbs)* 2000 300 300 100-400
PART 3 - Bottom Ash (lbs)* 0 2600 2600 **
or Coarse Aggregate
or Fine Aggregate
Flow Cone (seconds)
ASTM C939 30-60 – – 30-60****
Slump (inches)
PTM No. 600 – 7-11 7-11 7-11****
Density (pcf) 30-70 or as speci-
PTM No. 613 95-110*** 120-135*** 125 min. *** fied ***
Water Absorption of Aggre-
gate, PTM No. 506 – – – 20 (max %)
Compressive Strength (psi)
PTM No. 604
PART 4 - 3 days (minimum 25 25 300 40

PART 5 - 28 days (range) 50-125 50-125 800 min. 90-400
* Quantities may be varied or alternate designs submitted to adapt mix to meet density and
strength requirements or to adapt to specific site conditions.
** Requires the use of suitable lightweight aggregate or air entraining admixture. Provide a
mix design that achieves the specified strength and density requirements.
*** Approximate Value. Use of air entraining agent may reduce these values.

ADDITION
**** As appropriate depending on whether lightweight aggregate or air entraining admixture is

used to obtain lightweight properties.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC
A. Maintain traffic in one or more unobstructed lanes and provide access to all streets and private
drives.
B. Provide and maintain protective devices as required by state and local codes, permits, and
regulations.
3.2 CUTTING PAVED SURFACES PRIOR TO TRENCHING
A. Where installation of pipelines, miscellaneous structures, and appurtenances necessitate

breaking a paved surface, make cuts in a neat uniform fashion forming straight lines parallel
with the centerline of the trench. Cut offsets at right angles to the centerline of the trench.
B. Protect edges of cut pavement during excavation to prevent raveling or breaking; square edges
prior to pavement replacement.
C. The requirement for neat line cuts, in other than state highways, may be waived if the final
paving restoration indicates overlay beyond the trench width.
3.3 BLASTING
A. Blasting is prohibited.
3.4 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Depth of Excavation:
1. Gravity Pipelines:
a. Excavate mainline trenches to the required depth and grade for the invert of the
pipe plus that excavation necessary for placement of pipe bedding material.
b. Excavation for laterals shall provide a straight uniform grade from the main pipeline
to the right-of-way line, plus that excavation necessary for placement of pipe
bedding material.
2. Pressure Pipelines:
a. Excavate trenches to the minimum depth necessary to place required pipe bedding
material and to provide a minimum of 42" from the top of the pipe to the finished
ground elevation, except where specific depths are otherwise shown on the
Contract Drawings.
3. Where unsuitable bearing material is encountered in the trench bottom, continue

excavation until the unsuitable material is removed, solid bearing is obtained or can be

ADDITION
established, or concrete cradle can be placed. If no concrete cradle is to be installed,

refill the trench to required pipeline grade with pipe bedding material.
4. Where the CONTRACTOR, by error or intent, excavates beyond the minimum required
depth, backfill the trench to the required pipeline grade with pipe bedding material.
B. Width of Excavation:
1. Excavate trenches, including laterals, to a width necessary for placement and jointing of
the pipe, and for placing and compacting pipe bedding and trench backfill around the
pipe, but not less than 16" or more than 24" plus the pipe outside diameter from the
bottom of the trench to a point 12" above the crown of the pipe.
2. Shape trench walls completely vertical from trench bottom to at least 2' above the top of
the pipe. Trench walls from 2' above the top of the pipe to grade to be benched and
sloped, or shaved, to comply with Federal and State laws and codes.
3. For pressure pipeline fittings, excavate trenches to a width that will permit placement of
concrete thrust blocks. Provide earth surfaces for thrust blocks that are perpendicular to
the direction of thrust and are free of loose or soft material.
3.5 SUPPORT OF EXCAVATION
A. The adequacy of the design of sheeting, shoring and bracing installations relative to the nature
of the material to be encountered and retained is the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR
and no duty is assumed or to be exercised by OWNER or ENGINEER relative thereto.
B. Support excavations with sheeting, shoring, and bracing or a "trench box" as required to comply
with Federal and State laws and codes.
C. Install adequate excavation supports to prevent ground movement or settlement of adjacent

structures, pipelines or utilities. Damage due to settlement because of failure to provide support
or through negligence or fault of the CONTRACTOR in any other manner, shall be repaired at
the CONTRACTOR's expense.
D. Removal of sheeting, shoring and bracing as backfilling proceeds is the CONTRACTOR’s

responsibility.
3.6 CONTROL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. Keep the ground surface on both sides of the excavation free of excavated material to comply
with Federal and State laws and codes.
B. Provide temporary barricades to prevent excavated material from encroaching on private

property, walks, gutters, and storm drains.
C. Maintain accessibility to all fire hydrants, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb boxes, fire and
police call boxes, and other utility controls at all times. Keep gutters clear or provide other
satisfactory facilities for street drainage. Do not obstruct natural water courses. Where
necessary, provide temporary channels to allow the flow of water either along or across the site
of the work.

ADDITION
D. In areas where pipelines parallel or cross streams, ensure that no material slides, is washed, or
is dumped into the stream course. Remove cofferdams immediately upon completion of pipeline
construction.
E. Comply with Section 31 25 00 - Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
3.7 DEWATERING
A. Keep excavations dry and free of water. Dispose of precipitation and subsurface water clear of
the work. Comply with Section 31 25 00 - Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
B. Maintain pipe trenches dry until pipe has been jointed, inspected, and backfilled, and concrete
work has been completed. Prevent trench water from entering pipelines under construction.
C. Intercept and divert surface drainage away from excavations. Design surface drainage systems
so that they do not cause erosion on or off the site, or cause unwanted flow of water.
D. Comply with Federal and State requirements for dewatering to any watercourse, prevention of
stream degradation, and erosion and sediment control.
3.8 PIPE BEDDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Depth of pipe bedding aggregate as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with
Publication 408 Specifications.
B. Shape recesses for the joints or bell of the pipe by hand. Assure that the pipe is supported on
the lower quadrant (under “haunches”) and the pipe bottom for the entire length of the barrel.
Fill all voids below the pipe.
C. Pipe embedment material shall be placed, worked by hand or compacted until a minimum
density of 90% in yards and 95% under driveways, shoulders, roadways and sidewalks is
achieved (at optimum moisture content, + 2%, standard proctor.
3.9 PIPE LAYING
A. Provide required pipe bedding placed in accordance with the Standard Details.
B. Lay pipe as specified in the appropriate Section of these Specifications for pipeline construction.
3.10 THRUST RESTRAINT
A. Provide pressure pipe with concrete thrust blocking or use restrained joint fittings at all bends,
tees, valves, and changes in direction, in accordance with the Standard Details.
3.11 BACKFILLING TRENCHES
A. After pipe installation and inspection, backfill trenches to 12" above the crown of the pipe with
specified backfill material, placed and carefully compact with approved compaction equipment
in layers of suitable thickness to provide specified compaction. Backfill and compact the
remainder of the trench with specified backfill material. Refer to the Contract Drawings and in
accordance with Publication 408 Specifications, for trench backfill material and compaction
requirements at each specific location.
B. Lift Thickness Limitations:

ADDITION
1. Submit a list of the compaction equipment to be utilized on the project, the

recommendations of the equipment manufacturer as to the maximum lift thickness which
can be placed, and the method of compaction to be used with this equipment to achieve
the required compaction. In no case shall maximum lift thickness placed exceed the
maximum limits specified by the manufacturer's recommendations. However, if the
equipment manufacturer's lift thickness recommendation is followed and the specified
compaction is not obtained, the CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, remove,
replace, and retest as many times as is required to obtain the specified compaction.
2. Lift thickness limitations specified for state highways, shoulders, or embankments shall
govern over the compaction equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Jetting:
1. When approved by the ENGINEER in writing, jetting methods may be used to consolidate
backfill. Quality assurance methods to verify adequate compaction will be a condition of
the approval by the ENGINEER.
D. Uncompacted Backfill:
1. Where uncompacted backfill is indicated on the Contract Drawings, backfill the trench
from one foot above the pipe to the top of the trench with material excavated from the
trench, crowned over the trench to a sufficient height to allow for settlement to grade after
consolidation, providing for surface water drainage.
E. Unsuitable Backfill Material:
1. Where the ENGINEER deems backfill material to be unsuitable and rejects all or part
thereof due to conditions prevailing at the time of construction, remove the unsuitable
material and replace with select material backfill.
3.12 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. Excavated material remaining after completion of backfilling shall remain the property of the
CONTRACTOR, removed from the construction area, and legally disposed of.
3.13 ROUGH GRADING
A. Rough subgrade areas disturbed by construction to a uniform finish. Form the bases for
terraces, banks, and lawns.
B. Grade areas to be paved to depths required where placing subbase and paving materials.
C. Rough grade areas to be topsoiled and seeded to 4" below indicated finish contours.
3.14 RESTORATION OF UNPAVED SURFACES
A. Restore unpaved surfaces disturbed by construction to equal the surface condition prior to
construction.
B. Restore grassed areas in accordance with Section 32 91 15 - Finish Grading, Seeding and
Sodding.
3.15 LIMITS OF WORK

ADDITION
A. All disturbances shall be confined to OWNER’s property, street rights-of-way, permanent

easements, and temporary construction easements shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall not permit trucks and equipment to enter private driveways.
C. All work shall be confined to the Municipal or state highway rights-of-way and permanent rights-
of-way on temporary construction rights-of-way shown on the Contract Drawings.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall not permit trucks and equipment to enter private property except
where easements are provided or prior written permission from the OWNER has been obtained
by the CONTRACTOR.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Installation of soil erosion and sedimentation control (SESC) measures as per approved
plan.
2. Maintenance of SESC measures.
3. Restoration of area and removal of any interim SESC measures placed to protect areas
from erosion during stabilization period.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:

2. Earth Moving (Site excavation and placement of fill material): Section 31 20 00 00
4. Facility Storm Drainage Piping (Storm drain pipe): Section 33 41 00
C. Applicable Standard Details:

Publication 72M, Roadway Construction Standards (RC 0-99)
2. Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection (PA DEP):
Erosion and Sediment Pollution Control Program Manual Document No. 363-2134-008,
Effective April 15, 2000 or latest revisions thereof as released in accordance with PA
Code 25 Chapter 102.
3. Asphalt Institute Specifications
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control plan for this project is included in The Contract
Drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall regard this plan as a minimum standard. This plan may
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION AND 31 25 00 - 1

SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
ADDITION
not be adjusted by the CONTRACTOR without prior approval of the County Conservation
District and other regulatory agencies as applicable, and by means of a Contract Change Order.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS: Section Not Utilized.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 STONE FOR RIP-RAP
A. Stone used shall be the type and size of rip-rap shown on Contract Drawings and shall meet the
requirement of Publication 408, Section 850.
2.2 MATTING FOR EROSION CONTROL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certification from the manufacturer that the matting
conforms to the requirements prescribed hereinafter.
B. Jute matting for erosion control:
1. As specified in Publication 408, Section 806.2(a).
C. Excelsior matting:
1. As specified in Publication 408, Section 806.2(b).
D. Nylon matting:
1. As specified in Publication 408, Section 806.2(d).
2.3 EROSION CONTROL DEVICES
A. Silt Barrier Fence:
1. Geotextiles, Class 3: As specified in Publication 408, Section 735.1 (a) (b) (c) (d) and
Section 865.2 (a).
2. Mesh Support: As specified in Publication 408, Section 865.2(b).
3. Post:
a. Wood or steel or acceptable plastic with equivalent section and sufficient length for
height of fence required.
b. As specified in Publication 408, Section 865.2 (c).
4. Fasteners: As specified in Publication 408, Section 865.2(d).
5. Ground Anchors, Guy Wires: As specified in Publication 408, Section 865.2 (e) (f).

ADDITION
B. Compost Filter Sock:
1. Sock: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) expandable, tubular, biodegradable or

photodegradable, 3 mil to 5 mil, 3/8 inch knitted meshes netting. Size as specified on
Contract Drawings, as specified in Publication 408, Section 866.2.b
C. Compost: Well-decomposed, stable, weed-free, organic compost meeting AASHTO MP-9 as

specified in Publication 408 Section 866.2.a.
D. Stakes 2 inch x 2 inch wood or equivalent steel stakes, length provided to ensure a minimum
embedded depth of 18 inches and 3-4 inches extended above the top of the sock.
2.4 TEMPORARY COVER
A. Seed: As specified in Section 32 91 15.
B. Seed Mixtures: As specified in Section 32 91 15.
C. Inoculant: As specified in Section 32 91 15.
2.5 SOIL SUPPLEMENT MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer: As specified in Section 32 91 15.
B. Agricultural Lime: As specified in Section 32 91 15.
2.6 MULCHING MATERIALS
A. Straw: As specified in Section 32 91 15.
B. Wood Cellulose Fiber: As specified in Section 32 91 15.
C. Mulching Binder:
1. Emulsified Asphalt: SS-1, CSS-1, CMS-1, MS-2, RS-1, RS-2, CRS-1, or CRS-2.
Designations from Asphalt Institute Specifications.
D. Wood Chips: Wood chips, recovered from clearing and grubbing operation will be acceptable
as mulch for seeding and shall be used at a rate of 35 cubic yards per acre.
2.7 STORM DRAIN PIPE
A. As specified in Section 33 11 16.00.
2.8 PUMPED WATER FILTER BAG
A. As shown on the Contract Drawings, in accordance with Publication 408 Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. As shown on the Contract Drawings, C7 sheet series.

ADDITION
3.2 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Topsoil stockpile heights shall not exceed 35 feet. Stockpile side slopes must be 2:1 or flatter.
B. A copy of the approved erosion and sediment control plan must be available at the project site
at all times.
C. All pumping of sediment laden water shall be through a sediment control BMP, such as a
pumped water filter bag or equivalent sediment removal facility, over undisturbed vegetated
areas.
D. All building materials and wastes must be removed from the site and recycled or disposed of in
accordance with the PA DEP’s solid waste management regulations at (PA Code 2501 et esq.
271.1 and 287,1 et seq). No building materials, water or unused building material shall be
burned, buried, dumped or discharged at the site.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the removal of any excess material and shall
ensure that the site(s) receiving the excess has an approved erosion and sediment control plan
that meets the conditions of PA Code 25, Chapter 102 and/or other State or Federal
regulations.
F. Clean Fill is defined as: uncontaminated, non-water soluble, non-decomposable, inert, solid
material. The term includes: soil, rock, stone, dredged material, used asphalt, brick, block or
concrete from construction and demolition activities that is separate from other waste and is
recognizable as such. The term does not include materials placed in or on the waters of the
Commonwealth unless otherwise authorized. (The term “used asphalt” does not include milled
asphalt or asphalt that has been processed for re-use).
G. Any placement of clean fill that has been affected by a spill or release of a regulated substance
must use Form FP-001 to certify the origin of the fill materials and the results of the analytical
testing to qualify the material as clean fill. Form FP-001 must be retained by the OWNER of the
property receiving the fill.
H. Environmental due diligence must be performed to determine if the fill materials associated with
the project qualify as clean fill. Environmental due diligence is defined as: investigative
techniques, including but not limited to, visual property inspections, electronic database
searches, review of property ownership, review of property use history, sanborn maps,
environmental questionnaires, transaction screens, analytical testing, environmental
assessments or audits. Analytical testing is not a required part of due diligence unless visual
inspection and/or review of the past land use of the property indicates that the fill may have
been subject to a spill or release of a regulated substance. If the fill may have been affected by
a spill or release of a regulated substance, it must be tested to determine if it qualifies as clean
fill. Testing should be performed in accordance with Appendix A of the PA DEP’s policy
Management of Clean Fill.
3.3 STABILIZATON SPECIFICATIONS
A. Permanent stabilization is defined as a minimum uniform 70% perennial vegetative cover or

other permanent non-vegetative cover with a density sufficient to resist accelerated surface
erosions and subsurface characteristics sufficient to resist sliding and other movements.
B. Immediately after disturbance activities cease, the operator shall stabilize the disturbed areas.
During non-geminating periods, mulch must be applied at the specified rates. Disturbed areas
which are not at finished grade and which will be re-disturbed within 1-year must be stabilized in
accordance with the temporary vegetative stabilization specifications. Disturbed areas which are

ADDITION
at final grade or which will not be re-disturbed within 1-year must be stabilized in accordance
with the permanent vegetative stabilization specifications.
C. An erosion control blanket will be installed on all disturbed slopes steeper than 3:1, all areas of
concentrated flows, and disturbed areas within 50’ of waters of the Commonwealth.
D. Straw and hay mulch should be anchored immediately after application to prevent being
windblown. A tractor-drawn implement may be used to “crimp” the straw or hay into the soil.
This method is limited to slopes no steeper than 3:1. The machinery should be operated on the
contour. (Note: Crimping of hay or straw by running over it with tracked machinery is not
recommended.)
E. Asphalt, either emulsified or cut-back, containing no solvents or other diluting agents toxic to
plant or animal life, uniformly applied at the rate of 31 gallons per 1000 sq. yd. may be used to
tack mulch.
F. Synthetic Binders (chemical binders) may be used as recommended by the manufacture to

anchor mulch provided sufficient documentation is provided to show they are non-toxic to native
plant and animal species.
G. Lightweight plastic, fiber, or paper nets may be stabled over the mulch according to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
H. Tracking slopes is required by running tracked machinery up and down the slope, leaving tread
marks parallel to the contour. (Note: If a bulldozer is used, the blade shall be up.) Care should
be exercised on soils having a high clay content to avoid over-compaction.
3.4 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
A. Until the site is stabilized, all erosion and sediment control BMP’s must be maintained properly.
Maintenance must include inspections of all erosion and sediment control BMP’s after each
runoff event and on a weekly basis. All preventative and remedial maintenance work, including
cleanest, repair replacement, re-grading, reseeding, re-mulching and re-netting must be
performed immediately. If erosion and sediment control BMP’s fail to perform as expected,
replacement BMP’s or modifications of those installed will be required.
B. The permittee and co-permittee must ensure that visual site inspections are conducted weekly,
and after each measurable precipitation event by qualified personnel, trained and experienced
in erosion and sediment control, to ascertain that Erosion and Sediment Control (E&S) BMP’s
are operational and effective in preventing pollution to the waters of the Commonwealth. A
written report of each inspection shall be kept, and include:
1. A summary of the site conditions, E&S BMP’s, and compliance; and

2. The date, time, and the name of the person conducting the inspection.
C. Any sediment removed from BMP’s during construction will be returned to upland areas on site
and incorporated into site grading.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING (Bituminous Paving and Surfacing)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Bituminous concrete base course construction.

2. Placement and compaction of bituminous binder and wearing surface.
3. Placement of bituminous seal coat and surface treatment.
4. Surface preparation.

2. Earth Moving (Site excavation and placement of fill material): Section 31 20 00 00
3. Earth Moving (Roadway excavation, fill, and compaction): Section 31 20 00 01

Publication 27, Specification for Bituminous Mixtures (Bulletin 27)
Publication 37, Specification for Bituminous Materials (Bulletin 25)
D2950 Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods
Title 67. Transportation, Chapter 459, Occupancy of Highways by Utilities
B. Inspections:

surface.
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 1

(Bituminous Paving and Surfacing)
ADDITION
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certification:
1. Submit certification from bituminous and aggregate suppliers attesting that materials
conform to Publication 408, Specifications.
2. Submit bituminous concrete mix design for approval.
3. Provide PennDOT certifications (CS-4171 with each load delivered to the job site, as
required by ENGINEER).
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Control of Traffic:
1. Take measures to control traffic during paving operations. Do not allow traffic on newly
paved areas until adequate stability and adhesion have been attained and the material
has cooled to 140o F or less.
2. Employ traffic control measures in accordance with Publication 213 "Temporary Traffic
3. OWNER, ENGINEER and all appropriate emergency services (police, fire and
ambulance) shall be notified by the CONTRACTOR a minimum of 36 hours in advance of
any temporary lane enclosure.
B. Protection of Adjacent Areas:
1. Restore existing surface outside the limits of the work that has been damaged by the
CONTRACTOR's operations, to its original condition at the expense of CONTRACTOR.
2. Reasonable access must be maintained for adjacent property owners and commercial
properties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS AND AGGREGATES
A. All bituminous materials and aggregates used in base course construction, paving, and
resurfacing are designated in these specifications by, and shall conform to, the applicable
portions of the Publication 408 Specifications. The coarse aggregate used in bituminous
wearing surfaces or the fine aggregate in the case of FJ-1 Wearing surfaces, shall have the
following aggregate Skid Resistance Level (SRL) letter designation based on the current
Average Daily Traffic (ADT) for resurfacing or anticipated initial daily traffic on new facilities:

ADDITION
ADT SRL ALTERNATIVES
20,000 and Above E None
5,000 to 20,000 H E, H, Blend of E and M,

Blend of E and G
3,000 to 5,000 G E, H, G, Blend of H and M,

Blend of E and L
1,000 to 3,000 M E, H, G, M, Blend of H and L,

Blend of G and L, Blend of E
and L
1,000 and Below L Any
Note: All blends are 50% by mass and shall be accomplished by an approved method.
B. All Superpave asphalt mixtures shall conform to applicable sections of Publication 408
Specifications. Aggregate shall be provided by approved sources and have the SRL
designation as specified above. Mixture shall have the specified Petroleum Grade (PG) as
indicated on Contract Drawings. If no PG is indicated in Section VIII - Technical Provisions
(Detailed), the bituminous mixture shall be PG 64-22.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 BASE COURSES
A. Superpave Asphalt - Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, construct HMA base course to
compacted depth in accordance with Publication 408, Section 309.
B. Bituminous paver shall be self-propelled with activated screed and shall have a minimum paving
width of 18’. All exceptions must be approved by the OWNER and ENGINEER.
3.2 SURFACE COURSES
A. Superpave Asphalt
1. HMA Binder Course - Construct HMA binder course with aggregate size, Design ESAL’s
and PG specified and to the compacted depth shown on the Contract Drawings, in
accordance with Publication 408 Specifications, Section 409.
2. HMA Wearing Course - Construct HMA wearing course with aggregate size, Design
ESAL’s and PG specified and to the compacted depth shown on the Contract Drawings,
in accordance with Publication 408 Specifications, Section 409.
3. Tack coat shall be applied to ensure bonding between courses and shall conform to
Publication 408 Specifications, Section 460.

ADDITION
4. Compaction testing for in-place density shall be conducted during placement of the
material, in accordance with PennDOT Publication 408, Section 409. Alternatively,
pavement cores, in accordance with Section 409.4, may be substituted. Acceptable
density shall be within 90-97% of the maximum theoretical density, as per ASTM D698.
5. Do not allow vehicular traffic on newly compacted Superpave HMA materials until the
temperature cools below 140˚F.
6. Bituminous paver shall be self-propelled with activated screed and shall have a minimum
paving width of 18’. All exceptions to paver requirement shall be approved by the
OWNER and ENGINEER.
B. Compaction
1. Compact by rolling with steel-wheel, vibration or pneumatic tire rollers or a combination of

these to obtain specified layer thickness and until non-movement of material under
compaction equipment is achieved, unless other density requirements are specified in
Section VIII - Technical Provisions (Detailed).
2. The roller pattern and speed shall be monitored by the CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER
to avoid roller marks, pattern segregation and displacement of hot mixtures.
C. Bituminous Seal Coat (single application)
1. Construct bituminous seal coat in accordance with Publication 408 Specifications,

Section 470.
D. Bituminous Surface Treatment (double application)
1. Construct bituminous surface treatment in accordance with Publication 408

Specifications, Section 480.
3.3 JOINTS
A. Notch
Where specified in Section VIII - Technical Provisions (Detailed), the edge of the overlay shall
be saw cut to a depth of 1-1/2" for the entire length of the joint and the detached material
removed to a minimum notch width of 12". Notch shall be skewed a minimum 6:1 unless
otherwise noted. A cold planer may be used. The vertical face must be painted with PG 64-22
or the same asphalt material used in mix design (Publication 408, Section 401.3(j)).
B. Sealing
All joints shall be sealed rubberized joint sealing material. When wearing course is placed
adjacent to curb to form bituminous gutter, seal with hot bituminous material of the class and
type designated for wearing course and extend to 6 inches from the curb, applied evenly. The
use of PG 64-22 may be permitted when approval is obtained from the ENGINEER.

ADDITION
A. Proof of Product
At the time of material delivery to the site, the OWNER’s Representative or ENGINEER shall be
furnished with a delivery ticket indicating material specifications. The tickets shall include, but
not limited to, vehicle identification, date, time, product identification, product quantity
(Petroleum Grade, Equivalent Single, Axle Loading (ESAL’s), aggregate size and Skid
Resistance Level (SRL) (for bituminous wearing course).
B. Surface Tolerance of Base and Binder Course.
After the base course has been completed as specified, the surface smoothness shall be
checked with approved templates, string lines, or straightedges.
1. Templates. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and use approved templates of required
length and cut to the required crown of the finished surface of the base course, for
checking the crown and contour thereof. The templates shall be equipped with metal or
other approved vertical extensions attached to each end, so that the bottom of the
template will be at the elevation of the top of the aggregate. At least 3 such templates
shall be furnished, and used at intervals of not more than 25 feet.
2. String Lines. String lines, for controlling the finished elevation of the base course, shall
be furnished with ample supports and offset along each side of the base course, and
shall be maintained until all irregularities have been satisfactorily corrected.
3. Straightedges. Approved straightedges 10 feet in length shall also be furnished and used
for testing longitudinal irregularities in the surface of the base course.
Any surface irregularities that exceed ½ inch shall be remedied by removing or adding
bituminous material as required, after which the entire area, including the surrounding
surface, shall be rolled until satisfactorily compacted.
C. Tests for Depth of Finished Base Course.
During the progress of the work, the depth of the base course will be measured by the
ENGINEER and unsatisfactory work shall be repaired, corrected, or replaced. The OWNER will
not be liable for payment for any excess depth of base course.
1. The depth will be determined by cutting or coring holes to the full depth of the completed
base course. One depth measurement may be required for each 1500 square yards, or
less, of completed base course. Any section in which the depth is ½ inch or more
deficient in specified depth shall be satisfactorily corrected at no expense to the OWNER.
2. All test holes shall be backfilled with similar material and satisfactorily compacted by and
at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. This operation shall be performed under the
observation of the ENGINEER who will check the depth for record purposes.
D. Surface Tolerance of Wearing Course.
After the wearing course has been completed as specified, the surface smoothness shall be
checked with straightedges.

ADDITION
1. Straightedges. Approved straightedges 10 feet in length shall be furnished and used for
testing longitudinal irregularities in the surface of the wearing course.
Any surface irregularities that exceed 3/16 inch shall be remedied by removing or adding
wearing material as required, after which the entire area, including the surrounding
surface, shall be rolled until satisfactorily compacted.
E. Tests for Depth of Finished Wearing Course.
During the progress of the work, the depth of the wearing course may be measured by the
ENGINEER and unsatisfactory work shall be repaired, corrected, or replaced. The OWNER will
not be liable for payment for any excess depth of wearing course.
1. The depth will be determined by cutting or coring holes to the full depth of the completed
wearing course. Test holes to be excavated by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the
OWNER. One depth measurement may be required for each 1500 square yards of
completed wearing course. Any section in which the depth is 1/4 inch or more deficient in
specified depth shall be satisfactorily corrected at no expense to the OWNER.
2. All test holes shall be backfilled with similar material and satisfactorily compacted by and
at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. This operation shall be performed under the
observation of the ENGINEER who will check the depth for record purposes.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 32 13 13.00 CONCRETE (Cement Concrete Curb and Sidewalk)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Subgrade preparation
2. Construction of cement concrete curb and sidewalk
3. Construction of handicap ramps
1. Site Clearing (Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction): Section 31 20 00.02

4. Concrete (Trench Paving and Restoration): Section 32 13 13.02
5. Concrete (Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete): Section 32 13 13.01

Department of Justice, Code for Regulations, ADA Standards for Accessible Design
A185 Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Biller-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
C94 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
C143 Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
C231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
D994 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type)
E329 Specification for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Materials
used in Construction
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 32 13 13.00 CONCRETE (Ce- 32 13 13.00 - 1

ment Concrete Curb and Sidewalk)
ADDITION
B. Inspections:
1. Inspection by the ENGINEER will at a minimum be made of the subgrade, formwork, and
any steel prior to placement of the concrete.
2. ENGINEER will observe all on-site testing of concrete.
C. Testing:
1. CONTRACTOR shall test concrete strength, slump, air content and temperature on site
as specified in Section 32 13 13.01.
2. All on-site testing as well as laboratory testing shall be performed by the same
independent testing agency.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit concrete mix designs, including strength test records, for review and approval.
B. Submit certified results of compressive strength cylinder tests (from laboratory/testing agency).
C. Submit copies of concrete batch slips.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Control of traffic:
1. Take measures to control traffic during all operations. Do not allow traffic on newly
placed concrete until adequate strength has been attained.
2. Employ traffic control measures in accordance with Publication 213, Temporary Traffic
Control Guidelines.
B. Protection of work area or adjacent areas:
1. Restore existing surfaces outside the limits of the work that have been damaged by the
CONTRACTOR's operations to their original condition, at the CONTRACTOR's expense.
2. CONTRACTOR shall notify property OWNERs to refrain from applying deicing materials
on new sidewalks; however, damage as a result of salting is the responsibility of the
property OWNER.
C. Coordination with utilities:
1. Coordinate all necessary adjustments of existing utilities to accommodate this work.
2. Provide access to the site for utility work.

ADDITION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE
A. Portland cement concrete shall be air-entrained and have a minimum 28 day compressive
strength shall be 3,500 psi for curbs and 4,000 psi for sidewalks.
B. Cement Concrete criteria for curbs and sidewalks:
Slump: 1" minimum, 5" maximum

Air Content: 4.5% minimum, 7.5% maximum
Temperature: 50ºF minimum, 90ºF maximum
C. For slip formed curb, same as above except with a maximum slump of 1-1/2".
2.2 FORMS
A. General requirements:
1. Forms shall be coated with a form release agent just prior to placement of concrete.
B. Straight curbing (or radius greater than 40 feet):
1. Approved metal forms.

2. Wood forms, not less than 2 inch nominal thickness, planed on finish side.
C. Radius curbing:

2. Fabricated plywood or hardboard forms.
D. Curbing repairs (less than 10 feet):

2. Adjust to match existing conditions
E. Machine-placed curbing:
1. Straight or radius curbing may be placed with a self-propelled machine approved by the
ENGINEER.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT
A. Welded Wire Fabric - ASTM A185, size and spacing as shown on Standard Details.
B. Reinforcing Bars - ASTM A615, Grade 60 billet steel. Size and spacing as shown on Standard
Details.
2.4 JOINT MATERIAL
A. Joint Filler – Pre-molded expansion joint material shall be fiber joint filler conforming to ASTM
D994.

ADDITION
2.5 FORM COATING MATERIALS
A. Form release agents shall be non-staining, liquid chemical coatings free of kerosene and oil
which effectively prevent absorption of moisture into the forms and bonding of the concrete to
the forms.
2.6 CONCRETE CURING COMPOUNDS
A. Curing compounds shall be clear, non-staining liquid coatings containing no oil or wax and
conforming to ASTM C309, such as Safe-Cure, Sealtight 1100, Klear Seal R-75 or Enviocure
Clear 500, or similar material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CURB CONSTRUCTION
A. Excavate to required depth, remove and dispose of material, including existing curbs, and
compact the subgrade material to a firm, even surface.
B. Saw cut existing pavement a minimum of 12" from face of new curb. Exposed edges of existing
work shall be smooth and square.
C. Forms shall be placed as appropriate to the type of curbing on 2 sides (front and back). Forms
shall be securely braced to limit deflection during placement of concrete.
D. Concrete shall be placed in accordance with the Contract Drawings and in accordance with
Publication 408 Specifications..
E. Variation of more than 1/8" from the established line and grade shall be cause for rejection of
that portion of the work.
F. Form or saw contraction joints 3/16" wide and 2" deep at 10-foot maximum intervals on 2 sides
(front and top). Saw as soon as possible after the concrete has set sufficiently to preclude
raveling during the sawing and before any shrinkage cracking occurs in the concrete, but in no
case later than 24 hours following completion of the curb placement.
G. Provide ½" expansion joints at 60-foot intervals, at the end of each pour, and at the beginning
and end of all radii. ½" expansion joint material shall also separate curb from adjacent
sidewalks, poles, hydrants, walls and other permanent structures, except that 3/4" thick
expansion joint material shall be provided at storm inlets.
H. The last three feet of curb shall be tapered to a 1-1/2" reveal with expansion joint at the
beginning of taper.
I. Finish top surface with wood floats. Provide depressions for drainage, driveways, and ramps
for the handicapped as directed by the ENGINEER. Tool all exposed edges to the specified
radius.
J. Do not remove forms until concrete has set. Begin proper curing immediately after placement.
K. Reapply curing compound 30 days following first application.

ADDITION
L. For slip formed curb, uniformly feed the concrete to the machine so the concrete maintains the
shape of the section, without slumping after extrusion. Voids or honeycomb on the surface of
the finished curb will not be allowed. Immediately after extrusion, perform any additional
surface finishing required.
M. Correct minor irregularities with a carborundum stone or mortar comprised of two parts fine
aggregate to one part cement.
3.2 SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION
A. Inform ions. Excavate to required depth, remove and dispose of material, including any existing
sidewalks, and compact the subgrade material to a firm, even surface.
B. Exposed edges of existing work shall be smooth and square.
C. Construct ramps for the handicapped persons at all street crossings (as required by ADA
regulations and as indicated on the Contract Drawings) and as directed by the ENGINEER.
Handicap ramps shall be 6" thick concrete. All handicap curb ramps shall have detectable
warning domes as shown on the Contract Drawings.
D. Sidewalks across sanitary sewer or storm sewer easements shall be 8" thick.
E. Spread AASHTO N. 57 aggregate and compact to the thickness shown on the Standard Details.
F. Concrete shall be placed in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Publication 408
Specifications. Hand float to desired line and grade.
G. Score contraction joints at 5-foot intervals to sufficient depth to insure cracking at the joint. Do
not saw cut the contraction joints without prior approval from the ENGINEER. Also score
sidewalks over each drainage pipe placed underneath.
H. Provide 1/4" expansion joint at 30-foot intervals and at the end of each pour. Place ½"
expansion joint material at adjacent curbs, poles, hydrants, walls, and other permanent
structures.
I. Apply light broom finish immediately after float finish as specified in the Contract Drawings and
J. Provide depressions for driveways, downspouts, and drainage as directed by the ENGINEER or
shown on the Contract Drawings. Reapply curing compound 30 days following first application.
K. Begin proper curing in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Publication 408
Specifications, and immediately following placement.
L. Monolithic sidewalk and curb will be allowed at a radius curb ramp only. Mid-block ramps must
have separate curbs.
M. Apply curing compound.
3.3 HANDICAP RAMPS
The following requirements shall be followed in all construction of handicap ramps, where these
requirements are less stringent or different from ADA requirement, the ADA requirements shall
govern.

ADDITION
A. Sidewalks
1. Sidewalk cross slopes shall not exceed 2%.
2. A minimum of 36” pedestrian path of travel, clear of obstructions, grates and other
openings, shall be provided along the run of a sidewalk. A 42” pedestrian path of travel is
preferred.
3. Objects shall not project more than 4 inches into the pedestrian path of travel between
27” and 80” above the sidewalk surface unless a detection barrier is provided beneath
the object at a maximum of 4” less than the projection into the pedestrian path of travel.
B. Driveway aprons
1. Driveway aprons shall provide a minimum of 36” pedestrian path of travel, clear of
obstructions, grates and other openings, in line with the run of a sidewalk with a
maximum cross slope of 2%.
C. Curb ramps
1. Curb ramps shall have a maximum slope of 1:12.
2. The sum of the percent slope of the curb ramp and the roadway cross slope, when added
together as positive values, shall not exceed 13%.
3. Curb ramps shall have a minimum width of 4 feet.
4. Curb ramps shall be constructed flush, without a reveal, at the edge of the roadway
surface.
5. Curb ramps shall be perpendicular to the curb.
6. Curb ramps shall be within the crosswalk if a crosswalk exists.
7. Flares shall be provided at a maximum slope of 1:10 when a curb ramp is located in the
pedestrian path of travel.
8. Return curbs shall only be provided in areas outside the pedestrian path of travel or
walkway.
D. Diagonal Curb ramps
1. Diagonal curb ramps shall not be permitted in new construction. For projects proposing
improvements to handicap facilities, diagonal curb ramps shall be permitted on a case to
case basis as determined by the Municipality.
2. Diagonal curb ramps shall have a minimum 4’x 4’ maneuvering space at the bottom of
the ramp. The maneuvering space shall have a maximum 2% cross-slope in any
direction. The maneuvering space shall be within the projected curb line measured from
the point of curvature and point of tangent to the point of intersection of the project curb
lines. The maneuvering space shall be within the crosswalk delineation.
3. Diagonal curb ramps having flared sides shall have at least a 24 inch long segment of
straight curb located on each side of the curb ramp and within the marked crossings.

ADDITION
E. Detectable Warning Surfaces
1. Detectable warnings shall provide significantly contrasting texture and light reflective
color.
2. Detectable warnings shall be the width of the curb ramp and two feet in depth.
3. Detectable warnings shall be provided at a maximum 8” from the roadway surface.
4. Detectable warnings may be considered part of the ramp portion of the curb ramp.
5. Truncated domes within the detectable warnings surface shall provide domes in
alignment with the direction of travel.
6. Truncated domes shall have a diameter of 0.9 inches, a height of 0.2 inches and a center
to center spacing of 2.35 inches and shall contrast visually with adjoining surfaces, either
light on dark, or dark on light.
F. Landing Areas
1. A landing area shall be provided at any curb ramp where there is more than one
pedestrian path of travel accessible to the curb ramp.
2. Landing areas shall be provided as required in accordance with Federal regulations.
3. Landing areas shall be a minimum 5’ X 5’ area, clear of any obstructions, with a

maximum slope of 2% in any direction. 4’ X 4’ landing with a 60” clear turning diameter
maybe be permitted if a written report of noncompliance is submitted for each location
proposed and approved by the Engineer.
4. Landing areas shall be provided at the following locations:
• every location the pedestrian path of travel would change direction

• at any location where the rise of a ramp exceeds 30 inches.
5. The landing area shall be at least as wide as the ramp run leading to it.
3.4 BACKFILLING AND RESTORATION
A. Temporary backfill at curbs shall consist of select granular material front and back, to within 8"
of top of curb.
B. Restore adjacent areas as indicated in the Contract Drawings and Publication 408
Specifications.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 32 13 13.01 CONCRETE (Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Construction of cast-in-place plain and reinforced cement concrete structures

2. Concrete curbs and sidewalks
3. Trench restoration of concrete roadways and driveways.
4. Testing of cast-in-place concrete for curbs, sidewalks and utility related structures
1. Concrete (Cement concrete curb and sidewalk): Section 32 13 13 00

2. Concrete (Trench Paving and Restoration): Section 32 13 13 02
3. Concrete (Cement concrete for utility construction): Section 32 13 13 03
C. Definitions:
1. Exposed construction - Permanently exposed to view.
2. Concrete - Normal weight concrete for which density is not a controlling attribute, made
with aggregates of the types covered by ASTM C33, and having unit weights in the range
of 135 to 160 lb. per cubic foot.
3. f'c - The design compressive strength of the hardened concrete at an age of 28-days.
E. Work shall conform to all requirements of ACI 301-05, published by the American Concrete
Institute, Farmington Hill, Michigan, except as modified by these Contract Documents.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
ACI 117 Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction

and Materials
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete.
ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
A185 Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
A615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 32 13 13.01 CONCRETE 32 13 13- 1

(Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete)
ADDITION
C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field
C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete
C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
C138 Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete
C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
C173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
C192 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
D698 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3)
(Bituminous Type)
Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types)
D1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork and Recycled
PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection
and/or Testing.
3. National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association, 900 Spring Street, Silver Spring, MD 20910:
Check list for certification of ready-mixed concrete production facilities.
B. Testing Agencies:
1. Testing services shall be performed by an independent testing agency acceptable to the

ENGINEER at the CONTRACTORS's expense.
2. All testing agencies shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's or supplier's certification for the following materials verifying compliance
with these Specifications:
1. Portland cement
2. Coarse and fine aggregates
3. Any specified concrete admixtures
4. Reinforcing steel

ADDITION
5. Joint forming and filling materials

6. Form coating materials
7. Concrete curing compounds
B. Submit concrete mix designs, including strength test records, for review and approval.
C. Submit certified results of compressive strength cylinder tests.
D. Submit copies of concrete batch slips.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE
A. Cement - Unless otherwise specified, Portland cement shall be Type I cement conforming to
ASTM C150.
B. Aggregates - Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM
C33.
C. Water - Mixing water for concrete shall be clean, potable water meeting the requirements of
ASTM C94.
D. Admixtures - Concrete admixtures, when required and/or approved for use by the ENGINEER,
shall conform to the following Specifications:
1. Air-entraining admixtures - ASTM C260.

2. Water-reducing, retarding and accelerating admixtures - ASTM C494.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars - All reinforcing bars shall be deformed, except spirals, which may be plain
bars. Reinforcing bars shall be Grade 60, plain carbon-steel conforming to the requirements of
ASTM A615, including supplementary requirements on Contract Drawings.
B. Welded Wire Reinforcement - Welded wire reinforcement shall be fabricated from smooth or
deformed wire of the size and spacing required on the Contract Drawings and shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM A185, except welded intersections shall be spaced not farther apart
than 12 inches in the direction of the principal reinforcement.

ADDITION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROPORTIONING
A. General - Concrete for all parts of the work shall be of the specified quality and capable of being
placed without excessive segregation. When hardened, concrete shall develop all
characteristics required by these Specifications and the Contract Documents.
B. Strength - Unless otherwise specified, the minimum 28-day compressive strength of the
concrete, f'c, shall be 3000 psi.
C. Durability - All concrete which will be subjected to potentially destructive exposure, including
freezing and thawing, weather, and/or deicer chemicals, shall be air-entrained and shall
conform to the air content limits in ACI 301 moderate exposure.
3.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Welding - Welding of crossing bars (tack welding) for assembly of reinforcement is prohibited.
B. Fabricate and place all reinforcing. in accordance with ACI 117.
3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support
shall be placed prior to concreting.
B. All CONTRACTORS whose work is related to the concrete or must be supported by it shall be
given ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish embedded items before the
concrete is placed.
C. Placing Embedded Items - Expansion joint material, water stops, and other embedded items
shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement. Voids in sleeves, inserts,
and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent the entry
of concrete into the voids.
3.4 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
A. Production Method - All concrete shall be ready-mixed concrete, batched, mixed and
transported in accordance with ASTM C94. Plant equipment and facilities shall conform to
"Certification of Ready-Mixed Concrete Production Facilities (Checklist with Instructions)" of the
National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association.
B. When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, as indicated by
the Specifications, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water-cement
ratio nor the maximum slump is exceeded. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing
equal to at least half of the total mixing required. Discharge of the concrete shall be completed
within 1-1/2 hours, or before the truck drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes
first, after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or the introduction
of the cement to the aggregates. Truck batch slips must include time of batching, total drum
revolutions upon arrival at site, and quantity of water (in gallons) per cubic yard available to be
added to attain the maximum design water-cement ratio.

ADDITION
3.5 PLACING
A. Preparation Before Placing:
1. Hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the inner surfaces of the
conveying equipment.
2. Formwork shall be completed; snow, ice and water shall be removed; reinforcement shall
be secured in place; expansion joint material, anchors, and other embedded items shall
be positioned; and the entire preparation shall be accepted.
3. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground.
B. Conveying:
1. Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit, as rapidly as
practicable, by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients and in a
manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is maintained. Do not
use aluminum pipes or chutes.
2. Conveying equipment shall be of a size and design such that detectable settling of
concrete shall not occur before adjacent concrete is placed. Conveying equipment shall
be cleaned at the end of each operation or work day.
a. Truck mixers, agitators and non-agitating units and their manner of operation shall
conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C94.
b. Belt conveyors shall be horizontal or at a slope which will not cause excessive
segregation or loss of ingredients. Concrete shall be protected against undue
drying or rise in temperature. An acceptable arrangement shall be used at the
discharge end to prevent segregation. Mortar shall not be allowed to adhere to the
return length of the belt. Long runs shall be discharged into a hopper or through a
baffle.
c. Chutes shall be metal or metal-lined and shall have a slope not exceeding 1'
vertical to 2' horizontal and not less than 1' vertical to 3' horizontal. Chutes more
than 20 ft. long and chutes not meeting the slope requirements may be used
provided they discharge into a hopper before distribution.
d. Pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall be capable of pumping the

specified mix with adequate pumping capacity. Pneumatic placement shall be
controlled so that segregation is not apparent in the discharged concrete. The loss
of slump in pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall not exceed 2 in.
Concrete shall not be conveyed through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum
alloy.

ADDITION
C. Depositing:
1. General - Concrete shall be deposited continuously, or in layers of such thickness that no

concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the
formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be
placed continuously, construction joints shall be located as indicated on the Contract
Drawings. Placing shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete which is being
integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Concrete which has partially hardened or
has been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited.
2. Segregation - Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to

avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Concrete shall not be subjected to any
procedure which will cause segregation.
3. Consolidation - All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration so that the concrete is

thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners
of forms, eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honey-combing, pitting, or
planes of weakness. Internal vibrators used shall be the largest size and the most
powerful that can be properly used in the work. They shall be operated by competent
workmen. Use of vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed.
Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn at points approximately 18 in. apart. At each
insertion, the duration shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete but not sufficient to
cause segregation, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. A spare vibrator shall be kept on the
job site during all concrete placing operations. Where the concrete is to have an as-cast
finish, a full surface of mortar shall be brought against the form by the vibration process,
supplemented if necessary by spading to work the coarse aggregate back from the
formed surface.
D. Protection:
1. Unless adequate protection is provided, concrete shall not be placed during rain, sleet or
snow.
2. Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water nor to damage the surface
finish.
3. The temperature of the concrete, as placed, shall not be so high as to cause difficulty
from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints and should not exceed 90oF. When the
temperature of the steel is greater that 120oF, steel forms and reinforcement shall be
sprayed with water just prior to placing the concrete.

ADDITION
3.6 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES
A. If the finish is not designated on the Contract Drawings, the following finishes shall be used as
applicable:
1. Rough form finish - For all concrete surfaces not permanently exposed. Tie holes and
defects shall be patched and fins over 1/4" in heights rubbed off.
2. Smooth rubbed finish - For all concrete surfaces permanently exposed. Apply on newly
hardened concrete within one day following form removal. Surfaces shall be wetted and
rubbed until uniform color and texture are produced.
3.7 SLABS
A. General - Concrete for slabs shall be as specified in Paragraph 3.01.
B. Preparation Of Subgrade for Slabs on Ground:
1. The subgrade shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform load-bearing capacity.
The minimum in-place density of the subgrade soils shall be not less than 95% of its
maximum dry weight density at its optimum moisture content, plus or minus 2%, as
determined by ASTM D698.
2. The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins. If the temperature
inside a building where concrete is to be placed is below freezing, it shall be raised and
maintained above 50oF long enough to remove all frost from the subgrade.
3. The subgrade shall be moist at the time of concreting. If necessary, it shall be dampened
with water in advance of concreting, but there shall not be standing water on the sub-
grade nor any muddy or soft spots when the concrete is placed.
C. Finishes
1. Floated finish - After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled,
the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating with a hand float
or with a bladed power trowel equipped with float shoes, or with a powered disc float shall
begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when the surface has stiffened
sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first floating, planeness of surface
shall be checked with a 10-ft. straightedge applied at not less than two different angles.
All high spots shall be cut down and all low spots filled and the slab shall then be
refloated immediately to a uniform sandy texture.
2. Broom or belt finish - Immediately after the concrete has received a float finish, it shall be
given a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the
surface.

ADDITION
3. Unspecified Finish - When type of finish is not specified on the Contract Drawings, use
broom finish.
3.8 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General - Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature
drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury, and shall be maintained
with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for
hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete.
B. Preservation of Moisture:
1. For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, one of the following procedures shall be
applied immediately after completion of placement and finishing:
a. Application of acceptable moisture-retaining covering as approved by the

ENGINEER.
b. Application of a curing compound conforming to ASTM C309 - The compound

shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer
immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has
disappeared from the concrete surface. It shall not be used on any surface against
which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded unless it is proven that
the curing compound will not prevent bond, or unless positive measures are taken
to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications.
2. Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden forms or metal forms exposed to
heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping the forms wet until they can be safely
removed. After form removal, the concrete shall be cured.
3. Curing shall be continued for at least 7 days. Alternatively, if tests are made of cylinders
kept adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods, moisture retention
measures may be terminated when the average compressive strength has reached 70
percent of the strength, f'c. Moisture retention measures may also be terminated when
the temperature of the concrete is maintained at least at 50oF for the same length of time
that laboratory-cured cylinders, representative of the concrete in-place, require to achieve
85 percent of f'c.
C. Temperature, Wind, and Humidity:
1. Cold weather - When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 40oF, the
temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between 50o and 70oF for the required
curing period. When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering, insulating, or
housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate
to maintain the required temperature without injury due to concentration of heat.
Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hrs. unless precautions are
taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon
dioxide.

ADDITION
2. Hot weather - When necessary, provisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying,
sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material shall be made in
advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as
concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow.
3. Rate of temperature change - Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to

the concrete during and immediately following the curing period shall be kept as uniform
as possible and shall not exceed 5oF in any 1-hr. or 50oF in any 24-hr. period.
D. Protection from mechanical injury - During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected
from damaging mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive
vibration. All finished concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage by construction
equipment, materials or methods, by application of curing procedures, and by rain or running
water.
3.9 TESTING
A. General - Concrete materials and operations will be tested and inspected as the work
progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later
rejection when such defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the ENGINEER for final
acceptance.
B. Testing Services - The following testing services shall be performed by the designated testing
agency.
1. Conduct strength tests of the concrete during construction, in accordance with the
following procedures:
a. Secure composite samples, in accordance with ASTM C172. Each sample shall be
obtained from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding any
selection of the test batch other than by a number selected at random before
commencement of concrete placement.
b. Mold and cure four (4) specimens from each sample, in accordance with ASTM
C31. Any deviations from the requirements of this Standard shall be recorded in
the test report.
c. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two specimens shall be tested at
28-days for acceptance and two shall be tested at 7-days for information. The
acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens
tested at 28 days. If one specimen in a test manifests evidence of improper
sampling, molding or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the
remaining cylinder shall be considered the test result. Should both specimens in a
test show any of the above defects, the entire test shall be discarded.
d. Make at least one strength test for each 50 cu. yd., or fraction thereof, of each
mixture design of concrete placed in any 1 day.
2. Determine slump of the concrete sample for each strength test and whenever
consistency of concrete appears to vary, using ASTM C143.
3. Determine air content of the concrete sample for each strength test, in accordance with
either ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138.

ADDITION
4. Determine temperature of the concrete sample for each strength test.
C. Additional Services When Required - The following services shall be performed by the testing
agency, when required by the ENGINEER, at the CONTRACTOR’s expense:
1. Inspect concrete batching, mixing and delivery operations to the extent deemed
necessary by the ENGINEER.
2. Sample concrete at point of placement and perform required tests.
3. Review the manufacturer's report for each shipment of cement and reinforcing steel and
conduct laboratory tests or spot checks of the materials, as received, for compliance with
specifications.
4. Mold four specimens from each sample (in addition to those required in Section 03000,
Paragraph 3.09.B.1.b), in accordance with ASTM C31 and field cure in or on the structure
providing the same method of cure for the specimens as that which the structure
receives.
D. Other Services As Needed - The following services shall be performed by the testing agency at
the CONTRACTOR's expense:
1. Additional testing and inspection required because of changes in materials or proportions

requested by the CONTRACTOR.
2. Additional testing of materials or concrete occasioned by their failure by test or inspection

to meet specification requirements.
E. Duties and Authorities of Designated Testing Agency:
1. Representatives of the agency shall inspect, sample and test the materials and the
production of concrete, as required by the ENGINEER. When it appears that any
material furnished or work performed by the CONTRACTOR fails to fulfill specification
requirements, the testing agency shall report such deficiency to the ENGINEER and the
CONTRACTOR.
2. The agency shall report all test and inspection results to the ENGINEER and
CONTRACTOR immediately after they are performed. All test reports shall include the
exact location in the work at which the batch represented by a test was deposited.
Reports of strength tests shall include detailed information on storage and curing of
specimens prior to testing.
3. The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax,
enlarge or release any requirement of the Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept
any portion of the work.
F. Responsibilities and Duties of CONTRACTOR:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary testing services for the following:
a. Qualification of proposed materials and the establishment of mixture designs.
b. Other testing services needed or required by the CONTRACTOR.

ADDITION
2. The use of testing services shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR of the
responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the Contract
Documents.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER the concrete materials and the
concrete mix designs proposed for use with a written request for acceptance. This
submittal shall include the results of all testing performed to qualify the materials and to
establish the mix designs. No concrete shall be placed in the work until the
CONTRACTOR has received such acceptance in writing.
4. To facilitate testing and inspection, the CONTRACTOR shall:
a. Furnish any necessary labor to assist the testing agency in obtaining and handling
samples at the project or other sources of materials.
b. Advise the testing agency sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for

completion of quality tests and for the assignment of personnel.
c. Provide and maintain for the sole use of the testing agency adequate facilities for
safe storage and proper curing of concrete test specimens on the project site for
the first 24-hrs. as required by ASTM C31.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 32 13 13.02 CONCRETE (Trench Paving and Restoration)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Temporary trench paving

2. Permanent trench paving
3. Shoulder restoration
4. Driveway restoration
5. Concrete restoration
1. Earth Moving (Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting): Section 31 20 00 02

2. Earth Moving (Roadway Excavation, Fill and Compaction): Section 31 20 00 01
5. Concrete (Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete): Section 32 13 13 01

Publication 27, Specification for Bituminous Mixtures (Bulletin 27)
Publication 37, Specification for Bituminous Materials (Bulletin 25)
D2950 Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Method
Title 67 Transportation, Chapter 459, Occupancy of Highways by Utilities
B. Inspections:

surface.
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 32 13 13.02 CONCRETE 32 13 13 - 1

(Trench Paving and Restoration)
ADDITION
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit certification from bituminous and aggregate suppliers attesting that materials
conform to Publication 408, Specifications.
2. Submit bituminous concrete mix design for approval.
3. Provide PennDOT certifications (CS-4171 with each load delivered to the job site, as
required by ENGINEER).
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The Control of Traffic:
1. Take measures to control traffic during paving operations. Do not allow traffic on newly
paved areas until adequate stability and adhesion have been attained and the material
has cooled to 140° F or less.
2. Employ traffic control measures in accordance with Publication 213, Temporary Traffic
Control Guidelines.
B. Protection of Adjacent Areas:
1. Restore existing surface outside the limits of the work that has been damaged by the
CONTRACTOR's operations, to its original condition at the expense of CONTRACTOR.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE
B. Use air-entrained, PennDOT Class HES (High Early Strength).
2.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS AND AGGREGATES
A. All bituminous materials and aggregates used in base course construction, paving, and
resurfacing are designated in these specifications by, and shall conform to, the applicable
portions of the Publication 408 Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY TRENCH PAVING
A. Notify Place temporary paving immediately upon completion of trench backfilling. Trenches
shall not remain unpaved longer than five working days; nor over weekends and holidays;
unless construction activities are restricted by PennDOT to restore after backfill.

ADDITION
B. Shape and compact subgrade material, then place and compact base course to the required
thickness. Apply tack coat to vertical trench sides, in accordance to Publication 408, Section
460.
C. Place temporary paving material. Compact to required minimum thickness with trench roller
having a minimum 300 pounds pressure per inch-width of compaction. Restore temporary
trench paving in accordance with the Contract Drawings and in accordance with Publication 408
Specifications.
D. Continuously maintain temporary paving.
3.2 PERMANENT TRENCH PAVING
A. For Bituminous Surface (Trench), saw existing paving in accordance with PA Code 67, Chapter
459. This restoration shall be used when the final surface must be established immediately.
B. For Bituminous Surface (Trench) Local, the trench restoration shall be for all trenched within the
roadway surfaces on roads that are classified as local roadways. The pavement restoration
design parameters shall be determined in the Contract Drawings and in accordance with
C. For Bituminous Surface (Trench) Collector or Arterial, trim existing paving to remove damaged
areas. Cut straight joint lines and right angle offsets. This restoration shall be used for any
trench restoration on a road surface where the road is classified as a collector or an arterial.
The pavement restoration design parameters shall be determined in the Contract Drawings and
in accordance with Publication 408 Specifications.
D. For concrete (trench), trench restoration for all trenched areas within the roadway surfaces that
are concrete. Design parameters shall be determined in the Contract Drawings and in
accordance with Publication 408 Specifications.
E. Construct permanent base and surface courses to the required compacted thicknesses shown
in the Contract Drawings and in accordance with Publication 408 Specifications. Seal all joints.
F. Maintain permanent paving throughout the contract maintenance period.
3.3 BITUMINOUS OVERLAY
A. See Section 32 12 16.
B. As shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with Publication 408 Specifications.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 32 13 13.03 CONCRETE (Cement Concrete for Utility Construction)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Reaction and support blocking

2. Cradles and encasements
3. Miscellaneous utility related cast-in-place cement concrete construction
1. Earth Moving (Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting): Section 31 20 00 02

2. Concrete (Trench Paving and Restoration): Section 32 13 13 02
3. Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems: Section 33 71 19
4. Facility Storm Drainage Piping: Section 33 05 16 13
5. Facility Sanitary Sewers (Sanitary Sewer Pipe): Section 33 31 00 00
6. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Water Mains): Section 33 11 16 00
7. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Valves and Fire Hydrants): Section 33 11 16 02
8. Concrete (Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete): Section 32 13 13 01


B. Inspections:
1. Inspections by the ENGINEER will, at a minimum, be made of the subgrade, formwork,

supports, and reinforcement prior to placement of the concrete; and of the concrete prior
to backfilling.
C. Testing:
1. As specified in Section 32 13 13.01.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit concrete mix designs, including strength test records, for review and approval.
B. Submit certified results of compressive strength cylinder tests.
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 32 13 13.03 CONCRETE (Ce- 31 10 00 - 1

ment Concrete for Utility Construction)
ADDITION
C. Submit copies of concrete batch slips.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENT CONCRETE
B. For work involving a time constraint, use PennDOT Class HES (High Early Strength).
2.2 REINFORCEMENT STEEL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Comply with Section 32 13 13.01 for construction requirements including placement, curing, and
protection of cement concrete.
B. Excavate and shape trench bottoms and sides to accommodate thrust block forms,
encasements, manhole bases, drop connections, inlets and vaults.
C. Support pipes, valves and fittings at the required elevation with brick or concrete block. Do not
use earth, rock, wood, or organic materials as supports.
D. Provide spacers, chairs, bolsters, ties and other devices for properly placing, spacing,
supporting and fastening reinforcement in place.
E. Place concrete utilizing all possible care to prevent displacement of pipes or fittings. Return
displaced pipes or fittings to line and grade immediately.
F. Insure tie rods, nuts, bolts and flanges are free and clear of concrete.
G. Do not backfill structures until concrete has achieved its initial set and forms are removed.
H. Perform backfilling and compaction as specified in Section 31 20 00.01.
END OF SECTION
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 32 13 13.03 CONCRETE (Ce- 31 10 00 - 2

ment Concrete for Utility Construction)
ADDITION
SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Application of traffic lines, markers or legends on roadway surfaces.

2. Surface preparation.
3. Removal of any conflicting pavement markings.
4. Inlaid thermoplastic pavement markings.
1. Asphalt Paving (Bituminous paving and surfacing): Section 32 12 16

2. Concrete (Trench paving and restoration): Section 32 13 13.02
Publication 408, Specifications.

Publication 68 Regulations – Traffic Signs, Signals and Markings
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest revision:
D868 Standard Method of Evaluating Degree of Bleeding of Traffic Paint

D1309 Standard Test Method for Settling Properties of Traffic Paint During Storage
3. The Institute of Transportation Engineer (ITE):
“A Model Performance Specification for the Purchase of Pavement Marking Paints and
Powders”, approved September 25, 1977.
M247 Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints

M249 White and Yellow Reflective Thermoplastic Striping Materials (Solid Form)
5. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), latest
edition.
B. Qualifications:
1. Installer shall specialize in application of traffic lines and pavement markings and have
five (5) years documented experience in Pennsylvania.
2. CONTRACTOR shall meet PennDOT standards for installing pavement markings.
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT 32 17 23 - 1

MARKINGS
ADDITION
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Letter of certification from the paint manufacturer stating that traffic line paint supplied meets
either PennDOT’ spec for Traffic Line Paint (required type) or the referenced ITE spec. This
letter shall accompany the delivery of the material and be given to the ENGINEER prior to the
installation of pavement markings. CONTRACTOR shall supply certification (CS-4171).
B. Application method, material and manufacturer’s required mixing instruction and surface
preparation details.
C. Schedule of operations.
D. Inlaid thermoplastic pavement markings:
1. Product data sheet from manufacturer.
2. A four (4) square foot pre-cut sample of each lot or batch for each color for testing
physical properties, if required.
3. Certification from manufacturer that the CONTRACTOR has been properly trained in the
handling and installation of the product.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Control of Traffic:
1. Take measures to control traffic during line painting operations. Line painting machine
shall not appreciably impede traffic flow in adjacent lanes while painting centerline and
one lane shall be left completely open to traffic when painting edge lines.
2. Employee traffic control measures in accordance with Publication 213, Temporary Traffic
Control Guidelines.
B. Temperature and Weather Restrictions:
1. Painted traffic lines and markings shall not be placed when the ambient temperature is
less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Cold plastic markers or legends shall be applied only when the surface temperature is 60
degrees Fahrenheit or higher, unless otherwise directed by the ENGINER.
C. Protection of Markings:
1. Protect markings during and after application using barrier cones or other devices to keep
traffic off newly applied markings until track free.
D. Environmental Requirements:
1. Adhere to manufacturer’s data on air and surface temperature limits and relative humidity
during application and curing of coatings. Schedule coating work to avoid dust and
airborne contaminants.
E. Material Storage:
1. If paint is stored for more than two (2) months, invert container several days prior to use.

MARKINGS
ADDITION
2. Store glass bead in a cool, dry place.
3. All products shall be protected from weather and freezing.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee to replace, at his expense, that portion of the pavement
marking installed under this Contract which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, has not remained
effective in performing useful daylight and nighttime service for a period of 6 months from the
date of installation. The required service is defined as 90% of markings being effective and in
place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT
A. Paint shall be PennDOT Paint Type I, unless otherwise noted, and shall consist of either an
alkyd resin type or a combination of alkyd resin type modified with chlorinated rubber ready-
mixed white and yellow traffic paints, for use on bituminous and Portland cement concrete
pavements. These paints shall be reflectorized for night visibility, if specified, by adding
reflective spheres before the paint dries or sets, using the drop-on or pressurized methods.
B. Traffic paint shall consist of ready-mixed pigmented binder in a one package system. When
applied at the wet-film thickness of 15 mils, the paint shall be suitable for application to traffic
bearing surfaces such as Portland cement concrete, bituminous pavements, and plain or
vitrified brick surfaces of streets, highways, bridges, tunnels and parking lots.
C. Pigments:
1. White - Any combination of pigments provided the finished paint meets all the
requirements specified herein. Sufficient suspending and dispersing agents shall be used
to prevent excessive settling.
2. Yellow - Any organic yellow pigment provided it does not contain any of the metals listed
in EPA Code of Regulations 40. Sufficient suspending and dispersing agents shall be
used to prevent excessive settling. Color of dry paint film shall match Color No. 33538 of
Federal Standard 595a.
D. Binder: The supplier may use any combination of ingredients, except tall oil resins, provided the
finished paint meets all the requirements herein. Sufficient amounts of anti-skinning agents shall
be used to prevent skinning. Sufficient resin solids, compatible thinners and driers, if necessary,
shall be used.
2.2 GLASS SPHERES
A. Glass spheres shall meet the requirements of Publication 408, Section 1103.14 (a) 2. and all
current supplements.
B. Glass beads shall be in units of 50 lbs. and packed in moisture-proof bags. The beads shall be
stored in a cool dry place.

MARKINGS
ADDITION
2.3 COLD PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pigmented plastic which contains glass beads and capable of being attached to bituminous
and/or cement concrete pavement by means of a factory applied, pressure-sensitive adhesive.
B. Pigments shall meet requirements in Section 1103.14 (a) 1. in Publication 408.
C. Glass beads - AASHTO M247

.
2.4 HEAT APPLIED THERMOPLASTIC MARKINGS
A. A durable, retro-reflective pavement marking material suitable for use as roadway, intersection,
commercial or private delineation markings. Must be composed of hydrocarbon resin,
aggregate, pigments, binders and glass beads which have been factory produced as a finished
product, and is designed to meet the requirements of the current edition of the MUTCD. The
thermoplastic material conforms to AASHTO M249, with the exception of the relevant
differences due to supplying the material in a preformed state.
B. The markings must be a resilient white or yellow hydrocarbon thermoplastic product with
uniformly distributed glass beads throughout the entire cross section area. Lines, legends and
symbols are capable of being affixed to bituminous and/or Portland concrete pavements by the
use of the normal heat of a propane type of torch. Other colors shall be available as required.
C. The markings must be capable of conforming to pavement contours, breaks and faults through
the action of traffic at normal pavement temperatures. The markings shall have resealing
characteristics, such that it is capable of fusing with itself and previously applied thermoplastic
when heated with the torch.
D. The markings must be able to be applied in temperatures down to 32 degrees Fahrenheit

without any special storage, preheating or treatment of the material before application.
E. Pigments:
1. White: Sufficient titanium dioxide pigment is used to ensure a color similar to Federal
Highway White, Color No. 17886, as per Federal Standard 595a.
2. Yellow: Sufficient yellow pigment is used to ensure a color similar to Federal Highway
Yellow, Color No. 15358, as per Federal Standard 595a. The yellow pigment must be of
organic origin only.
F. Environmental Resistance: The material must be resistant to deterioration due to exposure to

sunlight, water, oil, gasoline, salt or adverse weather conditions.
2.5 M ETHYL METHACRYLATE MARKINGS (MMA)
A. A durable, cold applied, 2 component material composed of resins in reactive monomers,

pigment, plasticizer, fillers and/or glass beads and is to be reacted just prior to application with a
benzoyl-peroxide catalyst. It shall be suitable for use as roadway intersection, commercial or
private delineation markings on asphaltic or Portland cement surfaces.
B. Color shall be as required by project (white and/or yellow).
C. MMA shall be lead free and cure to a minimum 99% solids when reacted as per the
manufacturer’s instructions. All mixed material shall cure to a no track condition within 15
minutes of application at min. 40 mils wet at 77˚F.

MARKINGS
ADDITION
D. Applied markings shall not deteriorate due to ultraviolet light, water, oil, pavement oil, salt and
adverse weather conditions.
E. Material shall be capable of conforming to pavement contours, breaks and faults through action
of traffic at normal pavement temperatures.
2.6 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
A. Plowable or non-plowable as per Section 1103.05(c) in Publication 408 and the Contract
Drawings.
1. Plowable: Shaped to fit in a depression in the pavement.
2. Non-plowable: Attached to roadway surface by use of pressure sensitive adhesive.
B. Plastic, retro-reflective surface, color and one-way or two-way marker as indicated on Contract
Drawings.
1. Retroreflectors shall be prismatic type, acrylic plastic molded polycarbonate or other

suitable material designed to provide strength, abrasion resistance, impact resistance,
resilience and adhesion. The retroreflective shall be ultraviolet stabilized grade material
which provides resistance to color change over long periods of outdoor exposure.
2. The retroreflective surface shall contain two (2) prismatic reflective faces to reflect light in
two (2) directions. The surface of the reflective face shall be protected by a permanently
bonded glass face or other transparent, abrasion resistant material. Reflective face colors
shall be selected by the ENGINEER.
2.7 INLAID THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. The inlaid thermoplastic pavement markings shall be provided pre-cut in sizes to conform to the
specified pattern, widths and shapes shown on the Contract Drawings. The material shall be
packaged in accordance with accepted commercial standards and, when stored in cool dry area
indoors, shall be suitable for use for one year after the date of purchase. Color for insert and
surrounding shall be in accordance to Section VIII - Technical Provisions (Detailed). Pattern
shall be in accordance to Section VIII - Technical Provisions (Detailed).
B. Accepted pre-cut reflectorized inlaid thermoplastic pavement markings materials shall be the
thermoplastic material for inlay into hot mix asphalt (HMA). The inlaid thermoplastic material
shall have a minimum thickness of 90 mils (2.3mm), and consist of a mixture of high quality
polymeric materials, pigments, fibers, and glass beads distributed throughout the cross-section,
and with a reflective layer of glass beads bonded to the top surface.
C. Softening Point: The softening point shall be measured by the Ring and Bell method, as
described in ASTM D-36-95 (2000). Acceptable range shall be 210-250˚ F (100-120˚ C).
D. Bond Strength: Thermoplastic bond strength to asphalt substrate shall be measured by Cross-
Cut Test, as described in ASTM D-3359. A minimum of 50% of thermoplastic bond surface shall
exhibit attached particles of asphalt.
E. Acceptable manufacturer for inlaid thermoplastic marking is Streetprint Duratherm at

(800).688.5653, unless noted on the Contract Drawings.

MARKINGS
ADDITION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean the surface of the roadway before application of traffic lines or pavement markings to
provide a clean, dry roadway surface which is free of loose dirt and other debris, to the
satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
B. The surface cleaning for Cold Plastic markings shall include as a last operation the use of
compressed air or a fine bristled broom over the application area to provide a dust-free surface.
C. New concrete road surfaces shall be cured at least seven (7) days prior to marking. Remove
curing compounds prior to applying markings.
D. MMA markings may be placed on top of existing MMA markings which are in good condition.
Other non-MMA markings must be mechanically removed prior to placement of new MMA
markings. Remove chipped or flaking MMA markings prior to placing new MMA markings.
3.2 APPLICATION OF PAINTED MARKINGS
A. Paint: Paint shall be dispensed in a wet film thickness of 15+1 mils. The rate of application of
paint on bituminous surface treatment roads may be 25% greater. The ENGINEER will
determine whether roadways require an increased application rate.
B. Glass Beads: Glass beads shall be applied at a rate of six (6) pounds per gallon of paint.
C. Apply new pavement markings and “touch-up” existing markings within the limits of work. The
finished project shall match the Contract Drawings.
3.3 EQUIPMENT FOR PAINTED MARKINGS
A. The line painting machine type shall be such that it shall not appreciably impede the traffic flow
in adjacent lanes while painting the centerlines of the roadway and one lane shall be left
completely open to traffic when painting edge lines.
B. The line painting machines used on this project shall be capable of a simultaneous application
of two parallel lines in either a solid or broken pattern in forming the centerline. It shall also be
capable of the automatic dispensing of glass beads onto the painted surface at the required
application rate, by the pressurized glass gun method.
C. The machinery shall also be capable of providing a paint line in 4-inch, 6-inch and 8-inch widths.
D. Each piece of machinery used to apply centerlines and edge lines shall be equipped with a
measuring device which automatically and continuously measures to the nearest foot, the
length of each line placed.
E. Legends shall be applied with equipment approved by the ENGINEER; hand brushes or rollers
are not permitted. Glass beads may be hand applied.

MARKINGS
ADDITION
3.4 CENTERLINE APPLICATION
A. Where existing centerlines are visible and properly located, the new centerlines shall be applied
directly over the existing pattern. Where centerlines do not exist, or existing centerlines are
improperly located, as determined by the ENGINEER, the new centerlines shall be applied at
the correct location. If the existing markings have to be removed to allow correct placement of
the new markings, such work shall be done in accordance with Section 963 of Publication 408.
This work is incidental to the application of the new centerline.
B. In general, on two-lane roadways, the centerline shall evenly divide the roadway; however, if a
portion of the roadway on either or both sides is to be utilized for parking, the centerline shall
evenly divide the traveled way.
C. Apply the centerline in its proper location; any centerline pattern placed more than six (6) inches
from the center of the roadway or traveled way shall be removed and replaced by the
CONTRACTOR at his own expense.
3.5 EDGELINE APPLICATION
A. Field-check all roadways shown on the Contract Drawings which require application of edge
lines. Only those roadway sections which are 20 feet or greater in width for more than 50
percent of their length shall be painted with edge lines.
3.6 APPLICATION OF COLD PLASTIC MARKINGS
A. Inlaids: Place material on new bituminous surface just before final compaction. Roll material into
new surface to achieve flush finished surface.
B. Surface applied: Apply onto the existing, cleaned surface of concrete or bituminous roadways.
C. Use compatible “adhesive activator” or “primer sealer”, if recommended by adhesive

manufacturer.
3.7 APPLICATION OF HEAT APPLIED THERMOPLASTIC MARKINGS
A. Asphalt: The materials shall be applied using the propane torch method recommended by the
manufacturer. The material must be able to be applied at ambient and road temperatures down
to 32 degrees F. without any preheating of the pavement to a specific temperature. The
pavement shall be clean, dry and free of debris. Supplier must enclose application instructions
with each box/package.
B. Portland Concrete: The same application procedure shall be used as described under above
Paragraph 3.07A. However, a compatible primer sealer may be applied before application to
assure proper adhesion.
3.8 APPLICATION OF METHYL METHACRYLATE MARKINGS
A. Apply MMA markings using one method chosen from the three listed below, depending on
project type and size:
1. Extrude using trowel, drag box, push cart or shoe. (Applicable for all types of markings).
Recommended film thickness is 90 mils, drop on glass rate of 10 lbs. /100 sq. ft.

MARKINGS
ADDITION
2. Stencil Spray using spray applicator (for all types of markings). Recommended film
thickness for transverse markings and symbols is 90 mils; 60 mils for longitudinal
markings.
3. Truck Spray using driven vehicle and paint guns to apply longitudinal lines.
Recommended film thickness is 40 mils with a double drop of glass beads.
3.9 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
A. Install markers as per manufacturer’s requirements and the Contract Drawings, according to the
MUTCD. Installation shall be performed so as not to cause damage to the surrounding
pavement. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for repairing any damaged pavement
surfaces at no additional cost. The edges of pavement markers shall be a minimum of four (4”)
inches from pavement joints.
1. The pavement shall be cut to the dimensions and depth recommended by the
manufacturer.
2. All cutting shall be performed to minimize airborne dust and similar dust. All debris from
cutting shall be vacuumed up from the pavement cut and adjacent pavement surfaces
and disposed of properly.
3. Only install raised pavement markers when the ambient and pavement temperatures are
above 50˚F.
4. The epoxy resin adhesive material shall follow manufacturer’s recommendations for
proportioning, mixing and application.
5. The pavement markers shall be immediately placed into the epoxy-filled pavement cut.
B. CONTRACTOR shall provide manufacturer PennDOT certification (CS-4171) that all raised
pavement markers meet all current Federal and State regulations previously stated.
3.10 INLAID THERMOPLATIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pre-cut inlaid thermoplastic pavement marking material shall be furnished and installed by the
CONTRACTOR at the locations and with the proper dimensions or as directed by the
ENGINEER at the appropriate time after the completion of the asphalt surface.
B. The surface shall be clean and free of all dust, silt, debris and, most importantly, chemical
residue from de-icing materials. If de-icing material has been used on the road in the past,
cleaning shall be carried out using pressure washing.
C. Placement shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations and the installers
shall posses an appropriate Certification of training from the Manufacturer.
D. Layout and imprinting of the pattern into the surface of the hot mix asphalt (HMA) shall be as
per the Contract Drawings or Specifications in Section VIII - Technical Provisions (Detailed).
Imprinting shall be carried out after the HMA paving work has been completed. The asphalt
surface shall be re-heated to make the upper portion of the asphalt surface pliable enough to
accept the imprint of the template. The application of heat to existing asphalt surface shall be
done using reciprocating infra-red re-heating equipment.

MARKINGS
ADDITION
E. The asphalt surface temperature shall not exceed 325˚ F (163˚C). The temperature of the
asphalt surface shall be regularly monitored during the reheating process, to avoid over heating
and degradation of the asphalt cement. Direct flame heaters and non-reciprocating heaters shall
not be allowed to be used for this purpose. Once the asphalt has reached imprinting
temperature, the templates shall be place in position and pressed into the surface using
vibratory plate compactors.
F. Supply and install the inlaid thermoplastic panels on completely dry asphalt, in the imprinted
area. Heat shall be gently applied to the surface using reciprocating infra red heaters, slowly
raising the surface temperature until the thermoplastic material in the panels starts to liquefy
and flow, but no higher than 325˚F. Once the thermoplastic material has liquefied, the heat
source shall be removed and the surface allowed cooling to ambient temperature. Only once
the asphalt surface and the thermoplastic have reached ambient temperature may the road be
opened to traffic.
END SECTION

MARKINGS
ADDITION
SECTION 32 91 15 – SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Placing topsoil
2. Soil conditioning
3. Finish grading
4. Seeding
5. Sodding
6. Mulching
7. Maintenance

2. Earth Moving (Trenching, backfilling and compacting): Section 31 20 00 02
2. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
T194Determination of Organic Matter in Soils by Wet Combustion
3. Pennsylvania Department of Agriculture
4. Others:
Agricultural Liming Materials Act of 1978, P.L.15

Pennsylvania Seed Act of 1965, Act 187, as amended
Pennsylvania Soil Conditioner and Plant Growth Substance Law, Act of December 1,
1977, P.L. 258 No. 86 (3P.S. 68.2) as amended
Rules for Testing Seeds of the Association of Official Seed Analysts
Federal and State pesticide acts and registration requirements
B. Sod Producer - Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with a minimum of 5
years experience.
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 32 91 15 – SOIL PREPARATION 32 91 15 - 1

(PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION)
ADDITION
C. Sod Installer - Company specializing in performing this work with a minimum of 5 years
experience.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. Unless otherwise directed, furnish three strips of sod, 4-1/2 feet long by 12" wide, laid on
3" of topsoil and tamped in place. The samples shall be representative of the sod and
workmanship to be provided. Include sod source location.
2. Advise the ENGINEER of the location of the field, and area within the field, from which
the sod is to be taken for approval.
B. Certificates:
1. Unless directed otherwise, prior to use or placement of material, submit certifications of

material composition of the following for approval:
a. Topsoil analysis
b. Fertilizer
c. Lime
d. Seed mixtures
e. Inoculant
f. Sod
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS – Section not utilized
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TOPSOIL
A. Having a pH of between 6.0 and 7.0; containing not less than 2% nor more than 10% organic
matter as determined by AASHTO T194.
B. Fertile friable loam, sand loam, or clay loam which will hold a ball when squeezed with the hand,
but which will crumble shortly after being released.
C. Free of clods, grass, roots, or other debris harmful to plant growth.
D. Free of pests, pest larvae, and matter toxic to plants.
2.2 FERTILIZER
A. Basic Dry Formulation Fertilizer:
1. Analysis 10-20-20 and as defined by the Pennsylvania Soil Conditioner and Plant Growth
Substance Law.

ADDITION
B. Starter Fertilizer:
1. Analysis 38-0-0 or 31-0-0 and as defined by the Pennsylvania Soil Conditioner and Plant
Growth Substance Law.
2.3 LIME
A. Raw ground limestone conforming to Publication 408, Section 804.2(a).
2.4 SEED
A. Deliver seed fully tagged and in separate packages according to species or seed mix. Seed
which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or storage will not be accepted.
B. Fresh, clean, dated material from the last available crop and within the date period specified,
with a date of test not more than 9 months prior to the date of sowing. Percentage of pure seed
present shall represent freedom from inert matter and from other seeds distinguishable by their
appearance. All seeds will be subject to analysis and testing.
2.5 SEED MIXTURES
A. See “Seeding Restoration Table” on the Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Details plan
sheet.
2.6 INOCULANT
A. Inoculant leguminous seed before seeding with nitrogen fixing bacteria culture prepared
specifically for the species.
B. Do not use inoculant later than the date indicated by the manufacturer.
C. Protect inoculated seed from prolonged exposure to sunlight prior to sowing.
D. Reinoculate seed not sown within 24 hours following initial inoculation.
2.7 MULCHING MATERIALS
A. Mulches for seeded areas shall be one, or a combination of, the following:
1. Straw:
a. Cured to less than 20% moisture content by weight.

b. Contain no stems of tobacco, soybeans, or other coarse or woody material.
c. Wheat or oat straw.
2. Wood Cellulose:
a. No growth or germination inhibiting substances.

b. Green, air dried. Packages not exceeding 100 pounds.
c. Requirements:
Moisture Content: 12% + 3%

Organic Matter: 98.6% + 0.2% on the oven dried basis.
Ash Content: 1.4% + 0.2%
Minimum Water-Holding Capacity: 100%

ADDITION
3. Mushroom Manure:
a. Organic origin, free of foreign material larger than 2" and substances toxic to plant
growth.
b. Organic Matter: 20% minimum
c. Water-Holding Capacity: 120% minimum
d. pH: 6.0
B. Sewage sludge compost is not permitted.
2.8 SOD
A. Well-rooted Kentucky Bluegrass (Poa pratensis) sod containing a growth of not more than 10%
of other grasses and clovers.
B. Free from noxious weeds such as Bermuda grass, wild mustard, crab grass, and kindred
grasses.
C. Mow sod in the field to a height of not more than 2-1/2" within 5 days prior to lifting.
D. Cut sod to a depth equal to the growth of the fibrous roots, but in no case less than 1-1/2",
exclusive of grass and thatch. Do not cut sod when the ground temperature is below 32°F.
E. Deliver sod to the project site within 24 hours after being cut and place sod within 36 hours after
being cut. Do not deliver small, irregular, or broken pieces of sod. Do not deliver more sod
than can be laid within 24 hours.
F. During wet weather, allow sod to dry sufficiently to prevent tearing during handling and placing.
During dry weather, moisten sod to ensure its vitality and to prevent dropping of the soil during
handling. Sod which dries out will be rejected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TIME OF OPERATIONS
A. Spring Seeding:
1. Preliminary operations for seed bed preparation may commence as soon after February
15 as ground conditions permit.
B. Fall Seeding:
1. Preliminary operations for seed bed preparation may commence after July 15.
3.2 FINISH GRADING
A. Preparation of Subgrade:
1. “Hard pan” or heavy shale:
a. Plow to a minimum depth of 6".

b. Loosen and grade by harrowing, discing, or dragging.
c. Hand rake subgrade. Remove rocks over 2" in diameter and other debris.

ADDITION
2. Loose loam, sandy loam, or light clay:
a. Loosen and grade by harrowing, discing, or dragging.

b. Hand rake subgrade. Remove rocks over 2" in diameter and other debris.
B. Placing Topsoil:
1. Place topsoil and spread over the prepared subgrade to obtain the required depth and
grade elevation. Compact with a roller having not more than 65 pounds per roller foot
width to a final compacted thickness of not less than 4".
2. Hand rake topsoil and remove all materials unsuitable or harmful to plant growth.
3. Do not place topsoil when the subgrade is frozen, excessively wet, or extremely dry.
4. Do not handle topsoil when frozen or muddy.
C. Tillage:
1. After seed bed areas have been brought to proper compacted elevation, thoroughly
loosen to a minimum depth of 4" by discing, harrowing, or other approved methods. Do
not work topsoiled areas when frozen or excessively wet.
2. Liming:
a. Distribute lime uniformly at the specified rates.

b. Thoroughly incorporate into the topsoil to a depth of 4".
c. Incorporate as a part of the tillage operation.
3. Basic Fertilizer:
a. Distribute basic fertilizer uniformly at the specified rate.

b. Thoroughly incorporate into the topsoil to a depth of 4".
c. Incorporate as a part of tillage operation.
D. Finish Grading:
1. Remove unsuitable material larger than ½ " in any dimension.
2. Uniformly grade surface to the required contours without the formation of water pockets.
3. Rework areas which puddle by the addition of topsoil and starter fertilizer and re-rake.
3.3 SEEDING
A. Distribute starter fertilizer at the specified rates.
B. Incorporate starter fertilizer into the upper 1" of soil.
C. Uniformly sow specified seed mix by use of approved hydraulic seeder, power-drawn drill,
power-operated seeder, or hand-operated seeder. Do not seed when winds are over 15 mph.
D. Upon completion of sowing, cover seed to an average depth of 1/4" by hand re-raking or
approved mechanical methods.
E. Mulch immediately after seeding, using one of the following methods:

ADDITION
1. Place straw mulch in a continuous blanket at a minimum rate of 1,200 pounds per 1,000
square yards.
a. Anchor straw mulch by use of twine, stakes, wire staples, paper, or plastic nets.
b. Emulsified asphalt may be used for anchorage provided it is applied uniformly at a
rate not less than 31 gallons per 1,000 square yards.
c. Chemical mulch binders may be used for anchorage if they are applied uniformly
at the manufacturer's recommended rate.
d. Chemical mulch binders or a light covering of topsoil may be used for anchorage
when the size of the area precludes the use of mechanical equipment.
2. Apply wood cellulose fiber hydraulically at a rate of 320 pounds per 1,000 square yards.
Incorporate as an integral part of the slurry after seed and soil supplements have been
thoroughly mixed.
3. Spread mushroom manure uniformly to a minimum depth of ½" or to the depth indicated
on the Contract Drawings.
F. When mulch is applied to grass areas by blowing equipment, the use of cutters in the
equipment will be permitted to the extent that a minimum of 95% the mulch is 6" or more in
length. For cut mulches applied by the blowing method, achieve a loose depth in place of not
less than 2".
G. When mulching by the asphalt mix method, apply the mulch by blowing. Spray the asphalt
binder material into the mulch as it leaves the blower. Apply the binder to the mulch in the
proportion of 1.5 to 2.0 gallons per 45 pounds of mulch.
1. Protect structures, pavements, curbs, and walls to prevent asphalt staining.
2. Erect warning signs and barricades at intervals of 50 feet or less along the perimeter of
the mulched area.
3. Do not spray asphalt and chemical mulch binders onto any area within 100 feet of a
stream or other body of water.
3.4 SODDING
A. Prior to sod placement, complete finish grading and moisten prepared surface to received sod.
B. Do not place sod when the temperature is lower than 32°F.
C. Place sod by hand with tight joints and no overlap. Transverse joints shall be broken or
staggered.
D. Place sod so that the top of the sod is flush with the surrounding grade.
E. Use of tools which damage the sod or dumping of sod from vehicles will not be permitted.
F. Water sod to the saturation point immediately after placement.
G. After watering, tamp with an approved tamper to close all joints and insure close contact
between sod and sod bed. After tamping, the sod shall present a smooth, even surface free
from bumps and depressions. If so directed, use a light roller, weighing not more than 65
pounds per foot of roller width to complete firming and smoothing the sod.

ADDITION
H. When placing sod in ditches, place the strip with the long dimension at right angles to the flow of
water. At any point where water will start flowing over a sodded area, the upper edge of the sod
strips shall be turned into the soil below the adjacent area and a layer of compacted earth
placed over this juncture to conduct the water over the edge of the sod.
I. In ditches and on slope areas, stake each strip of sod securely with at least 1 wood stake for
each 2 square feet of sod. Stakes shall be ½" by 1" with a length of 8" to 12". Drive stakes
flush with the top of the sod, with the long face parallel to the slope contour.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance includes watering, weeding, cleanup, edging and repair of depressions, washouts
or gullies.
B. Those areas which do not show a prompt catch of grass within 14 days of seeding or sodding
shall be reseeded or re-sodded until complete grass catch occurs.
C. Maintain sodded areas for 3 months from date of substantial completion, mow to maintain
maximum height of 2-1/2" or as specified on Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 32 93 00 – PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Furnishing and planting trees, shrubs and grasses.

2. Transporting trees and shrubs.
3. Maintenance.
4. Fertilizing and mulching.
C. Definitions:
1. Weeds - vegetative species other than specified species to be established in a given

area. Weeds include dandelion, crabgrass, chickweed, poison ivy, bermuda grass,
thistles and similar species.
1. PennDOT Publication 72M, Standard for roadway construction, latest edition.
2. See Contract Drawings.
1. Horticultural Standards, Latest edition of rules and grading, adopted by the American
Association of Nurserymen.
2. Standardized Plant Names, American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature.
3. ANSI 260.1 of American Association of Nursery.
B. Qualifications:
1. Nursery: Company specializing in growing and cultivating plants with five (50 years of
experience.
2. Installer: Company specializing in installing and planting plants and placing mulch, with
five (5) years of experience.
3. CONTRACTOR shall be PennDOT pre-qualified for this work prior to bid opening.
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 32 93 00 – PLANTS 32 93 00 - 1

ADDITION
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protect underground utilities and structures. Comply with local and State requirements to locate
facilities to avoid damage.
B. Control of Traffic:
1. Traffic on OWNER’s streets may be limited as required with advance approval from the
ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR must notify the ENGINEER three (3) days in advance
for traffic limitations.
2. Allowable work hours are as follows: 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m.
C. Protection of Adjacent Areas:
1. Precautions shall be taken in regard to the damage of OWNER’s or State streets by any
other heavy equipment.
D. Coordination with Utilities:
1. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible to place any and all PA One Calls.
CONTRACTOR shall provide all serial numbers to ENGINEER prior to commencing
work.
2. Coordination with OWNER’s maintenance crews will be the responsibility of the

ENGINEER; however, the CONTRACTOR will be responsible to notify the ENGINEER of
required actions as they become apparent to the CONTRACTOR.
3. Coordination with utility companies for any utility adjustments is the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR.
E. Safety Precautions:
1. All open trenches, excavation areas, and the perimeter of the project shall be fenced and
barricaded during non-construction periods.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with local, State and Federal laws relative to plant material shipment.
B. CONTRACTOR shall identify any stockpile locations to ENGINEER prior to construction.
C. During loading, transporting and unloading material, CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to
prevent damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANT STOCK
A. All plant material shall be true to type and name, in accordance with the current edition of
Standardized Plant Names. Each plant or plant group shall be labeled with not less than the
plants common name and size. Each plant shall be typical of the species or variety specified. All

ADDITION
stock shall be free from disease, insect infestations, mechanical injuries, broken branches, or
other defects and also meeting the following requirements.
1. Nursery Stock shall have been grown in a certified nursery for a period of at least two (2)
full growing seasons. The use of mechanical digging equipment at the nursery will be
permitted only when its use is not deemed detrimental to nursery stock survival.
2. Plants shall not be collected from native areas.
3. Balled and Burlapped Plants (B&B) shall have a firm ball composed of original,
undisturbed soil, wrapped with untreated burlap and laced with biodegradable lacing to
hold the root ball firm and intact. All plants found with broken, loose or manufactured root
balls, will be rejected. Trees shall have a well developed root system and a straight stem.
4. Container-Grown Plants shall have been grown for a least one (1) year, but not more
than two (2) years, in the same container and shall not exist in a “pot-bound” condition.
5. Bare Root Plants shall have a live, well balanced root system with moist, fibrous root
hairs free from rot and mold.
B. Plant material shall be handled, packed and stored using good nursery practices. Materials shall
be available for inspection in the nursery before digging. The ENGINEER reserves the right to
tag selected plants, indicating acceptable form, shape and culture practices, in compliance with
detailed specifications.
C. Any plant material which is designated as rejected material shall be segregated and removed
from the planting site within 48 hours.
D. All plant material shall be free of insect, disease and any mechanical injury.
E. Tree types shall be in accordance with Contract Drawings.
2.2 WRAPPING MATERIAL
A. Approved wrapping material shall be crinkle-Kraft waterproof paper 30-30-30 in 4” widths or

approved equal.
2.3 FERTILIZER
A. Commercial fertilizer shall conform to the requirements of the Pennsylvania Soil Conditioner
and Plant Growth Substance Law, Act of December 1, 1977, P.L. 258, No. 86 (3P.S.68.2), as
amended. Fertilizer shall have an analysis of 0-20-0, 20-10-5 (10 gram tablets) or 16-8-16 and
shall be packaged in 4 ounce, individual, heat-sealed, polyethylene envelopes. Add fertilizer to
plant pits at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Balance root system with moist, fibrous root hairs free from rot and mold.
2.4 MULCH
A. All mulch shall be free from foreign material, coarse stems, and any substances toxic to plant
growth. Material shall be suitable, shredded not decomposed, between 1/4” and 2” in any
dimension.

ADDITION
B. The color of the mulch shall be selected by the OWNER.
2.5 BACKFILL MIX FOR PLANTINGS
A. Backfill mix, if needed, shall consist of a homogeneous mixture of 20% peat (either shredded
reed sedge peat or spaghnum moss peat, or a combination of both from fresh water sites) and
80% topsoil by volume.
B. Construction debris may not be used as backfill mix.
2.6 STAKES AND GUYS
A. Where required, stakes shall be rough-sawn, red or white cedar, southern yellow pine, or
acceptable hardwoods free from knots, rot, or other defects which may impair the strength of
the stake. Steel channel bar posts, rolled from Standard Carbon Steel Rails, and meeting ASTM
A499 may be used in lieu of wood stakes.
B. All wire for bracing and guying trees shall be #12 gage, galvanized, and shall meet ASTM A392,
Class II requirements.
2.7 HOSE GUARD
A. To protect trees and shrubs from guy wire damage, an acceptable hose guard shall be utilized.
2.8 WEED BARRIER MAT
A. Each area where a tree is proposed to be planted shall have nonwoven 100% polyester fiber
fabric manufactured for this specific purpose. The weed barrier mat shall extend to the limits of
the planting island.
2.9 TREE PROTECTORS
A. If shown on the Contract Drawings, all newly planted trees shall have a tree protector device
installed around the base. The protector shall be corrugated polyethylene solid pipe (ASTM
D1248, ASTM F405) of a minimum diameter of 2X greater than the caliper of the tree, and a
length of 18”. Galvanized steel or aluminum, perforated protectors may be used but must have
a rubber hose guard lining at the top.
B. Before placing, samples or manufacturers catalog cuts of the devices shall be submitted for
review and acceptance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY STORAGE
A. All plant material not planted immediately shall be properly stored. Obtain, provide, and prepare
a suitable healing-in site or arrange for a well-ventilated and cool storage shed located near the
planting site. Temporarily store container-grown or balled and burlapped plants in a protected

ADDITION
area, with containers or balls 6 inches apart. Fill all voids with moist mulch to the top of the
container or ball.
B. Bare root plant material which arrives at the planting site shall be immediately removed from the
transport vehicle. Roots shall be covered with wet burlap or mulch to prevent drying. Protect the
plant material from sun and wind and keep fresh by fine mist spraying, or by other acceptable
methods.
C. Protect plants at all times. All material left out of the ground, unprotected overnight, with roots
exposed to sun and wind, or unprotected during transit, unloading, storage, heating in or during
actual planting operations will be rejected.
D. The planting areas shall be stripped of existing mulch and topsoil, (which can be stored for
reuse).
3.2 LAYOUT OF PLANTINGS
A. Delineate the tree installation locations, bed and planting area outlines. Identify the plants to be
placed at the delineated locations. Do not start excavation or cultivation until the locations and
outlines have been accepted by the ENGINEER or OWNER.
B. Should obstructions prevent planting at the indicated locations, alternate locations or deletions
will be determined by the ENGINEER.
3.3 BED PREPARATION
A. For areas indicated for tree installation, prepare the area in the following manner to attain the
designed finished grade:
1. Where indicated on Contract Drawings, remove existing tree or stump, including any
existing concrete, bricks or blocks. Remove sod and all undesirable growth, add
additional topsoil, if required to re-establish grade. Each planting area shall promote
positive drainage when complete.
2. Uniformly spread 3 inches of peat, and then thoroughly incorporate it into the soil to a
minimum depth of 6 inches. As directed during this blending operation, remove and
dispose of undesirable material larger than 2 inches in any dimension.
3. Each planting area shall have a minimum of 3” of settled mulch on top of the plantings.
3.4 PREPARATION OF PLANTS
A. For bare root shrubs, vines, and seedling transplants, dig pits with vertical sides and flat
bottoms large enough to accommodate roots without crowding. For balled and burlapped plants,
the pit shall be twice the width of the ball diameter. For common periwinkle, pachysandra, and
ivy, provide only four (4) inches of backfill mix beneath and around all sides of the root system.
B. All plant pits designated for bare root or balled and burlapped plant stock shall be dug prior to
removing plants from temporary storage. Immediately before planting, scarify, loosen, or
roughen the sides of the plant pit.
C. If the soil conditions are deemed favorable to healthy plant growth, the ENGINEER may direct
the CONTRACTOR to dig the pit up to three (3) times the root spread or balled diameter.

ADDITION
3.5 PRUNING
A. Broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed with a clean cut. Pruning cuts over 3/4”
diameter shall be painted over with approved tree paint.
B. Root pruning shall only be performed to remove damaged or broken main roots. Cut
immediately above the damage with a clean oblique cut.
C. Typical top pruning, as directed, shall be performed appropriately for each species, variety, size,
or planting location. Typical pruning samples will serve as a guide for subsequent pruning
throughout the project.
D. Prune the tops of deciduous shrubs prior to or immediately following planting. Prune according
to best horticultural practices regarding natural or desired form and growth characteristics of the
individual species. Unless otherwise directed, remove one-fourth to one-third of the potential
leaf bearing surface from deciduous plants. Only trim or thin evergreens when and as directed.
3.6 PLANTING OR TRANSPLANTING
A. Planting shall be performed when soil and climatic conditions are favorable, and according to
the following schedule. Where local conditions warrant and at the direction of the ENGINEER,
these dates may be extended:
1. Deciduous Trees and Shrubs: October 15- June 15
2. Evergreen Trees: March 1- May 15 and August 1- September 15
3. Seedlings and Seedling Transplants: March 1- May 15
B. Plants shall be set plumb and at the specified depth. Plant material shall be handled by the
packaging material and not by the stem or branches. Remove plant containers or pre-formed
root protection devices which restrict root development immediately prior to planting. Balled and
burlapped material shall be placed in the plant pits intact. Set the root collar at the finished
grade.
C. Bare root material shall be planted immediately. To prevent root drying, use wet burlap, straw,
hay or other protective measures.
D. Fertilize in accordance with the fertilizer schedule. Cultivate and completely tamp backfill mix
around the ball or toots, in a manner that fills voids and eliminates air pockets. Use extreme
care to avoid damaging roots during backfilling and tamping operations. When backfilling is two-
thirds complete, on balled and burlapped material, cut the lacing around the main stem or trunk
then lay the burlap back. Thoroughly water the plant. After absorption of all water, complete the
backfill operation and water again.
E. For each planting area, install the weed barrier mat to match the diameter of the plant pit or
other designated area and staple. The weed barrier mat shall be installed to the extent of the
planting island. Mulch areas required. The weed barrier mat shall have a minimum of 3” of
mulch on top of it.
F. Wrap deciduous shade flowering tree trunks from the ground line to the lowest main branches,
overlapping the wrap. Tie the wrapping at the top middle, and bottom and at a minimum of two
other places.

ADDITION
G. If staking and guying is required, perform that operation immediately after completion of
backfilling.
H. Install tree protectors around the base of deciduous and flowering trees with the bottom of the
protector extending through the mulch and being in contact with the backfill material.
3.7 MULCH APPLICATION
A. All plants shall be mulched with tanbark shredded mulch to a uniform depth of 3”, settled depth,
placed after planting.
B. Remove weeds and deleterious materials prior to placing mulch. Place mulch within two (2)
days after planting.
C. Rake mulch surface smooth and even. Soak full depth of mulch thoroughly with water the same
day.
3.8 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTING
A. All plants shall be maintained in a living, healthy condition until the entire project has been
accepted. Plants are required to be growing in place at least 60 days prior to project
acceptance. During this period of establishment, perform necessary maintenance functions
such as weeding, spraying, remulching and watering, as required or directed.
B. Watering shall be performed during the period of establishment promptly and with sufficient
personnel and equipment to complete any directed operation within five (5) calendar days of
such direction.
C. Tighten guys and stakes that may become loosened. At the end of the guarantee period,
CONTRACTOR shall remove all guying material.
3.9 CLEAN UP
A. The planting site shall be left in an acceptable condition, with all debris and undesirable
excavated material satisfactorily removed from the site and suitably disposed of. The
acceptable condition may also require seeding and mulching of disturbed areas within the limits
of work.
3.10 REPLACEMENT AND GUARANTEE
A. Within the required establishment period and prior to acceptance of the project, all plants
determined by the ENGINEER not to be alive or in a healthy condition shall be replaced with
plants of the same species, size, and quality as originally indicated and specified. Replacement
may be directed to be made at the beginning of the next planting seasons.
B. CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all plants for a period of one (1) year from the date of
acceptance. Date of acceptance is defined as the inspection after the last of total planting is
installed. Inspection will be performed by the OWNER and ENGINEER when requested by the
CONTRACTOR.
C. CONTRACTOR shall maintain all plantings for 90 days following project completion and provide
maintenance instructions for the OWNER.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 33 05 13 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES (Manholes)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Precast concrete manhole sections

2. Precast concrete manhole bases
3. Cast-in-place concrete manhole bases
4. Manhole steps
5. Manhole frames and covers and adjusting rings

3. Soil Preparation (Performance Standard): Section 32 91 15
5. Facility Sanitary Sewers (Sanitary Sewer Pipe): Section 33 31 00.00
6. Facility Storm Drainage Piping (Storm Drain Pipe): Section 33 41 00
7. Facility Sanitary Sewers (Sanitary Sewer Testing): Section 33 31 00.01
8. Concrete (Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete: Section 32 13 13.01
9. Concrete (Cement Concrete for Utility construction): Section 32 13 13.03
C. Definitions:
1. Standard Manhole – manhole with vertical height from top of base (invert) to top of rim
greater than five feet (5').
2. Shallow Manhole - manhole with vertical height from top of base to top of rim less than
five feet (5').


• PTM No. 106 – Moisture-Density Relations of Soils (using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 inch
drop)
• PTM No. 402 – Determining In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Construction
Materials by Use of Nuclear Gauges
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 33 05 13 Manholes and Struc- 33 05 13 - 1

tures
ADDITION
Publication 72M, Roadway Construction Standards (RC-39)
A48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings

A185 Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement
Reinforcement
B221 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles and Tubes
C139 Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins
and Manholes
C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
M306 Specifications for Drainage, Sewer, Utility and Related Castings
C443 Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using
Rubber Gaskets
C478 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
C923 Specifications for Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete
Manholes Structures, Pipes and Laterals
D1248 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials
3. Federal Specifications (FS):
CID A-A-60005 Frame, Covers, Grating, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin Manholes
SS-S-00210 Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic, for Expansion Joints and Pipe
Title 67, Transportation, Chapter 459, Occupancy of Highway by Utilities
B. Inspections:
1. Inspections of the manholes by the ENGINEER will, at a minimum, be made of materials

upon delivery to the job site; of the subgrade, prior to manhole base construction or
placement; and of the completed manhole, prior to backfill.
2. Inspections of the frame and covers by the ENGINEER will be made upon delivery to the
job site; and of the completed installation, prior to backfill.
3. A final inspection of the manhole channels, steps, frames and covers and all joints will be
performed upon completion of all testing, roadway restoration, and/or seeding.
4. Manholes shall be subject to rejection for failure to conform with these specifications or if
any one of the following conditions is noted:
a. Fractures or cracks passing through the wall, except for a single end crack that
does not exceed the depth of the joint.
b. Defects that indicate incorrect proportioning, mixing, and molding.
c. Surface defects larger than ½” diameter indicating honey-combed or open texture.
d. Damaged or cracked ends, where such damage would prevent making a
satisfactory joint.
e. Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inches or more and extending
for a length of 6 inches or more, regardless of position in the section wall.

tures
ADDITION
C. Concrete Testing (For Cast –In-Place Work) – As specified in Section 32 13 13.01.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit two copies of certification from material suppliers attesting that materials meet or
exceed specification requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit details of manhole sections, and precast bases if used.
2. Submit details of manhole frames and covers, including required lettering.
3. Submit details of adjusting rings.
4. Submit details of manhole steps.
5. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for the pipe to manhole flexible connections.
6. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for joint sealant compounds.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Precast Concrete Units:
1. After fabrication and curing, transport the manhole and components to the job site.
Protect until required for installation.
2. Handle to avoid damage to surfaces, edges and corners and to avoid creation of stresses
within the units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CRUSHED STONE BASE
A. AASHTO No. 57 or AASHTO No. 8 crushed aggregate, Section 703.2, Publication 408, Section
703.2.
2.2 MANHOLE BRICK: Not Permitted
2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: Not Permitted
2.4 CEMENT MORTAR: ASTM C270, Type S
2.5 CEMENT CONCRETE: Section 32 13 13.03
2.6 RUBBER GASKETS: ASTM C443
2.7 RESILIENT PIPE-TO-MANHOLE CONNECTION: ASTM C923

tures
ADDITION
A. PSX gaskets as manufactured by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation, Fort Wayne, Indiana or

approved equal.
2.8 NON-SHRINK GROUT: Fastsetting, cement-based mortar such as Waterplug, manufactured by

Thoro Division of ChemRex, Shakopee, MN, or approved equal.
2.9 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE BASES AND SECTIONS: ASTM C478
A. 5.5% + 1.5% air-entrained cement concrete.
B. Eccentric cone or flat slab top sections; minimum 24" access opening.
C. Precast riser sections of length to suit.
D. Precast bases of a design similar to the precast riser sections.
E. Precast drop connections, and precast lampholes are not permitted, unless approved by the
ENGINEER.
F. Manholes shall have a 4' inside diameter unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.
G. Precast manhole bases shall be manufactured in accordance with the elevations shown on the
ENGINEER's grade sheets and shall accommodate lateral hookups as marked in the field.
H. Precast manhole bases and precast concrete channels shall be constructed specifically for the
work intended.
I. Precast manhole bases are not permitted with pipes greater than 10.00% unless approved by
the ENGINEER.
2.10 CASTING MATERIALS
A. Gray Iron Castings shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M105 Class 35B or ASTM A
48 Class 35B.
B. Castings shall be manufactured true to pattern and component parts shall fit together in a
satisfactory manner. They shall be smooth and well cleaned by shot blasting. Circular manhole
frames, covers and grates shall be furnished with machined horizontal bearing surfaces.
C. All shipments shall include appropriate certification from the producing foundry. The certification
shall state that the castings have been produced in facilities operating in accordance with the
applicable laws and regulations of the United States and the appropriate state, province, or local
unit of government. This certification shall also state that all samples representing each lot have
been tested, inspected, and have been found to meet the requirements of this specification and
the applicable ASTM material specification listed in Section 3. Certification shall also state
country of origin of the castings. If specified in the order, a report of the test results shall be
furnished.
D. Markings
A. Each individual casting shall be identified by the foundry showing the following:
1. Name of producing foundry and country of manufacture preceded by the words “Made
In”, such as “Made in USA”.

tures
ADDITION
2. AASHTO designation or ASTM designation number.

3. Class by a number followed by a letter indicating the minimum tensile strength and size
of test bar.
4. Heat identification and cast date (MM/DD/YY).
5. Casting lettering as required by the OWNER.
6. Any markings as required to meet Federal requirements.
E. Records
1. All test results by this specification shall be maintained by the producing foundry for
seven years and shall be made available to the purchaser upon request.
2. Records of casting certifications issued by a producing foundry shall be maintained by

the producing foundry for seven years and shall be made available upon request.
2.11 JOINT SEALANT COMPOUND
A. F S SS-S-00210, preformed, flexible, self-adhering, cold-applied. Joints between manhole base

and riser, between risers, between riser and cone, between cone and adjusting rings and cast
iron frame, shall be made of RUB'R-NEK, a flexible plastic gasket-type sealant manufactured by
K. T. Snyder Company, Inc., of Houston, Texas, or approved equal.
2.12 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Manhole steps shall be made of non-corrosive aluminum, or steel reinforced fiberglass or

polypropylene materials. Steps in precast walls shall terminate 1" from outer surface and shall
be cast in place wherever possible or grouted with a waterproof, non-shrink grout.
1. Aluminum alloy steps (Alloy 6061-T6) shall be model No. F-140 manufactured by
Washington Aluminum Company, Inc., of Baltimore, MD, or approved equal and shall
have a protective coating consisting of asphalt coating conforming to AASHTO M-190
requirements applied to the portion to be embedded in the concrete.
2. Steel reinforced fiberglass steps shall be Model No. 115 manufactured by R.J.
Manufacturing, Inc. of San Antonio, Texas, or approved equal.
3. Steel reinforced copolymer polypropylene plastic steps shall be Model No. PS-2-B or PS-
2 –PFS manufactured by M. A. Industries, Inc. of Peachtree City, Georgia, or approved
equal.
2.13 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Domestic soft, gray cast iron castings shall be free of bubbles, sand and air holes, and other
imperfections. Castings shall be furnished unpainted.
B. Standard and Heavy Duty frames and covers shall be capable of withstanding an AASHTO HS-
25 loading and shall have about a 24" clear opening. Watertight frames and covers shall meet
AASHTO HS-20 loading requirements.
C. Frame and cover shall have machined bearing surfaces and matched to insure against rocking.
D. Cover shall be lettered or marked in accordance Municipal and Authority requirements. Lugs
and lettering shall be flush with frame.

tures
ADDITION
E. Standard frames and covers shall be similar to Model No. 1040, manufactured by East Jordan
Iron Works, Inc., East Jordan, Michigan, or approved equal. Solid covers shall be self-sealing,
have two (2) concealed watertight pick holes, and shall have two (2) lifting rings or bars, and no
openings to permit surface water entry. Covers shall be 1 1/2" thick, and frames shall have a
24" diameter minimum clear opening and a minimum height of 7".
F. Heavy duty frames and covers shall be similar to Model No. 1545 manufactured by East Jordan
Iron Works, East Jordan, Michigan, or approved equal. Solid cover shall be self-sealing, have
two (2) concrete pick holes and shall have two (2) lifting rings orf bars and no openings to
permit surface water entry. Cover shall be 2 ½" thick and frames shall have a 23 15/16"
diameter clear opening and a minimum height of 79".
G. Watertight frames and covers shall have suitable clamp, employing a rubber gasket seal, similar
to Model No.1893, manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. East Jordan, Michigan, or
approved equal. Exterior cover shall be 1 3/8" thick. Frames shall have 24 1/2" diameter clear
openings and a minimum height of 7".
2.14 REINFORCING STEEL: Section 32 13 13.01
2.15 ADJUSTING RINGS
A. Precast cement concrete grade adjustment rings shall be cast from 4000 psi concrete (28-day
compressive strength). Circumferential reinforcement shall be in conformance with ASTM
C478. Split concrete rings are not permitted.
B. Plastic or High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) rings are not permitted.
C. Infra-Riser Adjustment rubber rings, manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works, East Jordan
Michigan or approved equal, may be substituted for concrete rings, if approved by the
ENGINEER for force main connections.
D. Poured in place concrete adjustments shall conform with Contract Drawings and Publication
408 Specifications..
2.16 WALL PENETRATION SEALS FOR FORCE MAIN CONNECTIONS
A. Concrete wall penetration seals shall be “link-seal”, as manufactured by Thunderline

Corporation, Houston, TX or approved equal.
B. Use appropriate wall sleeve type as recommended by manufacturer to provide watertight

seal/connection.
2.17 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE BONDING AGENT
The epoxy bonding agent shall be Nitrobond EP, as manufactured by Fosroc Limited, Coleshill
Road, Tamworth, Straffordshire, UK. The bonding agent shall be a two-component, solvent-free
epoxy resin. The two components shall be differentially pigmented in order to ensure visually
that correct mixing has taken place prior to the application. The product shall achieve 70 N/mm2
compressive strength, 36 N/mm2 tensile strength, 30% elongation, and 14 N/mm2 bond
strength and water absorption of 0.05%, when tested in accordance to ASTM C881: Type I, II,
III, IV and V, grade 2 class E & F. Nitrobond shall be installed per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC: Section 31 20 00.02

tures
ADDITION
3.2 CUTTING PAVED SURFACE PRIOR TO EXCAVATION: Section 31 20 00.02
3.3 BLASTING: Blasting is prohibited.
3.4 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
B. Excavate at location marked in the field.
C. Excavate to the required depth and grade for the invert of the manhole plus that excavation
necessary for placement of base material.
3.5 STANDARD MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION
A. All manholes greater than 5' in vertical height from top of base to top of rim.
B. Install a minimum of 4" thick compacted crushed stone base. Provide cast-in-place concrete or
precast concrete bases.
1. Construct cast-in-place bases as shown on Contract Drawings and Publication 408

Specifications.
a. Cast-in-place bases may be constructed with a special form for a joint to match the
manhole cylinder sections.
2. Install precast bases as shown on Contract Drawings and Publication 408 Specifications.
a. Set the precast base on the crushed stone base.

b. Provide a sealed, flexible resilient connection between pipe and precast base
section.
C. Install the proper diameter watertight manholes on precast concrete or poured-in-place concrete
bases shown on the Contract Drawings.
D. Construct drop connections shown on Standard Detail 02601-5. Encase drop connection in
concrete, unless approved by ENGINEER.
E. Form flow channels in manhole bases. Slope channels uniformly from influent invert to effluent
invert, minimum 0.1' drop. Construct bends of the largest possible radius. Form channel sides
and invert smooth and uniform, free of cracks, holes or protrusions.
F. Do not permit pipe to project more than 3" into the manhole.
G. Where special gaskets or water stops are recommended by pipe manufacturers for connections
at manhole walls, these facilities shall be provided. All pipe connection joints shall be
watertight.
H. Seal joints between precast concrete manhole sections with preformed rubber gaskets or joint
sealant compound.
I. Place joint sealant compound on lower section to be compressed by the weight of the upper
section.

tures
ADDITION
J. Step placement:
1. Install manhole sections with steps in proper vertical alignment. Distance from top of rim
to top step shall not be greater than 30". Distance from floor of manhole to bottom step
shall not be greater than 20".
2. Manhole steps shall be placed perpendicular to the mainline channel. Do not locate
steps over channels, unless approved by ENGINEER.
K. Install manhole frames and covers.
1. In all streets and private roadways the top rim elevation or the entire circumference of all
manhole frames and covers shall be depressed 1/4" below the elevation of the adjacent
street surface.
2. Seal joint between manhole frame and manhole with joint sealant compound.
3. All manholes shall be adjusted to finished street grade utilizing no more than two (4"
maximum thickness) adjusting rings. Brick and stone adjustments are not permitted. The
use of metal extension rings is not permitted, unless approved by the ENGINEER.
4. If the proper adjustment cannot be achieved by the use of two rings, the cone section
shall be removed and the proper barrel section inserted.
5. All concrete adjusting rings shall be parged and plastered on the inside and outside with
cement mortar one-half (½") inch in thickness, carefully spread and thoroughly troweled
to a smooth surface on the inside only.
6. Install Infra Riser adjusting rings in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

using approved butyl sealant between cone and ring and between rings.
L. New manholes constructed on existing pipelines:
1. Only cast-in-place manhole bases shall be installed over existing sanitary sewers, unless
approved by the ENGINEER.
2. Carefully excavate around existing pipeline for placement of the new manhole base.
3. Take all measures necessary to control flow through the existing pipeline and to prevent
leakage into the new base.
4. After completion of the manhole, carefully saw and remove the top portion of the existing
pipeline.
5. No materials, construction debris, or ground and surface water shall enter the existing
pipelines.
6. Upon completion of the connections, a properly sized plumber's stopper shall be placed
in the new line and be adequately braced to prevent a "blow-out".
7. The stopper shall not be removed until written permission is granted by the ENGINEER.

tures
ADDITION
M. Concrete wall penetration shall be cored at the sizes and locations indicated on the Contract
Drawings or as recommended by the seal manufacturer. Place approved water-tight
connectors in the concrete walls in accordance with manufactures requirements as approved by
the ENGINEER.
3.6 SUPPORT OF EXCAVATION: Section 31 20 00.02
3.7 CONTROL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL: Section 31 20 00.02
3.8 DEWATERING: Section 31 20 00.02
3.9 SHALLOW MANHOLES
A. All manholes less than five (5') feet in vertical height shall have a flat top section without a cone
transition section and shall be constructed in accordance with Standard Detail 02601-4.
3.10 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill only after examination of the manhole by the ENGINEER.
B. Perform backfilling as specified in Section 31 20 00.02
3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL: Section 31 20 00.02
3.12 RESTORATION OF SURFACE AREAS
A. Restore paved areas as specified in Section 32 13 13.02.
B. Restore unpaved surfaces as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
END OF SECTION

tures
ADDITION
SECTION 33 05 16.13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING (Storm Inlets, Catch Basins, Endwalls)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Storm drainage inlets

2. Storm drainage catch basins
3. Storm drainage pipe endwalls
4. Pipe culvert end sections

4. Asphalt Paving (Bituminous paving and surfacing): Section 32 12 16
5. Manholes and Structures Section 33 05 13
6. Facility Storm Drainage Piping (Storm Drain Pipe): Section 33 41 00
7. Concrete (Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete): Section 32 13 13.01
8. Concrete (Cement Concrete for Utility Construction): Section 32 13 13.03

A36Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

A47 Specification for Ferritie Malleable Iron Castings
A48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings
A185 Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
A536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
Reinforcement
C32 Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (made from clay or shale)
C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 33 05 16.13 FACILITY 33 05 16.13 - 1

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING (Storm
Inlets, Catch Basins, Endwalls)
ADDITION
4. Title 67, Transportation, Chapter 459, Occupancy of Highway by Utilities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit certification from material suppliers attesting that materials provided meet or
exceed specification requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit detailed Shop Drawings, including reinforcing steel details.
C. Submit concrete mix designs, certified results of compressive strength tests, certified field tests
and copies of batch slips for all cast-in-place inlets, catch basins or endwalls.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS: Section no utilized.
A. Precast Concrete Units:
1. After fabrication and curing, transport the units to the job site. Protect until required for
installation.
2. Handle to avoid damage to surfaces, edges and corners and to avoid creation of stresses
within the units.
B. Inspections
1. Inspection by the ENGINEER will, at a minimum, be made of materials upon delivery to

the job site; of the subgrade, prior to construction or placement; and of the completed
structure, prior to backfill.
2. Precast cement concrete products shall be subject to rejection for failure to conform with
these specifications or if any one of the following conditions is noted:
a. Fractures or cracks passing through the wall, except for a single end crack that
does not exceed the depth of the joint.
b. Defects that indicate incorrect proportioning, mixing, and molding.
c. Surface defects larger than ½" diameter indicating honey-combed or open texture.
d. Damaged or cracked ends, where such damage would prevent making a
satisfactory joint.
3. Concrete Testing (For Cast-In-Place Work): Section 32 13 13.01.

ADDITION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Temp Crushed Stone Subbase:
1. AASHTO No. 8 or 57, Type C, Section 703.2, Publication 408 Specifications. Do not use
slag or cinders.
B. Brick: ASTM C32 Grade SS, solid.
C. Masonry Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S.
D. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, Grade 35018, Domestic.
E. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18, Domestic.
F. Structural Grade Carbon Steel: ASTM A36.
G. Cast-in-Place Cement Concrete: Section 03050.
H. Cast Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48.
2.2 FABRICATIONS
A. Precast Cement Concrete Units:
1. Comply with the requirements of Section 714, Publication 408 Specifications. Concrete shall
be Class AA, unless otherwise specified.
1. All reinforcing shall comply with the requirements of Publication 72M.
2. 6' inlets shall be similar in all respects to standard inlets except that the longitudinal
dimension shall be increased by 24".
3. Modified boxes (PennDOT Type 1, 2 or 3, Modified Type I or Modified Type II) shall have
reinforced cover adjustment slabs in accordance with Details in Publication 72M.
B. Pipe Culvert End Sections:
1. Concrete or Metal - Comply with the requirements of, Publication 72M, RC-33.
2. Polyethylene end sections shall have smooth interior and be anchored at the flared end.
C. Inlet Grates:
1. Comply with the requirements of Publication 72M, RC-34 PennDOT approved diagonal or
bicycle safe grates.

ADDITION
2. 6' inlet grates shall be similar in all respects to standard inlet grates except that the
longitudinal dimension shall be increased by 24".
3. Inlet grates in traffic areas shall be capable of handling HS-25 loading.
4. Welded structural steel grates and frames shall be coated with bituminous paint. All iron
castings shall be furnished unpainted.
D. Adjustments
1. Precast cement concrete grade adjustment risers: Shall be cast from 4000 psi concrete
(28-day compressive strength), shall be a maximum of 2" thick, and shall be reinforced in
accordance with ASTM A478.
2. Brick adjustments are not permitted.
3. Infra-Riser adjustment rubber rings manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works, East
Jordan Michigan or approved equal, may be substituted for concrete rings if approved by
the ENGINEER.
E. Outlet Structures
1. Precast concrete or cast-in-place concrete in accordance with Paragraph A.
2. Construct outlet structures to dimensions shown on Contract Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
B. Excavate at location marked in the field.
C. Excavate to the required depth and grade for the bottom of the unit plus that excavation
necessary for placement of base material.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct inlets and catch basins of either precast cement concrete sections or of cast-in-place
cement concrete, and of the type indicated on the Contract Drawings.
1. Place precast units on a minimum 4" compacted crushed aggregate base.
2. Construct cast-in-place units on a minimum 4” compacted crushed aggregate base.
3. Pour channels in inlet boxes to channel the flow of water to the outlet pipe and to prevent
water from standing in box.
4. Unless units are cast-in-place, use precast cement concrete grade adjustment risers or
Infra Risers to adjust to grade. Mortar concrete risers in place.

ADDITION
5. Place bicycle safe grates in all paved (present or future) areas.
B. Construct endwalls to the dimensions and design indicated on Standard Drawing RC-31,
Publication 72M, and of the type shown on the Contract Drawings. Construct endwalls of
monolithically cast reinforced concrete.
C. Do not permit pipes to project more than 3" into inlets. Do not expose end of pipe through faces
of endwalls.
D. Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide pipe culvert end sections of the design and
dimensions of Standard Drawing RC-33, Publication 72M.
E. Install polyethylene end sections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, bedded and
anchored as required.
F. Construct basin outlet structures with inverts, grates and openings at the required elevations
shown on the Contract Drawings. Connect to new or existing outlet pipes, relaying or adding
pipe as needed to meet the structure.
G. At junction of different sized pipes, the pipe crowns should match.
3.3 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill structures only after inspection by the ENGINEER.
B. Perform backfilling and compaction as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL: Section 31 20 00.00.
3.5 RESTORATION OF SURFACE AREAS
A. Restore paved areas in accordance with Section 32 13 13.02.
B. Restore unpaved surfaces as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 33 11 16.00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Water Mains)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Installing and repairing water mains and fittings, in excess of 2" diameter.

5. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Valves and Fire Hydrants): Section 33 11 16.02
6. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Water Service Connections): Section 33 11 16.01
7. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Testing and disinfecting): Section 33 11 16.03
1. American Water Works Associations (AWWA) most recent revisions:
C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Cast-Iron and Ductile-Iron Pipe Fittings for Water
C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe Systems
C110 Gray Iron and ductile Iron Fittings 3-inch through 48 inches
C111 Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
C115 Flanged Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges
C116 Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for Interior & Exterior Surfaces of
Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service
C150 Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe
C151 Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or other Liquids
C153 Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 inch through 24 inch for Water Service
C200 Steel Water Pipe 6 inches and Larger
C203 Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
and Tape Hot Applied
C205 Cement Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe 4 inch and
Larger - Shop Applied
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS 33 11 16.00 FACILITY WATER 33 11 16.00 - 1

DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Water Mains)
ADDITION
C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe

C207 Steel Pipe Flanges
C300 Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type
C301 Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, for Water and other
Liquids
C302 Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe, Non-Cylinder Type, for Water and other
Liquids
C303 Reinforced Concrete Water Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, Pretensioned
C304 Design of Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe Asbestos-Cement Pipe
C400 Asbestos-Cement Pressure Pipe, 4 inch through 16 inch for Water Distribution
Systems
C401 Selection of Asbestos-Cement Pressure Pipe 4 inch through 16 inch
C402 Asbestos-Cement Transmission Pipe, 18 inch through 42 inch for Potable Water
& Other Liquids
C403 Selection of Asbestos-Cement Transmission & Feeder Main Pipe, sizes 18 inch
through 42 inch
C600 Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances
C900 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 inches through 12 inches, for water
distribution
D1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40,
80, and 120
D2241 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Plastic Pipe (SDR
Series)
D3139 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric
Seals
B. Materials contaminated with gasoline, lubricating oil, liquid or gaseous fuel, aromatic
compounds, paint solvent, paint thinner, or acid solder will be rejected.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers’ Literature:
1. Submit two copies of manufacturers’ catalog information for each type of pipe, fittings,
couplings, adapters, gaskets and assembly of joints for approval of the ENGINEER.
Include manufacturers’ recommendations for deflection in pipe joints.
B. Certificates:
1. Submit two copies of certifications for each type of pipe, fittings, gaskets, lubricants or
other joint materials from the manufacturers attesting that each of these meets or
exceeds specifications requirements.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS: Section not utilized.
1.5 PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Handing:
1. Do not place materials on private property without written permission from the property
OWNER.

ADDITION
2. During loading, transporting and unloading, exercise care to prevent damage to

materials.
3. Do not drop pipe or fittings. Avoid shock or damage at all times.
4. Use padded slings, hooks and tongs to prevent damage to the exterior surface or internal
lining of the pipe.
B. Storage:
1. Do not stack higher than Maximum Stacking Heights shown in AWWA C600 or as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
2. Keep interior of pipe and fittings free from dirt, water or other foreign matter.
3. Store gaskets for mechanical and push-on joints in cool location out of direct sunlight and
not in contact with petroleum products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS
A. Ductile Iron (DI):
1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C150 and C151:
a. Cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104.

b. Class, as indicated on the Contract Drawings, minimum Class 52.
2. Ductile Iron and Cast Iron Fittings: AWWA C110:

b. Pressure rating as indicated on the Contract Drawings, minimum 350 psi for
mechanical joint; 250 psi for flanged joint.
3. Joints:
a. Mechanical or push-on joints confirming with AWWA C111.

b. Flanged joints conforming with AWWA C110 and AWWA C115.
B. Reinforced Concrete (RC):
1. Reinforced concrete pressure pipe, steel cylinder type: AWWA C300.

2. Prestressed concrete pressure pipe, steel cylinder type: AWWA C301.
3. Reinforced concrete pressure pipe, non-cylinder type: AWWA C302.
4. Reinforced concrete pressure pipe, steel cylinder type, pretensioned: AWWA C303.
5. Fittings: Type B
6. Joints: Rubber gasket and steel bell and spigot joint rings.
7. Minimum steel cylinder thickness: 16 gauge.
C. Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe:
1. Pipe:

ADDITION
a. Outside diameter dimension pipe: AWWA C900, pressure class and dimension
ratio as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2. Manufactured from Poly (Vinyl Chloride) 1120 or 1220.
3. National Sanitation Foundation Seal of Approval for use with potable water required.
4. Joints: Push-on: ASTM D3139.
5. Fittings: Cast or ductile iron fittings for PVC pressure pipe: AWWA C110.
D. Steel:
1. Pipe: AWWA C200.

b. Coal tar coated in accordance with AWWA C203.
c. Internal pressure and minimum wall thickness as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
2. Fittings: AWWA C200.
3. Joints:
a. Welded: AWWA C206.

b. Flanged: AWWA C207.
c. Mechanically coupled: Dresser Style 38, Rockwell 411 or equal.
2.2 REPAIR PRODUCTS
A. Couplings:
1. Threaded Compression (½" - 2" nominal diameter pipe)
a. Short or long body style.

b. Conductive gasket.
c. 150 psi pressure rating.
d. Ductile iron material.
2. Bolted Compression (4" - 12" nominal diameter pipe)
a. Ductile iron material.
b. 150 psi pressure rating.
3. Flared Couplings
B. lamps
1. Gridded gasket
2. Full gasket coverage
3. Stainless steel hardware
4. Stainless steel material

ADDITION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate trenches as specified in Section 31 20 00.02. Provide at least 4 ft. of cover from the
top of the pipe to the finished grade elevation.
3.2 PIPE BEDDING
A. Provide Type IV bedding as shown on Standard Detail 31 20 00.02.
B. Shape recesses for the joints or bell of the pipe by hand. Assure that the pipe is supported for
the entire length of the barrel.
3.3 PIPE LAYING
A. Clean and inspect each length of pipe or fitting before lowering in the trench. Do not lower pipe
into the trench except that which is to be immediately installed.
B. Lay pipe to a uniform line with the barrel of the pipe resting solidly in bedding material
throughout its length. Excavate recesses in bedding material to accommodate joints, fittings,
and appurtenances. Do not subject pipe to a blow or shock to achieve solid bearing or grade.
C. Lay each section of pipe in such a manner as to form a close concentric joint with adjoining
section and to avoid offsets.
D. Lubricate pipe and gaskets as recommended by the manufacturer. Assemble to provide tight,
flexible joints that permit movement caused by expansion, contraction, and ground movement.
E. Check each pipe installed as to line and grade in place. Correct deviations immediately.
Deflection of pipe joints in excess of maximum recommended by manufacturer will be cause for
rejection.
F. Install fittings and valves as pipe laying progresses. Do not support weight of fittings and valves
from pipe.
G. When the work is not in progress, and at the end of each work day, securely plug the ends of
pipe and fittings to prevent trench water, earth, or other substances from entering the pipes or
fittings.
H. Backfill concurrently with pipe laying to hold installed pipe in place. When pipe laying is
terminated for any reason, provide at least 2 feet of backfill over all pipe except the last piece
laid.
I. Joint Assembly
1. Push-on Joints:
a. Clean the inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot. Insert rubber gasket into
the bell recess.
b. Apply a thin film of gasket lubricant to either the inside of the gasket or the spigot
end of the pipe, or both.

ADDITION
c. Insert the spigot end of the pipe into the socket using care to keep the joint from
contacting the ground. Complete the joint by forcing the plain end to the bottom of
the socket. Mark pipe that is not furnished with a depth mark before assembly to
assure that the spigot is fully inserted.
2. Mechanical Joints:
a. Wash the socket and plain end. Apply a thin film of lubricant. Slip the gland and
gasket over the plain end of the pipe. Apply lubricant to gasket.
b. Insert the plain end of the pipe into the socket and seat the gasket evenly in the
socket.
c. Slide the gland into position, insert bolts, and finger-tighten nuts.
d. Bring bolts to uniform tightness. Tighten bolts 180 degrees apart, alternately.
Torque Required:
Bolt Size, Inches Torque, Ft. - Lbs.
5/8 45 - 60
3/4 75 - 90
1 100 - 120
3.4 CUTTING
A. Saw cut pipe full depth without damaging pipe or lining.
B. Grind cut ends and rough edges smooth. Bevel end for push-on joints.
C. Do not field cut reinforced concrete pipe. Provide special lengths to make up distance shown.
3.5 DEFLECTION
A. When it is necessary to deflect water mains from a straight alignment horizontally or vertically,
do not exceed limits as follows, unless approved by ENGINEER:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe: <12" dia. - 5o maximum deflection per joint.
>12" dia. - 3o maximum deflection per joint.
2. PVC Pipe: 4 degree maximum deflection per joint.
3. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: 1 degree maximum deflection per joint.
3.6 THRUST RESTRAINT
A. Provide all valves, tees, bends, (excluding 11 ¼˚ bend) caps, and plugs with concrete thrust
blocks in accordance with York Water Company Standards and Details. Pour concrete thrust
blocks against undisturbed earth. Locate thrust blocks to contain the resultant force and so pipe
and fitting joints will be accessible for repair.

ADDITION
B. Furnish and install tie rods, clamps, set screw retainer glands, or restrained joints if indicated on
the Contract Drawings or required by the ENGINEER. Protect metal restrained joint
components against corrosion by applying a bituminous coating.
3.7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
A. Connections to existing facilities:
1. Construct connections as shown on the Contract Drawings.
2. For connecting pipe of different materials, use transition fittings as recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the ENGINEER.
B. Wall Sleeves:
1. Provide pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction with sleeves and
mechanical seal of the type and size required or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
3.8 COMPLETION
A. Test and disinfect water mains as specified in Section 33 11 16.03.
3.9 SURFACE RESTORATION
A. Restore unpaved areas in accordance with Section 31 20 00.02.
B. Restore other areas in accordance with Section 32 13 13.02.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 33 11 16.01 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Water Service Connections)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Tapping water mains by installation of corporation stops or other suitable fittings or

couplings, up to and including 2" diameter.
2. Connection of service pipe and fittings up to curb stops and meter boxes.
3. Installation of meter setting equipment.

3. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Water Mains): Section 33 11 16.03
02642-1 Water Service Installation

B62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

B88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
C62 Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
C700 Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case

C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit two copies each of certificate for pipe and pipe fittings from each manufacturer
attesting that each of these meets or exceeds specification requirements.
B. Manufacturers' Literature:
1. Submit two copies each of manufacturers' catalog for each size and type of corporation
stop, curb stop, curb box, meter setting and pipe, fitting or coupling.
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS 33 11 16.01 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16.01 - 1

PIPING (water service connections)
ADDITION
A. Product Delivery:
1. During loading, transporting and unloading of all materials and products, exercise care to
prevent any damage.
B. Storage:
1. Store all products and materials off the ground and under protective coverings and
custody, and in a manner to keep products clean and in good condition until used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE OR TUBING AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Water Tubing:
1. ASTM B88, Type K, Seamless

2. Matching bronze fittings of flared or compression type
2.2 CORPORATION STOP ASSEMBLY
A. Corporation Stops:
1. Brass or Red Brass alloy body conforming to ASTM B62.

2. Inlet end threaded for tapping according to AWWA C800.
3. Outlet end suitable for service pipe specified.
B. Service Clamps:
1. Galvanized iron or bronze body.

2. Neoprene, O-ring gasket.
3. Single or double straps with matching hardware.
2.3 CURB STOP ASSEMBLY
A. Curb Stops:
1. Brass or Red Brass alloy body conforming to ASTM B62.

2. Plug type valve.
3. Positive pressure sealing.
B. Curb Boxes and Covers:
1. Cast iron body, extension type or Buffalo type.

2. Minneapolis or arch pattern base.
3. Lid with inscription 'Water', with pentagon plug, or as approved by ENGINEER

ADDITION
2.4 METER SETTING EQUIPMENT
A. Meter Setting:
1. Meter yokes, copper or iron.

2. Inlet and outlet horizontal/vertical setting with matching couplings, fittings and stops.
2.5 METERS
A. Displacement Type: AWWA C700
2.6 BRICK
A. ASTM C62, Grade SW
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Establish location of curb stops and boxes or meter pits for each service connection.
B. Perform trench excavation and associated work as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
3.2 TAPPING WATER MAINS
A. Each connection for different kinds of water mains shall be tapped using suitable materials,
equipment and methods in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide service clamps for asbestos cement and PVC water mains.
C. Fill ductile iron main 24 hours in advance of tapping (no dry tap). Pretesting of main is
recommended before tapping.
D. Screw corporation stops directly into a tapped and threaded iron main at 10 or 2 o'clock
positions on the main's circumference. Locate corporation stops at least 12" apart longitudinally
and staggered. Tap into main shall be a minimum of 2’ from the center of bell.
E. In case of plastic pipe water mains, provide full support for the service clamp all around the
circumference of the pipe, with minimum 2" width of bearing area. Exercise care against
crushing or other damage to water mains at the time of tapping or installing the service clamp or
corporation stop.
F. Use proper seals or other devices to ensure that no leaks are left in the water mains at the
points of tapping. Do not backfill and cover the service connection until observed by the
ENGINEER.
G. Top taps shall be removed and replaced with taped brass plug.
3.3 SERVICE LINE AND FITTINGS
A. U se bends to connect the service pipe or tubing to the tapping fitting or corporation stops to
provide flexibility to counteract the effects of settlement or expansion/contraction in the line.

ADDITION
B. Lay each section of the service line in a manner to form a tight joint with the adjoining section.
Avoid offsets, kinks or awkward bends to ensure a smooth flow line. Provide Type V bedding
as specified in Section 31 20 00.02. Limestone based masonry sand is not permitted.
C. Clean and inspect each pipe and part of the fitting before installing and assemble to provide a
flexible joint.
D. Install service fittings and appurtenances on suitable brick or concrete supports, as shown on
the Contract Drawings. Do not use earth, rocks, wood or other organic materials as supports.
E. Operate each corporation and curb stop before and after installation.
F. When the work is not in progress, and at the end of each work day, securely plug the ends of
pipe and fittings to prevent any dirt or foreign substances from entering the lines.
G. Test and disinfect mains and service lines as specified in Section 33 11 16.03.
H. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 20 00.02.
A. Restore unpaved areas in accordance with 31 20 00.02.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 33 11 16.02 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Valves and Fire Hydrants)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Water valves
2. Fire hydrants

2. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Water Mains): Section 33 11 16.00
3. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Water Service Connections): Section 33 11 16.01

02640-1 Air Release Valve
02640-2 Fire Hydrant Setting Detail
02640-3 Blow-off Detail

C500 Gate Valves, 3" through 48", for Water and Other Liquids
C502 Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants
C504 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves
C509 Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems
C512 Air-Released, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit two copies of manufacturer's certification attesting that valves, hydrants, and
accessories meet or exceed AWWA Standards and specification requirements.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit two copies of manufacturer's latest published literature including illustrations,

installation instructions, maintenance instructions and parts lists.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves, hydrants, and accessories for shipment according to AWWA Standards and:

PIPING (Valves and Fire Hydrants)
ADDITION
1. Seal valve, hydrant, and meter ends to prevent entry of foreign matter into product body.
2. Box, crate, completely enclose, and protect products from accumulations of foreign
matter.
B. Store products in areas protected from weather, moisture, or possible damage.
C. Do not store products directly on ground.
D. Handle products to prevent damage to interior or exterior surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GATE VALVES
A. AWWA C509
B. Iron body, bronze trim.
C. Resilient wedge.
D. Non-rising stem; O-ring stem seals.
E. 2" square operating nut; open counterclockwise unless otherwise indicated.
F. Flanged, mechanical joint or bell end connections.
G. Provide valves 16" and larger with bypass valves and gear operators.
2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. AWWA C504, Class 150B.
B. Iron body, stainless steel shaft, nylon bearings.
1. Sizes 2" thru 20": 200 psi rated.

2. Sizes 24" thru 48": 150 psi rated.
C. Flanged, wafer, or mechanical joint end.
D. Worm gear manual actuators sealed and permanently lubricated.
3. Vertical, right angle, or buried type; hand wheel, crank handle, or square nut, as
indicated.
4. Stem extension and valve box for buried valves.
5. Open counterclockwise, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 VALVE BOXES
A. 12" valves and smaller:

ADDITION
1. Domestic cast iron, two-piece, screw type.
B. Valves larger than 12" and blowoffs:
1. Domestic cast iron, three-piece, screw type.

2. Round base.
C. Cast iron lid.
2.4 AIR RELEASE VALVE
A. A WWA C512.
B. Cast iron body and cover; stainless steel float, orifice seat, linkage mechanism, mountings and
trim. Buna-N orifice valve. 150 psi minimum rated working pressure.
C. Provide with orifice size indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2.5 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Dry-barrel break-away type conforming to AWWA C502.
1. Bury depth: 4'-6", or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2. Inlet Connection: 6".
3. Valve Opening: 5-1/4".
4. Mechanical Joint or Ball End.
5. Corrosion resistant bolts and nuts.
6. One pumper, two hose nozzles.
a. Attach nozzle caps by separate chains.
7. Threads, as specified in Section VIII Technical Provisions (Detailed).
2.6 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
A. Tapping Sleeves:
1. Mechanical joint, or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2. 200 psi working pressure, 2" - 12" size.
3. 150 psi working pressure, 14" - 24" size.
4. Outlet flange: ANSI B16.1, Class 125. See Table 1.
B. Tapping Valves:
1. AWWA C500.
2. Inlet flange, Class 125.

ADDITION
TABLE 1 – CLASS 125 PLATE FLANGES

(ASME B16.1 – 1989)
Pipe Size Outside Di- Number of Bolt Bolt Hole Bolt Circle
ameter Holes Diameter
2” 6” 4 3/4” 4-3/4”
2-1/2” 7” 4 3/4” 5-1/2”
3” 7-1/2” 4 3/4” 6”
3-1/2” 8-1/2” 8 3/4” 7”
4” 9” 8 3/4” 7-1/2”
5” 10” 8 7/8” 8-1/2”
6” 11” 8 7/8” 9-1/2”
8” 13-1/2” 8 7/8” 11-3/4”
10” 16” 12 1” 14-1/4”
12” 19” 12 1” 17”
14” 21” 12 1-1/8” 18-3/4”
16” 23-1/2” 16 1-1/8” 21-1/4”
2.7 TIE RODS
A. Tie rod restraint system.
B. Star National Products, 1323 Holly Avenue, P.O. Box 258, Columbus, Ohio 43316.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Determine the exact location and size of valves and hydrants from the Contract Drawings.
B. Perform trench excavation, backfilling and compaction in accordance with Section 31 20 00.02.
C. Install pipe and tubing in accordance with Sections 33 11 16.00 and 33 11 16.01 and the
applicable York Water Company Details.

ADDITION
3.2 GATE AND BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Install valves in conjunction with pipe laying. Set valves and valve boxes plumb.
B. Place concrete block under valve.
C. Provide buried valves with valve boxes installed flush with finished grade.
D. Furnish one tee wrench to the OWNER.
3.3 AIR RELEASE VALVES
A. Orient, locate and install air release valves including valve vault as shown on York Water
Company Details.
B. Set air release valves and vault plumb.
C. Verify there are no leaks and that the valve functions correctly.
3.4 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Install fire hydrants as shown on York Water Company Details. Provide support blocking and
drainage gravel as shown.
1. Set hydrants plumb with pumper nozzle facing the curb or street.
2. Set hydrants with nozzles at least 12 inches above the ground and the safety flange not
more than 6 inches nor less than 2 inches above grade.
3. Do not block drain hole.
4. Paint hydrants in accordance with local color scheme.
B. After hydrostatic testing, flush hydrants and check for proper drainage.
3.5 BLOWOFFS
A. Install a blowoff on the dead ends of all water mains or where shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Construct blowoffs as shown on York Water Company Details.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 33 11 16.03 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Testing Pressure Pipelines:
a. Hydrostatic leakage testing
B. Disinfecting Water Main Pipelines.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Water Mains): Section 33 11 16 00

2. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Valves and Fire Hydrants): Section 33 11 16 02
3. Facility Water Distribution Piping (Water Service Connections): Section 33 11 16 01
D. Definitions: NONE
E. Applicable Standard Details: NONE
A. Testing Agency:
1. Bacteriological (total Chlorine and/or chlorination) testing shall be performed by a testing

laboratory engaged and paid for by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the
ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR to provide water samples to testing agency as approved by
the ENGINEER.
B. Reference Standards:
B300 Standard for Hypochlorites

B301 Standard for Liquid Chlorine
C651 Disinfecting Water Mains
C. Test Acceptance:
1. No test will be accepted until the results are within the specified limits.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, determine and correct the sources of
leakage and retest until successful test results are achieved.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Procedures:
1. Submit a testing sequence schedule including a list of testing equipment to be used.
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 33 11 16.03 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 11 16.03 - 1

PIPING (Testing and disinfecting water mains)
ADDITION
B. Certificates:
1. Submit, prior to starting testing, certification attesting that the pressure gauges to be used
have been calibrated and are accurate to the degree specified herein.
2. Submit certification attesting that the chlorine form composition is as specified.
C. Test Reports:
1. Submit two copies each of test reports of chlorine residual and bacteriological tests.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST EQUIPMENT
A. High pressure water pump

B. Pressure hose
C. Test connections
D. Water meter
E. Pressure gauge, calibrated to 0.1 lbs./sq. in.
F. Pressure relief valve
2.2 DISINFECTING CHEMICALS
A. Liquid chlorine, calcium hypochlorite tablets or granules, or sodium hypochlorite (liquid)

conforming to AWWA Standards B300 and B301.
2.3 2.03 ADHESIVE
A. Food-grade adhesive such as Permatex Form-A-Gasket No. 2 and Permatex Clear RTV
Silicone Adhesive Sealant manufactured by Loctite Corporation, Kansas City, KS, or approved
equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Backfill trenches in accordance with Section 31 20 00 02, Paragraph 3.11.
B. Provide the water line under test with reaction thrust blocking. Hydrostatic testing shall not begin
until the concrete thrust blocking has set. Allow 3000 psi 28-day strength concrete to cure for a
minimum of 7 days prior to testing. If 3000 psi 3-day high early strength concrete is used,
hydrostatic testing may not begin until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 2 days.
C. Provide water, pumps, piping, tanks, connections, plugs, and appurtenances at no additional
expense to the OWNER.
3.2 TESTING PRESSURE PIPELINES
A. Hydrostatic Pressure Test (ASTM C900): 200 psi/30 min

ADDITION
1. Test each newly laid pressure pipeline, including any valved section thereof,
hydrostatically at 1.5 times the working pressure of the pipeline based on the elevation of
the lowest point in the pipeline corrected to the elevation of the test gauge. Obtain test
pressure from the ENGINEER.
2. Slowly fill the section to be tested with water, expelling air from the pipeline at the high
points. Install corporation stops at high points if necessary. After all air is expelled, close
air vents and corporation stops and raise the pressure to the specified test pressure.
3. Observe joints, fittings and valves under test. Remove and replace cracked pipe, joints,
fittings, and valves showing visible leakage. Retest.
4. After visible deficiencies are corrected, continue testing at the same test pressure for an
additional two hours to determine the leakage rate. Maintain pressure within plus or
minus 5.0 psi of test pressure. Leakage is defined as the quantity of water supplied to
the pipeline necessary to maintain test pressure during the period of the test.
5. Compute the maximum allowable leakage by the following formula:
L = ND(P)0.5
7,400
Where: L is the allowable leakage in gallons/hour

N is the number of joints in the section tested (does not include services)
D is the nominal diameter of the pipe in inches
P is the average test pressure in psig
Note: Perform calculation based on 2 hour test
6. If the line under test contains sections of various diameters, the allowable leakage shall
be the sum of the computed leakage for each size.
3.3 DISINFECTION
A. General:
1. After completion of satisfactory hydrostatic leakage testing, disinfect the water pipelines
in accordance with the recommended practice established in AWWA Standard C651.
Conduct water line disinfection in the following steps:
a. Preliminary flushing
b. Chlorine application
c. Chlorine residual testing
d. Final flushing
e. Bacteriologic tests
B. During construction, place calcium hypochlorite granules at the upstream end of the first section
of pipe, at the upstream end of each branch main, and at 500 ft. intervals:

ADDITION
Table 02653-1
Ounces of Calcium Hypochlorite Granules to be Placed at Beginning of Main and at Each 500-
ft. Interval
Pipe Diameter Calcium Hypochlorite Granules

(in.) (oz.)
4 1.7
6 3.8
8 6.7
12 15.1
D2 x 15.1
14 and larger Where D is pipe diameter in feet
C. Preliminary Flushing:
1. Prior to disinfection, except when the tablet method is used, fill the line to eliminate air
pockets and flush the line at a rate of flow of 2.5 feet per second to remove particulates:
Table 02653-2
Flow Required to Produce 2.5 fps (Approx.) Velocity in Main
Size of Tap
(in.)
1 1½ 2 Number of
Required 2½-inch
Pipe Diameter Flow Number of Hydrant
(in.) (gpm) Taps on Pipe Outlets
4 100 1 - - 1
6 200 - 1 - 1
8 400 - 2 1 1
10 600 - 3 2 1
12 900 - - 2 2
16 1600 - - 4 2
2. Dispose of flushing water. Conform with Federal, State, and local laws when discharging
the chlorinated solution.
D. Chlorine Form:
1. The chlorine form to be applied to the system shall be either chlorine gas solution,
calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite.
E. Chlorine Application:
1. Continuous Feed Method:

ADDITION
a. The continuous feed method consists of placing calcium hypochlorite granules in

the main during construction, completely filling the main to remove air pockets,
flushing to remove particulates, and filling the main with potable water chlorinated
so that after a 24-hour holding period in the main, there will be a free chlorine
residual of not less than 10 mg/L.
b. Feed water and chlorine to the line at a constant rate such that the water will have
not less than 25 mg/L free chlorine. Chlorine application shall not cease until the
entire line is filled with heavily chlorinated water.
Table 02653-3
Chlorine Required to produce 25-mg/L Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe-by Diameter
Pipe 100-percent 1-percent

Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution
(in.) (lb.) (gal.)
4 .013 .16
6 .030 .36
8 .054 .65
10 .085 1.02
12 .120 1.44
16 .217 2.60
a. during chlorine application, take precautionary measures to prevent the

concentrated treatment solution from flowing back into the existing distribution
system and/or supply source.
2. Tablet Method:
a. The tablet method consists of placing calcium hypochlorite granules and tablets in
the water main as it is being installed and then filling the main with potable water
when installation is completed.
NOTE: Since the preliminary flushing step must be eliminated, this method may
be used only when scrupulous cleanliness has been exercised and only with
approval of the ENGINEER. It shall not be used if trench water or foreign material
has entered the main, or if the water temperature is below 41° F.
b. During construction, place sufficient number of 5 gram calcium hypochlorite tablets

in each section of pipe, in hydrants, hydrant branches, and other appurtenances to
obtain a minimum of 25 mg/L available chlorine. Attach tablets to the invert of pipe
sections with adhesive. Apply adhesive only to the broad side of the tablet next to
the pipe surface.

ADDITION
Table 02653-4
Number of 5-gram Calcium Hypochlorite Tablets Required for Dose of 25 mg/L
Length of Pipe Selection (ft.)

Pipe Diam-
eter (in.) 13 or less 18 20 30 40
4 1 1 1 1 1
6 1 1 1 2 2
8 1 2 2 3 4
10 2 3 3 4 5
12 3 4 4 6 7
16 4 6 7 10 13
c. When pipeline installation is completed, fill the main with water at a maximum
velocity of one foot per second. This water shall remain in the pipe for at least 24-
hours. Manipulate valves so that the chlorine solution does not flow back into the
line supplying the water.
3. During the 24-hour treatment, operate all valves, curb stops, and hydrants in the section
treated.
4. At the completion of the 24-hour treatment, the treated water in all portions of the main
shall have a residual of not less than 10 mg/L free chlorine.
5. Repeat the disinfection process until the minimum free chlorine is present at the end of
the treatment sequence. The tablet method cannot be used in these subsequent
disinfections. No additional compensation will be provided the CONTRACTOR for repeat
treatment or testing.
F. Final Flushing:
1. After completion of the required disinfection, flush the line at a minimum rate of 2.5 fps
until the free chlorine residual reduces to the level of the existing water supply or 1 mg/L,
whichever is lower. Dispose of flushing water in conformance with Federal, State, and
local laws. A neutralizing chemical shall be applied to the water to be wasted to
neutralize residual chlorine. Wasted water may be discharged to the public sewer
system, if approved by the ENGINEER.
2. No flushing or bacteriological tests permitted until receipt of passed chlorine residue test
results.
G. Bacteriological Testing:
1. After final flushing is completed and before the water main is placed in service, test the
line for bacteriologic quality. Perform two tests, 24-hours between tests.
2. Collect a minimum of one sample at the end of each line for each test, and one sample of
the incoming water from the existing water system for comparison.
3. Collect samples in sterile bottles treated with sodium thiosulphate.
4. Sampling tap shall consist of corporation stop installed in the main with copper tube
gooseneck assembly. Fire hydrants may be used if approved by ENGINEER.

ADDITION
5. Provide bacteriological test reports to the OWNER and the ENGINEER. The presence of
bacteriological contamination will be cause to require the CONTRACTOR to rechlorinate
and retest the system, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 33 31 00.00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS (Sanitary Sewer Pipe)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Sanitary sewer gravity pipelines

2. Sanitary sewer pressure pipelines and valves
3. Laterals/service connections

5. Manholes and Structures Section 33 05 13
6. Facility Sanitary Sewer (Sewer Pipeline Testing: Section 33 31 00.01
C. Definitions:
1. Clearing is Dimension Ratio (DR) - Constant ratio between outside pipe diameter and
wall thickness.
2. Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) - Constant ratio based on Renard numbers and rated
for pressure.
02610-1 Lateral Detail

02610-2 Lateral Detail with Cleanout
02610-3 Subbase Drain Detail
02610-4 Combination Air Release Valve
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Cast-Iron and Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
A21.10 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings
A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds,
for water or other liquids
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 33 31 00.00 FACILITY SANITARY 33 31 00.00 - 1

SEWERS (Sanitary Sewer Pipe)
ADDITION
A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless
A74 Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
C14 Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe
C76 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
C425 Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings
C443 Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe Using Rubber
Gaskets
C564 Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
D1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
D1869 Specification for Rubber Rings for Asbestos-Cement Pipe
D2241 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR series)
D2321 Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and other
Gravity-Flow Applications.
D2564 Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems
D2855 Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe
and Fittings
D3034 Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
D3139 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
D3212 Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric
Seals
F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
F679 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer
Pipe and Fittings
C301 Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, for Water and Other
Liquids
C504 Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves
C507 Ball Valves, 6" through 48"
C900 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) PVC Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4" through 12" for Water
Distribution
B. Materials contaminated with gasoline, lubricating oil, liquid or gaseous fuel, aromatic
compounds, paint solvent, paint thinner, or acid solder will be rejected.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit 2 copies of each manufacturer's certification attesting that the pipe, pipe fittings,
valves, joints, joint gaskets and lubricants and detectable warning tape meet or exceed
specification requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Literature:
1. Submit 2 copies of the manufacturer's recommendations on installation, handling and

storage of materials.
C. Details of bypass pumping operation and pump curves. The CONTRACTOR shall analyze the
existing flow rate and provide pumps with enough capacity to handle daily fluctuations.

ADDITION
A. Delivery and Handling:
1. Do not place materials on private property without written permission of the property
OWNER.
2. During loading, transporting and unloading, exercise care to prevent damage to

materials.
3. Do not drop pipe or fittings. Avoid shock or damage at all times.
4. Take measures to prevent damage to the exterior surface or internal lining of the pipe.
B. Storage:
1. Do not stack pipe higher than recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
2. Store PVC pipe and gaskets for mechanical and push-on joints in a cool, dry location out
of direct sunlight and not in contact with petroleum products.
Place on flat surface with proper support.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENT CONCRETE SEWER PIPE
A. Reinforced Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings:
1. ASTM C76.
2. Provide in load class indicated on Contract Drawings, minimum Class II.
B. Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe and Fittings:
1. AWWA C301
2. Design internal pressure 150 psi unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.
C. Joints:
1. Tongue and groove
2. Bell and spigot
D. Gaskets: Solid circular cross-section O-ring, ASTM C443.

ADDITION
2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Pipe:
1. ANSI A21.51, Thickness Class as indicated on the Contract Drawings, minimum Class
52.
2. Standard cement-mortar lining, ANSI A21.4.
3. Standard bituminous coating, interior and exterior.
B. Fittings:
1. Ductile-iron or gray-iron, ANSI A21.10.
2. Provide with standard lining and coating as for ductile iron pipe.
C. Joints:
1. Where not specifically shown on the Contract Drawings, pipe joints may be either
mechanical joint or push-on joint.
2. Fitting joints shall be mechanical joint, unless specified otherwise.
D. Rubber gaskets, lubricants, gland, bolts and nuts: ANSI A21.11
2.3 POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) SEWER PIPE
A. Sewer Pipe, Fittings and Couplings:
1. Pipe 15" diameter and smaller: ASTM D3034, minimum SDR-35.
2. Pipe 18" to 27" diameter: ASTM F679.
3. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D3212

Seal Material: ASTM F477
4. Where specifically approved by OWNER, pipe 15" and smaller: ASTM F789 may be
substituted.
B. Pressure Sewer Pipe and Fittings:
1. Pressure-Rated:
a. ASTM D2241, Pressure rating as indicated on the Contract Drawings, 125 psi
minimum.
2. Schedule-Rated:
a. ASTM D1785, Schedule rating as indicated on the Contract Drawings, Schedule 40

minimum.
3. Dimension-Rated:

ADDITION
a. AWWA C900, DR 18 minimum (150 psi), for 4" diameter and larger.
b. AWWA DR 21 minimum (200 psi), for 2" diameter and smaller.
4. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D3139

Seal Material: ASTM F477
2.4 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (PLUMBING)
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74, Service Class
1. Hub and spigot or double hub
B. Joints
1. Gaskets: Double-seal compression gaskets conforming to physical requirements of

ASTM C564.
2.5 STEEL CASING PIPE: Section 02150
2.6 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS: Leak proof, PVC compound with stainless steel clamps suitable for the
pipe materials as manufactured by Fernco, Inc., Davison, MI, or approved equal, as approved by
ENGINEER.
2.7 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanout riser pipe and fitting shall be PVC SDR 35.
B. Cleanout caps:
1. All cleanout PLUGS shall be brass, counter sunk, designed for 4” riser pipe and meeting
Southern Code service weight standards. Use General Engineering Company (GENECO),
Frederick, MD or approved equal.
2.8 DETECTABLE WARNING TAPE
A. Detectable warning tape shall consist of a minimum thickness of 0.5 mils solid aluminum foil
core running the full length and width encased in a protective, high visibility, green color coded
inert plastic jacket that is impervious to all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents and solvents
found in the soil. Foil to be visible on unprinted side. Minimum overall thickness shall be 5.5
mils. Minimum tensile strength shall be 5000 psi. Minimum weight of 2 ½ pounds per 1" x 100'
unit. Tape width shall be a minimum of 6 inches and have the words “Caution Buried Sewer
Line Below” imprinted on the color side. Tape shall meet Office of Pipeline Safety regulations,
U.S. Department of Transportation, USAS Code B31.8.
2.9 VALVES
A. Plug valves
1. Plug valves shall be of the non-lubricated, eccentric type, and shall be designed for a
working pressure of 175 psi for valves 12" and smaller. Valves shall be of round port
design. If a rectangular style design is employed, port area shall be a minimum of 100%
of the corresponding pipe area.

ADDITION
2. Valves shall provide tight shut-off with rated pressure from either direction, where
required. The plug valves shall be manufactured by Dezurik of Sartell, MN, Keystone
Valve of Houston, TX, or approved equal.
3. Plug valves shall be furnished with replaceable permanently lubricated sleeve-type 18-8
stainless steel bearings in the upper and lower journals. Valve seats shall be nickel with
raised surface completely covered to ensure that the plug face contacts only nickel.
4. Manual gear operators shall be totally enclosed worm and gear type, permanently
lubricated. Manual operator components shall withstand, without damage, a pull of 80 to
200 lbs. on the handwheel, with buried service gear units capable of withstanding input
torque on the operating nut as required by AWWA C504, Section 3.8.3 and AWWA C507,
Section 11, Paragraph 11.9. Gear segment shall be of ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade
56-45-12 supported on bronze bushings.
5. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C504, Section 5. The leakage test
shall be applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the valve. Certified copies of
reports covering proof of design testing as described in Section 5.5 shall be provided to
the ENGINEER.
B. Combination Air Release Valves
1. Cast iron body and cover, stainless steel float, orifice sent linkage mechanism, mountings
and trim. Buna-N orifice valve. 150 psi minimum rated working pressure.
2. Orifice size as indicated on Contract Drawings.
2.10 CAST/DUCTILE COUPLINGS:
1. For joining steel, cast iron, ductile iron, extra strength vitrified clay or asbestos cement
pipe to PVC materials, use cast couplings Model CC-441 manufactured by Smith Blair,
Inc., PO Box 5337, Teyallana, TX 79505. Model No. Nylon 242 manufactured by JCM
Industries, PO Box 1220, Nashville, TN, 75569 or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform trench excavation as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
B. Unless otherwise required by the ENGINEER, provide for a minimum cover of 4 feet above the
top of pipe laid in trenches in non-traffic areas, and 5 feet in traffic areas.
C. Provide bedding as specified in Section 31 20 00.02. Place so that the pipe can be laid to the
required tolerances in accordance with ASTM D2321.
3.2 LAYING PIPE IN TRENCHES
A. Give ample notice to the ENGINEER in advance of pipe laying operations, minimum seventy-
two hours.

ADDITION
B. Maintain no less than three batter boards, at 25’ maximum interval, or their equivalent between
adjoining manholes during pipe laying operations, or use laser alignment instruments.
C. Lower pipe into trench using handling equipment designed for the purpose to assure safety of
personnel and to avoid damage to pipe. Do not drop pipe or fittings.
D. Lay pipe proceeding up-grade with the bell or groove pointing upstream, unless approved by the
ENGINEER.
E. Lay pipe to a true uniform line with the barrel of the pipe resting solidly in bedding material
throughout its length. Excavate recesses in bedding material to accommodate joints, fittings
F. Lay each section of pipe in such a manner as to form a close concentric joint with the adjoining
section and to avoid offsets in the flow line.
G. Clean and inspect each section of pipe before joining to mark on pipe. Assemble to provide
tight, flexible joints that permit movement caused by expansion, contraction, and ground
movement. Use lubricant recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer for making joints.
If unusual joining resistance is encountered or if the pipe cannot be fully inserted into the bell,
disassemble joint, inspect for damage, reclean joint components, and reassemble joint.
H. Assemble joints in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer.
1. Push-on joints:
a. Clean the inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot. Insert rubber gasket into
the bell recess.
b. Apply a thin film of gasket lubricant to either the inside of the gasket or the spigot
end of the pipe, or both.
c. Insert the spigot ends of the pipe into the socket using care to keep the joint from
contacting the ground. Complete the joint by forcing the plain end to the bottom of
the socket using reference mark at the spigot end of the pipe as a guide. Mark
Pipe that is not furnished with a reference mark before assembly to assure that the
spigot is fully inserted.
d. Pipe gaps in excess of ¼” in length will not be accepted.
2. Mechanical joints:
a. Wash the socket and plain end. Apply a thin film of lubricant. Slip the gland and
gasket over the plain end of the pipe. Apply lubricant to gasket.
b. Insert the plain end of the pipe into the socket and seat the gasket evenly in the
socket.
c. Slide the gland into position, insert bolts, and finger-tighten nuts.
d. Bring bolts to uniform tightness. Tighten bolts 180 degrees apart, alternately.
Torque Required:

ADDITION
Bolt Size, In. Torque, Ft.-Lbs.
5/8 45 - 60
3/4 75 - 90
1 100 - 120
3. Solvent cemented joints:
a. Chamfer and deburr pipe. Clean socket and plain end. Measure and mark the
socket depth on the outside of the pipe.
b. Apply primer to inside socket surface using a scrubbing motion to ensure

penetration. Repeated applications may be necessary. Soften surface of male
end of pipe to depth of fitting socket by applying a liberal brush coat of primer. Do
not pour primer on. Assure entire surface is well softened.
c. Repeat application of primer to inside socket surface, and then apply cement to
pipe while surfaces are still wet with primer. Apply cement uniformly taking care to
keep excess cement out of socket.
d. Immediately after applying the last coat of cement to the pipe, and while both the
inside socket surface and outside pipe surface are soft and wet, forcefully seat the
pipe into the socket. Turn the pipe 1/4 -turn during assembly to distribute cement
evenly. Assembly should be completed within 20 seconds after the last application
of cement. Insert pipe with a steady, even motion. Do not use hammer blows.
e. Hold joint in place until cement has set. Wipe excess cement from the pipe.
4. Coupled joints:
a. Assemble in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Disassemble and remake improperly assembled joints using a new gasket.
J. Check each pipe installed as to line and grade in place. Correct deviation from line and grade
immediately. A deviation from the designed grade as shown on the Contract Drawings, or
deflection of pipe joints, will be cause for rejection.
K. Place sufficient compacted backfill on each section of pipe, as it is laid, to hold firmly in place.
L. Clean interior of the pipe as work progresses. Where cleaning after laying is difficult because of
small pipe size, use a suitable swab or drag in the pipe and pull forward past each joint
immediately after the jointing has been completed.
M. Keep trenches and excavations free of water during construction.
N. When the work is not in progress, and at the end of each work day, securely plug open ends of
pipe and fittings to prevent trench water, earth, or other substances from entering the pipes or
fittings.
O. Joint Deflection:
1. When it is approved by the ENGINEER to deflect pressure sewer mains from a straight
alignment horizontally or vertically, do not exceed the following limits:

ADDITION
a. Ductile Iron Pipe: <12" diameter - 5 maximum deflection per joint
>12" diameter - 3 maximum deflection per joint
b. PVC Pipe: 4 degree maximum deflection per joint.
c. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: 1-degree maximum deflection per joint.
P. Make connections in accordance with the Contract Drawings, and perform any adjustments and
ensure a watertight installation. Connections to the existing sewers shall be made under the
direct observation of the ENGINEER or his authorized representative. Do not permit any water,
earth, debris or other materials to enter the existing sewer system.
Q. As soon as connections are completed, install an adequately sized screw-in plug in the existing
manhole, tie-off with rope and brace to prevent a “blowout”. The stopper is to prevent flow from
the new line from entering the existing system and it shall not be removed until authorization to
do so is given by the ENGINEER. Routinely remove any accumulated ground and surface
water from the line upstream and dispose of properly.
3.3 WYE BRANCHES AND TEES
A. Install wye branches or pipe tee wye at locations designated concurrent with pipe laying
operations. Use standard fittings of the same material and joint type as the pipeline into which
they are installed.
B. For connections into an existing pipeline, where permitted by the ENGINEER, install a wye or
tee wye with Smith Blair or JCM Industries couplings if connecting to vitrified clay or ductile iron
pipe. Use PVC solid wall sleeve with gasket if connecting to PVC pipe.
C. Where specifically approved by the OWNER, for taps into an existing pipeline, use a saddle wye
or tee with stainless steel clamps or core drill pipe and install watertight resilient boot. Mount
saddles with gasket and secure with metal bands. Lay out holes with a template and cut holes
with a mechanical hole cutter.
D. Where lateral is not to be installed, install an approved water-tight plug, braced to withstand
pipeline test pressure thrust.
3.4 LATERALS
A. Construct laterals from the wye branch to a terminal point in accordance with Standard Detail
02610-1, 02610-2 or 02610-5, as specified. Vertical risers are not permitted unless approved
by the ENGINEER.
B. Install an approved watertight plug, braced to withstand pipeline test pressure thrust, at the
termination of the lateral. Install a temporary marker stake (minimum 2" x 2") extending from
the end of the lateral to 1 foot above finished grade.
C. Laterals shall be installed at a slope of 1/4"/ft. (4" diameter) or 1/8"/ft. (6" diameter) from the
main to the cleanout or plug. The minimum depth under streets shall be 5'. Any deviations
must be approved by the ENGINEER prior to installation.
D. Lateral lengths to extend 5' past right of way line, unless approved by ENGINEER.
E. Drop cleanouts are not permitted.

ADDITION
F. Cleanouts in driveways are not permitted.
3.5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
A. Conform to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.03.
3.6 CRADLES AND ENCASEMENT
A. Provide concrete cradles and encasement for pipeline where indicated on the Contract
Drawings, or as directed by the ENGINEER.
3.7 THRUST RESTRAINT FOR PRESSURE PIPELINES
A. Provide all valves, tees, bends, caps, and plugs with concrete thrust blocks in accordance with
Municipal and Authority Standard Details. Pour concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed
earth. Locate thrust blocks to contain the resultant force and so pipe and fitting joints will be
accessible for repair.
B. Furnish and install, tie rods, clamps, set screw retainer glands, or restrained joints if indicated
on the Contract Drawings or required by the ENGINEER. Protect metal restrained joint
components against corrosion by applying a bituminous coating.
3.8 COMBINATION AIR VALVES
A. Orient, locate and install air release or combination air release valves on force mains where
shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Construct air release valves including valve vault in accordance with Municipal and Authority
Standard Details. Valve and valve vault shall be vertical and plumb.
C. During project start-up, verify that there are no leaks in saddle or plumbing. Verify correct
function of valves.
D. Pipe penetrations shall have a manhole boot-type seal.
3.9 BACKFILLING TRENCHES
A. Backfill pipeline trenches only after examination of pipe by the ENGINEER.
B. Backfill trenches as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
C. Install the detectable warning tape along the entire length of PVC force main on top of the pipe
bedding but no deeper than 48 inches below finished grade. The pipe bedding (12" cover) shall
maintain sufficient separation between the tape and the line.

ADDITION
3.11 BYPASS PUMPING
A. Provide one (1) reliable pump capable of handling the existing wastewater flows and daily
fluctuations and enough discharge piping to bypass pump from upstream manhole to
downstream manhole. Provide one (1) backup pump on-site or provide evidence of ability to
obtain backup pump within 30 minutes in case of pump failure. Bypass pumping system shall
not allow backup in collection system beyond two (2) manholes. Bypass piping shall be
watertight and not allow any discharge to the surface. Any leaks in the system will be just
cause to discontinue bypass operation and pipe installation and tie piping back into gravity flow.
B. At the end of each workday, the bypass pumping shall stop and the new PVC piping shall be
connected to the existing piping with a watertight flexible coupling. All trenches shall be
properly backfilled and compacted except in the immediate area of the tie-in. Open trenches in
traffic areas shall be protected with jersey barriers and steel plating and all trenches shall be
protected with construction fencing.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall supply necessary equipment for bypassing operations; and inform the
ENGINEER of such. Bypassing of service connections to be reconnected is not necessary,
however; the CONTRACTOR will be responsible for notifying customers that their services will
be interrupted. Service shall be restored at the end of each working day.
D. CONTRACTOR is responsible for design, installation and operation of all bypass pumping.
CONTRACTOR’s plan for proposed bypass pumping system shall include, but not be limited to
the staging area for pumps, pump sizes and number to be used; power source and standby
power source and schedule for installation and maintaining of bypass pumping lines.
CONTRACTOR shall size pumps for wastewater flow bypass according to normal flows in the
system. CONTRACTOR shall reconnect the sanitary sewer pipe at the end of each workday to
prevent system overload caused by potential storm events.
E. Plugging the upstairs pipe to prevent flow into the construction area is not acceptable in lieu of
bypass pumping.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 33 31 00.01 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS (Sanitary Sewer Testing)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Testing Gravity Sewer Pipelines:
a. Lamping
b. Low-pressure air test
c. Infiltration test
d. Deflection test - PVC pipe only
2. Testing Pressure Pipelines:
a. Hydrostatic leakage test
3. Testing Manholes:
a. Vacuum test
1. Facility Sanitary Sewers (Sanitary Sewer Pipe): Section 33 31 00.00

2. Facility Sanitary Sewers (Sanitary Sewer Testing): Section 33 31 00.01

1. No test will be accepted until the results are within the specified limits.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, determine and correct the causes of test
failure and retest until successful test results are achieved.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Testing procedures
B. List of test equipment
C. Testing sequence schedule
D. Provisions for disposal of flushing and test water
E. Certificate of test gauge calibration

SEWERS (Sanitary Sewer Testing)
ADDITION
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not allow personnel in manholes during pressure and vacuum testing.
B. Provide relief valves set at 10 psig to avoid accidentally over-pressurizing gravity sewer line
during low pressure air testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Air compressor
B. Air supply line
C. Shut-off valve
D. Pressure regulator
E. Pressure relief valve
F. Stop watch
G. Plugs
H. Pressure gauge, calibrated to 0.1 lbs./sq. in.
2.2 INFILTRATION TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Weirs
2.3 DEFLECTION TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Go, No-Go mandrels, as approved by ENGINEER

B. Pull/retrieval ropes
C. Certificate of mandrel gauge calibration
2.4 VACUUM TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Vacuum pump
B. Pipe plugs
C. Vacuum hose
D. Test connections
E. Vacuum gauge
F. Vacuum relief valve
2.5 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Fastsetting, cement based mortar such as Waterplug, manufactured by Thoro Division of
ChemRex, Shakopee, MN, or approved equal.

ADDITION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Backfill trenches in accordance with Section 31 20 00.02.
B. Provide pressure pipeline with concrete reaction support blocking.
C. Clean and flush pipeline with water to remove debris. Collect and dispose of flushing water and
debris in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations.
D. Plug outlets, wye-branches and laterals. Brace plugs to offset thrust.
3.2 TESTING GRAVITY SEWER PIPELINES
A. Lamping, if required by ENGINEER:
1. After flushing and cleaning, lamp gravity pipeline in conjunction with the ENGINEER.
2. Assist the ENGINEER in the lamping operation by shining a light at one end of each
pipeline section between manholes. The ENGINEER will observe the light at the other
end. Pipeline that has not been installed with uniform line and grade will be rejected.
Remove and re-lay rejected pipeline sections. Re-clean and lamp until pipeline section
achieves a uniform line and grade.
B. Low Pressure Air Test:
1. Test each newly installed section of gravity sewer line, including service connections.
2. Slowly introduce air pressure to approximately 5.0 psig.
3. Once pressure has stabilized, start test.
4. Test:
a. Determine the test duration for a sewer section with a single pipe size from the
table below:
Low Pressure Air Test - Test Times
Nominal Time Nominal Time

Pipe Size(in.) Min./100 Ft. Pipe Size(in.) Min./100 Ft.
4 .3 21 3.0
6 .7 24 3.6
8 1.2 27 4.2
10 1.5 30 4.8
12 1.8 33 5.4
15 2.1 36 6.0
8 2.4
b. Record the drop in pressure during the test period. If the air pressure has dropped
more than 1.0 psig during the test period, the line is presumed to have failed. If

ADDITION
the 1.0 psig air pressure drop has not occurred during the test period, the test shall
be discontinued and the line will be accepted.
c. If the line fails, determine the source of the air leakage, make corrections and
retest the entire section between manholes.
d. All laterals installed into manholes shall be air tested or included in vacuum test.
Regardless of pipe length, the minimum test times for 4" dia., 6" dia., and 8" dia.
pipes are 2 ½, 4 and 5 minutes, respectively.
e. All tests subject to 5 psig. for 5 minutes, minimum.
C. Testing Pipe Over 36" Diameter:
1. Pipe over 36" diameter shall be subjected to a visual interior inspection.
D. Infiltration Test:
1. Use only when leakage is visible.
2. Maximum Allowable Infiltration: 50-gallons per inch of pipe diameter per mile per day for
the section under test.
E. Deflection Testing of Plastic Sewer Pipe:
1. Perform vertical ring deflection testing on all portions of PVC sewer piping, in the
presence of the ENGINEER, after backfilling.
2. The maximum allowable deflection for installed plastic sewer pipe shall be limited to 5%
of the original vertical internal diameter.
3. Perform deflection testing with a properly sized 'Go, No-Go' mandrel approved by
ENGINEER.
4. Pipe exceeding the allowable deflection shall be located, excavated, replaced, and
retested at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR, including surface restoration.
5. During the 12th month of the warranty period, the OWNER reserves the right to perform a
second deflection test at the OWNER’s expense.
3.3 TESTING PRESSURE PIPELINES
A. Hydrostatic Leakage Test: Section 33 11 16.03
3.4 TESTING MANHOLES
A. Test all new manholes for exfiltration utilizing the vacuum test method and equipment
developed by NPC Systems, Inc., Milford, NH, or approved equal.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary labor, equipment or materials to conduct the
vacuum test.
C. The testing shall be done after complete assembly of the manhole, including frame and cover.

ADDITION
D. The CONTRACTOR shall plug the pipe openings, taking care to securely brace the plugs and
the pipe.
E. With the vacuum tester set in place:
1. Inflate the compression band to effect a seal between the vacuum base and the structure
at top of manhole frame.
2. Connect the vacuum pump to the outlet port with the valve open.
3. Draw a vacuum to 10" of Hg. and close the valve.
F. All tests subject to 10” of Hg for 60 seconds.
G. A vacuum of 9 in. of Hg. or more shall be maintained for at least the period of time indicated in
the following table in order to successfully complete the test:
TIME (sec.)
Depth of Manhole (ft.) Diameter of Manhole (in.)
48" 60" 72"

up to 10 30 30 30
12 30 30 34
14 30 32 40
16 30 37 45
18 32 41 51
20 35 46 57
22 39 51 62
24 42 55 68
26 46 60 74
28 49 64 80
30 53 69 85
H. If the manhole fails the initial test, the CONTRACTOR shall locate the leak and make proper
repairs. Leaks and lift holes shall be filled with approved non-shrink grout.
END OF SECTION

ADDITION
SECTION 33 41 00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING (Storm Drain Pipe)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. Storm sewer pipelines
1. Earth Moving: Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting): Section 31 20 00.02

5. Facility Storm Drainage Piping: (Inlets, CB, EW) Section 33 05 16.13
C. Definitions:
1. Polyethylene pipe Type C - full circular cross-section with corrugated surface both inside
and outside.
2. Polyethylene pipe Type S - full circular cross-section with outer corrugated pipe wall and
smooth inner wall.
C76 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
C507 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
Pipe
D2241 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR series)
D2321 Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and other
Gravity-Flow Applications.
F405 Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubing and Fittings
F667 Specification for Large Diameter Corrugated Polyethylene Tubing and Fittings
3. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
M36 Metallic (zinc or aluminum) coated corrugated steel culverts and underdrains
M246 Precoated galvanized steel sheet for culverts and underdrains
M252 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing
MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SECTION 33 41 00 FACILITY STORM 33 41 00 - 1

DRAINAGE PIPING (Storm Drain Pipe)
ADDITION
M278 Class PS50 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

M294 and MP6-95 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 12" to 36" Diameter
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates:
1. Submit two copies of manufacturer's certification attesting that the pipe, fittings, and joints
meet or exceed specification requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Literature:
1. Submit two copies of the manufacturer's recommendations on installation, handling, and

storage of materials.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. During loading, transporting, and unloading, exercise care to prevent damage to materials.
B. Do not drop pipe or fittings. Avoid shock or damage at all times.
C. Do not place materials on private property without permission from the property owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CORRUGATED GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE AND PIPE ARCH
A. Pipe and Coupling Bands:
1. Section 601.2, Publication 408 Specifications.
2. AASHTO M36, Type I or AASHTO M218, Type I or AASHTO M274, Type II.
3. Metal sheet thickness and corrugation size as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2.2 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE
A. Pipe and Fittings:
1. ASTM C76, Minimum Class II
B. Joints:
1. Tongue and groove or bell and spigot.
2.3 ELLIPTICAL REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE
A. Pipe and Fittings:

ADDITION
1. ASTM C76, Minimum Class II
2.4 CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE PIPE
A. Tubing and Fittings - 3" to 6"
1. AASHTO M252
2. ASTM F405
B. Pipe and Fittings - 12" to 48"
1. Integrally formed smooth interior.

2. AASHTO M294 and MP6-95
3. ASTM F667
C. Pavement Base Drains - 4", 6"
1. AASHTO M304
2.5 POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) PIPE 3" TO 6"
A. Pipe and Fittings
1. AASHTO M278
2. ASTM D3034
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform trench excavation and associated work as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
B. Provide pipe bedding as specified in Section 31 20 00.02. Place aggregate so that the pipe can
be laid to the required tolerances.
3.2 LAYING PIPE IN TRENCHES
A. Give ample notice to the ENGINEER in advance of pipe laying operations, minimum twenty-four
hours.
B. Lower pipe into trench using handling equipment designed for the purpose to assure safety of
personnel and to avoid damage to pipe. Do not drop pipe.
C. Lay pipe proceeding upgrade with the bell or groove pointing upstream.
D. Lay pipe to a true uniform grade with the barrel of the pipe resting solidly in bedding material
throughout its length. Excavate recesses in bedding material to accommodate joints, fittings

ADDITION
E. Lay each section of pipe in such a manner as to form a close concentric joint with the adjoining
section and to avoid offsets in the flow line.
F. Clean and inspect each pipe and fitting before joining. Align pipe with previously laid sections.
Assemble to provide tight, flexible joints that permit movement caused by expansion,
contraction, and ground movement. Assemble joints in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's instructions.
G. Check each pipe installed as to line and grade in place. Correct deviation from line and grade
immediately. A deviation from the designed line or grade as shown on the Contract Drawings
will be cause for rejection.
H. Place and compact sufficient backfill to hold each section of pipe firmly in place as the pipe is
laid.
3.3 PAVEMENT BASE DRAINS AND PIPE UNDERDRAINS
A. Backfill pipeline trenches only after examination of pipe by the ENGINEER.
B. Backfill and compact trenches as specified in Section 31 20 00.02.
3.4 PAVEMENT BASE DRAINS AND PIPE UNDERDRAINS
A. Construct drains of the size and type indicated on the Contract Drawings in accordance with the
requirements set forth in Section 6l0, Publication 408 Specifications and as shown on Standard
Drawing RC-30, Publication 72M.
END OF SECTION

www.marottamain.com
214 North Duke Street, Lancaster, Pennsylvania 17602

P 717.393.3211 / F 717.393.3212

Project Manual - Mep & Site/Civil Specifications Volume 3 of 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Manual - Mep & Site/Civil Specifications Volume 3 of 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project Manual - Mep & Site/Civil Specifications Volume 3 of 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROJECT MANUAL – MEP & SITE/CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS

214 North Duke Street, Lancaster, Pennsylvania 17602

NO. SECTION TITLE PAGES

LEGAL SPECIFICATIONS – VOLUME 1 OF 3

00 01 01 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 01 2

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS INDEX 1 of 5

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS – VOLUME 2 OF 3

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS INDEX 2 of 5

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

MEP & SITE/CIVIL SPECIFICATIONS – VOLUME 3 OF 3

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS INDEX 3 of 5

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS INDEX 4 of 5

27 60 10 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION 27 60 10 4

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS INDEX 5 of 5

SECTION 20 00 10 – GENERAL PROVISIONS – MECHANICAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.2 WORK INCLUDED – PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION

1.3 WORK INCLUDED – HVAC

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 1 of 9

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers

1.6 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 2 of 9

1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 3 of 9

J. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.

1.10 COORDINATION – GENERAL

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 4 of 9

1.11 COORDINATION – NEW CONSTRUCTION

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 5 of 9

1.13 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

B. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 09.

1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS

B. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.

1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

C. The manuals shall include, but not be limited to the following:

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 6 of 9

D. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.

1.17 SPARE PARTS AND EQUIPMENT

1.18 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01.

A. Work shall be installed by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 7 of 9

D. Work shall be subject to inspection by the Architect.

3.3 PROTECTION FROM DUST AND DEBRIS

3.4 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

3.5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 8 of 9

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20 00 10 - 9 of 9

SECTION 20 00 20 – GENERAL PROVISIONS – ELECTRICAL